Operationg Instruction Manual

Operating instructions
Part 1 – Driving
3 112 252 en
Vehicle identification number: 08.03.2006
Important note
Duplications of any kind and excerpts from this

document are not subject to the revision service.
Original documents of Deutsche GROVE GmbH
are marked with the blue serial number of the
truck crane on the cover sheet.
Duplications and printouts of data carriers on

which Deutsche GROVE GmbH has delivered this
document are also not subject to the revision ser-
vice.
© Copyright reserved by Deutsche GROVE GmbH

08.03.2006
Dissemination or duplication of this document as well as utilization and disclosure of its contents are prohibited unless ex-
pressly permitted. Infringement will incur liability for compensation. All rights pertaining to registration of patent or utility
model are reserved.
3 112 252 en Operating instructions

GMK 4080-1
Additional pages
SLI override
These additional pages only apply to truck cranes with additional operating
elements:
Additional operating elements:

1 Status display
2 Key-operated SLI override switch
3 Raise switch
These change the following:
– Cancelling automatic mode for rigging the

counterweight
and
– The procedure for the SLI override
Cancelling automatic mode

When the counterweight menu (2) is dis-
played, turn the key-operated switch (1) anti-
clockwise, regardless of whether symbol (A)
or (B) is displayed.
s
20.05.2010
Additional pages 3 112 695 en 1

SLI override – symbol (A)
Use the key-operated switch (3) to override the
SLI as described in the operating manual.
The operating elements (1), (2) and (4)have
not been assigned functions.
If additional equipment is used, the status dis-

play (1) indicates this in the same way as the
SLI display in the crane cab:
Green: 0 - 90%
Yellow: Approx. 90 - 100%
Red: Greater than 100%
SLI override – symbol (B)

The status display (1) is active.
The following operating elements can be used

to override the SLI:

3 Key-operated rigging switch
4 Raise switch
Carry out the SLI override only as it is

described in these additional pages.
20.05.2010
2 3 112 695 en Additional pages

Status display
The status display informs people in the danger area of the truck crane:
– about the current degree of utilisation,

– in case of an SLI shutdown or early warning,
– when the SLI has been overridden.
The warning is made optically and, in part,
acoustically.
1 Loudspeaker (warning signal)
2 Lamp, green
3 Lamp, yellow
4 Lamp, red
s
20.05.2010

The lamps of the status display light up or blink depending on the SLI
degree of utilisation and operation of the switches.
Degree of utilisation
Switch operated 0 - 90% Approx. Greater than
90 - 100% 100%
No switch Display (4) Display (5) Display (6)
(normal operation) green yellow red
Display (5)
Key-operated Display (4) Display (5)
rigging switch (1) green yellow,
yellow
blinking
Display (4) Display (5) Display (4)

Raise switch (2)
green yellow green, blinking
Key-operated Display (6) red, Display (6) red, Display (6) red,
override switch (3) blinking blinking blinking
20.05.2010

SLI shutdown
There are different types of SLI shutdowns:
– Shutdown due to overload, approx. 100% of the maximum permissible

load is exceeded,
– Shutdown due to an error.
If the SLI has shut down the crane movements, then:
– depending on the version, the lamp (1) lights up,

– a continuous buzzer tone sounds.
– the status display lights up red.
Now you can:
à Raising after SLI shutdown, S. 6

à Overriding SLI or lifting limit switch for rigging work, S. 7
à Overriding the SLI in an emergency, S. 9
s
20.05.2010

Raising after SLI shutdown
You can re-enable raising with the switch (1) in order to leave the shutdown
range.
The speed is then reduced to 50%.
Prerequisite
– The engine for crane operation is running.
Raise main boom

• Press the button (1) up once.
– Raising is enabled.
The SLI shows an information code; à S. 11.
– The status display blinks green.
• Raise the main boom with the control lever until the degree of utilisation
is less than 100%.
The crane movements are enabled again.
H
The raising of the main boom is shut down if the main boom angle is too
great. Then all you can do is set the load down.
If the degree of utilisation is over 100%, you can cancel the function by:
– pressing switch (1) up again or
– switching off the ignition.
20.05.2010

Overriding SLI or lifting limit switch for rigging work
For rigging work, you can:

– Override the lifting limit switch or
– Override the SLI and thus enable a degree of utilisation of up to 110%.
H
For both overrides the speed of the movements which increase the load
moment is reduced to 15%.
The speed of the movements which increase the load moment is not
reduced.
Prerequisite
Lifting limit switch shutdown

• Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the left
once.
Once the lifting limit switch has been acti-
vated, the crane movement is now stopped
only once and then no longer monitored.
Overriding the SLI

• Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the right
once.
Now a degree of utilisation of up to 110% is
enabled.
After overriding
– The status display lights up red.
– The SLI shows an information code; à S. 11.
If you do not trigger a control lever movement within 10 seconds, you must
press the key-operated switch again.
s
20.05.2010

Cancelling the override
The override is cancelled when you:
– press the key-operated switch again or
– do not activate the control lever for 10 seconds or
– switch off the ignition.
S
Risk of accidents due to accidental override!
The key must not remain in the key-operated switch during the crane
operation!
In this way, you avoid overriding the SLI unintentionally.
20.05.2010

Overriding the SLI in an emergency
G
Risk of accidents due to overridden or faulty SLI
It is not permitted to work with an overridden or faulty SLI!
Set down the load immediately and stop operating the crane if the SLI is
faulty!
You may only override the SLI if it becomes absolutely necessary in the
event of an emergency. This is to put the truck crane into a safe condition
in the event of a malfunction. In this case, do not perform any movements
that would increase the load moment.
If the SLI has shut down all crane movements,

you can cancel the shutdown with the key-
operated switch (1).
Once the shutdown is cancelled, the crane

operation is no longer monitored and the
switched off crane movements are enabled
again.
The power unit speeds are reduced to 15%.
Prerequisite
Cancelling a shutdown
• Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the left or right once.
– Now all crane movements are enabled for 30 minutes. The crane
movements are no longer monitored by the SLI.
The status display blinks red.

At a degree of utilisation over 110% the warning signal sounds; à S. 4.
s
20.05.2010

– switch off the ignition or
– press the key-operated switch again.
The override is automatically cancelled 30 minutes after the key-operated
switch has been pressed.
S
operation!
20.05.2010

Table – Error The following table contains error codes, their causes and possible reme-
codes dies.
Representation of error codes; à Operating instructions
Error code Cause Remedy

8 04 4 Key-operated rigging – Start the engine;
switch pressed, no override – Reduce degree of utilisation to less
effective than 110%
– Move the control lever within
10 seconds after operation
8 05 4 Raise switch pressed, no – Start the engine;
override effective – Press switch again
8 06 4 Key-operated SLI override – Start the engine;
switch pressed, no override – Press switch again
effective
8 04 5 Information code:
Key-operated rigging
switch pressed, override
effective
Raise switch pressed, No measures required.
override effective
Key-operated SLI override
effective
20.05.2010

Blank page
20.05.2010

Additional page
Controls for crane cabin heating
Differing slightly from the details in the operating instructions, depending

on the version, the position and function of the controls may change.
This additional page shows you the changed position of the controls.
Position of
controls
Function
1 Air-conditioning system1) à Operating instructions
2 Setting fresh air/recirculated air/mixed air à Function, p. 2
3 Setting the fan à Function, p. 2
4 Air distribution à Function, p. 2
5 Setting the temperature à Operating instructions
1) Additional equipment
s
24.06.2008
Additional page 3 112 526 en 1

Heating controls
Function
Setting fresh air/recirculated air/mixed air

You can set the air to be sucked in by the fan.
• Turn the switch (1) to the position for
A Recirculated air – air is sucked in from the driver's cab.
Change to fresh air often to ensure that oxygen is supplied.
B Fresh air – outer air is sucked in.
C Mixed air – outer air and air from the driver's cab is sucked in.
The percentage of the corresponding air type is increased
continuously by turning the switch in direction (B) or (A).
Setting the fan

• Turn the switch (2) to the required level 1 to 3, depending on the desired
air quantity.
Air distribution
You can allow the air to flow out from various air vents.
• Turn the switch (4) to the position for the

required air vents.
A Air vents (1), (2),

windscreen, centre
B Air vents (3),
cab floor
C Air vents (1), (2), (3)
24.06.2008
2 3 112 526 en Additional page

Heating controls
These operating instructions consist of two parts:
Part 1 – Driving
Part 2 – Crane operation
Part 1 comprises the following chapters:
1 Overview
2 Basic safety instructions for crane operators
3 Information for operations planning
4 Description of the truck crane vehicle section
5 Diesel engine
6 Driving the truck crane
7 Driving modes and rigging for on-road driving
8 Malfunctions in driving mode
9 Technical Information on Carrier
10 Index
Chapter 11 to 16 are in Part 2 – Crane operation

08.03.2006
Operating instructions 3 112 252 en

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1
1 Overview
1.1 Vehicle identification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
1.2 EC Conformity Declaration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 5
1.3 Overview and contents of the truck crane user information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 7
1.3.1 Operating instructions for driving and crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 7
1.3.2 Operating instructions for the lattice extension (additional equipment) . . . . . 1- 8
1.3.3 Maintenance manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 8
1.3.4 Lifting capacity tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 9
1.3.5 Outrigger pressure tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 9
1.3.6 Safety manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 9
1.3.7 Circuit diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 9
1.3.8 Spare parts list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
1.4 Instructions for using this documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
1.4.1 How are the operating instructions laid out? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 10
1.4.2 How are the pages of the operating instructions formatted? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 11
1.4.3 How can I find the necessary information quickly and easily? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 12
1.4.4 Definition of positional references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 18
1.4.5 Conversion table for US measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1- 19
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1.1 Vehicle identification
1 Overview

These operating instructions are intended only for the truck crane with the
serial number specified on the front cover.
s
08.03.2006
Operating instructions 3 112 252 en 1-1

GMK 4080-1
Overview
08.03.2006
1-2 3 112 252 en Operating instructions

GMK 4080-1
Overview
The following plates and numbers have been fitted to the truck crane for
identification:
1 The superstructure name plate at the front of the crane cab, contain-
ing the serial number and the designation of the crane model.
2 The CE mark on the name plate (only with truck cranes that are deliv-
ered to member countries of the EU).
3 The chassis name plate, on the console of the passenger seat with
the chassis number, the crane type designation and the closing num-
ber for the ignition lock and the driver's cab doors.
4 The chassis number at the front right, at the height of the first axle
line, in the web plate of the frame.
The location of the identification numbers on removable rigging parts (e.g.

counterweights, lattice extension) is described in the corresponding chap-
ters or in the specific operating instructions supplied.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1.2 EC Conformity Declaration

The operator is handed over a conformity declaration together with the de-
livery protocol for trucks crane delivered to EC member countries. An exam-
ple of the conformity declaration is illustrated in the following diagram.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1.3 Overview and contents of the truck crane user information
1.3 Overview and contents of the truck crane user

information
1.3.1 Operating instructions for driving and crane operation
These operating instructions contain the information required to operate

the truck crane.
The operating instructions are divided into two parts. Part 1, comprising
chapters 1 to 10, describes how the truck crane is driven. Part 2, comprising
chapters 11 to 16, describes how to operate the crane.
In chapter 2 you will find Basic safety instructions. Please read and observe
these instructions, even if you are familiar with the safety manual. The Basic
safety instructions are contained in this chapter only. Special safety instruc-
tions that relate to specific hazards are described in the section containing
the operation with which the hazard is associated.
Chapter 3 contains Information for operations planning. It is intended primarily

for the truck crane operator and those responsible for operations planning.
This chapter contains the following:
– The qualifications required for those involved in operations planning for
the truck crane,
– Special safety instructions,
– Information that is relevant to operations planning.
In chapter 4 to chapter 6 you will find information which is necessary for

Driving the truck crane: a description of all structural and operational compo-
nents, clearly defined checklists for rigging modes or rigging work and the
operating instructions for on-road and off-road driving.
Chapter 7 gives information on Rigging for road driving.
In chapter 8 you will find information on Troubleshooting when driving.
Chapter 9 contains the Technical description of the individual parts and func-
tional elements of the carrier as well as the Technical data.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Chapter 10 contains the index at the end of Part 1 – Driving.
Chapter 11 to chapter 12 contain the information necessary for Operating the

crane section, i.e. for working with the truck crane: a description of all compo-
nents and control elements, information about operating the diesel engine
and about operating the crane itself.
Chapter 13 deals with rigging the truck crane. There are individual sections
with information on Selecting a suitable site, rigging the Outriggers and Coun-
terweight and on Rigging work on the main boom.
Chapter 14 provides information on Troubleshooting when operating the

crane.
Chapter 15 contains the Technical description of the individual parts and func-
tional elements of the superstructure as well as the Technical data.
The Index in chapter 16, at the end of Part 2 – Crane operation, will help you
to find certain operations and terms in the operating instructions.
1.3.2 Operating instructions for the lattice extension (additional

equipment)
If the truck crane has been equipped with a lattice extension, a boom exten-
sion, an auxiliary single-sheave boom top, or other additional equipment,
the corresponding operating instructions (e.g. the operating instructions for
the Lattice extension) will be supplied. These contain all the information
about possible combinations, rigging, operation, transportation and the
technical data of the additional equipment.
1.3.3 Maintenance manual
The maintenance manual is intended for maintenance personnel. The main-

tenance manual does not contain information on repair work.
The maintenance manual consists of
– Instructions for cleaning the truck crane
– Run-in regulations
– Inspection and servicing intervals
– Maintenance tables
– Specifications for the required lubricants and fuels
08.03.2006
– A description of the maintenance work on both the vehicle section and

crane section

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1.3.4 Lifting capacity tables
These tables contain data concerning the load bearing capacity, the permis-
sible wind speed and the SLI code of the truck crane in various rigging
modes and boom positions.
1.3.5 Outrigger pressure tables
These tables contain data concerning the outrigger pressure on the pres-
sure points of the support in relation to the load, radius, rigging mode and
boom direction.
1.3.6 Safety manual
The Safety manual is intended to warn the crane operator of the hazards that
may occur during normal operation of the truck crane. It illustrates how to
avoid these hazards from the onset and how to react should they occur.
The Safety manual contains

– General safety instructions
– Safety instructions that apply to truck crane driving
– Safety instructions for rigging and working with truck cranes
– Safety instructions for crane operation under specific operating condi-
tions
Observing the information and carrying out the measures which are given
in the Safety manual is the responsibility of the crane operator and a prereq-
uisite for operating the truck crane safely.
1.3.7 Circuit diagrams
Circuit diagrams are used for troubleshooting and are intended for trained
maintenance personnel and for the local CraneCARE.
Enclosed are:
– The compressed-air circuit diagram
– The hydraulic circuit diagram and
– The electrical circuit diagram.
08.03.2006
1.3.8 Spare parts list
The Spare parts list contains all available genuine spare parts, and ordering
instructions.

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1.4 Instructions for using this documentation

These operating instructions are not a training manual for prospective crane
operators. All descriptions are written explicitly for crane operators who
have been trained to operate truck cranes.
These operating instructions are for reference; they contain brief or detailed
explanations of operating steps and procedures and assume the foreknowl-
edge of the crane operator.
1.4.1 How are the operating instructions laid out?
The operating instructions consist of Part 1 - Driving and Part 2 - Crane op-
eration. One part on its own, however, does not constitute a complete set of
operating instructions; both parts must be included with the truck crane.
The basic safety measures, including for crane operation, as well as general
information are found only in Chapter 1. The individual parts consist of the
following:
– The descriptions of the operating and control instruments, their designa-
tion, location and function
– The checklists, which describe the required crane mode or rigging mode
The individual rigging steps are listed in the correct order for extensive rig-
ging procedures. The accompanying step-by-step instructions are referred
to in the individual points. These descriptions look at the individual rigging
steps in detail and give the necessary warnings and safety instructions.
G
The checklists and the step-by-step instructions should always be consid-
ered as a single unit for the complete description of a rigging procedure.
A step-by-step instruction on its own will always describe only one individ-
ual rigging step in detail. The necessary rigging steps for the complete rig-
ging procedure and their order can only be found in the checklist.
S
08.03.2006
1 - 10 3 112 252 en Operating instructions

GMK 4080-1
Overview
The checklists contain cross-references to the respective accompanying

sections in which the required actions are described along with the dangers
involved.
As the crane operator, you are obliged to read these sections
– prior to using the crane for the first time and
– whenever you are not entirely confident about operating the truck crane.
Safely operating the truck crane using the checklists only is impossible un-
less
– you have mastered the necessary activities as they are described in the
relevant sections and
– you are aware of all the hazards that may arise and know how to avoid
them.
If in doubt always read the accompanying section which is referred to in the
checklist before working with the truck crane.
1.4.2 How are the pages of the operating instructions formatted?
Each page of the operating instructions consists of a wide text column and
a narrow column containing several functions.
The narrow column contains graphic and / or textinformation as required.
This includes
– the symbols for danger, information on environmental protection and
general information,
– the symbols for the switches, keys and lamps required to operate the
truck crane,
– graphic illustrations of the individual functional and structural elements
of the truck crane,
– the chapter and section numbers,
– the headings of the smaller sections, e.g. those in which a single proce-
dure is explained.
The following text passages are highlighted in italics:
– the descriptions of the operating instruments such as switches, push-but-
tons or lamps,
– cross-referenced section titles.
Text passages where sentences are preceded by a hyphen (as in this sec-
tion) are lists. This formatting structure is used to separate the text compo-
nents for easier comprehension.
s
08.03.2006
Operating instructions 3 112 252 en 1 - 11

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Sentences preceded by a bullet points contain specific instructions, such as
• Switch the transmission into neutral position N.

These passages require that you carry out a specific action.
Switch elements and indicator lamps which have the same symbol are rep-
resented by a single symbol when they are mentioned in the same connec-
tion, e.g.
• Press down the Suspension locking system rocker switch. The Suspension
u locking system indicator lamp must light up.
1.4.3 How can I find the necessary information quickly and easily?
These operating instructions contain the following reference aids:

– the table of contents at the front of the operating instructions,
– the table of contents of each chapter on the coloured sheet preceding the
respective chapter,
– the index at the back of the operating instructions, or at the back of each
individual part of the operating instructions,
– cross-references in the text.
The general table of contents and the table of contents for individual chap-
ters provide a thematic overview of the operating instructions.
The Index (in Chapters 10 and 16 of these operating instructions) lists key
words and terms alphabetically, and indicates the page on which the re-
spective word is defined or the corresponding operation is described.
You will find instructions for the use of the index on page à p. 1 - 18.
The text itself contains a number of cross-references to other text passages,
which contain additional or detailed information about a particular term.
These cross-references are indicated by means of an arrow ( ). à
Whenever you require further information on a subject, you should always
turn to the page to which the arrow refers.
Furthermore, you can use the cross-references to systematically familiarize

yourself with general and particular information on the truck crane, or to
look up the function of individual elements.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Example of cross- This will be explained using the example of switching on the transverse dif-
reference usage ferential lock.
The following seven sample pages show how the cross-references guide
you through the operating instructions. The example starts with the overall
view and goes on to the function of an individual switch.
H
The sample pages in this example originate from operating instructions for
the GMK 3050 and may be different from the actual operating instructions.
9 Driver's cab à p. 4 - 6
4-4 4-5
C0646
On page 4 -4 of our example you will find the overall view of the truck crane
with the position numbers 1 to 17. You will find the designation of the truck
crane part labelled with the number 9 on the opposite page 4 -5. There,
number 9 states Driver's cab. The accompanying cross-reference ( ) refers à
you to pages 4 -6.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1 Side instrument panel à p. 4 - 14
4-6
C0647
Page 4 -6 gives an overview of the driver's cab.

Item number 1 designates the side instrument panel. The operating ele-
ments on the side instrument panel are given on page 4 -14 according to the
cross-reference.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
6 Rocker switch for transverse differential lock à p. 4 - 22
h
6
4 - 14 4 - 15
C0648
The side instrument panel is shown on page 4 -14. In our example the mag-
nifying glass is directed at the symbol designated by the item number 6. On
the opposite page 4 -15 under number 6 you will find the designation Rocker
switch for transverse differential lock. You will find information on this switch
on page 4 -22.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
h Rocker switch for transverse differential lock

Locks the transverse differentials in all driven axle lines.
May only be activated when the vehicle is stationary or is moving at a
speed of no more than 3 km/h.
To switch on: Press rocker switch down.
To switch off: Press rocker switch up.

à p. 6 - 34
4 - 22
C0649
On page 4 -22, in the section Functional description of the display and operating
elements instrument panel, you will find the symbol as well as the designation
of the accompanying operating element: Rocker switch for transverse differen-
tial lock.
Furthermore, you will find a brief functional description of this switch. You
are referred to page 6 -34 for further information.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Activating the ●
Stop the truck crane or allow it to roll at a max. speed of 3 km/h.
transverse
differential locks ●
Straighten up the wheels.
●
Switch on the Level adjustment system key-operated switch.
h ● Press the Transverse differential lock rocker switch down.

Carefully start the truck crane and wait until the Transverse differential
lock indicator lamp lights up. The indicator lamp will flash if not all of the
transverse differential locks have been activated yet. It will only light contin-
uously when all the transverse differential locks in all the axle lines have been
activated.
6 - 34
C0650
The section Transverse differential locks in the axle lines is on page 6 -34 of our
example. This describes in detail the function and operation of the trans-
verse differential locks. You are also given warning information which will
help prevent you from incorrectly operating the transverse differential locks
and causing damage.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
How to use the in- The index has the following structure:
dex
The names of parts or modules you are searching for are listed in alphabet-
ical order on the left. The following are indented under these terms:
– Operations (e.g. Outrigger beam / extend) or
– Sub-headings (e.g. Steering / display and operating elements) or
– Sub-headings in relation to operations (e.g. Hydraulic system / preheat
hydraulic oil).
H
The first search word is always a noun which is followed by an operation or
a subcategory.
1.4.4 Definition of positional references
This section defines several terms which are used in the descriptions of the
operating elements in these operating instructions.
Basic rule Forwards always means the driver's cab is to the front of the direction of travel
Backwards always means the rear lights on the carrier are to the front of the
direction of travel.
Front, rear, right and left relate to the position of the carrier from the driver's
cab. The driver's cab is always at the front. This also applies when these
terms are used to describe the control levers in the driver's cab.
In the crane cab, front, rear, right and left relate to the position of the super-
structure. The front is always in the direction of the main boom head. This
also applies when these terms are used to describe the control levers in the
crane cab.
Buttons and Switches and buttons on the instrument panels are always pressed up or
switches down. In the illustrations of switches and buttons this means:
Up: Press (1)

Down: Press (2)
This applies whether the switch is installed horizontally, vertically or at an

angle. Up and down always refers to the way the switch or button is illus-
08.03.2006
trated in these operating instructions.

GMK 4080-1
Overview
1.4.5 Conversion table for US measurements
The following conversion factors will help you convert from metric to US
units and vice versa when the truck crane is being used in countries that use
US units of measurement.
Converting from in Multiply by

mm in 0,03937
in mm 25.4
m ft 3,28084
ft m 0,30479
m2 ft2 10,76391
cm2 in2 0,155
cm3 in3 0,061
l gal (US) 0,264178
kg lbs 2,204622
lbs kg 0,45359
t lbs 2204,622
lbs t 0,0004536
kN lbf 224,809
daN/cm2 lbf/in2 14,50378
lbf/in2 daN/cm2 0,06895
bar psi 14,50378
psi bar 0,06895
m/s ft/s 3,28084
km/h or km mph or mi 0,62137
mph or mi km/h or km 1,60935
Nm lbf ft 0,7375
°C °F 1.8 x °C+32
°F °C (°F-32)/1.8
t/m2 lbs/ft2 204,8
m2/t ft2/lbs 0,04882
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overview
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2
2.1 Warnings and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
2.2 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
2.3 Organizational measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 4
2.4 Personnel qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 6
2.5 Safety instructions that apply to truck crane driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
2.6 Safety instructions for truck crane work. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 7
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Basic safety instructions for crane operators
2.1 Warnings and symbols
2.1 Warnings and symbols

The following definitions and symbols are used in the operating instruc-
tions to highlight particularly important information:
G
This symbol indicates hazards related to the operation described which
may cause personal injury. The type of danger (e.g. risk of fatal or nonfatal
injury, or risk of crushing) is normally specified before the warning.
S
This symbol indicates dangers which could put objects at risk, e.g. damage
to the truck crane, the load or the environment.
B
This symbol alerts you to situations where there is a risk of receiving an
electric shock.
O
This symbol reminds you that you are working with substances which pose
a risk to the environment. Take particular care. Further information on han-
dling substances that pose a risk to the environment; à
Maintenance man-
ual, Chapter Safety and environmental protection.
The vertical line to the left of the warning text indicates the following: this
text, regardless of its length, relates to the warning symbol.
H
The hand with the pointing finger indicates passages that contain additional
instructions and tips regarding truck crane operation.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2.2 Intended use
s
This symbol indicates that the topic is continued on the next page. Turn to
the next page.
Horizontal lines always indicate the start or the end of an example. The text used
for examples is in a different font.
2.2 Intended use

The GMK 4080-1 truck crane is constructed in accordance with the latest
technology and the recognized safety regulations. Nevertheless, personal
injury to the operator or a third party as well as damage to the crane and
other property may occur during use.
The truck crane may only be modified with the consent of the manufacturer.
The GMK 4080-1 truck crane may only be used in when in excellent working
condition and for its intended purpose, and with due attention to safe oper-
ation and any possible hazards.
Malfunctions that may affect the safe operation of the unit are to be cor-
rected immediately.
The GMK 4080-1 truck crane may only be operated at temperatures of be-
tween -25 to +40 °C unless fitted with the appropriate special equipment.
The GMK 4080-1 truck crane may only be used to vertically lift loads in the
authorized rigging modes using a hook block that is reeved to the hoist
rope. The weight and centre of distribution of the loads must be known. Any
other use of the crane is not considered to represent intended use.
The manufacturer is not liable for damage resulting from the improper or
unauthorized use of the truck crane GMK 4080-1. The user shall take full re-
sponsibility for any such use.
Intended use also entails

– Observing the complete crane documentation consisting of the operating
instructions, the lifting capacity table, the outrigger pressure table and the
safety manual
– Adhering to the inspection and maintenance requirements specified in
the maintenance manual.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2.2 Intended use
Improper use includes:

– Transporting loads on the carrier
– Pushing, pulling or lifting loads with the level adjustment system, the
beams or the outrigger cylinders
– Pushing, pulling or lifting loads off the ground using the slewing gear, the
derricking gear or the telescoping mechanism
– Pulling off fixed objects using the crane
– Two-hook operation with the boom extension and two-hook operation on
the main boom head without additional equipment
– Defining SLI codes that do not correspond to the actual rigging mode
– Working with an overridden SLI or overridden lifting limit switch
– After SLI deactivation, increasing the radius by pulling the raised load at
an angle (e.g. with a chain hoist)
– Misuse of the outrigger pressure indicator as a safety function to prevent
overturning after an SLI shutdown (outrigger pressure greater than 0 t)
– Road driving in an unauthorized driving mode (axle load, dimension)
– Moving the rigged crane in an unauthorized driving mode
– Use of equipment that is not authorized for use with the crane
– Transporting people in any way with the lifting tackle, upon the load, or in
the crane cab while driving
– Carrying passengers outside the driver's cab
– Loading and unloading work, i.e. continuous operation without a suffi-
ciently long break
– Usage for any kind of sport or recreation event, especially for bungee
jumping
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2.3 Organizational measures

The operating instructions and the lifting capacity table should be kept in
the truck crane for immediate access at all times, and must not be removed
from the truck crane. You must have read and understood the operation and
safety instructions in these operating instructions, and comply with them
when working.
In addition to the operating instructions and the lifting capacity table, ob-
serve all general, statutory and otherwise applicable regulations concerning
accident prevention and environmental protection. You must have read and
understood these and must comply with them when working.
These could include:
– How to deal with hazardous materials
– Wearing personal protective equipment
– Traffic regulations
– All applicable regulations concerning the operation of a crane.
Ensure that those appointed to work on the truck crane are given the infor-
mation required to carry out the work before starting operations. Instruct
your employees (e.g. banksmen, slingers, rigging personnel) accordingly.
Ensure that the maintenance personnel possess the necessary expertise to

safely operate the crane. Ensure that the maintenance personnel have ac-
cess to the operating instructions.
Only properly trained or instructed personnel may carry out work on the
truck crane.
Responsibilities related to crane operation, rigging, maintenance and repair
work must be clearly defined.
Ensure that only the appointed employees operate the truck crane.
Do not leave long hair down or wear loose clothing or jewellery (including
rings) when working with the crane. These could get caught or pulled into
the unit and result in injury.
Use your personal protective equipment whenever necessary or prescribed.
Observe all safety and warning signs on the truck crane.
Ensure that all safety and warning signs on the truck crane remain legible.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Note the operational organization on the site. Report your arrival to site
management. Ask for the employee authorized to instruct you.
Familiarize yourself with the location and operation of the fire extinguishers
on every site.
Note the fire alarm and fire fighting facilities on the site.
Should the operating behaviour of the truck crane change in such a manner
that the safety conditions are affected, e.g. if you doubt the truck crane's op-
erating safety, stop the machine immediately and inform the appropriate
persons responsible.
Do not make any changes to the programmable control systems (e.g. the
SLI).
Do not modify or mount attachments to the truck crane without the consent
of the manufacturer, if such changes could affect the safety of the unit. This
also applies to
– The installation of safety devices
– The adjustment of safety devices and valves
Welding work on load-bearing parts may only be carried out by properly
qualified personnel with the manufacturer's prior permission. To avoid any
damage, especially to electronic parts, there are certain steps you must take
before doing any welding work. You should therefore always consult
CraneCARE before doing any welding work.
Ensure that both the prescribed periods and the periods specified in the op-
erating and maintenance instructions for regular testing, inspection and
maintenance work are maintained.
Replace the hydraulic hose lines, or have them replaced, at the prescribed
intervals, even if no safety defects are noticeable.
Replacement parts must fulfil the technical requirements prescribed by the

manufacturer. Genuine spare parts always meet these requirements.
It is imperative that appropriate service equipment be used when carrying

out repair work.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2.4 Personnel qualifications
2.4 Personnel qualifications

These operating instructions are not a training manual for prospective crane
operators.
All descriptions are written explicitly for crane operators who have been
trained to operate truck cranes.
Employees in training may only operate the truck crane under strict super-
vision.
Only reliable personnel may operate the truck crane.
As a truck crane operator you are obliged to fulfil a number of requirements:

– You must possess a driving licence for this type of vehicle that is valid in
the country in which you are working.
– You must have general knowledge of crane operation and any qualifica-
tions that may be required by the country in which you are working.
– You must be familiar with and have understood the operating instruc-
tions.
– You must be familiar with and have understood the accident prevention
regulations.
– You must fulfil all physical and mental requirements for truck crane oper-
ation, e.g. perfect sight and hearing and the ability to react quickly.
Please refer to the section in the Safety manual titled You as crane driver and
operator.
Only experienced personnel familiar with the applicable accident preven-

tion regulations are authorized to sling loads and to train crane operators.
Your responsibilities as a crane operator (including those concerning traffic

regulations) must be clearly defined. You must be in a position to refuse to
carry out any instructions given to you by a third party that violate safety
regulations.
Only trained personnel with special knowledge and experience in the fields
of hydraulics, pneumatics and electrical equipment may carry out mainte-
nance work on the truck crane.
Deutsche GROVE GmbH conducts general and type-related crane operator

courses and technical courses.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2.5 Safety instructions that apply to truck crane driving
2.5 Safety instructions that apply to truck crane driving

Walk around the truck crane before beginning to drive. Check the condition
of the truck crane carefully using the checklists in the operating instructions.
Do not assume that everything is in working order simply because it was in
working order when work was last completed.
Before starting the vehicle, check that all guards and safety devices are cor-
rectly fitted and that they are all in a proper condition.
Use the appropriate access aids when checking overhead crane parts.
Do not use parts of the machine as access aids.
Keep all handles, steps, step treads and ladders free of dirt, snow and ice.
Check all operating and control elements in the driver's cab before starting
the diesel engine.
Monitor all warning and indicator lamps as well as the control instruments
when the engine is started.
Lock the truck crane after operation to prevent unauthorized use.
2.6 Safety instructions for truck crane work

Carefully select a safe site for the truck crane to stand from where you can
work safely.
Check over the truck crane before beginning crane work. Check the condi-
tion of the truck crane carefully using the checklists in the operating instruc-
tions. Do not assume that everything is in working order simply because it
was in working order when work was last completed.
Check daily before starting to work with the crane that all guards and safety
devices are correctly fitted and that they are all in a proper condition.
Check the safety devices each day before beginning work (SLI, lifting limit
switch, dead man's switch, emergency stop switch for crane control).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
2.6 Safety instructions for truck crane work
Use the appropriate access aids when carrying out overhead rigging or
maintenance work. Do not use parts of the crane as access aids.
Walk only on those machine parts which are equipped with appropriate
steps and railings and therefore guarantee safety. During rigging and main-
tenance work on machine sections above body height which have no appa-
ratus for accessing them, always use the extension ladder supplied (e.g.
when reeving the hoist rope on the boom head).
Keep all handles, steps, step treads and ladders free of dirt, snow and ice.
Check all operating and control elements in the crane cab before starting the
diesel engine.
Monitor all warning and indicator lamps as well as the control instruments
when the engine is started.
Make sure that there are no unauthorized people in the vicinity of or on the
truck crane when rigging or during crane work. Secure the danger zone us-
ing cordons and mark the zone as such.
When lifting a load, raise the boom to balance out the increase in radius
caused by the boom bending so that the load is lifted up vertically and does
not drag, injure helpers or fall into the hoist rope diagonally (e.g. from a ve-
hicle or scaffolding). Inform banksmen and helpers about this as well.
Before turning the superstructure, support the truck crane with the outrig-
ger span required for the currently rigged counterweight.
Ensure that the truck crane is horizontally aligned before carrying out crane
work.
Only use equipment (counterweight sections, lattice extensions) that be-

longs to your truck crane. Both the truck crane and the equipment must
have the same serial number.
Simultaneously lifting loads with two cranes is particularly dangerous. Use

extreme caution when carrying out this type of work.
When work is interrupted, always put the load down and never leave the
truck crane if a load is raised.
Lock the truck crane when you leave the cab to prevent unauthorized use.
Crane work carried out in the vicinity of live electrical cables as well as oil,
gas or other supply lines is dangerous and requires that special precaution-
08.03.2006
ary measures be taken. Please refer to the section titled Crane operation under
special operating conditions in the Safety manual, and observe the relevant na-
tional regulations.

GMK 4080-1
3
3.1 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.1.1 Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.1.2 Organizational measures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
3.1.3 Personnel qualifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 2
3.2 Operations planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2.1 Prerequisites for operations planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 3
3.2.2 Information for operations planning contained in the user information . . . . . 3 - 4
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Information for operations planning
3.1 Safety instructions
3.1.1 Intended use
When carrying out operations planning, please remember that the

GMK 4080-1 truck crane may only be used for applications that do not vio-
late any laws, regulations or the Intended use of the unit as specified by the
manufacturer. Therefore, please observe the section Intended use, p. 2 - 2.
3.1.2 Organizational measures
The manufacturer of your truck crane has no direct influence on the way you
use, operate, or maintain the crane. You are therefore responsible for ensur-
ing the safe operation of the crane and the fulfilment of all laws and regula-
tions.
Ensure that the operating instructions are supplemented with any instruc-
tions required for special operational features, such as:
– Work organisation
– Work procedures
– Personnel assignment
– Compulsory supervision and registration
When using oils, lubricants and other chemical substances, ensure that the
safety regulations that apply to the respective product are strictly observed.
Ensure that process materials and replaced parts are disposed of in a man-
ner which is as environmentally sound as possible.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Monitor the work of the employees at least occasionally and ensure that
they are working in accordance with the operating instructions in a respon-
sible, conscientious manner and are aware of the related operational haz-
ards.
Use only equipment that belongs to your particular truck crane, such as
counterweight sections and lattice extensions.
The serial number of both the truck crane and the equipment must be
identical.
Observe the lifting capacity table for the truck crane, which is also contained
in the operating instructions. If the truck crane permits the use of different
counterweight combinations, the counterweight sections may only be com-
bined as defined in the lifting capacity table.
When loading the truck crane, please observe the national regulations that
apply to transport. In addition, please observe the prescribed safety mea-
sures of the shipper (e.g. the carrying agent or railway carrier).
3.1.3 Personnel qualifications
Only qualified personnel may operate the truck crane. Therefore, please ob-
serve the section Intended use, p. 2 - 2.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
3.2 Operations planning
3.2.1 Prerequisites for operations planning
Plan each operation carefully. Gather information concerning the route,

paying particular attention to
– Distance
– Route
– Headroom clearances
– Load bearing capacity of bridges.
Gather information about the job including

– The load bearing capacity and stability of the ground (e.g. soil, buildings)
– Weight and dimensions of the loads to be lifted
– Type of load (degree of risk involved)
– Required stroke length and radius
– Restricted movement due to buildings etc.
Make sure that the necessary equipment is on hand, such as

– Lifting gear
– Counterweight
– Blocks for outrigging, etc.
Organise transportation and obtain any necessary driving permits.
Poor planning leads to improvisation and improvisation is the cause of

many accidents!
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
3.2.2 Information for operations planning contained in the user

information
Extensive information is necessary for operations planning in order to guar-

antee the safe, trouble-free, efficient use of the truck crane:
The operating instructions contain

– Measurements and weights of the truck crane; à p. 9 - 2, à p. 15 - 2,
– Driving modes permitted on public roads; à p. 6 - 7,
– Dimensions and weights of equipment that can be removed; à p. 9 - 4,
à p. 15 - 4,
– Dimensions and turning circle radiuses for manoeuvring; à p. 9 - 9,
– The permitted outrigger spans; à p. 13 - 37,
– Size of the outrigger pads; à p. 9 - 5.
The lifting capacity table contains

– Working ranges (working-range curve of the boom)
– Lifting capacities for the permitted rigging modes
– Lifting capacities for the permitted spans
– SLI codings
– Permitted wind speeds
– Load reduction in certain rigging modes
The outrigger pressure table contains

– Outrigger pressures on the ground under the outrigger for various rigging
modes and boom directions
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4
4.1 Overview of the operating and display elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.1.1 Overview of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
4.1.2 Overview of the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
4.1.3 Front instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
4.1.4 Side instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 18
4.1.5 Operating elements on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
4.1.6 Connections for hand-held control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 24
4.1.7 Switch boxes for the outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure indicator 4 - 25
4.2 Functional description of the display and operating elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
4.2.1 On the instrument panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 27
4.2.2 On the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 53
4.2.3 Overhead in the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 56
4.3 Other operating elements on the carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 57
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Description of the truck crane vehicle section
4.1 Overview of the operating and display elements

This section only contains the operating and display elements for driving
that are located on the outside of the truck crane or in the driver's cab.
4.1.1 Overview of the vehicle
The figures on the following pages illustrate the location of the operating
and control instruments which are required to drive the truck crane and
which are found on the outside of the vehicle.
All operating and control elements required for crane operation are de-
scribed in chapter 11.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Outrigger lighting à p. 4 - 52
2 Access ladder to the superstructure à p. 4 - 60
3 Connections for hand-held control à p. 4 - 24
4 Diesel engine emergency stop switch à p. 5 - 20
5 Switch boxes for the outriggers / electronic level / à p. 4 - 25
outrigger pressure indicator 1)
6 Ladder à p. 4 - 61
7 Oil dip stick, diesel engine à p. 5 - 8
8 Filler connection for the compressed air system à p. 8 - 6
– Tyre inflator connection 1) à p. 8 - 13
9 Wing mirror à p. 6 - 9
– electrically adjustable à p. 4 - 42
10 Driver's cab à p. 4 - 4
11 Diesel engine à p. 5 - 1
12 Coolant tank, diesel engine à p. 5 - 6
13 Shut-off valves for carrier hydraulic system à p. 5 - 5
14 Hydraulic oil tank, inspection glass à p. 5 - 7
15 Boom pretensioning 1) à p. 7 - 12
16 Boom floating position 1) à p. 7 - 10
17 Spare wheel 1) à p. 8 - 10
18 Chock 1) à p. 6 - 47
19 Slewing gear freewheel 1) à p. 7 - 8
20 Air intake inhibitor 1) à p. 5 - 21
21 Oil filler neck for the diesel engine à p. 5 - 8
(under the driver's cab)
22 Front flap à p. 4 - 62
23 Extendable ladder à p. 4 - 60
24 Reservoir for windshield wipers à p. 6 - 7
25 Tipping device for driver's cab 1) à p. 8 - 15
26 Emergency hand pump à p. 8 - 23
27 Battery master switch à p. 5 - 5
28 Reservoir, central lubrication system 2)
29 Superstructure driving lights on/off switch 1) à p. 7 - 14
30 Fuel tank filler neck à p. 5 - 10
31 Dual tank 1) à p. 5 - 23
08.03.2006
2)
à Separate operating instructions

GMK 4080-1
4.1.2 Overview of the driver's cab
Top view of
driver's cab
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Side instrument panel à p. 4 - 18

2 Adjustable driver's seat with built-in safety belt à p. 6 - 13
3 Rocker button for separate steering à p. 4 - 38
4 Steering wheel à p. 4 - 23
5 Adjustable steering column à p. 4 - 23
6 Rocker button for electric window winder à p. 4 - 59
7 Front instrument panel à p. 4 - 10
8 Service brake pedal à p. 6 - 29
9 Accelerator à p. 6 - 42
10 Transmission operating elements à p. 4 - 22
11 Parking brake lever à p. 4 - 36
12 Fire extinguisher 1) à p. 4 - 62
13 Removable rest, fuses behind it, diagnostics plug, à p. 4 - 9
rocker switch
14 Glove compartment
15 Rocker button for electric window winder à p. 4 - 59
16 Adjustable passenger's seat à p. 6 - 14
17 Storage compartment or auxiliary heater 1)
18 Suspension operating pressure display 1) à p. 4 - 39
19 Folding berth 1)
à p. 4 - 63
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Overhead in the
driver's cab
1 Sun visor
2 Loudspeaker 1)
3 Radio cassette 1), 2)
Radio CD player 1), 2)
4 Cab lighting à p. 4 - 56
5 Roof fan 1) à p. 4 - 56
1)
Additional equipment
2)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Below the front

instrument panel
1 Tachograph 1) à p. 4 - 12
2 Rocker button for steering column block à p. 6 - 15
3 Unlocking lever for front flap à p. 4 - 62
4 Storage compartment for hand-held control à p. 13 - 27
1)
Only for truck cranes that are supplied to member states of the EC.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Under the The following elements are under the detachable covering.
covering
1 Fuses à p. 8 - 30
2 Diagnostics plug à p. 4 - 51
3 Rocker switch for emergency operation 1) à p. 14 - 85
1)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.1.3 Front instrument panel
Left-hand insert
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Air vent à p. 4 - 47
2 Gauge for supply pressure in brake circuits I and II à p. 4 - 36
3 Indicator lamp for hydraulic oil return flow filter I à p. 4 - 38
4 Indicator lamp for eddy current retarder 1) à p. 4 - 37
5 Warning lamp for trailer ABS 1) à p. 4 - 37
6 ABS warning light à p. 4 - 37
7 Warning light for steering circuit I à p. 4 - 37
8 Turn signal indicator lamp à p. 4 - 41
9 Indicator lamp for hydraulic oil return flow filter II à p. 4 - 36
10 Indicator lamp for suspension locking system à p. 4 - 39
11 Driver's cab locking system warning lamp 1) à p. 4 - 52
12 Warning lamp for steering circuit II à p. 4 - 37
13 Turn signal indicator lamp 1) à p. 4 - 41
14 Rocker switch with hazard warning system indicator à p. 4 - 41
lamp
15 Indicator lamp/push-button dual tank 1) à p. 4 - 52
16 Rocker switch for suspension locking system à p. 4 - 39
17 Rocker switch for roof ventilator 1) à p. 4 - 56
18 Soot particle filter control 1) à p. 4 - 52
19 Rocker switch "Gear position L" à p. 4 - 32
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Tachograph insert
H
The tachograph is only installed on cranes that are delivered to member
states of the EC.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Tachograph display à p. 6 - 20
2 Button for setting the minutes - à p. 4 - 45
3 Button for setting the minutes + à p. 4 - 45
4 Button for unlocking the drawer à p. 6 - 18
5 Button for time group for driver 1 à p. 6 - 19
6 Button for time group for driver 2 à p. 6 - 19
7 Button for time setting menu à p. 4 - 45
8 Drawer à p. 6 - 18
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Speedometer
insert
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Speed indicator à p. 4 - 45
2 Speedometer display à p. 4 - 45
3 Tachograph malfunction warning lamp à p. 4 - 46
(only on truck cranes with tachograph)
4 Time / day's kilometers display push-button à p. 4 - 46
1), 2)
5 Data logger
6 Off-road gear indicator lamp à p. 4 - 33
7 On-road gear indicator lamp à p. 4 - 33
8 Transfer case off-road gear rocker button à p. 4 - 33
9 Transfer case neutral position rocker button à p. 4 - 33
10 Transfer case on-road gear rocker button à p. 4 - 33
1)
2)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Right-hand insert
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Operating hours counter for the diesel engine à p. 4 - 28

2 Air vent à p. 4 - 47
3 Tachometer à p. 4 - 28
4 Diesel engine coolant temperature display à p. 4 - 27
5 Fuel gauge à p. 4 - 28
6 Warning lamp for supply pressure of brake circuits I à p. 4 - 36
and II
7 Diesel engine oil pressure warning lamp à p. 4 - 27
8 Indicator lamp for full-beam headlight à p. 4 - 41
9 Indicator lamp for transverse differential locks à p. 4 - 36
10 Indicator lamp for diesel engine air filter à p. 4 - 27
11 Charge warning lamp à p. 4 - 40
12 Indicator lamp for vehicle parking brake à p. 4 - 37
13 "Boom not set down" indicator lamp 1) à p. 4 - 52
14 Indicator lamp for longitudinal differential locks à p. 4 - 35
15 Indicator lamp for diesel engine coolant level à p. 4 - 27
16 Flame start system 1) à p. 4 - 27
17 Warning lamp for engine electronic system à p. 4 - 28
18 Rocker switch with indicator lamp for the fog light à p. 4 - 40
and fog tail light 1)
19 Rocker switch with indicator lamp for rotating à p. 4 - 41
beacon
20 Rocker switch for parking light / headlight à p. 4 - 40
21 Collective warning light for the carrier electronics à p. 4 - 42
1)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.1.4 Side instrument panel
H
In the illustration of the side instrument panel, the left-hand edge corre-
sponds to the front, i.e. the direction of travel of the truck crane.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Warning lamp for transmission shift lock à p. 4 - 32

2 Rocker switch for outrigger lighting 1) à p. 4 - 52
3 "Steering unlocked" warning lamp à p. 4 - 38
4 Air-conditioning on / off rocker button à p. 4 - 49
5 Rocker switch with lock button for driving mode / à p. 4 - 51
crane operation
6 Rocker button for right-hand level adjustment à p. 4 - 44
7 Rocker button for front level adjustment à p. 4 - 44
8 Rocker button for rear level adjustment à p. 4 - 44
9 Rocker button for left-hand level adjustment à p. 4 - 44
10 Combination button for mirror setting à p. 4 - 42
11 On / off rocker button for separate steering à p. 4 - 38
(with lock button)
12 Rocker button for Longitudinal differential lock / à p. 4 - 35
Drive of second axle line 1)
13 Rocker button for transverse differential locks à p. 4 - 35
14 Key-operated switch for level adjustment system à p. 4 - 43
15 Auxiliary heater with timer 1) à p. 4 - 21
16 Indicator lamp for raising vehicle level à p. 4 - 44
17 "Not on-road level" indicator lamp à p. 4 - 44
18 Rocker switch for raising / lowering vehicle level à p. 4 - 43
19 Indicator lamp for lowering vehicle level à p. 4 - 44
20 Rocker button for raising / lowering truck crane à p. 4 - 44
21 Rocker button for on-road level à p. 4 - 44
1)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Heating insert
1 Transmission display à p. 4 - 30
2 Knob switch for upper fan à p. 4 - 47
3 Recirculated / fresh air regulator à p. 4 - 47
4 Air temperature regulator à p. 4 - 47
5 Knob switch for lower fan à p. 4 - 47
6 Cigarette lighter
7 Ashtray
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Auxiliary heater The auxiliary heater with timer is only available with additional equipment.
insert
1 Display field for auxiliary heater à p. 4 - 49

2 Push-button for setting time / day à p. 4 - 49
3 Push-button for calling up storage locations à p. 4 - 50
4 Push-button for switching the auxiliary heater on / à p. 4 - 49
off
5 Input – push-button à p. 4 - 50
6 Input + push-button à p. 4 - 50
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Transmission op-
erating elements
1 Transmission touch lever à p. 4 - 31

2 Transmission rotary switch à p. 4 - 29
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.1.5 Operating elements on the steering column
Adjusting the steering column; à p. 6 - 15.

L
1 Multipurpose switch, left à p. 4 - 55

To operate the lights / horn / front windscreen wiper
/ washing system
2 Ignition lock à p. 4 - 53
3 Multipurpose switch, right à p. 4 - 53
Functions on the stationary truck crane:
– Set idling speed à p. 4 - 53
Functions on the parked truck crane:
– Tempomat à p. 4 - 54
– Retarder à p. 4 - 55
– Eddy current retarder1) à p. 4 - 55
4 “Temposet on” button à p. 4 - 54
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.1.6 Connections for hand-held control
There are sockets (3) on the carrier and sockets (1) and (2) on the superstruc-
ture for the hand-held control supplied.
The hand-held control contains the operating and display elements for the
outriggers, the electronic level and for driving the power units in case of
emergency.
As these operating instruments are required for crane operation, they are
described in Part 2 – Crane operation; à
On the hand-held control, p. 11 - 105.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.1.7 Switch boxes for the outrigger / electronic level / outrigger

pressure indicator
With additional equipment, there is a switch box with the operating and dis-
play elements for outrigger, electronic level and the pressure display on
each side of the carrier.
As these operating instruments are required for crane operation, they are
described in Part 2 – Crane operation; à Switch boxes for outrigger / electronic
level / outrigger pressure display, p. 11 - 42.
H
When driving, error messages relating to the carrier electronics can be read
on this display; àMalfunctions to the carrier electronic system, p. 8 - 45.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.2 Functional description of the display and operating elements
4.2 Functional description of the display and operating

elements
Definition of directional information for using operating elements;
à p. 1 - 18.
4.2.1 On the instrument panels
Diesel engine
z Indicator lamp for flame start system

The indicator lamp is only available with additional equipment.
Lights up when ignition is switched on and the diesel engine is cold.
Goes out when the diesel engine is ready to run (waiting period of up
to 20 seconds depending on the temperature of the engine coolant);
à Starting the diesel engine, p. 5 - 13.
L Diesel engine oil pressure warning lamp

This lights up when the motor is off and the ignition is switched on;
à p. 5 - 11.
It goes out after the engine has been started; à
p. 5 - 17.
Does not go out or goes on if the oil pressure in the diesel engine is too low;
à p. 8 - 37.
Diesel engine coolant temperature display

Displays the current coolant temperature of the diesel engine. The temper-
ature is monitored by the engine electronic system; à
p. 6 - 35.
t Indicator lamp for diesel engine coolant level

Lights up if the coolant level is too low; à p. 6 - 36.
p Indicator lamp for diesel engine air filter

Lights up if the air filter is soiled and must be replaced; à Maintenance man-
ual.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Fuel gauge
Shows the current fuel level in the fuel tank; à p. 6 - 37.
C0013
Tachometer
This displays the current engine speed in 100 rotations / minute;
à Monitoring the maximum permissible engine speed, p. 6 - 39.
Operating hours counter for the diesel engine

Displays the current working hours of the diesel engine. All periods be-
tween the engine being started and stoppped again count as working hours.
This includes the time during which the crane is operated.
‡ Warning lamp for engine electronic system

This lights up when the motor is off and the ignition is switched on;
à p. 5 - 11.
It goes out after the engine has been started; à p. 5 - 17.
Does not go out or goes on if an error is identified in the engine electronic
system; à p. 8 - 37.
Operating elements on the multipurpose switch, right

The multipurpose switch functions are divided into different types (engine /
brake) and are therefore described in the section On the steering column;
à Setting the Tempomat, p. 4 - 54,
à Setting the Temposet, p. 4 - 54,
à Setting the idling speed, p. 4 - 53.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Transmission with à Operating the transmission with automatic gear change, p. 6 - 23.
automatic gear
change
Transmission rotary switch
Used to switch the transmission into different transmission modes or to
neutral position. Gear can only be shifted when the engine is running.
Can be operated any time, even when driving. Changing gears in the trans-
mission depends on whether the truck crane is parked or driving and which
switch positions you switched between. There are three switch positions:
– Position D for gear position D

To switch the transmission to gear position D - forwards.
When switching from N to D while the truck crane is stationary or driving
forward, gear position D is switched on.
When switching from R to D, gear position D is only switched on when the
truck crane is stationary. When it is being driven, the transmission
switches to neutral position N.
After switching on when the truck crane is stationary, the electronic
system selects and engages an suitable starting gear.
After switching on while driving, the electronic system selects, puts in and
engages a gear suitable for the current speed.
– Position N for neutral position N

To switch transmission to neutral position (no gear engaged).
When switching from D or R to N, the neutral position N is always
switched on. This shift always has priority.
– Position R for gear position R

To shift the transmission to gear position R - reverse.
When shifting from N to R, gear position R is only engaged when the truck
crane is stationary. No gear shifting is performed while driving.
When switching from D to R, gear position R is only engaged when the
truck crane is stationary. When it is being driven, the transmission
switches to neutral position N.
After switching on when the truck crane is stationary, the electronic
system selects and engages an suitable starting gear.
When the selected transmission mode has been engaged, the Transmission
display indicates this in a corresponding message. With additional equip-
ment, an acoustic signal is given.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Transmission display
Indicates the actual transmission status:
N when neutral position N is engaged
RL or RH when transmission mode R is engaged

(RL = first reverse gear, RH = second reverse gear)
1 to 12 when you have switched to transmission mode D,

depending on the gear that is engaged.
In automatic mode all the arrows and bars are also dis-
played.
1 to 12 when you have switched to transmission mode D,
depending on the engaged gear 1 - 12.
In manual operation, the existing reverse options are indi-
cated by the downward arrow and bar (one gear per bar).
The display also indicates:

– Various information prior to and while driving; à
Operating the transmis-
sion with automatic gear change, p. 6 - 23.
– And error messages, e.g. the service symbol, the wrench; à
Error mes-
sages on the Transmission display, p. 8 - 53.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Transmission touch lever

The Transmission touch lever is touched for operation (pushed into a certain
direction once and then let go) and then returns to its initial position.
The Transmission touch lever has several functions:
– Changing over between manual and automatic mode

When transmission mode D or R is switched on, change-over can be per-
formed any time, even while driving. No change-over is performed if the
transmission is in neutral position N.
Change-over to auto- Push touch lever to the left once
matic mode:
Change-over to manual Push touch lever to the left once
mode: or push forwards once
or push back once
When changing over to manual mode while driving by pushing forward
or to the back, the first gear shift is performed in manual mode at the
same time.
When a change-over has been performed the Transmission display changes

to the corresponding indication.
– Switching the transmission in manual mode

In the transmission modes D and R the touch lever serves to
change the selected starting gear when the truck crane is stationary,
to shift the transmission up and down while driving.
Shift to next gear up: Push touch lever forward once
Shift to next gear down: Push touch lever back once
Skipping gears: Push touch lever into the desired direction
once or twice in a row.
The transmission shifts one or two gears fur-
ther.
Shifting down is only performed if the engine speed in low gear does not
exceed the max. permissible speed.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
– Calling up error codes

To retrieve error codes, push the Transmission touch lever in one direction
and hold there. You can call up various error codes:
Current error codes that are present at the moment and
Stored error codes, derived from earlier errors.
To call up current error 1. Switch to neutral position N;
messages:
2. Push touch lever forward;
An error code is shown on the Transmission
display.
To call up stored error 1. Switch to neutral position N;
messages
2. Actuate service brake;
3. Push touch lever forward;
The Transmission display shows all the
stored error codes one after the other.
The Transmission display shows all the stored
error codes one after the other.
à Calling up error codes, p. 8 - 54.
# Warning lamp for transmission shift lock

Lights up in the case of a serious transmission malfunction. At the same
time, the Transmission display indicates the service symbol and the entry
STOP and a warning buzzer sounds; à
Service symbol and STOP display,
p. 8 - 54.
Á Rocker switch "Gear position L"

To switch on and off the gear position L – slow, maneuvering on slopes.
Switched on when the truck crane is at a standstill at idling speed, in
addition to gear position D or R.
The rocker switch may only be activated when the lock button is activated
simultaneously.
To switch on gear posi- Press the rocker switch down.
tion L: The transmission is shifted into first gear (for-
wards or reverse) and will not shift during
driving (max. ca. 5 km/h).
To switch on gear posi- Press the rocker switch up.
tion L:
à Gear position L, p. 6 - 30.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Transfer case à Off-road gear, p. 6 - 50
4 Transfer case on-road gear rocker button
The truck crane is standing still, the transmission rotary switch is in position N.
To switch on the on-road gear: Press down the rocker button.
4 On-road gear indicator lamp

Goes on if the on-road gear is switched on.
Goes out in neutral position and when switched to off-road gear.
5 Transfer case off-road gear rocker button
To switch on the off-road gear: Press down the rocker button.
5 Off-road gear indicator lamp

Goes on if the off-road gear is switched on.
Goes out in neutral position and when switched to on-road gear.
v Transfer case neutral position rocker button
To switch on: Press down the rocker button.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Axle drive The longitudinal differential locks and the transverse differential locks can
be switched on using the key-operated switch of the Level adjustment system.
The indicator lamp will always be displayed as long as the ignition is
switched on; à p. 6 - 56.
c Rocker button for longitudinal differential lock / drive of the second axle
line
Used to switch on the longitudinal differential lock in the transfer case and
in the third axel line.
With 8 x 8 x 8 drive as additional equipment, the drive of the second axle
line is also activated.
May only be activated when the vehicle is stationary or is moving at a speed
of no more than 5 km/h .
à p. 6 - 52.
c Indicator lamp for longitudinal differential locks

Used to check the switching states:
– Switches the longitudinal differential lock on / off in the transfer case and
on the third axle line.
– Drive of second axle line on / off (only with additional equipment
8 x 8 x 8).
Goes on if all of the listed switch states have been mechanically switched
on.
Flashes if not all of the listed switch states have been switched on or off.
Goes out when all of the listed switch states have been mechanically
switched off (as available).
à p. 6 - 52.
h Rocker button for transverse differential locks

Locks the transverse differentials in all driven axle lines:
– With 8 x 6 x 8 drive in the axle lines 1, 3 and 4
– With 8 x 8 x 8 drive in the axle lines 1, 2, 3 and 4.
May only be activated when the vehicle is stationary or is moving at a speed
of no more than 5 km/h .
à p. 6 - 54.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
h Indicator lamp for transverse differential locks

Lights up if all transverse differential locks have been switched on.
Flashes if not all transverse differential locks have been switched on or off.
Goes out if all transverse differential locks have been switched off;
à p. 6 - 55.
Brakes
Gauge for supply pressure in brake circuits I and II
4 5
6
3 7 The operating pressure is approx. 8 bar.
2 8
1 9 The pressure in both brake circuits must be more than 5.5 bar for driving;
0 bar 10 à p. 6 - 34.
C0005
l Warning lamp for supply pressure of brake circuits I and II

Goes out if the supply pressure in both brake circuits is over 5.5 bar.
Lights up if the supply pressure decreases to less than approx. 5 bar;
à p. 6 - 34.
Parking brake lever
1 To close parking brake: Pull the parking brake lever back until it locks
into place.
2 Release parking brake: Lift the locking ring on the parking brake lever
and push the parking brake lever forward as
far as it will go.
3 Operation as auxiliary The braking force can be continuously regu-

brake: lated with the parking brake lever. This allows
the parking brake to be used as an auxiliary
brake as well.
4 Test position when tow- 1. Pull the parking brake lever back until it
ing a trailer: locks into place.
2. Press in the parking brake lever and pull it
backwards.
The parking brake on the trailer will be
à
08.03.2006
released; p. 6 - 84.

GMK 4080-1
f Indicator lamp for vehicle parking brake

Lights up when the holding brake is engaged.
Goes out if the parking brake is released.
x ABS warning light

Goes on after the ignition has been switched on and goes out at a driving
speed of about 6 km/h; à p. 6 - 34.
y Warning lamp for trailer ABS

Is only active when additionally equipped with lattice extension.
Goes out only at a driving speed of at least 6km/h; à
p. 6 - 35.
Operating elements on the multipurpose switch, right

à Engine retarder / eddy current retarder, p. 4 - 55.
Í Indicator lamp for eddy current retarder

Lights up when the eddy current retarder is switched on; à Eddy current re-
tarder, p. 6 - 41.
Steering
d Warning light for steering circuit I

Lights up if the oil pressure in the steering circuit I decreases while driving.
Only goes out when the truck crane goes slower than ca. 10 km/h;
à p. 6 - 35.
e Warning lamp for steering circuit II

Lights up if the oil pressure in steering circuit II decreases while driving;
à p. 6 - 35.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Separate steering à Separate steering, p. 6 - 61

On / off rocker button for separate steering
Is only active when the Level adjustment system key-operated switch is on.
Press the button to switch the separate steering on and off.
When the separate steering is switched on, the steering of the third axle line
is unlocked. When the separate steering is switched off, the third axle line is
locked in the straight position.
To switch on the separate steering: Release rocker switch and press
down.
To switch off separate steering: Release rocker switch and press up.
à Separate steering, p. 6 - 61.

à Switching to separate steering, p. 6 - 62.
? "Steering unlocked" warning lamp

Lights up when all the unlocking procedures which were initiated have been
mechanically completed.
Goes out when all the locking procedures which were initiated have been
Flashes when the unlocking procedures which were initiated have not all
been completed.
Rocker button for separate steering

Steers the wheels of the third and fourth axle lines
To turn to the left: Press the rocker button to the left
To turn to the right: Press the rocker button to the right
à p. 6 - 63
Hydraulic system
g Indicator lamps for hydraulic oil return filters I and II

The relevant lamp lights up when the filter is soiled and the filter cartridge
needs to be changed.
To exchange the filter cartridges; à
Maintenance manual.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Suspension
u Rocker switch for suspension locking system

Locks all suspension cylinders in the current position.
To switch on: Press rocker switch down;à p. 13 - 42.

To switch off: Press rocker switch up; à p. 6 - 10.
u Indicator lamp for suspension locking system

Lights up if the suspension is locked.
Goes out if suspension locking system is released;
à p. 6 - 10.
Suspension operating pressure status display

The display is only available with additional
equipment. Displays the operating pressure in
the suspension groups on the individual axle
lines.
1 Operating pressure suspension, left-

hand side, first and second axle lines
2 Operating pressure suspension, right-
hand side, first and second axle lines
3 Operating pressure suspension, left-
hand side, third and fourth axle lines
4 Operating pressure suspension, right-
hand side, third and fourth axle lines
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Electrics
Ignition lock
à Ignition lock, p. 4 - 53.
q Charge warning lamp

Lights up if the ignition is switched on and the diesel engine is stationary;
à p. 5 - 11. Goes out after the diesel engine is started; à
p. 5 - 17.
! Rocker switch for parking light / headlight

To turn off the light: Press rocker switch up
Parking light: Put rocker switch in middle position
Headlight: Press rocker switch down
When the headlight is switched on, you can switch between low-beam and
high-beam using the Left-hand multipurpose switch; à
p. 4 - 55.
The instrument lighting is switched on with the parking light / headlight.
Ê Rocker switch with indicator lamp for the fog light and fog tail light (addi-
tional equipment)
The fog tail light and the fog lights may only be switched on with low-beam
headlight.
To switch fog light / fog Press rocker switch up
tail light off:
To switch fog light on: Put rocker switch in middle position
Switch fog light / fog tail Press rocker switch down
light on:
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up when the fog tail light is
switched on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
k Rocker switch with indicator lamp for hazard warning system

The indicator lamp in the rocker switch flashes.
Does not flash if a lamp element in the turn-
signal indicator is defective.
r Rocker switch with indicator lamp for rotating beacons

The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights
up.
Operating elements on the Left-hand multipurpose switch

à Multipurpose switch, left, p. 4 - 55.
i Turn signal indicator lamp

Flashes when the turn signal indicator is switched on.
Does not flash if a lamp element in the turnsignal indicator is defective.
j Indicator lamp for trailer turn signal (additional equipment)

Flashes when the turn signal indicator is switched on and a trailer is col-
lected to the electrical system.
If a trailer is not connected to the electrics, the indicator lamp flashes once
when the turn signal indicator is switched on.
Does not flash if a lamp element in the turnsignal indicator is defective.
@ Indicator lamp for full-beam headlight

This lights up when full-beam headlight is switched on.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
[ Collective warning light for the carrier electronics

This is only active when the ignition in the driver's cab is switched on.
Flashes if there is a malfunction in the carrier electronics.
An error message will be saved at the same time. The error message can be
read
– On the superstructure, on the Crane control display
– At the switch boxes for the Outriggers / electronic level / outrigger pressure dis-
play in the case of additional equipment.
The collective warning light goes out if the malfunction in the carrier elec-
tronics has been corrected.
à Malfunctions to the carrier electronic system, p. 8 - 45.
Combination button for mirror setting

This is rotated to preselect a wing mirror. The
arrow on the combination button (1) indicates
the preselected mirror (to the right or to the
left).
Press the combination button in the desired
direction (2 to 5) to set the preselected wing
mirror.
The different directions are as follows:
2 Move mirror to the right

3 Move mirror downwards
4 Move mirror to the left
5 Move mirror upwards
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Level adjustment à Level adjustment system, p. 6 - 56.

system
Level adjustment system key-operated switch
To switch on: Insert the key in the switch.

Turn the key to the right, push in the switch and turn
the key to the left. The switch engages.
The following operating elements are released:
– Rocker switch for transverse differential locks
– Rocker switch for longitudinal differential lock / drive of
the 2nd axle line
– Rocker switch for Separate steering on / off
– Switch/button for the level adjustment system
Gear shifts are executed depending on the shift posi-

tion.
The transmission shifts up to 6th gear maximum.
To switch off: Turn the key to the right – the switch disengages,
remove the key
The following gear shifts are executed – regardless of
the positions of the corresponding rocker switch:
– Transverse differential locks off
– Longitudinal differential lock / drive of the 2nd axle
line off.
: Rocker switch for raising / lowering vehicle level

Used to preselect the vertical direction of movement for the rocker buttons
Level adjustment left / forward / backward / right
To raise the vehicle level: Press rocker switch up.
To lower the vehicle level: Press rocker switch down.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8 Indicator lamp for raising vehicle level

Lights up if the Raise / lower vehicle level rocker switch has been pressed up.
9 Indicator lamp for lowering vehicle level

Lights up if the Raise / lower vehicle level rocker switch has been pressed
down.
6897 Rocker button for left / forward / backward / right level adjustment
The rocker buttons are only active when the suspension locking system is
switched off.
Raises or lowers the truck crane to the front, left, back or right (depending
on the position of the Raise / lower vehicle level rocker switch).
{ "Not on-road level" indicator lamp

Is only active when the Level adjustment system key-operated switch is
switched on and the On-road level rocker button is pressed simultaneously.
Used to indicate on-road level.
Indicator lamp lit: On-road level not reached
Indicator lamp goes out : On-road level reached
{ Rocker button for on-road level

The rocker button is only active when the suspension locking system is
switched off.
To switch on: Press rocker button down, until on-road level
is reached. The Not on-road level indicator lamp
goes out when the truck crane has reached on-
road level.
| Rocker button for raising / lowering truck crane

The rocker buttons are only active when the suspension locking system is
switched off.
To raise the truck crane: Press rocker button up.
To lower the truck crane: Press rocker button down.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Tachograph The GMK 4080-1 truck crane is only equipped with a tachograph if it is de-
livered to member states of the EU; à
Tachograph, p. 6 - 17.
The following buttons are for adjusting the clock and are not described
further in these operating instructions.
G Button for time setting menu

Used to call up the menu for setting the time.
H Button for setting the minutes +

Used to set the time forward by a maximum of two minutes.
I Button for setting the minutes -

Used to reverse the time by a maximum of two minutes.
For further information on these buttons; à
Operating instructions of the Ta-
chograph manufacturer. Major correction of the time setting can only be car-
ried out by the tachograph manufacturer.
Speedometer Speed indicator

insert
Shows the current driving speed:
– In km/h on the outer scale
– In mph on the inner scale
Speedometer display
The display is only active when the ignition is switched on.
The total distance travelled is shown in the top line. The last digit represents
stretches of 100 m-.
The bottom line shows the time or, alternatively, the kilometers covered
that day. The display in the bottom line is switched over using the Display
time / day's kilometer push-button.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Time / day's kilometers display push-button

The push-button has two functions:
– To switch the display in the Speedometer display between time and day's
kilometer counter
– Resetting the day's kilometer counter to zero.
Switch over the display: Press the push-button briefly and let it go
again.
The display switches between time and day's
kilometers.
Reset the day's kilometers 1. Switch over to day's kilometers.
to zero:
2. Press the push-button for longer than
2 seconds.
The day's kilometers display will be set to
zero.
Tachograph malfunction warning lamp

This warning lamp is only available on truck cranes that are equipped with
a tachograph.
Lights up when a malfunction is recognized in the Speedometer / tachograph
system.
At the same time, an error code will be displayed on the Tachograph display;
à Tachograph malfunctions, p. 8 - 43.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Heating system à Heating, p. 6 - 65.

Air vent with air flow regulator
1 Adjustable ventilation grid
2 Air flow regulator
à p. 6 - 66.
Recirculated / fresh air regulator

Used to regulate between fresh air mode and recirculated air mode
Fresh air mode: Regulator to symbol (2)
Recirculated air mode: Regulator to symbol (1)
Mixed air: Regulator in intermediate position
Air temperature regulator

To set the temperature of the air emitted from the heating system
Warmer: Regulator in the direction of symbol (1)
Cooler: Regulator in the direction of symbol (2)
Knob switch for upper fan

For switching on or off the blower which supplies the top air vents
To turn on the blower: Turn the rotary switch (1) clockwise; it engages at
three different positions
To turn off the blower: Turn the rotary switch (1) anti-clockwise as far as it
will go
Knob switch for lower fan

For switching on or off the blower which supplies the botttom air vents
To turn on the blower: Turn the rotary switch (1) clockwise; it engages at
three different positions
To turn off the blower: Turn the rotary switch (1) anti-clockwise as far as it
will go
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Air-conditioning The folding berth is only available with additional equipment; à Air-condi-
system tioning system, p. 6 - 75.
Air-conditioning on / off rocker button

Used to switch the air-conditioning system on and off.
To switch on: Press rocker switch (1) down.
To switch off: Press rocker switch (1) up.
Auxiliary heater The auxiliary heater with timer is only available with additional equipment.
with timer This section only describes the operating elements on the auxiliary heater
insert. To set the air distribution between the air vents, use the heating sys-
tem's Air distribution rotary switch; à p. 6 - 69.
Display field for auxiliary heater

Shows the time, selected storage locations for the automatic heating start
and displays values as they are entered; à
Saving automatic heating start,
p. 6 - 72.
w Push-button for setting time / day

When pressed with ignition switched on, activates the input menu for time
and weekday; àSetting the time and weekday, p. 6 - 71.
When pressed with ignition switched off, activates display of the current
time on the Auxiliary heater display.
v Push-button for switching the auxiliary heater on / off

For switching the auxiliary heater on and off manually. If the auxiliary heater
is switched off, it can be switched on by pressing the push-button once. If
the auxiliary heater is switched on, it can be switched off by pressing the
push-button once.
As soon as the auxiliary heater is switched on, the fan will run at level 1;
à Switching on the auxiliary heating system, p. 6 - 70.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
u Push-button for calling up storage locations

Used to retrieve stored weekdays and times for automatic heating start.
There are three storage locations.
After the button is pressed, the storage location retrieved will flash for five
seconds in the Auxiliary heater display, along with the time and weekday of
the automatic heating start. Then the display switches back to the current
time and displays the retrieved storage location. The heating start switched
on is always that of the storage location displayed.
By pressing the push-button again, all storage locations are retrieved and
displayed one after the other. If no storage location is displayed, the auto-
matic heating start is switched off; àSaving automatic heating start, p. 6 - 72.
s Input – push-button
Used to ente values when the Auxiliary heater display is flashing (when
storing an automatic heating start and when setting the time). The flashing
value counts down each time the button is pressed.
If the button is held down for more than two seconds, it switches to fast
mode, and the value counts down continuously.
If the button is held down for longer than three seconds with the auxiliary
heater switched off, the automatic heating duration which has been set will
flash and can be adjusted; à
Setting automatic heating duration, p. 6 - 73.
t Input + push-button
For entering values when the Auxiliary heater display is flashing, for storing
an automatic heating start and for setting the time. The flashing value
increases each time the button is pressed.
mode and the value increases continuously.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diagnostics plug The diagnostics operating elements for the diesel engine, gear system and
carrier electronics may only be operated by service personnel from the en-
gine or gear system manufacturers or by CraneCARE.
• Remove the shelf (4).

The following diagnostics plugs are used by
the service personnel to connect measuring
instruments.
1 Diesel engine diagnostics plug

2 Transmission diagnostics plug
3 Carrier electronics diagnostics plug
Other operating
elements
3 Rocker switch with lock button for driving mode / crane operation
Only switch from Driving mode to Crane operation and vice versa when the en-
gine is switched off.
The rocker switch may only be pressed up or down if the lock button is
pushed down simultaneously.
Driving mode: Press rocker switch up.

All driving functions may only be operated from inside
the driver's cab; à p. 6 - 8.
Crane operation: Press rocker switch down.
All crane functions can be operated from the crane cab.
The driving functions “service brake”, “vehicle parking
brake”, “shift transmission”, “steering”, “separate
steering”, “transverse differential locks”, “longitudinal
differential lock / second axle line drive” can only be
operated from the crane cab; à
p. 12 - 21.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
w Warning light for driver's cab locking system

The warning lamp is only available with additional equipment with a
driver's cab which can be tipped hydraulically.
Lights up when the driver's cab locking system is open.
Goes out when the driver's cab locking system is engaged.
à Lowering the driver's cab, p. 8 - 22.
G Rocker switch for outrigger lighting

Used to switch on the spotlight which is fitted to the outrigger box in the
case of additional equipment.
To switch on: Press rocker switch down
To switch off: Press rocker switch up
3 "Boom not set down" warning lamp

The warning lamp is only available as additional equipment. Lights up if the
boom is not in the boom rest and the ignition is switched on.
A warning buzzer sounds at the same time. The warning lamp and buzzer
indicate that the vehicle height given in the driver's cab is exceeded at on-
road level; à p. 6 - 12.
Dual tank push-button and indicator lamp

1 Dual tank control
– On: Fuel supply from the dual tank
– Off: Fuel supply from the standard tank
2 Change over the fuel

– Press once: Fuel supply is changed over
à Operation if equipped with dual tank, p. 5 - 23
Soot particle filter control

1 Yellow lamp lights up: Early warning: clean soot particle filtering
system
2 Orange lamp lights up: Clean / replace soot particle filtering
system; Maintenance Manual.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.2.2 On the steering column
Ignition lock à Switching on the ignition, p. 5 - 11.

0 Ignition off, diesel engine off, key can be removed
1 Power supply on for:
Heating, diesel engine / transmission diagnostics, radio / telephone
(additional equipment)
2 Ignition on
3 Starting position
Multipurpose Used to carry out the following functions:

switch, right
– Setting the idling speed
– Setting the Tempomat
– Setting the Temposet
– Switching on the engine brake / eddy current retarder.
Different functions are carried out by activating the multipurpose switch in
the same way. Which function is active depends on whether the vehicle is
standing, moving or whether the engine brake is switched on.
Setting the idling speed
This multipurpose switch function is only ac-

tive when the vehicle is stationary.
1 (push up- Increase the idling speed

wards):
2 (push down- Decrease the idling speed
wards):
3 push (for- Switch off the engine
wards): speed adjustment
Pushing in direction 1 or 2 will change the

engine speed by 20 rpm.
Holding the switch down will produce contin-
ual changes in engine speed; à
Setting the
idling speed, p. 5 - 15.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Setting the Tempomat

Further information on the operation of the Tempomat; à p. 6 - 43.
This multipurpose switch function is only
active when the vehicle is moving at a mini-
mum speed of 15 km/h.
Tempomat Push once in direction (1)

To switch on: or (2).
After switching on the Tempomat, the current

speed will be saved and kept as the set value.
1 (push upwards): Increase the set value

2 (push downwards): Decrease the set
value
3 push (forwards): Switch off the
Tempomat
Pushing in direction 1 or 2 will increase the set value by 0.5 km/h. Holding
the switch down will produce continual changes.
Setting the Temposet

Further information on the operation of the Temposet; à p. 6 - 45.
This is used to limit the maximum speed from
15 km/h.
4 Press the Tem- Temposet activated,

poset on button the current speed is
once: set as the upper limit.
3 Push (forwards) Temposet switched off
2 x:
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Engine retarder / eddy current retarder

The eddy current retarder is only available as additional equipment.
à Engine retarder, p. 6 - 40.
à Eddy current retarder, p. 6 - 41.
Direction of switching 5.1 to 5.4 = to the rear
5.0 Switched off (home position, front)

5.1 Engine retarder, level 1
Eddy current retarder, level 1
Í When the eddy current retarder is switched on, the Eddy current retarder in-
dicator lamp will light up.
Multipurpose Used to operate the lights, horn, and front windscreen wiper / washing sys-
switch, left tem.
1 Horn
2 Headlight flasher
3 Low-beam headlight
4 Full-beam headlight
5 Right turn indicator
6 Left turn indicator
7 Front windscreen washer
8 Windscreen wipers
0= Off
INT = Intervallic
I= Slow
II = Fast
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
4.2.3 Overhead in the driver's cab
Roof ventilator The roof ventilator with rocker switch is only available as additional equip-
ment.
~ Rocker switch for roof ventilator

To ventilate: Press rocker switch up.
Off: Set rocker switch to middle position.
Blow air: Press rocker switch down.
à p. 6 - 68
Roof ventilator
To close the roof ventilator: Turn handwheel to left.
To open roof ventilator: Turn handwheel to right.
à p. 6 - 68
Cab lighting Cab lighting is fitted on the driver's side and the passenger's side of the
driver's cab.
1 Cab lighting
2 Switch for interior lighting:
Pressed down at the switches on with
front: door contact
Middle position: permanently off
Pressed down at the permanently on
back:
3 Switch for reading light
4 4 Reading light
3
2
1
08.03.2006
C0721

GMK 4080-1
4.3 Other operating elements on the carrier
Keys
The truck crane carrier has the following keys:
1 Door keys / ignition key of driver's cab
Crane cab door lock
2 Key-operated switch for level adjustment
system
3 Switch boxes for the outriggers / elec-
tronic level / outrigger pressure
indicator 1)
4 Carrier covers
5 Padlock for boom floating position 1)
6 Padlock for slewing gear freewheel 1)
7 Fuel tank padlock 1)
1)
Doors
The driver's and passenger's doors of the
driver's cab may be locked from the outside
using the door key (1).
To unlock: Turn the key to the

front, in direction A.
To lock: Turn the key to the
rear, in direction B.
To open door: Press button (2).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
When the doors are closed, they can be locked

from the inside with the button.
To lock: Push knob (1) down.

To unlock: Push knob (1) up.
To open door: Pull lever (2).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Windows The windows of the driver's door and the passenger's door are opened and
closed with electric window winders.
G
Risk of crushing when closing the windows
Monitor the window and let go of the rocker button as soon as someone
reaches into or leans through the window.
If the window winder encounters resistance, it does not stop but keeps
moving with reduced power.
There are three Electric window winder rocker buttons in the driver's cab.
There are two rocker buttons on the driver's side:

1 For the window in the driver's door
2 For the window in the passenger's door.
There is one rocker button on the passenger's side:

3 For the window in the passenger's door.
All rocker buttons are operated in the same way:

To open window: Press rocker button up.
To close window: Press rocker button down.
The respective window opens or closes as long as you hold the Electric win-
dow winder rocker button pressed or until the window is completely opened
or closed.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Access ladders A ladder is fixed to the truck crane for access to the carrier.
On the left-hand side, the ladder (2) is in front

of the third axle line.
There are hand holes (1) above the access

ladders.
When the crane cab door is opened, you can
also reach the grip (3).
Ladders As well as the fixed access ladder you will find the following on the truck
crane:
– An extendable ladder
– A hook-on ladder
Extendable ladder
The extendable ladder can be transported in a
holder at the front underneath the truck crane.
• Raise the holder (4) slightly and release the
lock with the lever (3).
• Fold down the holder (4).
• Insert the retaining pins into the holder (5).
• Position the ladder with a rung (2) between
the bracket (1), so that it cannot slip to one
side.
• Fold up the holder (4) and secure it with the
lock (3).
The holder (4) can also be secured with a pad-
lock.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Ladder
There is a hook-on ladder (1) in the holder (4)
on the carrier. The hook-on ladder is secured
with a spring latch (2).
Release the hook-on ladder

• Turn the spring latch (2) to position B. The
spring latch is pulled out of the ladder beam
(3) in the process.
Securing the hook-on ladder
• Turn the spring latch (2) to position A, so
that it is pushed into the ladder beam (3).
G
Risk of ladder falling down!
Secure the ladder in the appropriate holder after each use. In this way, you
prevent the ladder from falling down during on-road driving, which could
endanger vehicles behind you or people standing at the side of the road.
The hook-on ladders can be hung into the bore

holes on the right and the left at the rear (1).
• Attach the ladder in such a way that the pegs

go as far as possible into the bore holes.
• Unfold the spacer at the bottom of the lad-
der to make the installation safe.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Front flap The front flap is equipped with two locks. For the sake of safety, only one of
the two locks can be released from the driver's cab.
Opening the front flap

• To release the front flap (4), pull the Front
flap release lever (1) in the driver's cab.
• Press the locking lever (5) to the right and
fold the front flap upwards.
• Fold the support (3) upwards and fasten it to
the retaining sheet (2).
Closing the front flap
• Raise the front flap slightly, pull the support
out of the retaining sheet and fold the front
flap down.
• Press the front flap against the driver's cab
until it audibly engages.
• Check whether the front flap is securely en-
gaged.
Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher (additional equipment) is between the driver and pas-
senger seats.
• Follow the operating instructions (1) on the fire extinguisher.

• Have the fire extinguisher serviced by trained personnel in good time be-
fore the service interval indicated on the label (2) expires.
S
Risk due to fire extinguisher not working!
Proper functioning of the fire extinguisher is no longer guaranteed once the
service interval given on the label has expired.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Folding berth The folding berth is only available with additional equipment. The folding
berth is located on the back wall of the driver's cab and is secured there with
a spring latch. To fold down the folding berth, you must incline the back rest
of the driver's and passenger's seat all the way forwards.
Folding down the folding berth
• Turn the spring latch (2) to position A, thus
drawing the spring latch out of holder (1).
• Fold the berth (3) downwards.
• Attach both of the seat belts in the retainers
(4) on the cab ceiling.
Folding up the folding berth
• Turn the spring latch (3) to position B.
• Take both seat belts out of the retainers (4)
and lay the belts on the folding berth.
• Fold up the folding berth and press it against
the cabin's rear wall, so that the spring latch
(2) audibly engages behind the holder (1).
G
Risk of accidents due to berth falling open!
Always check after folding up whether the berth is securely locked, and put
the back rest of the driver's and passenger's seat up again. In this way you
can avoid the folding berth falling open when braking, which could lead to
uncontrolled manoeuvres due to fright.
Always fold the folding berth up after every use.
When the folding berth is folded down, the elements on the side instrument
panel, which are needed for driving, are inaccessible.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
5
5 Diesel engine
5.1 Starting / turning off the diesel engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
5.1.1 CHECKLIST: Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 1
5.1.2 CHECKLIST: In winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 4
5.1.3 Checks prior to starting the vehicle engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5- 5
5.1.4 Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
5.1.5 Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
5.1.6 Checks after the diesel engine has been started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
5.2 Shutting down the diesel engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
5.2.1 Under normal circumstance with the ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
5.2.2 In an emergency situation, with the emergency stop switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
5.2.3 In an emergency, using the air intake inhibitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
5.3 Operation if equipped with dual tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
5.3.1 Checking the fuel level and refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23
5.3.2 Switching over the fuel supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.1 Starting / turning off the diesel engine
5 Diesel engine
5.1.1 CHECKLIST: Starting the diesel engine
H
This checklist is not a complete instruction manual. There are accompany-
ing instructions which are indicated by cross-references.
Observe the warning and safety instructions given there.
1. Check if the shut-off valves for the hydraulic system are opened;
à Checking the shut-off valves in the hydraulic system, p. 5 - 5.
2. Check the coolant level of the diesel engine; à Checking the coolant level,
p. 5 - 6.
3. Check the oil level in the hydraulic system; à Checking the hydraulic oil
level, p. 5 - 7.
4. Switch on the battery master switch; à Switching on the battery master

switch, p. 5 - 5.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5. Check diesel engine oil level; à Checking the diesel engine oil level,
p. 5 - 8.
6. Check whether the parking brake is locked (parking brake lever points
toward the rear).
3 7. Check whether the Driving / Crane operation rocker switch is switched up-
wards, in Driving position; à
p. 5 - 11.
8. Turn on ignition and check instruments; à Switching on the ignition,

p. 5 - 11.
9. Check the level of the fuel tank; àRefuelling, p. 5 - 10.

Check the level of the dual tank with additional equipment;
à Refuelling, p. 5 - 24.
C0013
10. Switch the Transmission rotary switch to neutral position N;

à Switching on, p. 6 - 23.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
z 11. If equipped with flame start system, wait until the Flame start system in-
dicator lamp goes out.
12. Start the diesel engine; à Starting the diesel engine, p. 5 - 13.
13. Check the instruments with the diesel engine running; à Checking
instruments, p. 5 - 17.
14. When the temperature is low, also refer to the checklist;

à CHECKLIST: In winter, p. 5 - 4.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.1.2 CHECKLIST: In winter
Observe these additional points when using the truck crane in winter:
1. Fuel and engine oil must comply with the specifications given in the
supplied diesel engine manufacturer operating instructions for the re-
spective external temperatures.
2. The engine coolant must contain sufficient antifreeze (see supplied

diesel engine manufacturer's operating instructions).
3. The windscreen washing system must contain sufficient antifreeze;

à Checking the reservoir of the windscreen washing system, p. 6 - 7.
4. The diesel engine can be pre-warmed by the engine-independent aux-

iliary water heating system; à
Auxiliary heater with timer, p. 6 - 69.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.1.3 Checks prior to starting the vehicle engine
Checking the shut- All four shut-off valves in the hydraulic system suction lines must be open
off valves in the before the diesel engine is started.
hydraulic system
S
Risk of damage to the hydraulic pumps!
The diesel engine may only be started if all of the four shut-off valves in the
suction lines of the hydraulic pumps are open.
The shut-off valves are open when the handles are parallel to the suction
lines.
The shut-off valves (1) are at the front right at

the hydraulic tank and are each secured with a
spring latch (2).
The illustration shows the opened position.
• Check whether the shut-off valves (1) are

open, and open any shut-off valves which
are closed.
Opening the shut-off valve
• Pull out the spring latch (2) as far as
possible.
• Turn the handle in parallel to the line.
• Let the spring latch engage again.
Switching on the The battery master switch is on the right, behind the steps of the access lad-
battery master der.
switch
• Switch on the battery master switch (1).
The battery master switch is switched on if the
selector handle cannot be pulled off.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Checking the cool- The coolant reservoir is located on the left-hand side of the carrier behind
ant level the driver's cab.
G
Risk of scalding when the cooling circuit is hot
The hot coolant circuit is under pressure. If you open the expansion tank
while the cooling circuit is hot, you can burn yourself on the hot steam and
possibly the hot coolant which escapes.
Wear appropriate protective gloves and cover the plug on the expansion
tank with a rag before you open it.
Turn the lid slowly to the first detent in order to allow the excess pressure
to be released.
• Do not open the pressure relief valve (2) on

the side of the expansion tank.
• Loosen (do not open!) the cap on the filling
hole (1) when the coolant is at operating
temperature, to release the pressure.
• Open the cap (1).
The coolant must reach the lower edge of
the pipe in the filler neck.
If the coolant level is too low:
• Top up the coolant.
See the crane engine operating instructions
for the composition of the coolant.
• Screw the filling hole cap (1) as tight as
possible.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Checking the hy- Check the level of the hydraulic oil tank daily before commencing work.
draulic oil level
In order to check the oil level
– The truck crane must be aligned horizontally
– The outriggers must be retracted
– The truck crane must be at on-road level.
The inspection glass (1) is found on the left in

front of the third axle line.
• Check the filling level of the hydraulic oil
tank.
The hydraulic oil should be visible in the
centre of the inspection glass (1) when cold.
If the level is too low, top up the hydraulic oil;
à Maintenance manual.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Checking the Check the oil level in the diesel engine daily before commencing work.
diesel engine oil The truck crane must be on a horizontal surface when the oil is checked.
level
• Start the diesel engine and monitor the Diesel engine oil pressure warning
lamp.
S
Damage may occur to the engine if the oil pressure is too low!
If the Diesel engine oil pressure warning lamp has not gone out after 10 sec-
onds, switch off the diesel engine and look for the cause; à
Malfunctions
to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
• Allow the diesel engine to run at idling speed for 2-3 minutes.
• Turn off the diesel engine.
• Check the oil level after approx. 2 minutes.
G
Risk of burning yourself at the hot exhaust system!
You have to reach between the back of the driver's cab and the exhaust sys-
tem to access the dipstick. Make sure you do not touch the hot exhaust sys-
tem.
The oil dipstick for the diesel engine is on the

left-hand side, in front of the boom rest.
• Pull out the oil dipstick (1).
The oil level must be between min and max
(arrow marks).
• Put the dipstick into the dipstick tube after

checking the oil level.
Top up the engine oil if necessary, à Topping
up engine oil, p. 5 - 9.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Topping up For details regarding required oil specifications, refer to the diesel engine
engine oil operating instructions.
The oil filler (1) for the diesel engine is located
at the front right on the carrier, next to the
charge air cooler.
• Refill the engine oil through the filler neck

(1).
S
Damage may occur to the engine if the oil level is too high
Do not put in too much oil. The oil level must not exceed the upper arrow
mark (max). Drain oil if necessary; à
Operating instructions of the diesel motor
manufacturer.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.1.4 Refuelling
Monitor the fuel gauge. Refuel with diesel in good time.
C0013
G
Risk of fire due to flammable gases!
Switch off the diesel engine, the heater and all additional heating devices
before refuelling.
The fuel tank is at the rear at the carrier

(capacity of approx.) 400 l).
• When refuelling, attach the ladder (2) at the
rear right of the carrier; à p. 4 - 61.
Data concerning the prescribed fuel
specifications can be found in the diesel
engine manufacturer's operating instructions
provided.
• Fill in the fuel through the filler neck (1).
• Screw the sealing cover back onto the filler
neck (1) after refuelling.
G
Risk of accidents if the fuel tank is not closed!
Screw the cap back on after each refuelling.
In this way you prevent vehicles behind you from being endangered by the
cap falling off or fuel escaping.
H
Also fill the fuel tank for the crane operator's cab heating system. Informa-
tion about the position and the fuel filter specification; à
Fuel tank level,
p. 12 - 10.
H
With additional equipment, also check the fuel supply at the dual tank and
à
refill it with fuel if necessary; Checking the fuel level and refuelling, p. 5 - 23.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.1.5 Starting the diesel engine
Switching on the This section describes only how to start the diesel engine from the driver's
ignition cab. You can also start the diesel engine from the hand-held control;
à With the hand-held control, p. 13 - 29.
H
The ignition can only be switched on, if the bridging plug has been inserted
in all sockets for hand-held control; à Connections for hand-held control,
p. 4 - 24.
• Before switching on the ignition, check if the driving mode is switched on:
3 The Driving mode / Crane operation rocker switch must be pressed up in the
Driving mode position.
• Switch the Transmission rotary switch to the neutral position N;

à Switching on, p. 6 - 23.
You can only start the diesel engine in this shift position.
• Turn on the ignition. To do this, insert the ignition key into the ignition
lock as far as it will go and turn it to position 2.
S
Risk of damage due to faulty warning lamps!
When starting the ignition or the diesel engine, indicator lamps which serve
as warning lamps for functions that fail during operation are tested.
Replace any defective lamps immediately.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
The following indicator and warning lamps must light up:
L Diesel engine oil pressure
q Battery charge indicator
f Vehicle parking brake
de Steering circuit I and steering circuit II
l If the supply pressure in the brake circuits decreases to below 5 bar, the Sup-
ply pressure brake circuits I and II warning lamp will also light up.
xy ABS and with additional equipment in towing mode also ABS trailer
‡ Engine electronic system
z The Flame start system indicator lamp (additional equipment) will light up.
The temperature of the diesel engine determines when the lamp will go out;
à p. 5 - 14.
u If the Suspension locking system indicator lamp lights up even though the Sus-
pension locking system rocker switch is pressed up (switched off), the air pres-
sure in the secondary consumer circuit is too low.
H
The Suspension locking system indicator lamp does not show the switching
state of the Suspension locking system rocker switch, but rather the actual sta-
tus of the suspension locking system. For this reason, check the position of
the Suspension locking system rocker switch before starting the vehicle engine,
à p. 6 - 10. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Starting the diesel Refer to the enclosed diesel engine manufacturer's operating instructions
engine for diesel engine operation.
• Check whether the vehicle parking brake is locked.

If the brake is locked, the parking brake lever will point to the rear.
H
If the diesel engine of your truck crane is equipped with a flame start system
(additional equipment); à Starting a cold diesel engine with the flame start sys-
tem (additional equipment), p. 5 - 14.
Starting the diesel engine (without flame start system)

This section applies to the starting of warm and cold vehicle engines.
S
Risk of explosions when using starter fuel!
A warm diesel engine must never be started using starter fuel (e.g. starter
spray). Starter fuel sprayed into the suction unit can ignite.
• Do not press the accelerator.

• Turn the ignition key to position 3 and hold it there until the diesel engine
starts.
• Release the ignition key after the diesel engine starts up.
If the engine does not start, abort the starting procedure after approx.
15 seconds and wait one minute before attempting to start the engine
again.
à Malfunctions to the diesel

H
If the engine fails to start after several attempts;
engine, p. 8 - 37.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Starting a cold diesel engine with the flame start system (additional equip-
ment)
If the temperature of the coolant is low, the flame start system heats the
suction air of the diesel engine by burning fuel in the suction line.
S
Danger of explosions when using starter fuel!
The diesel engine must never be started using starter fuel (e.g. starter
z The flame start system is activated every time the ignition is started:
– When the diesel engine is warm, the Flame start system indicator lamp will
light up only briefly (2 to 3 seconds). The engine can be started immedi-
ately: you do not have to wait for the indicator lamp to go out.
– When the diesel engine is cold, the Flame start system indicator lamp will
light up for up to 20 seconds depending on the coolant temperature. The
engine can be started as soon as the indicator lamp goes out. The engine
should be started up within the next 30 seconds.
H
If the Flame start system indicator lamp does not go out after ca. 20 seconds,
there is a malfunction in the flame start system; à Malfunctions to the diesel
engine, p. 8 - 37.
• Wait until the Flame start system indicator lamp goes out.
z If you start the diesel engine when the temperature of the coolant is low,
the vehicle engine will emit smoke for a while after start-up.
• Do not press the accelerator.
starts.
• If the engine does not start, abort the starting procedure after approx.
again.
zH If the engine is cold and switched off but the ignition has been switched on
a while you must first switch off the ignition briefly and switch it back on
again to reactivate the flame start system before starting the engine. If the
engine fails to start after several attempts;à Malfunctions to the diesel
engine, p. 8 - 37.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Setting the idling After starting the diesel engine, adjust the idling speed in relation to the
speed coolant temperature. If necessary, the idling speed can be increased up to
about 200 rpm.
The idling speed is increased with the Right-hand multipurpose switch.
H
This multipurpose switch function is only active when the vehicle is station-
ary.
Increasing the idling speed:
(1) Push upwards The speed increases by

once: 20 rpm.
(1) Pull upwards The engine speed in-
and hold: creases continuously.
Decreasing the idling speed:
(2) Push downwards The speed decreases

once: by 20 rpm.
(2) Push down and The engine speed de-
hold: creases continuously.
Switching off engine speed change:

Manually: Push the multipurpose switch forward once (3).
Automatically: Start the truck crane and accelerate over 20 km/h .
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.1.6 Checks after the diesel engine has been started
Checking The following indicator and warning lamps must go out when the engine
instruments is running:
• Observe the Diesel engine oil pressure warning lamp immediately after start-
L ing the diesel engine.
S
Risk of damage to the engine!
If the Diesel engine oil pressure warning light does not go out after about
10 seconds, switch the engine off. Too low an oil pressure on a running
diesel engine may cause damage to the engine.
If the oil pressure does not increase after 10 seconds and the Diesel engine oil
pressure warning lamp does not go out, switch off the engine by turning the
ignition key to position 0; à Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
q Battery charge indicator
H
If the Charge indicator warning lamp does not light up, the alternator will not
generate any charging current when the vehicle engine is running. Switch
the diesel engine off and look for the cause; àMalfunctions to the diesel en-
gine, p. 8 - 37.
de Steering circuit I and Steering circuit II
H
The Steering circuit I warning lamp goes out only when the truck crane is
moving at around 10 km/h.
G
Risk of accidents due to truck crane steering not functioning!
If one or both warning lamps Steering circuit I or II do not go out, follow the
information in Section Monitoring the control instruments while driving,
p. 6 - 34.
‡ Engine's electronic system

If the Engine electronic system warning lamp does not go out when the diesel
engine is running, switch off the ignition, wait at least 5 seconds, and restart
the diesel engine. If the warning lamp still lights up; à Malfunctions to the
08.03.2006
diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
s
GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Monitor the following indicator lamps (also while driving):
p – Diesel engine air filter
t – Diesel engine coolant level
g – Hydraulic oil return filter I and Hydraulic oil return filter II
xy – ABS and with additional equipment in towing mode also ABS trailer
z – Flame start system (additional equipment)
L – Diesel engine oil pressure

If the Diesel engine oil pressure warning lamp goes on, stop the truck crane
as quickly as possible and look for the cause; à Malfunctions to the diesel
engine, p. 8 - 37.
H
If one of the indicator lamps listed lights up: remedial measures
à Malfunctions in driving mode, p. 8 - 1.
à Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.2 Shutting down the diesel engine
5.2.1 Under normal circumstance with the ignition lock
G
Turn off the diesel engine only when the truck crane is at a standstill. If you
remove the ignition key, the steering will lock and you will lose control of
the truck crane if it is moving.
If the temperature of the coolant is still very high (e.g. after mountain pass
driving), let the diesel engine run for another one or two minutes at in-
creased idling speed.
• To turn off, turn the ignition key to position 0 and pull it out.
H
To park the truck crane, please observe section; Parking the truck crane,
p. 6 - 46.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.2.2 In an emergency situation, with the emergency stop switch
In an emergency, when the diesel engine

cannot be switched off with the ignition key,
you can also turn off the engine outside the
driver's cab.
There is a Diesel engine emergency stop switch
(1, 2) in the access ladders on both sides of the
carrier.
• Press one of the two Diesel engine emergency
stop switches. The switch will engage.
or
• Press the emergency stop switch when the
hand-held control is connected (3). The
switch will engage.
The diesel engine turns off.
Resetting the emergency stop switch

You can only restart the diesel engine if you have reversed the emergency
stop switch.
• Switch off the ignition.
• Turn the actuated Diesel engine emergency stop switch until it disengages.
If an air intake inhibitor is fitted, it must be loosened; à Releasing the air in-
take inhibitor manually, p. 5 - 22.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.2.3 In an emergency, using the air intake inhibitor
If the truck crane is additionally equipped with an air intake lock, you can
also switch off the engine in an emergency when the air contains combus-
tible gases.
If you switch on the air intake inhibitor, a gate will shut the air intake line of
the diesel engine, killing the engine.
Switching on the The air intake lock is switched on outside the driver's cab, via the Diesel en-
air intake inhibitor gine emergency stop switch.
• Press one of the two Diesel engine emergency

stop switches (1, 2). The switch will engage.
or
• Press the emergency stop switch when the
hand-held control is connected (3).
The switch will engage.
The cap in the air intake line shuts and the
diesel engine switches off.
H
You can only restart the diesel engine after you have reversed the emer-
gency stop switch and released the air intake inhibitor manually.
à Releasing the air intake inhibitor manually, p. 5 - 22.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Releasing the air • Switch off the ignition.

intake inhibitor
• Turn the actuated Diesel engine emergency stop switch until it disengages;
manually
à Resetting the emergency stop switch, p. 5 - 20.
• Open the locks (hexagon socket spanner) on
the two middle cover plates (3) and remove
the cover plates.
The air intake inhibitor (1) is located at the
intake stub pipe of the diesel engine in front of
the pipe to the air filter.
When the air intake inhibitor is switched on,
the lever (2) is in position B.
• Turn the lever (2) clockwise as far as it will

go.
The lever (2) goes as far as position A. The air

intake inhibitor is released in this position.
You can switch on the air intake inhibitor man-

ually using the lever (1).
• Place the two middle cover plates (3) back

onto the carrier and secure them with locks.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.3 Operation if equipped with dual tank

As additional equipment, the GMK 4080-1 can be rigged with a dual tank. In
doing so, a second fuel tank (the dual tank) is installed on the carrier, in ad-
dition to the standard fuel tank.
Under certain circumstances the fuel supply can be switched between the
standard fuel tank and the dual tank.
In this way, it is possible to operate the truck crane in driving mode and
crane operation mode with different types of fuel, provided this complies
with the local regulations in the country in which you are working.
H
The weight of the dual tank and the additional fuel has not been taken into
account for the driving mode tables and the specified axle loads for driving
with rigged truck crane.
5.3.1 Checking the fuel level and refuelling
Checking the fuel The fuel level displays in the driver's cab and crane cab only apply to stan-
level dard fuel tanks.
The dual tank is at the rear, at the centre, under

the plate (2).
There is an inspection glass (1) at the dual
tank, which is used to check the level.
• Check whether there is sufficient fuel at the

inspection glass (1) before starting work and
during work breaks.
The level display of the inspection glass is not
linear due to the shape of the tank.
The dual tank is therefore only filled up to a
third (about 44 l ) if the level is at the centre of
the inspection glass.
Never allow the fuel tank to run completely

empty! Refuel with appropriate fuel in good
time; à p. 5 - 24.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Refuelling • Always use a funnel and filter when refuelling.

Data for the prescribed fuel specifications can be found in the diesel engine
operating instructions supplied.
G
Risk of fire due to flammable gases!
Switch off the diesel engine, crane cab heater and all additional heating de-
vices before refuelling.
The filler neck (1) of the dual tank (capacity of

about 125 l) is at the rear of the carrier.
Data concerning the prescribed fuel
specifications can be found in the diesel
engine manufacturer's operating instructions
provided.
• When refuelling, attach the ladder (2) at the
rear right of the carrier; à p. 4 - 61.
• Fill in the fuel through the filler neck (1).
• Screw the sealing cover back onto the filler
neck (1) after refuelling.
G
Risk of accidents if the fuel tank is not closed!
Screw the cap back on after each refuelling.
In this way you prevent vehicles behind you from being endangered by the
cap falling off or fuel escaping.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
5.3.2 Switching over the fuel supply
You can switch the fuel supply between the standard fuel tank and the dual
tank. The Dual tank indicator lamp indicates the fuel tank in use.
– The standard fuel tank is in use if the Dual tank indicator lamp (1) is out.
– The dual tank is in use if the Dual tank indicator lamp (1) is on.
Switching to dual You can switch to the dual tank if the truck crane is driving at a speed lower
tank than 10 km/h or is stationary.
• Start the diesel engine.

• Press the Dual tank button (2).
• Keep pressing the button (2) until the Dual
tank indicator lamp (1) flashes.
The Dual tank indicator lamp (1) goes on if the
dual tank is selected.
The diesel engine is now supplied with fuel
from the dual tank.
You can view the sucked in fuel at the inspec-
tion glasses (3) on the right behind the driver's
cab. The fuel used in the dual tank is usually
coloured.
The dual tank remains switched on until

– The truck crane is driving quicker than 10 km/h or
– You switch to the standard fuel tank; à p. 5 - 26.
The dual tank remains switched on after a restart from the driver's cab, from
the hand-held control or from the crane cab.
à p. 8 - 39.
H
If the switch-over procedures are not carried out;
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine
Switching to the The standard fuel tank is automatically switched to if the truck crane is
fuel tank driven quicker than 10 km/h.
You can also switch manually to the standard fuel tank however, e.g. in the
event of a insufficient fuel in the dual tank.

• Press the Dual tank button (2).
• Keep pressing the button (2) until the Dual
tank indicator lamp (1) goes out.
The diesel engine is now supplied with fuel
from the standard fuel tank.
You can view the sucked in (uncoloured) fuel
at the inspection glasses (3) on the right be-
hind the driver's cab.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6
6.1 Inspections and adjustments before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
6.1.1 CHECKLIST: Condition of the truck crane for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 1
6.1.2 Checking the condition of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 7
6.1.3 Adjusting the seat and the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
6.1.4 Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
6.2 General operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23
6.2.1 Operating the transmission with automatic gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 23
6.2.2 Monitoring the control instruments while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 34
6.2.3 Driving downhill. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 38
6.2.4 Driving uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 42
6.2.5 Tempomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 43
6.2.6 Temposet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 45
6.2.7 Parking the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 46
6.3 Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49
6.3.1 Off-road gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 50
6.3.2 Longitudinal differential locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 52
6.3.3 Transverse differential locks in all driven axle lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 54
6.3.4 Level adjustment system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 56
6.3.5 Freeing an immobilized truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6- 59
6.4 Separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
6.4.1 Switching to separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 62
6.4.2 Steering the third and fourth axle lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 62
6.4.3 Switching to normal steering mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 63
6.5 Heating and ventilating the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 65
6.5.1 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 65
6.5.2 Roof ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 68
6.5.3 Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
6.6 Air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 75
6.6.1 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 77
6.7 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 79
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Driving the truck crane
6.1 Inspections and adjustments before driving
6.1.1 CHECKLIST: Condition of the truck crane for on-road driving
H
This checklist is not a complete instruction manual. There are accompany-
ing instructions which are indicated by cross-references.
1. If the main boom is set down on a trailer for driving (only with
additional equipment):
– The anemometer has been removed; à p. 13 - 147,
– The main boom is laid on a trailer; à p. 7 - 10,
– All telescopic sections are locked,
– If additional equipment if fitted, the houselock is switched off;
à p. 12 - 17,
– The boom floating position is switched on;à p. 7 - 10,
– The slewing gear freewheel is switched on; à p. 7 - 8,
– The main boom pre-tensioner (additional equipment) should be
switched on; àp. 7 - 12,
– Switch off the Superstructure driving lights if necessary (additional
equipment); à p. 7 - 14.
2. If the boom is placed on the boom rest for driving:
– The boom is resting on the boom rest,
– All telescopic sections are interlocked; the telescoping cylinder is
locked in telescopic section I,
– The anemometer has been removed; à p. 13 - 147,
– Switch on the Superstructure driving lights if necessary (additional
equipment); à p. 7 - 14,
3 – The Boom not set down warning lamp has gone out (applies to
additional equipment); àp. 6 - 12.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
3. On the outriggers:
– All four outrigger beams are retracted and secured to prevent
extension; à
p. 13 - 55.
– The location of the outrigger pads in driving position; à p. 13 - 56.
4. All mirrors for crane operation are folded in; à Folding mirrors in and
out and adjusting them, p. 13 - 24.
With additional equipment, the slewable working area spotlight is

turned downward; à
Using the directional spotlight for the working area,
p. 12 - 144.
5. The anemometer and air traffic control light are removed;

à Anemometer and air traffic control light, p. 13 - 147.
6. Check the tyres; à Checking the tyres, p. 6 - 8.
7. Check the fluid level of the windscreen washing system;

à Checking the reservoir of the windscreen washing system, p. 6 - 7.
8. Carry out all the activities and inspections required to start the vehicle
engine; à CHECKLIST: Starting the diesel engine, p. 5 - 1, points 1 - 5.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9. Switch on ignition; à Switching on the ignition, p. 5 - 11.
3 10. Check whether the Driving / Crane operation rocker switch is switched up-
wards, in Driving position; à
Checking the change-over to driving mode,
p. 6 - 8.
w 11. With additional equipment, check whether the locking system of the
driver's cab is engaged; Lowering the driver's cab, p. 8 - 22.
12. Adjust the driver's seat; à Adjusting the driver's seat, p. 6 - 13.
13. Adjust the steering column; à Adjusting the steering column, p. 6 - 15.
14. Adjust the mirrors; à Checking the mirror settings, p. 6 - 9.
15. Insert the diagram sheet into the tachograph (only applies to truck
cranes that were delivered to member states of the EC); à
Tachograph,
p. 6 - 17.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
16. Start the diesel motor and carry out all checks; à Checks after the diesel
engine has been started, p. 5 - 17.
à Checking the electrical system, p. 6 - 9.

!DHk 17. Check the electrical system;
u 18. Check the suspension locking system. The Suspension locking system in-
dicator lamp must not be lit; à
Checking the suspension, p. 6 - 10.
à Checking the on-road level, p. 6 - 11.

{ 19. Check on-road level;
h 20. Check the transverse differential locks in all driven axle lines;
à Checking the transverse differential locks, p. 6 - 11.
à Checking the longitudinal dif-

c 21. Check the longitudinal differential locks;
ferential locks, p. 6 - 11.
à Checking the steering locks,

? 22. Check the steering locks on the axle lines;
p. 6 - 12.
23. Check the level of the fuel tank; à Refuelling, p. 5 - 10.

Check the level of the dual tank with additional equipment;
à Refuelling, p. 5 - 24.
Fill up the fuel tank for the crane cab heating if necessary; à Fuel tank
level, p. 12 - 10.
C0013
5
24. Check the compressed air and brake systems; à Checking the com-
4 6 pressed air and brake systems, p. 6 - 10.
3 7
2 8
1 9
0 bar 10
C0005
4 25. Check whether the transfer case is in on-road driving position;

à Checking the transfer case, p. 6 - 9.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
26. With 20.50 R25 tyres as additional equipment, the warning signs for the
designation of the vehicle width are folded down; à
Warning plates for
vehicle width, p. 6 - 7.
27. The detachable equipment parts are stripped down so that they fulfil
the regulations of the country in which you are working as regards
permissible weights and axle loads, lengths, widths, height etc.
Detachable equipment parts include:
– Counterweight sections; à Rigging / unrigging the counterweight,
p. 13 - 85,
– Hook blocks; à Picking up the hook block from the bumper, p. 13 - 121,
– Spare wheel; à Removing the wheel from the spare wheel holder, p. 8 - 10,
– Lattice extension; à Lattice extension operating instructions.
Sections of the equipment which need to be unrigged for a driving
mode with an axle load of max. 12 t; à
Checking the condition of the truck
crane, p. 6 - 7.
28. All additional parts such as support blocks or lifting gear are attached
securely.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.1.2 Checking the condition of the truck crane
Checking the res- The windscreen washing system reservoir is on the left behind the driver's
ervoir of the wind- cab, on the outrigger box.
screen washing
system
• Check the level of the container (2).

If the level is too low:
• Open the cap (1) and fill with water.
If possible, use a windscreen washing agent
and an appropriate antifreeze for low
temperatures.
• Close the receptacle with the cap (1).
Warning plates for With additional equipment with 20.50 R25 tyres, there is a foldable warning
vehicle width sign for the vehicle width under each side of the driver's cab (vehicle width
over 2.75 m ; à p. 9 - 2).
The warning signs (1) must be folded down to

indicate the vehicle width during on-road driv-
ing.
For off-road driving, the warning plates can be

folded up and fastened with the spring latch
(2).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Checking the tyres • Check the tyre pressure using the following table.
S
Risk of damage to the tyres!
Always check the tyre pressure in on-road driving mode and when the tyres
are cold.
The air pressure increases when the tyres become hot while driving. Never
let out the increased air pressure of tyres which are warm from driving.
Tyres Air pressure in bar

for cold tyres
14.00 R 25 10,0
16.00 R 25 9,0
20.5 R 25 7,0
• Check the condition of the tyres for damage

and by looking at the tread depth (1).
Checking the The diesel engine can also be started from the driver's cab, when the driving
change-over to mode has been switched on.
driving mode
• Check whether the driving mode is switched on. Press the Driving / Crane
3 operation rocker switch upward if necessary.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Checking the elec- • Check the function of

trical system
– The lighting and signalling devices
– The brake lights
k – The hazard warning system
D – The windscreen wipers
H – The windscreen washing system.
Checking the
transfer case
4 • Check whether the On-road gear indicator lamp is on. Switching on the on-
road gear à Switching off the off-road gear, p. 6 - 51.
Checking the The crane is equipped with several wing mirrors. Adjust the mirror relative
mirror settings to your sitting position.
Both wing mirrors (3) are adjusted electrically;

à Combination button for mirror setting,
p. 4 - 42.
1
• On the right side of the vehicle, adjust the
following manually:
2
– The wide-angle exterior mirror (2),
– The proximity mirror (1) for the field of
view right next to the vehicle at the height
of the driver's seat.
3 s
C0930
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Checking the com- • Fill the compressed-air supply in neutral gear until it reaches a cut-out
pressed air and pressure of 8.1 bar.
brake systems
l The Supply pressure brake circuits I and II warning lamp will not go out until
the pressure in the tanks has reached 5.5 bar (Supply pressure brake circuits I
and II status display).
f You may not begin driving until the air pressure in brake circuit III is suffi-
cient to release the parking brake. The releasing pressure is approx. 5.4 bar.
The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp will not go out until the wheel brakes
have been released.
G
Risk of accidents due to unchecked movement of the truck crane!
Use the service brake to stop the truck crane moving when the parking
brake is released for a functional check.
Push the parking brake lever to the back (closed) before you fill up the com-
pressed air. This way you prevent the parking brake from releasing when it
reaches the releasing pressure and the truck crane starting to move inad-
vertently.
Checking the The suspension must not be locked during on-road driving.
suspension
S
Risk of damage to the axle lines!
The suspension must not be locked during on-road driving. The steering
behaviour may also change when the suspension is locked.
• Check whether the suspension locking system is switched off. The Suspen-
u sion locking system indicator lamp must be off.
• When the Suspension locking system indicator lamp is lit, then switch the
u suspension locking system off by pressing the Suspension locking system
rocker switch up.
u If the air pressure in the secondary consumer circuit decreases below 5 bar,
the suspension is locked even if the suspension locking system is switched
off and the Suspension locking system indicator lamp lights up; àp. 8 - 44.
H
The suspension is always locked when the ignition is switched off.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Checking the on- When on-road driving, the truck crane must be at on-road driving level.
road level Check whether the truck crane is at on-road driving level.
• Park the truck crane on level ground for the inspection.

Insert the key into the Level adjustment system key-operated switch. Turn the
key to the right, push it in and turn it back to the left.
• Press down the On-road level rocker button.

{
• Check whether the Not on-road level indicator lamp has gone out. If the in-
{ dicator lamp lights up, hold down the On-road level rocker button until the
indicator lamp goes out.
• After checking the on-road level, switch off the Level adjustment system key-
operated switch and remove the key.
Checking the All transverse differential locks must be switched off for on-road driving.
transverse differ-
ential locks
• Check whether the Transverse differential lock indicator lamp has gone out
h (operation à p. 6 - 54).
Checking the The longitudinal differential locks (and with additional equipment, the actu-
longitudinal differ- ator of the second axle line) must be switched off for on-road driving.
ential locks
• Check whether the Longitudinal differential locks indicator lamp has gone
c out (operation à p. 6 - 52).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Checking the The separate steering must be switched off and the steering must be locked
steering locks for on-road driving. Operating the separate steering; àSeparate steering,
p. 6 - 61.
G
Risk of accidents when driving on-road with unlocked steering!
Before on-road driving, ensure that all locking procedures are completed
and the Steering unlocked warning lamp goes out. The truck crane is only in
a safe condition for road driving when the Steering unlocked warning lamp
has gone out.
• Check if all locking procedures were completed after switching off the
? separate steering. The Steering unlocked warning light must be out.
When the Steering unlocked indicator lamp is lit, you have to lock the steering;
à Switching to normal steering mode, p. 6 - 63.
Boom not set down The Boom not set down warning lamp is additional equipment. Currently, it is
warning lamp only standard equipment for cranes in use in Great Britain.
3 The Boom not set down warning lamp shows that the boom is not set down
correctly in the boom rest and thus the specified vehicle height is exceeded
at on-road level.
The vehicle height is specified on an adhesive label in the driver's cab.
S
Risk of damage to the truck crane!
If the Boom not set down warning lamp is lit, the vehicle is higher than spec-
ified. If you drive under a bridge or through low headroom (tunnel), an ac-
cident may occur which could cause damage to the truck crane, bridge or
tunnel.
Set the boom down correctly in the boom rest and ensure that on-road level
is set.
• Check the on-road level. The Not on-road level indicator lamp must not be
{ lit; à p. 6 - 11.
• Check whether the Boom not set down warning lamp is out. If the warning
3 lamp is lit, the boom is not set correctly in the boom rest. This means that
the vehicle height specified in the driver's cab is exceeded.
• Lower the boom until it is correctly situated in the boom rest.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.1.3 Adjusting the seat and the steering column
Adjusting the When the driver's seat is not occupied, it will sink to its lowest position. Seat
driver's seat height and lumbar support are adjusted pneumatically. You can only carry
out these adjustments when
– The supply pressure on the Supply pressure for brake circuits I and II display
5
4 6 shows ca. 5,5 bar. If necessary, start the diesel engine so that the com-
3 7
pressed-air chamber fills up.
2 8
1 9
0 bar 10
C0005
– The switch for lowering the seat to its lowest position is switched off
(i.e. not pushed down).
• Sit on the driver's seat; the seat will rise to the last position set.
You may correct the current setting to suit your size and body contour.
The following options are available:
Adjustments relative to height
1 Length adjustment of the seat cushion

2 Lowering to lowest position
3 Seat cushion angle
4 Seat height
5 Angle of the back rest
6 Vertical suspension - hardness
7 Length adjustment of the seat
8 Horizontal suspension on / off
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Adjustments relative to body contour
1 Lumbar area support - bottom

2 Lumbar area support - top
3 Lateral support
The following settings happen pneumatically.

The following applies to all buttons:
Empty air cushion: Press –

Fill air cushion: Press +
Adjusting the pas- The passenger's seat is adjusted mechanically. There are the following op-
senger seat tions.
1 Length adjustment of the seat

2 Seat cushion angle
3 Angle of the back rest
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Adjusting the The steering column is unlocked pneumatically. If the steering column does
steering column not unlock after you have pressed the rocker button, the supply pressure in
the compressed air reservoir is too low. In this case, you have to start the
diesel engine and wait until the supply pressure has built up.
G
Risk of accidents when the steering column is unlocked!
Always stop the vehicle before you unlock the steering column.
When the steering column is unlocked, the vehicle can no longer be
properly steered.
• Press the Steering column lock (1) rocker but-

ton down once. The steering column is un-
locked for approx. 6 seconds.
• Bring the steering column into the desired
position.
• Press up the Steering column lock (1) rocker
button once.
Or wait until the steering column is locked au-
tomatically (after about 6 seconds).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.1.4 Tachograph
H
The GMK 4080-1 truck crane is only equipped with a tachograph if it is de-
livered to member states of the EU. Therefore, truck cranes that are deliv-
ered to the USA do not have a tachograph.
In the tachographs for the GMK 4080-1 the diagram sheets (24-hour discs)
can be inserted for two drivers simultaneously.
The tachograph and the speedometer form a unit. The Speedometer display
and the Tachograph malfunction warning lamp are display elements of the ta-
chograph and are controlled directly by it.
You are obliged as a crane operator to set the respective activity on the ta-
chograph.
H
This section only describes the basic operation of the tachograph (inserting
diagram sheets, setting time groups, operating errors).
Before operation, also note the information in the supplied operating in-
structions from the tachograph manufacturer.
There you will find detailed information (marking the diagram sheets, mal-
functions, etc.).
S
Risk of damage to the tachograph drawer!
Open the tachograph drawer only to insert or remove diagram sheets and
do not use the opened drawer as a shelf or surface (e.g. to mark the dia-
gram sheets). By doing this, you can prevent contamination and damage.
When there is a tachograph malfunction, the tachograph malfunction warning

light and a error message will be shown on the display; à
Tachograph mal-
functions, p. 8 - 43.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Opening the drawer and checking the time settings

The drawer can only be opened when the following conditions have been
fulfilled:
– The vehicle is stationary
– The ignition is switched on
– No error message is shown on the Tachograph display (the Tachograph mal-
function warning lamp has gone out).
• Press the Unlock drawer button (1) once.

In the Tachograph display, the symbol (3) in the first line shows that unlock-
ing has been started.
The running bar (2) in the second line shows that unlocking has not yet been
completed.
• Wait until the drawer has been unlocked.

• Pull out the drawer (2) as far as possible.
The diagram sheet mounting (3) and an isolat-
ing plate (1) are in the drawer.
• First check the time setting for the diagram

sheet mounting (3); fold the isolating plate
(1) upwards to do this.
• Put a diagram sheet in the diagram sheet
mounting. Make sure that the diagram sheet
is under the spring (5).
• Check whether the diagram sheet's time
scale on the marking (4) is showing the cur-
rent time.
If the tachograph is equipped with an
adjusting knob (2), you can change the time
with the adjusting knob (press down and turn).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
If there is no adjusting knob, you can change the time in the following way:
• Take all the diagram sheets out of the diagram sheet bracket.
• Close the drawer. The time setting will be corrected automatically.
• Open the drawer and replace the required diagram sheets.
Inserting diagram sheets
H
Only insert diagram sheets which are properly marked.
The diagram sheets are always inserted with the front facing upwards.
For 2 driver operation you must:
– Leave the diagram sheet under the isolating plate after checking the time
or changing it with the adjusting knob.
– Replace the diagram sheet under the isolating plate once you have
changed the time without an adjustment wheel.
The diagram sheet under the isolating plate is for the second driver. Put the
diagram sheet for the first driver on the isolating plate.
For single-driver operation the diagram sheet

mounting under the isolating plate is empty
and only the diagram sheet for driver 1 is in-
serted:
• Put the isolating plate (1) back down.

• Put the diagram sheet (2) for driver 1 on the
isolating plate.
• Take care that the diagram sheet is under
the bracket (4).
• Push the drawer (3) back in until it engages.
S
Risk of malfunctions in the electronics!
If a diagram sheet has been damaged by being marked several times, this
might cause malfunctions in the electronics. Therefore, always insert the
plastic sheet diagram supplied should you not need to use the tachograph.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
If no malfunction is present, the Tachograph

display now shows the basic display:
– Date (4) and time (5)
– Driver 1 time group (1.1)
– Driver 1 diagram sheet inserted (1.2)
– Total kilometres of the truck crane (3)
– Driver 2 time group (2.1)
– Driver 2 diagram sheet inserted (2.2)
Setting time groups

The time group for driver 1 can be set by
repeatedly pushing button (1).
The set time group is shown with the symbol
(1.1).
The time group for driver 2 can be set by

repeatedly pushing button (2).
The set time group is shown with the symbol
(2.1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The different time groups are shown with the following symbols:
Driving times: As soon as the vehicle starts to move the tachograph auto-
matically switches to the symbol for driver 1 driving time.
If there are two diagram sheets inserted, the tachograph automatically
switches to stand-by time for two-drivers operation.
Working hours: For all other work, the same activities apply as do for stand-
by time.
When setting the working hours and stand-by time, observe the applicable
local regulations for the country in which you are working.
Stand-by time: Periods of presence at the truck crane, e.g. crane operation,
maintenance work, passenger time etc.
Pauses and times of rest: These times are prescribed by law and must be
observed.
H
If the drivers were changed during Two-driver operation, the diagram
sheets in the trip recorder also have to be changed. The driving time is al-
ways recorded on the diagram sheet which is on the isolating plate
(driver 1).
H
The symbol for resting time has to be set for driver 2 in single-driver opera-
tion. Otherwise an error message will appear.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2 General operation
G
Never switch off the ignition or remove the ignition key while the truck
crane is moving.
This precaution prevents the steering from locking and loss of control of the
moving truck crane.
6.2.1 Operating the transmission with automatic gear change
The GMK 4080-1 truck crane is equipped with a mechanical transmission

with automatic gear change. The transmission automatically controls the
clutch operating mechanism and gear changing. Despite this, gears can be
changed manually at any time.
H
After driving onto the roller type dynamometer, always shift the transmis-
sion to neutral position N; à On the roller type dynamometer, p. 6 - 33.
Switching on The transmission is always in neutral position N after being switched off.
To avoid malfunctions always make sure the Transmissionrotary switch is in
neutral position N before switching on.
• Check position of the Transmission rotary switch and switch to neutral po-
sition N if necessary.
The gearbox electronics are switched on with the ignition.
• Turn the ignition key to position 2.

A warning buzzer will sound for a few seconds.
The transmission electronics carry out an internal check. During this time
the Transmission control display indicates the entry CH.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
After the internal check has been completed, the display changes to the cur-
rent status and indicates the entry N.
If the transmission control detects an error, an error message appears;

à Error messages on the Transmission display, p. 8 - 53.
Selecting the driv- Before starting at extremely low temperatures; à Starting at extremely low
ing direction temperatures, p. 6 - 33.
The following description assumes the following:

– The truck crane is stationary
– The holding brake is closed
– The accelerator is not actuated.
• Start the diesel engine; à p. 5 - 13.

If the supply pressure in the compressed air system does not suffice, the
transmission will not be able to shift and the display will indicate AL (air-
less).
l If necessary, wait until the supply pressure has built up and the Supply pres-
sure brake circuit I and II warning lamp goes out.
• For forward travel, switch the Transmission rotary switch to position D.

• For reverse travel, switch the Transmission rotary switch to position R.
With additional equipment, the acoustic signal sounds when the reverse
gear is engaged.
The Automatic operating mode is now activated and will select a suitable
starting gear. The coupling remains disengaged.
If the starting gear has been engaged, this is shown on the Transmission dis-
play (e.g. the third gear).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Starting You can correct the automatically engaged starting gear.
If you push the Transmission touch lever forwards once, the transmission will
shift the starting gear up one (e.g. from 3 to 4 or from RL to RH).
If you push the Transmission touch lever to the rear once, the transmission
will downshift the starting gear by one (e.g. from 4 to 3 or from RH to RL).
If the starting gear has been engaged, this is indicated on the Transmission
display.
H
Only correct the starting gear if it is absolutely necessary to do so. Starting
gears which are too high cause premature clutch wear.
G
Danger from unexpected rolling!
Also apply the parking brake before starting on sloping ground. The gear
will only be engaged after you step on the accelerator. This can lead to the
truck crane starting to roll (also backwards) while you are moving your foot
from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
To start moving you must do the following:

– Apply the holding brake (see the note above)
– Step on the accelerator (now coupling will be started)
– Release the parking brake after coupling (motor sound changes).
H
The transmission automatically shifts to manoeuvring mode when you are
moving at a very low speed; à Manoeuvring mode, p. 6 - 32.
If, on starting, the transmission electronics detect that the clutch was over-
strained (e.g. during towing free or if the starting gear selected was too
high), the Transmission display indicates CL and a warning buzzer will sound.
• In this case, remove your foot from the accelerator immediately and actu-
ate the service brake.
• Switch to neutral position N and leave the vehicle engine running until the
coupling has cooled down and CL is no longer shown on the display.
• Select a lower starting gear.
• Start to move again.
H
If you do not release the accelerator, the electronics will engage automati-
cally within a few seconds. This sudden load can cause the engine to cut off
or the wheels to spin.
Exception: Gears 1 and R are not engaged automatically. Be careful not to
allow the clutch to overheat.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
• While driving, monitor the transmission display and warning instru-

ments; à Monitoring the control instruments while driving, p. 6 - 34.
Selecting the You can select one of two operating modes for the transmission:
transmission op-
– In the automatic operating mode the gear change and the gear selection
erating mode
is done using the electronic gear system.
In spite of this, you can undertake a manual change of gear at any time.
After a manual gear shift the transmission is in Manual operating mode.
– In manual operating mode a shift of gears can only be done with the
Transmission touch lever. There is no automatic switch operation.
H
The Automatic operating mode is intended for on-road driving.
The Manual operating mode serves primarily for off-the-road driving with
load conditions changing at short notice.
Switching from automatic to manual

It is possible to switch between the two operating modes when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving.
• To change over with gear shift, push the Transmission touch lever forward
or backward once.
The transmission upshifts one gear (or downshifts one gear) and is now in
Manual operating mode.
• To change over without gear shift, push the Transmission touch lever to
the left once.
The transmission remains in the currently selected gear and is now in Man-
ual operating mode.
If the operating mode Manual is selected, the gear engaged (e.g. gear 8) is
indicated on the right side of the Transmission display.
The left side of the display will only show information (bar and arrow down-
wards) if it is possible to downshift manually.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Switching from manual to automatic

It is possible to switch between the two operating modes when the vehicle
is stationary or when driving.
• To change over, push the Transmission touch lever to the left once.
The transmission switches to Automatic operating mode and shifts gears as
required and depending on the respective load.
If the Automatic operating mode is selected, the gear engaged (e.g. 8th gear)
is indicated on the right side of the Transmission display.
The left side of the display constantly shows both arrows and 4 bars.
Driving and In Automatic operating mode

changing gears
In Automatic operating mode, the electronic gear system shifts the gears in
the respective appropriate gear depending on the current operating condi-
tion (road resistance, weight, accelerator pedal position, speed and engine
speed).
You can influence transmission upshifting with the accelerator:
Accelerate a little: Upshifting with low engine speed
Accelerate a lot: Upshifting with high engine speed
You can influence the downshifting of the transmission with the service
brake or the engine retarder, as well as the position of the accelerator
(e.g. kick-down).
For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator as far as possible (kick-

down). The transmission will shift to a lower gear at first, depending on the
operating status. Then, to provide more power, the transmission will shift
only after a higher engine speed has been reached.
H
You can perform a manual shift of gear with the Transmission touch lever at
any time. After a manual gear shift the transmission is in Manual operating
mode. The transmission will only perform an automatic shift after you have
switched to Automatic operating mode (push touch lever to the left once).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
In Manual operating mode

• When driving, always leave the Transmission rotary switch in the position
for the current driving direction, e.g. in position D for forward travel.
G
Risk of accidents due to switching over while driving in neutral position N
or in the opposite driving direction!
If, while driving, you switch the Transmission rotary switch to the neutral po-
sition N or to the transmission mode for the opposite direction (depending
on the driving direction to R or D), the transmission switches the transmis-
sion to the neutral position and the drive line is interrupted. As a result you
will no longer be able to accelerate the truck crane in the event of an obsta-
cle avoidance manoeuvre, for example, and the engine retarder will have
no effect.
The transmission only shifts in Manual operating mode if you shift the gear
with the Transmission touch lever.
• To upswitch, push the Transmission touch lever forward. You may skip
gears when doing so:
Upshifting one gear: Push forwards once
Upshifting two gears: Briefly push forwards twice
Upshifting three gears: Briefly push forwards three times
The newly selected gear will be shown in the Transmission display.
If it is possible to downshift, the Transmission display will indicate how many

gears you can downshift without exceeding the maximum permissible en-
gine speed.
You can downshift one gear per bar shown (e.g. 3 gears, down to gear 5).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
• To downswitch push the Transmission touch lever to the rear. You may
skip gears when doing so:
Shift down first gear: Push to the rear once
Shift down second gear: Briefly push to the rear twice
Shift down third gear: Briefly push to the rear three times
The newly selected gear will be shown in the Transmission display.
H
If you perform a downshift operation which would exceed the maximum
permissible engine speed, the shift operation will not be performed.
In that case, slow the truck crane down until a maximum permissible engine
speed is reached and push the touch lever again.
Changing the di- • Stop the truck crane.

rection of travel
To switch between the positions D and R you can turn the Transmission ro-
tary switch two stages in sequence when the truck crane is stationary.
You do not need to wait for the intermediate position N to appear on the
Transmission display.
The Transmission display indicates the newly engaged gear.
H
The transmission switches to neutral position N if you switch between the
positions D and R directly when the truck crane is moving or you are driving
it.
Stopping • In order to stop, remove your foot from the accelerator and actuate the
service brake.
The transmission decouples shortly before the vehicle comes to a halt.
The current gear remains engaged.
If you stop for more than 1 to 2 minutes with the diesel engine running, you
need to perform the following to spare the coupling:
– Apply the parking brake.
– Shift the transmission to neutral position N.
If you want to park the truck crane; à Parking the truck crane, p. 6 - 46.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Shifting the You can switch the transmission to neutral position at any time.
transmission to
neutral position
G
Risk of accidents from switching to neutral position while driving!
If you switch the transmission to neutral position while driving, the drive
line will be interrupted. As a result you will no longer be able to accelerate
the truck crane in the event of an obstacle avoidance manoeuvre, for exam-
ple, and the engine retarder will have no effect.
Switch the transmission into neutral position to start the diesel engine.
The diesel engine may only be started in this position.
• Turn the Transmission rotary switch to position N.

The neutral position is activated when the N symbol appears on the Trans-
mission display.
Gear position L In gear position L, the transmission will only shift into first gear (forwards
or reverse). This prevents the transmission from upshifting too early due to
the external conditions, e.g. when maneuvering on sloping ground.
Switching on gear position L

• Stop the truck crane and release the accelerator.
Gear position L can only be switched on when the truck crane is
stationary, at idling speed. If you operate the Gear position L rocker switch
while driving, gear position L will only be switched on when the truck
crane comes to a stop.
• Turn the Transmission rotary switch to the required position D or R.
The corresponding starting gear will be engaged and displayed.
• Press the gear position L rocker switch down.

Á
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The transmission shifts to first gear (1 or RH).

As long as gear position L is switched on, the transmission will not shift.
As a consequence, the speed is limited to approx. 5 km/h.
It is not possible to upshift manually.
H
You can also switch on gear position L when neutral position N is switched
on. In this case, the transmission selects the appropriate starting gear for
approx. 3 seconds long after the switchover to position D or R and then
shifts to the appropriate gear 1 or RH.
Switching off gear position L

• Stop the truck crane or release the accelerator.
Gear position L can only be switched off when the idling speed is not
exceeded.
• Press the gear position L rocker switch upwards.

Á
• Turn the Transmission rotary switch to the required position D or R.

– When the truck crane is stationary, the corresponding starting gear will
be engaged and displayed.
– If the truck crane is still moving, a gear appropriate to the speed will be
engaged and displayed.
Gear position L is now switched off. The transmission shifts automatically
and you can upshift and downshift manually.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Manoeuvring When the electronic gear system identifies a manoeuvring condition e.g.
mode when connecting a trailer (depending on accelerator position and speed), it
automatically switches to manoeuvring mode.
H
The Transmission display remains the same in manoeuvring mode.
In manoeuvring mode the clutch control changes, making the truck crane
respond to the accelerator more sensitively.
The manoeuvring mode only applies to the forward gears 1 and 2 and the
two reverse gears RL and RH.
G
Risk of accidents from unexpected acceleration!
If you press the accelerator too far or the speed becomes too high, the elec-
tronic gear system deactivates the manoeuvring mode and the truck crane
accelerates.
If the electronic gear system identifies a danger of clutch overload (e.g. from
prolonged manoeuvring mode), the transmission display indicates CL and a
warning buzzer sounds.
If the accelerator does not release, the motor output is throttled and the
electronic gear system engages. In this way, the engine is cut off.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the roller type • Always switch the transmission to neutral position N after driving onto a
dynamometer roller type dynamometer.
G
Danger from unexpectedly moving out of the rollers!
Always switch the transmission to neutral position N if the truck crane is on
a roller type dynamometer. When the rollers are running, the electronic
gear system will identify a thrust operation, as when starting to move down
a slope. If transmission mode D is selected now, an adequate gear is en-
gaged even if you do not press the accelerator. The engine braking power
acts against the rollers and the truck crane can drive out of them.
Starting at At outside temperatures between -20 °C and -25 °C the gear oil must be pre-
extremely low heated before driving the truck crane.
temperatures
Let the diesel engine run at idling speed for at least 10 minutes before you
start driving.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2.2 Monitoring the control instruments while driving
Test the service and parking brakes as soon as you begin driving.
While driving, monitor the following control and warning instruments:

Gauge for supply pressure in brake circuits I and II
4 5
6
3 7 The operating pressure is approx. 8 bar.
2 8
1 9 The pressure in both brake circuits must be over 5.5 bar while driving.
0 bar 10
C0005

The warning lamps will light up if the pressure in a brake circuit falls under
5.5 bar.
G
Risk of accidents if a brake circuits fails!
The effectiveness of the service brake is reduced when one of the brake cir-
cuits fails.
If the warning light lights up, stop the truck crane immediately and try to
find the cause! You may only continue driving at a low travelling speed un-
til you reach the next workshop.
G
Risk of accidents if both brake circuits fail
If the pressure in both brake circuits drops to less than 5.5 bar, the truck
crane can only be stopped by applying the holding brake.
Stop the truck crane immediately and do not drive any further before the
truck crane has been repaired.
x ABS warning light

The warning lamp lights up when the vehicle is stationary. The warning
light does not go out until the truck crane is moving at walking speed.
The warning lamp does not go out or it lights up when the crane is being
driven if the ABS system is malfunctioning or fails. The ABS system is not
ready for operation but the braking force of the truck crane is fully main-
tained;à Service brake malfunctions, p. 8 - 42.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
y Warning lamp for trailer ABS

For additional equipment with towbar coupling, the warning lamp only
functions when a trailer equipped with an ABS system is attached correctly
to the truck crane.
The warning lamp lights up when the truck crane is stationary. The warning
light does not go out until the truck crane and the trailer are moving at walk-
ing speed.
The warning lamp does not go out or it lights up when the crane is being
driven if the ABS system on the trailer is malfunctioning or fails. The braking
force of the truck crane and the trailer are fully maintained, only the ABS
system on the trailer is not ready; à Service brake malfunctions, p. 8 - 42.
de Warning lamps for steering circuits I and II

The corresponding warning lamp lights up if the oil supply in one of the
steering circuits decreases; à
Steering malfunctions, p. 8 - 41.
H
The warning lamp for steering circuit I goes on at speeds of under 10 km/h.
d It must go out whenever the speed exceeds 10 km/h.
G
Risk of accidents if both steering circuits fail!
Stop the truck crane immediately if both warning lamps are on at a speed
of over 10 km/h.
You must stop driving immediately, as the truck crane can no longer be
safely steered due to the high steering force.
G
Risk of accidents if one of the steering circuits fails!
Reduce the driving speed, stop the truck crane at the next opportunity and
look for the reason if one of the two warning lamps is on at a speed of over
10 km/h.
If one of the steering circuits fails, you may only continue driving at a low
travelling speed until you reach the next workshop.
Diesel engine coolant temperature display

The coolant temperature is monitored by the engine electronic system.
When the coolant temperature rises, the engine electronic system restricts
the engine power. If the maximum permitted coolant temperature (approx.
120 °C ) is exceeded, the engine electronic system indicates a malfunction
and the Engine electronic system warning lamp lights up; à Warning lamp for
engine electronic system, p. 6 - 36.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
t Indicator lamp for diesel engine coolant level

If the Coolant level indicator lamp lights up, the coolant level is too low. Re-
plenish coolant immediately to prevent the vehicle engine overheating;
à Checking the coolant level, p. 5 - 6.
L Diesel engine oil pressure warning lamp

The engine oil pressure must not drop while driving.
The warning lamp lights when the oil pressure falls below 0.4 bar.
A warning buzzer sounds at the same time.
S
Risk of damage to the engine when the oil pressure drops!
Stop the truck crane immediately if the warning lamp lights up or the warn-
ing signal sounds. Turn off the diesel engine immediately and attempt to
find the cause!
In no event should you restart the diesel engine before the cause has been
found and the problem eliminated; à Malfunctions to the diesel engine,
p. 8 - 37.
‡ Warning lamp for engine electronic system

If the Engine electronic system warning lamp lights up while driving, there is a
malfunction in the engine electronics. The engine's performance decreases
continuously but the engine does not switch off, and you can thus continue
driving until you get an opportunity to stop; à p. 8 - 37.
[ Collective warning light for the carrier electronics

Flashes if there is a malfunction in the carrier electronics. At the same time,
an error message is stored, that you can see in the crane cab on the Crane
control display (and with additional equipment also on the switch box Out-
à
riggers / Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indicator); Malfunctions to the
carrier electronic system, p. 8 - 45.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Fuel reserve display

Monitor the Fuel reserve display.
Never allow the fuel tank to run completely empty.
C0013
H
If the fuel tank is nearly empty, air may be sucked in. If air was sucked in, the
fuel system must be bled ( à Maintenance manual).
Diesel engine air filter; à Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.

p
Hydraulic oil return flow filter; à Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
g
Flame start system (additional equipment); à Malfunctions to the diesel engine,
z p. 8 - 37.
Transmission display
If the transmission display indicates the service symbol or the additional entry
STOP, there is a malfunction in the transmission; à Error messages on the
Transmission display, p. 8 - 53.
# Warning lamp for transmission shift lock

Lights up in the case of a serious transmission malfunction. At the same
time, the transmission display indicates the service symbol and the entry
STOP; à Service symbol and STOP display, p. 8 - 54.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2.3 Driving downhill
Starting on a slope All information in this section is based on the assumption that the diesel en-
gine is running.
G
Danger when driving in neutral position N!
If the transmission is in neutral position N, the drive line is interrupted and
the engine brake will have no effect. Therefore, always turn the Transmission
rotary switch to position D or R for the desired direction of driving before
you start.
If you switch to position N while driving, the truck crane may accelerate.
G
Danger of the truck crane starting to roll in an unexpected direction!
Hold the truck crane with the parking brake until the gears have engaged
when starting to reverse on a slope. Starting to move in the opposite direc-
tion to the one selected before engaging a gear may cause an undefined
status in the electronic system and prevent the gear from being engaged.
This causes the truck crane to move in the opposite direction.

– Turn Transmission rotary switch to position D
– Release the holding and service brakes.
– Apply the accelerator if you wish to accelerate.
– Do not press the accelerator if you want to use the engine for braking (e.g.
when starting to drive in a traffic jam).
H
To start driving in reverse in position R, first actuate the accelerator and then
release the brake to avoid moving in the opposite direction ( à information
stated above).
H
When the truck crane starts to move forwards in neutral position N you can
still switch to transmission mode D. The transmission electronic system se-
lects and engages a gear appropriate for the speed. The engine's braking ca-
pacity is now effective.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Monitoring the In both operating modes (Manual and Automatic) the engine speed is not au-
maximum permis- tomatically throttled by the engine electronic system if the maximum per-
sible engine speed missible speed is exceeded and the transmission does not automatically up-
shift.
S
Risk of damage due to excessive engine speed!
Shift to a higher gear or slow the truck crane down when the maximum per-
missible engine speed has been reached.
In this way, you prevent the engine from running at an excessive speed and
the transmission from getting damaged.
• Check the current speed on the tachometer while driving.

The maximum permissible engine speed is 2300 min-1 .
Make sure the maximum permissible engine speed is not exceeded. Slow
the truck crane down or shift to a higher gear.
When driving downhill, you can also slow down the truck crane with the ser-
vice brake, as follows:
– By selecting a lower gear; à Preselecting gears, p. 6 - 40,
– With the engine retarder; à Engine retarder, p. 6 - 40,
– With the eddy current retarder (additional equipment); à Eddy current re-
tarder, p. 6 - 41.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Preselecting gears If you select a lower gear in Automatic mode using the Transmission touch
lever, the electronic transmission system automatically switches to Manual.
You can perform more shift operations in Manual mode with the Transmis-
sion touch lever.
H
If the maximum permissible engine speed would be exceeded by shifting to
a lower gear, the shift operation will not be carried out.
In that case, slow the truck crane down until a maximum permissible engine
speed is reached and downswitch again.
If the engine speed increases to the maximum permissible speed in the cur-
rently selected gear, you need to take action; à
Monitoring the maximum
permissible engine speed, p. 6 - 39.
Engine retarder An engine flap brake with constant throttle on the truck crane serves as the
engine brake. The engine retarder only becomes effective at an engine
speed of 900 RPM and can be used up to a maximum of 2300 min-1 .
Switching on the engine retarder

• Pull the Multipurpose switch, right to the rear
to stage 5.1.
The engine retarder is on.
The stages 5.2 to 5.4 are only active if the truck

crane is equipped with an eddy current re-
tarder (additional equipment); à p. 6 - 41.
Switching off the engine retarder

• Press the Multipurpose switch, right forwards
to level 5.0.
The engine retarder is switched off. With addi-
tional equipment, the eddy current retarder is
also switched off.
G
Risk of accidents due to unexpected acceleration!
Keep sufficient distance when driving downhill. The effectiveness of the en-
gine brake is interrupted during a shift operation. This may cause the truck
crane to accelerate briefly.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Eddy current re- With additional equipment, the eddy current retarder is switched on to-
tarder gether with the engine brake.
H
All levels of the eddy current retarder are switched on in addition to the en-
gine brake.
Switching on the eddy current retarder

5.1 Level 1 on = ¼ brake power
5.2 Level 2 on = ¼ brake power
5.3 Level 3 on = ¾ brake power
5.4 Level 4 on = full braking power
Switching off the eddy current retarder

• Press the Multipurpose switch, right forwards
to level 5.0.
The eddy current retarder and the engine re-
tarder are switched off.
Í When the eddy current retarder is switched on, the Eddy current retarder in-
dicator lamp will light up.
H
You cannot regulate the engine speed with the accelerator as long as the
eddy current retarder is in operation.
H
When switching through a number of levels, the switch must engage briefly
in each level in order to build up the power-supply connection of the eddy
current retarder.
The braking force of the eddy current retarder is dependent only on the driv-
ing speed. In contrast to the engine brake, the transmission mode engaged
does not influence the function of the eddy current retarder.
For long downhill stretches, when you have stabilized your speed, you
should use the eddy current retarder at level 2.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2.4 Driving uphill
Starting
G
Danger of the truck crane starting to roll in an unexpected direction!
Hold the truck crane with the parking brake until the transmission has en-
gaged when starting to drive forwards uphill. If the truck crane starts to
move against the selected direction of travel (while you are changing from
the brake pedal to the accelerator), no gear will be selected.
This means that the truck crane rolls forward and you can only stop this
movement by braking.

– Apply the holding brake (see the note above)
– Turn Transmission rotary switch to position D
– Step on the accelerator (the gear will now be engaged)
– Release the holding brake.
H
When starting in reverse in position R the gear is engaged as soon as the
truck crane begins to move. You can make use of the engine braking power
immediately if you do not actuate the accelerator.
If, during starting, the electronic gear system recognizes that the load is too
great and the clutch will overheat, the Transmission display will indicate CL
and a warning buzzer will sound.
• Select a lower starting gear.
• Start to move again.
H
cally within a few seconds. This sudden load can cause the engine to cut off
or the wheels to spin.
Driving The transmission may switch between two gears at certain gradients. Either
take your foot slightly off the accelerator or select a lower gear position.
H
When starting on steep gradients and when manoeuvring, it can be advan-
tageous to operate the service brake with the left foot in order that the brake
and accelerator pedals can be operated simultaneously and with sensitivity.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2.5 Tempomat
The truck crane is equipped with a Tempomat. This allows you to drive at a
speed that you have determined.
G
Risk of accidents through carelessness!
Always be prepared to brake even when the Tempomat is activated.
Only switch the Tempomat on if the traffic situation permits a constant
speed.
Activating the The Tempomat is switched on and off with the Multipurpose switch, right.
Tempomat This function of the multipurpose switch can only be activated at speeds
greater than 18 km/h .
• Tap the Multipurpose switch, right upwards or downwards once.

The Tempomat is switched on and the current speed will be saved as the set
value.
Driving with the With the Tempomat function switched on, you can take your foot from the
Tempomat accelerator at any time without changing the set speed.
To increase speed:
• Pull the Multipurpose switch, right upwards and hold it until the desired
speed has been reached.
After letting go, the current speed will be saved and kept as the set value.
or
• Tap the Multipurpose switch, right upwards once. The speed will increase
by 0.5 km/h and will be saved.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
To decrease speed:
• Press the Multipurpose switch, right downwards and hold it until the
desired speed has been reached.
After letting go, the current speed will be saved and kept as the set value.
or
• Tap the Multipurpose switch, right downwards once, and the speed will de-
creased by 0.5 km/h and will be saved.
If you wish to increase the speed, e.g. in order to pass another vehicle, you
may press the accelerator and increase the speed of the diesel engine with-
out deleting the predefined cruising speed. The truck crane speed will de-
crease to the set speed when you release the accelerator.
G
Risk of accidents due to excessive speed!
Do not activate the Tempomat control when you are driving downhill since
the Tempomat will not have any braking effect on your truck crane. The
driving speed of your truck crane could be greater than the speed which
you have set on the Tempomat.
Switching off the Automatic shutdown of the Tempomat

Tempomat
In the following cases, the Tempomat will be automatically switched off:
– If the service brake or the engine brake / eddy current retarder are actu-
ated
– When the speed falls to under 10 km/h
– When the Temposet function is switched on
– If the ignition is switched off.
Switching off the Tempomat (manually)

• Tap the multipurpose switch forwards once.
The Tempomat is switched off. You have to regulate the speed again with
the accelerator.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2.6 Temposet
The truck crane is equipped with a Temposet function. This function enables
you to limit the truck crane to a particular speed (e.g. in areas with speed
limits). (exceptionà Overtaking in this section)
H
The Temposet function is switched on and off with the Multipurpose switch,
right.
This function of the multipurpose switch can only be activated at speeds
greater than 18 km/h .
Switching on • Bring the truck crane up to the desired maximum speed.

Temposet
• Press the Temposet on button once.
The current speed is set as the upper limit.
Driving with the When the Temposet function is switched on, you can only drive in the range
Temposet below the set speed limit.
For passing or evasive manoeuvres, you can exceed the maximum speed in
the following way:
Exceeding the maximum speed

• Press the accelerator down as far as it will go (kick-down) to exceed the
set maximum speed (e.g. for overtaking or obstacle avoidance manoeu-
vres).
• Take your foot off the accelerator and press it again. The maximum speed
is effective again.
Switching You can switch off the Temposet at any time.

Temposet off
• Tap the Multipurpose switch, right forwards twice.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.2.7 Parking the truck crane
Applying the park- • Bring the truck crane to a halt using the service brake.
ing brake
• Apply the parking brake when the truck crane is stationary.
Activating neutral • Switch into the neutral position by turning the Transmission rotary switch
position to position N.
When neutral position is activated, N will appear in the Transmission display.
Turning off the • If the temperature of the coolant is still very high (e.g. after mountain pass
diesel engine driving), let the diesel engine run for another one or two minutes.
G
Always apply the parking brake before you switch off the ignition. The
transmission automatically switches to neutral position N when you switch
off the ignition and the truck crane may move inadvertently if the holding
brake has been released.
• To turn off, turn the ignition key to position 0 and pull it out. All indicator
lamps must go out.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Securing the truck Depending upon the regulations of the respective country, a number of
crane against roll- chocks were included in delivery to secure the truck crane from rolling
ing away.
Two chocks can be attached to the rear of carrier. If available, two further
chocks can be attached in front of the right rear outriggers.
G
The truck crane cannot be secured against rolling by selecting transmission
mode (D or R) in addition to applying the parking brake!
• Secure the truck crane on uphill and downhill slopes using both the park-
ing brake and chocks.
Transport at the rear of the carrier

• Insert the chock (1) in the bracket (2).
• Press the chock downwards until the clamp
(3) engages.
• Attach the other chock to the rear of the car-
rier in the same way if necessary.
Transport in front of the outriggers
• Open the spring latch (3).

• Push one or two chocks (1) between the
holding rods (2).
• Secure the chocks with the spring latches
(3).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Extended stand- Always switch off the battery master switch if the truck crane is going to be
still inactive for over 8 hours.
S
Risk of damage to the alternator!
When the diesel engine is running you must never disconnect the cable
connection to the alternator.
• Switch off all power consumers.

• Turn off the diesel engine and remove the ignition key.
• Switch off the battery master switch.
You do not need to wait for the return water of the auxiliary water heating
system (additional equipment). Be sure you switch the heater off, so that it
does not switch on inadvertently when the battery master switch is
switched on.
Securing the truck crane against unauthorized use

• Secure the truck crane against unauthorized use as follows:
– Stow away the hand-held control in the crane cab
– Pull out the ignition key
– Lock the driver's cab.
G
Danger of unauthorized use!
Always stow away the hand-held control in the crane cab before leaving the
truck crane, and lock the door to the crane cab or the driver's cab.
In this way you can stop unauthorized persons from starting the diesel en-
gine with the hand-held control.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.3 Off-road driving
H
If you are driving on very uneven ground with constantly changing loads or
on slippery ground, the transmission may downshift too late or upshift too
early. In this case, select the manual operating mode.
This way you will be able to drive carefully and shift gears on time.
You may also take the following steps in the order specified below:
– Switch on the off-road gear in the transfer case
The off-road gear reduces the driving speed in all gears and consequently
increases the thrust of the driving wheels.
You may also use the off-road gear for manoeuvring on solid ground.
– Shift to a low starting gear
Select a lower starting gear to increase the driving wheel thrust. Changing
the starting gear which is engaged automatically; à Starting, p. 6 - 25.
– Longitudinal differential locks
For off-road driving you can also switch on the longitudinal differential
lock in the transfer case and on the third axle line. With additional
equipment with 8 x 8 x 8 the drive of the second axle line is also activated
You may not, however, use the longitudinal differential lock on firm
ground.
– Transverse differential locks
The transverse differential locks in the driven axle lines prevent the
individual wheels spinning when driving on slippery ground. However,
you may not use the transverse differential lock on hard surfaces or while
driving around corners.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.3.1 Off-road gear
The off-road gear reduces the driving speed in all gears and consequently
increases the thrust of the driving wheels.
Speeds in the off-road gear à Driving speeds, p. 9 - 8.
S
Risk of the transfer case not functioning properly!
Do not switch the off-the-road gear on or off unless the truck crane is sta-
tionary and the transmission rotary switch is in the N position.
Never press two of the three rocker buttons Transfer case on-road gear, Trans-
fer case neutral position and Transfer case off-road gear simultaneously, since it
will result in the transfer case not working properly.
Engaging the off- • Stop the truck crane.

road gear
5 • Press down the Off-road gear transfer case rocker button once. The Off-road
gear indicator lamp goes on as soon as the off-road gear is engaged.
4 The On-road gear indicator lamp goes out.
5 • When the Off-road gear indicator lamp fails to light up, briefly turn the
Transmission rotary switch briefly into the D position, and then back to the
N position.
Press down the Off-road gear transfer case rocker button again.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Switching off the • Stop the truck crane.

off-road gear
4 • Press down the On-road gear transfer case rocker button once. The On-road
gear indicator lamp goes on as soon as the on-road gear is engaged.
5 The Off-road gear indicator lamp goes out.
4 • When the On-road gear indicator lamp fails to light up, briefly turn the
Transmission rotary switch briefly into the D position, and then back to the
N position.
Press down the On-road gear transfer case rocker button again.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.3.2 Longitudinal differential locks
For off-road driving you can also switch on the longitudinal differential lock
in the transfer case and on the third axle line.
With additional equipment including the 8 x 8 x 8 drive, the drive of the
second axle line is also activated.
H
The longitudinal differential lock can only be engaged if the Level adjustment
system key-operated switch in the driver's cab is on.
As long as the Level adjustment system key-operated switch is switched on,

the transmission will upshift to 6th gear at most. This means that the truck
crane speed is limited to approx. 20 km/h ; à
Level adjustment system,
p. 6 - 56.
S
Risk of damage to the longitudinal differential locks!
The longitudinal differential locks may not be switched on when the vehicle
is on solid ground. Do not leave the longitudinal differential locks switched
on for longer than is necessary and make sure you switch them off before
driving on solid ground!
Switching on the The longitudinal differential lock can only be switched on when the truck
longitudinal differ- crane is stationary or moving at a maximum of 5 km/h.
ential lock
• Position the steering straight ahead.
hb • Check whether the rocker switches for the Transverse differential locks and
the Separate steering on / off are switched off. This prevents them being
switched on accidentally with the Level adjustment system key-operated
switch.
• Turn on the level adjustment system with the key-operated switch.
c • Press the Longitudinal differential lock / drive of the second axle line rocker
switch down.
c • Carefully start the truck crane until the Longitudinal differential locks
indicator lamp lights up.
08.03.2006
The indicator lamp will flash if not all of the activation procedures have
been mechanically completed yet. The indicator lamp only goes out when
all activation procedures have been completed mechanically.

GMK 4080-1
Switching off the The longitudinal differential locks can only be switched off when the truck
longitudinal differ- crane is stationary or moving at a maximum of 5 km/h.
ential locks
• Press the Longitudinal differential lock / drive of the second axle line rocker
c switch up.
• Wait until the Longitudinal differential lock indicator lamp goes out.
c The indicator lamp will flash if not all of the deactivation procedures have
been mechanically completed yet. The indicator lamp only goes out once
all deactivation procedures have been completed mechanically.
H
If the Longitudinal differential locks indicator lamp does not go out, you can
support the switching off process by driving slowly forwards and back-
wards;
• Switch off the Level adjustment system key-operated switch.
• Check whether the rocker switches for the Longitudinal differential lock /
chb Drive for the second axle line, Transverse differential locks and Separate steering
on / off are switched off.
H
The longitudinal and transverse differential locks and the separate steering
will be switched off together with the Level adjustment system key-operated
switch, even when the individual rocker switches are still on.
Turn off these rocker switches afterwards. This prevents unnecessary
switching procedures, since all the switch procedures corresponding to the
rocker switch positions will be activated every time the key-operated switch
is switched on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.3.3 Transverse differential locks in all driven axle lines
The transverse differential locks in the driven axle lines prevent the individ-
ual wheels spinning when driving on slippery ground.
H
The transverse differential locks can only be engaged if the Level adjustment
system key-operated switch in the driver's cab is on.
As long as the level adjustment system key-operated switch is on, the trans-
mission will upshift to 6th gear at most. This means that the truck crane
speed is limited to approx. 20 km/h ; àLevel adjustment system, p. 6 - 56.
S
Risk of damage to the transverse differential locks!
The transverse differential locks may not be switched on when the vehicle
is on solid ground. Do not leave the transverse differential locks switched
on any longer than necessary. It is imperative that you switch off the trans-
verse differential locks when driving on firm ground.
Switching on The transverse differential locks can only be switched on when the truck
the transverse crane is stationary or moving at a maximum of 5 km/h.
differential locks
• Switch on the Level adjustment system key-operated switch.
h • Press down the Transverse differential locks rocker switch.
h • Carefully start the truck crane until the Transverse differential locks indicator
lamp lights up. The indicator lamp will flash if one or more of the trans-
verse differential locks has not been activated. It will not light up continu-
ously until the transverse differential locks of all axle lines have been ac-
tivated.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Switching off The transverse differential locks can only be switched off when the truck
the transverse crane is stationary or moving at a maximum of 5 km/h.
differential locks
h • Press up the Transverse differential locks rocker switch.

The indicator lamp will flash if one or more of the transverse differential
locks have not been deactivated. It will only go out when the transverse
differentials in all axle lines have been deactivated.
H
If the indicator lamp flashes after the transverse differential locks have been
deactivated, one or more of the locks are still locked into place. You may
support the disengaging of the locks by slowly driving forward and back-
ward while turning the steering slightly.
• Switch off the Level adjustment system key-operated switch.
chb • Check whether the rocker switches for the Longitudinal differential lock /
Drive for the second axle line, Transverse differential locks and Separate steering
on / off are switched off.
H
The longitudinal and transverse differential locks will be switched off to-
gether with the Level adjustment system key-operated switch, even when the
individual rocker switches are still on.
is switched on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.3.4 Level adjustment system
You can improve the off-road handling of the truck crane by increasing its
ground clearance and chassis angle with the level adjustment system. Op-
eration of the level adjustment system is inhibited by the key-operated
switch.
Leave the key-operated switch on when the truck crane is not at on-road
level. After a level change, return the truck crane to on-road level as soon as
possible. Turn off the key-operated switch and remove the key.
The rocker switches for the following functions are also activated using this
key-operated switch:
– Transverse differential locks;
– Longitudinal differential lock / drive of the second axle line;
– Separate steering on / off;
– The gears will upshift to the 6th gear at the highest; this means that the
speed is limited to 20 km/h .
Activating the The buttons for the level adjustment system are only active when the
level adjustment suspension locking system is switched off.
system
u • Check whether the suspension locking system is switched off. The Suspen-
sion locking system indicator lamp must be off.
u • When the Suspension locking system indicator lamp is lit, then switch the
suspension locking system off by pressing the Suspension locking system
rocker switch up.
chb • Check whether the rock switches for the Transverse differential locks, longi-
tudinal differential lock / drive for the second axle line and Separate steering are
switched off. This prevents them being switched on accidentally with the
Level adjustment system key-operated switch.
• Insert the key into the Level adjustment system key-operated switch and turn
it on. Turn the key to the right, push it in and turn it back to the left.
• Use the accelerator to maintain the engine speed at between 1000 and
1300 min-1 during each level change.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Bringing the truck • Park the truck crane on a flat, even surface.
crane into on-road
level
• Press the On-road level rocker button until the Not on-road level indicator
{ lamp goes out.
Tilting the truck • Select the direction of movement of the level adjustment using the Raise /
crane lengthwise lower vehicle level rocker switch:
or crosswise
: To raise the truck crane: Press the rocker switch up.

To lower the truck crane: Press the rocker switch down.
89 The Raise vehicle level and Lower vehicle level indicator lamps show the se-
lected direction of movement.
You can tilt the truck crane lengthwise or crosswise with the Level adjustment
system rocker button:
6 – Raise or lower at the front
7 – Raise or lower at the rear
8 – Raise or lower on the right-hand side
9 – Raise or lower on the left-hand side
{ The Not on-road level indicator lamp will light up as soon as the truck crane
is no longer at on-road level.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Raising or lower- • Select the direction of movement of the level adjustment using the Raise /
ing the entire lower vehicle level rocker switch:
truck crane
: To raise the truck crane: Press the rocker switch up.

To lower the truck crane: Press the rocker switch down.
89 The Raise vehicle level and Lower vehicle level indicator lamps show the se-
lected direction of movement.
| Press the Raise / lower truck crane rocker button down to raise or lower the
entire truck crane.
{ The Not on-road level indicator lamp will light up as soon as the truck crane
is no longer at on-road level.
Deactivating the
level adjustment
system
• Turn the Level adjustment system key-operated switch back so that it disen-
gages, and then remove the key.
G
Risk of accidents from exceeding the overall height permitted!
If you switch off the level adjustment system before on-road driving, then
you should always put the truck crane into the On-road level position.
If the truck crane is on a higher level, then the specified overall height will
be exceeded.
• Check whether the rocker switches for the Longitudinal differential lock /
chb Drive for the second axle line, Transverse differential locks and Separate steering
are switched off.
H
The longitudinal and transverse differential locks and the separate steering
will be switched off together with the Level adjustment system key-operated
switch, even when the individual rocker switches are still on.
08.03.2006
is switched on.

GMK 4080-1
6.3.5 Freeing an immobilized truck crane
Freeing the truck If the crane is stuck in terrain, you can attempt to free it by changing be-
crane by its own tween forward and reverse driving (rocking free):
power
If you are trying to rock the crane free, you should insert the transverse dif-
ferential locks and the longitudinal differential lock.
• Switch to transmission mode D or R.

• Select a smaller starting gear with the Transmission touch lever.
• Start driving as far as you can, as high as possible.
• Release the accelerator, the gears disengage.
• Let the truck crane roll in the opposite direction, as far as it will go.
• Start driving - again as far as possible.
• Repeat driving and letting the truck crane roll back until it has rocked itself
free.
H
It does not make sense to switch between the transmission modes D and R,
as switching to R is only performed when the truck crane is stationary and
takes a few seconds. You would not be able to take advantage of the swing
force caused by the change of direction.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Towing free to the • Fasten a steel rope to the front towbar coupling.
front
S
Risk of damage to the chassis!
Only tow the truck crane free while observing the procedure given for the
pulling direction.
Pulling out the truck crane jerkily or at an angle may damage the chassis.
The front towbar coupling is designed for a maximum tractive force of

100 kN (approx. 10 t), when:
– The direction of pull runs forward along the longitudinal axle or at an an-
gle of 45° to the right or left of the longitudinal axle and
– The direction of pull runs along the longitudinal axis toward the rear with-
out diverting up or down.
Towing free to the • Fasten a steel rope to one of the towing eyes on the rear chassis wall us-
rear ing a shackle.
S
Only tow the truck crane free while observing the procedure given for the
pulling direction. Otherwise the chassis may be damaged or the towing
eyes may bend off.
The towing eyes on the vehicle tail or the ROB are designed for a maximum
tractive force of 75 kN (approx. 7.5 t), if:
– The direction of pull runs along the level of the longitudinal axle and
– The direction of pull runs along the longitudinal axis toward the rear with-
out diverting up or down.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.4 Separate steering

Manoeuvrability on the site may be increased by steering with the third axle
line. To do this:
– The steering on the third axle line must be unlocked
– The drag rods of the third and fourth axle line must be connected and the
drag rod between the second and fourth axle line needs to be separated.
H
Always switch on separate steering on narrow construction sites when you
are
– Driving with the rigged truck crane or
– Steering at low speed.
b The first and second axle lines are then steered with the steering wheel and
the third and fourth axle lines with the Separate steering rocker button in the
panelling of the driver's door.
Operation of the separate steering is inhibited by the Level adjustment system

key-operated switch. Leave the key-operated switch on when the steering
on the third axle line is unlocked. Relock the steering on the third axle line
as soon as possible. Turn off the key-operated switch and remove the key.
H
The speed of the truck crane is limited to approx. 18 km/h as long as the
Level adjustment system key-operated switch is switched on; àLevel adjust-
ment system, p. 6 - 56.
When the steering is unlocked, you may drive in both all-wheel steering
mode and crab travel mode.
All-wheel steering:
The turning circle of the truck crane will become smaller if you turn the
wheels of the front and rear axle lines in opposite direction.
Crab travel mode:

The truck crane will move diagonally to the side if you turn the wheels of the
front and rear axle lines in the same direction.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.4.1 Switching to separate steering
• Switch on the Level adjustment system key-operated switch.
• Press the Release separate steering rocker switch downward.

b To do this, you must press the lock button downwards.
? The Steering unlocked warning lamp lights up when the steering is unlocked.
• Steer the third axle line with the Separate steering rocker button until the
b wheels of the third and fourth axle lines have the same steering angle.
The connection between the drag rods of the third and fourth axle lines
engages audibly and the wheels of the third and fourth axle lines deflect in
the same direction.
The steering system is now in separate steering mode.
G
Risk of accidents if the steering of the third axle line is unlocked during
on-road driving!
After driving in all-wheel steering mode, return the truck crane immediately
to normal driving mode with the steering lock engaged at the third axle line
and the drag rods connected between the second and fourth axle lines.
The normal driving mode is only re-established once the Steering unlocked
warning lamp goes out.
6.4.2 Steering the third and fourth axle lines
b You can steer the wheels of the third and fourth axle lines with the Separate
steering rocker button:
To turn to the left: Push the button to the left.

To turn to the right: Push the button to the right.
The steering angle changes until you either release the rocker button or the
end stop is reached.
08.03.2006
H
The wheels of the first and second axle lines are steered using the steering
wheel.

GMK 4080-1
6.4.3 Switching to normal steering mode
The following prerequisites must be met for on-road driving:

– The third axle line steering is locked.
– The drag rods of the second and fourth axle lines are connected to each
other.
G
on-road driving!
Normal steering mode with locked steering on the third axle line is not ac-
tivated until the steering unlocked warning lamp has gone out.
• Turn the wheels of the front axle lines as far as possible to the left or right
using the steering wheel.
H
If the wheels on the front axle lines are not turned as far as they will go, the
steering lock on the third axle line cannot be engaged.
• Press the Release separate steering rocker switch upward.

b
? The Steering unlocked warning lamp remains on.
The second and fourth axle line steering drag rods must be connected first.
• Steer the wheels of the rear axle lines with the Separate steering rocker
button into the position for on-road driving which corresponds to the
turned front wheels.
If the front wheels, for example, are turned to the right, you have to turn
the rear wheels to the left.
The drag rods between the second and fourth axle line are connected to
each other if only the wheels of the third axle line turn when the rocker but-
ton is actuated.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
You must now lock the third axle line steering.
• Using the Separate steering rocker button, turn the wheels of the third axle
b line to the Straight ahead position until they cannot be turned any more.
? The steering lock of the third axle line is locked when the warning lampsteer-
ing unlocked goes out.
The steering system is set to normal steering.
G
on-road driving!
If you deactivate the ignition or the key-operated level adjustment system
switch, before the steering is locked, the magnetic valve in the separate
steering is inactive, without locking the steering of the third axle line.
When the ignition is restarted, separate steering is immediately reactivated
and the Steering unlocked warning lamp goes on.
A dangerous driving situation is the consequence.
• Switch off the key-operated Level adjustment system switch.
• Check whether the rocker switches for the Longitudinal differential locks, the
chb Transverse differential locks and the Separate steering on / off are switched off.
H
The longitudinal and transverse differential locks will be switched off to-
gether with the Level adjustment system key-operated switch, even when the
individual rocker switches are still on.
is switched on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.5 Heating and ventilating the driver's cab
6.5.1 Heating
The heat for the heater is created by a heat exchanger which is warmed with
the heat from the engine coolant. The heater is intended for use with the
diesel engine running.
Switching the The heater is switched on and off with the Fan rotary switches.
heater on and off
To switch on the heating system, turn the Top fan (1) or Bottom fan (2) rotary
switch clockwise. The rotary switches engage one after the other at the
three levels (small, middle, large).
To switch off the heating system, turn the Top fan (1) and Bottom fan (2) ro-
tary switches ant-clockwise.
Setting the You can set the temperature of the heating air which is produced with the
temperature Air temperature regulator:
Cold: Push the regulator as far as possible in the direction of the
symbol (2). The heat exchanger is not heated in this position.
Warm: Push the regulator in the direction of the symbol (1). The air
temperature is increased continuously.
Setting recircu- Fresh air or recirculated air can be used as suction air of the heating system.
lated / fresh air You can set the desired level of suction air with the Fresh / Recirculated air
regulator:
Recirculated air mode: Push the regulator as far as possible in the direc-
tion of the symbol (1).
Fresh air mode: Push the regulator as far as possible in the direc-
tion of the symbol (2).
Mixed air: Push the regulator in a position between symbol
(1) and (2).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Setting the air You can adjust the air distribution by switching on the various fans:
distribution
Air vents only Turn the Top fan (1) rotary switch to the desired
Windscreen and centre: level.
Air vents only Cab floor: Turn the Bottom fan (2) rotary switch to the de-
sired level.
All vents: Turn the Top fan rotary switch (1) and the Bottom
fan rotary switch (2) to the desired level.
The Top fan supplies the air vents (1) and (2) at
the windscreen and at the top of the
instrument panel.
The Bottom fan supplies the air vents (3), (4)
and (5) at the centre of the windscreen and on
the cab floor.
You can also set the direction of the air flow at

the air vents (2) and (3) and (5).
Adjusting the air vents

There are two kinds of air vents that are oper-
ated in different ways.
Version 1 (1)
Open air vent: Push regulator (1.2) up.
Direct air flow: Push regulator (1.1) to
the left or right.
Close air vent: Push regulator (1.2)
down.
Version 2 (2)
Open air vent and Push regulator (2.1) to
direct air flow: the left or right.
Close air vent: Push regulator (2.1) to
the left or right.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Ventilating the This section describes how you can set the heating to ventilate the driver's
driver's cab cab. With additional equipment, you can also ventilate the driver's cab with
the roof fan;à Roof ventilator.
• Set the heating for ventilation of the driver's

cab in the following way:
– Air temperature regulator to the symbol (4)
for cold
– Fresh air / recirculated air regulator to the
symbol (3) for fresh air
– Top fan rotary switch (1) and Bottom fan
rotary switch (2) to the desired level.
– Open all air vents and adjust the air flow if
necessary.
H
If the front window becomes foggy, then let the air out only from the air
vents of the front window and shift the Air temperature regulator to the sym-
bol for warm.
With additional equipment, you can also switch on the air-conditioning sys-
tem to dry out the air;à p. 6 - 78.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.5.2 Roof ventilator
With additional equipment, there is a ventilation fan for the driver's cab in
the roof of the cab.
~ You may determine the direction of the air flow (in or out) using the Roof fan
rocker switch located on the front instrument panel.
To ventilate: Switch pressed up

Off: Middle position
Air in: Switch pressed down
You can regulate the air volume with the hand-

wheel (1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.5.3 Auxiliary heater with timer
There is a water auxiliary heater with timer as additional equipment.

You can use the auxiliary heater to:
– Either preheat the diesel engine or
– Preheat the diesel engine and driver's cab simultaneously.
H
If you run the auxiliary heater while the engine is off, the batteries will run
down. If you use the auxiliary heater frequently, you must recharge the bat-
teries at shorter intervals.
Preheating the Adjust the heating system as follows if only the diesel engine is to be
diesel engine preheated with the auxiliary heater:
• Push the Air temperature regulator in the direction of the symbol (3) for
warm.
• Switch off both fans. To do this, turn the Top fan (2) and Bottom fan (1) ro-
tary switches anti-clockwise as far they will go.
Preheating the Adjust the heating system as follows if the driver's cab is to be preheated
driver's cab with the auxiliary heater, in addition to the diesel engine:
• Push the Air temperature regulator in the direction of the symbol (3) for
warm.
• Switching to recirculated air mode. For this propose, push the Fresh / Re-
circulated air regulator as far as possible in the direction of the symbol (4).
• Switch on the fan. To do this, turn the Top fan (2) and Bottom fan (1) rotary
switches to the desired level.
• Open the air vents; à p. 6 - 66.
H
If you heat the driver's cab at the same time, the amount of time required to
preheat the diesel engine will increase significantly.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Switching on the • Before switching on, check if the auxiliary heater can be operated at the
auxiliary heating current site of the truck crane. Find out, if necessary, about existing
system sources of danger that can lead to an explosion.
G
Risk of explosion when working with the auxiliary heater!
Operation of the auxiliary heater is impermissible:
– At service stations and tank farms
– A locations where flammable gas or vapours are found or can be formed
(e.g. at fuel stations and chemical factories)
– At locations where explosive dust is found or can be formed (e.g. coal
dust, wood dust, grain dust)
G
Risk of suffocation when working with the auxiliary heater!
Do not operate the auxiliary heater and the auxiliary heater with timer in
closed rooms (e.g. garages).
The auxiliary heater is not switched on if the Air temperature regulator is at

the stop at the symbol (2) (cold).
• Push the Air temperature regulator in the direction of the symbol (1) to the
desired temperature.
H
This section describes how to switch the heater on manually. You can also
save the switch-on time and have the auxiliary heater turned on
automatically; à
Saving automatic heating start, p. 6 - 72.
• Turn on the ignition; à Switching on the ignition, p. 5 - 11.
v • Press the push-button for Switching the auxiliary heater on / off once.
The auxiliary heater switches on and the display and the switches light up.
When the diesel engine is running, the auxiliary heater supports the heating
power of the diesel engine if outdoor temperatures are low and it has not
sufficiently heated the coolant.
When the operating temperature of the diesel engine has been reached, a
thermostat turns off the heater, while the pump of the heating system re-
mains on.
H
Check whether the auxiliary heater is switched off whenever you park the
truck crane with the battery master switch switched on. In this way, you can
prevent the auxiliary heater from restarting and running down the batteries
after the diesel engine has cooled down.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Switching off the This section describes how to switch the heater off manually. When the aux-
auxiliary heater iliary heater was automatically switched on, then it switches off again after
a specific heating duration. You can set the heating duration time;
à Setting automatic heating duration, p. 6 - 73.
v • To switch off press the Switch auxiliary heater on / off push-button once.
The auxiliary heater switches off immediately.
H
If you turn off the ignition while the auxiliary heater is in operation, the
heater will continue running for a certain period. You can set this remaining
time; à Setting the remaining time, p. 6 - 74.
Setting the time Always set the current time and current weekday. These settings are re-
and weekday quired for the correct switch-on time for automatic heating start.
If the power supply is interrupted, all symbols in the Auxiliary heater display
will flash and you must set the time and day again.
• Press the Set time / day push-button (w) for longer than 2 seconds.
The displayed time will flash, e.g. 10.00.
st • Set the desired current time with the Input push-buttons while the display
is flashing, e.g. 14.00.
• Wait five seconds. The new time is saved and then the weekday (e.g. MO
top left) flashes.
st • Set the current day with the Input push-buttons while the display is flash-
ing.
After five seconds the display stops flashing and the current time is dis-
played.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Saving automatic Before setting, check whether the current time and day are set so that the
heating start automatic heating start will be activated at the desired time; à
Setting the
time and weekday, p. 6 - 71.
The auxiliary heater can be set so that it switches on automatically and re-
mains on for a particular length of time. The heating start can be set up to
seven days in advance, and the time it is switched on for can be set to be-
tween ten minutes and two hours.
There are three storage locations in which you can store different heating
starts and then call them up at some later point.
H
If you call up values in order to change them with the following setting pro-
cess, they will flash for five seconds. Input must be made within this time
span. After five seconds, the value stops flashing and is saved as the new
value.
u • Press the Call up storage locations push-button once.
In the Auxiliary heater display, the storage location called up (e.g. 2 bottom
left) and the time of the heating start last saved will flash (e.g. 6.00 am).
st • Adjust the time for the desired heating start with the two Input push-but-
tons (e.g. 8.00 am).
Wait approx. five seconds. The new time is saved and then the weekday
(e.g. MO top left) of the heating start flashes.
st • Set the day for the desired heating start with the two Input push-buttons.
Wait approx. five seconds. The new weekday is saved and then the current
time is displayed. You have now allocated a new heating start for this stor-
age location. The heating start is now switched on; à
Switching automatic
heating start on / off, p. 6 - 73.
• If you want to save one or two other heating starts in the other two stor-
age locations, keep pressing the Call up storage locations push-button until
the corresponding storage place is shown in the bottom left of the Auxil-
iary heater display. The storage process ensues in the same manner as de-
scribed above.
• After you have stored the heating start, you can also set the duration for
heating after the automatic switch-on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Setting automatic The heating duration after the auxiliary heater has been switched on auto-
heating duration matically is set independently of the stored heating starts and then applies
to all heating starts which are called up.
v • Switch off the auxiliary heating.
s Press the Input push-button for longer than three seconds.
The last heating duration which was set (in minutes) now flashes in the Aux-
iliary heater display for five seconds (e.g. 27 minutes).
st • Set the desired heating duration with the Input push-buttons while the
value is flashing.
You can set a heating duration of 10 to 120 minutes.
Wait five seconds. The new heating duration is saved and the Auxiliary
heater display changes back to the current time (e.g. 14.00).
Switching auto- To switch on an automatic heating start, you must call up the particular stor-
matic heating age location where the desired heating start is stored.
start on / off
u • Press the Call up storage locations push-button once; the Auxiliary heater dis-
play will flash for five seconds.
When the display stops flashing, a storage location is shown in the bottom
left next to the time (e.g. 2). The heating start in this storage location is now
activated.
If you want to activate a different heating start, press the Call up storage loca-
tions push-button until the desired storage location is displayed. When the
status display stops flashing, that heating start is activated.
H
Each time the button is pressed, the storage location flashes in the display
for five seconds and you can read the time and day of the heating start if you
do not know the stored values.
To switch off the automatic heating start, press the Call up storage locations
push-button until only the current time is displayed and there is no longer a
number in the bottom left.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Setting the If the ignition is turned off with the auxiliary heater turned on, the auxiliary
remaining time heater will continue to run for the set time remaining. To change the remain-
ing time, the auxiliary heater must have entered the remaining time period.
v • Switch on the auxiliary heater.
The auxiliary heater stays on and the last remaining time period set is
shown in the Auxiliary heater display in minutes (e.g. 27 minutes).
st • Set the desired remaining time with the Input push-buttons while the
value is flashing. You can set a heating duration of 1 to 120 minutes.
• Wait five seconds until the Auxiliary heater display is no longer flashing
and the current time is displayed again. The remaining time is now set.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.6 Air-conditioning system

With additional equipment, a refrigerant compressor is driven by the diesel
engine. When the driving mode is switched on, the refrigerant compressor
provides the air-conditioning system of the driver's cab. When the crane op-
eration is switched on, the same refrigerant compressor provides the air-
conditioning system of the crane cab.
H
Further information on the crane cab air conditioning can be found under
the heading Air conditioning, p. 6 - 77.
Switching on • Switch off the driver's cab auxiliary heater; à Switching off the auxiliary
heater, p. 6 - 71.
• Push the Air temperature regulator to the symbol (1) for cold (exception: de-
humidifying the driver's cab; à p. 6 - 78).
• Turn the Top fan (1) rotary switch to the desired level.
The air-conditioning system only cools down the air which is circulated by
the Top fan.
• Switch off the Bottom fan. For this, turn the Bottom fan rotary switch (2) as
far as possible anti-clockwise (exception: dehumidifying the driver's cab;
à p. 6 - 78).
• To switch on the air-conditioning system, press down the Air-conditioning

system on / off (1) rocker switch.
• To cool down the driver's cab more quickly, switch to recirculated air.
To do so, push the Fresh / Recirculated air regulator to the symbol (1).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Setting the air dis- The cooled down air escapes from the air vents at the windscreen and at the
tribution top of the instrument panel.
• Adjust these air vents in such a way that the cool air can mix well with the
air in the driver's cab; à Adjusting the air vents, p. 6 - 66.
Switching off
• To switch off the air-conditioning system, press up the Air-conditioning

system on / off (1) rocker switch.
• Turn the Top fan (1) rotary switch anti-clockwise as far as it will go if no air
is to be recirculated in the driver's cab.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.6.1 Air conditioning
How to use the air Avoid excessive cooling of the air in the cab.
conditioning effec- At an outside temperature of 40 °C, for example, the internal temperature
tively should be about 26 °C to 30 °C, i.e. the temperature difference should be 10
°C to 14 °C at most.
If the outside temperature is lower, you should accordingly select a lower
temperature difference. Excessive cooling frequently results in physical
discomfort, mostly after you have left the cab.
Avoid exposing your body directly to cold air. Direct the air stream from the
jets in the cab floor so that the cold air mixes thoroughly with the warm air
in the cab. This produces an even temperature throughout the cab and
ensures cooling without a draught.
When using recirculated air for drying the driver's cab air, you should switch
over to fresh air mode to ensure a fresh supply oxygen at the same time.
Adjust the cooling system as actually needed:
Initially, if the truck crane has, for example, been parked in strong sunlight
for a long time, the cooling system should be operated at maximum cooling
capacity and with the fan at setting 3 with the diesel engine running.
The driver's cab doors or at least the windows should be kept open for a
time to ventilate the cab. The cooling-down process can be accelerated by
increasing the engine speed.
During continuous operation of the air-conditioning system, close the
windows and other air vents to ensure that the driver's cab can be cooled
adequately.
When the desired inside temperature is reached, turn down the blower to
level 2. Fan level 1 is sufficient if only a low level of cooling is required.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Dry air in the On humid days at the turn of the season, you can dehumidify the air in the
driver's cab driver's cab by operating the air-conditioning system in the combined
heating and cooling mode.
As this involves the heating and air-conditioning system functioning "in op-
position to each other", dehumidifying produces only little or no heat.
• Switch on the air-conditioning system by pressing the Air-conditioning sys-

tem on / off (1) rocker switch down.
• Turn the Top fan (2) rotary switch to the de-

sired level.
• Also switch the heating on as follows:
– Bottom fan rotary switch (1) to the desired
level
– Air temperature regulator in the direction of
the symbol (3) for warm
– Fresh air / recirculated air regulator to
symbol (4) for recirculated air.
The heating circuit with the Bottom fan now heats the bottom part of the
driver's cab and, as a result, the air absorbs the humidity from the driver's
cab.
The heating circuit with the Top fan sucks in this humid air and directs it first
via the air conditioning system. Part of the humidity condensates in the pro-
cess. Then this air is heated and blown into the top of the driver's cab. This
dry air now mixes with the humid air in the cab floor area and again absorbs
humidity before being directed through the air conditioning system. This
circuit dries the air in the driver's cab.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
6.7 Towing a trailer

With additional equipment, a towbar coupling has been installed on the rear
side of the chassis to facilitate towing a trailer.
Please observe the permissible trailer load of your truck crane.
G
Risk of accidents by the trailer rolling away!
Before coupling or uncoupling the trailer, it must be secured with the trailer
parking brake as well as with chocks to prevent it from rolling away. Ensure
that it is still possible to swivel the front axle of the trailer.
H
Before coupling the trailer, adjust the towbar to the height of the towbar
coupling.
G
Risk of accidents when coupling the trailer!
No one may stand between the truck crane and the trailer when coupling
the two vehicles.
G
Risk of accidents due to unexpected acceleration!
When you move slowly to the trailer, the transmission automatically shifts
into manoeuvring mode. If the warning buzzer sound when doing this, re-
lease the accelerator immediately.
cally within a few seconds. The truck crane could accelerate unexpectedly
and people might be crushed between the trailer and the truck crane.
H
Please observe the relevant national regulations regarding the coupling and
uncoupling of the trailer.
Effects on the axle Pay attention to effects on the axle loads when towing a trailer. The axle
loads loads of your truck crane change in the following manner when operating
with central axle trailers:
– Per 100 kg of drawbar load, the axle loads on the first and second axle
lines are reduced by 41 kg
– Per 100 kg of drawbar load, the axle loads on the third and fourth axle
lines are increased by 91 kg each.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Coupling the
trailer
G
Risk of injury if the automatic closing device is actuated!
Do not put your hand into the coupling jaw when the towbar coupling is
open.
This can activate the automatic closing device, making the coupling pin
move down with great force and seriously injuring your hand.
• Open the towbar coupling.

To do this, push the hand lever (1) up. The
lever locks in the uppermost position.
• Check that the coupling jaw (2) is stable. It
must not be allowed to move to the left or
the right when the towbar coupling is open.
• Adjust the towbar of your trailer to the
height of the towbar coupling and carefully
drive the truck crane in reverse towards the
towbar.
The towbar coupling automatically locks when
the eyes of the towbar and towbar coupling
are correctly aligned. The hand lever (1) disen-
gages from the uppermost position and drops
down.
H
Make sure that you check the prescribed condition of the coupling after ev-
ery coupling process.
The control pin (1) must not protrude from the

guide bushing after the trailer has been cou-
pled.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
G
Risk of accidents if the trailer is incorrectly coupled!
If the control pin is protruding from the guide bushing (this can also be es-
tablished in the dark by touch), the trailer is not correctly coupled and could
be disengaged from the towbar coupling when you are driving.
Connecting the
supply lines
• Insert the plug of the trailer's electrical sys-

tem into the socket (5). Plug the ABS con-
nection cable (if one is attached) into the ap-
propriate socket (3) (additional equipment).
• First connect the hose of the brake cable to
the yellow coupling head (4).
• Then connect the hose of the supply cable to
the red coupling head (1).
Another cable is connected to the socket (2)
(additional equipment) for special equipment
of the trailer.
G
Risk of accidents if the hoses are too short or incorrectly positioned!
The hose lines must not come off when driving around corners. When con-
necting the hoses, ensure that the length is sufficient and that the hoses
have enough clearance.
• Check that the trailer's direction indicators and light system are working.
• Test the service brake and the parking brake immediately after setting off.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Removing supply-
lines
G
Risk of accidents if these steps are not carried out in the proper order!
It is imperative that the hoses be disconnected in the order specified below.
If the hose for the brake line is disconnected first, the trailer brake will be
released and the trailer will begin to roll.
• First disconnect the hose of the supply line

from the red coupling head (1). The trailer
brakes automatically.
• Then disconnect the hose of the brake line
from the yellow coupling head (4).
• Pull the plugs of the trailer's electrical
system out of the sockets (2), (3) and (5).
Pull the ABS connection cable (if one is
attached) out of the respective socket.
Uncoupling the
trailer
G
Do not put your hand into the coupling jaw when the towbar coupling is
open.
This can actuate the automatic closing device, make the coupling pin move
down with great force and seriously injure your hand.
• Use the trailer service brake and chocks as

prescribed to prevent the trailer from roll-
ing.
• Open the towbar coupling.
To do this, push the hand lever (1) up. The
lever locks in the uppermost position.
• Drive the truck crane carefully away from
the trailer.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
G
Risk of injury when closing the towbar coupling by hand!
When closing, the hand lever moves down with great force in the direction
of the coupling jaw. Therefore start the closing process only by moving the
lever briefly in the direction of the coupling jaw with the hand balls.
If you hold the hand lever and move it down, it may carry your hand with it
and crush it.
If no trailer is connected, you must close the

towbar coupling by hand. Proceed as follows:
• Move the hand lever knob (1) briefly in the

direction of the coupling jaw (observe direc-
tion of arrow).
G
Always close the coupling when no trailer is connected. This prevents peo-
ple being injured by the automatic closing device being activated uninten-
tionally.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Test position of When driving the truck crane with a trailer attached, you can check whether
the parking brake the braking force of the truck crane suffices to brake both the truck crane and
when towing a trailer on downhill and uphill slopes.
trailer
• When the parking brake is shut, push the parking brake lever downward,
pull it backward and hold it in this position.
This releases the parking brake on the trailer; the parking brake on the truck
crane remains actuated.
In this way you can check whether the braking force of the truck crane's
parking brake alone suffices to brake the truck crane and trailer should the
trailer's parking brake somehow malfunction (e.g. if a brake hose bursts).
• Release the parking brake lever again. The parking brake lever falls into
the Parking brake engaged position and the trailer's parking brake is again
engaged.
S
Risk of accidents by the truck crane rolling away!
In addition to the parking brake, always secure the trailer with chocks when
parked on uphill or downhill slopes in order to prevent rolling. Do this even
if the parking brake functioned perfectly when you checked it. Observe the
corresponding regulations in your country when doing this.
H
Wheel chocks are supplied only when they are included in the package for
the specific country.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7
7.1 Driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
7.1.1 Information on how to use the tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
7.1.2 Tables for maximum axle load 12 t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 3
7.2 Rigging work for driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
7.2.1 Switching on the slewing gear freewheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7- 8
7.2.2 Switching on boom floating position. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
7.2.3 Switching on boom pre-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
7.2.4 Switching the superstructure driving lights on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 14
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Driving modes and rigging for on-road driving
7.1 Driving modes

This chapter contains:
– Tables with driving modes of the GMK 4080-1, where the maximum axle
load is 12 t .
– Rigging work that is necessary when the main boom is set down on a
trailer for driving.
7.1 Driving modes
Information on the For the GMK 4080-1 truck crane there are driving modes with maximum
axle loads axle loads of 12 t .
This section contains the respective tables for the different driving modes.
H
The GMK 4080-1 truck crane is supplied fitted for driving with maximum
axle loads of 12 t . The German GROVE GmbH would like to point out that if
the truck crane is driven with axle loads greater than 12 t the brake system
may overheat and the braking deceleration will no longer be ensured.
If country-specific regulations allow driving with axle loads greater that 12 t
, the crane driver / crane operator bears sole responsibility for driving in this
condition and for any damage which may result. This also applies to dam-
age which occurs due to premature wear.
G
Risk of accidents due to increased braking distance!
When driving with axle loads in excess of 12 t the braking deceleration re-
quired by the EU partial type-approval cannot be met. Please bear in mind
that the braking distance of the truck crane will lengthen as a result.
S
Risk of damage due to premature wear!
Even when the axle loads only briefly exceed 12 t premature wear of parts
(brake system, steering, tyres, wheels, suspension, drive shafts) that are
under particular stress cannot be ruled out.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.1 Driving modes
7.1.1 Information on how to use the tables
The tables consist of three parts:

– The top part, Equipment, gives the driving mode of your truck crane. De-
termine which driving mode applies to your truck crane. Each truck crane
has only one driving mode.
– The middle part, Rigging mode, lists the necessary rigging state for this
driving mode and the accessories which you may transport with it.
Example of how to use the table:

If your truck crane is equipped with 14.00 tyres, 8 x 8 x 8 drive and eddy current
retarder, the driving mode given in the upper section, beside “Equipment”, will
be driving mode 4.
According to the data in the lower section, beside "Rigging mode", no spare
wheel may be installed on the rear of carrier.
In this rigging mode:
– The single-sheave hook block may be attached to the front bumper.
– The 6.8 t counterweight may be attached to the turntable.
– The 2.5 t counterweight section may rest on the counterweight platform.
– The 15 m swing-away lattice extension may be folded on the side of the main
boom.
The following tables show the axle loads and the total weights in the various
driving modes.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.1 Driving modes
7.1.2 Tables for maximum axle load 12 t
For 14.00 R25 The following table only applies for mounted 14.00 R25 tyres.
tyres Also observe the effects on the axle loads when towing a trailer;
à p. 6 - 79.
Driving mode
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14.00 R25 tyres ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
8 x 6 x 8 drive ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Equipment
8 x 8 x 8 drive ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Towbar coupling ✔ ✔
Eddy current retarder ✔ ✔
Auxiliary hoist or compensation
weight attached ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
14.00 R25 spare tyre at the rear ● ●

1-sheave hook block attached to the
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
bumper1)
Rigging mode
15 m two-stage swing-away lattice

● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
extension folded on the side
6.8 t counterweight attached to the
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
turntable
2.5 t counterweight section on the
● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
counterweight platform
1)
The weight of the hook blocks is based on the information in this operating manual;
à p. 15 - 4.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.1 Driving modes
For 16.00 R25 The following table only applies to mounted 16.00 R25 tyres.
à p. 6 - 79.
Driving mode
1 2 3 4 5
16.00 R25 tyres ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
8 x 6 x 8 drive ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Equipment
8 x 8 x 8 drive ✔
Towbar coupling ✔
Eddy current retarder ✔
Auxiliary hoist or compensation weight in-
stalled ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
1-sheave hook block attached to the bumper 1) ● ● ● ● ●

15 m two-stage swing-away lattice extension
● ●
folded on the side
Rigging mode
8,7 m two-stage swing-away lattice extension

● ●
folded on the side
6.8 t counterweight attached to the turntable
● ● ● ● ●
2.5 t counterweight section on the counter-

● ● ● ● ●
weight platform
1)
à p. 15 - 4.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.1 Driving modes
For 20.50 R25 The following table only applies to installed 20.50 R25 tyres.
à p. 6 - 79.
Driving mode
1 2 3 4 5 6
20.50 R25 tyres ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
8 x 6 x 8 drive ✔ ✔
Equipment
8 x 8 x 8 drive ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Towbar coupling ✔ ✔
Eddy current retarder ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
Auxiliary hoist or compensation weight
attached ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
20.50 R25 spare tyre at the rear ●

1-sheave hook block attached to the
● ● ● ● ● ●
bumper 1)
15 m two-stage swing-away lattice ex-
● ●
tension folded on the side
Rigging mode
8,7 m two-stage swing-away lattice ex-

●
tension folded on the side
● ● ●
turntable
● ● ●
turntable
2.5 t counterweight section on the
● ● ● ● ●
counterweight platform
1)
à p. 15 - 4.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.1 Driving modes
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.2 Rigging work for driving with a trailer

In order to adapt the axle loads to conform with the regulations for on-road
driving which apply in the country where the truck crane is used, you can
set down the main boom on a trailer (dolly) with the corresponding addi-
tional equipment.
If you want to place the main boom on a trailer (dolly) for driving, the truck
crane must be equipped with slewing gear freewheel and boom floating po-
sition (both additional equipment).
Before driving, you must do the following:

– Switch on the slewing gear freewheel; à p. 7 - 8.
– Switch on the boom floating position; à p. 7 - 10.
– Switch on the boom pre-tensioner if available (can be supplied as further
additional equipment); àp. 7 - 12.
– If also equipped with houselock, check whether the houselock in the crane
cab is switched on; à p. 12 - 17.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.2.1 Switching on the slewing gear freewheel
This section only applies whenever a slewing gear freewheel is fitted as ad-
ditional equipment and where the boom is placed on a trailer for on-road
driving.
If the boom is placed on the trailer for on-road driving, the superstructure
must be able to turn freely (e.g. when travelling around bends). The slewing
gear brake must therefore be locked while disengaged (slewing gear free-
wheel).
H
If the truck crane is equipped with a houselock (additional equipment), this
must be switched off before you can place the main boom on the trailer;
à Switching the houselock on / off, p. 12 - 17.
G
Risk of accidents during on-road driving with the houselock switched on!
The houselock (additional equipment) will not be automatically switched
off when the slewing gear freewheel is switched on.
For this reason, always switch the houselock off before you place the main
boom on the trailer, so that the superstructure can turn freely when driving
on roads.
• Place the boom on the trailer as described in section Switching on boom

floating position, p. 7 - 10.
Prerequisites You can only switch on the slewing gear freewheel when the following
conditions have been fulfilled:
– The diesel engine is running.
1 – The slewing gear is switched on and the Slewing on / off indicator lamp is
shown on the Crane control display in green; àp. 12 - 83.
t – The service brake is released and the Slewing gear brake indicator lamp
goes out on the Crane control insert; à p. 12 - 83.
– The Slewing gear (1) service brake pedal is not activated; à p. 12 - 88.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
: H If the pin cannot be pushed in during the following step, you can relieve the
system by performing Incline the crane cab into a horizontal position. Press up
the Incline crane cab rocker button.
S
Risk of damage to the slewing gear brake
Always close the valve on the slewing gear before switching on slewing
gear freewheel. In this way you prevent the slewing gear brake from being
partially closed and being damaged when the pin is pushed in.
• Close the valve (5).

• Remove the lock (4) from the bore hole (2).
• Push the pin (3) inward as far as it will go.
• Guide the lock with the yoke through the
bore hole (1) and close it.
The slewing gear freewheel is now switched
on and secured against being switched off by
unauthorised persons.
Switch on the slewing gear freewheel on the
second slewing gear in the same way.
H
Switching off the slewing gear freewheel after on-road driving;
à p. 13 - 20.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.2.2 Switching on boom floating position
This section only applies where boom floating position is fitted as additional
equipment and the boom is placed on a trailer for on-road driving.
If the boom is placed on the trailer for road driving, the trailer with the boom
must be able to move up and down freely, e.g. when driving in hilly regions.
To make this "floating" of the boom possible, the piston rod side of the der-
ricking cylinder must be hydraulically connected with the hydraulic tank by
switching a valve.
G
Risk of accidents when driving with boom floating position switched off!
Always switch the boom floating position on when driving with the trailer
and secure it with the padlock against being switched off by unauthorised
persons.
When driving with the boom floating position switched off, the trailer can
hang on the main boom with its full weight when the surface is uneven. On
the one side the axle loads increase suddenly, on the other side this situa-
tion can lead to the truck crane tipping over when driving around corners.
Setting the main • Enter the SLI code for the current outrigger span (or for the working posi-
boom down on tion Free on wheels).
the trailer
• Fully retract the main boom.
• Raise the main boom to an angle permitted within the working range.
• Turn the superstructure to the 0° to the rear working position and place the
main boom on a trailer.
G
Risk of accidents due to the main boom falling down!
You may only switch on boom floating position when the boom has been
placed onto the trailer.
In this way you prevent the raised boom from falling down.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
H
Due to different fitting positions of the changeover valve, the position of the
lever can deviate from the following illustrations. The following, however,
always applies to the position of the hand lever:
– For Driving, the lever is always pointing vertically upwards or down-
wards. Boom floating position is switched on.
– For Crane operation, the lever is always pointing horizontally outwards or
inwards. Boom floating position is switched off.
Tap I (1) is located on the derricking cylinder.
• Remove the padlock (2) on the lever.

• Shift the hand lever to position A (vertical).
• Secure the hand lever with the padlock and
remove the key.
Boom floating position is now switched on.
à Switching
H
Switching off the boom floating position after on-road driving.
off the boom floating position, p. 13 - 18.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.2.3 Switching on boom pre-tensioning
This section only applies to additional equipment with boom pre-tension-

ing.
If the main boom has been set down on a trailer for on-road driving, you can
change the axle loads on the rear axle lines by means of a hydraulic switch-
ing operation. To do so, connect one side of the derricking cylinder to a
pressure accumulator.
The hand valves I to IV are located in the hydraulic circuit for the boom pre-
tensioning. Set the valves to the following positions:
Valve I (on derricking cylinder with padlock):

The valve I is at the proper setting when boom floating position is switched
on; à p. 7 - 10.
Valve IV
The valve IV (1) is located directly on the der-
ricking cylinder.
• Shift the hand lever to position B for driving

mode.
Valves II and III

The valves II and III and the pressure gauge
(3) are on the left at the turntable, behind the
crane cab and access ladder.
• Switch valve II (2) to position A (closed).
• Switch valve III (1) to position B (opened).
You can now fill the pressure accumulator.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
• Open the counterweight % submenu.

• Press the button (1) – retract lifting cylinders.
The pressure accumulator is filled.
• Fill up the pressure accumulator until the

pressure on the pressure gauge (3) stops in-
creasing.
The hydraulic system is designed in such a
way that the pressure in the reservoir can
increase only until the required pressure for
pressurizing the boom is reached.
The exact value for the required pressure can
be found in the hydraulic circuit diagram.
• Switch valve III (1) to position A (closed).
Valve II (2) remains in position A (closed).
Boom pre-tensioning is now switched on.
à Switching off
H
Switching off boom pre-tensioning after on-road driving;
boom pre-tensioning, p. 13 - 19.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
7.2.4 Switching the superstructure driving lights on/off
The Superstructure driving lights comprise the

lights (2) on the turntable and the lights (3) on
the main boom head.
With standard equipment, lights (2) and (3)

are always switched on or off together with
the parking light and the headlights.
With additional equipment consisting of the

switch (1), lights (2) and (3) can be switched on
or off when the parking light or headlights are
switched on.
Switching off When the boom is set down on a trailer, you can switch off the Superstructure
driving lights when necessary, e.g. in order to conform to country-specific
regulations for the colour of front and rear lights.
• Push the switch (1) to the right – towards the outside.
Switching on When the main boom is in the boom rest, the Superstructure driving lights
must be switched on.
• Push the switch (1) to the left – towards the turntable.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8
8.1 Emergency stop device on carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
8.1.1 Diesel engine emergency stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
8.2 What to do in the event of a breakdown in road traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
8.3 Towing the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
8.3.1 Towing in the event of engine or transmission damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
8.3.2 Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
8.4 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
8.4.1 Wheel change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
8.4.2 Filling the tyres yourself at tyre inflator connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
8.5 Tilting and lowering the driver's cabin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
8.5.1 Prerequisites and information on tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
8.5.2 With mechanical tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
8.5.3 With hydraulic tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
8.6 Emergency operation for lifting the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
8.6.1 Connecting / Disconnecting the hose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 24
8.6.2 Establishing necessary hydraulic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 25
8.6.3 Switching the continuous operation on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 26
8.6.4 Performing emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 27
8.6.5 After the emergency activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 28
8.7 Fuses on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
8.7.1 Fuses in the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 30
8.7.2 Fuses in battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 35
8.7.3 Fuses on I/O circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 36
8.8 Finding and eliminating malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37
8.8.1 Malfunctions to the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 37
8.8.2 Differential lock malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 39
8.8.3 Malfunctions to the transmission with automatic gear change. . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 40
8.8.4 Steering malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 41
8.8.5 Service brake malfunctions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 42
8.8.6 Malfunctions to the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 42
8.8.7 Tachograph malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 43
8.8.8 Suspension locking system malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 44
8.8.9 Level adjustment system malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 44
8.8.10 Malfunctions to the carrier electronic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8- 45
8.9 Procedure in the event of malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
08.03.2006
8.9.1 Switching the fan thermostat to emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51

8.9.2 Procedure in the event of transmission malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Malfunctions in driving mode
8.1 Emergency stop device on carrier

In an emergency, you can also switch off the diesel engine outside the driv-
er's cab on the GMK 4080-1 truck crane (e.g. if the truck crane has started to
roll unchecked or if the ignition lock fails).
You can turn off the truck crane from outside of the driver's cab by activat-
ing the Diesel engine emergency stop switch.
H
The battery master switch cannot be used as an emergency stop switch for
the diesel engine. The diesel engine continues to run after the battery mas-
ter switch has been switched off.
8.1.1 Diesel engine emergency stop switch
Emergency stop There are three different Diesel engine emergency stop switches on the truck
switch crane.
On both sides of the carrier, there is a Diesel

engine emergency stop switch (1) and (2).
The emergency stop switch (3) is active when-
ever the hand-held control is connected.
• Press one of the Diesel engine emergency-

stop switches (1), (2) or (3).
The switch engages and the diesel engine
stops.
If the truck crane is additionally equipped with

an air suction block, the air suction block is au-
tomatically switched on together with the ac-
tuation of the emergency stop switch; à In an
emergency, using the air intake inhibitor, p. 5 - 21.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Resetting the You can only restart the diesel engine if you have reversed the emergency
emergency stop stop switch.
switch

• Turn the actuated Diesel engine emergency
stop switch (1), (2) or (3) until it disengages.
Now you can start the diesel engine again.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.2 What to do in the event of a breakdown in road traffic

Road traffic regulations require that a vehicle which has stopped in the traf-
fic lane, or on the verge or hard shoulder of a public roadway due to a break-
down or for any other reason be marked using the prescribed traffic mark-
ers.
Please observe the following if a breakdown occurs:

• Keep calm.
• Slow the vehicle down. Watch the traffic behind you when braking.
• Stop at a location that is safe for you, your vehicle and those behind you.
G
Risk of accidents due to poor visibility!
If possible, do not stop in a tunnel or directly after a curve.
• Secure the vehicle.

• Turn on the hazard warning lights.
• Secure the breakdown area:
– Set up a warning triangle.
– Set up a signal lamp or torch.
G
Risk of accidents due to poor visibility!
Warning triangles, signal lamps and torches must be set up in front of the
breakdown area in such a way as to prevent rear end collisions, particularly
in curves.
Try to repair the damage yourself. If this is not possible, notify the local
CraneCARE or have the vehicle towed away; à Towing the truck crane,
p. 8 - 5.
G
Risk of accidents during repair work in danger areas!
In danger areas (e.g. tunnels, crossroads, motorway bridges) even simple
repairs can be dangerous.
When in a danger area, only carry out that repair work which is required to
leave the area.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.3 Towing the truck crane

Observe the following when towing the truck crane:
– The truck crane may only be towed with a tow bar. Attach the towbar on
the tow-rod coupling on the front bumper of the truck crane and the tow
coupling of the towing vehicle.
– The statutory regulations concerning the overall length of the towing and
towed vehicle, including the towing bar, must be observed.
– If the diesel engine, the steering and the service brake still work, you may
tow the truck crane with a truck.
– If the diesel engine, the steering or the service brake no longer function
properly, the truck crane must be towed with a special breakdown truck.
The front towing coupling is designed for a maximum tractive force of 10 t.
The tractive force may go forwards or at an angle of 45° to both sides from
the longitudinal axle of the truck crane.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.3.1 Towing in the event of engine or transmission damage
The following information only applies to towing the truck crane out of
the immediate danger area in the event of damage to the engine or trans-
mission.
S
Risk of accidents and damage when towing the truck crane long distances!
Tow the truck crane at a maximum of 6 to 7 km/h and no further than 100
m . Additional measures must be taken for longer distances. In these cases,
contact CraneCARE at the respective location.
Compressed-air When the engine fails, the truck crane must be supplied with compressed
supply air by the towing vehicle so that the brake system is still supplied with com-
pressed air.
• Connect the filler connection (1) with the

Supply coupling head of the towing vehicle.
When towing, the following must be available
in the driver's cab:
– a supply pressure of at least 6 bar must be
displayed, and
– the lamp (2) must have gone out.
Electric power
supply
• Switch on the battery master switch.

• Turn on the ignition.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the trans-
mission
On the transfer
case
v45 • Press down the Transfer case neutral position rocker button. The On-road
driving and Off-road driving indicator lights must have gone out.
Axle drives • Switch off all transverse and longitudinal differential locks;
à Switching off the longitudinal differential locks, p. 6 - 53.
à Switching off the transverse differential locks, p. 6 - 55.
Parking brake
• Release the parking brake.

The f lamp must go out.
If the f lamp continues to light up, the supply pressure may be too low.
Depending on the compressed-air supply, allow the engine of the truck
crane or towing vehicle to continue running until the supply pressure has
increased to 8.1 bar.
If the f fails to go out, damage has occurred to the parking brake, and you
should contact CraneCARE at the respective location.
G
Risk of accidents in the event of defective brakes!
If damage has occurred to the service brake system, you may only tow the
truck crane away from the immediate danger area after receiving permis-
sion to do so from CraneCARE at the respective location.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Towing the truck If you have made all the adjustments in the way described in this section,
crane out of the you can tow the truck crane away from the danger area.
danger area
• Ensure that the tractor-vehicle only drives off slowly.
S
a

Starting to tow too quickly or in jolts can damage the chassis.
• Remember that the steering is sluggish.

If the engine fails, only the emergency steering pump will be available,
which only supports the steering from a speed of at least 2 km/h.
G
Risk of accidents due to stiff steering!
At speeds of less than 2 km/h, the truck crane can hardly be steered.
• Tow the truck crane at a maximum of 6 to 7 km/h.

• Ensure that the towing distance does not exceed 100 m .
S
Risk of accidents and damage when towing the truck crane long distances!
Tow the truck crane at a maximum of 6 to 7 km/h and no further than 100
m . Additional measures must be taken for longer distances. In these cases,
contact CraneCARE at the respective location.
8.3.2 Tow starting
Tow starting of the truck crane is not possible for reasons related to the
gearbox.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.4 Wheels and tyres

This section contains all information about changing a wheel and about the
use of the tyre inflator connection.
8.4.1 Wheel change
If a tyre is punctured while driving:

• Watch the traffic behind you and stop when it is safe.
H
Keep in mind that the steering wheel may jolt. Hold the steering wheel
firmly with both hands.
• Choose the flattest possible location to change the tyres. The chosen lo-
cation should not impede traffic or pose danger to you or the vehicle.
• Protect the vehicle and the breakdown area; à What to do in the event of a
breakdown in road traffic, p. 8 - 3.
G
Risk of accidents from overturning wheel!
If you temporarily lean a wheel against the truck crane when changing a
wheel, secure it against falling over with a rope.
Only move the outriggers if there is no wheel leaning against the truck
crane.
Removing a dam- • Engage the vehicle parking brake.

aged wheel
• Lock the suspension system.
• Lift the truck crane with the outriggers until the wheel that is to be
changed leaves the ground.
G
When unscrewing the last wheel nuts the wheel can slip off the hub and tip
in your direction. Secure the wheel and step back quickly if the wheel
threatens to tip.
• Unscrew the wheel nuts.

• Pull the wheel off the wheel studs (shake it off if necessary). Ensure that
the thread of the wheel studs is not damaged.
• Secure the wheel against falling over when you put it down temporarily.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Removing the You can lift the spare wheel (additional equipment) with chain hoist or with
wheel from the the truck crane itself. To do so, you may need to support the truck crane, de-
spare wheel pending on how much counterweight there is on the turntable.
holder
G
Danger of free-on-wheels truck crane overturning!
Always support the truck crane on outriggers before rotating the super-
structure.
You may not operate the truck crane in the Free on wheels working position
if the tyres are damaged.
G
Risk of overturning with a rigged outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m!
With an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m the superstructure may only be ro-
tated if there is a maximum of 6.8 t counterweight on the turntable and the
working radius permissible in the working range is maintained according
à
to the Lifting capacity table (at least 3.0 m); p. 13 - 118.
G
Changing the tyres without the appropriate lifting equipment for the spare
wheel is dangerous.
Have someone help you change the wheel whenever possible.
• Enter the current rigging mode at the SLI.

Only use lifting gear with sufficient lifting ca-
pacity, weight of the spare wheel; à p. 9 - 4.
• Attach the wheel.

• Remove the nuts (1).
• Raise the spare wheel from the spare wheel
holder.
• Secure the spare wheel against falling over
when you put it down temporarily. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Mounting a dam- If you are using the truck crane to lift the wheel onto the spare wheel holder,
aged wheel on the take note of the Danger of tipping with truck crane free on wheels! safety instruc-
spare wheel tion contained in the previous section.
holder
• Raise the wheel onto the spare wheel

holder.
• Fasten the spare wheel onto the holder with
four nuts (1), tightening moment: 500 Nm
each.
Mounting the
spare wheel
G
Danger of accidents!
Check the wheel rim, the tyres, the wheel nuts and the wheel studs for dam-
age before mounting the spare wheel.
Never mount damaged parts.
Mount only the manufacturer's original spare wheel or a permitted wheel
of the same size and load bearing capacity.
• Check whether the surface of the wheel rim and the hub are clean (no
paint, grease or oil).
• Grease the wheel studs slightly.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
• Put the wheel on the hub vertically.

• Extend or retract the outrigger cylinders until the holes in the wheel rims
align with the wheel studs.
• Push the wheel onto the wheel studs, shaking the wheel if necessary. En-
sure that the thread of the wheel studs is not damaged.
• Screw a wheel nut hand-tight onto both the upper and lower wheel studs.
• Screw on the rest of the wheel nuts hand-tight.
• Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise in three

stages in the order shown in the diagram us-
ing a torque wrench.
First stage: 200 Nm
Second stage: 400 Nm
Third stage: 650 Nm
Check the wheel nut torque after 50 km and
150 km with 650 Nm.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.4.2 Filling the tyres yourself at tyre inflator connection
The tyre inflator hose is available as additional equipment. You should only
fill the tyres using the tyre inflator hose in an emergency.
The tyres can only be filled up to a maximum operating pressure of the com-
pressed air system of 10 bar. Depending on the tyres, this pressure may not
correspond to the air pressure required by the tyres.
S
Risk of damage when tyre pressure is too high!
Depending on the size of the tyres, the prescribed pressure is under 10 bar;
à Tyres, p. 9 - 6. Fill the tyres no more than the prescribed amount of pres-
sure. In this way you prevent the tyres becoming damaged during driving,
and bursting.
You should always drive directly to a service station or workshop as soon

as you have refilled the tyres, and check the air pressure in the tyres there.
The tyre inflator hose is in the tool box of the truck crane.
A tyre inflator connection (2) and a screw connection (1) are attached to the
tyre inflator hose.
The tyre inflator hose is connected to the tyre inflator connection of the truck
crane's compressed air system.
Connecting the
filling hose
The tyre inflator connection (2) is on the left
side under the driver's cab, between the steps.
Unscrew the cap (3) from the tyre inflator
connection (2).
• Remove the cap (4) from the screw connec-
tion (1).
• Screw the screw connection (1) onto the tyre
inflator connection (2).
The valve in the filler connection opens as the
screw connection is screwed on, and the tyre
inflator hose will be pressurized at the same
pressure as in the truck crane's compressed
air system.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Filling the tyres The maximum operating pressure (10 bar ) of the compressed air system is
only attained with the vehicle engine running.
• Start the diesel engine; à p. 5 - 13.
• Fasten the tyre inflator connection (1) to the
tyre valve.
• Top up the tyre pressure.
• Remove the tyre inflator connection (1) from
the tyre valve.
Removing the tyre

inflator hose
• Unscrew the screw connection (1) from the
tyre inflator connection (2).
• Place the protective cap (4) onto the screw
connection (1).
• Screw the protective cap (3) onto the tyre in-
flator connection (2).
• Stow away the tyre inflator hose safely.
• Drive to a service station or workshop and
check the air pressure in the tyres.
S
Risk of damage to the compressed air system!
After increasing the tyre pressure, close the tyre inflator connection with
the cap.
In this way you prevent the thread on the tyre inflator connection from con-
tamination and damage, and also prevent contamination of the com-
08.03.2006
pressed air system.

GMK 4080-1
8.5 Tilting and lowering the driver's cabin

To tip the driver's cab (e.g. for maintenance work), the main boom must be
raised and the hoisting gear moved.
This means that the diesel engine needs to be stated.
H
If the diesel engine cannot be started, the boom must be raised using the
emergency operation facility; à Emergency operation for lifting the main boom,
p. 8 - 23.
A mechanical tilt mechanism is part of the standard equipment. The truck
crane can be equipped with a hydraulic tilt mechanism as additional equip-
ment.
The prerequisites for tilting are the same for both tilt mechanisms.
8.5.1 Prerequisites and information on tilting
Before tilting the driver's cab the following requirements must be met:
– All loose objects must be removed from the driver's cab.

– The main boom is raised to the extent (approx. 1.5 m) that the driver's cab
will not touch the main boom (nor the hose drum if equipped with one)
when tilting.
– Ensure that the hook block is outside of the driver's cab slewing range
(and the windscreen).
S
Risk of damage for the steering's universal joint!
The steering wheel may only be moved when the driver's cab is tipped to
the rear and locked. When moving the steering wheel into other driver's
cab positions, the steering's universal joint can be damaged.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.5.2 With mechanical tilt mechanism
This section describes the standard equipment. If a hydraulic tilt mechanism

is available; à
With hydraulic tilt mechanism, p. 8 - 20.
Unlock the driver's cab mechanically and attach to suitable hoist gear for
tilting.
Unlocking / Lock- Unlock the driver's cab before tilting it forward. Lock the driver's cab again
ing the driver's once you have brought it back to its initial position.
cab
The driver's cab is locked on both sides at the
back with a pin on the vehicle chassis.
To unlock, release the retaining pins (3) and

pull the pin (1) out of the clamp (2).
Also pull the pin out on the other side.
To lock, push the pin (1) through the clamps

(2) and secure it with the retaining pin (3).
Also push the pin in on the other side.
Before tilting the driver's cab, observe the prerequisites stated at the begin-
ning of the section; à Prerequisites and information on tilting, p. 8 - 15.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Tilting the driver's You need to attach and lift the driver's cab to tilt it. You can attach the
cab driver's cab to the truck crane yourself and raise it with the main hoist or use
another appropriate lifting gear (e.g. an overhead crane in a hall).
• Remove all loose objects from the driver's cab and close the doors.
G
Risk of accidents from falling objects and doors swinging open!
Remove all loose objects (e.g. bags, bottles etc.) from the driver's cab so
that they will not topple when tilting and close all the doors of the driver's
cab.
This prevents liquids from getting into the inserts and doors from swinging
open during tilting and injuring people.
G
Risk of accidents due to driver's cab tilting!
When you are tilting the driver's cab forward and while it is actually tilted
forward, nobody may be in front of the driver's cab.
S
Risk of damage when the driver's cab is tilting!
When lifting the driver's cab, the angle between the roof of the driver's cab
and the slinging rope must always be larger than 45°. Therefore, use only
sling gear which is long enough. If the sling gear is too short, the angle will
be less than 45° and the ring bolts and the threads may become over-
loaded.
Two ring bolts (2) are supplied for slinging the

driver's cab.
• Screw the two ring bolts (2) into the

threaded bores located at the rear on the
driver's cab.
• Fasten a rope (1) to each ring bolt.
• Fasten the loose ends of the rope to the
hook block of the truck crane or to any other
suitable lifting gear.
• Ensure that the angle A is always larger than
45° when lifting.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The support (2) is pulled apart when the

driver's cab is tilted.
• Tilt the driver's cab to the extent that it will

tilt over the pivot point and tighten the sup-
port.
In this position the spring latch engages (1)
(handle points downwards) and secures the
driver's cab against unintentionally tilting
backwards.
G
Risk of accidents due to the driver's cab tilting back!
You may only stand under the tilted driver's cab if the driver's cab has tight-
ened the wire rope between driver's cab and vehicle chassis.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Lowering the Before lowering the driver's cab, you must unlock the support.
driver's cab
G
Risk of crushing due to the driver's cab tilting back!
Make sure that the driver's cab puts the support under tension or that the
driver's cab is secured by the lifting gear against tilting back before unlock-
ing the support.
By doing this, you are preventing the driver's cab from accidentally tilting
back when unlocking the support, and preventing you or other people from
being crushed.
• Release the spring latch while also turning

the handle (1) upwards.
• Lower the driver's cab until it is set down on
the vehicle chassis.
When the driver's cab (2) is lowered, the sup-
port is pushed in and the stop (3) turns the
handle on the spring latch back to the correct
position for locking when the cab is next tilted.
• Remove the two ropes (1) from the ring

bolts.
• Screw the ring bolts (2) out of the threaded
bores.
• Store the ring bolts and the ropes safely,
ready for driving.
• Lock the driver's cab with the two pins;

à Unlocking / Locking the driver's cab,
p. 8 - 16.
G
Risk of accidents if the driver's cab is not locked!
08.03.2006
Always lock the driver's cab with the two pins to the vehicle frame after the
lowering process. This prevents the driver's cab from tilting forward (under
the boom) when braking.

GMK 4080-1
8.5.3 With hydraulic tilt mechanism
The hydraulic tilt mechanism is only available as additional equipment. If

the mechanical tilt mechanism is available as standard equipment; Withà
mechanical tilt mechanism, p. 8 - 16.
Operating the With the hydraulic tilt mechanism, you can tilt the driver's cab forward by
hand pump activating a hydraulic hand pump.
The hand pump (1) is located on the right side

of the driver's cab, behind the upper stair
tread.
The corresponding pump lever (3) is located in
the toolbox.
• To tilt the driver's cab, turn the two-position

lever (2) forwards into the A position.
• To lower the driver's cab, turn the two-posi-
tion lever (2) backwards, to position B.
Before tilting the driver's cab, observe the prerequisites stated at the begin-
ning of the section;à Prerequisites and information on tilting, p. 8 - 15.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Tilting the driver's • Remove all loose objects from the driver's cab. Close the doors of the
cab driver's cab.
G
Risk of accidents from falling objects and doors swinging open!
Remove all loose objects (e.g. bags, bottles etc.) from the crane cab so that
they do not fall over when tilting. Close the doors of the driver's cab.
This prevents liquids from getting into the inserts and doors from swinging
open during tilting and injuring people.
G
Risk of accidents due to driver's cab tilting!
When you are tilting the driver's cab forward and while it is actually tilted
forward, nobody may be in front of the driver's cab.
S
Risk of damage when the main boom angle is too low!
Only tilt the driver's cab when the main boom is sufficiently raised.
When the driver's cab is blocked by the main boom and you continue to use
the hand pump, then the fastening breaks, the driver's cab is pushed for-
wards and the steering's universal joint breaks.
• Check whether the two-position lever on the hand pump is turned up-
wards into position A.
• Operate the hand pump with the pump lever.
The driver's cab locking system automatically opens and the rear of the
driver's cab is lifted up.
• Keep pumping until the driver's cab tilts forwards over the centre of mo-
tion and the tilting cylinder (1) is placed under tension.
G
Risk of accidents due to the driver's cab tilting back!
You may only stand under the tilted driver's cab when the lifting cylinder is
placed under tension.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Lowering the
driver's cab
• Check whether the two-position lever on the hand pump is turned back-
wards into position B.
• Operate the hand pump with the pump lever.
The driver's cab lowers itself backwards and down.
• Lower the driver's cab to its end position.

• Keep pumping until you sense resistance. The driver's cab locking system
will lock automatically.
• Check if the driver's cab is locked by doing the following:
G
Risk of accidents if the driver's cab is not locked!
Ensure that the driver's cab is locked after every lowering.
This prevents the driver's cab from tilting forward (under the boom) when
braking.
• Switch on the ignition in the driver's cab.
• Check whether the Driver's cab locking system warning lamp has gone out.
w When the Driver's cab locking system warning lamp lights up, then you have
to continue to lower the driver's cab with the hand pump until the locking
system engages and the warning lamp goes out.
• Remove the pump lever and store it in the tool box.
G
Risk of accidents due to the pump lever falling!
Always remove the pump lever from the hand pump after lowering the
driver's cab and store it away prior to driving.
This will prevent the pump lever from falling while driving and damaging
the following vehicles.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.6 Emergency operation for lifting the main boom

When the diesel engine doesn't start and the driver's cab has to be tilted, the
boom can be raised using the emergency activation and the hoisting gear
can be moved.
The procedure for tilting and lowering the driver's cab is described in a sep-
arate section;à Tilting and lowering the driver's cabin, p. 8 - 15.
H
If your truck crane is also equipped with a hydraulic emergency operation
in accordance with BGR 159 (ZH1/461), the information given in this section
does not apply. In that case the hydraulic emergency operation is connected
to a hand pump or an external, hydraulic source of energy and you can per-
form the required movements; àHydraulic emergency operation according to
BGR 159 (ZH1/461), p. 14 - 69.
Operating The oil pressure needed for emergency activation is created with the hand
principle pump. The oil flows from the hydraulic tank to the relevant power unit via
the hand pump, the connecting hose and the console and flows back to the
hydraulic oil tank via a fixed connection or the hand pump, depending on
the kind of crane movement.
Accessories To use the emergency operation, you will need the following, supplied
parts:
– The pump lever (2) for the hand pump (with delivery in the tool box)
– The connecting hose (1) approx. 8 m.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.6.1 Connecting / Disconnecting the hose
Establishing a Before the emergency operation you must connect the supplied hose.
hose connection
S
Risk of damage to the connecting hose!
When the hose is connected it may tear with the rotating movement of the
superstructure. Remove the connecting hose from the connections imme-
diately after emergency operation.
The connection (1) is on the console behind

the crane cab.
There is a connection (3) on the rear left of the
hydraulic tank.
• Open the protective caps at the connections

(1) and (3) and at the connecting hose (2).
• Connect one end of the hose (2) to connec-
tion (1).
• Connect the other end of the hose (2) to con-
nection (3).
The hose is connected.
Disconnecting After the emergency operation you must disconnect the hose again.
the hose
Disconnecting the hose
• Remove the connecting hose (2) from the

connections (1) and (3).
• Apply the protective caps to the connections
(1) and (3).
• Close both ends of the connecting hose (2)
with the protective caps.
Stow away the connecting hose safely.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.6.2 Establishing necessary hydraulic circuits
The required hydraulic circuits are established by setting the valves to spe-
cific switching positions. A solenoid valve must also be in continuous oper-
ation for the emergency activation of the main hoist.
All the required hand valves are located behind the crane cab, on a console.
There are valves 1 to 4, all the valves are

marked.
All the valves have the positions Crane opera-
tion and Emergency operation
Crane operation position

The valves' handles 1, 2 and 4 point down-
wards at an angle. The handle on the valve 3
points forwards (shown in the illustration).
Emergency operation position

The valves' handles 1, 2 and 4 point upward at
an angle. The handle on the valve 3 points up-
ward.
• For emergency operation of the required power unit, switch the respec-
tive valve to position Emergency operation as shown in the table below.
H
Never switch more than one valve to the Emergency activation position.
All the other valves must be in the Crane operation position.
Crane move- Switched to the Emer- Continuous operation on

ment gency operation posi- valve
tion
Lifting the main Valve 1 Y1104 switched off
hoist Y1105 switched on
Lowering the Valve 2 Y1104 switched on
main hoist Y1105 switched off
Raising Valve 3 Y1104 switched off
Y1105 switched off
Lowering Valve 4 Y1104 switched off
Y1105 switched off
• Switch the respective solenoid valve to continuous operation before

emergency operation; à p. 8 - 26.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.6.3 Switching the continuous operation on and off
For main hoist emergency operation, you must also switch valves Y1105 or
Y1104 to continuous operation ( à
table on the previous page).
The solenoid valves Y1104 (1) and Y1105 (2) are directly under the hoisting
gear, on the right side at the rear at the turntable.
Switching on continuous operation

Only switch one valve (1) or (2) to continuous
operation at a time.
• Unscrew the sealing cap (3) from the re-
quired valve (e.g. from Y1104).
• Pull the protective cap (5) out of the sealing
cap (3); there is a pin (4) in this end.
• Screw the sealing cap back onto the valve
with this end. The pin actuates the respec-
tive valve in the process.
Continuous operation is now switched on.
S
Danger due to falling loads!
Switch off continuous operation at both solenoid valves (Y1105 and Y1104)
immediately after the emergency operation. Check whether the pins can be
seen at the two open sealing caps.
In this way, you can prevent loads from falling down immediately after be-
ing raised in the subsequent crane operations.
Switching off continuous operation

• Screw the sealing cap (3) off the valve no
longer required (1) or (2).
with the other end (without pin).
• Check whether the pins (4) can be seen in
the two open sealing caps (3) before operat-
ing the crane.
• Insert the protective caps (5) in the sealing
caps in order to protect the pins from dirt.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.6.4 Performing emergency operation
You cannot operate the derricking gear and hoisting gear simultaneously,
as is common in crane operation, during emergency activation. In emergen-
cy operation, you must always perform these functions alternately (e.g.
when detaching the hook block from the bumper).
When the required hydraulic circuit has been connected you can perform
the emergency operation with a hand pump on the carrier.
The hand pump (2) is located on the right

behind the driver's cab.
The hand pump return valve can be opened
(turn to the left) and closed (turn to the right)
with the handwheel (3).
• Insert the pump lever (1) into the holder at

the hand pump.
• Check that the return valve is closed. The
handwheel (3) must be turned to the right as
far as possible.
• Pump on the pump lever.
The appropriate crane operation is performed.
H
If the return valve is open, you cannot move the crane with the hand pump.
• Take the pump lever out of the holder after the emergency operation and
stow it away in the tool box.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.6.5 After the emergency activation
After emergency operation, re-establish the original state.

• Switch the continuous operation on the solenoid valves Y1104 and Y1105
off again; à Switching off continuous operation, p. 8 - 26.
• Switch all the hand valves on the console to position Crane operation;
à Establishing necessary hydraulic circuits, p. 8 - 25.
• Remove the connecting hose from the connections on the console and on
the hydraulic tank. Close all connections and the connecting hose with the
protective caps; à Connecting / Disconnecting the hose, p. 8 - 24.
• Remove the pump lever from the hand pump and put it away in the tool-
box; à Performing emergency operation, p. 8 - 27.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.7 Fuses on the carrier

The fuses are located in different places on the carrier:
– In the driver's cab
– In the battery box
– On I/O circuit boards
Information on The positions of the fuses, their designations and which functions are pro-
replacing fuses tected by the respective fuses are shown in the following sections.
• Switch off the ignition whenever a fuse has to be replaced.
S
Risk of damage when the ignition is switched on!
Switch off the ignition whenever a fuse has to be replaced. In this way you
can prevent the new fuse from being damaged by the increased starting
current immediately after inserting it.
S
Risk of damage due to overloading!
Replace blown fuses only with new fuses of the same amperage. In this
way you can prevent parts from being overloaded and damaged or the fuse
from being immediately damaged again.
Notify CraneCARE at the respective location if a fuse of the same amperage
blows again after turning on the ignition.
S
Danger of fire!
Never repair a defective fuse with other electrically conductive materials.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.7.1 Fuses in the driver's cab
The fuse groups F 1 to F 6 are on the right side next to the front instrument
panel.
You can access the fuses by removing the

cover (1).
Each group consists of eight fuses.

The following tables show the designations of
the individual fuses, including their amperage
and function.
The designations 1 to 8 in the following tables correspond to their order

from left to right in the illustration (fuse 1 is always the left fuse).
Before you replace a fuse; à Information on replacing fuses, p. 8 - 29.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Designation Amperage (A) Function

F 1/1 20 E-control, diesel engine (PLD)
Engine electronic system (FMR and
F 1/2 10
ADM), diesel engine diagnostics plug
Flame start system (additional equip-
F 1/3 20
ment)
F 1/4 15 Hazard warning system, brake lights
Driver's cab ceiling lighting, cigarette
F 1/5 10
lighter
Electronic gear system control,
F 1/6 10
transmission operating elements
Carrier electronics, control unit at con-
F 1/7 10
nection 3
F 1/8 20 ABS truck crane

Tachograph (elements in speedometer
F 2/1 10 insert), radio, voltage transformer 24 V /
12 V
F 2/2 15 Auxiliary heater
F 2/3 10 Unassigned
Fan for heating system for driver's cab
F 2/4 10
Roof ventilator (additional equipment)
Radio, telephone (both additional
F 2/5 10
equipment)
Eddy current retarder, air conditioning
F 2/6 20
system
F 2/7 20 ABS trailer
F 2/8 10 Unassigned
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

F 3/1 15 Rotating beacon
"Boom not set down" monitor (addition-
F 3/2 10
al equipment)
F 3/3 10 Auxiliary heater switch clock
Mirror heating, mirror adjustment, elec-
F 3/4 20
tric window winder, air drier
Outrigger lighting (additional equip-
F 3/5 10
ment)
F 3/6 10 Turn signal indicator
Windscreen wiper washer system,
F 3/7 10
Horn
F 3/8 5 Suspension locking system

Position lights for indicator lamps for
F 4/1 5
the displays
Reversing lights, trailer plug (additional
equipment),
F 4/2 10
reverse gear audible signal (additional
equipment)
F 4/3 10 Unassigned
ABS truck crane, air-conditioning sys-
F 4/4 10
tem
F 4/5 10 Tachograph
Diesel engine diagnostics plug, outrig-
F 4/6 10 ger pressure indicator (additional equip-
ment)
Electronic gear system and diagnostics
F 4/7 10
plug
F 4/8 10 Central lubrication system
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

Driving / crane operation change-over,
F 5/1 5 battery charge indicator, transmission
display
Diesel engine emergency stop switch,
electronic gear system
F 5/2 20
Air intake inhibitor (additional equip-
ment)
Carrier electronics and diagnostics plug,
Power supply input / output boards I/O
F 5/3 20
1, I/O 2,
electronic level (additional equipment)
Control unit on connection 3, input / out-
F 5/4 20
put boards I/O 0, I/O 1, I/O 2
Air intake inhibitor (additional equip-
F 5/5 5
ment)
F 5/6 20 Engine electronic system
8.5 V fuse for control unit at
F 5/7 2
connection 3
F 5/8 20 Fog headlight, fog tail light

Left parking light, left clearance lamps
F 6/1 5
(driver's cab / turntable)
Right parking light, right clearance
F 6/2 10
lamps (driver's cab / turntable)
Left side clearance lamps, left tail lamp,
instrument lighting for tachometer /
F 6/3 10 heating / speedometer / supply pressure
brake circuit / engine temperature / tank
gauge /
Right side clearance lamps, right tail
F 6/4 5
lamp
F 6/5 5 Left headlight full beam, fog light
Right headlight - full beam, headlight -
F 6/6 5
full beam display
F 6/7 5 Left low-beam headlight
08.03.2006
F 6/8 5 Right low-beam headlight

GMK 4080-1
Fuses for addi- There are two further fuses on the front instrument panel behind the shelf
tional equipment for additional equipment with the dual tank.
• Remove the shelves (3).

The following fuses are available for
additional equipment of the dual tank.
Amper-
Pos. Function
age (A)
1 15
Power supply
2 10
Depending on the fitting position, the fuse (1)

may also be under the fuse (2).
Before you replace a fuse; à Information on

replacing fuses, p. 8 - 29.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.7.2 Fuses in battery box
The fuses F 7 to F 10 are in the battery box.
S
Danger! Battery components contain lead and lead compounds.
Battery poles, clamps, and parts of the battery itself contain lead and lead
compounds. Wash your hands following work on these parts or in these ar-
eas!
• Remove the flap plug and open the battery

box lid.
The fuses are in a terminal box in front of the
batteries.
• Remove the lid from the terminal box:
1 Fuse F 7
2 Fuse F 8
3 Fuse F 9
4 Fuse F 10
Before you replace a fuse; à Information on

replacing fuses, p. 8 - 29.
Designation Amper- Function

age (A)
F7 100 Carrier central fuse
F8 50 Superstructure central fuse
Preliminary fuse for auxiliary heater,
F9 20
voltage transformer and tachograph
F 10 20 Crane cab heating supply
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.7.3 Fuses on I/O circuit boards
The control unit on connection 3 of the carrier electronics is located on the

left, behind the access ladder. It is connected to input-output boards which
are equipped with further fuses.
Please check these fuses if the fuses for the control unit on connection 3 are
intact and the instructions for remedy stated in section Finding and eliminat-
ing malfunctions do not help eliminate the malfunction.
There are three input-output circuit boards (I/O) on the carrier:
Designation Position on the truck crane

I/O 0 Under the cover (3) of the side instrument panel
In the switch box (1) on the left-hand front, on the inside
I/O 1
of the vehicle chassis (accessible from below)
At the rear left, over the outrigger beam in the switch box
I/O 2
(2)
All fuses (1) on the circuit boards have a strength of 10 amps.

Depending on the model, one or two fuses may be located on a single circuit
board.

08.03.2006
• Check the fuses and replace defective ones.

GMK 4080-1
8.8 Finding and eliminating malfunctions
8.8.1 Malfunctions to the diesel engine
H
In the case of malfunctions on the diesel engine, also see the operating in-
structions of the diesel engine manufacturer.
Malfunction Cause Remedy

Engine not starting Battery master switch not Switch on the battery master
(starter not turning) switched on. switch; à p. 5 - 5.
Ignition not switched on. Switch on ignition;
à p. 5 - 11.
Transmission is not in neutral Shift the transmission to neu-
position. tral position N; à p. 6 - 30.
Parking brake not actuated. Engage the parking brake;
à p. 6 - 46.
Fuse F 1/2 C, F 1/2 C or F 5/6 C Check the fuses and replace
defective. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
The Driving mode / Crane opera- Press in the Driving mode /
tion rocker switch is in Crane Crane operation rocker switch
operation position. at the top, in Driving mode po-
sition; à p. 4 - 51.
An emergency stop switch for Reverse the emergency stop
the diesel engine is activated. switch; à p. 8 - 2.
F 5/4 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Engine not starting Batteries insufficiently Charge batteries;
(starter turning) charged. à Maintenance manual.
Fuel tank empty. 1. Fill up fuel tank;
à p. 5 - 10.
2. Bleed the fuel system;
à Maintenance manual
à operating instructions of
the diesel engine manu-
facturer
Air intake inhibitor switched à Releasing the air intake inhib-
on. itor manually, p. 5 - 22.
Flame start system indicator F 4/6 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
lamp (additional equipment) them if necessary;
08.03.2006
does not go on after ignition à p. 8 - 30.

is switched on and motor is
cold
Diesel engine air filter warn- Air filter is clogged. Replace dry air filter;
ing lamp is on à Maintenance manual

GMK 4080-1

Diesel engine coolant level Coolant level too low. Top up coolant; à
p. 5 - 6.
warning lamp is on
Truck crane is unable to drive Level adjustment system Deactivate level adjustment
quicker than approx. 20 km/h , switched on. system; à p. 6 - 58.
the transmission can only be
switched up to the sixth gear.
Engine coolant temperature Coolant level too low (warn- Top up coolant; à p. 5 - 6.
is too high. ing lamp on).
Oil level in the transmission Check oil level;
too low. à Maintenance manual
Outside of the heat exchanger Clean outside of heat ex-
dirty. changer.
V-belts of the coolant pump at Tighten V-belt; à operating
the engine are loose. instructions of the diesel en-
gine manufacturer.
Fan thermostat defective. Switch the fan thermostat to
emergency operation;
à p. 8 - 51.
The Diesel engine oil pressure Engine oil level too level or Stop the truck crane, check
warning lamp is on. diesel engine defective. the oil level and refill if neces-
sary; à p. 5 - 8.
Notify CraneCARE if the oil
level is alright.
Engine cannot be switched Malfunction to the electronics. Switch off the engine using
off with the ignition key. the emergency stop device;
à p. 8 - 1.
Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Motor brake (engine retarder) F 2/6 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
cannot be switched on. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
No diesel engine diagnostics F 1/2 C or F 5/3 C fuse defec- Check the fuses and replace
plug function tive. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
The engine power is reduced The engine electronic system Wait until the coolant has
and the engine coolant tem- has reduced the engine power cooled down and the engine
perature is increased. due to increased coolant tem- power is increased again.
perature. The Engine electronics
warning light goes on if the
temperature exceeds the ma-
ximum permissible value.
The Engine electronics warn- In the event of engine elec- Notify CraneCARE at the re-
ing lamp is on during driving, tronics malfunctions the per- spective location.
the engine performance gets formance of the engine re-
worse and worse (engine duces continuously. However,
08.03.2006
coolant temperature is too the engine will not be

high). switched off, so continued
travel is guaranteed until the
next opportunity to stop.

GMK 4080-1
When operating The following specifications only apply for additional equipment with the
with the dual tank dual tank.

Fuel supply cannot be Corresponding fuses defec- Check the fuses and replace
switched over. tive. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Engine not starting Dual tank empty. 1. Fill up the fuel tank;
(starter turning) à p. 5 - 24.
2. Bleed the fuel system;
à operating instructions
of the diesel engine man-
ufacturer
8.8.2 Differential lock malfunctions
This section applies to malfunctions to all differential locks:

– Transverse differential locks of the driven axle lines
– Longitudinal differential lock in the transfer case and with additional
equipment with 8 x 8 x 8 drive also in the first axle line.

Differential locks cannot be Level adjustment not Switch on the level adjust-
switched on switched on. ment system key-operated
switch; à p. 6 - 56.
Drive train blocked. Slowly drive truck crane
straight back and forth,
à p. 6 - 55.
Compressed air system not Let engine run until pressure
sufficiently filled. has built up.
The circuit for the secondary
consumer will only be full a
few minutes after the Supply
pressure for brake circuits I and II
warning lamp has gone out.
F 5/4 C fuses defective. Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Defective fuse on the I/O 0 cir- Check the fuses and replace
cuit board. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 36.
Differential locks cannot be Drive train blocked. Slowly drive truck crane
08.03.2006
switched off straight back and forth,

à p. 6 - 55.

GMK 4080-1
8.8.3 Malfunctions to the transmission with automatic gear change

Transmission not shifting Transmission is in Manual op- à Switching from manual to
automatically erating mode. automatic, p. 6 - 27.
Fuse F 1/6 C, F 4/7 C defective. Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Transmission cannot be actu- Pressure of 5.5 bar has not yet Let the engine run until the
ated and the display shows built up in the reservoirs. pressure has built up, observe
AL build-up on Supply pressure for
brake circuits I and II display;
à p. 4 - 36.
Transmission only shifts up to Level adjustment system Deactivate level adjustment
sixth gear. switched on. system; à p. 6 - 58.
Transmission does not re- F 1/6 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
spond to actuation of the them if necessary;
touch lever or rotary switch. à p. 8 - 30.
Transmission does not en- The transmission rotary Turn rotary switch to position
gage starting gear and does switch was not set at position N and shift to position D or R;
not respond to actuation of N when the ignition was à p. 6 - 23.
touch lever. switched off.
Transmission control display The electronic gear system à Error messages on the dis-
indicates service symbol or a has identified a malfunction. play; à p. 8 - 53.
different error message.
The transmission control dis- Serious malfunction to the Stop the truck crane immedi-
play indicates Stop and the transmission. ately and search for the cause;
warning lamp Transmission à p. 8 - 54.
shift lock lights up
Transmission diagnostics F 4/7 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
plug not working them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.8.4 Steering malfunctions

Steering wheel is hard to Oil level in the hydraulic oil Check hydraulic oil level;
turn, grating noises when tank too low. à p. 5 - 7.
steering Then drive at low speed to the
nearest workshop and have
the cause of the oil loss
checked.
A warning lamp Steering cir- Oil level in the hydraulic oil Check hydraulic oil level;
cuit I or warning lamp Steer- tank too low. à p. 5 - 7.
ing circuit II lights up Then drive at low speed to the
nearest workshop and have
the cause of the oil loss
checked.
Steering circuit has failed, e.g. Vehicle can be driven slowly
pump defective. as far as the next workshop.
The Steering circuit I warning Both steering circuits have Driving any further is not pos-
lamp and the Steering circuit failed. sible, vehicle can no longer be
II warning lamp are on. steered.
Hydraulic oil temperature Oil level in the hydraulic oil Check hydraulic oil level;
too high tank too low. à p. 5 - 7.
Hydraulic oil return filter I Hydraulic oil return filter dirty. Change hydraulic oil return fil-
warning lamp and Hydraulic ters I and II; à
Maintenance
oil return filter II warning manual.
lamp are on.
Separate steering not work- F 5/3 or F 5/4 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
ing them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Defective fuse on the I/O 1 or Check the fuses and replace
I/O 2 circuit board. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 36.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.8.5 Service brake malfunctions

The Supply pressure brake cir- Air pressure in one of the two Vehicle can be driven slowly
cuit I and II warning lamp circuits has dropped below as far as the next workshop.
goes on while driving or does 5.5 bar, check on the Supply
not go out after starting the pressure for brake circuits I and II
engine. supply.
Air pressure in both circuits 1. Fill compressed-air sup-
has dropped below 5.5 bar, ply at connection for ex-
check on display for Supply à
ternal filling; p. 8 - 6.
pressure for brake circuits I and
2. Tow truck crane with
II.
towing bar; à p. 8 - 6.
Parking brake does not re- Air pressure in circuit 3 is too Let the engine run idle with
lease, Parking brake indicator low. the parking brake actuated
lamp does not go out, Supply until the air pressure in
pressure brake circuit I and II circuit 3 is high enough.
warning lamp has gone out.
ABS warning lamp also goes ABS brake system has failed. Drive to next workshop; brak-
on at a speed of over 6 km/h ing without ABS support is
still possible
ABS trailer warning lamp is Trailer ABS brake system has Drive to next workshop; brak-
also on at a speed of over failed. ing without ABS support is
6 km/h still possible.
Eddy current retarder cannot F 2/6 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
be switched off. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
8.8.6 Malfunctions to the outriggers

Outrigger cylinders and F 5/3 or F 5/4 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
beams can neither be ex- them if necessary;
tended nor retracted and the à p. 8 - 30.
electronic level is not work-
Defective fuse on the I/O 0 cir-
ing.
cuit board. Check the fuses and replace
No outrigger pressure indica- Defective fuse on the I/O 1 them if necessary;
tor function (front outriggers) or I/O 2 cir- à p. 8 - 36.
cuit board (rear outriggers).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.8.7 Tachograph malfunctions
H
When there is a tachograph malfunction, the Tachograph malfunction warning
light will light up on the speedometer and an error message will be shown
on the Tachograph display.

Tachograph without function F 4/5 C, F 2/1 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
! 4A050 Driving without diagram Insert diagram sheet for driver
sheet for driver 1. 1 and press any key;
à p. 6 - 19.
! 4A051 Diagram sheet for driver 1 Insert diagram sheet for driver
missing. 1 and press any key;
à p. 6 - 19.
! 49052 Diagram sheet for driver 2 Set time group for driver 2 to
missing. pause time in single driver op-
eration; à p. 6 - 20.
In 2-driver operation, insert di-
agram sheet for driver 2;
à p. 6 - 19.
Press any key.
! 49060 Error at the drawer. Acknowledge error message
by pressing any key until ini-
! 4A400 Voltage cut-off.
tial display appears. Notify
! 4A411 Interruption on the line to the CraneCARE at the respective
speedometer. location if an error message
cannot be acknowledged.
! 4A423 Transmitter communication
error.
! 4900F Keyboard error.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.8.8 Suspension locking system malfunctions

Suspension locking system Compressed air system not Let engine run until pressure
cannot be switched off sufficiently filled. has built up. The circuit for the
secondary consumer will only
be full a few minutes after the
Supply pressure for brake circuits
I and II warning lamp has
gone out.
F 3/8 C, F 5/4 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
cuit board. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
8.8.9 Level adjustment system malfunctions

Level adjustment system not Level adjustment key-operated Switch on the level adjust-
working switch switched off. ment key-operated switch;
à p. 4 - 43.
Suspension locking system Switch off the suspension
switched on. locking system; à p. 4 - 43.
F 5/3 or F 5/4 C fuse defective. Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Fuse on input-output Check the fuses and replace
board I/O 0 defective or on them if necessary;
I/O 1 (first and second axle) or à p. 8 - 36.
on I/O 2 (second + third axle).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.8.10 Malfunctions to the carrier electronic system
[ The Carrier electronic system general warning lamp flashes if there is a mal-
function to the carrier electronic system.
Current errors in the carrier electronics that occur during crane operation
can be read on the Crane control display; à p. 14 - 40.
Current errors in the carrier electronics, the errors that occur while driving,
can be read as follows depending on the equipment:
– With additional equipment, you can read the error message at the switch
boxes Outrigger / Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indicator.
– With standard equipment, you can read the error messages in the driver's
cab; à p. 8 - 47.
Reading error You can call up an error menu on the switch boxes' Outrigger / Electronic level
messages at the / Outrigger pressure indicator (additional equipment) in which an error code is
carrier displayed for each error. The error can be more precisely described using
this error code.
Calling up the error menu

The ignition must be switched on to read the error messages.
• Open the door on one of the two switchboxes Outrigger / Electronic level /
Outrigger pressure indicator.
É • Press the Switch on second level button and hold it down.
Å • Also press the Switching over measuring range button once.
The error menu is opened and the display

fields (1) to (4) display e.g. the entries
ALL Err
4
The number in the field (4) shows the total

number of existing error messages (e.g. 4).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Displaying error codes

• Press the Extend all outrigger cylinders button
(5) once.
The display fields (1) to (4) now show an error
code, with the following meanings:
1 The device number (e.g. 4)
2 The group number (e.g. 3)
3 The index (e.g. 13)
4 The error number (e.g. 2)
If more than one error message is stored, the

error code for the oldest existing error is al-
ways displayed first.
Proceed in the following manner to display other error codes:
§ • Press the Retract all outrigger cylinders button once.

The error code for the next error is displayed.
Ä • Press the Extend all outrigger cylinders button once.

The error code for the previous error is displayed.
The displays will change in the corresponding direction until the last or the
first error message is displayed.
Exiting the error menu
É • Press the Switch on second level button and hold it down.
Å • Also press the Switching over measuring range button once.

The error menu is closed and the display fields once again show the
measured values for the outrigger pressure indicator.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Reading error With standard equipment, the existing error messages are displayed on the
messages in the side instrument panel via a blink code.
driver's cab
Switching on the error display
• Switch off the key-operated Level adjustment system switch.
• Press down the Raise / lower truck crane (2) rocker button and the On-road
level (3) rocker button once at the same time.
The Not on-road level (1) indicator lamp now shows the error that occurred
last via a blink code.
H
If the Not on-road level indicator lamp does not flash, then there is an error on
the Can-Bus or on the input / output board I/O 0.
Reading error codes

Every error code consists of four digits.
The digits are shown by the frequency of flashing from the Not on-road level
(1) indicator lamp.
The indicator lamp goes out for a short time (approx. 1.5 seconds) between
the individual digits.
When the last digit of the error code has been displayed, there will a longer
pause (approx. 8 seconds). Then the same error code will be shown again.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
H
Wait during the longer pause (approx. 8 seconds), so that you can note the
digits in the correct sequence.
• Count how often the Not on-road level indicator lamp flashes and note the
{ first digit (e.g. 4).
The indicator lamp now goes out for approx. 1.5 seconds and flashes for the
next digit of the error code.
{ second digit (e.g. 3).
{ third digit (e.g. 13).
{ fourth digit (e.g. 2).
You have the error code by writing down the digits in the sequence of its
output from left to right, e.g. 4 - 3 - 13 - 2.
H
When a digit of the error code is a 0, the indicator lamp will not flash. This
could lead to the following cases:
– If only two digits are shown, e.g. 18, 7, then the third and the fourth digits
are always a 0. Afterwards, the error code would be 18 - 7 - 0 - 0.
– If only three digits are shown, e.g. 18, 7, 1 and the pauses between the
three digits are all of the same length (approx. 1.5 seconds), then the
fourth digit is a 0. Afterwards, the error code would be 18 - 7 - 1 - 0.
– If only three digits are shown, e.g. 18, 7, 1 and the pause before the third
digit is longer (approx. 3 seconds), then the third digit is a 0. The error
code would consequently be 18 - 7 - 0 - 1.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Displaying other error codes
{ You can display all existing error codes one after the other in the same way
via a blink code with the Not on-road level indicator lamp.
• Press the Right-hand level adjustment (1)

rocker button once.
The Not on-road level (3) indicator lamp imme-
diately begins with the display of the next er-
ror.
• Press the Left-hand level adjustment (2) rocker

button once.
The Not on-road level (3) indicator lamp imme-
diately begins with the display of the previous
error.
You can change repeatedly until the last or the

first error code is displayed.
Switching off the error display

You can switch off the error display at any time. There are ways of doing
this.
• Press down the Raise / lower truck crane (2) rocker button and the On-road
level (3) rocker button once at the same time.
The Not on-road level (1) indicator lamp now shows the on-road level again.
or

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.9 Procedure in the event of malfunctions
8.9.1 Switching the fan thermostat to emergency operation
The coolant is cooled by a heat exchanger.

The speed of the fan in the heat exchanger is regulated by a hydraulic valve
with a thermostat. The valve can be switched manually in the event of a
thermostat malfunction.
G
Risk of accidents from turning fan wheel!
Switch off the diesel engine before switching on emergency operation.
If you switch the fan to emergency operation while the vehicle engine is
running, the fan wheel immediately begins to turn very quickly. Objects or
loose clothing can be sucked up as a result.
Make sure there are no people or objects in the vicinity of the fan when
switching to emergency operation.
H
Always switch on emergency operation after installing a new thermostat!
The cooling water cooler is located on the right-hand side of the vehicle over
the first axle line.
The valve (2) for emergency operation is on a

sheet behind the driver's cab under the cool-
ing water cooler (1), behind the panelling.
Switching on emergency operation (A)

• Close the valve (2) slowly.
The valve is closed if the handle is
perpendicular to the line.
Switching off emergency operation (B)

• Close the valve (2) slowly.
The valve is open if the handle is parallel to
the line.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
8.9.2 Procedure in the event of transmission malfunctions
If the transmission malfunctions, the electronic gear system will try to es-
tablish a secure operating condition for the transmission with the remaining
functions.
Error messages on There are different error messages which are shown on the Transmission dis-
the Transmission play in the event of a malfunction.
display
EE display
The entry EE shows that there is a malfunction in the communication be-
tween the transmission electronics and the Transmission display.
• Proceed in the following manner to correct the malfunction:
– Switch off the ignition.
– Wait about 15 seconds.
– Turn on the ignition again.
If EE continues to be shown, and the transmission does not shift, consult
CraneCARE or the transmission manufacturer's service department.
FP display
The entry FP (accelerator) shows that there is a malfunction in the commu-
nication between the transmission electronics and the accelerator.
• Bring the accelerator to neutral position.
If the display does not go out, there is a malfunction in the system. In this
case it is not possible to drive any further.
Service symbol display

When the Transmission display shows the service symbol (spanner), there is
a malfunction in the system.
In this case you can continue to drive. There might, however, be restrictions
concerning the automatic mode or you might have to shift gears manually.
H
If the service symbol is displayed, you should notify CraneCARE or the ser-
vice department of the transmission manufacturer as soon as possible. You
should do this even if the transmission still shifts.
In this way you avoid that the transmission stops working entirely in case
there is a further small problem present.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Service symbol and STOP display

If the display shows STOP a serious malfunction has occurred.
# A warning buzzer sounds and at the same time the Transmission shift lock
warning lamp lights up on the side instrument panel.
• Bring the truck crane to a stop as the traffic situation allows.

Driving any further is not permitted.
Depending on the type of error, it may be possible to eliminate the error as

follows:
• Switch off the ignition and wait about 10 seconds.
• Check whether the indication on the Transmission display has gone out.
• Switch the battery master switch off if the error message is still shown.
• Wait about 10 seconds and switch the battery master switch back on
again.
If the error message reappears:
• Call up the error code, note down the error code and contact the
CraneCARE or the service department of the transmission manufacturer.
Short error message – clutch wear

If CW is displayed (about 10 seconds long after switching on the ignition),
then contact CraneCARE. A repair will be necessary in the near future.
Calling up error The transmission electronic system stores one or more error codes with ev-
codes ery malfunction. These codes help the service department to delimit the er-
ror cause. Therefore, always note down the error codes before contacting
the service department.
You can call up two kinds of error codes on the Transmission display:
– Current error codes and
– Saved error codes.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Calling up current error codes

These error codes refer to a currently occurring malfunction.
• Engage the holding brake.

• Switch the transmission to neutral position N.
• Do not operate the service brake.
• Push the Transmission touch lever forwards.
The Transmission display indicates the current error code. If there are several
errors, all the error codes are displayed repeatedly in sequence as long as
you hold the push lever forwards.
The error codes are displayed in various ways:
– Error codes up to 99 are simply shown as a number (e.g. error code 74).
– If bars appear in front of the number shown, you need to add 100 to the
number shown (e.g. error code 174).
– If bars and arrows appear in front of the number, you need to add 200 to
the number shown (e.g. error code 274).
Calling up stored error codes

These error codes refer to malfunctions not active at present. These error
codes were stored with previous malfunctions.
• Engage the holding brake.

• Switch the transmission to neutral position N.
• Operate the service brake and push the Transmission touch lever forwards.
The Transmission display shows the stored error code. If there are several er-
rors, all the error codes are displayed repeatedly in sequence as long as you
hold the push lever forwards.
• They are displayed in the same way as the current error codes (e.g. error
code 77).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9
9.1 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
9.1.1 Dimensions and weights of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 2
9.1.2 Dimensions and weights of removable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 4
9.1.3 Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 5
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Technical Information on Carrier
9.1 Technical data
9.1 Technical data
GROVE truck crane GMK 4080-1

Permitted temperature range: –25 °C to +40 °C
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
9.1.1 Dimensions and weights of the truck crane
The dimensions in the illustration are given in mm.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
Dimensions for All measurements relate to the on-road driving mode; à Driving modes,
driving on public p. 7 - 1.
roads
Length without auxiliary 12.53 m
hoist and without spare
wheel:
1) Height on on-road level: 3.85 m -130 / +170 mm (14.00 R25)
3.90 m -130 / +170 mm (16.00 or 20.50 R25)
2) Width: 2.55 m for 14.00 R25 tyres
2.75 m for 16.00 R25 tyres
2.86 m for 20.50 R25 tyres
Slope angle, front: Approx. 19° on on-road level (14.00 R25)
Slope angle, rear: Approx. 21° on on-road level (14.00 R25)
H
If there is a ladder in the holder under the driver's cab or if the spare wheel
and the rear outrigger pads are installed, then the specified slope angle is
correspondingly reduced.
Total weight and For equipment with the specified axle loads in on-road mode; à Driving
axle loads modes, p. 7 - 1.
Dimensions and weights of the parts which must be transported on sepa-
rate vehicles during on-road driving; à
p. 9 - 4 and à
p. 15 - 4.
Total weight: 48 t
Axle loads: 12 t
Axle loads: 24 t each in working position
H
The value for the axle load in working position free on wheels applies to
driving with a rigged truck crane and a maximum load that is allowed to be
hoisted according to the Lifting capacity table.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
9.1.2 Dimensions and weights of removable parts
This section contains the transport dimensions and weights of those parts
which can be transported on separate vehicles during on-road driving.
On-road mode with a maximum axle load of 12 t; à Checking the condition
of the truck crane, p. 6 - 7.
Spare wheel The spare wheel is additional equipment.
Description Length x width x height in m Weight in kg

Spare wheel 14.00 R 25 1.36 x 1.36 x 0.40 245
Spare wheel 16.00 R 25 1.50 x 1.50 x 0.45 310
Spare wheel 20.50 R 25 1.50 x 1.50 x 0.53 355
Outriggers
Weight (kg)in
Description Length x width x height in m
kg
Per outrigger pad 0.50 x 0.50 x 0.20 36
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
9.1.3 Carrier
Diesel engine
Make: Mercedes-Benz
Type: OM 501 LA
Power: 290 kW (395 HP) at 1800 min-1 (rpm)
(EG 80/1269 - 89/491 EWG, fan detached)
Engine emissions: EUROMOT \ EPA \ CARB (off road)
Fuel tank: Approx. 400 l
Dual tank (additional Approx. 125 l
equipment)
Manual trans- ZF-AS Tronic automated transmission system 12 AS 2302, 12 forward gears,
mission 2 reverse gears.
Transfer case Kessler VG2600 2-stage transfer case with pneumatic, lockable longitudinal
differential.
Axle lines
Drive: 8x6x8
First axle line: Steered and driven axle line
Second axle line: Steered axle line
Third axle line: Steered and driven axle line (steering can be
switched on)
Fourth axle line: Steered and driven axle line
Drive: 8 x 8 x 8 (additional equipment)

First axle line: Steered and driven axle line
Second axle line: Steered and driven axle line (drive can be
switched on)
Third axle line: Steered and driven axle line (steering can be
switched on)
Fourth axle line: Steered and driven axle line
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
Steering
Make: ZF
Type: Dual-circuit Servocom steering with emer-
gency steering pump which operates indepen-
dently of the engine
The wheels of the 3re and fourth axle lines are steered separately when the
separate steering is switched on.
Tyres Single rear wheels:

8 x 14.00 R 25 on disk wheels 9.50-25/1.7
8 x 16.00 R 25 on disk wheels 11.00-25/1.7 (additional equipment)
8 x 20.5 R 25 on disk wheels 17.00-25/1.7 (additional equipment)
Torque for wheel nuts: 650 Nm
Spare wheel can be supplied as additional equipment for all specified tyres.
The following tyre pressures apply for axle loads up to a max. of 12 t.
Air pressure in bar

Tyres
for cold tyres
14.00 R 25 10
16.00 R 25 9
20.50 R 25 7
Vehicle's electrical
system Alternator: 28 V / 100 A
Batteries: 2 pce.: each 12 V / 170 Ah
Voltage: 24 V
Tools 1 tool kit in tool box

Wheel chocks (number according to national regulations)
Towing coupling
Front towing coupling: 100 kN permissible tension 1)
Rear tow lug: 75 kN permissible tension 1)
1)
Only permissible if a particular tension angle is observed; à p. 6 - 60
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
Outriggers
Design: 4-point telescoping outrigger system
Control system: Can be controlled from both sides on the carrier
and individually from the crane cab.
Outrigger spans: 8.10 x 7.00 m
8.10 x 6.00 m
8.10 x 5.00 m
8.10 x 2.32 m
Size of outrigger 500 x 500 mm
pads:
Outrigger pad sur- 2500 cm2
face area:
Stroke of the 550 mm, rear
support cylinders: 550 mm, front
Inclination indicator: Using the electronic level, on the hand-held con-

trol, in the crane cab and with additional equip-
ment in the switch boxes on the carrier
Outrigger pressure Integrated into the outriggers with digital display
indicator (additional in the control boxes on the carrier and in the crane
equipment): cab
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
Driving speeds All driving speeds measured at an engine speed of 1800 min-1:
Forwards: max. 85.0 km/h

Backwards: approx. 6 km/h , depending on the tyres
Climbing ability Maximum climbing ability at the fixed brake point at transport weight of 48 t
:
Climbing ability with

Drive
14.00 tyres 16.00 tyres 20.5 tyres
8x6x8
or 70.1 % 62.6 % 62.6 %
8x8x8
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
Turning circle The dimensions in the illustration are given in mm.

radiuses
R = values for normal steering mode
Ra = values for separate steering mode
.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
9.1 Technical data
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
10
10 Index
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
10 Index
à
H
How to use the alphabetical index; p. 1 - 18.
To avoid making the index unnecessarily long and unclear,
we have not included every single element from the instrument panel.
These elements, such as rocker switches, rocker buttons, warning and indicator lamps,
as well as status displays, are described and named in detail in the overviews of
chapter 4 and chapter 11 Description of the truck crane.
From there, you will be referred to more detailed descriptions of these elements.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
A ABS
Diagnostics plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 51
Access ladders to the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Adjusting mirrors
in the driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
in the driver’s cab, electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
on the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 24
Adjusting the seat
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
Passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Adjustments whilst operating the crane
Adjusting power unit speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 138
Adjusting the brightness of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 135
Adjusting the wiper stroke interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 143
Directional spotlights for the working area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 144
Setting a constant engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 140
Setting characteristic curves for the control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 136
Tilting the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 142
Air-conditioning system
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 202
in the driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 75
All-wheel steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
Auxiliary hoist
Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 67
Folding hoist mirrors in / out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 24
Lifting and lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 77
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 77
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 76
Working with the auxiliary hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 76
Axle drive
Display and operating elements in the driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 35
B Battery charge indicator

after starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
after switching on the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
Battery master switch
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Boom floating position
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 18
08.03.2006
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Boom pre-tensioning
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 19
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12

GMK 4080-1
Index
Brakes
Auxiliary brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
Checking the brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Compressed-air supply in the event of engine failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Eddy current retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 41
Engine retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
Test position of the parking brake when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 84
Breakdown
Behaviour in road traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
C Carrier hydraulic system

Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Checking the position of the shut-off valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Checking the coolant level
in the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 6
Checking the oil level
in the carrier hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Checking the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Checking the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Checking the windscreen washing system
CHECKLIST
before working with the crane in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Condition of the truck crane for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Extending the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
Retracting the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 35
Rigging for crane operation with main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Rigging mode when truck crane is rigged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
Rigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 92
Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Unrigging for crane operation with main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
Unrigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 94
Choosing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9
Compressed air system
see Brakes
Constant speed
see Tempomat
Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85
08.03.2006
Assembling counterweight versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 97

CHECKLIST
Rigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 92
Unrigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 94

GMK 4080-1
Index
Counterweight hoist unit

Checking the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 110
Display of incorrect statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 111
Extending / retracting the lifting cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 112
Locking / unlocking counterweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 114
Counterweight parts and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85
Counterweight versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 87
Installing counterweight sections on the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 117
Removing counterweight sections from the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 116
Slewing with the rigged counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 118
Slinging points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 91
Crab travel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
Crane cab
Adjusting the front console and crane cab seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
Air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 202
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 102, 12 - 193
Position of the operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 4
Setting the automatic heating start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 198
Sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 110
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 142
Ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 196
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 111
Windscreen washing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 9
Crane cab heating system
Fuel level in the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10
Crane control
Crane control display
Adjusting the brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 135
Error menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 149
Operating hours counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 145
Warning message submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 147
Emergency operation in the event of a failure of the operating elements
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 63
Emergency telescoping program submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 49
Entering telescoping values after emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 60
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
Error messages on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
Operating elements
at insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 16
in the (semi-automatic) Telescoping submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 24
in the counterweight submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 21
in the driving submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 30
in the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 18
in the Outriggers submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 22
in the Settings / Displays submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 28
Telescoping submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 103
08.03.2006
Crane engine

GMK 4080-1
Index
Crane work
in winter – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Permissible slewing ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 68
Pre-warming the hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 15
Procedure in the event of malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5
Crane work with main boom
Before working with the crane, CHECKLIST – with rigged truck crane . . . . . . 12 - 1
Crane work with the main boom
Rigging – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Unrigging – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
D Dead man’s switch system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 134

Derricking gear
Raising and lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 79
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 80
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 78
Working with the derricking gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 78
Diesel engine
Diesel engine – operation with the hand-held control
Starting and turning off the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 29
Inspections after starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Inspections before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37
Shutting down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11, 5 - 13
Starting – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Starting the cold engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Topping up oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Diesel engine – operation in the crane cab
Inspections after starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 30
Inspections before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 33
When starting the engine the first time in the day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 21
Differential locks
see Longitudinal differential locks
see Transverse differential locks
Displaying whilst operating the crane
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 149
Operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 145
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 147
08.03.2006
Driver’s cab
Adjusting mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Adjusting the driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Adjusting the passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14

GMK 4080-1
Index
Air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 75
Auxiliary heater
Position of the operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 57
Emergency operation for raising the boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
after the emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Establishing a hose connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24
Establishing hydraulic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25
Performing emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Switching the continuous operation on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 65
Position of the operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20, 11 - 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Roof ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 68
Tilting and lowering the driver’s cabin
with hydraulic tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
with mechanical tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Tilting forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Tilting forward without hydraulic tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 67
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59
Driving
Behaviour in the event of a breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 38
Inspections before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Inspections while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 34
off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49
uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 42
Driving from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 171
After driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 190
Driving the rigged truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 184
Opening / closing the driving mode submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 175
Possible connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 187
Longitudinal differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 188
Transverse differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 189
Preconditions for driving with a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 174
Preconditions for driving without a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 173
Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 172
Steering
Adapt steering direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178
Normal steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 179
Separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 179
Switch on steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178
Driving modes
Using the tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Dual tank
08.03.2006
Checking the fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Switching over the fuel supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

GMK 4080-1
Index
E Earthing
of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 13
the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 67
Earthing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 67
Eddy current retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 41
Electrical system
Display and operating elements in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 99
Fuses in the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
SLI fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
Emergency operation
for raising the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159 (ZH1/461) . . . . . . . . . 14 - 69
in the event of the crane control breaking down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 63
Emergency retraction operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44
Inspections prior to emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44
Mechanical emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 46
Retraction procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 45
Emergency stop devices
Air intake inhibitor (additional equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Diesel engine
Air intake inhibitor (additional equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
with diesel engine emergency stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
on the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
Extending / retracting the telescopic section / cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 110
F Fire extinguisher
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 113
Front flap
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 62
Fuel tank
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Fuses
in the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
on the superstructure
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 10
on I/O circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9
on the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8
SLI fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
H Hand-held control
Connecting the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 27
Crane engine
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
Disconnecting the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 32
Starting the diesel engine with connected hand-held control
With the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 29
Starting the diesel engine with the connected hand-held control
from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 31
From the driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 30
Hazard warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Heating
Crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 193
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 103
Crane cab heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 102
Driver’s cab
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49, 6 - 69
Cab heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 65
High-speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism high speed function . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
Hoist high-speed function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 133
Switching on the high speed function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
Hoist rope
Checking the position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 11
Positioning it on the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 128
Possible reeving methods on the main boom
with 6 head sheaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 132
Unreeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 124
Hook block
on a separate vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 123
Picking up the hook block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 124
Setting down the hook block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 124
on the bumper
to the bumper
Attaching the hook block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 122
Houselock
Switching on / off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17
Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159 (ZH1/461)
After emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 84
Emergency supply of another crane
Connecting / disconnecting the hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 85
Switching on / off the emergency supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 86
Emergency supply of other cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 72
08.03.2006
Establishing hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 73

Establishing the hydraulic circuits required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 76
Important instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 69
Operating in emergency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 80
Operating principle and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 71

GMK 4080-1
Index
Hydraulic system
Display and control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
Hydraulic system of the superstructure
Cooling the hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 134
Display and control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 85
I Identification
of the counterweight sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 86
of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Information
Conversion table for US measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 19
Example of how to use cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
for operations planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Technical information on carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Inspections
"Boom not set down" warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
of the safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 12
prior to starting the vehicle engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 34
Installing/removing the air traffic control light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 147
Installing/removing the anemometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 147
Instrument panels
in the driver’s cab – overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
K Keys
for the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 57
for the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 110
L Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Level adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 56
Display and operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 43
Moving the truck crane into on-road driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Raising or lowering the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 58
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 58
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 56
08.03.2006
Tilting the truck crane lengthwise or crosswise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57

Lifting limit switch
Installing / removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 139
Locking / releasing lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 145

GMK 4080-1
Index
Load bearing capacity of the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9

Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 10
Longitudinal differential lock
Switch off from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 188
Switch on from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 188
Longitudinal differential locks
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 53
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 52
while towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Lowering limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 131
M Main boom
Lowering to the horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 81
Rigging work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 121
Main hoist
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 75
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 71
Working with the main hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 71
Malfunctions
at the safe load indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
Auxiliary hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 20
Carrier electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Counterweight hoist unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 26
Crane control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
Derricking gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 22
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37
Diesel engine – when operating with the dual tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Hydraulic system / hydraulic oil cooler of the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
in the diesel engine during crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15
Level adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39, 8 - 44
Main hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 18
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42, 14 - 16
Procedure in the event of malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 24
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Suspension locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Telescoping mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 28
Transmission with automatic gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40, 14 - 32
08.03.2006
Turntable locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
when operating with the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
when working with the crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5

GMK 4080-1
Index
Movement combinations
for operation with the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 131
Multipurpose switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 55
O Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49
On-road driving level
see Level adjustment
On-road level
Bringing the crane into on-road level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Operating elements
for crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 45
for driving from inside the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 115
Outrigger pressure indicators
on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 84
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
Aligning the truck crane horizontally
Automatic alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 77
with free-on-wheels truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80
during crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 81
when rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80
with truck crane on outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 77
Checking the alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 69
at the switch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 71
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 73
in the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 73
in the Outriggers submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 74
on the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 69
CHECKLIST – Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
CHECKLIST – Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 35
Enlarging the outrigger surface area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 11
Extending / retracting outrigger beams
from the switch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 46
Setting permissible outrigger spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 51
with the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 43
Extending / retracting the outrigger beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 43
Extending / retracting the outrigger cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 57
Outrigger pads
Moving them into working position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 56
Outrigger pressure indicator
08.03.2006
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 83

on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 84
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 83
Permissible outrigger spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 37

GMK 4080-1
Index
Preparing the truck crane for rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 42

Securing the outrigger beams for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 55
Overview
Crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 4
Crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Operating and display elements – crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Operating and display elements – vehicle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
P Parking brake
while towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Possible reeving methods
on the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 135
R Reeving / unreeving the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 126

Positioning the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 128
Reeving the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 129
Rope end clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 126
Refuelling
Dual tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Fuel for the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Rigging for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
for driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
Switching on boom floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Switching on boom pre-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Switching on the slewing gear freewheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Rigging mode
before starting work – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
Setting on the SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 39
Rigging work
Main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 121
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
Rigging add-on parts in position for crane operation / driving . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 23
Folding mirrors in / out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 24
Rigging for crane operation – CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Unrigging after crane operation – CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
Rotating beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Rotating beacon (controlled from the crane cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 100
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
S Safe distance
from banks and pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12
from electrical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 14
Safe load indicator
see SLI
Safety
Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Safety devices
Functional description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 129
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 12
Separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
Checking the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Steering the third and forth axle lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 62
Switching to normal steering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 63
Switching to separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 62
Slewing gear
Braking the slewing movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 88
Slewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 84
Slewing to 0° and 180° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 87
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 90
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 89
Working with the slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 83
Slewing gear freewheel
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 20
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
SLI
Displaying / entering the time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 60
during crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 51
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 58
Finding and eliminating malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
Error messages on the SLI insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 34
General malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
Lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 37
Operating elements
at the insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36
Overriding SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 59
Setting the rigging mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 39
SLI early warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 54
SLI shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 55
due to an error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 56
due to overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 55
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 35
08.03.2006
SLI lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 37

Steering
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178

GMK 4080-1
Index
Steering column
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Operating elements on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Superstructure lock
Houselock
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 19
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17
Superstructure, access ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Suspension
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
Switching on the ignition
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
Switching the fan thermostat to emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Symbols in the operating instructions, explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
T Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Inserting diagram sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19
Opening the drawer to check time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 18
Setting time groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1, 15 - 1
Dimensions and weights of removable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 4
Dimensions, weights and axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
Maximum lifting capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
Technical data for the power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 5
Working speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 7
Technical description of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
Telescoping mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 91
Checking the initial position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 102
Control lever function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 98
Emergency program submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 49
Error messages and causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 31
Example of a telescoping procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 101
Locking the telescopic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 119
Locking the telescopic section for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 123
Main boom fixed length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 93
Main boom intermediate length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 94
Main boom telescoping length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 94
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 92
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 100
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 98
08.03.2006
Telescoping in fully automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 124

Telescoping sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 97
Telescoping the main boom for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 81
Telescoping the main boom into a horizontal position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 130
Telescoping the telescopic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 117

GMK 4080-1
Index
Telescoping, display on the SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 95

Unlocking the telescoping cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 107
Tempomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 44
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43
Temposet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Electric power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
in the event of engine or transmission damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Towing the truck crane out of the danger area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 79
Towing free
Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60
Forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60
Transfer case
Display and operating elements in the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
Switching the off-road gear on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 50
Transmission
Transmission with automatic gear change
Changing gears while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27
Changing the direction of travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29
Changing the starting gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
Error messages on the Transmission display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
gear position L - slow, maneuvering on sloping ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30
Manoeuvring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 32
on the roller type dynamometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 33
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23
Selecting the driving direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24
Selecting the operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26
Shifting to neutral position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
Starting at extremely low temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 33
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29
Transverse differential locks
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
08.03.2006
switch on from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 189

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 55
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 54

GMK 4080-1
Index
Trip recorder
see Tachograph
Truck crane
Checking horizontal alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 63
Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 13
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
in on-road driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Overview of crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Overview of the vehicle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29, 6 - 46
Raising or lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 58
Rocking free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 59
Safe distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 63
Securing against rolling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 47
Tilting lengthwise or crosswise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Towing free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60
Turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Tyres
see Wheels
V Vehicle engine
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Ventilation
Driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
W Warning plates for vehicle width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Filling the tyres yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Mounting a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
onto the spare wheel holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Removing a wheel from the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Removing the wheel from the spare wheel holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Wind
Effect of wind on crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 64
Permissible wind load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 67
Wind strength table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 64
Windscreen wipers
at the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 100
08.03.2006
Work break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 191

During short work breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 191
During work breaks longer than 8 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 192
Working area spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 99

GMK 4080-1
Index
Working range limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 151

Entering a maximum working radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 156
Entering limit values manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 164
Entering point data for objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 160
Entering the maximum overall height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 155
Entering the maximum slewing angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 157
Opening the working range limitation submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 152
Reading current settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 153
Shutdown caused by working range limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 169
Switching monitoring off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 168
Switching monitoring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 167
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Operating instructions
3 112 252 en
Vehicle identification number: 08.03.2006
Important note
Duplications of any kind and excerpts from this

document are not subject to the revision service.
Original documents of Deutsche GROVE GmbH
are marked with the blue serial number of the
truck crane on the cover sheet.
Duplications and printouts of data carriers on

which Deutsche GROVE GmbH has delivered this
document are also not subject to the revision ser-
vice.
© Copyright reserved by Deutsche GROVE GmbH

08.03.2006
Dissemination or duplication of this document as well as utilization and disclosure of its contents are prohibited unless ex-
pressly permitted. Infringement will incur liability for compensation. All rights pertaining to registration of patent or utility
model are reserved.

GMK 4080-1
Additional pages
SLI override
These additional pages only apply to truck cranes with additional operating
elements:
Additional operating elements:

1 Status display
3 Raise switch
These change the following:
– Cancelling automatic mode for rigging the

counterweight
and
– The procedure for the SLI override
Cancelling automatic mode

When the counterweight menu (2) is dis-
played, turn the key-operated switch (1) anti-
clockwise, regardless of whether symbol (A)
or (B) is displayed.
s
20.05.2010

SLI override – symbol (A)
Use the key-operated switch (3) to override the
SLI as described in the operating manual.
The operating elements (1), (2) and (4)have
not been assigned functions.
If additional equipment is used, the status dis-

play (1) indicates this in the same way as the
SLI display in the crane cab:
Green: 0 - 90%
Yellow: Approx. 90 - 100%
SLI override – symbol (B)

The status display (1) is active.
The following operating elements can be used

to override the SLI:

3 Key-operated rigging switch
4 Raise switch
Carry out the SLI override only as it is

described in these additional pages.
20.05.2010

Status display
The status display informs people in the danger area of the truck crane:
– about the current degree of utilisation,

– in case of an SLI shutdown or early warning,
– when the SLI has been overridden.
The warning is made optically and, in part,
acoustically.
1 Loudspeaker (warning signal)
2 Lamp, green
3 Lamp, yellow
4 Lamp, red
s
20.05.2010

The lamps of the status display light up or blink depending on the SLI
degree of utilisation and operation of the switches.
Degree of utilisation
Switch operated 0 - 90% Approx. Greater than
90 - 100% 100%
No switch Display (4) Display (5) Display (6)
(normal operation) green yellow red
Display (5)
Key-operated Display (4) Display (5)
rigging switch (1) green yellow,
yellow
blinking
Display (4) Display (5) Display (4)

Raise switch (2)
green yellow green, blinking
Key-operated Display (6) red, Display (6) red, Display (6) red,
override switch (3) blinking blinking blinking
20.05.2010

SLI shutdown
There are different types of SLI shutdowns:
– Shutdown due to overload, approx. 100% of the maximum permissible

load is exceeded,
– Shutdown due to an error.
If the SLI has shut down the crane movements, then:
– depending on the version, the lamp (1) lights up,

– a continuous buzzer tone sounds.
– the status display lights up red.
Now you can:
à Raising after SLI shutdown, S. 6

à Overriding SLI or lifting limit switch for rigging work, S. 7
à Overriding the SLI in an emergency, S. 9
s
20.05.2010

Raising after SLI shutdown
You can re-enable raising with the switch (1) in order to leave the shutdown
range.
The speed is then reduced to 50%.
Prerequisite
Raise main boom

• Press the button (1) up once.
– Raising is enabled.
The SLI shows an information code; à S. 11.
– The status display blinks green.
• Raise the main boom with the control lever until the degree of utilisation
is less than 100%.
The crane movements are enabled again.
H
The raising of the main boom is shut down if the main boom angle is too
great. Then all you can do is set the load down.
If the degree of utilisation is over 100%, you can cancel the function by:
– pressing switch (1) up again or
– switching off the ignition.
20.05.2010

Overriding SLI or lifting limit switch for rigging work
For rigging work, you can:

– Override the lifting limit switch or
– Override the SLI and thus enable a degree of utilisation of up to 110%.
H
For both overrides the speed of the movements which increase the load
moment is reduced to 15%.
The speed of the movements which increase the load moment is not
reduced.
Prerequisite
Lifting limit switch shutdown

• Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the left
once.
Once the lifting limit switch has been acti-
vated, the crane movement is now stopped
only once and then no longer monitored.
Overriding the SLI

• Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the right
once.
Now a degree of utilisation of up to 110% is
enabled.
After overriding
– The status display lights up red.
If you do not trigger a control lever movement within 10 seconds, you must
press the key-operated switch again.
s
20.05.2010

– press the key-operated switch again or
– do not activate the control lever for 10 seconds or
– switch off the ignition.
S
operation!
20.05.2010

Overriding the SLI in an emergency
G
Risk of accidents due to overridden or faulty SLI
It is not permitted to work with an overridden or faulty SLI!
Set down the load immediately and stop operating the crane if the SLI is
faulty!
You may only override the SLI if it becomes absolutely necessary in the
event of an emergency. This is to put the truck crane into a safe condition
in the event of a malfunction. In this case, do not perform any movements
that would increase the load moment.
If the SLI has shut down all crane movements,

you can cancel the shutdown with the key-
operated switch (1).
Once the shutdown is cancelled, the crane

operation is no longer monitored and the
switched off crane movements are enabled
again.
The power unit speeds are reduced to 15%.
Prerequisite
Cancelling a shutdown
• Turn the key-operated switch (1) to the left or right once.
– Now all crane movements are enabled for 30 minutes. The crane
movements are no longer monitored by the SLI.
The status display blinks red.

At a degree of utilisation over 110% the warning signal sounds; à S. 4.
s
20.05.2010

– switch off the ignition or
– press the key-operated switch again.
The override is automatically cancelled 30 minutes after the key-operated
switch has been pressed.
S
operation!
20.05.2010

Table – Error The following table contains error codes, their causes and possible reme-
codes dies.
Representation of error codes; à Operating instructions

8 04 4 Key-operated rigging – Start the engine;
switch pressed, no override – Reduce degree of utilisation to less
effective than 110%
– Move the control lever within
10 seconds after operation
8 05 4 Raise switch pressed, no – Start the engine;
override effective – Press switch again
8 06 4 Key-operated SLI override – Start the engine;
switch pressed, no override – Press switch again
effective
Key-operated rigging
effective
Raise switch pressed, No measures required.
override effective
Key-operated SLI override
effective
20.05.2010

Blank page
20.05.2010

Additional page
Controls for crane cabin heating
Differing slightly from the details in the operating instructions, depending

on the version, the position and function of the controls may change.
This additional page shows you the changed position of the controls.
Position of
controls
Function
1 Air-conditioning system1) à Operating instructions
2 Setting fresh air/recirculated air/mixed air à Function, p. 2
3 Setting the fan à Function, p. 2
4 Air distribution à Function, p. 2
5 Setting the temperature à Operating instructions
s
24.06.2008
Additional page 3 112 526 en 1

Heating controls
Function
Setting fresh air/recirculated air/mixed air

You can set the air to be sucked in by the fan.
• Turn the switch (1) to the position for
A Recirculated air – air is sucked in from the driver's cab.
Change to fresh air often to ensure that oxygen is supplied.
B Fresh air – outer air is sucked in.
C Mixed air – outer air and air from the driver's cab is sucked in.
The percentage of the corresponding air type is increased
continuously by turning the switch in direction (B) or (A).
Setting the fan

• Turn the switch (2) to the required level 1 to 3, depending on the desired
air quantity.
Air distribution
You can allow the air to flow out from various air vents.
• Turn the switch (4) to the position for the

required air vents.
A Air vents (1), (2),

windscreen, centre
B Air vents (3),
cab floor
C Air vents (1), (2), (3)
24.06.2008
2 3 112 526 en Additional page

Heating controls
These operating instructions consist of two parts:
Part 1 – Driving
Part 2 comprises the following chapters:
11 Description of the crane section of the truck crane

12 Crane operation
13 Rigging work
14 Malfunctions during crane operation
15 Technical information for superstructure
16 Index
Chapter 1 to 10 are in Part 1 – Driving
This part does not constitute the complete

operating instructions. The basic safety
instructions for crane operation can be
found in Part 1, Chapter 2.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11
11 Description of the crane section of the truck crane
11.1 Overview of the operating and display instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
11.1.1 Overview of the crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
11.1.2 Overview of crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 4
11.1.3 Operating elements on the front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 6
11.1.4 Operating elements on the side panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 7
11.1.5 Control consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 12
11.1.6 Control lever configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 14
11.1.7 At crane control insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 16
11.1.8 Main menu of the crane control display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 18
11.1.9 Crane control display - submenus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 21
11.1.10 At the SLI insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36
11.1.11 Hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 41
11.1.12 Switch boxes for outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display . . . 11 - 42
11.2 Functional description of the display and operating elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 45
11.2.1 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 45
11.2.2 Crane control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 46
11.2.3 Outrigger, electronic level, outrigger pressure indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 51
11.2.4 Counterweight submenu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 61
11.2.5 Hoists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 65
11.2.6 Slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 68
11.2.7 Derricking gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 71
11.2.8 Telescoping mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 74
11.2.9 Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 85
11.2.10 Safe load indicator (SLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 87
11.2.11 Electricity, lighting, windscreen wiper / washing system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 99
11.2.12 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 102
11.2.13 On the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 105
11.2.14 Other operating elements of the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 110
11.3 Functional description of the display and operating elements for driving
from inside the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 115
11.3.1 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 115
11.3.2 Driving submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 116
11.3.3 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 117
11.3.4 Axle drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 121
11.3.5 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 124
11.3.6 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 125
11.4 Functional description of the safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 129
08.03.2006
11.4.1 Safe load indicator (SLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 129

11.4.2 Lowering limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 131
11.4.3 Lifting limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 132
11.4.4 Dead man's switch and seat contact switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 134

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Description of the crane section of the truck crane
11.1 Overview of the operating and display instruments
11 Description of the crane section of the truck

crane

This section only describes those operating and display elements for crane
operation that are located on the outside of the truck crane or in the crane
cab.
11.1.1 Overview of the crane section
The diagram on the following page illustrates the location of the operating
and control instruments on the outside of the truck crane that are required
for crane work.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Compensation weight or à p. 13 - 85
auxiliary hoist1) à p. 12 - 76
2 Main hoist à p. 11 - 65
3 Counterweight à p. 13 - 85
4 Depending on the version
– Operating panel for emergency operation with à p. 8 - 23
hand pump à p. 14 - 69
– Operation panel for hydraulic emergency opera-
tion 1)
5 Rear outriggers à p. 13 - 33
6 Storage box and access ladder
7 Connections for hand-held control à p. 11 - 105
8 Crane cab à p. 11 - 4
9 Diesel engine emergency stop switch à p. 14 - 1
10 Switch boxes for outrigger operation / electronic à p. 11 - 42
level / outrigger pressure indicator 1)
11 Front outrigger à p. 13 - 33
12 Slewable working area spotlight 1) à p. 12 - 144
13 Data transmitters 2)
14 Boom pre-tensioning 1) à p. 13 - 19
15 Boom floating position 1) à p. 13 - 18
16 Working area spotlight 1) à p. 11 - 99
17 Hydraulic oil cooler à p. 12 - 134
(additional equipment for second hydraulic oil
cooler)
18 Slewing gear freewheel 1) à p. 13 - 20
19 Hook block à p. 13 - 121
20 Fuel tank for heating system à p. 12 - 10
21 Slewing gear à p. 12 - 83
22 Central lubrication system
23 Mirror for observing the outriggers à p. 13 - 25
24 Storage box 1)
25 Hoist mirror / mirror on the crane cab à p. 13 - 24
1)
2)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.2 Overview of crane cab
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Side panel à p. 11 - 7
2 Front panel à p. 11 - 6
3 Heating insert 1 à p. 11 - 10
4 Right-hand control console à p. 11 - 12
5 Left-hand control console à p. 11 - 12
6 Air vents à p. 11 - 102
7 Accelerator
8 Vehicle's service brake pedal à p. 11 - 124
9 Slewing gear service brake pedal à p. 11 - 69
10 Storage compartment
11 Reservoir for windshield wipers à p. 12 - 9
12 Cab lighting à p. 11 - 112
13 Heating insert 2 à p. 11 - 11
14 Loudspeakers
15 Radio cassette player 1), 2)
Radio CD player 1), 2)
16 Crane cab seat with à p. 12 - 8
seat contact switch à p. 11 - 134
17 Detachable covering, behind fuses à p. 14 - 10
18 Air vent à p. 12 - 193
19 Fan intake à p. 12 - 193
20 Fire extinguisher 1) à p. 11 - 113
21 Door unlocking mechanism à p. 11 - 111
1)
2)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.3 Operating elements on the front panel
1 Crane control emergency stop switch à p. 11 - 49

2 SLI insert (safe load indicator) à p. 11 - 36
3 Key-operated override switch à p. 11 - 98
– For safe load indicator (SLI)
– For safe load indicator and lifting limit switch
4 Crane control insert à p. 11 - 16
5 Front panel, adjustable à p. 12 - 8
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.4 Operating elements on the side panel
Left side of the

side panel
1 Ashtray
2 Heating / air-conditioning insert à p. 11 - 10
3 Diagnostics plugs (behind covering) à p. 11 - 112
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Top of the
side panel
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Air vents à p. 11 - 102

2 Hoist high speed indicator lamp à p. 11 - 65
3 Rocker button for windscreen wiper à p. 11 - 100
4 Rocker button for roof window wiper à p. 11 - 101
5 Rocker button for washing system à p. 11 - 101
6 Indicator lamp for high-speed derricking gear / tele- à p. 11 - 72
scoping mechanism à p. 11 - 76
7 Rocker button for working area spotlight socket à p. 11 - 99
8 On / off rocker button for slewable working area à p. 11 - 100
spotlight1)
9 On / off rocker button for air traffic control light1) à p. 11 - 99
10 Rocker button for pivoting working area spotlight1) à p. 11 - 100
11 Indicator lamp for flame start system1) à p. 11 - 46
12 Charge warning lamp à p. 11 - 115
13 Indicator lamp for vehicle parking brake à p. 11 - 124
14 Rocker switch for rotating beacon on / off1) à p. 11 - 100
15 On / off rocker button for Houselock1) à p. 11 - 69
16 Rocker button for constant engine speed à p. 11 - 45
17 Rocker button for vehicle parking brake à p. 11 - 124
18 Ignition lock à p. 11 - 45
19 Cigarette lighter (24 Volt)
1)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Heating insert 1
1 On / off rocker button for air-conditioning1) à p. 11 - 104

2 Rotary switch for fresh air / recirculated air à p. 11 - 102
3 Rotary switch for air distribution à p. 11 - 102
4 Rotary switch for blower à p. 11 - 102
1)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Heating insert 2 The insert is installed vertically. The picture shows the insert in such a way
that the figures on the display are visible.
1 Heating system display à p. 11 - 103

2 Rotary switch for regulating temperature à p. 11 - 103
3 Push-button for setting time / day à p. 11 - 103
4 Push-button for calling up storage locations à p. 11 - 104
5 "Switch heating on / off" push-button à p. 11 - 103
6 Input – push-button à p. 11 - 104
7 Input + push-button à p. 11 - 104
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.5 Control consoles
Left-hand control
console
1 Left-hand control lever (configuration depends on à p. 11 - 14

version)
2 Dead man's switch à p. 11 - 134
3 Horn button
4 Depending on function switched on:
– Rocker button for high-speed derricking gear / à p. 11 - 72
telescoping mechanism à p. 11 - 75
– Rocker button for separate steering à p. 11 - 127
5 Auxiliary hoist slewing indicator1) à p. 12 - 77
6 On / off rocker button for slewing gear à p. 11 - 68
à p. 11 - 67
08.03.2006
7 On / off rocker button for auxiliary hoist

8 Rocker button for inclining crane cab1) à p. 11 - 85
1)

GMK 4080-1
Right-hand con-
trol console
1 Right-hand control lever (configuration depends on à p. 11 - 14

version)
2 Dead man's switch à p. 11 - 134
3 Horn button
4 Depending on function switched on:
– Rocker button for hoist high speed à p. 11 - 66
– Rocker button for steering à p. 11 - 127
5 Main hoist drum synchro à p. 12 - 72
6 On / off rocker button for main hoist à p. 11 - 65
7 On / off rocker button for slewing gear à p. 11 - 71
8 On / off rocker button for telescoping mechanism à p. 11 - 74
9 On / off rocker button for derricking lattice à p. 11 - 73
extension1)
08.03.2006
1)

GMK 4080-1
11.1.6 Control lever configuration
The truck crane can be equipped with two different control lever configura-
tions. The current control lever allocation is indicated by the symbol on the
control levers.
Version 1 The illustrations in this section show the control lever allocation in version 1
(standard) (truck crane without auxiliary hoist); à
Version 2 (additional equipment),
p. 11 - 15.
Left-hand control lever allocation Right-hand control lever allocation

1 Slew to the left 5 Raise
3 Slew to the right 7 Lower
2 Extend 6 Lower main hoist
4 Retract 8 Lift main hoist
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Version 2 (addi- The illustrations in this section show the control lever allocation in version 2
tional equipment) (truck crane with auxiliary hoist); àVersion 1 (standard), p. 11 - 14.
Left-hand control lever allocation Right-hand control lever allocation

1 Slew to the left 5 Raise / Retract
3 Slew to the right 7 Lower / extend
1)
2 Lower auxiliary hoist 6 Lower main hoist
4 Raise auxiliary hoist1) 8 Lift main hoist
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.7 At crane control insert
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Crane control display à p. 11 - 18

2 Error warning lamp / warning message à p. 11 - 47
3 Buttons F 1 to F 4 à p. 11 - 46
4 Buttons F 5 to F 8 à p. 11 - 46
5 Sensor for brightness à p. 11 - 49
6 Buttons F 9 to F 14 à p. 11 - 46
7 Button for opening the error menu and Error menu à p. 11 - 47
overview LED à p. 11 - 33
8 Buttons for key code input and LEDs à p. 11 - 47
8.1 Button for Warning message submenu and LED à p. 11 - 32
9 Close submenu / input mode button and LED à p. 11 - 48
10 Indicator lamp for slewing gear brake à p. 11 - 48
11 Input rotary switch à p. 11 - 46
12 Warning lamp for lifting limit switch shutdown à p. 11 - 48
13 Button for input confirmation and LED à p. 11 - 48
H
Various menus are shown on the Crane control display.
The menus are operated with the buttons F 1 to F 14. The individual buttons
have different functions in each menu. The function of the buttons in the dis-
played menu corresponds to the symbol located next to or above the but-
ton;à p. 11 - 46.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.8 Main menu of the crane control display
Symbols for further submenus and symbols for current displays are shown
on the Crane control display in the main menu.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Switching the measuring range à p. 11 - 50

2 Electronic level display à p. 11 - 50
3 Anemometer display 1) à p. 11 - 50
4 Telescoping submenu à p. 11 - 24
5 Control instruments submenu à p. 11 - 27
6 Counterweight submenu à p. 11 - 21
7 Power unit speed submenu à p. 11 - 26
8 Remote control display 2)
9 Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure dis- à p. 11 - 22
play submenu
10 Settings / displays submenu à p. 11 - 28
11 Indicator lamp
– Slewing gear on / off à p. 11 - 68
– Auxiliary hoist on / off 1) à p. 11 - 67
– Main hoist on / off à p. 11 - 65
– Derricking gear on / off à p. 11 - 71
– Telescoping mechanism on / off à p. 11 - 74
– Lattice extension rocker on / off 1) à p. 11 - 74
12 Houselock locking status display 1) à p. 11 - 69
13 Working range limitation submenu 1) à p. 11 - 34
14 Display of serial number of the truck crane à p. 11 - 50
15 Display of crane control program version à p. 11 - 50
16 Submenu Driving à p. 11 - 30
1)
2)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.9 Crane control display - submenus
Counterweight
submenu
1 Display of slewing direction to 0° / 180° à p. 11 - 64

2 On / off indicator lamp for slewing gear à p. 11 - 63
3 Current slewing angle display à p. 11 - 64
4 Counterweight lock display à p. 11 - 61
5 Lock counterweight à p. 11 - 62
6 Unlock counterweight à p. 11 - 62
7 Pre-charge pressure display à p. 11 - 63
8 Retract lifting cylinders à p. 11 - 63
9 Extend lifting cylinders à p. 11 - 63
10 Cylinder position display à p. 11 - 62
11 Stop at 0° / 180° à p. 11 - 64
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Outriggers /
electronic level /
outrigger pressure
display submenu
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 All outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 58

2 Front right outrigger à p. 11 - 57
2.1 Front right outrigger pressure display1) à p. 11 - 60
3 Both right-hand outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 58
4 Rear right outrigger à p. 11 - 57
4.1 Rear right outrigger pressure display1) à p. 11 - 60
5 Extend outrigger beams à p. 11 - 59
6 Retract outrigger beams à p. 11 - 59
7 Both rear outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 58
8 Both front outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 58
9 Extend outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 59
10 Retract outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 59
11 Rear left outrigger à p. 11 - 57
11.1 Rear left outrigger pressure display1) à p. 11 - 60
12 Both left-hand outrigger cylinders à p. 11 - 58
13 Front left outrigger à p. 11 - 57
13.1 Front left outrigger pressure display1) à p. 11 - 60
14 Switching the measuring range à p. 11 - 60
15 Electronic level display à p. 11 - 60
16 Directional indicator for electronic level à p. 11 - 60
17 On / off indicator lamp for slewing gear à p. 11 - 59
18 Movements locked display à p. 11 - 59
1)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Semi-automatic
telescoping sub-
menu
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Select Unlock telescopic section à p. 11 - 79

2 Select Lock à p. 11 - 79
3 Select Unlock telescoping cylinder à p. 11 - 78
4 Current locking status display à p. 11 - 78
5 Remote control display 1)
6 Anemometer display à p. 11 - 83
7 Display for telescoping cylinder at locking point à p. 11 - 80
8 Display for release of telescope à p. 11 - 81
9 On / off indicator lamp for telescoping mechanism à p. 11 - 76
10 Display:
– Telescoping cylinder in the telescopic section à p. 11 - 77
– Teleautomation switched on à p. 11 - 82
11 Current telescoping display à p. 11 - 77
12
13 Telescopic diagram display à p. 11 - 77
14 Directional indicator for teleautomation à p. 11 - 81
15 Enter set value for teleautomation à p. 11 - 81
1)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Power unit speeds

submenu
1 Set slewing gear speed à p. 12 - 138

2 Set telescoping mechanism speed à p. 12 - 138
3 Set main hoist speed à p. 12 - 138
4 Set derricking gear speed à p. 12 - 138
5 Set auxiliary hoist speed 1) à p. 12 - 138
6 Displays for currently set speeds à p. 12 - 138
7 Set derricking gear speed of the lattice extension 1)
8 Input mode on display à p. 12 - 139
1)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Control instru-
ments submenu
1 Oil temperature gauge for hydraulic system à p. 12 - 30

2 Display for diesel engine fuel tank level à p. 12 - 27
3 On-board voltage status display à p. 12 - 30
4 Diesel engine speed display à p. 12 - 30
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Settings /
Displays submenu
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Carrier display fields on / off 1) à p. 11 - 56

2 Display for carrier display fields on / off 1)
à p. 11 - 56
3 Lamp test à p. 12 - 24
4 Control lever characteristic curve display à p. 12 - 136
5 Control lever characteristic curve input à p. 12 - 136
6 Pressure indicator for telescoping cylinder à p. 11 - 85
7 Pressure indicator for slewing gear hydraulic circuit à p. 11 - 85
8 Operating hours counter submenu à p. 11 - 32
9 Set display brightness à p. 12 - 135
10 Display brightness value à p. 12 - 135
11 Pressure indicator for hydraulic circuit à p. 11 - 86
12 Access to telescoping emergency program à p. 14 - 49
13 Display for current status of telescoping mechanism à p. 11 - 82
14 Interval wiper display à p. 11 - 101
15 Interval wiper setting à p. 11 - 101
16 Display for entering the telescope status after emer- à p. 14 - 60
gency operation
1)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Submenu Driving
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Gear position R à p. 11 - 119

2 Neutral position à p. 11 - 117
3 Gear position D à p. 11 - 118
4 Gear position L à p. 11 - 120
5 Changing the steering direction à p. 11 - 125
6 Steering display à p. 11 - 125
7 Steering lock display à p. 11 - 116
8 Transverse differential lock display à p. 11 - 122
9 Transverse differential locks on / off à p. 11 - 121
10 Longitudinal differential locks display à p. 11 - 123
11 Longitudinal differential locks on / off à p. 11 - 122
12 Steering locking status display à p. 11 - 126
13 Separate steering on / off à p. 11 - 126
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Operating hours counter submenu

1 Crane control
2 Auxiliary power units
3 Telescoping mechanism
4 Diesel engine
5 Derricking gear
6 Locking system
7 Main hoist
8 Auxiliary hoist 1)
9 Slewing gear
10 Lattice extension 1)
1)
Description of the displays; à Display the operating hours, p. 12 - 145.
Warning message submenu

1 Diesel tank
2 Diesel engine excessive engine speed 1)
3 On-board voltage
4 Diesel engine air filter
5 Preload pressure in the counterweight lift-
ing unit
6 Service brake
7 Anemometer
8 Collective warning lamp
9 Hydraulic oil temperature
10 Hydraulic oil filter feed / control circuit
11 Hydraulic oil return filter 1
1)
Description of the displays; à Warning message submenu, p. 12 - 147.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Error menu
1 Current error / sum of errors display à p. 14 - 40

2 Page up à p. 14 - 40
3 Page down à p. 14 - 40
4 Error display à p. 14 - 40
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Working range The Working range limitation submenu is only available with additional
limitation sub- equipment.
menu
1 Working range limitation display à p. 12 - 167

2 Maximum overall height entry à p. 12 - 155
2.1 Maximum overall height display à p. 12 - 155
3 Maximum working radius entry à p. 12 - 156
3.1 Maximum / Current working radius display à p. 12 - 156
4 Maximum slewing angle entry submenu à p. 11 - 35
4.1 Maximum / Current slewing angle display à p. 12 - 157
5 Entry point data for objects submenu à p. 12 - 160
6 Manual entry on / off à p. 12 - 164
7 Monitoring objects on / off à p. 12 - 167
8 Monitoring slewing angle on / off à p. 12 - 167
9 Monitoring working radius on / off à p. 12 - 167
à p. 12 - 167
08.03.2006
10 Monitoring maximum overall height on / off

GMK 4080-1
Maximum slewing angle entry submenu

1 Limited slewing angle display
2 Select slewing angle A
2.1 Maximum / Current slewing angle A
display
3 Select slewing angle B
3.1 Maximum / Current slewing angle A
display
4 Manual input on / off
Description of the displays; à

Entering limit
values for maximum slewing angles, p. 12 - 157.
Enter point data for objects submenu

1 Limiting by object display
2 Point data display
3 Current point data display
4 Manual input on / off
5 Select previous point
6 Select next point
7 Select angle / radius
8 Delete selected point data
9 Delete all point data
Description of the displays; à Entering point

data for objects, p. 12 - 160.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.10 At the SLI insert
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Angle of lattice extension input button1) à p. 11 - 90

No function2)
1.1 Lattice extension angle display1) à p. 11 - 90
Current lattice extension inclination display2) à p. 11 - 92
2 Length of lattice extension input button à p. 11 - 90
2.1 Length of lattice extension display à p. 11 - 90
3 Reeving input button à p. 11 - 88
3.1 Reeving display à p. 11 - 88
4 Counterweight input button à p. 11 - 90
4.1 Counterweight display à p. 11 - 90
5 SLI code input button à p. 11 - 87
5.1 SLI code display à p. 11 - 87
6 Outrigger span input button à p. 11 - 89
6.1 Outrigger span display à p. 11 - 89
7 Input mode button à p. 11 - 87
8 Numerical pad with buttons 1 to 0 à p. 11 - 87
9 Acknowledge button à p. 11 - 89
10 Confirm entry button à p. 11 - 88
11 Time / Date button à p. 11 - 97
1)
Additional equipment with manually inclinable lattice extension
2)
Additional equipment with hydraulically derricked lattice extension
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Current telescoping display à p. 11 - 91

2 Maximum load display à p. 11 - 92
3 SLI early warning lamp à p. 11 - 93
4 SLI shutdown warning lamp à p. 11 - 93
5 Indicator lights for hoists à p. 11 - 88
6 Sensor for brightness à p. 11 - 94
7 Current main boom angle display à p. 11 - 91
8 Current degree of utilization display à p. 11 - 93
9 Current load display à p. 11 - 93
10 Current radius display à p. 11 - 92
11 second level numerical pad button à p. 11 - 94
12 Lamp test (second level assignment) button à p. 11 - 94
13 Service F3 button à p. 11 - 94
14 Service F4 button à p. 11 - 94
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
1 Information / errors display à p. 11 - 95

2 Error information button à p. 11 - 95
3 Degree of utilisation button à p. 11 - 95
4 Button for oil pressure of derricking cylinder lower à p. 11 - 96
chamber (second level and third level assignment)
5 Current slewing angle button à p. 11 - 97
6 Current overall height button à p. 11 - 97
7 Current radius button à p. 11 - 97
8 second level information button à p. 11 - 96
9 third level information button à p. 11 - 96
10 Current main boom length button à p. 11 - 96
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.11 Hand-held control
1 Diesel engine operating panel à p. 11 - 106

2 Pre-selection button for emergency à p. 11 - 107
operation
3 Two-hand operating panel à p. 11 - 108
4 Outrigger / electronic level operating panel à p. 11 - 51
5 No function
6 Horn button à p. 11 - 106
Required connections for the different movements à p. 11 - 105.
H
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.1.12 Switch boxes for outrigger / electronic level / outrigger

pressure display
With additional equipment, there is a switch box with the operating and dis-
play elements for outrigger, electronic level and the pressure display on
each side of the carrier.
H
Identical display fields are located on each side of the carrier.
Using both the lower button units (1 and 3), it is possible to operate the out-
rigger cylinders and outrigger beams of the side on which the respective
display fields are located (operator's side).
Outrigger cylinders opposite the display field (opposite) are operated on the
side using both the upper button units (2 and 4).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Operating ele- 1 Button unit for outrigger to the left of display field, à p. 11 - 55
ments for the operator's side
outriggers
2 Button unit for outriggers to the left of display field, à p. 11 - 55
opposite
3 Button unit for outriggers to the right of display field, à p. 11 - 55
operator's side
4 Button unit for outriggers to the right of display field, à p. 11 - 55
opposite
5 High-speed button à p. 11 - 55
6 Normal speed button à p. 11 - 55
7 Switch on second level button à p. 11 - 54
8 Retract all outrigger cylinders button à p. 11 - 55
9 Extend all outrigger cylinders button à p. 11 - 55
Display elements
for the outrigger 1.1 Outrigger pressure indicator to the left of display à p. 11 - 56
pressure indicator field, operator's side
2.1 Outrigger pressure indicator to the left of display à p. 11 - 56
field, opposite
3.1 Outrigger pressure indicator to the right of display à p. 11 - 56
field, operator's side
4.1 Outrigger pressure indicator to the right of display à p. 11 - 56
field, opposite
Operating and
display elements 10 Switch measuring range button à p. 11 - 56
for the electronic 11 Electronic level display à p. 11 - 56
level
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

elements
Definition of directional information for using operating elements;
à Definition of positional references, p. 1 - 18.
11.2.1 Diesel engine
On the side panel à Inspections on the instrument panel, p. 12 - 30.
Ignition lock
0 Ignition off, diesel engine and crane functions off, key can be
removed.
R, 1 Ignition on, instrument lighting is on.
Additional power supply on for:
control units for crane control, engine control system, SLI
2 Starting position; à Starting and stopping the diesel engine from the
superstructure, p. 12 - 21.
Â Rocker button for constant engine speed

To set a constant engine speed which will be maintained when the acceler-
ator is released.
– When the diesel engine is at a standstill:
Down: Press once Diesel engine starts up, constant engine
speed = idling speed
– When the diesel engine is running:

Down: Press once Constant engine speed one level higher
Continuous Constant engine speed is increased until
operation the maximum engine speed is reached.
Up: Press once Constant engine speed one level lower
Continuous After approx. 3 seconds = idling speed
operation After a further approx. 3 seconds – diesel
engine off
à Setting a constant engine speed, p. 12 - 140.

s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
z Indicator lamp for flame start system

Lights up when ignition is switched on and diesel engine is cold.
Goes out when diesel engine is ready to start; à
p. 12 - 29.
On the crane con- In the Control instruments submenu of the Crane control display there are
trol display additional displays for checking the speed of the diesel engine and the fuel
tank level; à Inspections after starting the diesel engine, p. 12 - 30.
11.2.2 Crane control
At crane control This section only describes the function of the operating elements (hard-
insert ware) irrespective of the menu opened in the Crane control display.
> Buttons F1 to F14

Used for operating the crane (e.g. telescoping mechanism, locking of turn-
table) and for opening displays and submenus. The function of the buttons
depends on the menu opened. The function of a button is shown by a sym-
bol located next to or above the button in the Crane control display.
Input rotary switch

The rotary switch is only active when input mode for the settings listed
below is switched on. The optical display for the input mode switched on
varies according to the setting.
Is used to enter values on the Crane control display.
Turning it clockwise: Increases the value
Turning it to the left: Decreases the value
Turning the knob slowly changes the value in small intervals. Turning the
knob quickly changes the value in large intervals.
The rotary switch is only active when input mode for the settings listed
below is switched on.
– Adjusting the brightness of the display; à p. 12 - 135,
– Adjusting power unit speeds; à p. 12 - 138,
– Adjusting the windscreen wiper stroke interval; à p. 12 - 143,
– Entering limit values manually; à p. 12 - 164.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
¥ Error warning lamp / warning message

Warning lamp flashes as soon as crane control detects a new error or a new
error message.
Warning lamp remains lit for error messages which have been acknowl-
edged in the Error menu but still exist; à
p. 12 - 149.
–£ Button for opening the error menu and LED

This button is only active when the LED next to the button is lit or flashing.
After pressing the button, the Error menu appears in the Crane control display.
The LED flashes when a new error message is detected.
The LED is lit when all existing error messages are acknowledged, but still
exist.
The LED goes out when there has been no error message since the last time
the ignition was turned on.
à Error menu, p. 12 - 149.
–Å Button for Warning message submenu and LED

This button is only active when (only) the LED next to the button is lit or
flashing. After pressing the button, the Error memory submenu appears in
the Crane control display.
The LED flashes when a new error message is detected.
The LED is lit when the Warning message submenu was opened once after the
last warning message.
The LED goes out when the warning message no longer exists.
à Warning message submenu, p. 12 - 147.
The button is needed to enter a key code in another function.
ÅÆÇ Buttons for key code input and LEDs

These are only active when all three LEDs next to the buttons are lit.
The LEDs indicate that entering a key code required (for the Telescoping emer-
gency program or entering a telescope image after the emergency pro-
gramme).
The LEDs go out when the key code has been entered correctly and
accepted;
à Emergency telescoping program submenu, p. 14 - 49,
à Entering telescoping values after emergency operation, p. 14 - 60.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
ö Close submenu / input mode button and LED

This button is only active when the LED next to the button is lit.
It is used to close a submenu which has been opened. Pressing the button
closes the current submenu and opens the menu of the next level up. If this
menu is also a submenu, it is possible to return to the main menu by press-
ing the button again.
The LED lights up in all submenus and goes out in the main menu.
Ö Button for input confirmation and LED

This button is only active when the LED next to the button is lit.
It is used to transfer a value entered in the Crane control display. Pressing this
button saves the newly entered value in the crane control.
The LED is lit when input mode is activated in the displayed menu.
The LED goes out when input mode is closed (by saving a new value or can-
celling the entry).
Warning lamp for lifting limit switch shutdown

# Lights up when shutdown of the hoist is triggered by the hoist limit switch.
The SLI does not display any error messages.
Lamp flashes when the lifting limit switch has been triggered but shutdown
has been bypassed; à
Lifting limit switch, p. 11 - 132.
t Indicator lamp for slewing gear brake

Shows the current position of the slewing gear brake.
Brake is released when the slewing gear is switched on and closed when
slewing gear is switched off.
Indicator lamp lit: Slewing gear brake locked
Indicator lamp goes out: Slewing gear brake released
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane control emergency stop switch

Used for switching off the crane control system in an emergency. Immedi-
ately switches off the diesel engine. Crane functions are stopped abruptly.
To stop crane functions: Push in the emergency stop switch.
The switch clicks into position.
To release crane functions again: Turn the emergency stop switch.
The switch pops back out.
à In the crane cab, p. 14 - 2.
Sensor for brightness

The sensor (1) registers the light intensity around the Crane control insert.
After switching on the ignition, the basic brightness of all displays automat-
ically adjusts to the ambient light. The brightness of the displays can also be
manually adjusted; à p. 12 - 135.
This display is used to show various menus for

crane operation and to display information
and error messages.
The main menu appears after switching on the

ignition. The main menu contains display ele-
ments and various symbols.
Symbols which represent submenus are indi-

cated by a blue top left corner. Pressing the
button next to or under a symbol opens the
corresponding submenu.
H
The Crane control display can show metric units of measurement and US
units of measurement. The unit of measurement is set at shipment. If you
would like to change the setting, please contact CraneCARE.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the crane con- This section only describes the operating and display elements in the main
trol display menu. The submenus are described in separate sections or in the context of
the functions in which they must be used.
Electronic level display

Indicates the current alignment of the truck crane on the LED display (2). The
bars shown always refer to the alignment of the carrier as shown by the
directional indicator (3).
The currently set measuring range (1) is indicated above the display (1° or
5°). The most recently saved measuring range is shown after switching on
the ignition; à On the crane control display, p. 13 - 73.
Switching the measuring range

Used to switch the measuring range of the electronic level between an incli-
nation of 1° and 5°. Pressing the button switches the measuring range to the
other value respectively. The currently set measuring range is shown on the
display. The measuring range set last is saved when the ignition is switched
off; à p. 13 - 73.
Anemometer display
The display is only shown when an anemometer (additional equipment) is
connected electrically.
The current wind speed can be read from the Anemometer (1) display.
The display shows a level indicator with two different scales. The wind
speed can be read in metres per second (m/sec) on the left and in Beaufort
degrees (B) on the right; à
Monitoring the wind speed without an anemometer,
p. 12 - 64.
Displays for serial number and crane control program version

The Serial number display (1) shows the same serial number as indicated on
the Superstructure name plate; à
p. 1 - 3.
The Crane control program version (2) indicates the current version number of
the program used by the crane control. This version number must always
be specified in the case of errors; à
p. 14 - 39.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.3 Outrigger, electronic level, outrigger pressure indicator
On the hand-held The following designations for front, rear, right and left refer to the carrier,
control irrespective of the position of the superstructure.
The driver's cab is always at the front.
Outrigger pre-selection button

1 Front left outrigger
2 Front right outrigger
3 Rear left outrigger
4 Rear right outrigger
5 All outrigger cylinders
6 High-speed mode
7 second Switch on second level
LDNF Outrigger pre-selection button

Used to preselect the individual outriggers:
– Front left outrigger
– Front right outrigger
– Rear left outrigger
– Rear right outrigger
Pressing a pre-selection button pre-selects the associated outrigger for
operation. The pre-selection remains switched on for approx. 10 seconds
and then switches off automatically. The LEDs in the symbols show the cur-
rent status:
LED lit: Pre-selection switched on
LED gone out: Pre-selection switched off
As long as the pre-selection of one outrigger is switched on, other outrig-

gers can also be preselected.
The preselected outriggers are moved using the buttons on the two-hand
operating panel.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
J All outriggers pre-selection button

This button is used to preselect all outrigger cylinders simultaneously.
Pressing the pre-selection button preselects all four outrigger cylinders
together. The pre-selection remains switched on for approx. 10 seconds and
then switches off automatically. The LEDs in the symbols indicate the cur-
rent status:
LED on: Pre-selection switched on
LED out: Pre-selection switched off
operating panel.
On the second level, the button is used for automatic alignment of the truck
crane.
@ Switch on second level pre-selection button

This button is used to switch on the second level of a pre-selection button.
To switch on the second level, first press the Switch on second level button and
then the button allocated on the second level.
@ J +
Automatic alignment preselection
This function is on the second level of the All outriggers pre-selection button.
It is used to preselect automatic horizontal alignment.
– First press the Switch on second level pre-selection button once. The LED in
the pre-selection button lights up.
– Then press the All outriggers pre-selection button once. The LED in the pre-
selection button also lights up.
The Automatic alignment function is switched on as long as the LEDs in both
pre-selection buttons are lit. After approx. 10 seconds the pre-selection is
automatically switched off and the LEDs in both pre-selection buttons go
out.
operating panel; à
Automatic alignment, p. 13 - 77.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
H High speed pre-selection button

This button is used to switch pre-selection between high speed and normal
speed.
Pressing the pre-selection button switches between high speed and normal
speed. The LED in the pre-selection button shows the current preselection.
LED out: Normal speed is preselected.
LED on: High speed is preselected. The movements of the
outrigger are driven at a higher diesel engine
speed than in normal speed.
Two-hand operating panel

This is used to move the preselected function of the outrigger. There are:
– Direction buttons (1) and (4) and
– Movement buttons (2) and (3).
Two buttons must always be pressed in order to move the preselected func-
tion. There are four possible combinations. Buttons that have been pressed
are shown in black in the illustrations:
Extend Retract Extend Retract

outrigger cylinders outrigger cylinders outrigger beams outrigger beams
Moving the outrigger beams is only allowed when a maximum of two out-
rigger beams located on the same side are preselected.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Electronic level
1 Electronic level display
2 Switch measuring range button
The display's LEDs (1) indicate the current

alignment of the truck crane. The allocation of
the LEDs always corresponds to how the car-
rier is displayed on the symbol (3).
After the Switch measuring range button (2) is

pressed, the measuring range is switched to
the other respective value and the associated
LED in the button lights up (1° or 5°);à On the
hand-held control, p. 13 - 69.
On the display The Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure indicator display fields are
fields of the carrier only available with additional equipment; à Outriggers, p. 13 - 33.
This section only describes the operating elements on the display fields in
the Outriggers / electronic level / outrigger pressure indicator switch boxes.
There are additional displays on the Crane control display for the electronic
level and the outrigger pressure indicator; à In the Outrigger / electronic level
/ outrigger pressure display submenu, p. 11 - 57.
É Switch on second level button

The button has an LED which serves as a search light when the ignition is
switched on.
Press any button to make all buttons and displays light up. If you do not
press any button for ten seconds, the light is automatically switched off and
only the LED in the Switch on second level button is lit.
This button is used to switch on the second level of the Normal speed button.
then the button allocated on the second level.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Á Normal speed button

Used to move the outrigger when the diesel engine is running at idling speed.
This button is always used in conjunction with a button for retracting or
extending the outrigger. First the Normal speed button is pressed, followed
by the button corresponding to the desired movement of the outrigger.
Î High-speed button
Used to move the outrigger when the diesel engine is running at a high speed.
This button is always used in conjunction with a button for retracting or
extending the outrigger. First the High speed button is pressed, followed by
the button corresponding to the desired movement of the outrigger.
§ Retract all outrigger cylinders button

This button is always used in addition to the Normal speed button or High
speed button.
Used to retract all four outriggers simultaneously.
¨Ä Extend all outrigger cylinders button

This button is always used in addition to the Normal speed button or High
speed button.
Used to extend all four outriggers simultaneously.
Button units for outriggers to the left of display field

Used to move an individual outrigger cylinder or outrigger beam located to
the left of the display field. The following buttons are always pressed in
addition to the Normal speed or High speed buttons.
1 Extend outrigger cylinder button
2 Retract outrigger cylinder button
3 Extend outrigger beam button (only on operator's side)
4 Retract outrigger beam button (only on operator's side)
Button units for outriggers to the right of display field

Used to move an individual outrigger cylinder or outrigger beam located to
the right of the display field. The following buttons are always pressed in
addition to the Normal speed or High speed buttons.
.
1 Extend outrigger cylinder button

2 Retract outrigger cylinder button
3 Extend outrigger beam button (only on operator's side)
08.03.2006
4 Retract outrigger beam button (only on operator's side)
s
GMK 4080-1

Indicates the current alignment of the truck crane in the LED display (2);
à At the switch boxes, p. 13 - 71.
The current measuring range setting (1) is lit (1° or 5°).
Switch measuring range button

other value respectively. The current measuring range setting is lit;
à Switching the measuring range, p. 13 - 71.
On the second level, the button is assigned an error menu which indicates
the current error messages of the carrier electronics; à
Malfunctions to the
carrier electronic system, p. 8 - 45.
Outrigger pressure indicator display

Shows the outrigger pressure in the outrigger operated with the corre-
sponding button unit (e.g. to the left of the display field, operator's side).
The unit of the displayed outrigger pressure lights up next to the display.
Units can be displayed in t (tons) or klbs. (kilopounds) (1 kilopound =
1000 lbs.).
The display in t is with a decimal point.
The display in klbs. is without a decimal point.
à Outrigger pressure indicator on the carrier, p. 13 - 84.
In the Settings / The operating elements in this section are only available with additional
Displays submenu equipment when the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure indicator
switch boxes are installed on the carrier.
The button next to the Carrier display fields on/off (1) symbol is used to switch
on/off the functions of the button on the display fields in the switch boxes
on the carrier.
The switching state changes each time the button next to the symbol (1) is
pressed. The display Carrier display fields on/off indicates the current status:
Symbol 2: Display fields switched on
Symbol 3: Display fields switched off
à Switching on / off the display fields on the carrier, p. 13 - 42.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
In the Outrigger / à Extending / Retracting the outrigger beams, p. 13 - 43,

electronic level / à Extending / Retracting the outrigger cylinders, p. 13 - 57.
outrigger pressure
display submenu
All the elements described in this section can be found in the Outrigger / elec-
tronic level / outrigger pressure indicator submenu. To open this menu, press
the button next to the " symbol in the main menu.
H
This section only shows the symbols that can be found in this submenu.
When reference is made to the pressing of a button, the button meant is
always the one located next to or under the symbol shown.
H
The following designations for front, rear, right and left refer to the carrier,
irrespective of the position of the superstructure.
:/>3 Pre-selection of front / rear / right / left outrigger

Used to preselect the individual outriggers:
– Front left outrigger
– Front right outrigger
– Rear left outrigger
– Rear right outrigger
Pressing the button next to a symbol preselects the associated outrigger for
operation. The pre-selection remains switched on for approx. 10 seconds
and then switches off automatically. The points in the symbols indicate the
current status:
Green point: Pre-selection switched on
Black point: Pre-selection switched off
One outrigger can only ever be preselected. Pressing another button deac-
tivates a previously selected function.
To move this outrigger, it is necessary to press the corresponding button
next to one of the symbols for retracting or extending the outrigger cylinder
or outrigger beam while the pre-selection is still active.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
, Pre-selection of all outrigger cylinders

This button is used to preselect all outrigger cylinders simultaneously.
Pressing the button next to the symbol simultaneously preselects all outrig-
ger cylinders for operation. The pre-selection remains switched on for
approx. 10 seconds and then switches off automatically. The point in the
symbols indicates the current status:
The button next to the Extend outrigger cylinder symbol or Retract outrigger
cylinder symbol is also pressed to retract or extend the outrigger cylinders
when pre-selection is switched on.
Moving the outrigger beams is locked with this pre-selection.
<1B7 Both left / right / front / rear outrigger cylinders

Used to jointly preselect:
– Both left outrigger cylinders
– Both right outrigger cylinders
– Both front outrigger cylinders
– Both rear outrigger cylinders
Pressing the button next to a symbol preselects both associated outrigger
cylinders for operation. The pre-selection remains switched on for approx.
10 seconds and then switches off automatically. The points in the symbols
indicate the current status:
Only one pair of outrigger cylinders can be preselected at a time. Pressing

another button deactivates a previously selected function.
The button next to the Extend outrigger cylinder symbol or Retract outrigger
cylinder symbol is also pressed to retract or extend the outrigger cylinders
when pre-selection is switched on.
Moving the outrigger beams is locked with this pre-selection.
1 On / off indicator lamp for slewing gear

The lamp lights up red when the slewing gear is off.
The lamp lights up green when the slewing gear is on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Movement locked symbol

The (!) symbol is shown if the outrigger is preselected when the slewing
gear is switched on.
When the symbol appears the symbols for moving the outrigger are shown
in light grey and the associated buttons are not active.
65 Retract / Extend outrigger beams

The buttons next to the symbols are only active when movement of the pre-
selected outrigger cylinder is allowed and when the slewing gear is
switched off. The colour of the symbols indicates the current status:
Black: The button next to the symbol is activated.
Light grey: The button next to the symbol has no function.
These buttons are always pressed in addition as long as the pre-selection of

an outrigger is switched on and the point in the associated symbol is green.
– After pressing the button next to the Retract outrigger beam symbol the out-
rigger beam retracts to the preselected outrigger.
– After pressing the button next to the Extend outrigger beam symbol the out-
rigger beam extends to the preselected outrigger.
@A Retract / Extend outrigger cylinders

The buttons next to the symbols are only active when movement of the pre-
selected outrigger cylinder is allowed and when the slewing gear is
switched off. The colour of the symbols indicates the current status:
#

These buttons are always pressed in addition as long as the pre-selection of

an outrigger or the pre-selection of outrigger cylinders is switched on and
the point is green in the associated symbol:
– After pressing the button next to the Retract outrigger cylinder symbol the
outrigger cylinder retracts to the preselected outrigger.
– After pressing the button next to the Retract outrigger cylinder symbol the
outrigger cylinder extends to the preselected outrigger.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

Indicates the current alignment of the truck crane on the LED display (2). The
bars shown always refer to the alignment of the carrier as shown by the
directional indicator (3). The current measuring range setting (1) is shown
in the display (1° or 5°); àOn the crane control display, p. 13 - 73.
Switch the measuring range

other respective value; àSwitching the measuring range, p. 13 - 71.

The displays (1) are only available with additional equipment. They are used
to display the outrigger pressure in the outrigger. The unit is shown to the
right of the display. It is in t (tons) or klbs (kilopounds) (1 kilopound =
1000 lbs), depending on the setting.
Both units are displayed as a decimal.
à Outrigger pressure indicator in the crane cab, p. 13 - 83.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.4 Counterweight submenu
Counterweight à Rigging / unrigging the counterweight, p. 13 - 85,

submenu à Counterweight hoist unit, p. 13 - 109.
All the elements described in this section can be found in the Counterweight
submenu. To open this menu, press the button next to the % symbol in the
main menu.
H
Only the symbols which can be found in this submenu are described in this
section. When reference is made to the pressing of a button, the button
meant is always the one located next to or under the symbol shown.
Counterweight lock display

The counterweight is locked and unlocked by turning the counterweight lift-
ing cylinders. The display shows which position the counterweight lifting
cylinders (1) have been turned to.
– In locked position, the counterweight lifting cylinders are arranged verti-

cally and appear green.
– In unlocked position, the counterweight lifting cylinders are arranged hor-

izontally and appear red.
– Intermediate positions (between Locked and Unlocked) are represented by

yellow counterweight lifting cylinders.
– Error conditions (e.g. a lifting cylinder is registered as being simulta-

neously Locked and Unlocked) are detected by the crane control and repre-
sented by a violet symbol (!).
à Display of incorrect statuses, p. 13 - 111,
à Locking / unlocking counterweights, p. 13 - 114.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
!# Lock / Unlock counterweight

The buttons next to the symbols are only active when the associated func-
tion can be moved due to the current rigging mode. The colour of the sym-
bols indicates the current status:
! Green: The button next to the symbol is activated.
# Red: The button next to the symbol is activated.
!# Light grey: The button next to the symbol has no function.
The counterweight lifting cylinders are:

– Turned to the Locked position when the button next to the Lock counter-
weight symbol is pressed.
– Turned to the Unlocked position when the button next to the Unlock coun-
terweight symbol is pressed.
Movement continues for as long as the button is pressed or until a final
position has been reached; à
Locking / unlocking counterweights, p. 13 - 114.
Cylinder position display

The final positions for retracted counterweight lifting cylinders can differ
depending on the erected counterweight. Final positions are detected by the
proximity switch or using pre-charge pressure.
The display shows the current position of the counterweight lifting cylinders
(1):
– The final retracted position is represented by green retracted counter-

weight lifting cylinders.
– The final extended position is represented by green extended counter-

weight lifting cylinders.
– Intermediate positions (no final position has been reached) are repre-
sented by yellow counterweight lifting cylinders.
– Error conditions (e.g. messages appear for one lifting cylinder stating that
it is simultaneously Completely retracted and Extended) are detected by the
08.03.2006
crane control and shown as a violet symbol (!).

GMK 4080-1
89 Extend / Retract lifting cylinder

The buttons next to the symbols are only active when the function can be
moved due to the current rigging mode. The colour of the symbols indicates
the current status:
The counterweight lifting cylinders are:

– Retracted when the button next to the Retract lifting cylinder symbol is
pressed.
– Extended after pressing the button next to the symbol Extend lifting cylin-
der, if the superstructure is slewed to position 0° or 180°. After extension,
slewing is blocked.
Movement continues for as long as the button is pressed or until a final
position has been reached; à
Extending / Retracting the lifting cylinders,
p. 13 - 112.
Pre-charge pressure display

For crane operation, the raised counterweight must be forced against the
turntable with a specified pre-charge pressure.
The display shows whether this pre-charge pressure has been reached.
– Lights up in red, when the precharge pressure has not been reached or
when the precharge pressure decreases.
– The display lights up green as soon as the counterweight lifting cylinders
have been retracted far enough into the end position to create the pre-
charge pressure.
à Precharging the counterweight, p. 13 - 113.
On/off indicator lamp for slewing gear
Indicates whether the slewing gear is switched on or off.
Shown in red: Slewing gear is switched off
Shown in green: Slewing gear is switched on
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Current slewing angle display
0°: Position 0° to the rear

180°: Position 180° to the front
+ 0.1 to +180.0°: Turned to the right from 0°
– 0.1 to –179.9°: Turned to the left from 0°
à p. 12 - 86
Display of slewing direction to 0°/180°

Current position ± 20° in front of the 0° or 180° superstructure position.
– Both arrows: 0° or 180° superstructure position reached
– One arrow: Arrow direction = slewing direction to reach 0° or 180°
à p. 12 - 87
Stop at 0°/180°
To switch on: Press button until the dot turns green.

When 0° or 180° is reached:
– Automatic slewing stop
– Slewing gear brake engaged
– Slewing blocked
To switch off: Press button until the dot turns black.
– Release slewing
After switching on the ignition, the dot is black
à p. 12 - 87
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.5 Hoists
Main hoist à Main hoist, p. 12 - 71.
ä On / off rocker button for main hoist

Used to switch the main hoist on and off. There is an indicator lamp in the
rocker button.
After switching on the ignition, the main hoist is switched off and the indi-
cator lamp in the rocker button is dimly lit.
Switch on main hoist: Indicator lamp is dimly lit.
Press rocker button upwards once; the indi-
cator lamp will then be brightly lit.
Switch off main hoist: Indicator lamp is brightly lit.
cator lamp will then be dimly lit.
3 On / off indicator lamp for main hoist

This indicator lamp is located in the Crane control display in the main menu.
The lamp lights up red when the main hoist is off.
The lamp lights up green when the main hoist is on.
Right-hand control lever

To lift main hoist: Move control lever backwards
To lower main hoist: Move control lever forwards
The sensitivity of the control lever can be changed by setting various char-
acteristic curves;à p. 12 - 136.
: Hoist high speed indicator lamp

Indicates whether high-speed mode is switched on or off for the hoists.
Goes on if high-speed mode is switched on.
It goes out if high-speed mode is switched off.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rocker button for hoist high speed

The function for high-speed mode of the hoists is only active when the park-
ing brake is locked.
Switches on high-speed mode for the main hoist and auxiliary hoist (addi-
tional equipment).
To switch on high- The indicator lamp Hoists high-speed mode is not lit.
speed mode briefly: Press the rocker button to the left; high-speed
mode will be switched on for as long as the rocker
button is pressed.
When high-speed mode is switched on, the indica-
tor lamp Hoists high-speed mode lights up.
To switch on high- The indicator lamp Hoists high-speed mode is not lit.
speed mode for con- Press rocker button once to the right; high-speed
tinuous operation: mode will be switched on.
tor lamp Hoists high-speed mode lights up.
To switch off high- The indicator lamp Hoists high-speed mode lights up.
speed mode: Press rocker button once to the right or left; the
indicator lamp Hoist high-speed mode goes out.
If the parking brake is released, the rocker button has the Steering function;
à p. 11 - 127.
*
SLI early warning lamp
The SLI early warning lamp flashes when the actual load reaches 90% or
more of the maximum permissible load. An intermittent buzzer tone sounds
at the same time; àSLI early warning, p. 12 - 54.
The SLI early warning lamp lights up when SLI shutdown is imminent.
SLI shutdown warning lamp

+ Lights up when the SLI switches off crane movements which increase the
load moment. This happens either because approx. 100% of the maximum
permissible load has been reached (overload) or an error has occurred.
A continuous buzzer tone sounds at the same time; à
SLI shutdown,
p. 12 - 55.
Warning lamp for lifting limit switch shutdown

# Lights up when shutdown of the hoist is triggered by the hoist limit switch.
The SLI does not display any error messages;
08.03.2006
Lamp flashes when the lifting limit switch has been triggered but shutdown
has been bypassed; à
Lifting limit switch, p. 11 - 132.

GMK 4080-1
Auxiliary hoist The auxiliary hoist is only available with additional equipment; à Auxiliary
hoist, p. 12 - 76.
å On / off rocker button for auxiliary hoist

Used for switching the auxiliary hoist on and off. There is an indicator lamp
in the rocker button.
After switching on the ignition, the auxiliary hoist is off and the indicator
lamp in the rocker button is dimly lit.
To switch on the auxiliary Indicator lamp is dimly lit.
hoist: Press rocker button upwards once; the indica-
tor lamp will then be brightly lit.
To switch off the auxiliary Indicator lamp is brightly lit.
hoist: Press rocker button upwards once; the indica-
tor lamp will then be dimly lit.
2 Auxiliary hoist on / off indicator lamp

The lamp lights up red when the auxiliary hoist is off.
The lamp lights up green when the auxiliary hoist is on.
Left-hand control lever

To lift auxiliary hoist: Move control lever backwards
To lower auxiliary hoist: Move control lever forwards
acteristic curves; à p. 12 - 136.
H
High-speed mode for the auxiliary hoist is switched on together with high-
speed mode for the main hoist; à
Rocker button for hoist high speed,
p. 11 - 66. The function of the indicator and warning lamps is the same as
for the main hoist.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.6 Slewing gear
à Slewing gear, p. 12 - 83
ç On / off rocker button for slewing gear

Used for switching the slewing gear on and off. There is an indicator lamp
After switching on the ignition, the slewing gear is switched off and the indi-
cator lamp in the rocker button is dimly lit.
To switch on slewing gear: Indicator lamp is dimly lit.
cator lamp will then be brightly lit.
To switch off slewing gear: Indicator lamp is brightly lit.
cator lamp will then be dimly lit.
1 On / off indicator lamp for slewing gear

The lamp lights up red when the slewing gear is off.
The lamp lights up green when the slewing gear is on.
t Indicator lamp for slewing gear brake

Shows the current position of the slewing gear brake.
Brake is released when the slewing gear is switched on and closed when
slewing gear is switched off.
Indicator lamp lit: Slewing gear brake locked
Indicator lamp goes out: Slewing gear brake released
Left-hand control lever

The counterweight lifting cylinders are retracted.
To turn superstructure to the left: Push control lever to the left
To turn superstructure to the right: Push control lever to the right
acteristic curves; àp. 12 - 136.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Slewing gear service brake pedal

Used to apply the brakes to the slewing gear during crane operation. The
braking force can be adjusted to infinitely variable amounts.
¥ An error message is shown in the crane control insert when the oil temper-
ature of the slewing gear brake exceeds 120° C. The current temperature can
be found in the error menu. When the oil temperature exceeds 120°C, crane
operation must be discontinued until the oil has cooled and the error mes-
sage does not reappear.
House lock The following operating and display elements are only available with addi-
tional equipment; à Switching the houselock on / off, p. 12 - 17.
Houselock on / off rocker button

The rocker button (1) is on the side panel.
To switch on: Press the rocker button up.
The locking pin is extended.
To switch off: Press the rocker button down.
The locking pin is retracted.
Locking status displays

The current status of the locking pins is shown
by different symbols:
1 green – locked
2 red – unlocked
3 yellow – intermediate position
4 yellow/red – locked, locking pin in front
of a tooth
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.7 Derricking gear
à Derricking gear, p. 12 - 78.
U On / off rocker button for slewing gear

Used for switching the derricking gear on and off. There is an indicator lamp
After switching on the ignition, the derricking gear is off and the indicator
lamp in the rocker button is dimly lit.
To switch on derricking gear: Indicator lamp is dimly lit.
Press rocker button upwards once; the
indicator lamp will then be brightly lit.
If the control lever is assigned more than one function, all other power
units which are assigned the same movement of the control lever are
switched off. Indicator lamps in the corresponding rocker buttons are dimly
lit.
To switch off derricking gear: Indicator lamp is brightly lit.

Press rocker button upwards once; the
indicator lamp will then be dimly lit.
If the control lever is assigned more than one function, the derricking gear
can also be switched off by switching on a power unit which is assigned
the same movement of the control lever.
( On / off indicator lamp for derricking gear

The lamp lights up green when the derricking gear is on.
The lamp lights up red when the derricking gear is off.
Right-hand control lever

To raise (= raise boom): Push control lever to the left
To lower (= lower boom): Push control lever to the right
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rocker button for high-speed derricking gear / telescoping mechanism

The function for high-speed mode of the derricking gear / telescoping mech-
anism is only active when the parking brake is locked.
Switches on high-speed mode for the derricking gear / telescoping mechanism.
To switch on high- The indicator lamp Derricking gear / telescoping mech-

speed mode briefly: anism high-speed mode goes out.
Press the rocker button to the right; high-speed
mode is switched on for as long as the rocker but-
ton is pressed.
tor lamp High-speed mode derricking gear / telescoping
mechanism lights up.
speed mode for con- anism high-speed mode goes out.
tinuous operation: Press rocker button once to the left; high-speed
mode will be switched on.
To switch off high- The indicator lamp Derricking gear / telescoping mech-
speed mode: anism high-speed mode lights up.
Press rocker button once to the right or left; the
indicator lamp Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism
high-speed mode goes out.
If the parking brake is released, the rocker button has the Separate steering
function; à p. 11 - 127.
H
When lowering the boom, high-speed mode only supports the start-up of
the derricking procedure from steep boom positions; it does not increase
the derricking speed; à
p. 12 - 78.
; Indicator lamp for high-speed derricking gear / telescoping mechanism

Indicates whether high-speed mode is switched on or off for derricking gear
/ telescoping mechanism.
Lights up if high-speed mode is switched on.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
*
at the same time; à SLI early warning, p. 12 - 54.
+
Lights up when the SLI switches off crane movements which increase the
permissible load has been reached (overload) or an error has occurred.
A continuous buzzer tone sounds at the same time; à
SLI shutdown,
p. 12 - 55.
Derricking the lat- Is only active when additionally equipped with hydraulically derricked lat-
tice extension tice extension.
z On / off rocker button for derricking lattice extension

Used to switch the derricking gear on the lattice extension on and off. There
is an indicator lamp in the rocker button.
V On / off indicator lamp for derricking lattice extension

Found in the main menu with corresponding additional equipment.
Shows whether the derricking gear of the lattice extension is switched on or
off.
H
Used for the exact function of the button and the indicator lamp, as well as
the operation of the lattice extension; à Lattice extension operating instruc-
tions GMK 4080-1.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.8 Telescoping mechanism
Control consoles à Telescoping mechanism, p. 12 - 91.
T On / off rocker button for telescoping mechanism

Used for switching the telescoping mechanism on and off. There is an indi-
cator lamp in the rocker button.
After switching on the ignition, the telescoping mechanism is off and the
indicator lamp in the rocker button is dimly lit.
To switch on telescoping mechanism: Indicator lamp is dimly lit.
Press rocker button upwards once;
the indicator lamp will then be
brightly lit.
If a control lever is assigned more than one function, all other power units
which are assigned the same movement of the control lever are switched
off. Indicator lamps in the corresponding rocker buttons are dimly lit.
To switch off telescoping mechanism: Indicator lamp is brightly lit.

Press rocker button upwards once;
the indicator lamp will then be
dimly lit.
If the control lever is assigned more than one function, the telescoping
mechanism can also be switched off by switching on a power unit which
is assigned the same movement of the control lever.
& On / off indicator lamp for telescoping mechanism

This indicator lamp is located in the Crane control display in the main menu
and in the Telescoping submenu.
The lamp lights up red when the telescoping mechanism is switched off.
The lamp lights up green when the telescoping mechanism is switched on.
If a control lever is assigned more than one function, all other power units
which are assigned the same movement of the control lever are switched
off. The indicator lamps will then light up red for the power units which have
been switched off.
Control lever for Depending on the crane version, the telescoping mechanism can either be
telescoping operated with the right-hand or left-hand control lever; à
Control lever con-
figuration, p. 11 - 14.
The movement of the control lever for telescoping is different for each con-
trol lever:
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Telescoping with the right-hand control lever

To retract: Move control lever to the left
To extend: Move control lever to the right
Telescoping with the left-hand control lever

To retract: Move control lever backwards
To extend: Move control lever forwards
Rocker button for high-speed derricking gear / telescoping mechanism

The function for high-speed mode of the derricking gear / telescoping mech-
anism is only active when the parking brake is locked.
Switches on high-speed mode for the derricking gear / telescoping mecha-
nism.
speed mode briefly: anism high-speed mode goes out.
Press the rocker button to the right; high-speed
mode is switched on for as long as the rocker button
is pressed.
speed mode for con- anism high-speed mode goes out.
tinuous operation: Press rocker button once to the left; high-speed
mode will be switched on.
To switch off high- The indicator lamp Derricking gear / telescoping mech-
speed mode: anism high-speed mode lights up.
Press rocker button once to the right or left; the indi-
cator lamp Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism
high-speed mode goes out.
If the parking brake is released, the rocker button has the Separate steering
08.03.2006
function;à p. 11 - 127.
s
GMK 4080-1
; Indicator lamp for high-speed derricking gear / telescoping mechanism

Indicates whether high-speed mode is switched on or off for derricking gear
/ telescoping mechanism.
Lights up if high-speed mode is switched on.
*
at the same time; àSLI early warning, p. 12 - 54.
+
Lights up when the SLI switches off crane movements which increase the
permissible load has been reached (overload) or an error has occurred. A
continuous buzzer tone sounds at the same time; àSLI shutdown,
p. 12 - 55.
Telescoping à Telescoping mechanism, p. 12 - 91.

submenu
All the elements described in this section can be found in the Telescoping
mechanism submenu. To open this menu, press the button next to the
% symbol in the main menu.
H
Symbols which are used in the display of this submenu are described in this
section. When reference is made to the pressing of a button, the button
meant is always the one located next to or under the symbol shown.
& On / off indicator lamp for telescoping mechanism

The lamp lights up green when the telescoping mechanism is switched on.
The lamp lights up red when the telescoping mechanism is switched off.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Current telescoping display

The four displays (1) show the current telescoping of the telescopic sections
as a percent. The numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 next to the displays refer to the tele-
scopic sections I, II, III, IV or V.
When the background of a number (2) is shown in green, the telescoping
cylinder is located in the foot section of the telescopic section (e.g. in tele-
scopic section II).
The background of a number (2) flashes when the telescoping cylinder is
unlocked and when it would be locked during active Locking selection in the
foot section of this telescopic section if the telescoping cylinder were to be
moved farther in the current direction (e.g. in telescopic section II).
Telescopic diagram display

Shows the current status of the telescoping system.
The locking bolts (2) of the telescoping cylinder and the locking bolts (1) of
the telescopic sections are displayed locked in green.
No locking pins are displayed when unlocked.
Display for telescoping cylinder in foot section

Displays the numbers 1, 2, 3 or 4. The numbers refer to the telescopic sec-
tions I, II, III, IV or V.
Lamp is lit when the telescoping cylinder in the foot section of the displayed
telescopic section is locked (e.g. in telescopic section I).
Lamp flashes when the telescoping cylinder is unlocked. Lamp also shows
the number of the telescopic section in whose foot section the telescoping
cylinder would be locked during active Locking selection if the telescoping cyl-
inder were to be moved farther in the current direction (e.g. in telescopic
section I).
The lamp goes out when the telescoping cylinder is unlocked and when the
telescoping cylinder is still too far (more than 1 m) from the nearest locking
point in the foot section of a telescopic section for the possibility of locking
to be displayed.
Goes out when teleautomation is switched on and the Teleautomation
switched on symbol is shown in the same position in the display.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Current locking status display

Shows the current position of the locking pins detected by proximity
switches:
1 Locking pins of the telescopic section shown in the Telescoping cylinder

in the foot section display
2 Locking pins of the telescoping cylinder
The various positions of the locking pins are shown in different colours:
– The Locked position is shown in green (pins are extended),
– The Unlocked position is shown in red (pins are retracted),
– Intermediate positions are shown in yellow (pins are in motion).
– Error messages (e.g. a pin is registered as being simultaneously Locked
and Unlocked) are shown by a violet symbol (!).
+ Unlock telescoping cylinder selection

Shows an active selection screen in the crane control for unlocking the tele-
scoping cylinder or displays the current locking status of the telescoping
cylinder by means of various background colours or by flashing:
– The background of the symbol appears yellow when the telescoping
cylinder is unlocked.
– The background of the symbol appears grey when the telescoping cylin-
der is locked and unlocking has not been selected in the crane control at
the same time.
– The background of the symbol flashes (background changes between
grey and yellow) when the crane control is prepared to carry out the
unlocking procedure in the next step.
Press the button next to the symbol once in order to select unlocking.
The crane control saves the selection and the symbol for the next step nec-
essary for unlocking the telescoping cylinder flashes (e.g. the Lock selection
flashes when the telescopic section is unlocked by pressing the button).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
* Unlock telescopic section selection

The display always refers to the telescopic section shown in the Telescoping
cylinder in foot section display:
Shows an active selection screen in the crane control for unlocking the tele-
scopic section or displays the current locking status of the telescopic section
by means of various background colours or by flashing.
– The background of the symbol appears yellow when the telescopic sec-
tion is unlocked.
– The background of the symbol appears grey when the telescopic section
is locked and unlocking has not been selected in the crane control at the
same time.
grey and yellow) when the crane control has selected unlock and will
carry out the procedure in the next step.
Press the button next to the symbol once in order to select unlocking.
The crane control saves the selection and the symbol for the next step nec-
essary for unlocking the telescopic section flashes (e.g. the Lock selection
flashes when the telescoping cylinder is unlocked by pressing the button).
, Lock selection
Shows an active selection screen in the crane control for locking (telescopic
section or telescoping cylinder) or displays the current locking status of the
system by means of various background colours or by flashing:
– The background of the symbol appears yellow when the telescoping
cylinder and telescopic section are locked.
– The background of the symbol appears grey when the telescoping cylin-
der or telescopic section is unlocked and locking has not been selected in
the crane control at the same time.
grey and yellow) when the crane control will carry out locking as the next
step and until the locking process has been completed mechanically.
Press the button next to the symbol once in order to select locking. The
crane control saves the selection and the symbol next to the button flashes
(background changes between grey and yellow).
The crane control automatically detects whether a telescopic section or the
telescoping cylinder is locked based on whether telescoping is being carried
out or whether the telescoping cylinder is moving without the telescopic
section.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Display for extended length of telescoping cylinder

Shows the current extended length of the telescoping cylinder.
The value (1) shows the length in millimetres (mm) or in feet (ft).
The display unit depends on the factory-made basic adjustments with which
the truck crane was delivered.
Display for telescoping cylinder at locking point

Shows the current position of the telescoping cylinder at the locking point
in the foot section of the telescopic section shown in the Telescoping cylinder
in foot section display.
Arrows shown in yellow indicate the direction in which the telescoping cyl-
inder must be moved in order to be at the locking point:
– If the arrows point downward, the telescoping cylinder must be retracted.
– If the arrows point upwards, the telescoping cylinder must be extended.
The number of yellow arrows shows where the head of the telescoping cyl-
inder is located:
– Two arrows are shown when the locking area has been reached (detected
by length indicator).
– One arrow is displayed shortly before the locking point is reached
(detected by the proximity switch).
Green arrows which point to one another show that the telescoping cylinder
is located at the locking point.
H
TheTelescoping cylinder at locking point display is used mainly as support
when retracting during emergency operation and for the emergency program sub-
menu à Emergency retraction operation, p. 14 - 44.
à Emergency telescoping program submenu, p. 14 - 49.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Display for release of telescope

Shows whether the extending or retracting is enabled.
The upper arrow (1) stands for extension;
The lower arrow (2) stands for retraction.
Red arrow: Telescoping blocked
Green arrow: Telescoping enabled
Further information about display; à Control lever function, p. 12 - 98.
Enter set value for teleautomation

This display is used for entering set values for teleautomation. The coloured
display of the values in displays (1) to (5) shows the current teleautomation
status:
Red: Teleautomation off
Yellow: Set value input
Green: Teleautomation off
The set values for the telescopic sections can be entered using the buttons
(1) under the displays. Buttons are ordered from left to right corresponding
to the telescopic sections I to V.
The display switches to a value for a fixed length each time the button is
pressed. The values for the fixed lengths are shown one after another in a
continuous loop, e.g. for telescopic section I – 0%, 47% and 100%.
After all set values have been entered, the entry can be confirmed by press-
ing the Confirm entry (2) button.
Directional indicator for teleautomation

Shows the telescoping direction for which the control lever must be moved
in order for teleautomation to take place:
Green arrow to the right: Extend control lever for telescoping out
Green arrow to the left: Extend control lever for telescoping in
Arrow flashes: The control level was extended in the wrong
direction
If a change of direction becomes necessary, the telescoping mechanism

stops and the arrow for the other direction is shown in green (e.g. when
switching from retraction of the telescoping to extension); à
Telescoping in
fully automatic mode, p. 12 - 124.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Teleautomation switched on
The symbol is displayed when teleautomation is switched on.
It disappears when teleautomation is switched off.
If, after switching off teleautomation, the telescoping cylinder is in a foot
section, the Telescoping cylinder in foot section display will be shown in the
same position in the display.
Access to telescoping emergency program

For starting the Telescoping emergency program submenu. The button next to
the symbol (1) is only active if the emergency program can be executed. The
colour of the symbol indicates the status:
After pressing the button next to the symbol, the prompt for a key code
appears. After entering the key code, the Telescoping submenu changes into
the display for the emergency program; à Emergency telescoping program
submenu, p. 14 - 49.
; Display for current status of telescoping mechanism

Provides information about the current status of the telescoping mecha-
nism. Different symbols are shown depending on the status.
H
The symbols are shown in the Settings / Displays submenu. If the telescoping
mechanism has been blocked, some of the symbols are also shown in the
telescoping submenu; à
Telescoping mechanism error messages, p. 14 - 31.
@ Normal status
Is only shown in the Settings / Displays submenu.
The symbol for the telescoping mechanism alone is shown if the telescop-
ing mechanism is in semi-automatic or fully automatic control.
x Waiting status
An hour glass is shown on the symbol to show that not all the information
from length indicators and proximity switches has been detected yet. This
status normally shows up for a short time after switching on the ignition.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
w No telescoping status
A question mark on the symbols shows that the crane control does not have
any information about the current telescoping. This status arises after tele-
scoping with the emergency program for example.
y Deactivated status
A prohibitive sign appears on the symbol if the telescoping mechanism can-
not be operated from the crane cab.
z Emergency program access status

If there is a red triangle in addition to the prohibitive sign, the telescoping
mechanism can only be operated with the emergency program.
> Key code status

Is only shown in the Settings / Displays submenu.
The prompt shows that a key code must be entered. This status occurs when
accessing the Telescoping emergency program submenu or when accepting a
newly entered telescoping.
v Emergency program status

The red triangle next to the symbol shows that in the Telescoping submenu,
the display for the Telescoping emergency program is active.
Anemometer display
If crane is additionally equipped with an anemometer, it is possible to check
the current wind speed in the Anemometer display.
The Anemometer display (1) shows a level indicator with two scales on either
side. The wind speed can be read in metres per second (m/sec) on the left
and in Beaufort degrees (B) on the right; àMonitoring the wind speed without
an anemometer, p. 12 - 64.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.9 Hydraulic system
At the control
consoles
: Rocker button for tilting the crane cab

The rocker button is only available with additional equipment. Used to
incline the crane cab from the horizontal to the rear and back to the horizon-
tal.
To tilt the crane cab backward: Press rocker button down.
To tilt the crane cab back into a Press rocker button up.
horizontal position:
à Tilting the crane cab, p. 12 - 142.
In the Settings / The control displays described in this section can be found in the Settings /
Displays submenu Displays submenu. This submenu can be opened in the Crane control display
in the main menu.
All the elements described in this section can be found in the Settings / Dis-
plays submenu. To open this menu, press the button next to the ! symbol
in the main menu.
The displays (1) in the middle provide information about the hydraulic sys-
tem.
Pressure indicator for telescoping cylinder

Displays the current pressure with which the telescoping cylinder is
retracted and extended.
Pressure indicator for slewing gear hydraulic circuit

Displays in bar the current pressure with which the gear pump supplies the
hydraulic circuit.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Pressure indicator for hydraulic circuit

Displays in bar the current pressure that the piston pump produces for the
superstructure's hydraulic system (connected power unit.
In the Control This submenu contains the Hydraulic system oil temperature submenu. Used
instruments to open the submenu and read the display; à Cooling the hydraulic oil,
submenu p. 12 - 134.
In the Error mes- This submenu contains displays for the hydraulic oil filter. If an hydraulic oil
sages submenu filter is dirty, an error message appears; à
Warning message submenu,
p. 12 - 147.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.10 Safe load indicator (SLI)
Input elements All elements in this section are required to input the rigging mode.
with displays
Numerical pad
Buttons 1 to 0 are used to enter values into the SLI code and Reeving displays.
In addition, some buttons have a second level function and are used to call
up a lamp test as well as to set the dimmer.
The second level of the button is activated for as long as the Switch on
second level button is pressed.
Input mode button

This button is always pressed in conjunction with either the Input reeving or
the Input SLI code button. First press the Input mode (1) button, then press
the required button once.
– If you press the Input reeving button (1) again, input mode on the Reeving
display is switched on and the displayed value flashes.
– If you press the Input SLI code button (2) again, input mode on the SLI code
display is switched on and the displayed value flashes.
SLI code display and input

The value on the SLI code display (2) shows the SLI code entered. The SLI
code consists of a four-digit number.
If input mode is switched on in the SLI code display, the required SLI code
can be entered either by repeatedly pressing the Input SLI code button or by
using the numerical pad.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Reeving display and input

The Reeving (1) display shows the number of runs for the hoist being moni-
tored by the SLI and whose lamp is lit on the Hoist indicator lamps.
If input mode is switched on in the Reeving display, the desired reeving can
be entered either by repeatedly pressing the Input reeving (2) button or by
using the numerical pad.
If the unit (n=) is flashing behind the value, the maximum load is reduced
due to the displayed reeving (1). The entry max flashes in the Maximum load
(3) display at the same time.
In this case, pressing the Input reeving (2) button displays the maximum pos-
sible load (according to the Lifting capacity table) for approx. three seconds in
the Maximum load display (3).
Indicator lights for hoists

Show which hoist is being monitored by the SLI and which hoist is switched
on.
Lamp (I) lights up: Main hoist is switched on and the Reeving dis-
play applies to this hoist.
Lamp (II) lights up: Auxiliary hoist (additional equipment) is
switched on and the Reeving display applies to
this hoist.
If a lamp flashes, the corresponding hoist is switched on but the Reeving dis-
play applies to the other hoist. The lamp is always lit for the hoist that was
switched on first.
For crane operation the lamp which lights up must always be for the hoist
with which the load is to be lifted; à
Example of how to switch over the display,
p. 12 - 50.
Confirm entry button

The Confirm entry button (1) is used to confirm the flashing values on the SLI
code display and on the Reeving display.
Press the Confirm entry button to confirm the flashing value. The value stops
flashing and the signalling point is shown.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Acknowledge button
The Acknowledge (1) button is used to switch off the buzzer tone and to
acknowledge an error message.
Outrigger span display and input

The LEDs on the Outrigger span (2) display show the required outrigger span
in line with the SLI code entered.
When input mode is switched on in the SLI code display, press the Input out-
rigger span (1) button repeatedly to show one after another all outrigger
spans permitted according to the Lifting capacity table.
The LEDs indicate the various outrigger spans as follows:
1 Outrigger span 8.10 x 7.00 m

5 Free on wheels
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Counterweight display and input

The value in the Counterweight (2) display shows the counterweight to be
rigged in tons (t). The displayed value is obtained from the SLI code entered.
When input mode is switched on in the SLI code display, press the Input coun-
terweight (1) button repeatedly to show additional values permitted accord-
ing to the Lifting capacity table.
Lattice extension length display and input

The display function described here only applies for additional equipment
with lattice extension.
Entering an SLI code for working with the lattice extension activates the Lat-
tice extension length (2) display and indicates the length of lattice extension.
The displayed value is obtained from the SLI code shown.
The value is displayed in metres (m) or feet (ft) depending on the setting,
e.g. 15.0 m
When input mode is switched on in the SLI code display, press the Input lat-
tice extension length (1) button repeatedly to show additional values permit-
ted according to the Lifting capacity table in ascending order.
When the greatest length is reached and the button is pressed again, the
display starts again at the beginning with the lowest value.
Angle of lattice extension display and input

The display function described here only applies for additional equipment
with manually inclinable lattice extension.
tice extension length display and indicates the angle of lattice extension to the
main boom in degrees. The displayed value is obtained from the SLI code
shown.
When input mode is switched on in the SLI code display, press the Input lat-
tice extension angle (1) button repeatedly to show additional values permitted
according to the Lifting capacity table in ascending order.
When the greatest inclination is reached and the button is pressed again,
the display starts again at the beginning with the lowest value.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Display elements All elements in this section are used to display the current working range
and the monitored functions, as well as to check and set the displays.
The elements of a display

All displays have a three- to four-digit digital
display. The following elements can be dis-
played.
1 - 4 Value specifications
5 - 7 Decimal point
8 Signalling point
Current telescoping display

Shows the current telescoping status.
The displays (1) to (5) show the current

telescoping statuses of the telescopic sections
I to V:
– Fixed lengths are displayed as decimal val-
ues (e.g. 1.00 or 0.51).
– Intermediate and telescoping lengths are
shown as percentages (e.g. 100 or 51).
The display (6) is not used.
Current main boom angle display

The value in the display (1) shows the current main boom angle to the hor-
izontal in degrees.
For negative angles, a minus sign (-) appears to the left of the number.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Current radius display

The value in the display (1) shows the current radius (horizontal distance
between turntable axle and hook block axle).
e.g. 25 m.
The length displayed is calculated using the current telescoping status and
the current angle of the main boom. With additional equipment, length and
angle of lattice extension are also considered using the SLI code specified.
Current lattice inclination display

The display function described here only applies when additionally
equipped with hydraulically derricked lattice extension.
tice inclination (2) display and indicates the current lattice inclination to the
main boom in degrees.
After pressing the Angle of lattice extension input (1) button, the angle of lattice
extension in relation to the horizontal is shown in degrees for approx.
2 seconds.
Maximum load display

The value in the display (1) shows the maximum load that can be lifted at
the entered rigging mode or the current radius. With larger loads the SLI
would switch off.
The values (1) are displayed in tons (t) or kilopounds (lbs. x 1000), depend-
ing on the setting, e.g. 25.0 t .
The SLI calculates this value from:

– The rigging mode associated with the SLI code entered
(counterweight, outrigger span, length and angle of lattice extension)
– The reeving entered
– The current telescope status
– The current boom angle
If the maximum load is reduced by the reeving entered, then the max entry
next to the Maximum load display (3) flashes.
The unit (n=) behind the value on the Reeving display (1) flashes at the same
time.
In this case, the maximum possible load (according to the Lifting capacity
table, without reduction) can be shown by pressing the Input reeving (2) but-
ton (displayed for approx. three seconds).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Current load display

Indicates the load currently lifted.
The values (1) are displayed in tons (t) or kilopounds (lbs. x 1000), depend-
ing on the setting, e.g. 22.0 t .
The actual load consists of
useful load + hook block + lifting gear
If the signalling point appears behind the value shown, then an SLI shut-
down results due to overload.
Current degree of utilization display

Indicates the current degree of utilisation (degree of utilisation = 100 x
actual load / maximum load). The display is in the form of a level indicator
(1) with coloured LEDs. The LED that lights up is always the one for the
actual range of the degree of utilisation.
Green: 0 – 90%
Yellow: Approx. 90 -100%
The actual degree of utilisation can also be shown in figures as a percentage

at the Information / error display; à
p. 11 - 95.

The SLI early warning lamp (1) flashes if the actual load is 90% or more of the
permissible load. An intermittent buzzer tone sounds at the same time;
à SLI early warning, p. 12 - 54.
The SLI early warning lamp (1) goes on if an SLI shutdown is imminent.

The SLI shutdown warning (1) lamp goes on when the SLI switches off crane
movements which increase the load moment. This happens either because
approx. 100% of the maximum permissible load has been reached (over-
load) or an error has occurred. A continuous buzzer tone sounds at the same
time; à SLI shutdown, p. 12 - 55.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
second level numerical pad button

Used to switch the buttons on the numerical pad that are assigned on the
second level.
then also the button that is assigned on the second level.
Lamp test button

This function of the button is only active as long as the second level numerical
pad button (1) is pressed.
To carry out a lamp test also press the Lamp test (2) button once. All displays,
warning and indicator lamps light up for approx. 2 seconds with automati-
cally adjusted brightness.
Sensor for brightness

Sensor (1) registers the light intensity around the SLI insert.
After switching on the ignition, the basic brightness of all SLI displays,
warning and indicator lamps automatically adapts to the ambient light.
Service F3 and Service F4 buttons

The Service F3 and Service F4 buttons are only active if a service device is con-
nected. They are used to access service software.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Information This section contains all elements which can be used to call up values on the
displays displays.
Information / errors display

Displays the corresponding value when one of the following buttons is
pressed:
– Error information button
– Degree of utilisation button
– Button for Oil pressure of derricking cylinder lower chamber
– Permissible slewing range button
– Current overall height button
– Current radius button
– second level information button
– third level information button
– Main boom length button
The value in the Information display does not change when a button without
a function is pressed.
Error information button

The red LEDs (2) and (3) go on whenever there is an error message. If this
error leads to a shutdown, the SLI shutdown warning lamp lights up at the
same time and a continuous buzzing tone sounds.
An error code appears in the Information / errors display.
Pressing the Error information (1) button displays other current error mes-
sages (à Error message, p. 12 - 57).
Degree of utilisation button

After pressing the Degree of utilisation (1) button, the green LED (2) lights up
and the current degree of utilisation is shown in the Information / errors dis-
play as a percentage.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
second level information button

Used to switch the buttons under the Information / errors display that are
assigned on the second level.
To switch on the second level, first press the second level information button
and then the button that is assigned on the second level. The green LED (2)
goes on whenever the third level is switched on.
third level information button

Used to switch the buttons under the Information / errors display that are
assigned on the third level.
To switch on the third level, first press the third level information button and
then the button that is assigned on the third level. The green LED (3) goes
on whenever the third level is switched on.
Button for oil pressure of derricking cylinder lower chamber

The Oil pressure of derricking cylinder lower chamber (1) button is only assigned
on the second and third levels.
After the second or third level is switched on, the green LED (2) lights up and
the Information / errors display indicates the oil pressure on the piston surface
of the derricking cylinder as follows:
second Second Value measured by sensor A in bar
level:
third Third level: Value measured by sensor B in bar
Current main boom length button

After pressing the Main boom length button (1), the green LED (2) lights up
and the current main boom length is shown in the Information display.
e.g. 38.0 m.
No distinction is made in the display between fixed and intermediate or tele-
scoping lengths.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Current slewing angle button

The red LED (3) has no function.
After pressing the Current slewing angle button (1), the green LED (2) lights
up and the current superstructure position is shown in the Information dis-
play. A displayed angle of 0° means that the superstructure is turned toward
the rear (and is therefore in working position 0° to the rear). Complete rota-
tion from this working position is divided into two semicircles for the dis-
play. The rotation angle is shown as a negative or a positive number,
depending on the direction of rotation:
– Angles in the right-hand semicircle are displayed as positive numbers
(0° to 180.0°)
– Angles in the left-hand semicircle are displayed as negative numbers
(0° to -179.9°).
Current overall height button

After pressing the Current overall height button (1), the green LED (2) lights
up and the current overall height is shown in the Information display. The
overall height is considered to be the vertical difference between the lower
edge of the outrigger pad and the highest point of the main boom or lattice
extension. The value shown applies for completely extended outrigger
cylinders with an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m.
Current radius button

After pressing the Current radius button (1), the green LED (2) lights up and
the current radius is shown in the Information display.
e.g. 38.0 m.
Time / Date button

The time and date can be displayed on the Information / Errors display by
pressing the buttons (1). The buttons used to set the time and date are deter-
mined on the second level; à Displaying and entering the time and date,
p. 12 - 60.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the front panel
Key-operated override switch

The SLI shutdown system can be bypassed (deactivated) using the key-
operated switch.
To bypass SLI shutdown: Insert the key, turn right and hold.
To override the lifting limit switch Insert key, turn to the left and hold.
shutdown and the SLI shutdown:
To switch off override: Release the key, lock returns to its
start position, remove the key.
Observe the warnings in the appropriate sections: à SLI override, p. 12 - 59,

à Overriding the lifting limit switch shutdown, p. 11 - 132.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.11 Electricity, lighting, windscreen wiper / washing system
Electricity
Ignition lock
removed.
R, 1 Ignition on, instrument lighting is on.
control units for crane control, engine control system, SLI
2 Starting position; à Starting the diesel engine from the crane cab,
p. 12 - 23.
q Charge warning lamp

Lights up if the ignition is switched on and the diesel engine is stationary.
Goes out after the diesel engine is started; à
Starting the diesel engine from
the crane cab, p. 12 - 23.
Lighting
G Rocker button for working area spotlight socket

One working area spotlight comes as standard; a second working area spot-
light is available as additional equipment. There are two clamps and two
sockets on the front of the crane cab for the working area spotlights. The
voltage at the two sockets is switched on and off with the rocker button.
To switch on the working area spotlight: Press rocker switch down.
To switch off the working area spotlight: Press rocker switch up.
r Air traffic control light on / off rocker button

With additional equipment there is a socket for the air traffic control light on
the main boom head. The voltage in this socket is switched on and off with
the rocker button.
To switch on air traffic control light: Press rocker switch down.
To switch off air traffic control light: Press rocker switch up.

08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
G On / off rocker button for slewable working area spotlight

The rocker button is only available with additional equipment with slewable
working area spotlight. It is used to switch on and off the slewable working
area spotlight on the basic section of the main boom.
To switch on the working area spotlight: Press rocker switch down.
To switch off the working area spotlight: Press rocker switch up.
G Pivoting the working area spotlight rocker button

The rocker button is only available with additional equipment with slewable
working area spotlight. It is used to pivot the working area spotlight on the
basic section of the main boom.
To pivot the spotlight forwards: Press the rocker button up.
To pivot the spotlight backwards: Press the rocker button down.
à Using the directional spotlight for the working area, p. 12 - 144.
r Rocker switch for rotating beacon on/off

The rocker button is only available with additional equipment. To switch on
the rotating beacon for driving from the crane cab.
To switch on: Press the rocker switch down.
The indicator lamp in the rocker switch lights up.
To switch off: Press the rocker switch up.
Windscreen wiper / The following operating elements are on the side panel.
washing system
D Rocker button for windscreen wiper

Used to activate the windscreen wiper on the crane cab. The switch has
three levels:
Switch pressed up: Off
In the central position: Intermittent wiper operation
Switch pressed down: Continuous operation
The windscreen wiper returns to end position after switching off.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
F Rocker button for roof window wiper

Used to activate the roof window wiper on the crane cab. The switch has
three levels:
Switch pressed up: Off
In the central position: Intermittent wiper operation
Switch pressed down: Continuous operation
The windscreen wiper returns to end position after switching off.
H Rocker button for washing system

Used to activate the washing function on the windscreen or skylight of the
crane cab. Operates the water pump.
Windscreen: Press the rocker button down.
Skylight: Press the rocker button up.
The water pump operates for as long as you keep the button pressed. The
corresponding windscreen wiper is not switched on simultaneously.
The Settings / Displays submenu contains the following operating elements.

To open this menu, press the button next to the ! symbol in the main menu.
Adjusting the wiper stroke interval

Pressing the button next to the Set wiper interval (1) symbol activates setting
of the interval duration.
The value currently set is shown in seconds in the Interval duration (2) dis-
play.
à Adjusting the windscreen wiper stroke interval, p. 12 - 143.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.12 Heating
Insert 1 This insert is used to set the suction air and the air distribution; à Heating,
p. 12 - 193.
Rotary switch for fresh air / recirculated air

Used to regulate between fresh air mode and recirculated air mode
Fresh air mode: Turn the rotary switch clockwise as far as it will
go.
Recirculated air mode: Turn the rotary switch anti-clockwise as far as it
will go.
Mixed air: Rotary switch in intermediate position
Rotary switch for air distribution

Used to distribute the air flow between the air vents.
Air vents windscreens / Rotary switch to symbol (1)
centre:
Air vents, cab floor: Rotary switch to symbol (2)
All air vents: Rotary switch to symbol (3)
By turning to the symbols (1) or (2), the volume
of air at the corresponding air vents is increased
in continuous amounts.
Rotary switch for blower

Used to switch the fan for air distribution on and off.
To turn on the blower: Turn the rotary switch clockwise; it engages at
three different positions.
To turn off the blower: Turn the rotary switch anti-clockwise as far as it
will go.
Air vents
To open / close: Open and close the plates.
Air distribution: Turn air vents.
à Adjusting the air vents, p. 12 - 197.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Insert 2 This insert is used to switch on the heater and to regulate the temperature;
à Heating, p. 12 - 193.
Heating system display

Shows the time, selected storage locations for the automatic heating start
and displays values as they are entered; à
p. 12 - 198.
Rotary switch for regulating temperature

Used to preselect the desired temperature on the heater. Switches the heat-
ing on or off via thermostat, depending on the current temperature in the
crane cab.
Warmer: Turn the rotary switch clockwise.
Cooler: Turn the rotary switch anti-clockwise.
The higher the preselected temperature, the faster the fan in the heater runs.
w Push-button for setting the time / day

When pressed with ignition switched on, activates the input menu for time
and weekday; àSetting the time and weekday, p. 12 - 197.
When pressed with ignition off, activates the current time in the Heating sys-
tem display.
v Push-button used to switch the heating on / off

Used to switch the heating on and off manually. If the heating is switched
off, it can be switched on by pressing the push-button once. If the heating is
switched on, it can be switched off by pressing the push-button once.
As soon as the heating is switched on, the fan will run at level 1;
à Switching on the heating, p. 12 - 194.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
u Push-button for calling up storage locations

Used to call up stored weekdays and times for automatic heating start.
There are three storage locations.
After pressing the button, the retrieved storage location, weekday and time
of the automatic heating start flash for five seconds in the Heating system dis-
play. Then the display switches back to the current time and displays the
retrieved storage location. The heating start switched on is always that of
the storage location displayed.
By pressing the push-button again, all storage locations are retrieved and
displayed one after the other. If no storage location is displayed, the auto-
matic heating start is switched off; à
p. 12 - 198.
s Input push-button
Used to enter values when the Heating system display is flashing (when stor-
ing an automatic heating start and when setting the time). The flashing
value counts down each time the button is pressed.
mode and the value decreases continuously.
If the button is held down for longer than three seconds with the heating
switched off, the automatic heating duration which has been set will flash
and can be changed; à
Setting the automatic heating duration, p. 12 - 199.
t Input + push-button
Used to enter values when the Heating system display is flashing when stor-
ing an automatic heating start and when setting the time. The flashing value
increases each time the button is pressed.
mode and the value increases continuously.
Air-conditioning à Air-conditioning system, p. 12 - 202.

system
Air-conditioning on / off rocker button

Used to switch the air-conditioning system on and off.
To switch on: Press the rocker button at symbol (1).
To switch off: Press in the rocker switch opposite symbol (1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.2.13 On the hand-held control
Connections on The hand-held control can be connected to 2 or 4 different sockets depend-

the truck crane ing on the type of equipment. Only certain operations can be carried out
from each socket.
Socket Released operations

1 – Emergency operation for crane movements
At the main
(except telescoping mechanism)
boom 2)
– Derricking the lattice extension 1)
2 Behind the – Emergency operation for crane movements
crane cab – Derricking the lattice extension 1)
3 On both sides – Operating the outrigger
of the carrier
1) Only when additionally equipped with hydraulically derricked lattice

extension
2) Depending on the serial number of the truck crane, at position (A) or (B).
à Connecting / removing the hand-held control, p. 13 - 27.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Diesel engine The Diesel engine operating panel contains the displays and operating but-
operating panel tons for engine management:
1 Battery charge indicator lamp

Goes on if the diesel engine ignition is switched on after the hand-held
control is connected.
2 CAN indicator lamp
Goes on for approx. 20 seconds after connecting the hand-held control,
provided the control system does not detect any malfunctions.
Flashes if the control system has detected a malfunction.
3 Emergency stop switch
Used to switch off the crane control system in an emergency. Immedi-
ately switches off the diesel engine. Crane functions are stopped
abruptly.
4 START button
Used to start the diesel engine with the ignition switched on
5 STOP button
Used to turn off the diesel engine.
Horn button The horn button is only active when the ignition is switched on.
– When the ignition in the crane cab is switched on and the hand-held con-
trol is connected to a socket on the superstructure, then the horn of the
superstructure is activated with the horn button (1).
– The horn button (1) is used to activate the horn of the carrier if the hand-
held control is connected to a socket on the carrier.
Outrigger / elec- Used to operate and display the outrigger and the electronic level.
tronic level oper-
ating panel
The function of the operating and display elements on this operating panel
are described in section Outrigger, electronic level, outrigger pressure indicator;
à On the hand-held control, p. 11 - 51.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Pre-selection but- The following buttons are only meant for use in emergencies when opera-
ton for emergency tion is not possible from the crane cab. There is no monitoring by the SLI.
operation Press the corresponding button to pre-select. The following buttons with
indicator lamps can be selected:
A – Pre-selection button for main hoist
C – Pre-selection button for telescoping mechanism
D – Pre-selection button for lattice extension (only active when additionally

equipped with hydraulically derricked lattice extension)
B – Pre-selection button for auxiliary hoist
E – Pre-selection button for derricking gear
F – Pre-selection button for slewing gear
H
When the crane control system releases the function, the indicator lamp in
the button lights up and the released function can be executed with the but-
tons on the two-hand operating panel.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Two-hand operat- The pre-selected power unit is driven with the buttons in the two-hand oper-
ing panel ating panel. It is always necessary to press two buttons to do this:
– A direction button
Directions of movement which are primarily horizontal, e.g. turning, are
pre-selected with the Direction button R (1).
Directions of movement which are primarily vertical, e.g. raising / lower-
ing hoist, are pre-selected with the Direction button R (2).
– And also a movement button

By also pressing the movement button Right / upper (1), the pre-selected
movement is started either to the right or upwards.
By also pressing the movement button Left / lower (2), the pre-selected
movement is started either to the left or downwards.
Releasing the Movement button or the Direction button stops the movement.
The following table shows which button combinations are required so that
the pre-selected power unit moves in the desired direction. Buttons that
have been pressed are shown in black in the illustrations.
Before driving the power unit in an emergency; à Emergency operation in the

event of a failure of the operating elements in the crane cab, p. 14 - 63.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
H
Buttons that have been pressed are shown in black in the illustrations
Pre-selected power unit

Button combination Derrick
Telescop-
Derrick- Slewing Main Auxiliary lattice
ing mech-
ing gear gear hoist hoist exten-
anism
sion1)
c e f a b d
None 2) Lower Lower Lower Lower
Retract Raise Lift Lift Raise
Turn to
None None None None None
the right
Turn to
the left
1) Function only when additionally equipped with hydraulically derricked

lattice extension
08.03.2006
2) The telescoping cylinder is extended after it has been unlocked.

GMK 4080-1
11.2.14 Other operating elements of the crane cab
Keys
The following keys belong to the crane cab of
your truck crane:
1 Crane cab ignition lock

2 Key-operated override switch
3 Superstructure distribution box
4 Crane cab door lock
Door / Ignition lock of driver's cab
5 Reservoir for windshield wipers
Crane cab door
Outside on the cab door

The crane cab door can be locked from the
outside using the door key (1).
To unlock: Turn the key to the

front, in direction A.
To lock: Turn the key to the
rear, in direction B.
Door Pull handle (2) and
To open / close: push door back / for-
ward. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the inside of the crane cab door
To close the door:

Pull the unlocking mechanism (3) and pushthe
door forwards by the handlebar (1).
The door engages in its end position.
The door of the crane cab cannot be locked
from the inside.
To open the door:

Pull the release lever (2) and push door back
with the handlebar.
Windows The front windscreen and the rear window are designed as vent windows.
Windscreen / Rear window
The picture shows a handle of the windscreen.

The handles on the rear window have the
same function.
Opening the windscreen
Turn both handles (1) inward until the pegs (2)
are next to the retaining sheets (3).
Push the windscreen forwards into the desired
position.
Closing the windscreen / rear window

Pull in the window as far as it will go using the
handles (1).
Turn both handles downwards so that the
pegs (2) are behind the retaining sheets (3).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Cab lighting The interior light of the crane cab is attached to the ceiling behind the crane
cab seat.
1 Cab lighting
2 Switch for cab lighting
Pressed down at the switches on with
front: door contact
Pressed down at the permanently off
back:
Pressed down at the permanently on
back:
3 Switch for reading light
4
3 4 Reading light
2
1
C0721
Diagnostics plug The diagnostics plugs allow measuring devices to be connected and may
only be used by service personnel.
• Remove the cover (4) left on the side panel

(unscrew screws).
There are three diagnostics plugs under the
cover.
1 Crane control (serial interface)
2 Crane control (CAN-bus)
3 SLI
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher (additional equipment) is behind the crane cab seat.
• Follow the operating instructions (1) on the fire extinguisher.

• Have the fire extinguisher serviced by trained personnel in good time
before the service interval indicated on the label (2) expires.
S
Risk due to fire extinguisher not working!
Proper functioning of the fire extinguisher is no longer guaranteed once the
service interval given on the label has expired.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.3 Functional description of the display and operating elements for driving from inside the crane cab

elements for driving from inside the crane cab
11.3.1 Diesel engine
Ignition lock
removed.
R, 1 Ignition on, instrument lighting on.
control units of the crane control, engine control system, SLI
2 Starting position; à When starting the engine the first time in the day,
p. 12 - 21.
q Battery charge indicator warning lamp

Goes on whenever the ignition is switched on and the diesel engine is at a
standstill. Goes out after starting the diesel engine; à
Starting the diesel
engine from the crane cab, p. 12 - 23.
z Flame start system indicator lamp

Lights up when ignition is switched on and diesel engine is cold.
Goes out when diesel engine is ready to start;
à Starting the cold diesel engine with the flame start system (additional equip-
ment), p. 12 - 29.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.3.2 Driving submenu
For the operation of the transmission, separate steering and differential

locks.
The submenu can be opened both automatically and manually:

– The submenu opens automatically if the ignition key is turned to position
1 in the driver's cab and the parking brake is released from the crane cab.
The operating elements (1) are active.
– To open the submenu manually, press the button next to the t symbol in
the main menu. However, the operating elements (1) will only be acti-
vated once the prerequisites for automatically opening the submenu have
been fulfilled.
The submenu can only be closed manually. The submenu is closed by

pressing the ö button.
The button
up.
ö is only active if the indicator lamp next to the button lights ö
The indicator lamp lights up if the parking brake is engaged from the crane
cab (or if the ignition key in the driver's cab is not turned to position 1).
Steering lock display

Indicates whether the ignition key in the driver's cab is turned to position 1.
The colour of the key on the display (1) indicates the current status:
Green: The ignition key is turned to position 1.
Red: The ignition key is not turned to position 1.
The rocker buttons in the control levers are assigned the High speed function
as long as the key is displayed in red. They are not switched to the Steering /
Separate steering function by releasing the parking brake.
à Opening / closing the driving mode submenu, p. 12 - 175 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.3.3 Transmission
For driving the truck crane from the crane cab; à Operating the transmission
from the crane cab, p. 12 - 182.
All elements described in this section can be found in the Driving submenu.
The submenu can be opened both automatically and manually;
à p. 11 - 116.
Gears can only be changed while the diesel engine is running.
Neutral position N
To switch the transmission to neutral position (no gear engaged). The but-
ton next to the symbol H is only active if:
– The ignition key in the driver's cab is turned to position 1 and
– The parking brake is released.
The colour of the symbol H indicates the current status:
Symbol in black: Button active
Symbol in grey: Button disabled
The transmission is switched to neutral position after pushing the active

button. You can switch from D or R to N. This gear shifting operation always
has priority.
The point (1) in the symbol H is displayed in green even if the button is dis-
abled (symbol H in grey) whenever the neutral position N is activated.
When the parking brake is engaged, neutral position N is also engaged auto-
matically.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Gear position D
To switch over the transmission into gear position D – max. sixth gear cor-
responding to ca. 18 km/h. In gear position D no crane functions can be car-
ried out.
The button next to the symbol A is only active if:
The colour of the symbol A indicates the current status:
The transmission is switched as follows after pressing the active button:

– The gear position D is switched on if N is switched to D while the truck
crane is at a standstill or driving forward.
– The gear position D is only switched on if the truck crane is stationary if R
is switched to D. The transmission switches to neutral position N while
driving the truck crane.
The electronic system selects an appropriate starting gear and engages it
after activating the gear position while the truck crane is stationary.
The electronic system selects an appropriate gear for the speed and
engages it after activating the gear position while driving.
The point (1) in the symbol A is displayed in green even if the button is dis-
abled (symbol H grey) if the gear position D is switched on.
The arrows in the symbol A indicate the direction of travel in relation to the
carrier, which is displayed on the Steering display (1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Gear position R
To shift the transmission to gear position R - reverse.
The button next to the symbol L is only active if:
The colour of the symbol L indicates the current status:
The transmission is switched as follows after pressing the active button:

– The gear position R is only activated when the truck crane is stationary if
N is switched to R. The gear is not shifted while driving.
– When switching from D to R, transmission mode R is only engaged when
the truck crane is stationary. When it is being driven, the transmission
switches to neutral positionN.
The transmission is switched to first gear (reverse) (maximum speed of
about 5 km/h) after pressing the active button.
The point (1) in the symbol L is displayed in green even if the button is dis-
abled (symbol H grey) if the gear position R is activated.
The arrow in the symbol L indicates the direction of travel in relation to the
carrier, which is displayed on the Steering display (1).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Gear position L
To shift the transmission to gear position L - slow and driving with load.
The button next to the symbol E is only active if:
The colour of the symbol E indicates the current status:
The transmission is switched to first gear (forwards) (maximum speed of

about 5 km/h) after pressing the active button.
When the gear position D is switched on, the point (1) in the symbol E is
displayed in green - even when the button is disabled (symbol H grey).
The arrow in the symbol E shows the direction of travel relative to the car-
rier, which is displayed on the Steering display (1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.3.4 Axle drive
For driving the truck crane from the crane cab; à Possible connections,
p. 12 - 187.
All elements described in this section can be found in the Driving submenu.
The submenu can be opened both automatically and manually;
à p. 11 - 116.
Transverse differential locks on / off

Used to lock the transverse differentials in all driven axle lines:
– With 8 x 6 x 8 drive in the axle lines 1, 3 and 4
– With 8 x 8 x 8 drive in the axle lines 1, 2, 3 and 4
The button next to the symbol Q is only active if:
The colour of the symbol Q indicates the current status:
The switching procedure is triggered for all transverse differential locks

after pressing the active button. The point (1) in the symbol Q indicates the
triggered switching operation:
Point in green: Switching on the transverse differential locks
Point in black: Switching of the transverse differential locks
The point in the symbol Q only indicates that the switching operation has
been started. The gear change itself will only take place when the current
speed is under ca. 5 km/h.
The current switching state is displayed on the Transverse differential locks dis-
play (1)
à Transverse differential locks display, p. 11 - 122.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Transverse differential locks display

Used to display the current status of the transverse differential locks of the
carrier.
Different symbols are displayed depending on the status:
f – Locks released (green) – is shown when all transverse differential locks

are switched off.
d – Locks engaged (red) – is shown when all transverse differential locks are
switched on.
g – Intermediate position (yellow) – is shown when not all of the gear

changes triggered have been completed yet.
e – Error (violet) – is shown when the crane control detects a faulty status.
à Transverse differential locks, p. 12 - 189.
Longitudinal differential locks on / off

Used to switch on the longitudinal differential locks in the transfer case and
in the third axle line.
With 8 x 8 x 8 drive as additional equipment, the drive of the second axle
The button next to the symbol M is only active if:
The colour of the symbol M indicates the current status:
The switching procedure for the longitudinal differential locks (and if neces-
sary for the drive of the second axle line) is triggered by pressing the active
button. The point (1) in the symbol M indicates which switching operation
was triggered:
Point in green: Switching on the longitudinal differential locks
Point in black: Switching off the longitudinal differential locks
The point in the symbol M only indicates that the switching operated was
triggered. The gear change itself will only take place when the current speed
is under ca. 5 km/h.
The current switching status is displayed on the Longitudinal differential locks
08.03.2006
display (1).
à Longitudinal differential lock display, p. 11 - 123.

GMK 4080-1
Longitudinal differential lock display

Used to display the current status of the longitudinal differential locks at the
carrier.
W – Locks deactivated (green) – is displayed if the longitudinal differential

locks and, with additional equipment, the drive of the second axle line are
switched off.
X – Locks engaged (red) – is displayed if the longitudinal differential locks

and, with additional equipment, the drive of the second axle line are
switched on.
Z – Intermediate position (yellow) – is shown when not all of the gear

changes triggered have been completed yet.
Y – Error (violet) – is shown when the crane control detects a faulty status.
à Longitudinal differential locks, p. 12 - 188.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.3.5 Brakes

Goes out if the supply pressure in both brake circuits is over 5.5 bar.
Lights up if the supply pressure decreases to less than approx. 5 bar;
à p. 6 - 34.
f Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp

Lights up when the parking brake is locked.
Goes out when the parking brake is released.
f Rocker button for vehicle parking brake

The vehicle parking brake is automatically engaged when the ignition in the
crane cab is switched on.
To release the parking Press up the rocker button once.

brake: The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp goes
out.
When the ignition key is turned to position 1
in the driver's cab, the control lever rocker
buttons have the function Steering and the
submenu Driving will open.
To engage the parking Press the rocker button down once.
brake: The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp goes
on.
The control lever rocker buttons have the
function High-speed mode and the submenu
Driving can be closed.
à p. 12 - 190.
The lamp in the Vehicle parking brake rocker button is only a position light for
the indicator lamp.
Vehicle service brake pedal

Operates the vehicle service brake. The braking force can be continuously
adjusted.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.3.6 Steering
On the crane Operating elements for the steering are in the Driving submenu on the Crane
control display control display.
The driving submenu can be opened both automatically and manually;

à p. 11 - 116.
Changing the steering direction

Used to change the steering direction for the various superstructure posi-
tions. The steering direction is changed and the rocker buttons in the con-
trols levers are assigned the corresponding functions each time the button
under the symbol p is pressed. The steering direction currently switched on
is displayed on the Steering display.
Steering display
Indicates the superstructure position for which
the steering direction is switched on. There
are two displays:
A: Turned forwards
The steering direction of the truck crane
corresponds to the direction of move-
ment of the rocker buttons if the super-
structure is in the 0° working position to
the front.
B: Turned backwards:
The steering direction of the truck crane
corresponds to the direction of move-
ment of the rocker buttons if the super-
structure is in the 180° working position
to the rear.
à Adapting the steering direction to the superstructure setting, p. 12 - 178.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Separate steering on / off

Used to switch the separate steering on and off.
The button next to the symbol h is only active if:
The colour of the symbol h indicates the current status:
The separate steering is switched on and off by pressing the active button.
The point (1) in the symbol h indicates the current switching status:
Point (1) in green: Switch on separate steering.

All unlocking procedures are initiated.
Point (1) in black: Switch off separate steering.
All locking procedures are initiated.
The point in the h symbol only indicates that the switching operation has
been initiated. The current switching status is displayed on the Steering lock-
ing status display (1).
Steering locking status display

Used to display the following locking statuses:
– Steering on the third axle line
– Drag rods between the second and fourth axle lines
– Drag rods between the third and fourth axle lines
m – Locked (green) – is shown when all the locking procedures triggered are
j – Unlocked (red) – is shown when all the unlocking procedures triggered

are mechanically completed.
k – Intermediate position (yellow) – is shown when not all of the locking or

unlocking procedures triggered have been completed yet.
l – Error (violet) – is shown when the crane control detects a faulty status
(e.g. when the statuses Locked and Unlocked are registered at the same
time).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the control At the control consoles, the operating elements for steering are located on
panels the top of the control levers.
H
The Right and Left specifications in this section are based on the assumption
that the appropriate steering direction is activated for the current super-
structure position.
Steering rocker button

The steering function is only active if:
Used to steer the first axle line.
Steer to the right Press in the rocker button to the right.
Steer to the left Press in the rocker button to the left.
The rocker button is assigned the Hoisting gear high speed function if the pre-
requisites for the Steering function are not fulfilled; à
p. 11 - 66.
à Normal steering, p. 12 - 179.
Rocker button for separate steering

The steering function is only active if:
– The parking brake is released and
– The separate steering is switched on.
Used to steer the third axle line.
Right-hand turn: Press in the rocker button to the right.
Left-hand turn: Press in the rocker button to the left.
The rocker button is assigned the Derricking gear / Telescoping mechanism high
speed function if the parking brake is engaged; à
p. 11 - 72, à
p. 11 - 75.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.4 Functional description of the safety devices
11.4.1 Safe load indicator (SLI)
For increased operational safety the truck crane GMK 4080-1 is equipped
with an electronic Safe Load Indicator (SLI) to safeguard against overload-
ing.
The SLI only protects one-hook operation.
G
Danger of overturning in two-hook operation mode!
The safe load indicator only protects one-hook operation!
Two-hook operation is not permitted and is not covered by the SLI.
The safe load indicator prevents the permissible lifting capacity of the truck
crane from being exceeded at a particular radius. The load bearing limit can
be exceeded, for example, during crane operation when the main boom is
telescoped out or lowered further than is allowed.
The safe load indicator records some factors of the current rigging mode
automatically, some factors must be entered.
G
Danger of overturning if wrong settings are entered into the SLI.
The SLI does not automatically record all factors during crane operation
required to calculate the load limit.
Before operating the crane, ensure that all factors of the current rigging
mode have been correctly entered in the SLI.
The following table provides an overview of which factors are automatically

recorded and which factors have to be entered.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The SLI automatically records These factors must be set accord-

the following factors: ing to the current rigging mode:
– Length of main boom – Supporting span
– Angle of main boom – Counterweight mass
– Actual load – Length of lattice extension
– Angle of the lattice extension1) (additional equipment)
– Angle of the lattice extension2)
– Number of hoist rope reeving
methods
Setting either by entering the indi-
vidual components or by means of
the SLI code.
1) Only when additionally equipped with hydraulically derricked lattice

extension
2) Only when additionally equipped with hydraulically derricking lattice
extension
Transducers (sensors) are attached to the truck crane which supply the SLI
control unit with current load values. The current load value and the maxi-
mum possible load value are always shown in the crane cab on the SLI
insert. Before reaching the load limit, the SLI signals that the early warning
limit has been reached by giving a visual and an acoustic (intermittent buzz-
ing tone) signal. The acoustic signal can be switched off.
If the load moment continues to increase, the SLI shuts down all move-
ments which increase the load moment when the load limit is exceeded,
and signals that the shut-down limit has been reached with a visual and
acoustic (continuous buzzing tone) signal. The acoustic signal can be
switched off after approx. 5 seconds. If the system is switched off again, the
buzzing tone is re-activated.
The values necessary for operation of the truck crane are constantly dis-
played on the SLI insert (e.g. working radius, actual load, main boom length,
maximum load).
G
Danger of accidents due to incorrectly set SLI
If the actual rigging mode is not set, the maximum load calculated by the
SLI will not correspond to the actual permissible load capacity.
An incorrectly set safe load indicator will give you a false sense of security.
This will certainly result in overloading the truck crane and an accident!
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.4.2 Lowering limit switch
The lowering limit switch prevents the hoist rope from being reeled off the
drum completely. It deactivates the Lower hoist movement when there are
only five turns of rope left on the hoist drum.
The shutdown point must be reset when the hoist rope is replaced;
à Maintenance guidelines.
The lowering limit switch must not be activated during normal operation.
G
Danger of accident if the lowering limit switch is incorrectly set or defec-
tive!
Reset the lowering limit switch after every hoist rope change, and do not do
any crane work if the lowering limit switch is damaged, incorrectly set or
disabled. In this way you will avoid damaging the completely unreeled
hoist rope, which could then drop the load.
If the unreeved hoist rope is completely reeled up (e.g. when rigging the
auxiliary hoist) and the hoist rope is unrolled from the stationary rope drum,
the lowering limit switch must be reset.
G
Danger of accident from incorrect setting of the lowering limit switch!
Only unreel the hoist rope with Lower hoist. If you unreel the hoist rope from
the stationary rope drum, the lowering limit switch does not detect the
number of winds and you must reset the lowering limit switch before start-
ing crane work. This keeps the lowering limit switch from switching off too
late or not at all, which can cause the load to fall.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
11.4.3 Lifting limit switch
The lifting limit switch reacts as soon as it is no longer under the load of the
lifting limit switch weight. This is the case if:
– During crane work, the hook block lifts the lifting limit switch weight, or if
one derricks so far that the lifting limit switch weight is lying on the
ground
– During rigging the lifting limit switch weight is still not attached or if is
lying on the ground.
In these cases, the lifting limit switch activates and switches off all motions
that increase load moment. Movements which increase the load moment
arelifting, lowering the boom and telescoping out, and with additional equip-
ment derricking lattice extension.
The Lifting limit switch shutdown warning lamp lights up when the lifting limit
# switch is activated.
If there is a shutdown, the shutdown area must be left with a different crane
movement or by setting down the load.
G
Danger of accident due to operational triggering of the lifting limit switch!
When activating the lifting limit switch at too great a speed, the hook block
may hit the main boom head and the main boom head rollers. This may
damage the head rollers or the hoist rope, causing the load to fall either
immediately or later.
Overriding the lift- Shutdown of the lifting limit switch can be overridden from the crane cab
ing limit switch together with the SLI, and the lifting limit switch can be blocked mechani-
shutdown cally on the main boom.
G
Danger of accident from overridden safety devices!
When overriding the lifting limit switch with the Override key switch, crane
operation is no longer completely monitored!
For safety reasons, the crane movement is stopped once when the shut-
down point is reached. After renewed extension of the control lever for the
same crane movement, this crane movement is released again and is not
switched off again afterwards.
G
Danger of accident if the lifting limit switch is faulty or stuck!
It is not permitted to work with an overridden or defective lifting limit
switch!
Before beginning crane work, check whether the mechanical locking sys-
tem of the lifting limit switch on the main boom is deactivated, and deacti-
08.03.2006
vate it if necessary; à
Releasing the lock, p. 13 - 146.

GMK 4080-1
S
Danger of accidents due to overridden lifting limit switch!
You may only override the lifting limit switch when carrying out mainte-
nance or rigging work in accordance with the operating instructions. In
these cases, the lifting limit switch may only be overridden when there is
no load on the hook. Operate at minimum hoist speed when driving with
an overridden lifting limit switch.
The shutoff system of the lifting limit switch can be overridden (switched
off) together with the SLI with the Override key switch.
• Insert the key into the key-operated switch.
• Turn the key to the left.
• Hold the key in this position.
The lifting limit switch and SLI are overridden if you hold the key in this posi-
tion.
If you now reach the shutdown point, the crane movement is nevertheless
stopped once for safety reasons.
#
The Lifting limit switch shutdown warning lamp flashes.
If you want, for example, to continue driving during rigging work, you must
first put the control lever into initial position and then move it again for the
shutdown crane movement.
This movement is now executed and not switched off again.
G
Crane work with an overridden lifting limit switch is not permitted.
With an overridden lifting limit switch, the hook block can hit the main
boom head and the main boom head rollers, which can lead to the load fall-
ing immediately or later.
#
The Lifting limit switchshutdown warning light flashes until you leave the
shutdown area again.
G
Danger of accident due to unintentional override!
Always pull the key out of the Override key switch after overriding.
The key must be removed from the key-operated switch while the crane is
in operation.
The key switch has another position which only overrides the SLI; à SLI
H override, p. 12 - 59.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
11.4.4 Dead man's switch and seat contact switch
All crane functions are protected by a dead

man's switch system. This system includes
one dead man's switch (1) on each of the two
control levers and one seat contact switch in
the crane cab seat (2).
Crane movements may only be controlled

when you are sitting on the crane cab seat or
are pressing at least one of the two dead
man's switches.
If you stand up during crane movement and

no dead man's switch is pressed, all crane
movements are brought to a complete stand-
still within three seconds even if the control
lever is moved.
à Checking the seat contact switch and dead man's switch system, p. 12 - 13
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
12
12 Crane operation
12.1 Inspections and adjustments prior to crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
12.1.1 CHECKLIST: When truck crane is rigged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
12.1.2 Adjusting the front console and the crane cab seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
12.1.3 Checking the condition of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 9
12.1.4 Checking the safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 12
12.1.5 Pre-warming the hydraulic oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 15
12.1.6 Switching the houselock on / off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17
12.2 Starting and stopping the diesel engine from the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 21
12.2.1 When starting the engine the first time in the day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 21
12.2.2 Starting the diesel engine from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
12.2.3 Inspections after starting the diesel engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 30
12.2.4 Shutting down the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 33
12.3 Operating the safe load indicator (SLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 35
12.3.1 Switching on the SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 35
12.3.2 Entering the rigging mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 39
12.3.3 Checks before working with the crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 47
12.3.4 During crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 51
12.3.5 SLI pre-warning and SLI shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 54
12.3.6 Displaying and entering the time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 60
12.4 Crane work with the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 63
12.4.1 External influences while working with the crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 63
12.4.2 Permissible slewing ranges and working positions for crane work . . . . . . . . 12 - 68
12.4.3 Main hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 71
12.4.4 Auxiliary hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 76
12.4.5 Derricking gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 78
12.4.6 Slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 83
12.4.7 Telescoping mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 91
12.4.8 Possible movement combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 131
12.4.9 High-speed mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
12.4.10 Cooling the hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 134
12.5 Adjustments and displays whilst operating the crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 135
12.5.1 Adjusting the brightness of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 135
12.5.2 Setting characteristic curves for the control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 136
12.5.3 Adjusting power unit speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 138
12.5.4 Setting a constant engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 140
12.5.5 Tilting the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 142
12.5.6 Adjusting the windscreen wiper stroke interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 143
08.03.2006
12.5.7 Using the directional spotlight for the working area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 144
12.5.8 Display the operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 145
12.5.9 Warning message submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 147
12.5.10 Error menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 149

GMK 4080-1
12.6 Working range limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 151
12.6.1 Opening the Working range limitation submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 152
12.6.2 Reading current settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 153
12.6.3 Entering a limit value for a maximum overall height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 155
12.6.4 Entering a limit value for a maximum working radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 156
12.6.5 Entering limit values for maximum slewing angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 157
12.6.6 Entering point data for objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 160
12.6.7 Entering limit values manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 164
12.6.8 Switching monitoring on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 167
12.6.9 Shutdown caused by working range limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 169
12.7 Driving the truck crane from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 171
12.7.1 Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 172
12.7.2 Preparing to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 173
12.7.3 Opening / closing the driving mode submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 175
12.7.4 Steering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178
12.7.5 Operating the transmission from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 182
12.7.6 Driving the rigged truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 184
12.7.7 Possible connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 187
12.7.8 After driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 190
12.8 Work break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 191
12.8.1 During short work breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 191
12.8.2 Work breaks lasting longer than 8 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 192
12.9 Heating and ventilating the crane cab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 193
12.9.1 Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 193
12.9.2 Air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 202
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.1 Inspections and adjustments prior to crane operation
12 Crane operation
12.1.1 CHECKLIST: When truck crane is rigged
H
This checklist is not a complete operating manual. There are accompanying
instructions which are indicated by cross-references.
Observe the warning and safety information given there.
H
This checklist only applies to working with a rigged truck crane (supported
and rigged with counterweight). If the truck crane is not yet rigged;
à CHECKLIST: Rigging, p. 13 - 1.
1. All the activities and checks for starting the diesel engine have been
carried out; à CHECKLIST: Starting the diesel engine, p. 5 - 1.
2. If the truck crane has additional equipment for trailer operation, check
that:
– Boom floating position is switched off; à
Switching off the boom float-
ing position, p. 13 - 18.
– The slewing gear freewheel is switched off; à Switching off slewing
gear freewheel, p. 13 - 20.
– The valve on the slewing gear is open;à p. 13 - 20.
– Boom pre-tensioning is switched off; à Switching off boom pre-tension-
ing, p. 13 - 19.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
The following points apply only to working with the crane in the working
position Free on wheels. For working with a truck crane on outriggers, see
continuation of the checklist under point 8.
3. The tyre pressure is in accordance with the specified values;

à Checking the tyres, p. 6 - 8.
4. The load-bearing capacity of the ground is sufficient to take the maxi-

mum axle loads;
à Load bearing capacity of the ground and the outriggers, p. 13 - 9,
à Total weight and axle loads, p. 15 - 3.
5. For safety reasons all four outrigger beams are extended as far as pos-
sible; à Permissible outrigger spans, p. 13 - 37.
6. The truck crane is level; à When rigging, p. 13 - 80.
u 7. The suspension system is locked and the Suspension locking system indi-
cator lamp must be on; à
Locking the suspension, p. 13 - 42.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
The following points apply only to working with a truck crane on outriggers.
For working with a crane free on wheels, see continuation of the checklist
under point 13.
à Locking the suspension, p. 13 - 42.

u 8. The suspension system is locked;
9. All four outrigger beams are extended to the necessary span and
locked; à Permissible outrigger spans, p. 13 - 37.
10. The outrigger pads are attached in such a way that the outrigger pres-
sures arising during the planned crane operations on no account
exceed the load bearing capacity of the ground; à
Load bearing capacity
of the ground and the outriggers, p. 13 - 9.
11. No wheels are touching the ground; à Extending / Retracting the outrig-
ger cylinders, p. 13 - 57.
12. The truck crane is level; à Checking the alignment of the truck crane,
p. 13 - 69.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
3 13. Shut down the diesel engine and if necessary press the Driving mode /
crane operation rocker switch down to the Crane operation setting.
14. While inspecting the truck crane, look out in particular for any leaking
fluids (oil, fuel or water).
15. The truck crane is earthed as required; à Earthing of the truck crane,
p. 13 - 13.
16. All mirrors for crane operation are folded out and correctly set;
à Folding mirrors in and out and adjusting them, p. 13 - 24.
If the adjustable spotlight for the working area is fitted as additional
equipment, adjust it as necessary; à p. 12 - 144.
17. The level of the windscreen washing system is regulated; à Checking

the reservoir of the windscreen washing system, p. 12 - 9.
18. The heater fuel level has been checked and topped up as necessary;
à Fuel tank level, p. 12 - 10.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
19. Crane cab seat and front console have been suitably adjusted;
à Adjusting the crane cab seat, p. 12 - 8,
à Adjusting the front panel, p. 12 - 8.
20. Start diesel engine from the crane cab; à Starting and stopping the diesel
engine from the superstructure, p. 12 - 21.
f 21. The parking brake is locked and the Parking brake indicator lamp is on.
The rocker buttons in the control levers are assigned the High-speed
mode function and crane movements are enabled, regardless of the shift
position of the Driving mode selector switch, only if the parking brake is
locked.
22. The safety devices have been checked for perfect working order:
– SLI
– Lifting limit switch
– Dead man's switch system
– Crane control emergency stop switch
à Checking the safety devices, p. 12 - 12.
G
The superstructure of a free on wheels truck crane may be turned only if the
turntable is loaded with the maximum 4.3 t counterweight on the turntable
and the operating-area curve remains within the permissible working
radius as shown on the Lifting capacity table (not less than 3.0 m ).
23. The required counterweight combination is rigged; à Assembling coun-

terweight combinations, p. 13 - 97.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
24. The position of the hoist ropes on the hoist drums has been checked;
à Checking the position of the hoist ropes, p. 12 - 11.
25. The key has been removed from the Override key switch for the SLI and
the lifting limit switch; à
SLI override, p. 12 - 59.
26. The current rigging mode is set on the SLI and the corresponding SLI
code from the lifting capacity table is displayed; à
Entering the rigging
mode, p. 12 - 39.
27. The number of reeved rope lines has been entered for the correspond-
ing hoist and is shown on the reeving display; à
Entering the rigging
mode, p. 12 - 39.
28. The telescoping status was monitored; à Check before telescoping for the
first time, p. 12 - 97.
à Lamp test on the SLI,

o+ a 29. The lamp test on the SLI has been performed;
p. 12 - 37.
t2 30. – For working position 0° or 180°, close the slewing gear brake (switch
off the slewing gear) and switch on the houselock if necessary.
0 – For other working ranges, switch off the houselock if necessary.

à Switching on the slewing gear, p. 12 - 83,
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
31. The electrical equipment (spotlight for working area, windscreen wiper
/ washing system, horn) have been checked for good working order;
à Checking the electrical system, p. 12 - 10.
32. Check the temperature of the hydraulic oil; preheat the hydraulic oil if
necessary; à Pre-warming the hydraulic oil, p. 12 - 15.
33. If necessary, adjust the brightness of the Crane control display;

à Adjusting the brightness of the display, p. 12 - 135.
H
Further information on working with cranes, permitted working positions
and operating the individual power units; à
Crane work with the main boom,
p. 12 - 63.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.1.2 Adjusting the front console and the crane cab seat
Adjusting the You can adjust the height of the front panel.
front panel
• Hold the front panel (1) tightly by the handle

(2).
• (A) – Fold the pedal (3) upwards.
• (B) – Adjust the front panel (1) to the desired
height.
• Fold down the pedal (3) to lock the front
panel.
Adjusting the You may adjust the hydraulically-sprung seat in the crane cab to suit your
crane cab seat height.
1 Unlocking and height adjustment of the

right-hand control panel
2 Unlocking and height adjustment of the
left-hand control panel
3 Inclination of the seat back (knob switch on
each side)
4 Adjustment backwards / forwards of the
seat and the back rest without the control
consoles
5 Seat height adjustment
6 Adjustment backwards / forwards of the
whole seat with the control consoles
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.1.3 Checking the condition of the truck crane
Checking the res- The washer fluid reservoir is located at the front left in the crane cab.
ervoir of the wind-
screen washing
system
• Unscrew the cap (1) and check the fluid
level.
If the level is too low:
• Top up with water.
If possible, use a windscreen washing agent
and an appropriate antifreeze for low tem-
peratures.
• Close the reservoir with the cap (1).
Visual inspection Check over the truck crane before beginning crane work. Check in particular
of the entire crane for any leaking fluids such as oil, grease, fuel or coolant.
G
Danger if crane cannot be unrigged!
Remember that loss of oil can mean that crane movements cannot be car-
ried out even in emergency situations (e.g. when raising in emergency
mode).
O
Risk of damage to the environment from leaking fuel!
Immediately attend to any oil, fuel or coolant leaks which occur during
crane operation, or have them taken care of, so that no oil, fuel or coolant
seeps into the ground or ends up in bodies of water.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Fuel tank level The fuel tank for the crane cab heating is located on the right hand side
beside the crane cab on the storage box.
S
Danger of fire due to flammable gases!
Before filling the fuel tank, switch off the diesel engine and the heating.
• Check the fuel level in the tank (1) by the

level indicator (3).
You should use either the fuel used in the die-
sel engine or EL heating oil as heating fuel.
Always use a funnel with a filter when filling.
• Top up the fuel as necessary through the
filler neck (2).
• Close the filler neck (2) with the cap.
Checking the elec- • Check that the following parts of the components of the electrical system
trical system are functioning perfectly:
– Horn
– Spotlights
– Instrument lighting
– Indicator and warning lamps
– Windscreen wipers
– Windscreen washing system
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Checking the posi- For this check, the hoist mirror must be folded out; à Folding mirrors in and
tion of the hoist out and adjusting them, p. 13 - 24.
ropes The inspections in this section are carried out while the diesel engine is run-
ning;à Starting the diesel engine from the crane cab, p. 12 - 23.
G
Danger of accidents due to turning rope drum!
Keep yourself and other people away from the turning rope drum. If you
take hold of the turning rope drum, your fingers and hands could be
crushed between the rope drum and hoist frame or get caught and drawn
in by the turning drum.
Check the position of the hoist ropes (1) on the

rope drums of the hoists.
• Slowly turn the rope drum at least one turn

in the Lowering direction. Watch the
unreeled rope at the same time.
– The rope must be wound evenly on the
drum.
– The rope turns on the drum must be
evenly spaced at a distance of 0 to 2 mm .
– The cross-over points must be at an angle
of approx. 180°.
The upper rope lines lie over the next lower
rope lines at the cross-over points.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.1.4 Checking the safety devices
G
Danger of accidents when working with defective safety equipment!
It is strictly prohibited to operate the crane with non-operational or overrid-
den safety devices.
Defective safety equipment must be repaired immediately by the
CraneCARE.
Checking the safe • Switch on the safe load indicator; à Switching on the SLI, p. 12 - 35.
load indicator
• After the test program has run, check whether:

– An error message is displayed.
xw – The SLI early warning and SLI shutdown warning lamps are on.
– A continuous buzzer tone is sounded.
• Carry out a lamp test; à Switching on SLI, à Lamp test on the SLI,
p. 12 - 37.
All displays, warning lamps and indicator lamps on the SLI must light up at
maximum brightness.
At this point, the SLI is working properly if:

– No error messages are displayed.
– Both warning lamps are on.
– There is a continuous buzzer tone.
– The lamp test indicated no failures of lamps or lights.
If the SLI is not functioning correctly, do not start crane work. Notify the
responsible CraneCARE and have them repair the SLI.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Checking the • Raise the main boom.

lifting limit switch
• Slowly raise the hook block until the lifting limit switch weight has been
lifted from the hook block.
• Check whether the Lifting limit switch shutdown warning lamp on the Crane
# control plug-in module is lit.
• Check whether the crane movements that increase the load moment are
deactivated. Movements which increase the load moment are:
– Raising loads
– Raising the main boom
– Extending the main boom
At this point the lifting limit switch is working properly if the Lifting limit
switch shutdown warning lamp is lit and the movements which increase the
load moment have been shut down.
If the lifting limit switch is not functioning correctly, do not start crane work.
Notify the responsible CraneCARE and have them repair the lifting limit
switch.
Checking the seat

contact switch
and dead man's
switch system
G
Danger of accidents if the seat contact switch is defective!
Do not stand beside the crane cab on the carrier during this check. If the
dead man's switch is defective, the superstructure can turn and knock you
off the crane. Stand inside the crane cab.
Checking the seat contact switch

• Do not sit on the crane cab seat.
• Do not press any of the dead man's switches on the two control levers.
• Check that no crane movement can be carried out.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Check the dead man's switch system on the control lever:

• Do not sit on the crane cab seat.
• Press the dead man's switch on a control lever and slowly lift the hook
block.
• Release the dead man's switch. The crane movement must be brought to
a standstill within three seconds.
• Repeat the inspection with the dead man's switch at the other control
lever.
The seat contact switch and dead man's switch are functioning properly if
crane movement is not allowed when the crane cab seat is unoccupied and
the dead man's switch has not been pushed; and if crane motion stops on
releasing the dead man's switch.
If the dead man's switch system is not functioning correctly, do not start
crane work. Notify the responsible CraneCARE and have them repair the
dead man's switch system.
Crane control • Set down the load and release both control levers.
emergency stop
• Press the emergency stop switch for the Crane control (1), until it engages.
The Crane control emergency stop is working correctly at this point in time if
the crane engine stops.
If the Crane control emergency stop is not working properly, do not start
working with the crane. Notify the responsible CraneCARE and have them
repair the Crane control emergency stop.
Release the crane function again; à Resetting the emergency-stop switch,

p. 14 - 3.
• Carry out this check on the emergency stop switch (1) for the hand-held
control as well.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.1.5 Pre-warming the hydraulic oil
H
It may take a time for the solenoid valves to be activated or the power units
may start abruptly if the oil is cold.
The current hydraulic oil temperature is displayed in the Monitoring sub-

menu. To open the submenu; àp. 12 - 30.
For crane operation with loads and without speed limitation, the hydraulic
oil temperature must be at least 10°C .
• If the oil temperature falls below 10°C , proceed as follows:

– from 10°C to 0°C
You can carry out crane movements with loads only in normal operation
mode, at average engine speed and at average operating speed.
– from 0°C to –15°C
Only carry out crane movements without loads. Only use normal opera-
tion mode, at average engine speed and at average operating speed.
– Less than –15°C
You must prewarm the hydraulic oil before carrying out crane move-
ments.
(A) – Preheating
• Open the valve – lever (1) parallel with the
line.
• Press the button (2) and retract the lifting
cylinders to the full extent; à p. 13 - 112.
The hydraulic oil has been prewarmed when
display (3) shows a temperature of at least
10°C .
(B) – Before crane operation

• Open the valve – lever (1) parallel with the
line.
H
Operate all crane functions at least twice after prewarming (hydraulic oil
temperature above 10°C) in order to remove the cold oil from all parts of the
hydraulic system.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.1.6 Switching the houselock on / off
As additional equipment, the truck crane may be equipped with a house-

lock. The houselock consists of a lockable, rigidly engaging locking unit,
which is installed between the slewing motor and the slewing gear trans-
mission. It enables the superstructure to be locked at any angle in the whole
slewing range.
To lock and unlock it, a locking pin is extended or retracted by a control in

the crane cab.
The houselock is operated with the rocker button (1) on the side panel.
The corresponding display (2) is in the main menu.
Switching on the • Slew the superstructure to the position in which it is to be locked, and stop
houselock the slewing movement.
ç • Switch the slewing gear off; to do this, press down the Slewing gear on / off
rocker button once.
t The slewing gear brake will be engaged at the same time and the Slewing
gear brake indicator lamp will light up on the Crane control insert.
Houselock operation must take place with the slewing gear brake engaged.
S
Risk of damage from slewing during the locking procedure!
Always check before operating the houselock whether the slewing gear
brake has been engaged. In this way you prevent the superstructure from
being slewed during the locking procedure. Slewing during the locking pro-
cedure can lead to system damage.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• To lock, press the rocker switch Houselock on / off upwards and hold it until
the locking operation is completed. The Houselock locking status displays
show the procedure.
1 – As soon as the locking pin extends, the symbol for the Intermediate position
will be displayed in yellow.
2 – When the locking procedure is finished, the symbol for the Locked position
will be displayed in green.
/ If the symbol for the Blocked position is displayed in red on a yellow back-
ground, then one or both of the locking pins is in front of a tooth and cannot
move into the Locked final position.
• In this event, release the Houselock on / off rocker switch and proceed as fol-
lows:
¥0 • Press the rocker switch next to the Houselock on / off symbol and hold it
downwards until the symbol for the Unlocked position is displayed in red.
S
Risk of damage from slewing in intermediate position!
Before slewing make sure the symbol for the Unlocked end position (red) is
showing. Otherwise the locking pin is partially extended and the system
will be damaged during slewing.
ç • Operate the slewing gear brake and switch on the slewing gear.
• Rotate the superstructure a little further (minimal).
ç • Switch the slewing gear off again so that the slewing gear brake is
engaged.
ß2 Press the rocker switch Houselock on / off upwards and keep it pressed until
the locking operation is completed and the Locked position symbol is shown
in green.
/ If the symbol for the Blocked position is displayed again, then you have to
correct the superstructure position again, as described above.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching off the • Check whether the slewing gear brake is closed and if necessary switch
houselock off the slewing gear so that the slewing gear brake is closed.
S
Risk of damage from slewing during the locking procedure!
Always check before operating the houselock whether the slewing gear
brake has been engaged. In this way you prevent the superstructure from
being slewed during the locking procedure. Slewing during the locking pro-
cedure can lead to system damage.
• To unlock, press the rocker switch Houselock on / off downwards and hold
it until the unlocking operation is completed.
The Houselock locking status displays show the procedure.
1 – As soon as the locking pin retracts, the symbol for the Intermediate position
will be displayed in yellow.
0 – When the locking pin has reached the Retracted end position the symbol
for the position Unlocked will be displayed in red.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.2 Starting and stopping the diesel engine from the superstructure
12.2 Starting and stopping the diesel engine from the

superstructure
To avoid malfunctions, you should proceed differently when starting the
diesel engine depending on whether you
– are starting the cold diesel engine for the first time that day or
– are starting the warm diesel engine (e.g. after an interruption in opera-
tion).
12.2.1 When starting the engine the first time in the day
The first start of the day should always be made from the driver's cab, as all
the control and display instruments for monitoring the engine can only be
accessed there.
• Carry out all the required tasks and checks for starting the diesel engine;
à CHECKLIST: Starting the diesel engine, p. 5 - 1.
• Start the diesel engine from the driver's cab and check all control and dis-
play instruments used for monitoring the engine; à Checks after the diesel
engine has been started, p. 5 - 17.
• Check whether the Brake circuits I and II supply pressure warning lamp has
l gone out.
• Switch the diesel engine off and switch the ignition on again.
• Press the Driving mode / Crane operation down for crane operation.
3
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
You have to switch to the dual tank in the driver's cab if you want to use the
fuel from the dual tank with additional equipment. The switch-over is
retained after starting subsequently from the crane cab; à Operation if
equipped with dual tank, p. 5 - 23.
When the truck crane is not to be driven from the crane cab:
• Turn off the ignition and remove the ignition key.
If you want to drive the truck crane from the crane cab:
• Turn the ignition key to position 1.
Driving from the crane cab is only enabled when the ignition key is turned
to position 1. This prevents the steering lock from engaging during driving;
à Preparing to drive, p. 12 - 173.
H
Lock the driver's cab during crane operation for protection against unautho-
rised use.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.2.2 Starting the diesel engine from the crane cab
Inspections at the When starting a warm diesel engine from the superstructure it is assumed
carrier before that the following prerequisites have been fulfilled:
starting
3 – The Driving mode / Crane operation rocker switch in the driver's cab is
pressed down for Crane operation.
– The battery master switch is switched on.
– The diesel engine's oil and coolant levels have been checked.
– The oil level in the hydraulic system has been checked.
– The shut-off valves on the hydraulic tank have been opened.
– If the truck crane is to be moved from the crane cab, the ignition key must
be inserted at position 1 so that the steering is not locked; à
Preparing to
drive, p. 12 - 173.
Switching on the This section describes only how to start the diesel engine from the crane
ignition cab. You can also start the diesel engine with the hand-held control;
à Starting and turning off the diesel engine with connected hand-held control,
p. 13 - 28.
H
The ignition can only be switched on, if the bridging plug has been inserted
in all sockets for hand-held control; àConnections on the truck crane,
p. 11 - 105.
• Switch on the ignition in the crane cab. Insert the ignition key into the igni-
tion lock and turn the key to position 1.
When the ignition has been switched on:
f – the vehicle parking brake is engaged. The Vehicle holding brake indicator
lamp lights up.
– the transmission is switched to neutral position N. The diesel engine may
only be started in this position.
When the ignition key is in position R and the transmission is not switched
to the neutral position N, you must switch the transmission to the neutral
position N before starting the diesel engine (press the button next to the
symbol H) or turn the ignition key to the position 0 and then back into the
08.03.2006
position 1.
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
After switching on the ignition, the following tests are carried out:
– Crane control lamp test
– Electric lamp test
– Alignment of switching conditions
S
Danger of accidents due to faulty warning lamps!
When the ignition is switched on, lamps for indication light up that serve as
warning and indicator lamps during operation. Always carry out the follow-
ing lamp tests and replace faulty lamps / have them replaced immediately.
In this way, you will avoid accidents and damage that occur when
malfunctions are not recognised early enough.
Crane control After activating the ignition, the crane control conducts a lamp test with the
lamp test most important warning and indicator lamps.
• Check that the following lamps light up for approx. two seconds after the
ignition is turned on:
At the insert on the right:
– The indicator lamp Hoist gear / auxiliary hoist
high-speed mode (1).
– The indicator lamp Derricking gear / telescop-
ing mechanism high-speed mode (2).
• Replace any defective lamps immediately.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
At the crane control insert:

– The Error / warning message (1) warning lamp
– The LED alongside the Open error menu but-
ton (2)
– The LED alongside the Entry confirmation
button (3)
– The LED alongside theWarning message sub-
menu button (6) and
– The warning lamps Slewing gear holding brake
(5) and Switch off lifting limit switch (4)
• Have the defective lamps changed immedi-

ately by the CraneCARE.
If all the lamps could not be checked in the given time, the lamp test can be
carried out at the Crane control display.
• If another menu is shown on the Crane control display, press the Exit sub-
menu / input mode button (
ö), until the main menu is displayed.
! • Press the button next to the Settings / Displays symbol in the main menu.
The Settings / Displays submenu will open.

• Press the button next to the Lamp test symbol (1).
The above-mentioned lamps light up until you release the button.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Lamp test for • Check that the following warning and indicator lamps light up when the
electrics ignition is switched on:
– Battery charge indicator warning lamp (2),
– Flame start system indicator lamp (1), only if additional equipment fitted.
This indicator lamp only lights up for a limited amount of time (2 to
20 seconds). The warmer the diesel engine, the sooner the indicator lamp
goes out. The engine is ready when the indicator lamp goes out.
• Replace any defective lamps immediately.
Alignment of When the ignition is switched on, the switching states of the differential
switching condi- locks and the separate steering are compared.
tions
In the submenu Driving the symbols (1) and (2)

are displayed as they were saved when the
ignition was switched off, e.g. Switch off dif-
ferential locks and separate steering.
The corresponding gear changes are triggered
electronically.
The displays (3) and (4) show the current

switching states.
If the display (3) does not display the end state
corresponding to the gear change, the end
state could not be established.
In this case you must e.g. operate the steering
so that the locking procedures can be com-
pleted mechanically; à p. 12 - 181.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Checking the fuel • Before starting the diesel engine, check the fuel level.
level
H
If, with additional equipment, you have switched to the dual tank, you must
check the fuel level directly at the dual tank; à
Refuelling, p. 5 - 24. The dis-
plays in the crane cab apply to the standard fuel tanks only.
The current level of the fuel tank can be read in the Control instruments sub-
menu. If another menu is shown on the Crane control display, press the Exit
ö
submenu / input mode button ( ), until the main menu is displayed.
8 • In the main menu, press the button beside the Control instruments sub-
menu symbol.
The Control instruments submenu will open. The Fuel tank level status display
(1) indicates the current level.
The level is shown in percent (100% equal approx. 400 l ) and changes con-
tinuously.
The level indicator below the display changes its colour depending on the
filling level:
Green: more than 10% (over 40 l)
Yellow: 5 to 10% (20 to 40 l)
Red: below 5% (less than 20 l)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Starting the diesel Refer to the enclosed operating instructions for diesel engine operation.
engine
H
If the diesel engine of your truck crane is equipped with a flame start system
(additional equipment); à Starting the cold diesel engine with the flame start
system (additional equipment), p. 12 - 29.
Starting the diesel engine (without flame start system)

S
A warm diesel engine must never be started using starter fuel (e.g. starter
• Do not press the accelerator pedal.

starts.
If the engine does not start, abort the starting procedure after approx.
again.
à Malfunctions in the diesel

H
If the engine fails to start after several attempts;
engine during crane operation, p. 14 - 15.
• You can also start the diesel engine by pressing the rocker button Constant
Â engine speed down once with the ignition switched on.
If the diesel engine is started from the crane cab and crane operation is
engaged, the Transmission display in the driver's cab will show the entry PN. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Starting the cold diesel engine with the flame start system (additional
equipment)
If the temperature of the coolant is low, the flame start system heats the suc-
tion air of the diesel engine by burning fuel in the suction line.
S
The diesel engine must never be started using starter fuel (e.g. starter
z The flame start system is activated every time the ignition is started:
– When the diesel engine is warm, the Flame start system indicator lamp will
light up only briefly (2 to 3 seconds). The engine can be started immedi-
ately: you do not have to wait for the indicator lamp to go out.
– When the diesel engine is cold, the Flame start system indicator lamp will
light up for up to 20 seconds depending on the coolant temperature. The
engine can be started as soon as the indicator lamp goes out. The engine
should be started up within the next 30 seconds.
H
If the Flame start system indicator lamp does not go out after ca. 20 seconds,
there is a malfunction in the flame start system; à
Malfunctions in the diesel
engine during crane operation, p. 14 - 15.
• Wait until the Flame start system indicator lamp goes out.
z If you start the diesel engine when the temperature of the coolant is low,
the vehicle engine will emit smoke for a while after start-up.
• Do not press the accelerator pedal.
starts.
• If the engine does not start, abort the starting procedure after approx.
again.
H
If the engine is cold and switched off but the ignition has been switched on
a while you must first switch off the ignition briefly and switch it back on
again to reactivate the flame start system before starting the engine.
If the engine fails to start after several attempts; à
Malfunctions to the diesel
engine, p. 8 - 37.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.2.3 Inspections after starting the diesel engine
After starting the diesel engine, checks must be made to see if a malfunction
has occurred. Information about malfunctions can be found:
– On the instrument panel
– On the Crane control display
Inspections on the • Check whether the following indicator and warning lamps go out after the
instrument panel diesel engine has been started:
q – The charge indicator warning lamp

If the Battery charge indicator warning light does not go out or lights up
while the diesel engine is running, switch the diesel engine off and look
for the cause; à Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
z – Flame start system

With additional equipment, if the Flame start system does not go out or
lights up while the engine is running, there is a malfunction in the flame
start system; à Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
Inspections on the You can request that further information on the undercarriage is shown in
Crane control dis- the Crane control display and you will obtain warning messages if malfunc-
play tions occur.
Displaying information
Further information about the undercarriage can be shown in the Control
instruments submenu.
This submenu can be opened in the Crane control display in the main menu.
• If another menu is displayed on the Crane control display, press the Exit
submenu / input mode button (
played.
ö) repeatedly until the main menu is dis-
8 • In the main menu, press the button beside the Control instruments sub-
menu symbol.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The display changes to the Control instruments

submenu with the following displays:
– Hydraulic system oil temperature (1)
– Diesel engine fuel tank level (2)
– On-board voltage (3)
– Diesel engine speed (4)
Next to all the displays, there is a level indica-

tor on the left that continuously changes. In
electronics, limit values are given for all these
displays. The colour of the level indicator
show in which area the value can be found:
Green: Current value is OK.

Yellow: Current value is close to the limit value.
Red: Current value exceeds (or undershoots) the limit value. The
appropriate warning message will appear.
The warning message is displayed on the Crane control insert by the flashing
of the warning lamp (1) and of the LED (2), irrespective of which menu is
open.
For more information about the warning message, see the Warning message
submenu; à Warning message submenu, p. 12 - 147.
Oil temperature gauge for hydraulic system

Indicates the current hydraulic oil temperature beside the symbol. The tem-
perature is measured in the hydraulic tank.
Temperatures are shown either in °C or °F depending on the set measuring
unit.
The hydraulic oil temperature should not exceed 80 °C during crane opera-
tion; à Cooling the hydraulic oil, p. 12 - 134.
Fuel tank level status display

Shows the current fuel level in the superstructure fuel tank. The fuel level is
given as a percent (100% is equal to 400 l of fuel).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
On-board voltage display

Displays the current on-board voltage in volts.
Diesel engine speed display

Indicates the current diesel engine speed alongside the symbol.
The value is given in revolutions per minute.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.2.4 Shutting down the diesel engine
H
This section deals with switching off the diesel engine in normal operation,
at the ignition switch and at the hand-held control. In an emergency the die-
sel engine can however also be shut down by operating the emergency
stop;à Emergency-stop devices for crane operation, p. 14 - 1.
G
Danger of accidents due to suspended loads!
Never turn the diesel engine off while a load is suspended. Never leave the
crane cab while a load is suspended on the hook.
Always keep your hands near the control levers while a load is suspended.
This enables you to take corrective action at all times.
Always put down the load before you interrupt work!
In normal opera- In normal operation you can switch off the diesel engine at the ignition
tion switch or at the hand-held control, depending on which was used to start
the diesel engine.
Ignition lock
• Turn the ignition key to position 0, the diesel engine will stop.
On the hand-held control

• Press the Stopbutton (1), and the diesel engine will stop.
• Refer to the instructions in the respective section for each type of stopping
work;
à During short work breaks, p. 12 - 191,
à Work breaks lasting longer than 8 hours, p. 12 - 192.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
In emergencies If the diesel engine does not stop when the ignition key has been turned to
position 0 or the Stop button has been pressed on the hand-held control you
can press the emergency stop to stop the diesel engine.
In the crane cab

The Crane control emergency-stop switch (1) is in the crane cab.
Outside the crane cab

Outside the crane cab are located the Emer-
gency stop Diesel engine stop (1) and (2).

H
The diesel engine can be restarted only after the emergency stop has been
reset; à Resetting the emergency-stop switch, p. 14 - 3.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.3 Operating the safe load indicator (SLI)
12.3.1 Switching on the SLI
H
If you do not turn the ignition key into position 0 when restarting the engine,
but into position R instead, the SLI will not be switched off. This means that
the test program will not run, so you do not have to acknowledge the set-
tings again.
Switching on The SLI is switched on with the ignition.

• Turn on the ignition.
When the ignition has been turned on, a test program will run. A continuous
buzzer tone will sound for about 5 seconds and a lamp test will be carried
out on the warning and indicator lamps.
• Check whether you can hear a buzzer tone.
G
Danger of accidents with defective safety devices!
If warning lamps or the buzzer are faulty, notify CraneCARE and have the
fault fixed.
During the period when the buzzer is defective, pay particular attention to
the warning lamps; and if the warning lamps are defective, pay particular
attention to the buzzer.
• Check that the following LEDs light up on

switching the ignition on;
– In the SLI early warning warning lamp (2)
– In the SLI shutdown warning lamp (3)
– In the Current degree of utilisation display (5)
– In the Outrigger span display (6)
– On the Hoists indicator lamps (4)
– In the buttons (1) under the Information /
Fault display
• Check in all displays whether all digits are
flashing.
• In the case of defective safety devices,
please notify CraneCARE and have the fault
repaired.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
If you cannot check all the LEDs in the time available, you can carry out the
lamp test again at the SLI display; à p. 12 - 37.
After completing the test program:
xw – The SLI early warning and SLI shutdown warning lamps are lit.
– The continuous buzzer tone continues to sound.
– All power units will be blocked.
The display after the test program has been run orients itself according to
whether:
– The SLI had been switched off up to 48 hours or
– Had been switched off for longer than 48 hours.
After standstill of up to 48 hours

The Reeving display (1) and SLI code (3) corre-
spond to the rigging mode last set.
The Reeving display (1) shows the signalling
point (5).
If the values displayed correspond to the cur-
rent rigging status of the truck crane, you can
accept the values:
• Press the button Enter reeving (2) once.
The signalling point (5) will now change to
show the SLI code (3).
• Press the button Enter SLI code (4) once.
The SLI code will be loaded, the continuous buzzer tone will be switched off,
the signalling point will go out and the warning lamps SLI pre-warning and
SLI shutdown will cease to flash.
If no error messages are displayed, the SLI is now ready for crane operation
and the crane movements will be enabled; à Checks before working with the
crane, p. 12 - 47.
r The red LED in the Error information button goes on if there is an error mes-
sage; à Error message, p. 12 - 57.
If the values displayed do not correspond to the current rigging mode of the
truck crane, you must re-enter the current rigging mode; à Entering the rig-
ging mode, p. 12 - 39.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
After a standstill of more than 48 hours

The entries 1 and 1000 are displayed on the
Reeving display (1) and SLI code display (3).
The Reeving display (1) is set to input mode
and entry 1 flashes.
• Enter the current reeving;
à Entering individual components, p. 12 - 44,
à Confirm SLI code, p. 12 - 41,
à Saving values, p. 12 - 42.
The SLI code display (3) is set to input mode
and the entry 1000 flashes after accepting the
value.
• Enter the SLI code for the current rigging;
à Entering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.
Lamp test on the You can carry out a lamp test at the SLI insert at any time.
SLI
• Keep the Second level keypad button (1) pressed and in addition briefly press
the Lamp test button (2).
All displays, warning lamps and indicator lamps on the SLI insert must light
up at maximum brightness.
After about 2 seconds, the current display will reappear and the brightness
will be adjusted automatically.
Display brightness After switching on the ignition, the brightness of all displays and warning
and indicator lamps in the SLI automatically adapts to the ambient light.
The basic brightness is measured by the sensor (1). Take care not to cover
the sensor and to keep it free of dirt, so that the brightness control system
is not impaired.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.3.2 Entering the rigging mode
When adjusting the rigging mode, the rigging of the truck crane that of the
reeving must be input separately and acknowledged separately, so that the
SLI enables the crane movements:
– On the Reeving display and
– On the SLI code display.
G
If rigging mode is incompletely set there is an accident hazard!
The crane movements must be already enabled when you load the SLI code
or the reeving. Check therefore before working with the crane that both val-
ues match the current rigging mode.
In this way you prevent the SLI from incorrectly calculating the permitted
load and causing the truck crane to be overloaded or overturn.
You can input the rigging mode in two ways:

– Either input the SLI code for the current rig-
ging mode at the SLI code display (6)
or
– You can select the current rigging mode for
the individual components (1) to (5) one
after another.
Both ways require you to confirm and load the
new rigging mode at the SLI code display.
The following section describes the complete input procedure for the SLI
code. If you wish to input the rigging mode for individual components;
à Entering individual components, p. 12 - 44.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Entering the SLI When setting the rigging mode using the SLI code, the SLI code for the rig-
code ging mode is entered according to the Lifting capacity table.
• Refer to the Lifting capacity table for the current rigging mode. The corre-
sponding SLI code (1) is given at the bottom of the table (e.g. 1100).
Input is performed in four steps:
– Switching on input mode,
– Enter the SLI code,
– Confirm the SLI code and
– Accept the SLI code.
Switching on input mode

• Keep the Second level numeric pad (5) pressed.
• In addition press the Enter SLI code button (4)
once and release both buttons.
The value in the SLI code display (3) will flash.
The SLI early warning (1) and SLI shutdown (2)

warning lamps will light up.
Now the input mode is enabled at this display

and you can input new SLI code.
The Information / Error display (1) will automatically switch to displaying the
permissible slewing range.
If how an error message occurs the acoustic signal will sound and the red
LED in the Error information button (2) will light up.
The Information / Error display does not automatically display the error code.
To view the error code, press the Error information button (2); à Error mes-
sage, p. 12 - 57.
Then you can switch back to viewing the permissible slewing range, for
which press the Permissible slewing range button (3) once.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Entering the SLI code

You can only confirm SLI codes for other slewing ranges than 360°
– if the slewing gear is switched off in the working position 0°/180°.
– if the superstructure is in the entered slewing range. If necessary, first en-
ter an SLI code for the slewing range 360° and slew the superstructure
into the required position.
You can enter the SLI code as individual digits or select a permissible value.
Entry as digits
• Enter the individual digits of the value in
succession by pressing the buttons of the
numeric pad (8).
The entered value flashes on the SLI code dis-
play (6) and the corresponding rigging mode
is displayed on the displays (1) to (5).
Selecting an SLI code

• Press the button (7) repeatedly until the
required SLI code flashes on the display (6).
The values are displayed repeatedly in as-
cending order.
Confirm SLI code

• Press the Confirm entry button (1) once.
– If the SLI code is permissible, then the display (2) does not flash any
more and the signalling point is displayed. The entry has been con-
firmed.
– If the SLI code is not permissible, then the lights in the button (1) flash.
Press button (1) once to display the error codes; à
p. 14 - 35.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Saving values
Values can be accepted only when the signalling point is displayed at the
SLI code display (2).
• Press the button Enter SLI code (1) once.
The signalling point will go out and the SLI code is accepted.
G
If rigging mode is incompletely set there is an accident hazard!
Once the SLI code has been accepted the crane movements are enabled.
Check however before starting working with the crane the displayed value
for reeving also corresponds to the actual reeving value.
In this way you prevent the SLI from incorrectly calculating the permitted
load and causing the truck crane to be overloaded or overturn.
• Check that the Reeving display corresponds to the actual reeving value. If
a different value for reeving is displayed, you must input the actual reev-
ing value; à p. 12 - 43.
xw When no further error messages are outstanding and all error messages
that have occurred have been acknowledged, the SLI warning and SLI shut-
down warning lamps will also go out. Crane movements are now unblocked;
à Checks before working with the crane, p. 12 - 47.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Entering a reeving The rigging mode is fully input only when after the SLI code has been
accepted you enter the current reeving.
The newly input reeving always applies to the hoisting gear for which the
lamp on the Hoisting gear indicator lamp is lit, e.g. the lamp I for the main
hoist.
• Check whether the indicated hoist is the one that will be used to lift the
load and if necessary switch the display over to a different hoist;
à Example of how to switch over the display, p. 12 - 50.
H
For inputting the reeving you must perform the same steps at the Reeving
display that were required for inputting the SLI code at the SLI code display.
For this reason the procedure is described only briefly.

• Keep the Second level numeric keypad button
(3) pressed and in addition press the Input
reeving button (2).
The value in the Reeving display (1) will flash.
Inputting the value

• Input the value by pressing the keys of the
numeric pad (4).
or
• Select the value using the Input reeving but-
ton (2).
Confirming the input

• Press the Confirm entry button (3) once.
The input is confirmed when the signalling
point appears on the Reeving display (1).
Saving values
• Press the button Enter reeving (2) once.
The signalling point will go out and the reev-
ing is accepted.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Entering individ- You can input the current rigging mode by selecting the current rigging
ual components mode at the displays for the individual components.
G
Danger of overturning due to incorrectly set rigging mode!
Values which have already been set may change when individual compo-
nents are entered. For this reason, you should always compare the rigging
mode displayed with the current rigging mode of the truck crane. In this
way you prevent the SLI calculating with incorrectly set components and
the truck crane becoming overloaded or tipping; àChecks before working
with the crane, p. 12 - 47.
If you completely re-enter the rigging mode,

you can prevent changes to the components
already entered by entering the individual
entries in the following order:
– Counterweight (3)
– Lattice extensions (2) and, if necessary, (1),
– Outrigger span (4).
In this order, the values which can be selected for the current entry are
always limited by the previous entry. This means that the values already
entered will not change.
The appropriate SLI code is calculated from the components entered and is
displayed directly in the SLI code display.
Input is performed in four steps:

– Switching on input mode
– Selecting values
– Confirming the entry and
– Saving the values
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation

To input individual components you must
switch to input mode at the SLI code display.
• Keep the Second level numeric keypad button
(5) pressed and in addition press the Input
SLI code button (2).
The value in the SLI code display (6) will flash.
Input mode is switched on and the displays for
components (3) and (4) will be activated.
The displays (1) and (2) are only activated if an
SLI code for a lattice extension is shown.
Selecting values
Here you can select the values which are permitted according to the Lifting
capacity table for the individual components. The numeric keypad cannot be
used for these inputs.
The procedure for selection is the same for all components and is described
using the counterweight as an example.
The Counterweight display (2) shows the value corresponding to the last SLI
code to be entered, e.g. 6.6 t.
• Press the button Input counterweight (1) once.
The Counterweight display (2) shows the next

higher value e.g. 7.6 t.
• Press the Input counterweight button (1) as
many time as necessary to bring up the cur-
rently rigged counterweight combination
display.
If you skip past the required value, run through
all possible values until the status display
returns to the initial value.
The SLI code display (3) shows the correspond-

ing SLI code for each newly selected value.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Input the current rigging for the other components in the same way.
– Lattice extension
An SLI code for the lattice extension must be displayed.
• If the truck crane is rigged with additional equipment with lattice exten-
sions, use the Input lattice extension length button (1) to select the current
lattice extension length at the Lattice extension length display (2).
• If a manually inclinable lattice extension is fitted, you must use the Input
lattice extension inclination button (1) to select the current inclination of
the lattice extension at the Lattice extension inclination display (2).
This step is not necessary for hydraulically derricked lattice extensions.
– Outrigger span
• Use the Input outrigger span button (1) to select the current outrigger
span. The LEDs at the Outrigger span display show the selected outrig-
ger span directly, e.g. the outrigger span 8.10 x 7.00 m
You must confirm the displayed SLI code after selecting the current rigging
mode.
Confirm SLI code

The SLI code display (5) will now show the SLI
code for the newly input rigging mode.
To confirm the newly input components (1)
thro (4) you must confirm this SLI code.
• To do this, press the Confirm entry button (6)
once.
The digital value of the SLI code (5) will cease
flashing and the input is confirmed.
The signalling point is now displayed and the
SLI is ready to accept the entered rigging
mode.
Accepting the SLI code

To accept the newly input rigging mode you must accept the SLI code at the
SLI code display (1). Acceptance is performed in the same way as after input-
08.03.2006
ting a new SLI code; à Saving values, p. 12 - 42.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.3.3 Checks before working with the crane
G
Danger of accidents due to incorrectly set SLI!
If the actual rigging mode and the rigging mode indicated by the SLI do not
coincide, the permissible load calculated by the SLI is not the actual permis-
sible load.
This will result in overloading, causing an accident.
• Check whether the rigging mode displayed

by the SLI coincides with the actual rigging
mode:
– The counterweight combination (5)
– The outrigger span (6)
– The length of the lattice extension (2)
(only with additional equipment)
– The angle of the lattice extension (1)
(only with additional equipment)
– The reeving (3)
– The Hoists indicator lamps (4)
(only for additional equipment with auxil-
iary hoist).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The value on the Counterweight display must correspond to the counter-

weight combination which is actually rigged, e.g. 7.6 t.
At the Outrigger span display the LEDs for the outrigger span actually rigged
must light up, e.g. for outrigger span 8.10 x 7.00 m.
The value shown at the Reeving display must correspond to the actual num-
ber of reeved rope lines on the hoist which is to be used to lift the load
(e.g. 9).
If a lattice extension is rigged and an SLI code for operation with lattice
extensions is shown, both the following display will be active and you must
check them:
– The value on the Lattice extension length display must correspond to the
actual length of the rigged lattice extension, e.g. 7.5 m.
– If the truck crane is being operated with a manually inclinable lattice

extension, the value at the Lattice extension inclination display must match
the actually rigged lattice extension inclination, e.g. 20.0°.
The current lattice extension angle is displayed if the truck crane is oper-
ated with a hydraulically derricked lattice extension.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The lamp for the hoist with which the load is to be lifted must light up at the
Hoist indicator lamps.
Lamp I: Must light up when the load is to be lifted with the main
hoist.
Lamp II: Must light up when the load is to be lifted with the
auxiliary hoist.
The corresponding lamp will be activated as soon as a hoisting gear is

switched on (e.g. the auxiliary hoisting gear). If a hoisting gear is switched
on and you switch on a second hoisting gear in addition (e.g. the auxiliary
hoisting gear), then the lamp for the hoisting gear that is connected will
flash (e.g. the lamp I).
• Switch over the display if necessary. To do so, proceed as described in the

following section.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Example of how to switch over the display

In this example, the load is supposed to be lifted with the main hoist. Of the
Hoists indicator lamps however, lamp II for the auxiliary hoist lights up and lamp
I for the main hoist flashes.
Switch over the display as follows:
äå • Switch off both hoists; to do this, press down the rocker button Main hoist on /
off and then the rocker button Auxiliary hoist on / off once.
At the Hoisting gear indicator lamps, both lamps will go out.
ä • Switch the main hoist on; to do this, press down the Main hoist on / off rocker
button once.
Lamp I for the main hoist lights up in the Hoists indicator lamps.
The Reeving display will now show the last reeving that was input for the main
hoisting gear (e.g. 9).
If no reeving was entered for the main hoist, the SLI selects reeving I.
G
Danger of accidents due to incorrectly set SLI!
After switching over the hoist, always check whether the displayed reeving
agrees with the current reeving of the indicated hoist and, if necessary,
enter the current reeving.
In this way you prevent the SLI from making calculations based on an
incorrect reeving, which can lead to the truck crane overloading or over-
turning.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.3.4 During crane work
Continuous Apart from the displays listed in section Checks before working with the crane,
displays p. 12 - 47, the following information is constantly displayed by the SLI:
Shows the current telescoping status.
The displays (1) to (5) show the current

telescoping statuses of the telescopic sections
I to V:
– Fixed lengths are displayed as decimal
values (e.g. 1.00 or 0.51).
– Intermediate and telescoping lengths are
shown as percentages (e.g. 100 or 51).
The display (6) is not used.
The main boom angle in the Current main boom angle display (1).
If the boom is lowered to below a horizontal position, a minus sign (–)
appears on the left side of the display.
The current radius of the boom in the Current radius display (1).
When the lattice extension is mounted and electrically connected, the infor-
mation refers to the lattice extension.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The current lattice extension inclination is shown in the Current lattice exten-
sion inclination display (1) if the truck crane is being operated with hydrauli-
cally derricked lattice extensions.
If the truck crane is being operated with a manually inclinable lattice exten-
sion, the display for the SLI code will show the appropriate lattice extension
inclination.
If the truck crane is being operated without any lattice extensions no display
will be shown here.
The load currently lifted, on the Current load display (4). The load comprises
the payload + the hook block + the lifting gear.
The maximum load which can be lifted at the current rigging mode, on the
Maximum load display (3).
If the maximum load is reduced by the reeving that has been input, max is
displayed flashing alongside the Maximum load display (3).
At the same time the Reeving display (1) shown the unit n=.
In this event you can see the maximum possible load (in accordance with
the Lifting capacity table, without reduction) displayed for approx. 3 seconds
by pressing the Input reeving button (2) once.
The degree of utilization (relationship of the actual load and maximum

load) in the Current degree of utilization display. The display is in the form of
a level indicator (1) with coloured LEDs. The LED that lights up is always the
one for the actual range of the degree of utilisation.
Green: 0 – 90%
Yellow: Approx. 90 -100%
The actual degree of utilisation can also be shown in figures as a percentage

at the Information / Error display; à p. 11 - 95.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Optional displays The information listed in the following section can be shown on the Informa-
tion / Error display. If an error message is reported the Information / Error dis-
play will automatically change to showing the error code (unless input
mode is enabled).
The value currently shown in the Information /

Error display (1) always relates to the button
whose LED is lit (in the case of the Error infor-
mation button, both LEDs light up).
• To call up a value, press the associated but-

ton and it will be displayed:
– Error information button (2)
– Degree of utilisation button (3)
– Oil pressure derricking cylinder lower chamber
button (4)
– Current slewing angle button (5)
– Current overall height button (6)
– Current radius button (7)
– Second level information button (8)
– Third level information button (9)
– Main boom length button (10)
H
If one of the buttons that has no function is pushed, the value in the Informa-
tion / Error display will not change. The green indicator lamp in the button
will not light up.
Further information regarding the respective displays; à Information

displays, p. 11 - 95.
Furthermore you can display the time and date on the Information / Errors
display; à Displaying and entering the time and date, p. 12 - 60.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.3.5 SLI pre-warning and SLI shutdown
There are three warning lamps on the SLI

insert:
1 The two LEDs in the Error information

button, as Error warning lamp
2 The warning lamp SLI early warning
3 The warning lamp SLI shutdown
SLI early warning The SLI early warning indicates that the limits of the permitted working
range have been reached and further crane movements in the same
directed will result in SLI shutdown.
x
The SLI early warning lamp flashes if the actual load is about 90% or more
(depending on the national regulations) of the maximum permissible load.
An intermittent buzzer tone sounds at the same time.
p • You can switch off the buzzer tone after approx. 5 seconds by pressing the
Acknowledge button once. If SLI shutdown occurs again after this, the
buzzer tone will be activated once again.
In the Current degree of utilisation display (1) the yellow LEDs of the level indi-
cator will light up for the range 90 – 100%.
The degree of utilisation can be viewed as a percentage at the Information /

Error display:
• Press the Degree of utilisation button (2) once.

The green LED in the Degree of utilisation button will light up and the Informa-
tion / Error display (1) will show the current degree of utilisation as a percent-
age, e.g. 91%.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
SLI shutdown There are two types of shutdown:

– Shutdown due to overload if about 100% of the maximum permissible
load is exceeded
– Shutdown resulting from an error message
Shutdown due to overload

If you do not stop the current crane movement on receiving an SLI early
warning message and ca. 100% of the maximum permitted load is
exceeded, shutdown due to overload will result. If shutdown occurs due to
overload:
– All crane movements which increase the load moment will be shut down.
– The continuous buzzer tone sounds.
– The SLI shutdown warning lamp lights up.
w
In the SLI monitoring submenu, shutdown due to overload is represented on
the following displays:
– In the Current degree of utilisation display (1) the red LEDs in the level indi-
cator will light up for the range over 100%.
– The numerical value on the Current load display (2) is equal to or greater
than the numerical value on the Maximum load display (1).
p You can switch off the buzzer tone after approx. 5 seconds by pressing the
Acknowledge button once. If SLI shutdown occurs again after this, the buzzer
tone will be activated once again.
You can cancel a shutdown caused by overload by leaving the shutdown

area. To do this, carry out the crane movements described in the table which
follows:
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Crane movements which are Permitted crane movements

switched off
Raise load Lower load
Lower main boom Raise main boom
Extend main boom Retract main boom*)
Lower lattice extension Raise lattice extension
H *) With certain telescoping statuses the SLI also shuts down the retraction
of the boom for safety reasons. In this case leave the shutdown area by
raising the boom or, if this is not possible, set the load down, telescope
to the next fixed length and lift the load again.
p If you have not already switched off the buzzer tone, you must press the
Acknowledge button after leaving the shutdown area.
w The SLI shutdown warning lamp goes out after the shutdown area has been
left.
Shutdown due to an error message
If shutdown occurs due to an error message:

– All crane movements will be shut down.
– The continuous buzzer tone sounds.
w – The SLI shutdown warning lamp lights up.
r – The red LEDs in the Error information button will light up.
You can view the error codes for all outstanding errors at the Information /
Error display; à
p. 12 - 57.
p You can switch off the buzzer tone by pressing the Acknowledge button once.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Error message If an error is detected, the following display will be shown:
– Both red LEDs in the Error information button

(2) are on.
– The Information / Error display (1) will show
an error code, e.g. 1138.
– If the error causes a shutdown, the SLI shut-
down warning lamp (3) will light up.
G
You must cease operating the crane immediately as soon as any error mes-
sage is displayed.
Repairs to the SLI may only be carried out by trained, qualified personnel.
H
If you press the Error information button when no error message is outstand-
ing the Information / Error display will be cleared down.
r Press the Error information button once.
– If still no error code was shown, an error code will now appear in the Infor-
mation / Error display, e.g. 1138.
– If an error code was shown and several errors are outstanding, all error
codes can be displayed in sequence by repeatedly pressing the Error infor-
mation membrane button.
The following example shows what the various figures of the error code
mean.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Example of an error display:

The 4-digit error code comprises three different numbers.
From left to right these are: a single digit number (e.g. 1), a double digit number
(e.g. 13) and a single digit number (e.g. 8). The three numbers stand for:
The error group: e.g. 1
The component in
this error group e.g. 13
The type of error e.g. 8
The error codes can be evaluated using tables that show error messages, possible
causes and remedies; à Error messages on the SLI insert, p. 14 - 34.
Error messages In addition to SLI shutdown, some error messages are indicated by the
with additional respective display flashing. The following displays flash:
optical display
Either
– The Current telescoping displays (1) to (4).
or
– The Actual load display (5) and
– The Current radius display (6).
or
– The Current telescoping displays (1) to (4) and
– The Actual load display (5) and
– The Current radius display (6).
H
Flashing values mean that the SLI can no longer safely calculate these val-
ues. The error message occurs if the SLI detects deviations between mea-
sured and calculated values that are too great or the values from the SLI and
the crane control deviate from each other (e.g. after a manual entry of a tele-
scoping status on the Crane control display). Countermeasures; à
Table of
error codes, p. 14 - 35, Error message 3033.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
SLI override
G
Danger of accidents if SLI is overridden!
The SLI must never be overridden.
It is prohibited to operate the crane if the safe load indicator is switched off,
overridden, out of service or defective.
G
Danger of accidents in the event of a defective SLI!
The SLI may be overridden only in an emergency, when it is absolutely
necessary in order to make the condition of the truck crane safe when it is
defective. In such circumstances, do not undertake any movement that
would increase the load moment (extending telescopic sections, lowering
the boom).
If the SLI is faulty, set down the load immediately and stop operating the
crane!
The SLI shutdown system can be bypassed (deactivated) using the Override
key-operated switch.
• Insert the key into the key-operated switch.
• Turn the key to the right.
• Hold the key in this position.
The SLI is overridden as long as you hold the key in this position.
When the SLI is overridden, the Error / warning / Information display reads
error message 8022.
S
Danger of accidents by inadvertently switching on the Override key switch
Always remove the key from the Override key switch after overriding. The
key must be removed from the key-operated switch while the crane is in
operation. Otherwise there is a danger of the SLI being overridden acciden-
tally during crane operation.
H
The SLI can also be overridden together with the lifting limit switch. See the
instructions in the chapter Overriding the lifting limit switch shutdown,
p. 11 - 132.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.3.6 Displaying and entering the time and date
You can also display the time and date on the

Information / Errors display (1) and set them
there.
To display the time and date, you need to have

the f g h and i buttons on the numerical
pad.
You additionally require the Input mode n and

Confirm entry v buttons to set the time and
date.
Display • Press the required button f g h or i once to display the time and date.
The buttons are assigned as follows.
f Display of the time in hours and minutes, e.g. eight minutes past
nine.
g Display of the seconds, e.g. 14 seconds
h Display of the day and month, e.g. 10th May
i Display of the year, e.g. 2004
Input You can abort the following input procedure at any time by pressing the
Acknowledge button p.
Let us assume that you would like to enter the time as 9:08 and 14 seconds,
and the date as 10 May 2004.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• Using the button &, V, ( or ), call up the display that you wish to
change and enter the new value in the following way:
– Entering the time
• Press the key combination n + f. The digit 0 flashes on the Information /
Error display.
• Use the numerical pad to enter the time in the order of hour, minutes.
The number for the minutes must always consist of two digits. Press,
for example, the digits 9, 0 and 8 one after each other for eight past
nine.
– Entering seconds
• Press the key combination n + g. The digit 0 flashes on the Information /
Error display.
• Use the numerical pad to enter the seconds. Press the digits 1 and 4, for
example, for 14 seconds.
– Entering the day and month

• Press the key combination n +h. The digit 0 flashes on the Information /
Error display.
• Use the numerical pad to first enter the day and then the month. The
number for the month must always consist of two digits. Press the dig-
its 1, 0, 0 and 5, for example, for 10th May.
– Entering the year

• Press the key combination n + i. The digit 0 flashes on the Information
/ Error display.
• Use the numerical pad to enter the year. Press the digits 2, 0, 0 and 4,
for example, for the year 2004.
• Confirm the entry. To do this, press the Confirm entry button v once.
The display no longer flashes and the new entry is displayed, with the hour
/ minute and day / month separated by a full stop.
Illogical values (77 seconds for example) are not saved and the display con-
tinues to flash.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4 Crane work with the main boom
12.4.1 External influences while working with the crane
Horizontal The horizontal alignment of the truck crane can change due to the varying
alignment load on the ground during crane work.
G
Danger of accidents due to the truck crane not being horizontally aligned!
The SLI calculates the radius using the length and angle of the main boom.
If the truck crane is not in a horizontal position, the actual radius will change
and the crane may overturn.
• Immediately before starting work with the crane, check the horizontal
alignment of the truck crane on display (1); à p. 13 - 73.
Also check the horizontal alignment during crane work. Due to deformation
of the frame, the horizontal alignment can change by up to 2° when the
superstructure is turned from the 0° or 180° position.
If the truck crane does not return to the horizontal position after turning back
to the 0° or 180° position, you must immediately determine the cause and
eliminate it and realign the crane if necessary. Pay attention to the position
of the superstructure when doing so; à Aligning the truck crane on outriggers
horizontally, p. 13 - 77.
Safe distances When working with the crane, maintain adequate distances between all
parts of the truck crane including the load and objects on the site as well as
all persons on the site.
Pay particular attention to objects that pose a direct risk (e.g. scaffolding or
gas containers).
Keep a safe distance away from electrical lines; à Safe distance from electrical
lines, p. 13 - 14.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Monitoring the When there is an anemometer attached to the main boom tip (additional
wind speed with- equipment); à Monitoring the wind speed with an anemometer, p. 12 - 65.
out an anemo-
meter Strong winds lead to the truck crane being overloaded.
If necessary, find out about the forecasted wind speed from the relevant
weather station. The permitted wind speed for a fully loaded truck crane can
be found in the Lifting capacity table.
The following table provides an overview of the wind strengths, wind

speeds and their effects:
.
Wind strength Wind speed Effect of wind in

inland
Beaufort Designation m/s km/h
scale
0 Calm 0 to 0.2 1 Calm, smoke rises vertically
Direction of wind shown by
1 Light draught 0.3 to 1.5 1 to 5 smoke but not by weather
vanes.
Wind felt on face, leaves rus-
2 Light breeze 1.6 to 3.3 6 to 11 tle, weather vane moved by
wind.
Leaves and twigs in constant
Gentle
3 3.4 to 5.4 12 to 19 motion, wind extends light
breeze
flag.
Wind raises dust and loose
Moderate
4 5.5 to 7.9 20 to 28 paper, moves twigs and
breeze
small branches.
Small trees begin to sway.
5 Fresh breeze 8.0 to 10.7 29 to 38 Crested wavelets
form on lakes.
Large branches in motion,
telegraph lines whistle,
6 Strong wind 10.8 to 13.8 39 to 49
umbrellas used with diffi-
culty.
Whole trees in motion,
Moderate
7 13.9 to 17.1 50 to 61 restrictions when walking
gale
against wind.
Breaks twigs off trees,
8 Fresh gale 17.2 to 20.7 62 to 74 impedes progress when
walking outside.
Slight structural damage
9 Gale 20.8 to 24.4 75 to 88 (chimney pots and slates
removed).
08.03.2006
Trees uprooted, consider-

10 Full gale 24.5 to 28.4 89 to 102 able structural damage
occurs.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Monitoring the Strong winds lead to the truck crane being overloaded. The permitted wind
wind speed with speed for a fully loaded truck crane can be found in the Lifting capacity table.
an anemometer If an anemometer is fitted as additional equipment, whether on the main
boom head or on the lattice extension head, you can continuously monitor
the wind speed at the Anemometer display whilst operating the crane.
• To do this, open the main menu or the Telescoping submenu.

played.
If necessary to open the Telescoping submenu press the button alongside the
% symbol. The Anemometer display (1) can be found at about the same place
in both menus.
The Anemometer display (1) indicates the current wind speed. The display is
divided into three areas; the bar in the diagram has a different colour in each
of these areas:
Green: 0 to 6 m/s
Yellow: 6 to 12 m/s
Red: over 12 m/s
• Cease operating the crane immediately when the wind speed shown
exceeds the maximum permitted wind speed as shown in the Lifting
capacity table, and take heed of all the instructions given in the section If the
maximum permitted wind speed has been exceeded; à p. 12 - 66.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
If the maximum If the wind speed exceeds the value given in the Lifting capacity table, observe
permitted wind all given in this section.
speed has been
exceeded
G
Danger of accidents due to high wind speeds!
If the wind speed exceeds the maximum listed in the Lifting capacity table
you must cease operating the crane and set the truck crane to the rigging
mode shown in the following table. This applies also when the wind surface
of the load is smaller than the permissible specific wind surface Aperm;
à Permissible wind load, p. 12 - 67.
There is no automatic shutdown.
If the maximum permissible wind speed as shown in the Lifting capacity

table is exceeded, proceed as follows:
At wind speeds up to 20 m/s At wind speeds more than 20 m/s
Set down the load. Set down the load.
Slew the superstructure so that the Fully retract the main boom.
main boom creates as little wind
resistance as possible. Rotate the superstructure to the
front (180°- position) or to the back
(0°- position) and mechanically lock
the superstructure.
Set the main boom down on the
boom rest if possible.
H
Procedure when the permissible wind speed is exceeded during operation
with the lattice extension or boom extension; à
Operating instructions lattice
extension.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Permissible wind The permitted specific wind surface of the load (Aper) during crane work is
load Aper = 1 m2 per tonne lifting capacity:
The wind surface depends on the aerodynamic force coefficient c f of the
load. When c f -values are larger than 1.2 and the wind surface is larger than
the permissible specific wind surface (Aper), the wind surface of the load
must be reduced proportionally. Consultation with the supervisor is
required (c f -values to DIN 1055 part 4).
Calculation formula:
1, 2 ⋅ A per
v red = v × ------------------------
-
c f ⋅ A′
vred reduced permitted wind speed in m/sec

v permitted wind speed in m/sec according to the Lifting capacity table
cf actual aerodynamic force coefficient
A’ actual specific wind surface of the load in m2/t
Aper permitted specific wind surface of the load in m2/t
Earthing the load
B
Danger of accidents due to electric shocks!
Earth the load before crane operation
– Near strong transmitters (radio transmitters, radio stations, etc.)
– Near high-frequency switching stations
– If a thunder storm is forecasted
The load can become electrostatically charged even if the truck crane is
earthed; à Earthing of the truck crane, p. 13 - 13. This applies in particular if
a hook block is used with synthetic sheaves or non-conducting lifting tackle
(e.g. synthetic or manila hemp rope).
To prevent the electrostatic charging of the load, you need:

– A conductor in the form of a metal rod inserted in the ground
(ca. 2.0 m length),
– An electrically conductive cable (minimum cross section 16 mm2)
– An electrically conductive metal rod with an insulated handle, used to
touch the load
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
B
Ensure that the connection between the load and the ground is a perfect,
electrically conductive connection.
• Connect one end of the cable to the metal rod that is to be inserted into
the ground. Hammer the metal rod at least 1.5 m into the ground. Moisten
the soil around the metal rod for better conductivity.
• Connect the other end of the cable to the metal rod with the insulated han-
dle.
B
Hold the metal rod by the insulated handle only.
• Hold the metal rod by the insulated handle. Use the metal rod to touch the
load before touching the load with your hand.
12.4.2 Permissible slewing ranges and working positions for crane

work
Four ranges are allowed for crane operation according to the lifting capacity
table:
– The 360° slewing range
– The 0° to the rear working position
– The free-on-wheels working position
– For rigging work, the 180° to the front position
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
360° slewing • Support the truck crane with the required outrigger span as shown in the
range Lifting capacity table.
• On the SLI, enter an SLI code for the slewing range 360° according to the
Lifting capacity table; à Entering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.
• Rig the maximum counterweight combination for the rigged outrigger
span. Some outrigger spans do not permit slewing with a rigged counter-
weight; à
Slewing with the rigged counterweight, p. 13 - 118.
• If the truck crane is free on wheels, note the following additional informa-
tion; à If the truck crane is free on wheels, p. 12 - 70.
Working position • Support the truck crane with the required outrigger span as shown in the
0° rearwards Lifting capacity table.
• Slew the superstructure to the rear in the 0° position. For automatic stop-
page at 0°; à Slewing to 0° or 180°, p. 12 - 87.
• Switch off the slewing gear; à p. 12 - 90.
• Enter an SLI code for the 0° to the rear working position according to the
lifting capacity table; à
Entering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.
The SLI code is only adopted when the slewing gear has been switched
off and the superstructure is in the 0° position.
H
All slewing operations are disabled if an SLI code is entered for the 0° to the
rear working position. An SLI shutdown is triggered when you switch on the
slewing gear. To acknowledge the shutdown, you must:
– either shut down the slewing gear
– or, if slewing is permissible with the rigged counterweight
( à p. 13 - 118), set down the load and enter an SLI code for the 360°
slewing range.
• Observe the additional information if the truck crane is free on wheels;
à If the truck crane is free on wheels, p. 12 - 70.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
If the truck crane is • Check that the truck crane is rigged for free on wheels operation;
free on wheels à CHECKLIST: When truck crane is rigged, p. 12 - 1.
When working with a free on wheels truck crane
– Before crane work in the 360° slewing range and
– After crane work in the 0° rearwards working position
also be sure to observe the following:
• Before slewing, check how much counterweight is rigged and unrig the
counterweight if necessary before slewing the superstructure; à Slewing
with the rigged counterweight, p. 13 - 118.
• With the 4.3 t counterweight rigged, bring the main boom to a radius per-
missible for the working range (not less than 3.0 m), before slewing the
superstructure.
G
For a free on wheels truck crane, the superstructure may only be rotated if
there is a maximum of 4.3 t counterweight on the turntable and the radius
permitted in the working area is maintained according to the Lifting capacity
table (at least 3.0 m).
This prevents the truck crane from tipping to the rear.
G
Risk of overturning with free on wheels truck crane if SLI is overridden!
If the SLI code for working free on wheels with 4.3 t rigged counterweight
is entered, the SLI because of considerations of safety at the rear will pre-
vent those crane movements that would call for a working radius of less
than 3.0 m working radius.
If you override the SLI and reduce the working radius further, the truck
crane will overturn.
180° forward set- The same prerequisites and methods apply for this rigging position as for
up position the working position 0° backward; à
p. 12 - 69. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.3 Main hoist
You can work on the main boom, and the lattice extension if fitted as addi-
tional equipment, using the hoist rope of the main hoist.
G
Danger of accidents due to accidental operation of a hoist!
Always switch off the hoist that is not in use.
You are not allowed to turn the drum if the hook block is unreeved and you
have completely reeled in the hoist rope.
– Slack rope will occur if the hoist rope is unintentionally turned in lower-
ing direction. This causes rope loops to form on the hoist drum which can
lead to load slipping and destruction of the hoist rope.
– If the hoist rope is accidentally twisted in the lifting direction, the cut-out
point of the lowering limit switch will change so that fewer than the
required safety turns are available.
G
Danger of accidents due to loads being lifted at a slant!
Loads can bend the main boom, resulting in the hoist rope no longer being
aligned vertically. Compensate the deflection by raising in order to lift the
load vertically. In this way, you prevent the load dragging and injuring help-
ers, or falling at an angle into the hoist rope. Inform all helpers about this
situation.
G
Danger due to a slack rope!
Use only hook blocks and lifting gear with sufficient minimum safe working
load in accordance with the Lifting capacity tables for the reefing and boom
length. This will avoid the development of slack rope at large heights when
lifting with no load, which can lead to load slipping during subsequent lifts.
! In the Crane control display, in the submenu Settings / Displays, the operating
hours for the hoist can be displayed; à Display the operating hours,
p. 12 - 145.
Switching on the After turning on the ignition, all power units are switched off and the indi-
main hoist cator lamps in the corresponding rocker buttons light up dimly.
• Check that the auxiliary hoist (additional equipment) is switched off and
is therefore secured against unintentional operation:
å – The indicator lamp in the Auxiliary hoist on / off rocker button must only
light up dimly.
2 On the Crane control display's main menu, only the Auxiliary hoist on / off indi-
cator lamp may light up red.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
ä • Switch on the main hoist.

Additionally, press the Main hoist on / off rocker button down once. The
indicator lamp in the rocker button lights up brightly.
3 When the main hoist is switched on, the indicator lamp Main hoist on / off
lights up in green in the main menu of the Crane control display.
When the main hoist is switched on, lamp I will be activated at the Hoists
indicator lamps.
If you want to lift the load with the main hoist, the I lamp for the main hoist
must light.
• If the I lamp flashes, switch over the indicator lamps; à Example of how to
switch over the display, p. 12 - 50.
The value on the Reeving display is only valid for the hoist whose lamp lights
up at the Hoists position lights. When switching on a hoist, the value shown
will be the value last entered for this hoist.
Lifting and You can adjust the sensitivity of the control lever to the operating condi-
lowering tions; àSetting characteristic curves for the control lever, p. 12 - 136.
To lift the hoist: Pull the right-hand control lever to the rear.
To lower the hoist: Push the right-hand control lever forward.
In the right-hand control lever there is a hoist drum synchro (1) for the main
hoist. You will notice an impulse on the hoist drum synchro when the hoist
drum rotates.
You can regulate the speed of the main hoist by moving the control lever
and changing the engine speed using the accelerator.
9 You can also limit the maximum hoist speed manually in the submenu
Power unit speed; à
p. 12 - 138.
Â You can set a constant engine speed with the Constant engine speed rocker
button; àp. 12 - 140.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
For a higher speed, you can also switch on high-speed mode. High-speed
mode is only switched on when it is permitted for the current degree of util-
isation.
H
High-speed mode is only operational when the holding brake is set. Other-
à
wise the rocker button relates to the Steering function; Switching on the
high speed function, p. 12 - 132.
High-speed mode for the main and auxiliary hoists is switched on simulta-
neously using the Hoists high-speed mode rocker button in the right-hand con-
trol lever.
To switch Press rocker button to the left (inwards).

on briefly: High-speed mode will be switched on for as long as the
rocker button is pressed.
Continuous Press rocker button once to the right (outwards), high-
operation: speed mode will be switched on.
To switch off, press the rocker button once to the left or
right.
: When high-speed mode is switched on, the indicator lamp Hoists high-speed
mode lights up.
H
The speed of the hoists will only be clearly increased by switching to high-
speed mode if you have extended the control lever by more than 70%.
You can observe the rope running on the drum using the mirror. The hoist
mirror must be folded out before crane operation; à
Folding mirrors in and
out and adjusting them, p. 13 - 24.
G
Never leave the crane cab while a load is suspended on the hook. Never
turn the diesel engine off while a load is suspended. Always keep your
hands near the control levers while a load is suspended. This enables you
to take corrective action at all times.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
A lifting limit switch on the boom head deactivates the Raise main hoist, raise
# auxiliary hoist and lower boom and Telescoping out movements.
The Lifting limit switch shutdown warning lamp lights up when the switching
point is reached. Move out of the shutdown area by Lowering or Retracting.
G
Always leave the shutdown area after the lifting limit switch has been shut-
down. The shutdown must not be overridden during crane operation and
while a load is suspended on the hook. If, when the shutdown is overrid-
den, you continue to pull the hook block against the boom, the hoist rope
can tear, resulting in the load falling to the ground.
Further information about shutdown of the lifting limit switch; à Lifting

limit switch, p. 11 - 132.
A lowering limit switch on the hoist prevents the hoist rope from being
completely reeled off. It deactivates the Lowering function when five turns
are still left on the drum. For safety reasons, these five turns must remain
reeled on the drum.
Drive out of the shutdown area by performing the Lifting movement.
G
Danger of accidents due to defective lowering limit switch!
Do not carry out crane operation if the lowering limit switch is
– Damaged
– Out of service or
– Misadjusted.
Too much hoist rope would be reeled off and the required safety turns
would no longer be there.
H
If the hoist rope has been changed, the switching point of the lowering limit
switch must be readjusted. Five turns must be left on the drum if the hoist
rope is unreeled up to the point of shutdown; à Maintenance manual.
H
The hoist rope is stiff at low temperatures. A weight must be added if the
repeatedly reeved hook block cannot be lowered.
You must operate the hoist slowly when reeling in the rope, as stiff rope is
difficult to wind.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching off the If the main hoist is not required, it should be switched off to avoid uninten-
main hoist tional use.
ä • Press the Main hoist on / off rocker button down once.

The main hoist is switched off when the indicator lamp in the rocker but-
ton lights up dimly.
3 When the main hoist is switched off, the Main hoist on / off indicator lamp in
the main menu of the Crane control display lights up in red.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.4 Auxiliary hoist
With additional equipment you can work with the hoist rope of the auxiliary
hoist on the main boom and on the lattice extension (additional equipment).
G
Danger of accidents when working with auxiliary hoist!
Before working with the auxiliary hoist, read and follow all the safety
instructions in the Main hoist, p. 12 - 71 section.
When working with the auxiliary hoist, all the safety instructions for work-
ing with the main hoist also apply, along with the information in this sec-
tion.
G
Danger of accidents from damaged hoist rope!
If you reef the auxiliary hoist rope in addition to the main hoist rope, refer
to the following crane operating instructions so that the hoist ropes do not
rub against each other and that the auxiliary hoist rope does not come into
contact with the rotating edge plate for the main hoist. Derrick the main
boom to approx. 20° before lifting a load.
This avoids the risk of damaging the hoist rope and causing immediate or
subsequent slippage when operating the crane.
auxiliary hoist cator lamps in the corresponding rocker buttons light up dimly.
Check that the main hoist is switched off and is therefore secured against
unintentional operation:
ä – The indicator lamp in the Main hoist on / off rocker button must only light
up dimly.
3 – In the main menu of the Crane control display, the Main hoist on / off indica-
tor lamp must light up red.
å • Switch on the auxiliary hoist.

Press the Auxiliary hoist on / off rocker button down once. The indicator
lamp in the rocker button lights up brightly.
2 When the auxiliary hoist is switched on, the Auxiliary hoist on / off indicator
lamp in the main menu of the Crane control display lights up green.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Lamp II of the Hoists indicator lamps is activated when the auxiliary hoist is
switched on.
If you want to lift the load with the auxiliary hoist, lamp II for the auxiliary
hoist must light up.
If the II lamp flashes, switch over the indicator lamps; à Example of how to
switch over the display, p. 12 - 50.
The value on the Reeving display is only valid for the hoist whose lamp lights
up at the Hoists position lights.
Lifting and You can adjust the sensitivity of the control lever to the operating condi-
lowering tions;à Setting characteristic curves for the control lever, p. 12 - 136.
To lift the hoist: Pull the left-hand control lever backwards.

To lower the hoist: Push the left-hand control lever forward.
You may regulate the auxiliary hoist speed by moving the control lever and
by changing the engine speed using the accelerator.
In the left-hand control lever there is a hoist drum synchro (1) for the auxil-
iary hoist. You will notice an impulse on the hoist drum synchro when the
hoist drum rotates.
You may regulate the auxiliary hoist speed by moving the control lever and
by changing the engine speed using the accelerator.
H
Work with the auxiliary hoist is carried out in the same way as for the main
hoist (high-speed, set power unit speed, etc.); à p. 12 - 71.
Switching off the If the auxiliary hoist is not required, it should be switched off to avoid unin-
auxiliary hoist tentional use.
å • Press the Auxiliary hoist on / off rocker button down once.

The auxiliary hoist is switched off when the indicator lamp in the rocker
switch lights up dimly.
2 When the auxiliary hoist is switched off, the Auxiliary hoist on / off indicator
08.03.2006
lamp in the main menu off the Crane control display lights up red.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.5 Derricking gear
The main boom can be tilted between -3° and +82°. The angle of the main
boom in relation to the horizontal position can be adjusted by raising and
lowering the main boom.
During crane operation, and depending on the load size and the main boom
length, the SLI shuts down lowering as soon as the working range given in
the Lifting capacity table is left.
For lowering outside of the working range, under approx. 10 - 15°, there are
various rigging tables. When a rigging table is available for the current rig-
ging mode of the truck crane (dependent on the telescoping, counterweight,
outrigger span and slewing range), the SLI will switch to this rigging table
automatically. The rigging tables cannot be entered manually via SLI codes
(rigging tables available à Lifting capacity tables).
With a corresponding rigging mode, the boom can be lowered to an angle
less than 10 - 15° up to a boom length of 28.8 m .
To derrick from angles less than 10 - 15°, the same rigging tables apply.
Procedure for lowering the boom to the horizontal; àp. 12 - 81.
G
Danger of overturning while lifting loads!
Lifting loads by raising the boom is strictly prohibited as the SLI does not
function when this is done.
H
Raising the boom is a movement which decreases the load moment and is
not deactivated by the SLI. However, raising the boom can cause the truck
crane to overturn if excessively heavy loads are lifted.
! In the display Crane control in the Settings / displays submenu, the operating
hours of the derricking gear can be shown; à Display the operating hours,
p. 12 - 145.
derricking gear cator lamps in the corresponding rocker buttons light up dimly.
• Switch on the derricking gear.

U Additionally, press the Derricking gear on / off rocker button down once.
The indicator lamp in the rocker button lights up brightly.
If a control lever is assigned more than one function (e.g. derricking gear
and telescoping mechanism), all other power units which are assigned the
same movement of the control lever are switched off; àControl lever con-
figuration, p. 11 - 14.
08.03.2006
( When the derricking gear is switched on, the Derricking gear on / off indicator
lamp in the Main menu on the Crane control display lights up green.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Raising and lower- You can adjust the sensitivity of the control lever to the operating condi-
ing tions;à Setting characteristic curves for the control lever, p. 12 - 136.
To lower the boom: Push the right-hand control lever to the right.
To raise the boom: Push the right-hand control lever to the left.
You can regulate the speed of the derricking gear by moving the control
lever and changing the engine speed using the accelerator.
H
The maximum derricking speed is limited automatically. The maximum
derricking speed (= length of main boom + length of lattice extension) is
reduced as the system length is increased. If you now reduce the working
radius (e.g. by retracting the telescoping), the derricking speed is automati-
cally increased again.
9 You can set the maximum speed of the derricking gear for working with the
main boom and lattice extension on the Crane control display; à
Adjusting
power unit speeds, p. 12 - 138.
å You can set a constant engine speed with the Constant engine speed rocker
button; à p. 12 - 140.
For a higher speed, you can also switch on high-speed mode. When operat-
ing with a lattice extension or boom extension (both additional equipment),
high-speed mode is blocked for derricking.
H
The function for high-speed mode of the derricking gear and telescoping
mechanism is active only when the holding brake is set. Otherwise the
à
rocker button controls the function Separate steering; Switching on the high
speed function, p. 12 - 132.
High-speed mode for the derricking gear and telescoping mechanism is

switched on simultaneously using the Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism
high-speed mode rocker button in the left-hand control lever.
To switch off, press the rocker button once to the left or
right.
; When high-speed mode is switched on, the indicator lamp High-speed mode
08.03.2006
derricking gear / telescoping mechanism lights up.
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
If the fully retracted boom is in the steepest position and you would like to
lower the boom without load, you can engage the high-speed mode so that
the derricking gear can more quickly overcome dead centre.
Further information about high-speed mode; à p. 12 - 132.
Switching off the If the derricking gear is not required, it should be switched off to avoid unin-
derricking gear tentional use.
U • Press the Derricking gear on / off rocker button down once.

The derricking gear is switched off when the indicator lamp in the rocker
button lights up dimly.
( When the derricking gear is switched off, the Derricking gear on / off indicator
lamp in the main menu of the Crane control display lights up red.
H
If the right-hand control lever is multiply assigned, the derricking gear is
also switched off when another power unit is switched on that is assigned
the same movement of the control lever; à Control lever configuration,
p. 11 - 14.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Lowering the For lowering outside the working range, which according to the rigging
main boom to mode will be under approx. 10 - 15°, there are various rigging tables. It is not
horizontal posi- possible to enter the rigging tables manually via SLI codes. When a rigging
tion table is available for the current rigging mode of the truck crane (dependent
on the telescoping, counterweight, outrigger span and slewing range), the
SLI will switch to this rigging table automatically.
All the rigging modes for which rigging tables are available can be seen in
the Lifting capacity tables.
• Set down the load.
G
Danger of overturning when the SLI is overridden!
Never override the SLI when it shuts down the lowering process. If the SLI
shuts down the lowering, the truck crane is in a condition where the main
may not be lowered beyond the working range (e.g. the load or working
radius is too large).
If you continue to lower with the SLI overridden, the truck crane will over-
turn.
• Lower the main boom.

If there are no rigging tables for the current rigging mode, the SLI will switch
off lowering at approx. 10 - 15°. In this case, you must bring the crane into
a rigging mode for which a rigging table is available (e.g. retracting, setting
down load, another superstructure position).
The exact rigging modes for which rigging tables are available can be seen
in the Lifting capacity tables.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.6 Slewing gear
G
Danger of overturning when slewing with a rigged counterweight
Always check before slewing whether slewing is permitted in the truck
crane's current rigging mode (counterweight, outrigger span, working
radius).
Correct the rigging mode if necessary; à
Slewing with the rigged counter-
weight, p. 13 - 118.
! In the display Crane control in the Settings / displays submenu, the operating
hours of the slewing gear can be shown; à Display the operating hours,
p. 12 - 145.
Switching on the After switching on the ignition, all power units are switched off and the indi-
slewing gear cator lamps in the corresponding rocker button on the control consoles light
up dimly.
t The slewing gear brake is locked and the indicator lamp Slewing gear brake
lights up.
ç • Switch on the slewing gear.

To do this, press the rocker button down once.
1 When the slewing gear is switched on, the Slewing gear on / off indicator lamp
in the main menu off the Crane control display lights up green.
t When the slewing gear is switched on the slewing gear brake will be
released and the indicator lamp Slewing gear brake will go out.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Prerequisites Before slewing the superstructure, the following requirements should be

satisfied:
0 • Switch off the houselock (additional equipment) if applicable;

• Check whether slewing is permissible for a free on wheels truck crane
with the rigged counterweight and an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m;
à Slewing with the rigged counterweight, p. 13 - 118.
• Check whether the counterweight-lifting cylinders are retracted.
Slewing The rigging mode (counterweight, outrigger span) is monitored by the SLI
code. When the truck crane may not be slewed with the rigging mode which
is entered, slewing will be blocked ( à Slewing with the rigged counterweight,
p. 13 - 118).
Slewing is also blocked if an SLI code has been input for the 0° rearwards
working position.
G
Danger of overturning when turning with an overridden SLI!
Do not override the SLI before rotating the superstructure.
When the SLI is overridden, the SLI input and the corresponding rigging
mode will not be monitored. This would mean that slewing was unblocked
even when it was not permitted, and the truck crane would overturn.
G
Danger of accidents due to a rotating superstructure!
There is a danger of being crushed by rotating machine sections.
Use the horn before slewing the superstructure and check that no persons
are in the slewing range of the superstructure.
In this way you avoid the possibility of crushing persons between the rotat-
ing superstructure and fixed objects or between the superstructure and the
carrier.
S
Danger of the boom buckling!
Accelerate slewing speed only to such a degree that the load does not
sway.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
You can adjust the sensitivity of the control lever to the operating condi-
tions;à Setting characteristic curves for the control lever, p. 12 - 136.
Turning to the left: Push the left-hand control lever to the left.
Turning to the right: Push the left-hand control lever to the right.
The further you move the control lever to the right or left, the more quickly
the slewing gear slews.
H
If you let go of the control lever or move it to the middle position, the slew-
ing movement slowly comes to a stop; the slewing movement does not
automatically brake; à Braking the slewing movement, p. 12 - 88.
Furthermore, you can change the slewing speed by:

– Changing the engine speed with the accelerator
– Setting a constant engine speed; à
p. 12 - 140.
H
The maximum slewing speed is limited automatically. As the working
radius increases, the maximum hoist speed is decreased.
If you now reduce the radius (e.g. by raising) the slewing speed will auto-
matically be increased again.
9 You can also limit the maximum slewing speed manually in the submenu
Power unit speed;à p. 12 - 138.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Reading the slew- The current superstructure position can be found in the Superstructure lock
ing angle submenu at the Current slewing angle display.
played.
• Press the button next to the symbol (1).
The Crane control display changes to the Counterweight submenu.
The Current slewing angle display (1) shows the current position of the super-
structure in degrees. Positive or negative values are shown depending on
the position of the superstructure. The following diagram illustrates the
principle.
A displayed angle of 0° means that the super-

structure is slewed to the rear.
Complete rotation out of this working position
is divided into two semicircles:
– Angles in the right-hand semicircle are dis-

played as positive numbers (0° to +180.0°)
– Angles in the left-hand semicircle are dis-
played as negative numbers (0° to –179.9°).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Slewing to 0° or You can automatically stop the slewing movement to slewing angles 0° and
180° 180° e.g. in order to rig the counterweight or set down the main boom.
played.
• Press the button next to the symbol (1).
The Crane control display changes to the Counterweight submenu.
After switching on the ignition, the Stop at 0° / 180° function is switched off.
• Press the button next to the symbol (1) once.
The dot turns green, and the Stop at 0° / 180° function is switched on.
• Slew to slewing angle 0° or 180°.

When the slewing angle of 0° or 180° has been achieved:
– the slewing movement is stopped automatically,
– the slewing gear brake is engaged,
– both arrows (1) are shown.
If you have stopped too late, an arrow (1) indicates in which direction you
need to slew in order to achieve the slewing angle.
Slewing is blocked until you switch off the Stop at 0° / 180° function.
• Press the button next to the symbol (1) once.
The dot turns black, and the Stop at 0° / 180° function is switched off.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Braking the slew- The slewing movement can only be braked with the Slewing gear service brake
ing movement pedal.
S
Danger of the boom buckling!
Brake the slewing speed only to such a degree that the load does not sway.
Only depress the Slewing gear service brake pedal fully in case of danger (to
make an emergency stop).
On no account should you switch the slewing gear off to brake it; only
switch the slewing gear off when the superstructure has stopped rotating.
You can brake the slewing movement of the superstructure by actuating the
Slewing gear service brake pedal.
You can regulate the braking force to any level. The further the pedal is
depressed, the greater the braking force.
Monitoring the oil temperature in the slewing gear brake

If the Error / warning message warning lamp (1) lights up and the diode next
to the Warning message submenu button (2) flashes on the crane control insert,
the reason could be that the oil temperature in the slewing gear brake is too
high.
Å • To do this, press the Warning message submenu button once.

The Luffing jib submenu will open. A symbol for monitoring the slewing
gear brake oil temperature ( à Warning message submenu, p. 12 - 147) can be
found here.
• Check if the background of the Slewing gear brake temperature symbol (1) is
displayed in red.
If this symbol is displayed, the maximum permissible slewing gear brake oil
temperature has been exceeded.
• In this case, cease crane operation as soon as possible and allow the slew-
ing gear brake to cool down.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
G
Danger of accidents from overheating slewing gear brake!
When there is a warning message, always check in the Warning message sub-
menu if the slewing gear brake temperature is too high. If it is, stop crane
operation at the next opportunity.
This prevents the slewing gear brake from overheating and causing the
brake plates to be damaged. When the slewing gear brake has overheated,
its braking power is reduced.
Only begin working with the crane again when this warning message is no
longer displayed.
When the oil temperature has once again reached the permissible value, the
background of the Slewing gear brake temperature symbol (1) will change to
grey.
ö • Exit the Warning message submenu, and press Exit submenu / input mode
once.
H
If, when exiting the submenu, there are other warning messages, the LED
next to the Warning message button submenu will light up. If the temperature
of the slewing gear brake begins to rise again or if another, new warning
message appears, the LED will start to flash again.
Further information for calling up and displaying errors; à Warning message

submenu, p. 12 - 147.
Tracking the slew- The superstructure is able to adjust itself freely to external forces (e.g. wind
ing gear or working with a second crane) when the slewing gear has free movement.
ç • Switch on the slewing gear so that the slewing gear holding brake is
released; à Switching on the slewing gear, p. 12 - 83.
• Move the left-hand control lever to the central position.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching off the If the slewing gear is not required, it should be switched off to avoid unin-
slewing gear tentional use. It may be the case, however, that the slewing gear should
have free movement; à p. 12 - 89.
S
Risk of damage to the boom!
Always brake the slewing movement with the Slewing gear service brake pedal
until it has come to a standstill before you switch off the slewing gear.
When it is switched off, the slewing gear brake will be applied automati-
cally.
In this way, you avoid sideward force being operated on the boom due to
heavy retardation or swinging load.
ç • Press the Slewing gear on / off rocker button down once.

The slewing gear is switched off when the indicator lamp in the rocker
button lights up dimly.
1 When the slewing gear is switched off, the Slewing gear on / off indicator lamp
in the main menu of the Crane control display lights up red.
t
When the slewing gear is switched off, the slewing gear brake will be set.
When the slewing gear brake is set mechanically, the Slewing gear brake indi-
cator lamp in the Crane control insert will light up.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.7 Telescoping mechanism
Structure of the All procedures which you initiate for the operation of the telescoping mech-
chapter anism are then carried out by the crane control and monitored. In the pro-
cess, you receive acknowledgements, can follow the procedure and, at the
right time, initiate further procedures.
For this reason it is important that you are not only familiar with the opera-
tion, display, and control instruments of the telescoping mechanism, but
also its functioning. This way you can comprehend the procedures which
the crane control carries out in the boom while you move the control lever;
you will become familiar with the displays on the Crane control display more
quickly. Therefore, the chapter is divided into the following sections:
– Description of the functioning

– Main boom fixed length, intermediate length, telescoping length
– Telescoping
– Notes on the telescoping sequence
– Function of the control lever
– Example of the procedure for telescoping
(other sections are referred to in this section)
H
The previous section and the sections following it belong together and
describe the actual telescoping process. Before you proceed according to
this section for the first time, you should know the basic information from
the previous sections.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Description of The main boom consists of the basic section of the boom, four telescopic
functioning sections and a single-level telescoping cylinder. In the Telescoping submenu
the Crane control display shows the telescope diagram in the lower area, the
main boom in section with the telescoping cylinder. Using a similar illustra-
tion, the functioning is explained in the following section.
In the diagram the main boom is completely retracted and the telescoping
cylinder is located in the foot section of the telescopic section I.
All telescopic sections (I to V) are equipped with locking pins (1) on their
exterior sides, which are extended out of the telescopic sections with
springs (9). If a bore hole (2) on the telescopic section above it aligns with
the corresponding locking pin, the spring pushes the locking pin in at that
point and the telescopic section is locked. All telescopic sections can be
locked into the corresponding bore holes (2) at three different points (on the
fixed lengths).
Levers are fixed to the locking pins of all telescopic sections of which the
brackets (6) reach inward into the foot sections of the telescopic sections.
The brackets reach the same distance into the foot sections in all telescopic
sections.
The piston rod (7) of the telescoping cylinder is fastened to the main boom
basic section. If the telescoping cylinder is telescoped, its head runs (8)
through the foot sections of telescopic sections (I to V). If the head is located
at a locking point (in the illustration the head is located at the locking point
of the telescopic section I), then the mechanism (3) engages in the bracket
(6) within the telescoping cylinder.
08.03.2006
If the telescoping cylinder is located at the locking point, the bore holes (4)
on the inner sides of the telescopic sections also align with the locking pins
(5) of the telescoping cylinder.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Telescoping cylinders and telescopic sections can be locked and unlocked

at all locking points. In order to telescope, the telescoping cylinder must be
locked with the corresponding telescopic section and the telescopic section
must be unlocked.
The locking pins (5) are pushed into the bores

(4) of the telescopic section by spring force in
order to lock the telescoping cylinder.
To unlock the telescopic section, a hydraulic
cylinder (2) is extended.
The mechanism (3) transfers this movement
to the brackets (6) and retracts the locking pins
(1) against the spring force.
After telescoping, the telescopic section is re-

locked in the reversed sequence as for unlock-
ing.
For unlocking the telescoping cylinder, the
locking pins are hydraulically retracted against
the spring force.
H
The locking pins of the telescoping cylinder and of the mechanism are
moved hydraulically. This can result in retardations of 2 to 3 seconds.
H
A hydraulic / mechanical switch and the crane control prevent a telescopic
section from being unlocked at the same time as the telescoping cylinder. A
telescopic section can only be unlocked if the telescoping cylinder is locked
and vice versa.
Main boom fixed Main boom fixed length

length, intermedi-
All telescoping statuses are called main boom fixed lengths if all telescopic
ate length, tele-
sections are locked. Higher load bearing capacities are only permitted if all
scoping length
telescopic sections are locked.
In the case of the GMK 4080-1, only those telescoping statuses with the
highest lifting capacities are permitted as main boom fixed lengths because
of the large number of possible locked telescoping status for the same
boom length.
Released fixed lengths ( à Lifting capacity table). The lifting capacities for the
fixed lengths of the main boom are automatically monitored by the SLI.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Main boom intermediate length

All telescoping statuses are usually called main boom fixed lengths if all
telescopic sections are locked.
In unlocked telescoping status, the whole load effects the telescoping cylin-
der. This means that the permitted lifting capacities are sometimes far less
than those for the main boom fixed lengths.
In the case of the GMK 4080-1 all locked telescoping statuses which do not
have the highest load bearing capacity with their main boom length, are
also treated as main boom intermediate lengths. Therefore, higher loads
are not permitted for these locked telescoping statuses.
The lifting capacity values for the intermediate lengths of the main boom
are automatically monitored by the SLI.
Telescope the main boom to the required length before lifting the load.
Telescoping with a load is not possible for the lifting capacities which are
specified in the lifting capacity table for main boom intermediate lengths.
Main boom telescoping length

A main boom telescoping length means that the main boom is at an inter-
mediate length and telescoped with a load.
The lifting capacity values for the telescoping length of the main boom are
in the same range as the lifting capacity values for the main boom interme-
diate lengths which are monitored by the SLI.
The loads stated in the Lifting capacity table can only be telescoped when:
– The main boom is at the corresponding angle.
– The sliders between the telescopic sections are kept lubricated as pre-
scribed.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Telescoping The position of the telescopic sections, i.e. which telescopic section has
been telescoped how far, is called the telescoping. The current telescoping
is displayed:
– On the SLI and
– On the Crane control display
This section deals with the Current telescoping display on the SLI. The display
of the telescoping on the Crane control display is described from section
Example of the procedure for telescoping onwards;à p. 12 - 101.
Display of the main boom fixed lengths

For the main boom fixed lengths the current telescoping is displayed as a
decimal value with two places after the decimal point (e.g. 1.00 or 0.50).
For all telescopic sections, only percentages of 0%, 50% and 100% can be
used as main boom fixed lengths.
H
Not all locked telescoping statuses are available as main boom fixed
lengths; à p. 12 - 93. The approved fixed lengths can be found in the Lift-
ing capacity table.
Example: Displaying the telescoping for main boom fixed lengths
1 Telescopic section I 0% = fixed length

2 Telescopic section II 50% = fixed length
3 Telescopic section III 50% = fixed length
4 Telescopic section IV 50% = fixed length
5 Telescopic section V 100% = fixed length
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The increased lifting capacities for the main boom fixed lengths are only
released when:
– All telescopic sections are telescoped to a fixed length and
– All telescopic sections are locked and
– All telescopic sections are set down with the locking pins on the telescopic
section above. No telescopic section may be raised from the telescoping
cylinder.
As soon as any one of these conditions is not met, the lifting capacities for
the main boom intermediate lengths or main boom telescoping lengths
apply. The Current telescoping display will change accordingly.
Display of main boom intermediate lengths and telescoping lengths

Main boom intermediate and main boom telescoping lengths will be shown
as percentages (e.g. 100 or 50).
Percentage values of 0% to 100% can apply as main boom intermediate
lengths and main boom telescoping lengths for all telescopic sections.
H
Only one section at a time can be at an intermediate length (because it is
only possible for one telescopic section to be unlocked).
The intermediate lengths which can be used can be found in the Lifting
capacity table.
Example: Telescope status display for main boom intermediate lengths and main
boom telescoping lengths.
1 Telescopic section I 0% = fixed length

2 Telescopic section II 35% = intermediate
length
3 Telescopic section III 100% = fixed length
4 Telescopic section IV 100% = fixed length
5 Telescopic section V 100% = fixed length 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
The maximum permitted lifting capacity also changes constantly on the
Maximum load display.
Whenever the extending of a telescopic section would lead to a telescoping
which is not permitted according to the Lifting capacity table, the SLI will
switch this extension operation off as soon as the telescopic section moves.
Notes on the The telescopic sections can only be telescoped individually, one after the
telescoping other.
sequence When extending you must always extend the telescopic section with the
highest numbering first, then the telescopic section with the next lower
numbering, etc. (e.g. V, IV, III, II, I).
Retracting is always carried out in the reversed order as for extending.
Check before tele- The crane control calculates the displayed telescoping from the current sta-
scoping for the tus of the telescoping mechanism and the locking and unlocking processes
first time which have occurred and been saved.
Normally, the crane control recognises differences between current and dis-
played telescoping statuses and displays a corresponding error message;
à Telescoping mechanism error messages, p. 14 - 31.
If values are deleted due to an abnormal occurrence (e.g. struck by lighten-

ing), the crane control can no longer calculate the current telescoping and
no error message will be issued.
S
Risk of damage to the telescoping mechanism!
After switching on the ignition before the first telescoping, always check
that the current telescope status is displayed on the Crane control display.
Telescoping can cause damage to the telescoping mechanism if, after an
disturbance, the crane control is unable to correctly calculate the current
telescope status and no error message is issued.
• After turning on the ignition and before starting to telescope, always

check whether the Crane control display corresponds to the current tele-
scoping.
If the current telescoping is not correctly displayed, enter the current tele-
scoping; à Entering telescoping values after emergency operation, p. 14 - 60.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching on After turning on the ignition, all power units are switched off and the indi-
telescoping mech- cator lamps in the corresponding rocker buttons light up dimly.
anism
• Switch on the telescoping mechanism.

T Additionally, press the Telescoping mechanism on / off rocker button down
once.
If a control lever is assigned more than one function (e.g. derricking gear
and telescoping mechanism), all other power units which are assigned the
same movement of the control lever are switched off.
& When the telescoping mechanism is switched on, the Telescoping mechanism
on / off indicator lamp in the Main menu of the Crane control display lights up
green.
! In the Crane control display, in the submenu Settings / displays, the operating
hours of the telescoping mechanism can be shown; àDisplay the operating
hours, p. 12 - 145.
Control lever This section only describes the function of the control lever and provides
function general information for telescoping. Before telescoping, you must meet cer-
tain requirements. For this, read the section Example of the procedure for tele-
scoping, p. 12 - 101.
H
The SLI deactivates the extending function depending on the size of the load
and angle of the main boom (angle between the main boom and the hori-
zontal position). Ensure that the boom has been sufficiently raised before
the main boom is extended.
G
.
Danger of accidents due to unexpected crane movements!

If a control lever is assigned more than one function, check whether the
Telescoping mechanism on / off indicator lamp is lit up (at the control console
in the main menu or the Telescoping submenu) before moving the control
lever for telescoping. In this way you prevent accidents through unex-
pected derricking of the main boom.
Depending on the type of the truck crane, the telescoping mechanism func-
tion is either on the right- or left-hand control lever. These two control levers
have different movements for telescoping ( à Control lever configuration,
p. 11 - 14).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
You can adjust the sensitivity of the control lever to the operating condi-
tions;à Setting characteristic curves for the control lever, p. 12 - 136.
With telescopic extension on the right-hand side
To extend: Push the control lever to the right.

To retract: Push the control lever to the left.
With telescopic extension on the left-hand side
To extend: Push the control lever forwards.

To retract: Pull the control lever backwards.
H
For some telescoping statuses the SLI also shuts down the retracting func-
tion for safety reasons. In this case leave the shutdown area by raising the
boom or, if this is not possible, set the load down, telescope to the next fixed
length and lift the load again.
Telescoping will only be started after the control lever is extended if the
arrow for the corresponding telescoping direction lights up in green on the
Release telescoping display, e.g. the arrow (1) for extension.
If the arrow lights up in red, extending is blocked in this direction. There are
different causes for this (e.g. the telescopic section is in the final position,
shutdown, lifting limit switch, malfunctions, etc.).
You can regulate the telescoping speed by moving the control lever and
changing the engine speed using the accelerator.
9 You can set the maximum speed of the telescoping mechanism on the Crane
control display;à Adjusting power unit speeds, p. 12 - 138.
Â You can set a constant engine speed using the Constant engine speed rocker
button.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
For a higher speed, you can also switch on high-speed mode.
H
The function for high-speed mode of the derricking gear and telescoping
mechanism is active only when the holding brake is set. Otherwise the
rocker button controls the function Separate steering; à
Switching on the high
speed function, p. 12 - 132.
High-speed mode for the derricking gear and telescoping mechanism is

switched on simultaneously using the Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism
high-speed mode rocker button in the left-hand control lever.
To switch off, press the rocker button once to the left or right.
; When high-speed mode is switched on, the indicator lamp High-speed mode
derricking gear / telescoping mechanism lights up.
H
The distance between the hook block and the boom head also changes dur-
ing telescoping. Reel off the hoist rope when retracting and reel it on when
extending the telescoping.
S
Risk of damage to the hoist rope!
Slack rope will form if the hook block is allowed to touch the ground while
the boom is being retracted. This causes rope loops to form on the hoist
drum which can lead to load slipping and damage to the hoist rope.
H
The telescoping function is switched off if the hook block reaches the lifting
limit switch during extending.
Switching off the If the telescoping mechanism is not required, it should be switched off to
telescoping mech- avoid unintentional use.
anism
T Press the Telescoping mechanism on / off rocker button up once.

The telescoping mechanism is switched off when the indicator lamp in the
rocker button lights up dimly.
If the right-hand control lever is multiply assigned, the telescoping mech-

anism is also switched off when another power unit is switched on that is
assigned the same movement of the control lever; à Control lever configu-
ration, p. 11 - 14.
08.03.2006
& When the telescoping mechanism is switched off, the Telescoping mechanism
on / off indicator lamp in the Main menu and in the Telescoping submenu on
the Crane control display light up red.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Example of the The procedures for telescoping with semi-automatic control are described
procedure for tele- in the following sections.
scoping You can also telescope to fixed lengths with the automatic control, in the
course of which the crane control regulates the procedures described here;
à Telescoping in fully automatic mode, p. 12 - 124.
For a better overview, this section shows you the sequence of an entire tele-
scoping process.
H
This section and the sections referred to here presuppose that you are famil-
iar with the functioning of the telescope system; à
Telescoping mechanism,
p. 12 - 91.
The entire example cannot apply to all telescoping procedures, since the
start and final position of the telescoping mechanism is different for each
procedure. Nevertheless, a part of the sequence of the telescoping process
described here applies to all telescoping procedures.
Read the sequence for this example and follow the cross-references in the
sections with the descriptions of what to do. At the end, these sections
always take up the following example. You thus get an overview of all nec-
essary steps and can implement these for your specific telescoping process.
The following start and end states apply to this example:

– All telescopic sections are retracted and locked.
– The telescoping cylinder is locked with telescopic section V.
– The telescopic sections II and III are to be extended to 100%.
– Telescopic section I is to be extended to an intermediate length of 37%.
H
The lengths given in the following sections and illustrations are purely sam-
ple values, and may therefore deviate from the current display.
Sequence of a telescoping process

1. Check the telescope status, the position of the telescoping cylinder and
the locking pin;à Checking the initial position, p. 12 - 102.
2. Unlock the telescoping cylinder; à Unlocking the telescopic section,

p. 12 - 115.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
3. Move the telescoping cylinder into the telescopic section which is to be

telescoped and lock it there (in our example, telescopic section III);
à Extending / retracting the telescoping cylinder, p. 12 - 110.
à Locking the telescoping cylinder, p. 12 - 111.
4. Unlock telescopic section for telescoping; à Unlocking the telescopic sec-

tion, p. 12 - 115.
5. Telescope the telescopic section to fixed length and lock it; à Locking
the telescopic section, p. 12 - 119.
6. To telescope further telescopic sections (in our example, telescopic sec-

tion II would be the next one) repeat points 2 to 5 until all required tele-
scopic sections have been extended to their required fixed length.
7. If necessary, extend the last telescopic section (in our example, tele-
scopic section I) to its required intermediate length; à Telescoping tele-
scopic section to an intermediate length, p. 12 - 123.
Checking the ini- Before telescoping the main boom, check the following statuses:
tial position – The current telescoping
(how far the telescopic sections are telescoped)
– The position of the telescoping cylinder
(which foot section the telescoping cylinder is in)
– The position of the locking pins
(whether the telescopic sections and cylinders are locked or unlocked)
All information required is in the Telescoping submenu. This submenu can be
opened from the main menu in the Crane control display.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
played.
$ • In the main menu, press the button next to the Telescoping submenu sym-
bol.
The Crane control display switches to the Telescoping submenu.
If the telescoping mechanism is blocked, no symbols for the operation will

be available in the Telescoping submenu and the Current telescoping mechanism
status symbol will be shown together with an error code; àTelescoping
mechanism error messages, p. 14 - 31.
Checking the current telescoping

On the Current telescoping display (1), the cur-
rent telescoping is shown for each telescopic
section as a percentage.
The Telescope diagram (2) shows the boom in

section from above and displays all the tele-
scopic sections in their current extended
lengths.
In our example, the display would show the start position as it appears in the
illustration. The main boom is fully retracted and the Current telescoping display
shows all telescopic sections at 0 (%). The Telescope diagram shows all the tele-
scopic sections retracted.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Checking the position of the telescoping cylinder

The current telescoping is now known; the next thing you should do is check
in which telescopic section the head of the telescoping cylinder is located.
H
Definition: If "The telescoping cylinder is in foot section II" appears in the
following chapters, this means that "the head" of the telescoping cylinder is
in the foot section.
The Extended length of telescoping cylinder dis-

play (3) indicates how far the telescoping cyl-
inder is extended, in millimetres (mm) or in
feet (ft).
If the telescoping cylinder is in the foot section
of a telescopic section:
– This telescopic section is shown in the Tele-
scoping cylinder in foot section display (2).
– The number (4) for this telescopic section is
shown in green in the Current telescoping dis-
play.
If the telescoping cylinder is at a distance of
less than approx. 1 m from the locking point,
the Telescoping cylinder on the locking point dis-
play (1) is also shown:
The arrows in this display provide information on how close the telescoping
cylinder is to the locking point.
If the telescoping cylinder is at a distance of less than about 1 metre from
the locking point, firstly two yellow arrows are shown.
– If the arrows point downwards, the telescoping cylinder is behind the
locking point.
– If the arrows point upwards, the telescoping cylinder is behind the locking
point.
If the telescoping cylinder reaches the proximity switch in front of or behind

the locking point, only one yellow arrow is displayed. The telescoping cyl-
inder is now just in front of the locking point.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
If the telescoping cylinder is located directly at the locking point, two green
arrows are displayed that point to one another.
In this example, the displays are presented in the same way as they are shown in
the illustration at the beginning of this section.
"Initial position" is defined as the following: The telescoping cylinder in tele-
scopic section V is locked, meaning that the head of the telescoping cylinder is
there. The value 5 is then displayed in the Telescoping cylinder in foot section dis-
play and the number 5 is highlighted in green on the Current telescoping display.
Since the telescoping cylinder is locked, and therefore located at the locking
point, the Telescoping cylinder at locking point display shows both green arrows.
The length currently extended for the locking point for telescopic section V is
shown; à p. 14 - 58.
Checking the position of the locking pins

If you know in which telescopic section the telescoping cylinder is located,
check the positions of the locking pins as the last initial position.
The Current locking status display (1) shows the

current status of the locking pins, which is
detected by proximity switches.
The locking pins (2) for the telescopic sections
are shown above.
The locking pins (3) for the telescoping cylin-
der are shown below.
The different positions of the locking pins are
shown directly and are also highlighted in
colour:
Red: Unlocked end position reached
Green: Locked end position reached
Yellow: Neither of the two end positions
reached
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The status of the locking pins can also be checked with the following sym-
bols:
* – Select telescopic section unlock (6)
+ – Unlock telescoping cylinder selection (4) and
, – Select lock (5)
H
The following information applies to checks after the ignition has been
turned on when the telescoping system is at a standstill. If locking or unlock-
ing has already been selected during crane operation, the lamps may flash
or have a different background. These statuses are described in later sec-
tions; à Unlocking the telescoping cylinder, p. 12 - 107.
On the symbols for selecting, the background for the symbol whose indi-
cated function has been carried out is yellow; the following possibilities
arise:
, – If the telescoping cylinder and the telescopic section are locked, the Select
lock symbol is highlighted in yellow.
+* In this case, the two symbols Select telescoping cylinder unlock and Select tele-
scopic section unlock are highlighted in grey.
+ – If the telescoping cylinder is unlocked, the Select telescoping cylinder unlock

symbol is highlighted in yellow.
,* In this case, the two symbols Select lock and Select telescopic section unlock
are highlighted in grey.
* – If the telescopic section is unlocked, the Select telescopic section unlock sym-
bol is highlighted in yellow.
,+ In this case, the two symbols Select lock and Select telescopic cylinder unlock
are highlighted in grey.
Another way of reading the locking status is with the Telescope diagram dis-
play.
Here the locking pins (1) of the telescoping cylinders are:
– Shown in green in the Locked end position.
– There is no representation with the Unlocked end position.
With the locking cylinders for the telescopic sections (2):
– Green indicates the Locked end position.
– There is no representation with the Unlocked end position.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
In this example all telescopic sections and the telescoping cylinder are locked for
the starting position. The Current locking status displays and Telescope diagram
would correspond to the illustration at the beginning of this section.
In the Current locking status display, all locking pins would be shown extended in
green.
The Telescope diagram would display all telescopic sections retracted. The lock-
ing pins on the telescoping cylinder would be green; no locking pins would be
shown on the telescopic sections.
,
The background of the Select lock symbol would be in yellow. The backgrounds
of the Select telescoping cylinder lock and Select telescopic section unlock symbols
would be displayed in grey.
Current situation: - Telescoping cylinder locked in foot section V -
The next objective: - Unlocking the telescoping cylinder -
Unlocking the Before you can move the telescoping cylinder from one telescopic section
telescoping cylin- into another telescopic section, you must unlock the telescoping cylinder.
der
The locking pins on the telescoping cylinder retract when unlocking.
Initial positions for unlocking the telescoping cylinder:

Unlocking can be selected at any time. The crane control reacts differently,
depending on:
, – Whether the telescopic section is also locked; in this case the background
of the Select lock symbol is in yellow, or
* – Whether the telescopic section is unlocked; in this case the background of

the Select unlock telescopic section symbol is in yellow.
H
For safety reasons, simultaneous unlocking of both telescoping cylinder
and telescopic section is firstly blocked by a hydraulic / mechanical switch
and secondly is not permitted by the crane control.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Unlocking the telescoping cylinder
& • Check whether the telescoping mechanism is switched on. The Telescoping
mechanism on / off indicator lamp must light up in green.
+ • Select the unlocking of the telescoping cylinder. To do this, press the but-
ton next to the Unlock telescoping cylinder selection symbol.
+ When the telescopic section is locked, the crane control selects the unlock-
ing of the telescoping cylinder as its next step and the Select telescoping
cylinder unlock symbol flashes.
* If the telescopic section is unlocked, the crane control selects the locking of
the telescopic section as its next step and the Select telescopic section lock sym-
bol flashes.
• To unlock, move the control lever for the telescoping mechanism in the
directions Retract or Extend.
The unlocking process can be followed in the Current telescoping display:
– If the telescopic section is unlocked, the telescopic section is locked first.
As soon as the locking pins (1) leave the Unlocked end position, they are
shown in yellow.
When the locking pins have reached the Locked end position, they are
shown in green.
– If the telescopic section is locked, the telescoping cylinder is immediately

unlocked. As soon as the locking pins (2) leave the Locked end position,
they are shown in yellow.
When the locking pins have reached the Unlocked end position, they are
shown in red.
+ The Unlock telescoping cylinder unlock symbol is displayed on a yellow back-

ground after completing the unlocking process.
*, With the Select telescopic section unlock and Select lock symbols, the back-
grounds are in grey.
If you continue to move the control lever after unlocking, the telescoping
cylinder moves immediately in the corresponding direction.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
If the locking process is not finished after about 10 seconds (Telescoping
cylinder unlocked symbol continues to flash), you cannot retract the locking
pins because they are under load.
You can use the Telescoping cylinder at locking point displays to see if you need
to retract or extend the telescoping cylinder to relieve the load.
When both green arrows point towards each other, the telescoping cylinder
must be retracted.
When there is a yellow arrow pointing upwards, the telescoping cylinder
must be extended.
S
Risk of damage to the boom system!
If extending and retracting the telescoping cylinder several times does not
cause unlocking, you must not move the telescoping cylinder any further
against the stop.
If extending and retracting several times does not unlock the telescoping
cylinder:
, – Mechanically lock the telescoping cylinder. To do this, press the button

next to the Select lock symbol once and move the control lever.
– Restart the unlocking procedure. To do this, press the button next to the
Select telescoping cylinder unlock symbol once and move the control lever.
+ In our example the telescoping cylinder should be unlocked in this step. After
unlocking, the background for the Select telescoping cylinder unlock symbol is
now in yellow.
With the Select telescopic section unlock and Select lock symbols, the backgrounds
are shown in grey.
In the Current locking status display the locking pin for the telescoping cylinder
would now be retracted and shown in red, and the locking pins of the telescopic
section would be shown in green.
The next objective: - Moving the telescoping cylinder into foot section III -
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Extending / In order to telescope a telescopic section, you must first move the telescop-
retracting the tele- ing cylinder into the foot section of the corresponding telescopic section.
scoping cylinder
Initial position for moving the telescoping cylinder:
For extending / retracting the telescoping cylinder, the following applies:
* – The telescopic section extended last must be locked. The background for
the Select telescopic section unlock symbol must be in grey.
+ – The lock between the telescoping cylinder and telescopic section must be
released. The background for the Select telescoping cylinder unlock symbol
must be in yellow.
Extending / retracting the telescoping cylinder

• To extend / retract the unlocked telescoping cylinder, move the control
lever for the telescoping mechanism in the corresponding direction.
Extending: forward (or to the right with additional equipment)
Retracting: backward (or to the left with additional equipment)
While you are moving the telescoping cylinder, the Extended length of tele-
scoping cylinder display changes continuously (e.g. L: 7 326 mm.
In this way you can watch the extending / retracting on the status display.
The Telescope diagram also changes continuously.
Our example now shows the unlocked telescopic cylinder in telescopic section V.
The next step is to extend telescopic section III.
Therefore we should retract the unlocked telescoping cylinder, thus selecting the
telescoping cylinder lock, as described in the next section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Locking the tele-

scoping cylinder
When locking, the locking pins on the telescoping cylinder are extended.
The telescoping cylinder is only locked in the desired telescopic section if

you select locking at the right moment.
When to select locking depends on the following:
– Whether the telescoping cylinder is to be locked in the next foot section
that is reached, or
– Whether the telescoping cylinder must first pass through other foot sec-
tions.
Locking the telescoping cylinder in the first foot section reached
H
In the following description it is assumed that the telescoping cylinder is still
in the foot section into which it was locked and that, before unlocking, it will
pass through an extended telescopic section (e.g. IV).
If the telescoping cylinder is passed through foot sections that are next to
each other; à p. 12 - 112.
In the Telescoping cylinder in foot section display, the number designating the
telescopic section whose foot section contains the telescoping cylinder will
flash (e.g. 3 for telescopic section III).
• Move the telescoping cylinder in the required direction and observe the
Telescoping cylinder in foot section display.
As soon as the display goes out (no number is shown any more), you can
select locking.
, • To do this, press the button next to the Select lock symbol.

The background of the symbol flashes, showing that the crane control
confirms the selection.
H
The following actions run parallel so you do not need to interrupt the exten-
sion / retraction of the telescoping cylinder.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
As soon as the telescoping cylinder reaches the display area (approx. 1 m in

front of the foot section), the corresponding number flashes on the Telescop-
ing cylinder in foot section display (e.g. 4 for the telescopic section IV).
At the same time the Telescoping cylinder at locking point display becomes
active. It first shows two yellow arrows; the crane control now reduces the
telescoping speed prescribed by the control lever.
Shortly later only one yellow arrow is displayed and finally the two arrows
pointing towards each other are displayed in green.
Now the locking point is reached and the crane control initiates the locking
process owing to the selection made. The process can be followed in the
Current locking status display:
1. The locking pins are extended. As soon as the locking pins (1) leave the
Unlocked end position, they are shown in yellow.
2. As soon as the locking pins are in the Locked end position, they are shown
in green.
, After the locking process, the Lock selection symbol is displayed on a yellow
background and
+ the Unlock telescoping cylinder symbol is displayed on a grey background.
• End the telescoping process. Move the control lever to the middle posi-
tion.
This concludes the locking procedure for the telescoping cylinder after the
extension of a telescopic section.
Passing the telescoping cylinder through other foot sections before lock-
ing.
H
In the following description, it is assumed that the telescoping cylinder is
still in the foot section into which it was locked and that it will be passed
through several foot sections that are next to each other to lock it.
If the telescoping cylinder is passed through an extended telescopic section
to the next foot section;à p. 12 - 111.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
telescopic section whose foot section contains the telescoping cylinder will
flash (e.g. 5 for telescopic section V).
• Move the telescoping cylinder in the required direction and observe the
Telescoping cylinder in foot section display.
As soon as the telescoping cylinder retracts into a different foot section, the
number for this foot section flashes on the display.
• Wait until the number for the telescopic section in the foot section of
which you want to lock the telescoping cylinder flashes in the Telescoping
cylinder in foot section display (e.g. 3 for telescopic section III).
In the Telescoping cylinder on the locking point display, there is now a yellow
arrow pointing in the direction in which you are moving the telescoping cyl-
inder.
You must select locking:
– As long as the number for the correct telescopic section is still flashing on
the Telescoping cylinder in foot section display and
– Before the yellow arrow points in the other direction.
H
If you have gone past the locking point, the yellow arrow in the Telescoping
cylinder on the locking point display already points in the other direction (first
both the green arrows are briefly displayed).
In this case, stop extending / retracting (move control lever to central posi-
tion) and move the telescoping cylinder in the opposite direction until the
number for the desired telescopic section flashes again on the Telescoping
cylinder in foot section display.
Now select locking again, before the yellow arrow changes direction.

H
The following actions run parallel, so you do not need to interrupt the
extending / retracting of the telescoping cylinder.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
When the telescoping cylinder reaches the locking point, the Telescoping cyl-
inder on the locking point display shows both green arrows pointing towards
one another.
Now the crane control initiates the locking process owing to the selection
made. The process can be followed in the Current locking status display:
1. The locking pins (1) are extended. As soon as the locking pins leave the
in green.
background and
telescopic section to which the telescoping cylinder is locked will flash (e.g.
3 for telescopic section III).
tion.
This concludes the locking procedure for the telescoping cylinder after
working through the adjacent foot sections.
In our example the telescopic sections in the initial position were all fully
retracted and the telescoping cylinder was in the foot section of telescopic section
V and was unlocked.
The telescoping cylinder should be moved from foot section IV directly to foot
section III and be locked there.
Refer to the section "Passing the telescoping cylinder through other foot sections
before locking.". All displays in this section fit our example. You can take this sec-
tion as an example.
New end state: - Telescoping cylinder locked in foot section III -
The next objective: - Unlocking telescopic section III -
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Unlocking the Before you can telescope a telescopic section, you have to unlock it. You can
telescopic section only unlock the telescopic section in which the telescoping cylinder is
locked.
When unlocking, the locking pins of this telescopic section are retracted
from the mechanism on the telescoping cylinder.
Initial positions for unlocking the telescopic section:

Unlocking can be selected at any time. The crane control reacts differently,
depending on:
, – Whether the telescoping cylinder is also locked; in this case the back-
ground of the Select lock symbol is in yellow, or
+ – Whether the telescoping cylinder is unlocked; in this case the background

of the Select telescoping cylinder unlock symbol is in yellow.
H
For safety reasons, simultaneous unlocking of both telescoping cylinder
and telescopic section is firstly blocked by a hydraulic / mechanical switch
and secondly is not permitted by the crane control.
Unlocking the telescopic section
& • Check whether the telescoping mechanism is switched on. The Telescoping
mechanism on / off indicator lamp must light up in green.
* • Select the function for unlocking the telescopic section. To do this, press
the button next to the Select telescopic section unlock symbol.
* If the telescoping cylinder is locked, the crane control selects the unlocking
of the telescopic section as its next step and the Select telescopic section unlock
symbol flashes.
+ When the telescoping cylinder is unlocked, the crane control selects the
locking of the telescoping cylinder as its next step and the Select lock symbol
flashes.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• To unlock, move the control lever for the telescoping mechanism in the
directions Retract or Extend.
The unlocking process can be followed in the Current telescoping display:
– If the telescoping cylinder is unlocked, the telescoping cylinder is locked
first. As soon as the locking pins (1) leave the Unlocked end position, they
are shown in yellow.
When the locking pins have reached the Locked end position, they are
shown in green.
– If the telescoping cylinder is locked, the telescopic section is immediately

unlocked. As soon as the locking pins (2) leave the Locked end position,
they are shown in yellow.
When the locking pins have reached the Unlocked end position, they are
shown in red.
* When the unlocking process is finished, the background of the Select tele-
scopic section unlock is presented in yellow.
+, With the Select telescoping cylinder unlock and Select lock symbols, the back-
grounds are in grey.
If, after unlocking, you continue to move the control lever, the telescopic
section moves immediately in the corresponding direction.
H
If the locking process is not finished after about 10 seconds (Telescopic section
unlocked symbol continues to flash), you cannot retract the locking pins
because they are under load.
To relieve the locking pins, you can carefully extend and retract the tele-
scoping cylinder a little.
S
Risk of damage to the boom system!
If extending and retracting the telescoping cylinder several times does not
cause unlocking, you must not move the telescoping cylinder any further
against the stop.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
If extending and retracting several times does not unlock the telescoping
cylinder:
, • Lock the telescopic section. To do this, press the button next to the Select
lock symbol once and move the control lever.
* • Restart the unlocking procedure. To do this, press the button next to the
Select telescopic section unlock symbol once and move the control lever.
* The unlocking procedure applies to all telescoping processes, so in our example,

the background of the Select telescopic section unlock symbol has now also been
presented in yellow.
In the Telescope diagram display, the locking pins on telescopic section III will
disappear and the telescoping cylinder will be shown locked in telescopic section
III (green pins).
Current end state: - Telescopic section unlocked -
Next objective: - Extending telescopic section III to 100% -
Telescoping the When the telescopic section is unlocked, it can be telescoped.

telescopic section
Initial position for telescoping
The following initial position applies for telescoping:
* – The telescopic section which the telescoping cylinder is in must be

unlocked. The background for the Select telescopic section unlock symbol
must be shown in yellow.
+ – The telescoping cylinder must be locked. The background for the Select
telescoping cylinder unlock symbol must be in grey.
• To telescope the telescoping mechanism, extend in the corresponding

direction.
Extending: forward (or to the right with additional equipment)
Retracting: backward (or to the left with additional equipment)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
While you are extending the telescopic section, the Current telescoping dis-
play changes constantly. This allows you to view the current telescopic
extension length as a percentage (e.g. 35% for telescopic section III).
The Telescope diagram also changes continuously. This means that you can
see how much of the distance to be covered has been covered, especially
with longer telescoping processes.
In our example telescopic section III is now unlocked. The telescopic section
should be locked at 100%.
Therefore we would have to telescope the telescopic sections and thus select
locking as is described in the next section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Locking the tele- If you want to lock a telescopic section, you must first telescope it to a fixed
scopic section length. The locking points are there.
When unlocking the telescopic section the mechanism on the head of the
telescoping cylinder has its locking pins retracted.
When locking, the mechanism gives way again and the locking pins are
extended due to the spring force.
H
Read the sections concerning the fixed, intermediate, and telescoping
lengths, the telescoping sequence and the functioning of the control lever
at the beginning of this chapter and observe the notes for telescoping;
à Telescoping mechanism, p. 12 - 91.
The unlocked telescopic section is only locked in the desired telescopic sec-
tion if you select to lock at the right moment.
When to select locking depends on,
– Whether the telescopic section should be locked at the first fixed length
reached or
– Whether the telescoping cylinder should be locked on the fixed length
after that.
Locking the telescopic section at the first fixed length reached

This section applies if for example you extend a fully retracted telescopic
section to the middle fixed length and wish to lock it there.
If the telescopic section should be completely telescoped; à
p. 12 - 121.
• Telescope the telescopic section in the required direction.

If the initial position is an intermediate length, locking can be selected
immediately.
If the initial position is a fixed length (e.g. 0% with telescopic section III), you
must postpone selection until the value in the Current telescoping display has
changed by 2% so that the telescopic section is not immediately locked in
the initial position.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
, • To select, press the button next to the Select lock symbol.

H
The following actions run parallel, so you do not need to interrupt the
extending / retracting of the telescoping cylinder.
Shortly before reaching the first fixed length (e.g. 50%) the crane control
reduces the speed prescribed with the control lever due to the selection
made, and initiates the locking process.
The process can be followed in the Current locking status display:

in green.
, • Move the control lever until the Select lock symbol stops flashing. The sym-
bol only stops flashing when the locking process is completely finished
and the telescopic section has been set down.
background and
* the background of the Unlock telescopic section symbol is shown in grey.
S
Risk of damage to the telescoping cylinder!
Move the control lever until the Select lock symbol stops flashing.
The locking process is only finished and the telescopic section is only prop-
erly attached to the telescopic section above it when the background of the
symbol is shown in yellow.
In this way you prevent the load from affecting the telescoping cylinder
when the crane is in operation, and enable the release of a load for fixed
lengths.
tion.
This concludes the locking of the telescopic section at the fixed length
reached first.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Moving the telescopic section through other fixed lengths before locking
This applies if you want to telescope a telescopic section from e.g. 0% to
100% or vice versa.
If the telescopic section is to be locked to the middle fixed length;
à p. 12 - 119.
• Telescope the telescopic section in the required direction.

Follow the telescoping process on the Current telescoping display; the dis-
played value changes constantly (e.g. 55% with telescopic section III).
• Wait until the first fixed length for this telescopic section is exceeded (e.g.
up to 55%, the first fixed length is at 50%).
Now you can select locking.

H
The following steps run parallel; leave the control lever in this position.
Shortly before reaching the fixed length, the crane control reduces the
speed prescribed with the control lever due to the selection made, and ini-
tiates the locking process.
The process can be followed in the Current locking status display:

in green.
, • Move the control lever until the Select lock symbol stops flashing. The sym-
bol only stops flashing when the locking process is completely finished
and the telescopic section has been set down.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
, After the locking process, the Lock selectionsymbol is displayed on a yellow

background and
* the background of the Unlock telescopic section symbol is shown in grey.
S
Risk of damage to the telescoping cylinder!
Move the control lever until the Select lock symbol stops flashing.
The locking process is only finished and the telescopic section is only prop-
erly attached to the telescopic section above it when the background of the
symbol is shown in yellow.
In this way you prevent the load from affecting the telescoping cylinder
when the crane is in operation, and enable the release of a load for fixed
lengths.
tion.
This concludes the locking of the telescopic section at the second length
reached.
The section “Moving the telescopic section through other fixed lengths before lock-
ing” applies to our example. The telescopic section III should be extended to
100%, so you can only select locking if the telescopic section has been extended
to approx. 55%.
The values in this section correspond to this example. You can take this section as
an example.
Current end state: - Telescopic section III extended 100% -
New objective: - Extending telescopic section II -
In order to reach the end position of the example from p. 12 - 101, you would
have to now extend the telescopic section II.
To do this, you would have to repeat the sections which are referred to in items 2
to 5 of the example on p. 12 - 101. The steps are the same as for extending tele-
scopic section III. The initial and end positions would simply have to be imple-
mented for telescopic section II and the displays would change accordingly. This
is the same as for every other telescoping process.
You can also telescope a telescopic section without selecting locking, as

described in the next section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Telescoping tele- To telescope to intermediate lengths, the same specifications apply as in the
scopic section to section Telescoping the telescopic section; à
p. 12 - 117.
an intermediate
length
While you are extending the telescopic section, the Current telescoping dis-
play changes constantly.
• Extend the telescopic section until the display shows the desired interme-
diate length in percent (e.g. 37% with telescopic section I).
The telescoping specified for our example has now been reached. The main
boom is now at the intermediate length (37/100/100/0/0) and you could carry out
a lift according to the corresponding Lifting capacity table.
To reach the on-road mode, you must proceed logically in the reverse order,
retracting the telescopic sections I, II and III one after the other and locking the
telescoping cylinder in the telescopic section I.
Locking the tele- If you have retracted the main boom for on-road driving, you must now lock
scopic section for the telescoping cylinder in telescopic section I so that the axle loads are in
on-road driving accordance with the values in the Driving mode table; à
Driving modes,
p. 7 - 1.
If telescopic section I was the last telescopic section to be retracted, you can
select locking directly.
If another telescopic section was retracted last, you must do the following
before selecting:
– Unlock the telescoping cylinder ( àp. 12 - 107) and
– Move the telescoping cylinder into telescopic section I ( à
p. 12 - 112).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Telescoping in You can also telescope to fixed lengths using the automatic control (teleau-
fully automatic tomation). To do this, enter the desired telescope status on the Crane control
mode display and move the control lever in the telescoping direction. The crane
control carries out the locking and unlocking processes automatically.
H
Before you use the fully automatic telescoping, you should have read the
entire telescoping mechanism section so that you can understand the lock-
ing and unlocking processes that the crane control carriers out. In automatic
mode, you can only telescope the individual telescopic sections to 0%, 50%
and 100% lengths.
If you wish to telescope one of the telescopic sections to a different length
(e.g. 60%), you can first automatically telescope to the nearest locking point
(e.g. 50%) and then continue telescoping the last telescopic section in the
semiautomatic mode (e.g. to 60%).
Prerequisites
The following conditions must be fulfilled for telescoping with teleautoma-
tion:
$ – The Telescoping submenu must be called up on the Crane control display.
– The telescoping mechanism is switched on; on the Crane control display,

the Telescoping mechanism on / off indicator lamp in the Main menu must
light up in green.
Calling up the desired telescope status

The area Enter set value for teleautomation (6)
shows from left to right the set values for the
telescopic sections I to V.
When teleautomation is switched off, the val-
ues are shown in red. If the fully automatic
control is blocked, no value will be shown.
• Press one of the buttons (1) to (5).

The value above the button is now shown in
yellow; this means that input mode is
switched on for the respective section:
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• To change a set value press the correspond-

ing button under the respective value (1)
thro (5).
Each time a button is pressed, the value for the
respective telescopic section runs continu-
ously through the following fixed lengths.
1 Telescopic section I 0 / 50 / 100
2 Telescopic section II 0 / 50 / 100
3 Telescopic section III 0 / 50 / 100
4 Telescopic section IV 0 / 50 / 100
5 Telescopic section V 0 / 50 / 100
• Call up the desired set values for all the tele-

scopic sections (e.g. 0%, 100%, 100%, 100%,
100%).
ö You can cancel the entry by pressing the Exit submenu / input mode button
once.
In this way, input mode is switched off again and the values in the Enter set
value for teleautomation display are shown in red.
Ö Confirm the set values by pressing the Confirm input button once.
If the set values entered are not permitted, the

values on the display (2) will be shown in red,
and teleautomation is switched off.
If the set values entered are permitted, the val-

ues on the display (2) will be shown in green;
teleautomation is switched on.
The Telescoping cylinder in foot section display

goes out and the Teleautomation on symbol (1)
is now shown in its place.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The crane control now calculates the necessary telescoping sequence and
shows the direction in which you have to move the control lever on the
Directional indicator for teleautomation display to start teleautomation (e.g. the
arrow to the right for extending).
• Move the control lever in the corresponding direction.

If you move the control lever in the wrong direction, the arrow in the display
flashes.
When you move the control lever in the correct direction, the crane control
will extend / retract automatically until a change in direction is necessary.
The extension / retraction will be interrupted and the Directional indicator for
teleautomation will show the new direction.
H
Moving the control lever to change the direction is only necessary when
telescoping a telescopic section. Telescoping cylinder return runs (without
telescopic section) are automatically executed in both directions regardless
of the extension direction of the control lever. The Directional indicator for
teleautomation shows both arrows.
You can regulate the speed for telescoping in the same way as with the
semiautomatic control.
Cancelling teleautomation
• Press one of the buttons alongside the sym-
bol (1), (2) or (3).
The telescoping process will be stopped, and:
– The Directional indicator for teleautomation will
go out,
– The Teleautomation on symbol (-) goes out
and the current Telescopic cylinder in foot sec-
tion (4) display appears (e.g. 5 for telescopic
section V).
– The values in the Input set value for teleauto-
mation display (5) will be shown in red.
This will bring you into semi-automatic mode
again.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Example of telescoping with teleautomation

Assuming that the current telescoping is
100/0/0/0/0 and the telescopic section is locked in
the foot section I.
The desired telescoping status should be
50/100/100/100/100.
When you have entered the desired telescoping
and confirmed it, the display should correspond
to the diagram opposite.
The crane control would calculate the following
telescoping sequence:
– Retract telescopic section I to 0%

– Extend telescopic section V to 100%
– Extend telescopic section IV to 100%
– Extend telescopic section III to 100%
– Extend telescopic section II to 100%
– Extend telescopic section I to 50%
As the first step is retracting, the Directional indicator for teleautomation would
show the arrow pointing left.
• Move the telescoping control lever in the retracting direction and hold it there.
H If the arrow is now flashing in the display, you have extended the control lever in
the opposite direction.
While you are holding the control lever, the crane control automatically carries
out the necessary locking and unlocking processes and fully retracts telescopic
section I.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
You can follow the process on the display:

– Telescopic section I is retracted, display (3) 0%
– Telescopic section I is locked, pin (1) green
– The telescoping cylinder is unlocked, pin (2)
red
– The telescoping cylinder moves into telescopic
section V, display (4)
– Telescoping cylinder is locked, pin (2) green
If the telescoping cylinder moves by itself without the telescopic section, both
arrows in the display will light up.
If the telescopic cylinder is locked in telescopic section V, the crane controls will
end all operations, since a change of direction of telescoping must be performed.
The Directional indicator for teleautomation now shows this change with an arrow
to the right.
As long as you are still moving the control lever for retraction, the arrow in the
display will flash. When you move the control lever into the initial position, the
arrow lights up.
• Move the telescoping control lever in the direction for extending and hold it
there.
While you are holding the control lever, the crane control automatically carries
out the necessary locking and unlocking procedures, fully extending telescopic
sections V, IV, III and II and extending telescopic section I to 50%.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
When the procedure is finished, the display changes back to semi-automatic:

– The Directional indicator for teleautomation
goes out.
– The Teleautomation on symbol (-) goes out
and the current Telescopic cylinder in foot section
display (1) appears (e.g. 1 for telescopic
section I).
– The values in the Enter set value for teleautoma-
tion display (4) are shown in red.
– The current telescoping status 50/100/100/100/
100 is shown on the Current telescoping display
(2). The Telescope diagram display (3) shows the
respective telescoping.
Telescoping with the automatic control has now
been completed.
H If you want to extend telescopic section I to e.g. 60%, you can now further extend
this telescopic section with the semi-automatic control.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Telescoping the • Lower the main boom into a horizontal position. To do so, proceed as
main boom into described in the section Lowering the main boom to horizontal position;
a horizontal posi- à p. 12 - 81.
tion
When you have lowered the main boom to the horizontal, as described in
section Lowering the main boom to horizontal position. The SLI will automati-
cally switch to the rigging table for the current rigging mode.
It is this rigging table that also determines the maximum permissible tele-
scoping. If this telescoping is exceeded, the SLI shuts down extending. The
shutdown lengths are different for different rigging modes / rigging tables
(the current rigging table isà the Lifting capacity table).
• Set down the load.

• Extend the main boom only so far that the SLI switches off the extending
function.
H
If you continue to extend the main boom after an SLI shutdown, you can get
into areas where you can neither retract nor raise.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.8 Possible movement combinations
All listed power units can be moved in all combinations:
– Main hoist
– Telescoping mechanism and derricking gear
The telescoping mechanism and derricking gear can be operated simulta-
neously only if they are controlled by different control levers; à
Control
lever configuration, p. 11 - 14.
– Slewing gear
– Auxiliary hoist (additional equipment)
– Auxiliary power units ("incline crane cab" function or counterweight hoist
unit).
Moving the auxiliary power units in combination with other power units
can lead to speed losses. Therefore these movement combinations
should only be carried out when it is absolutely necessary.
H
Some of the movement combinations may reduce the speed in high-speed
mode.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.9 High-speed mode
G
Danger of accidents due to sudden acceleration!
Reduce the engine speed before switching on high-speed mode so that the
acceleration rate of the movement is not too high. The truck crane could
start to rock and then overturn.
You can switch to high-speed mode for some crane movements in order to
achieve a higher working speed. There are different ways of switching on
high-speed mode, depending on the crane movement:
– With the Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism high-speed mode rocker but-
ton or
– With the High speed hoist rocker button
H
The slewing gear cannot be moved at high speed.
Switching on the To switch on the High speed function with the rocker buttons in the control
high speed func- levers, the holding brake must first be set.
tion
• Press the Vehicle parking brake rocker switch down once.

f
f When the parking brake is engaged, the Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp
will light up. The rocker buttons on the control lever for high speed func-
tions are now enabled.
Derricking gear / You can only operate at high speed when the parking brake is set. When the
telescoping mech- parking brake is released, the rocker button is assigned the Separate steering
anism function; à
p. 12 - 179.
The Fast speed derricking gear / telescoping mechanism rocker button (arrow) is
used to switch to high-speed mode for the crane movements Telescoping
and Raising.
08.03.2006
; When high-speed mode is switched on, the High-speed mode derricking gear /
telescoping mechanism indicator lamp lights up.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
When lowering the boom, high-speed mode only supports the start-up of
the derricking procedure from steep boom positions; it does not increase
the derricking speed.
Hoists You can only operate at high speed when the parking brake is set. When the
parking brake is released, the rocker button is assigned the Steering function;
à p. 12 - 179.
S
Make sure that the lifted load is at the most 50% of the maximum load
according to the Lifting capacity table (50% maximum degree of utilisation),
before you operate the hoist at high speed.
The high-speed mode for the crane movements raise / lower main hoist and
raise / lower auxiliary hoist (additional equipment) is switched on with the
High speed hoist rocker button (arrowed).
: When high-speed mode is switched on, the indicator lamp Hoists high-speed
mode lights up.
S
Danger of slack rope!
Take care that slack rope does not form when the hoist is lowered.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.4.10 Cooling the hydraulic oil
Standard oil The truck crane is equipped with an electrically driven oil cooler which is
cooler controlled via a thermostat. When the hydraulic oil temperature reaches
40 °C , the oil cooler switches on.
The power of the oil cooler increases when the oil temperature increases,
the highest power being reached at about 60 °C .
During normal crane operation the temperature of the oil must not exceed
80 °C .
• Always monitor the hydraulic oil temperature during crane operation.

You can read the current temperature on the Crane control display in the
Control instruments submenu.
played.
8 • In the main menu, press the button beside the Control instruments symbol.
The display changes to the Control instruments submenu.

The display (1) indicates the current hydraulic oil temperature.
The current temperature is shown right next to the display in °C or °F,

depending on the units set.
When the maximum permissible temperature is reached (approx. 80 °C ),
the bar next to the display is shown in red. In addition, a warning is dis-
played; à Warning message submenu, p. 12 - 147.
If the hydraulic oil reaches a temperature of 80 °C , you must stop crane

operation and allow the oil to cool down with the diesel engine running.
Additional oil The truck crane can be equipped with a second oil cooler as additional
cooler equipment.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5 Adjustments and displays whilst operating the crane

This section does not describe all user controls or submenus. It deals prima-
rily with those adjustments and displays that are directly required whilst
operating the crane, such as inclining the crane cab or adjusting the power
unit speeds.
Further adjustment capabilities and submenus which are directly subordi-

nate to other procedures are described in the respective sections, such as
changing the sense of steering in section Driving the truck crane from the crane
cab and the Emergency telescoping program submenu submenu in chapter Mal-
functions during crane operation.
12.5.1 Adjusting the brightness of the display
The degree of brightness of the Crane control display is regulated automati-

cally in response to the ambient brightness. You can set a minimum degree
of brightness manually; this will always be observed when the brightness is
regulated.
The setting is carried out on the Crane control display, in the Settings / Displays
submenu. The manual setting will also apply to the SLI display.
played.
The display switches to the Settings / Displays submenu.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• Press the button beside the Adjust display

brightness symbol (3) once.
Under the Value for display brightness display (1)
a red bar (2) appears to prompt an entry.
• Set the minimum degree of brightness

required using the Entry rotary switch (4).
During the setting procedure, the brightness
of the display changes directly and you can
read off the value set (0 to 100%) on the dis-
play (1).
Automatic regulation will not decrease below
the degree of brightness which you set here.
H
If you set 100%, automatic regulation will not occur.
The displays will always be shown with maximum brightness.
once. The red bar will disappear and the settings will be cleared.
Ö If you want to accept the minimum degree of brightness entered, press the
Confirm entry button once.
The red bar under the display will go out and automatic regulation will be
switched on again. Regulation will now take place in the range between the
value just set and 100%.
12.5.2 Setting characteristic curves for the control lever
The control lever characteristic curve determines how high the power unit
speed should be for a particular control lever movement. You can set five
different characteristic curves for the control lever.
The control lever characteristic curve which is set applies to both control
levers and to all power units that are controlled using the control levers.
submenu.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
If another menu is shown on the Crane control display, press the Exit submenu
ö
/ input mode button ( ) until the main menu is displayed.
The display switches to the Settings / Displays

submenu.
The display (2) shows the characteristic curve
which is currently set.
By repeatedly pressing the button next to the
symbol (1) you can set five different character-
istic curves one after the other.
The characteristic curve which is set appears
in the display (2) and is assigned to both con-
trol levers.
You can set the following characteristic

curves:
One linear characteristic curve

With the linear characteristic curve (1), the increase in speed is identical
across the movement of the control lever. This means that you can reach a
high speed even with small movements of the control lever.
Four progressive characteristic curves

With the progressive characteristic curves (2) to (5), the speed in the first
range of the movement is less than for the linear characteristic (1) and only
increases with larger movements.
The higher the number of the characteristic curve, the further the control
lever must be moved to instigate a clear increase in speed.
When characteristic curve (5) is set, you can carry out particularly delicate
work with the control lever.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5.3 Adjusting power unit speeds
In this menu you can enter a maximum speed for all power units that are
connected. This submenu is called up on the Crane control display from the
Main menu.
played.
9 • Press in the main menu the button near the Power unit speeds symbol.
The display changes to the Power unit speeds

submenu.
You can call up the connected power units
with the following buttons:
1 Slewing gear
2 Telescoping mechanism
3 Main hoist
4 Derricking gear
5 Auxiliary hoist (additional equipment)
6 Derricking gear lattice extension
H
If the additional equipment is not available, the corresponding symbols
shown in grey on grey.
The displayed values state what percentage of the maximum speed has
been set as the maximum speed. Here the following values apply:
– On the displays (1) for main boom operation and
– On the displays (2) for operation with lattice extension or boom extension
The crane control always uses the value where the symbol over its display
is in green. The other symbol is shown in black.
As soon as a lattice extension is electrically connected, the symbol above
the display for working with the lattice extension switches from black to
08.03.2006
green.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Entering the maximum speed
H
The maximum speeds of the slewing gear and derricking gear are limited
automatically. Limit values entered manually will not be exceeded. The
automatic limitation cannot be increased manually. The value for automatic
limitation will not be shown on the display.
H
The procedure is described in the example for the slewing gear.
The maximum speed is input in the same way for all other power units.
1 • Press the button next to the symbol for the desired power unit
(e.g. slewing gear).
The display switches to input mode:

– The Input mode enabled symbol (4) appears.
– The LED (5) alongside the Confirm input but-
ton goes on and
– The red bar (1) appears as an entry request,
e.g. under the symbol which is shown in
green (e.g. under the symbol for the main
boom).
• If necessary, press the button next to the
Slewing gear symbol so that the bar switches
between the displays (2) and (3).
You can only re-enter a value under which the
red bar is located.
You can change the value with the Entry (1) rotary switch.
To increase the value: Turn the rotary switch clockwise.
To decrease the value: Turn the rotary switch anti-clockwise.
Turning the knob slowly changes the value in small intervals.

Turning the knob quickly changes the value in large intervals.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
ö If you do not want to accept the newly entered values, press the Exit sub-
menu / input mode button once.
The values will not be changed and the display will switch to the Main menu.
Ö • If you want to accept the newly entered values, press the Confirm entry
button once:
– The input mode is switched off, the red bar and the symbol for inputting
values will no longer be displayed and the LED alongside the Confirm input
button will go out.
– The newly entered values are displayed.
H
If you have to change several values, you can also change all the required
values first and then accept them all together by pressing the Confirm entry
button.
12.5.4 Setting a constant engine speed
å After switching on the ignition, you can start the diesel engine either with
the ignition key or with the Constant engine speed rocker button.
• Press the Constant engine speed rocker button downwards once.

Â The diesel engine will start.
The constant engine speed now corresponds to the idling speed.
To read off the current engine speed, you can open the Control instruments
submenu.
played.
8 • In the main menu, press the button beside the Control instruments submenu
symbol.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The display changes to the Driving gear speeds submenu.

The display (1) shows the engine speed of the diesel engine continuously.
H
The following settings are not dependent on the position of the accelerator.
However, you should release the accelerator so that you can also read those
settings which are below the current engine speed.
Increasing the You can increase the constant engine speed at any time.
constant engine
speed
• Press the Constant engine speed rocker button downwards and hold it
Â down. The constant engine speed is increased continuously until the max-
imum engine speed is reached.
or
• Press the rocker button downwards once. The constant engine speed will
be increased by one level.
Decreasing the You can decrease the constant engine speed at any time.
constant engine
speed
• Press the Constant engine speed rocker button upwards once.
Â The constant engine speed will be increased by one level.
or
• Press the Constant engine speed rocker button upwards and hold it there.
Â – After approx. 3 seconds, the constant engine speed corresponds to the
idling speed.
– After a further approx. 3 seconds, the diesel engine will switch off.
It is only possible to restart the diesel engine when ca. 7 seconds have
elapsed.
Exceeding the You can exceed the constant engine speed at any time using the accelerator.
constant engine When you release the accelerator, the engine speed will decrease to the pre-
speed set constant engine speed again.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5.5 Tilting the crane cab
As additional equipment, in order to attain a better sitting position while

working at greater heights, you can incline the crane cab rearwards by
approx. 20°.
G
Danger of accidents due to objects overturning in the crane cab!
Remove all loose objects (e.g. bags, bottles etc.) from the crane cab so that
they do not fall over when tilting the crane. And close the door to the crane
cab before inclining.
In this way you prevent fluids from reaching the inserts, and you prevent
the crane cab door opening by itself or unwanted operating errors being
caused by fright.
G
Danger of accidents when getting on or off the crane while the crane cab
is tilted!
Always bring the crane cab to the front into final position before leaving the
crane cab. If the crane cab is tilted you may slip between the cab and the
stepping grid, and fall down.
Tilting the crane cab to the rear

• Close the crane cab door.
• Press the rocker button Incline crane cab downward.

: The crane cab inclines to the rear for as long as the rocker button is held
down, or until it reaches its final position.
Tilting the crane cabin to the front again
• Press up the Incline crane cab rocker button.

: The crane cab inclines to the front for as long as the rocker button is held
down, or until it reaches its final position. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5.6 Adjusting the windscreen wiper stroke interval
The interval between strokes of the front and roof screen wipers can be
adjusted between 3 and 30 seconds.
H
The higher the value selected, the longer the pauses between strokes of the
wiper.
submenu.
If another menu is displayed on the Crane control display, press the Exit sub-
ö
menu / input mode button ( ) repeatedly until the main menu is displayed.
! Press the button next to the Settings / Displays symbol in the main menu. The
display switches to the Settings / Displays submenu.
• Press the button beside the symbol Adjust

wiper interval (3) once.
Under the display Duration of interval (1) a red
bar (2) will appear to prompt input.
• Set the desired value using the rotary switch
Input (4):
To increase Turn the rotary switch
the value: clockwise.
To decrease Turn the rotary switch
the value: anti-clockwise.
Whilst making the adjustment you can view

value directly on the Interval duration display
(1), e.g. 10 seconds.
once. The red bar will disappear and the settings will be cleared.
Ö • To accept the wiper interval input, press the Confirm input button once.
The red bar will disappear and the settings will be saved.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5.7 Using the directional spotlight for the working area
One or two directional spotlights for illuminating the working area (1) can
be attached as additional equipment to the GMK 4080-1 main boom basic
section.
Switching on / off If two spotlights for the working area are fitted, both spotlights for the work-
ing area must always be switched on and off together.
The spotlights for the working area are switched on and off using the Direc-
tional spotlights for the working area on / off rocker switch (1).
Adjusting the You can adjust the direction of the spotlights for the working area forwards
direction and backwards. If two spotlights for the working area are fitted, the direction
of both spotlights for the working area must always adjusted together.
G
Danger of accidents due to dazzling when driving on the road!
When driving on the road, always adjust the spotlights for the working area
so that the reflector points downwards. This is to avoid dazzling other road
users with reflections from the spotlights for the working area, which could
cause an accident.
The direction of the spotlights is adjusted using the Adjust direction of spot-
lights for the working area rocker button (1).
To direct spotlight forwards: Press the rocker button up.

To direct spotlight backwards: Press the rocker button down.
The spotlights for the working area will continue to be adjusted for direction
for as long as the rocker button is kept pressed, or until they reach their limit
of travel.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5.8 Display the operating hours
In this submenu you can read the operating hours for all power units. This
submenu can be opened from the Settings / Displays submenu in the Crane
control display.
played.
The display switches to the Settings / Displays submenu.
s In this menu press the button next to the symbol Operating hours counter sub-
menu.
The display changes to the submenu Operating hours counter.
The symbols for all the power units supplied with the crane are displayed
here. Power units currently not connected (e.g. the auxiliary hoist) are also
displayed.
– Crane control (1)

– Auxiliary power units (2)
– Telescoping mechanism (3)
– Diesel engine (4)
– Derricking gear (5)
– Locking system (6) (locking pins in the tele-
scoping mechanism)
– Main hoist (7)
– Auxiliary hoist (8) (additional equipment)
– Slewing gear (9)
– Lattice extension (10) (additional equipment)
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
H
The operating hours shown for the diesel engine represent the time that the
diesel engine has run with crane operation switched on.
The auxiliary power units include the counterweight lifting cylinder and
locking cylinder and the inclination of the crane cab.
You can read the operating hours directly on the display under the symbols:
– The upper value (1) displays the hours.
– The lower value (2) displays the minutes.
H
The values indicate the operating time only. For the slewing gear for exam-
ple, all the times in which the slewing gear was operated are added up.
Exception: The value under the symbol (1) or the locking system indicates
how many times the mechanism has carried out the cycle for Unlocking the
telescopic section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.5.9 Warning message submenu
The crane control differentiates between warning messages and error mes-
sages (error messages à Error menu, p. 12 - 149).
A warning message shows that certain values do not correspond to the set
value.
If a warning message occurs, it is shown on the Crane control insert in the
following way:
– The Error / warning message warning lamp (1) will flash and
– the LED alongside the Warning message submenu button (2) will flash.
For more information about the warning message, see the Warning message.
Å • To open the submenu, press the Warning message submenu button once.
This button is only active as long there is a warning message and the LED
alongside the button flashes or lights up.
Å When the Warning message submenu is opened, the warning message is

acknowledged. The LED alongside the Warning message submenu button will
stop flashing and now stay lit continuously.
The submenu displays the following symbols:
1 Fuel tank
2 Diesel engine overspeed
3 On-board voltage
4 Slewing gear brake oil temperature
5 Preload pressure in the counterweight
lifting unit
6 Service brake
7 Anemometer
8 Collective warning lamp
9 Hydraulic oil temperature
10 Hydraulic oil filter feed / control circuit
If there are no warning messages, the background of the symbol is shown

in grey.
If warning messages are present, the backgrounds of the affected symbols
are shown in red.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
If an individual symbol is displayed in red, this means:
Symbol with red Cause of the warning message

background
Fuel tank Fuel level too low; à Refuelling, p. 5 - 10.
Diesel engine overspeed This symbol is only available with air intake inhibitor (additional equip-
ment).
The air intake inhibitor was triggered because the maximum permissi-
ble engine speed was reached; à Switching on the air intake inhibitor,
p. 5 - 21.
On-board voltage Voltage too low or too high
Slewing gear brake oil Temperature in the slewing gear brake too high; à p. 12 - 88.
temperature
Preload pressure in the Preload pressure has dropped too far, you must preload the counter-
counterweight lifting weight; à Precharging the counterweight, p. 13 - 113
unit
Service brake à Service brake malfunctions, p. 8 - 42
Service brake malfunction
Anemometer Anemometer not electrically connected; à Anemometer and air traffic

control light, p. 13 - 147.
Collective warning Coolant level for the diesel engine, the associated warning lamp will
lamp light up in the driver's cab ( t ); à Checking the coolant level, p. 5 - 6
Transmission shift lock, the associated warning lamp will light up in the
driver's cab ( # ) and the Transmission will show an error code;
à Procedure in the event of transmission malfunctions, p. 8 - 53.
Engine electronic system, the associated warning lamp will light up in
the driver's cab ( ‡ ); à
Malfunctions to the diesel engine, p. 8 - 37.
Oil pressure for the diesel engine, the associated warning lamp will light
up in the driver's cab ( L ); à Checking the diesel engine oil level, p. 5 - 8.
Hydraulic oil tempera- Hydraulic oil temperature is too high; à Malfunctions in the hydraulic
ture system / hydraulic oil cooler, p. 14 - 27.
Hydraulic oil filter feed
/ control circuit
Hydraulic oil return The hydraulic oil filter is clogged. Clean the filter cartridge or replace it;
filter 1 à Maintenance manual.
Hydraulic oil return
filter 2
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
ö You can exit the submenu at any time by pressing the Exit submenu / input
mode button. The Crane control display changes again into the menu which
was displayed before the error menu was called up.
When you exit the submenu, the displays on the Crane control insert change:
– The Error / warning message warning lamp (1) lights up and
– The LED alongside the Warning message submenu button (2) will light up.
As soon as a new warning message occurs, both displays will start to flash
again.
12.5.10 Error menu
The crane control makes a difference between error messages and warning
messages (warning messages àWarning message submenu, p. 12 - 147).
If an error occurs, it is shown on the Crane control display as follows:

– The Error / warning message warning lamp (1) flashes and
– The LED alongside the Open error menu button (2) will flash.
For more information about the error message see the Error menu.
à Error messages on the crane control display, p. 14 - 40

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6 Working range limiter

As additional equipment, the GMK 4080-1 truck crane can be rigged with a
working range limiter. Truck cranes that are equipped with a working range
limiter have a supplemented crane control programme. Therefore, addi-
tional symbols appear on the Crane control display and additional submenus
can be called up.
In these submenus, you can program four different limitations for the truck
crane's working range:
– A maximum overall height that cannot be exceeded
– A maximum working radius that cannot be exceeded
– A maximum permissible slewing angle within which may be operated
– The position of individual objects in the working range that may not be
touched
The monitoring of the programmed limiting values can be switched on and
off separately.
G
Danger of accidents arising from situations which cannot be monitored!
The working range limiter only serves as an additional safety device. Brake
the crane movement in time to avoid the obstacle. Do not knowingly drive
into the shutdown area. You, the crane operator, are responsible for super-
vising the working range at all times, so that you can react accordingly in a
situation that cannot be monitored electronically.
G
Danger of accidents due to limit values set too low!
When entering the limit values, be aware that, even after switching off the
engine, movements can occur that would bring the load into the shutdown
area (e.g. due to load swing or bend of the boom). For this reason, always
enter the limit value to the object with sufficient safety distance.
G
Risk of accidents if the statutory safety distance is not complied with!
Even when the working range limiter is switched on, always observe all
safety distances according to the country's legal regulations (e.g. concern-
ing electrical overhead cables).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.1 Opening the Working range limitation submenu
Operation of working range limitation is carried out in the submenu Working

range limitation. This submenu is called up on the Crane control display from
the main menu.
played.
In the Working range limiter symbol (1) there is an indicator lamp (2). The
colour of this indicator lamp shows whether the monitoring of the limit val-
ues set has been activated:
Green: Monitoring on
Black: Monitoring off
Ï) To open the Working range limiter submenu, press the button next to the
Working range limiter symbol.
The display will switch to the Working range limiter submenu.
G
Danger of accidents due to limit values set too low!
When entering the limit values, be aware that, even after switching off the
engine, movements can occur that would bring the load into the shutdown
area (e.g. due to load swing or bend of the boom). For this reason, always
enter the limit value to the object with sufficient safety distance.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.2 Reading current settings
Display monitor- You can check in the Working range limiter submenu which monitoring func-
ing switched on / tions are switched on or off.
off
In the symbols for the monitoring functions

there are indicator lamps for
1 Monitoring overall height on / off
2 Monitoring working radius on / off
3 Monitoring slewing angle on / off
4 Monitoring objects on / off
The indicator lamps' colour (6) show whether

monitoring is activated or not:
Green: Monitoring on
Black: Monitoring off
Reading the limit You can check in the Working range limiter submenu which limiting values
values entered are entered for the individual monitoring functions.
H
All illustrations in these operating instructions use metric measuring units.
Depending on the country in which you are working, the display can also be
in US units of measurement; conversion is carried out at the factory.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The displays
1 Maximum / Current overall height
2 Maximum / Current working radius
3 Maximum / Current slewing angle
show you both the maximum set value and

the current value.
– The red-bordered values (display (1) and (2)
upper value, display (3) upper and lower
value ) always show the set maximum
value.
– The blue-bordered values (display (1) and
(2) lower value, display (3) middle value)
always show the value corresponding to the
current position of the boom and the super-
structure (current value).
H
The displays surrounded in blue only show the current value if the manual
entry is switched off. When the manual entry function is switched on, the
value can be changed in the display as desired; àEntering limit values man-
ually, p. 12 - 164.
The values for the point data of individual objects can only be read for
objects in the Point data entry for objects submenu;à Entering point data for
objects, p. 12 - 160.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.3 Entering a limit value for a maximum overall height
This section presupposes that the value for the maximum overall height is
unknown, and it therefore describes how to enter it by moving towards the
switching point. For this, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
– Manual entry is switched off;à Entering limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.
– Overall height monitoring is switched off; à Switching monitoring off,
p. 12 - 168.
H
If the monitoring function is switched on, you cannot approach any larger
limit value as the monitoring function would switch off crane movement.
If manual entry is switched on, you cannot accept the values for the cur-
rently approached switching point.
H
You can cancel the following entry at any time by pressing the Exit submenu
ö
/ input mode ( ) button once. The red bar under the selected entry goes out.
• Press the button next to the symbol Enter

maximum overall height (1) once.
A red bar appears under the Maximum / current
overall height display (2).
The lower value (surrounded in blue) in dis-
play (2) now shows the current overall height.
• Move the pulley head without load to just in

front of the switching point. During this pro-
cess, the lower value changes continuously.
• Accept the lower value as the limiting value
by pressing the Confirm entry button (
once.
Ö)
The upper value (surrounded in red) in display
(2) now shows the current overall height as the
newly set limit value.
• Switch on the overall height monitoring; à Switching monitoring on,

p. 12 - 167.
H
When the value for the maximum overall height is known, you can also
enter this value manually and accept it as the limit value; à
Entering limit
values manually, p. 12 - 164.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.4 Entering a limit value for a maximum working radius
This section presupposes that the value for the maximum working radius is
not known and therefore describes the input by approaching the switching
point. For this, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
à Entering limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.
– Manual entry is switched off;
– Working radius monitoring is switched off; à Switching monitoring off,
p. 12 - 168.
H
H
ö
• Press the button next the symbol Maximum

working radius entry (1) once.
A red bar appears under the Maximum / current
working radius display (2).
The lower value (surrounded in blue) in dis-
play (2) now shows the current working
radius.
• Move the pulley head to just in front of the

switching point. During this process, the
lower value changes continuously.
once.
Ö)
The upper value (surrounded in red) in display
(2) now shows the current working radius as
the newly set limiting value.
• Switch on the working radius monitoring; à Switching monitoring on,
p. 12 - 167.
H
The entered value for the maximum working radius influences the presen-
tation of the defined objects. Only those points are displayed that are
located within the maximum working radius.
08.03.2006
H
When the value for the maximum working radius is known, you can also
enter this value manually and accept it as the limiting value; à
Entering
limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.5 Entering limit values for maximum slewing angles
This section presupposes that the values for the maximum slewing angles
are not known and therefore describes the input by approaching the switch-
ing points. For this, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
– Manual entry is switched off; à
Entering limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.
– Slewing angle monitoring is switched off; à
Switching monitoring off,
p. 12 - 168.
H
H
ö
/ input mode ( button once. The red bar under the selected entry goes out.
Displays in the The slewing angle is displayed in positive and negative numerical values in
Working range this submenu in the same way as in the Counterweight submenu (for a more
limitation sub- detailed explanation with illustration; àp. 12 - 86):
menu – Angles in the right-hand semicircle are displayed as positive numbers
(0° to +180.0°).
– Angles in the left semicircle are displayed negatively (0° to -179.9°).
In the Maximum / current slewing angle display

(2), the middle value (surrounded in blue) dis-
plays the angle for the current position of the
superstructure.
The upper value (surrounded in red) displays
the set value for slewing angle A.
The lower value (surrounded in red) displays
the set value for slewing angle B.
• To enter slewing angle A or B, press the but-

ton next to the Maximum slewing angle entry
submenu symbol (1) once.
The Maximum slewing angle entry submenu opens.

08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Presentation of In the Maximum slewing angle entry submenu, the entered slewing angles A
slewing angles and B are presented pictorially in the Limited slewing angle display.
The current boom position is shown with a

cross (1) and constantly changes when the
superstructure rotates.
Both slewing angles A and B are displayed
directly and represent the limits of the permis-
sible slewing range.
The permissible slewing range is the angle
from A clockwise to B (approx. 270° in the dia-
gram).
Slewing angle A is the slewing movement
limit within the permissible slewing range to
the left.
Slewing angle B is the slewing movement
limit within the permissible slewing range to
the right.
G
Danger of accidents due to incorrectly set slewing angles!
Observe the definitions of slewing angles A and B when moving to the
shutdown points.
– When the value for slewing angle A is applied, the shutdown point must
always be located to the left next to the boom.
– When the value for slewing angle B is applied, the shutdown point must
always be located to the right next to the boom.
If you swap the values for slewing angles A and B, the shutdown points will
then be located within the permissible slewing range.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Entering the In the Maximum slewing angle entry submenu, you can enter the values for
slewing angle slewing angles A and B individually one after the other.
• Select the slewing angle to be entered. To

do this, press the button next to the Select
slewing angle A (2) or Select slewing angle B
symbol (3).
A red bar appears under the selected display
(e.g. Maximum / current slewing angle A (1)).
Rotate the superstructure to just in front of the

switching point:
– If you have selected slewing angle A, the
switching point must be located on the left
next to the pulley head (cross 4).
– If you have selected slewing angle B, the
switching point must be located on the right
next to the pulley head.
In the selected display (e.g. Maximum / current

slewing angle A display (1), the lower value
(surrounded in blue) displays the angle for the
current position of the superstructure.

once.
Ö)
The upper value in the display (surrounded in
red) now shows the newly set slewing angle
(e.g. slewing angle A = -140°).
• Enter the required values for slewing angles

A and B.
• Switch to the Working range limitation sub-
menu (1 x
ö).
• Switch on the slewing angle monitoring; à Switching monitoring on,
p. 12 - 167.
H
When the values for slewing angles A and B are known, you can also enter
the values into the selected displays manually and accept them as a limit
value;à Entering limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.6 Entering point data for objects
This section presupposes that the parameters for the point data of the
objects are not known and therefore describes the input by approaching the
switching points. For this, the following prerequisites must be fulfilled:
– Manual entry is switched off; à
Entering limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.
– Monitoring of objects, working radius and slewing angle are all switched
off;à Switching monitoring off, p. 12 - 168.
H
When the monitoring functions are switched on, the required crane move-
ments for starting individual points can be switched off.
H
ö
• Press the button near the symbol Enter point data for objects submenu (1)
once.
The Enter point data for objects submenu opens.
Presentation of The Enter point data for objects submenu opens. All entered points are pre-
defined objects sented pictorially in the Limitation by object display.
All entered points are represented by a cross

and numeration in the Limitation by object dis-
play (e.g. point 1).
Points that are connected to one object are fas-
tened with lines (e.g. points 1 to 3 and points 5
and 6).
The pictorial presentation corresponds to the
values in the Point data display (7). Every point
is defined by two values:
– By the angle for positioning the superstruc-
ture and
– By the working radius.
The current position of the boom is shown
continuously by a cross (8) and by the value
bordered in blue in the display (7).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Selecting and You can delete selected point data to change objects or delete all point data
deleting point to define new objects.
data
Selecting point data

Point 1 is selected after the submenu has been
opened and is displayed with a blue back-
ground.
By pressing the buttons under the symbols
Select previous point (9) or Select next point (8),
you can select any point.
Deleting selected point data

• Press the button under the symbol Delete
selected point data (7) once.
After deleting, the values next to the deleted

point are set to 0.0 (e.g. next to point 2).
The deleted point goes out in the Limited
objects display.
If the point was integrated into an object, the
object now comprises only the remaining,
successive points. When no successive points
are available anymore, the object is deleted
(as in the example).
Single points (e.g. 1 and 3) are not monitored

as objects!
You can delete all point data simultaneously.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Deleting all point data

• Press the button under the symbol Delete all point data (9) once.
On the symbol (9), the symbol
Ö and the symbol
Do you really want to delete the values?.
ö, appear for the prompt
• To delete all values, press the Confirm entry button (Ö).
• To cancel the process, press the Exit submenu / input mode button once
ö).
(
Entering point To enter point data, you can move the pulley head to the corresponding
data position and directly accept the current data for any point.
Select the first point to be entered (e.g.

point 1).
• Move the pulley head to the first point for
the object.
The Current point data display (9, surrounded
in blue) changes continuously at the same
time.
• Accept these values (9) as point data, to do
this press the Confirm entry button once (
Ö).
The values will now be displayed next to the
selected point 1. The Limitation by object display
shows a cross in the corresponding position
with the designation 1 for point 1.
The first point is then entered.
The point is only displayed when it is within the maximum radius. If neces-
sary, you can enlarge the maximum radius so that the point will be shown
à p. 12 - 164. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• Enter the data for the next limiting point of

the object in the same way as for point 1
(e.g. for point 2).
As soon as you accept the data for a new
point, this point is integrated into the object
and connected with a line.
If you wish to enter a second object, you must

delete the data for the following point or enter
as 0.0 value (e.g. for point 3, data = 0.0).
The next point you enter now is the first point

for a new object (e.g. point 4).
Therefore you have the entry options for the following objects:
– 1 object with a maximum of 8 points or
– 2 objects with a maximum of 7 points altogether or
– 3 objects with 2 points each
H
When the values for the point data are known, you can also enter the values
into the selected points manually and accept them as a limit value;
à Entering limit values manually, p. 12 - 164.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.7 Entering limit values manually
If you know the values for the switching points, you can also enter these
values manually.
Limit values for All entry menus contain the symbol Manual entry on / off. After the menu in
overall height, opened, manual entry is always switched off.
working radius or
slewing angle
• To switch on manual entry, press the button under the Manual entry on /
off symbol (1).
Each time you press, the indicator lamp in the symbol changes its colour:
Green: Manual entry on
Black: Manual entry off
• Select the display for the entry to be made

(e.g. the Maximum / current overall height dis-
play, 1).
• Switch on manual entry.
The continuous display of this value is then
switched off and the Entry rotary switch (2) is
active.
You can now enter the value surrounded in
blue directly into the selected display (1).
The continuous display of this value is now
switched off.
• Press the Confirm entry button once (Ö) to

accept the value as a limiting value. The
manual input is switched off at the same
time.
In display (1), the upper value (surrounded in red) now shows the newly set
limiting value.
In display (1), the lower value (surrounded in blue) now continuously shows
the value for the current position of the boom position and the super-
structure.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Manual point data The Manual entry on / off symbol is located in the submenu Enter point data for
entry objects.
• To switch on manual entry, press the button under the Manual entry on /
off symbol (1).
The indicator lamp in the symbol is shown in green and the symbol Select
angle / working radius (2) will be displayed.
• On the Point data display, select the point for

which the new point data is to be entered
(8 9), e.g. point 1.
The Current point data display no longer contin-
uously shows the current point data.
Under the value (9) for the angle, a red bar
appears. The red bar means that this value is
selected for entering.
You can also select the value (10) for the work-
ing radius by pressing the button under the
symbol Select angle / working radius (11). Every
time you press it, the red bar will switch
between values (9) or (10).
• Use the Enter rotary switch (12) to enter a

new value, e.g. for the angle.
• To accept this value, press the Confirm entry
button (
Ö) once.
The new value is shown on the Point data dis-
play next to the selected point (e.g. 4.0 next to
point 1).
• Select the next value, enter it in the same

way and adopt it.
The new value is shown on the Point data dis-
play next to the selected point (e.g. 12.0 next to
point 1).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
• Select further points as necessary and enter new values for the angle and
the working radius.
• To switch off manual entry, press the button
ö) once.
Exit submenu / input mode (
The indicator lamp in the symbol Manual entry
on / off (8) is shown in black and the symbol
Select angle / working radius will disappear (9).
The current position of the boom is shown

continuously by a cross (10) and by the value
bordered in blue in the display (7).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.8 Switching monitoring on and off
Switching moni- After the ignition is switched on, all monitoring functions are switched on
toring on that were on before the ignition was switched off.
G
Danger of accidents due to erroneously set limit values!
If, during starting operations or after entering new limit values, you switch
on the monitoring, then make sure that the settings for the limit values are
correct. Approach the limit value slowly and check whether the movement
is switched off at the right time.
If necessary, enter new values with a larger safety distance.
H
After switching on the monitoring, all of the power units' speeds are limited
to a maximum of 50%. This is also valid for power units with higher values
set in the submenu Power unit speeds. Limits under 50% continue to be active.
A limit between 30% and 50% is recommended for the slewing gear speed.
The monitoring is switched on with the but-

tons under symbols (4) to (7).
When monitoring is switched off, the indicator
lamp in the corresponding symbol will be
shown in black.
• Press the button under the desired symbol

once (e.g. under symbol (6) for monitoring
the slewing angle).
The indicator lamp in the corresponding sym-
bol now appears in green and the monitoring
is switched on.
The limit values entered in displays (1) to (3)
are monitored ( à Reading the limit values
entered, p. 12 - 153).
When a monitoring function is switched on, the area monitored will be dis-
played graphically.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
The Limited working range display presents the

limiting values pictorially. As soon as a moni-
toring function is switched on, the Limited
working range display shows the following:
– A red circle for the working radius
– A sector of a circle (A – B) for the permissible
slewing angle
– Points joined by lines (e.g. (1 – 3) or (4 – 6)
for monitored objects
– A cross (7) for the current boom position
There is no representation of the overall
height.
H
When the monitoring is switched on, it is impossible to drive behind a
defined object.
Switching moni- After the ignition is switched on, all monitoring functions are switched off
toring off that were off before the ignition was switched off.
The monitoring is switched off with the but-

tons under symbols (4) to (7).
When monitoring is switched on, the indicator
lamp in the corresponding symbol will be
shown in green.
• Press the button under the desired symbol
once (e.g. under symbol (6)) for monitoring
the slewing angle.
The indicator lamp in the symbol now appears
in black and the monitoring is switched off.
The optical representation of this monitoring
goes out on the Limited working range display
(e.g. the circle section for monitoring the slew-
ing angle).
H
The displays (1) to (3) show the last input limit values, even if monitoring is
switched off. The black symbol is always the standard for switching off.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.6.9 Shutdown caused by working range limiter
When one or more monitoring functions are switched on and the shutdown
point has been reached, shutdown is carried out by the safe load indicator.
When shutdown is carried out by the working range limiter:

– Movements that would reach the shutdown point if continued any further
are switched off;àCrane movements which are switched off, p. 12 - 169.
– An error message appears on the Information display at the SLI insert;
à
Table of error codes, p. 14 - 35.
Crane move- The following table provides an overview of crane movements that are
ments which are blocked by the various monitoring functions when the shutdown point is
switched off reached.
Monitoring is switched on Blocked crane movements

for
– Raising
– Extending
Maximum overall height – Lowering the main hoist
– Lowering the auxiliary hoist1)
– Lowering / Raising the lattice extension 1)
– Lowering
– Extending
Maximum working radius – Raising the main hoist
– Raising the auxiliary hoist1)
– Lowering / Raising the lattice extension1)
– Slewing to the left
(when reaching slewing angle A)
Maximum slewing angle
– Slewing to the right
(when reaching slewing angle B)
Depending on the current position of object
to the boom:
– Slewing to the left or right
Monitored objects – Lowering
– Extending
– Lifting the main hoist
– Lifting the auxiliary hoist1)
– Lowering / Raising the lattice extension1)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Bypassing
shutdown
If the monitoring function of the working range limiter is switched off in the
Working range limiter submenu after shutdown has occurred, shutdown is
maintained for safety reasons.
Crane movement shutdown can only be overridden at the SLI.
G
Danger of accidents from overriding a shutdown!
Override the shutdown only if absolutely necessary and if you can clearly
see the danger zone. Remember that, because of boom bending, the overall
height of the truck crane increases when putting down the load.
When you press the Override key-operated push button, shutdown of crane
movements listed in the table above is bypassed.
Error messages on When shutdown occurs through the working range limiter, the SLI display
shutting down in the SLI monitoring submenu of the Error message / Warning / Information dis-
play will show an error message. The error will be defined in more detail in
the Error message submenu; à Table of error codes, p. 14 - 35.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7 Driving the truck crane from the crane cab

The rigged truck crane free on wheels can be operated from the crane cab
with a load (as shown in the Lifting capacity table) or without a load. To move
the rigged lattice extension, see à Lattice extension operating instructions –
Moving the rigged crane with rigged lattice extension.
G
Risk of accidents when driving with a lifted load!
The truck crane may only be moved with a lifted load when in the Free on
wheels working position and the current rigging mode is secured with the
SLI code for free on wheels operations.
G
Risk of accidents due to the hook block or load swinging
When driving the rigged truck crane secure the hook block and the load
against swinging and switch to gear position L for driving forwards. In this
way, you avoid driving too fast and stop the load from swinging due to a
gear change in the transmission.
G
Risk of accidents by not having a clear overview of the entire truck crane!
While driving the rigged truck crane, always stay in visual or radio contact
with a banksman who can observe the parts which you cannot see. In this
way you prevent accidents resulting from collisions with persons, other
construction equipment, ledges of buildings, cables or other objects.
G
Risk of accidents due to use of constant high engine speed when driving
the truck crane from the crane cab
Do not drive the truck crane from the crane cab at the constant engine
speed. You may only drive the truck crane from the crane cab at the lowest
speed possible.
G
Danger of overturning due to the centre of gravity being changed!
When driving a truck crane in rigged mode from the crane cab, take account
of the position of the centre of gravity of the crane. The further the main
boom is extended and the steeper the main boom, the higher the centre of
gravity is above the ground. Adjust the driving speed in accordance with
the centre of gravity, especially when driving round corners.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
G
Danger of overturning by slewing the superstructure while driving the
truck crane
Always lock the slewing gear brake (shut down the slewing gear) before
driving the truck crane with a load. If you slew the superstructure when
driving with a raised load, there is an increased risk of overturning due to
acceleration forces.
12.7.1 Route
The route surface must be even. Uneven surfaces cannot be compensated

with the level adjustment system. If the surface pressure of the tyres
exceeds the permissible load on the ground, the bearing surface pressure
must be increased using packing made of durable material (e.g. wooden
planks).
S
Risk of damage to tyres
Check the pressure in the tyres before moving the rigged truck crane.
The truck crane may be moved only if the tyre pressure is at the prescribed
levels; à Tyres, p. 9 - 6.
Never reduce the tyre pressure in order to increase the bearing surface of
the tyres.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.2 Preparing to drive
In the driver's cab The following conditions must be met in the driver's cab:
– The ignition key must be in position 1 so that the Driving mode submenu
can be opened and the steering is not locked when the truck crane is
driven from the crane cab.
– The driver's cab must have been locked with the second ignition key to
prevent unauthorized starting of the diesel engine from the carrier. This
will prevent the engine electronic system of the superstructure from com-
ing into conflict with that of the carrier.
Preconditions for The following conditions must be fulfilled before driving without load:
driving without a – The slewing gear brake is engaged.
load
– The truck crane must be in the Free on wheels working position.
– The outrigger span Free on wheels must be selected on the SLI, and the cor-
responding SLI code in accordance with the Lifting capacity table must be
shown.
– The main boom must be at an inclination which is permissible for the
working range of the SLI code that is set.
– The suspension must be locked.
– For safety reasons, the outrigger beams should remain extended corre-
sponding to the space available. The outrigger pads must not touch the
ground whilst the crane is being driven.
– The steering system must be switched to separate steering mode from
the crane cab; à p. 12 - 179.
– The ground on the route must be stable enough to withstand the maxi-
mum axle load during free-standing work; à
Total weight and axle loads,
p. 15 - 3.
– The route must be along a flat, even surface; à p. 12 - 172.
– The air pressure in the tyres must be correct; à Tyres, p. 9 - 6.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Preconditions for If the truck crane has to be driven with a raised load, then in addition to the
driving with a load preconditions set out above for driving without a load, the following pre-
conditions must be fulfilled as well.
G
Risk of accidents when driving with a lifted load!
When driving the rigged truck crane secure the load against swinging and
switch to gear position L. In this way, you avoid driving too fast and stop
the load from swinging due to a gear change in the transmission.
– The hook block and the load must be secured or lashed securely.
– For forward travel, gear position L is switched on; à p. 12 - 183.
– The main boom must be at an inclination which is permissible for the
working range of the SLI code that is set.
– The driving speed is max. 1.5 km/h .
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.3 Opening / closing the driving mode submenu
In order to operate the transmission, the separate steering and the differen-
tial locks, the Driving submenu must be open.
The Driving mode submenu can be opened both automatically and manually.
It is only possible to close the submenu manually.
Opening the • Check whether the ignition key in the driver's cab is turned to position 1.
submenu auto-
matically
• Actuate the Vehicle service brake pedal to prevent the truck crane from
suddenly starting to roll when the vehicle parking brake is released.
• Release the vehicle parking brake by pressing up the Vehicle parking brake
f rocker switch once.
The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp goes out.
The Driving mode submenu is opened automatically as soon as the vehicle
parking brake is released.
The transmission is in the neutral position N.

The point in the symbol H is displayed in
green.
The status saved last is displayed at the sym-
bols (1), (2) and (5) and the corresponding
switching operations are performed.
The displays (3) and (4) indicate the current
switching state.
The buttons next to the symbols (1), (2) and (5)
are active.
H
The Driving mode submenu remains open until it is closed manually. If you
now engage the vehicle parking brake, the same state is established as after
opening the submenu manually, à
p. 12 - 176.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Opening the sub- You can open the Driving mode submenu manually at any time.
menu manually
• Press the button next to the Driving submenu symbol q in the main menu.
The Driving mode submenu is opened.
The transmission is in neutral position N if the

parking brake is engaged.
The point in the symbol H is displayed in
green.
The symbols (2) and (5) are displayed in light
grey and the corresponding buttons are inac-
tive.
The points in the symbols (2), (5) and the dis-
plays (3), (4) indicate the current switching
state.
The LED (6) is on and the button
ö is active.
The colour of the key on the Steering lock display (1) indicates whether the
ignition key in the driver's cab is turned to position 1.
Green: The ignition key is turned to position 1.

Red: The ignition key is not turned to position 1.
H
The Driving mode submenu remains open until it is closed manually. If the
ignition key in the driver's cab is turned to position 1 and you now release
the vehicle parking brake, the same state is established as after opening the
submenu manually, à p. 12 - 175.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Closing the You can only close the Driving mode submenu manually.
Driving mode
submenu
• Engage the vehicle parking brake by pressing down the Vehicle parking
f brake rocker switch once.
The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp is on.
The same state is established as after opening the submenu manually. The
transmission switches to the neutral position N.
The LED next to the button

ölights up and the button
vehicle parking brake is engaged.
ö is active if the
• Press the button ö once.
The Driving mode submenu is closed.
The display switches to the main menu.
H
When the Driving submenu is open and the ignition key in the driver's cab
is turned out of position 1, the button
öwill also be activated.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.4 Steering
Switching on the To switch on the Steering function with the rocker buttons of the control
steering function levers, the Driving mode submenu must open automatically.
• Check whether the ignition key in the driver's cab is turned to position 1.
• Actuate the Vehicle service brake pedal to prevent the truck crane from
suddenly rolling away.
• Release the vehicle parking brake by pressing up the Vehicle parking brake
f rocker switch once.
The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp goes out.
The Driving mode submenu is opened.
The high-speed function is now deactivated on the control lever rocker but-
tons:
– The rocker button on the right hand control lever is assigned the Steering
function.
– The rocker button on the left-hand control lever can be assigned the Sep-
arate steering function.
Adapting the When steering from the superstructure, you can set the function of the
steering direction rocker buttons in the control levers in accordance with the superstructure
to the superstruc- position.
ture setting
The adjustment is made in the Driving mode submenu.

• To change the steering direction, press the button under the Change steer-
ing direction symbol p once.
The setting changes each time you press the button, and is displayed
directly on the Steering display (1):
– In the Slewed to the front setting, the carrier is displayed on the Steering dis-
play with the driver's cab in the direction of vision.
The steering direction of the control lever rocker buttons now corre-
sponds to the steering direction of the truck crane when the superstruc-
ture is slewed to the front (in the 180° to the front working position).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
– In the Slewed to the rear setting, the superstructure is displayed on the Steer-
ing display with the driver's cab opposite the direction of vision.
The steering direction of the control lever rocker buttons now corre-
sponds to the steering direction of the truck crane when the superstruc-
ture is slewed to the rear (in the 0° to the rear working position).
H
The steering direction currently set is saved and is even retained after turn-
ing the ignition off and on again.
Normal steering Drive the rigged crane in separate steering mode; à p. 12 - 179.
All axle lines are steered with the Steering rocker button in the right-hand
control lever if separate steering is deactivated. The following directional
information is based on the assumption that the steering direction has been
set appropriately for the current superstructure position.:
To steer to the right: Press in the rocker button to the right.
To steer to the left: Press in the rocker button to the left.
Separate steering With released separate steering the wheels of the first and second axle lines
with the Steering rocker button are steered in the right-hand control lever, as
with normal steering mode.
The wheels of the third and fourth axle lines are steered with the Separate
steering rocker button in the left control lever.
The separate steering can be operated in the two steering modes, All-wheel
steering and Crab travel.
– All-wheel steering:
The turning circle of the truck crane becomes smaller if you turn the
wheels of the front and rear axle lines in the opposite direction.
– Crab travel:
The truck crane drives sideways if you turn the wheels of the front and
rear axle lines in the same direction.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching to separate steering mode

Separate steering is switched on in the Driving mode submenu.
• Press the button next to the Separate steering on / off symbol h once.
The point in the symbol h is displayed in green and the rocker button in the
left control lever is assigned the Separate steering function if separate steering
is switched on.
The switching operation is initiated.
k The Intermediate position symbol (yellow) appears on the Steering locking sta-
tus display as soon as the steering of the third axle line is unlocked.
You must now switch over the steering system mechanically.

• Steer the third axle line with the Separate steering rocker button in the left
control lever until the wheels of the third and fourth axle lines have the
same steering angle.
The connection between the drag rods of the third and fourth axle lines
engages audibly and the wheels of the third and fourth axle lines deflect
in the same direction.
j The Unlocked symbol is displayed (in red) once the switching procedure is
over.
The steering system is now in all-wheel steering mode.
l The Error symbol is displayed (in violet) if an error is detected in the carrier
electronics during the unlocking procedures; à Malfunctions when driving
from the crane cab, p. 14 - 32.
Steering in separate steering mode

You can steer the wheels of the third and fourth axle lines with the Separate
steering rocker button in the left control lever if separate steering is switched
on.
The steering angle changes until you either let go of the rocker button or the
end position is reached.
H
The wheels of the first and second axle lines are steered with the Steering
rocker button on the right control lever.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching off separate steering

• Use the Steering rocker button to steer the wheels of the first and second
axle lines as far as possible to the right or left and keep them in this posi-
tion until the switching operation is over.
The switching operation is not started unless the wheels of the front axle
lines are turned as far as they will go.
• Press the button next to the Separate steering on / off symbol h once. The
point in the symbol h is displayed in black if separate steering is switched
on.
The switching operation is initiated.

To change the steering system mechanically, you must steer as follows:
– The second and fourth axle line steering drag rods must be connected
first.
• Use the Separate steering rocker button to steer the wheels of the rear
axle lines into the position for on-road driving which corresponds to the
position of the front wheels.
If the front wheels are, for example, turned to the right, you must turn the
rear wheels to the left.
The drag rods between the second and fourth axle line are connected to
each other if only the wheels of the third axle line turn when the rocker
button is actuated.
k The Intermediate position symbol (yellow) appears on the Steering locking sta-
tus display.
– You must now lock the third axle line steering.

• Use the Separate steering rocker button to turn the wheels of the third
axle line to the Straight ahead position until they cannot be moved any
more.
m The Locked symbol is displayed (in green) on the Steering locking status dis-
play once the switching procedure is over.
The steering system is now set to normal steering mode.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.5 Operating the transmission from the crane cab
All the operating elements for the transmission can be found in the Driving
mode submenu. The Driving mode submenu is opened automatically if
– The parking brake has been released.
After the submenu is opened automatically, the symbols L, H and E are

displayed in black and the buttons next to the symbols are active.
The transmission is in neutral position and the point in the symbol H is dis-
played in green.
Driving direction The directions of travel Reverse (R) and Forwards (D, L) are always defined
relative to the carrier.
You can use the arrows in the symbols for orientation if the steering direc-
tion has been set appropriately for the current superstructure position. The
arrows indicate the driving direction in relation to the direction of vision
from the crane cab.
In the 180° working position to the front,

– Select the gear position R to drive backwards in relation to the direction
of vision.
– forwards relative to the direction of vision - select gear position D or L.
In the 0° working position to the rear,

– backwards relative to the direction of vision - select gear position D or L.
– Select the gear position R to drive forwards relative to the direction of
vision.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Selecting the You can select the gear positions R, D or L.

gear position
At position D (driving without a load) the transmission can not be switched

any further than into sixth gear. As a consequence, the speed is limited to
approx. 20 km/h .
In gear position D no crane functions can be carried out.
The transmission does not shift gears in gear position R and L (driving with
a load).
In both cases the first gear is always switched on and the speed is limited to
about 5 km/h
Crane operations can be carried out in the gear positions R and L.
• To select a gear position, press the button next to the corresponding sym-
bol, e.g. next to the symbol L.
The point (1) in the symbol is displayed in green once the gear position
has been selected.
The prerequisites for switching between A, L and H are described in the
section titled Functional description of the display and operating elements for driv-
ing from inside the crane cab;à Transmission, p. 11 - 117.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.6 Driving the rigged truck crane
G
aban
Risk of accidents due to use of constant high engine speed when driving
the truck crane from the crane cab
Do not drive the truck crane from the crane cab at the constant engine
speed. You may only drive the truck crane from the crane cab at the lowest
speed possible.
G
Risk of overturning
Please keep the load bearing capacity of the ground and the maximum axle
load in mind when driving the crane; à p. 9 - 3. Pay attention to the longi-
tudinal and transverse inclination of the truck crane. Please also pay atten-
tion to the tyre pressure; à p. 9 - 6. If the tyre pressures are too low there
is a risk of the truck crane tipping over, and the tyres will wear rapidly.
G
Risk of accidents by not having a clear overview of the entire truck crane!
While driving the rigged truck crane, always stay in visual or radio contact
with a banksman who can observe the parts which you cannot see. In this
way you prevent accidents resulting from collisions with persons, other
construction equipment, ledges of buildings, cables or other objects.
S
Risk of damage to tyres
Check the pressure in the tyres before moving the rigged truck crane.
The truck crane may be moved only if the tyre pressure is at the prescribed
levels;à p. 9 - 6.
Never reduce the tyre pressure in order to increase the bearing surface of
the tyres.
S
Risk of damage to the steering linkage!
Steer the truck crane only when the vehicle is rolling. The steering linkage
can become damaged if the steering is operated while the vehicle is station-
ary.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Driving The same maximum permissible wind speeds apply as when working with
the crane; à
Monitoring the wind speed without an anemometer, p. 12 - 64.
G
Risk of accidents due to high wind speeds!
If the wind speed exceeds the maximum permissible values set out in the
Lifting capacity table, you must not drive the rigged truck crane. In this case
you must bring the truck crane into a safe condition; à p. 12 - 66.
EL • Before moving with a lifted load, shift to the gear position L (or R).
When gear position L (or R) is switched on, the speed is limited to ca.
5 km/h and the transmission will not shift. This prevents the load swing-
ing unnecessarily.
• Drive only at the lowest possible speed (max. 1.5 km/h).
• The turning radius should be as large as possible when driving around
corners.
• Steer the truck crane only when it is rolling and avoid sudden steering
movements.
When the surface is uneven the truck crane must be raised with the outrig-
ger cylinders, horizontally aligned and then re-lowered; à
During crane
work, p. 13 - 81.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Checks while Whilst driving, watch out for any warning messages.
driving
• Check whether the Error / warning message warning lamp (1) is lit and the
LED alongside the Warning message submenu button (2) is flashing.
• When the LED next to the button Submenu warning message (2) flashes,
press the button Submenu warning message once.
The Warning message submenu will open.

• Check whether one of the symbols appears in red, which indicates a mal-
function on the carrier.
If a warning is displayed; à Warning message submenu, p. 12 - 147.
Levelling the truck If the truck crane is in the working position Free on wheels and the suspension
crane free on is blocked, then you must not under any circumstances switch off the sus-
wheels pension blocking.
In this event you must support the truck crane before changing the align-
ment.
G
Danger of overturning when switching off the suspension locking system
You may by no means switch off the suspension locking system as long as
the rigged truck crane is on wheels. The suspension is not under pressure
and the suspension struts would be pressed together and damaged when
the suspension locking system is switched off, and the truck crane could
overturn.
The procedure for alignment is the same in this case as for driving with a
rigged truck crane; à
During crane work, p. 13 - 81.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.7 Possible connections
You can make the following connections one after another if this becomes
necessary due to traction difficulties on slippery ground:
– The longitudinal differential locks in the transfer case and in the third axle
line. With additional equipment with 8 x 8 x 8 the drive of the second axle
– The transverse differential locks in the driven axle lines.
S
Risk of damage to the differential locks
The differential locks may not be switched on when the vehicle is on firm
ground. Do not leave the differential locks switched on any longer than nec-
essary. Make absolutely sure you switch off the differential locks when driv-
ing on firm ground!
The operating and display elements for the longitudinal and transverse dif-
ferential locks are in the Driving mode submenu. The Driving mode submenu
is opened automatically if
– The parking brake has been released.
The symbols (1) and (2) are displayed in black

and the buttons next to the symbols are active
after the submenu is opened automatically.
The displays (3) and (4) indicate the current

switching state.
eY If the error symbol is displayed for the following connections;

à Malfunctions when driving from the crane cab, p. 14 - 32.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Longitudinal dif- When additionally equipped with a 8 x 8 x 8 drive, the drive of the second
ferential locks axle line is switched on and off together with the longitudinal differential
locks.
The gear change itself will only take place when the current speed is under
approx. 5 km/h.
• Stop the truck crane.

Switching on the longitudinal differential locks

• Press the button next to the Longitudinal differential locks on / off symbol M
once. The point in the symbol M turns green and the switching operation
is initiated.
• Start to drive the truck crane carefully. The current state is displayed on
the Longitudinal differential locks display (1):
Z – The Intermediate position symbol is displayed (in yellow) as long as all of

the switching operations have not yet been mechanically completed.
X – The Locks on symbol (red) is displayed if the longitudinal differential locks

are switched on.
Switching off the longitudinal differential locks

• Press the button next to the Longitudinal differential locks on / off symbol M
once. The point in the symbol M turns black and the switching operation
is initiated.
• The Longitudinal differential locks display (1) indicates the current state:
Z – The Intermediate position symbol is displayed (in yellow) as long as all of

W – The Locks off symbol is displayed (in green) if the longitudinal differential
locks are switched off.
H
Support the switch-off procedure by slowly driving back and forth if the
symbol W for Locks off is not displayed.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Transverse differ- The gear change itself will only take place when the current speed is under
ential locks ca. 5 km/h.
• Stop the truck crane.

Switching on the transverse differential locks

• Press the button next to the Transverse differential locks on / off symbol Q
once. The point in the symbol Q turns green and the switching operation
is triggered.
• Carefully start to move the truck crane. The Longitudinal differential locks
display (1) indicates the current state:
g – The Intermediate position symbol is displayed (in yellow) as long as all of

d – The Locks on symbol is displayed (in red) if the transverse differential locks
are switched on.
Switching of the transverse differential locks

• Press the button next to the Transverse differential locks on / off symbol Q
once. The point in the symbol Q turns black and the switching operation
is triggered.
• The Transverse differential locks display (1) indicates the current state:
g – The Intermediate position symbol is displayed (in yellow) as long as all of

f – The Locks off symbol is displayed (in green) if the transverse differential
locks are switched off.
H
Support the deactivation procedure by slowly driving back and forth while
turning the steering slightly if the symbol f for Locks off is not displayed.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.7.8 After driving
• Bring the truck crane to a halt with the Vehicle service brake pedal.
• Restore the original condition:

– Switch off the transverse differential locks; à p. 12 - 189.
– Switch off the longitudinal differential locks; à p. 12 - 188.
– Switch off separate steering and switch the steering system to normal
steering mode; àp. 12 - 181.
• Engage the parking brake when the truck crane is stationary. To do so,
f press down the vehicle parking brake rocker switchonce.
f The Vehicle parking brake indicator lamp goes on when the parking brake is
engaged. The rocker buttons in the control levers are now assigned the high
speed functions (and no longer assigned the steering function).
H
The lamp in the Vehicle parking brake rocker button is only used as a position
light and does not indicate whether the parking brake is engaged or
released.
The LED next to the button

submenu.
ö is now on and you can close the Driving mode
• Press the button ö once.
– The transmission switches to the neutral position N.
– The Crane control display switches to the main menu.
In the driver's cab:

• Pull the ignition key from the ignition lock and lock the driver's cab to pre-
vent unauthorised access.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.8 Work break
12.8 Work break
12.8.1 During short work breaks
G
Never leave the crane cab while a load is suspended on the hook.
Never turn the diesel engine off while a load is suspended.
Always keep your hands near the control levers while a load is suspended.
This enables you to take corrective action at all times.
• Check that the slewing gear is switched off. The slewing gear is switched
Y off when the indicator lamp in the Slewing gear on / off rocker button lights
up dimly.
t
The Slewing gear brake indicator lamp in the Crane control insert must light up.
Switch the diesel engine off, turn the ignition key to the0 position and
remove it.
Ensure that no unauthorized persons can operate the truck crane;

à Securing the truck crane against unauthorised use, p. 12 - 192.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.8 Work break
12.8.2 Work breaks lasting longer than 8 hours
• Retract all telescopic sections.

• Set down the boom onto the boom rest.
• Check that the slewing gear is switched off. The slewing gear is switched
Y off when the indicator lamp in the Slewing gear on / off rocker button lights
up dimly.
t
The Slewing gear brake indicator lamp in the Crane control insert must light up.
• Switch the diesel engine off, turn the ignition key to the0 position and
remove it.
• Switch off all power consumers.

• Switch off the battery master switch.
You can switch off the battery master switch even if the heater is still run-
ning down. This does not interrupt the run-down period of the heater.
Securing the truck • Secure the truck crane against unauthorized use as follows:
crane against – Stow away the hand-held control in the crane cab (it can be stored in the
unauthorised use compartment on the left next to the crane cab seat).
– Pull out the ignition key.
– Lock the crane cab.
G
Danger of unauthorised use!
Always stow away the hand-held control in the crane cab before leaving the
truck crane, and lock the door to the crane cab. In this way you can stop
unauthorized persons from starting the diesel engine with the hand-held
control.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.9 Heating and ventilating the crane cab
12.9.1 Heating
The crane cab is heated with an air heating system that runs independently
of the engine. The heat is generated by burning fuel taken from the heating
à
fuel tank ( p. 12 - 10).
The fan for the heating system delivers warm air into an air distribution box.
Here the air is mixed with either fresh air or recirculated air according to the
setting of the controls and then delivered into the crane cab by a fan.
The crane cab heater can be operated whilst the diesel engine is running or
is stopped (e.g. as programmable auxiliary heating system).
S
Accelerated discharging of battery when the diesel engine is switched off.
If you run the heater whilst the engine is stopped, the batteries will run
down. They will then have to be recharged after shorter periods of time.
Behind the crane cab seat there are various air extraction and air delivery
vents.
Therefore, do not cover the following grille

with bags, articles of clothing or any other
objects.
– The heating system draws air through grill

(2) into the heater.
– The heating system draws air through grill
(3) into the air circulation.
– Air is drawn through grill (1) for ventilating
the electronics.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching on the • Before switching on, check if the heater can be operated at the current site
heating of the truck crane. Find out, if necessary, about existing sources of danger
that can lead to an explosion.
G
There is a danger of explosion when using the heater!
Operation of the heater is not permissible:
– At service stations and tank farms
– At locations where flammable gas or vapours are found or can be formed
(e.g. at fuel stations and chemical factories)
– At locations where explosive dust is found or can be formed (e.g. coal
dust, wood dust, grain dust).
G
There is a risk of suffocation when using the heater!
Do not operate the heater and the timed heater in enclosed spaces
(e.g. garages).
H
This section describes how to switch the heater on manually. You can also
save the switch-on time and then have the heating turned on automatically;
à Saving automatic heating start, p. 12 - 198.
• Turn on the ignition; à Switching on the ignition, p. 5 - 11.
v • Press the push-button for Switching the heater on / off once.

The heater will switch on and the display and switches will light up.
The fan will automatically be switched to level 1 when the heater is switched
on.
Switching off the This section describes how to switch the heater off manually. If the heater
heating had been switched on automatically, then it will switch off again after the
set heating period. You can set this heating duration time; àSetting the
automatic heating duration, p. 12 - 199.
v • To switch off, press the Switch heating on / off push-button once. The heater
switches off immediately.
H
If you turn off the ignition while the heater is in operation, the heater will
continue running for a certain period. You can set this remaining time;
à Setting the remaining time, p. 12 - 201.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Adjusting the air To avoid overheating, the fan for air distribution will automatically run at
volume level 1 or higher for as long as the heating is switched on. This is the case
even if the fan is switched off at the Fan rotary switch.
The air volume delivered into the crane cab can be adjusted using the Fan
rotary switch.
Increasing the Turn the rotary switch clockwise. The rotary switch clicks
air volume: to three levels.
Reducing the Turn the rotary switch anti-clockwise.
air volume:
To turn off the Turn the rotary switch as far as possible anticlockwise.
blower:
Regulating the You can preselect a desired temperature in the crane cab with the Regulate
temperature temperature rotary switch.
Warmer: Turn the rotary switch clockwise.

Colder: Turn the rotary switch anti-clockwise.
The current setting can be determined by the position of the marking on the
rotary switch in relation to the arrow.
The higher the temperature selected, the faster the fan will blow air from the
heater.
If the temperature in the crane cab sinks below the set value, the heater will
switch on. When the value is reached, the heating switches off.
Setting recircu- Fresh air, recirculated air or mixed air can be selected as the intake air to the
lated air / fresh air heating system. You can select the intake air using the Fresh / Recirculated air-
rotary switch.
Fresh air mode: Turn the rotary switch clockwise as far as
possible.
Recirculated air mode: Turn the rotary switch as far as possible anti-
clockwise.
Mixed air: Turn the rotary switch to an intermediate set-
ting.
Turning towards the direction of a stop con-
tinuously increases the proportion of that con-
tribution to the intake air.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Setting the air dis- You can distribute the heating air between the various air vents with the Air
tribution distribution rotary switch:
Only for the screen and Turn the rotary switch to symbol (1).
centre air vents:
Cab floor air vents only: Turn the rotary switch to symbol (2).
All vents: Turn the rotary switch to symbol (3). By turning
to the symbol (1) or (2), the air flow at the corre-
sponding air vents will be increased in continu-
ous amounts.
Depending on the position of the Air distribution rotary switch, air is emitted
from the following vents:
Depending on the position of the Air distribu-

tion rotary switch, air is emitted from the fol-
lowing vents:
– From the air vents (1) and (2) at the windows
and at the centre
– From air vents at the cab floor (3)
At the air vents (2) and (3), you can also set the
direction of the air flow.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Adjusting the air vents

To open press in the plates in the recess (1) so
that they are at right angles to the air vent.
To close press the plates back in again.
To direct the air flow, you can also turn the air
vents at the serrated ring (2).
Setting the time Always set the current time and current weekday. These settings are
and weekday required for the correct switch-on time for automatic heating start.
If the power supply is interrupted, all symbols in the Heater display will flash
and you must set the time and day again.
• Press the Set time / day push-button (w) for longer than 2 seconds. The dis-
played time will flash, e.g. 10.00.
st • Set the desired current time with the Input push-buttons while the display
is flashing, e.g. 14.00.
• Wait five seconds. The new time is saved and then the weekday (e.g. MO
top left) flashes.
st • Set the current day with the Input push-buttons while the display is flash-
ing.
After five seconds the display stops flashing and the current time is dis-
played.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Saving automatic • Before setting, check whether the current time and day are set so that the
heating start automatic heating start will be activated at the desired time; à Setting the
time and weekday, p. 12 - 197.
• Turn the Fan rotary switch anticlockwise to the stop, to the Off position.
H
If the Fan rotary switch is set to levels 1 thro 3, then when the heating starts
automatically some of the indicator lamps of the dashboard will light up.
The heating system can be set so that it switches on automatically and

remains on for a particular length of time. The heating start can be set up to
seven days in advance, and the time it is switched on for can be set to
between ten minutes and two hours.
There are three storage locations in which you can store different heating
starts and then call them up at some later point.
H
If you call up values in order to change them with the following setting pro-
cess, they will flash for 5 seconds. Input must be made within this time span.
After 5 seconds, the value stops flashing and is saved as the new value.
u • Press the Call up storage locations push-button once.
The Heating display field will flash to indicate the storage location you acti-
vated (e.g. 2 at the bottom left) and the start time last saved for the heating
(e.g. 06:00).
st • Adjust the time for the desired heating start with the two Input push-but-
tons (e.g. 8.00 am).
Wait approx. 5 seconds. The new time is saved and then the weekday (e.g.
MO top left) of the heating start flashes.
st • Set the day for the desired heating start with the two Input push-buttons.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Wait approx. 5 seconds. The new weekday is saved and then the current
time is displayed. You have now allocated a new heating start for this stor-
age location. The heating start is now switched on; à
Switching automatic
heating start on / off, p. 12 - 200.
• If you want to save one or two other heating starts in the other two stor-
age locations, keep pressing the Call up storage locations push-button until
the corresponding storage place is shown in the bottom left of the Heater
display. The storage process ensues in the same manner as described
above.
After you have stored the heating start, you can also set the duration for
heating after the automatic switch-on.
Setting the auto- The heating duration after the heater has been switched on automatically is
matic heating set independently of the stored heating starts and then applies to all heating
duration starts which are called up.
v • Switch off the heating.
s Press the Input push-button for longer than 3 seconds.
The last heating duration which was set (in minutes) now flashes in the
Heater display for 5 seconds (e.g. 27 minutes).
st • Set the desired heating duration with the Input push-buttons while the
value is flashing.
You can set a heating duration of 10 to 120 minutes.
Wait five seconds. The new heating duration is saved and the Heater display
changes back to the current time (e.g. 14:00).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Switching auto- To switch on an automatic heating start, you must call up the particular stor-
matic heating age location where the desired heating start is stored.
start on / off
u • Press the Call up storage locations push-button once; the Heater display will
flash for 5 seconds.
When the display stops flashing, a storage location is shown in the bottom
left next to the time (e.g. 2). The heating start in this storage location is now
activated.
If you want to activate a different heating start, press the Call up storage loca-
tions push-button until the desired storage location is displayed. When the
status display stops flashing, that heating start is activated.
H
Each time the button is pressed, the storage location flashes in the display
for five seconds and you can read the time and day of the heating start if you
do not know the stored values.
To switch off the automatic heating start, press the Call up storage locations
push-button until only the current time is displayed and there is no longer a
number in the bottom left.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Setting the If the ignition is turned off with the heating turned on, the heating will
remaining time remain switched on for the remaining time. To change the remaining time,
the heater must have entered the remaining time period.
v • Switch on the heating.
The heater will stay on and the last remaining time period set is shown in
the Heater display in minutes (e.g. 27 minutes).
st • Set the desired remaining time with the Input push-buttons while the
value is flashing. You can set a heating duration of 1 to 120 minutes.
• Wait 5 seconds until the Heaterdisplay is no longer flashing and the cur-
rent time is displayed again. The remaining time is now set.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
12.9.2 Air-conditioning system
If air conditioning is fitted as additional equipment, a refrigerant compres-

sor is driven by the diesel engine. When the driving mode is switched on,
the refrigerant compressor provides the air-conditioning system of the
driver's cab. When the crane operation is switched on, the same refrigerant
compressor provides the air-conditioning system of the crane cab.
H
Information on the air conditioning in the crane cab can be found in the sec-
tion How to use the air conditioning effectively, p. 12 - 203.
Switching on • Switch off the crane cab heating; Switching off the heating, p. 12 - 194.
• To switch the air-conditioning system on, press the Air-conditioning on / off
rocker switch at symbol (1).
• Switch the fan to the desired level, e.g. to level 2.
• For more rapid crane cab cooling, switch the air intake to air recirculation.
Turn the Fresh air / recirculated air rotary switch as far as possible anticlock-
wise.
• Turn the Control temperature rotary switch anticlockwise as far as possible

to Cold (exception: dehumidifying crane cab; à p. 12 - 204).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Setting the air dis- The air distribution is set in exactly the same way as for the heating system:
tribution
– You can distribute the cold air between the various air vents with the Air
distribution rotary switch; à p. 12 - 196.
– By opening and closing the air vents, you can further refine the distribu-
tion of the volume of air to these areas.
– By setting the air vents, you can direct the flow of air.
• Adjust the air vents so that the cool air can mix well with the crane cab air.
Switching off
• To switch the air-conditioning system off, press the Air-conditioning on / off

rocker switch at symbol (1).
• Switch off the fan. To do so, turn the Fan rotary switch anticlockwise as far
as possible.
How to use the air Avoid having the air in the crane cab cool down too much.
conditioning effec- At an outside temperature of 40 °C, for example, the internal temperature
tively should be about 26 °C to 30 °C, i.e. the temperature difference should be 10
°C to 14 °C at most. If the outside temperature is lower, you should accord-
ingly select a lower temperature difference. Excessive cooling frequently
results in physical discomfort, usually after you have left the crane cab.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Crane operation
Avoid allowing cold air to be blown directly onto your body.

Direct the air stream from the nozzles in the cab floor in a way that the cold
air mixes thoroughly with the warm air in the cab. This produces an even
temperature throughout the cab and ensures cooling without a draught.
When using recirculation to dry the air in the driver's cab you should switch
over to mixed air mode from time to time, which at the same time will
ensure a fresh supply oxygen.
Adjust the cooling system as actually needed:
Initially, if the truck crane has, for example, been parked in strong sunlight
for a long time, the cooling system should be operated with the fan on set-
ting 3 and the diesel engine running.
The crane cab door or at least the windows should be left open for a short
while to ventilate thoroughly.
The procedure can be accelerated by increasing the speed of the diesel
engine.
If you run the air conditioner continuously, you must close the windows and
other air vents to ensure that the crane cab can be cooled adequately.
When the desired inside temperature is reached, turn down the setting on
the blower.
Drying the air in On humid days at the turn of the season you can dry the air in the crane cab
the crane cab by operating the air-conditioning system in a combined heating and cooling
mode.
As this involves the heating and air-conditioning system functioning "in
opposition to each other", dehumidifying produces only little or no heat.
• Switch on the air conditioning system; à Switching on, p. 12 - 202.

• Switch on the heating too; à Switching on the heating, p. 12 - 194.
• Switch to recirculated air mode; à Setting recirculated air / fresh air,
p. 12 - 195.
The crane cab heating system will now heat the crane cab up, thereby caus-
ing much of the dampness to evaporate. The second heater sucks in the
humid air and directs it firstly to the heat exchanger, in the course of which
some of the humidity condenses. The air is then directed from the heat
exchanger to the crane cab heating system, where it is heated.
This dry, warm air is directed into the crane cab again, where it mixes with
the humid air again and itself becomes humid before it is directed to the air
conditioner heat exchanger again. This circulation dries the air in the crane
cab.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
13
13 Rigging work
13.1 Checklists for rigging work for crane operation with main boom . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
13.1.1 CHECKLIST: Rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
13.1.2 CHECKLIST: Unrigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
13.2 Choosing a suitable site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9
13.2.1 Load bearing capacity of the ground and the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9
13.2.2 Safe distance from banks and pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12
13.2.3 Earthing of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 13
13.2.4 Safe distance from electrical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 14
13.3 Rigging work after driving with a trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 17
13.3.1 Switching off the boom floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 18
13.3.2 Switching off boom pre-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 19
13.3.3 Switching off slewing gear freewheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 20
13.4 Rigging add-on parts in position for crane operation / driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 23
13.4.1 Folding mirrors in and out and adjusting them . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 24
13.5 Connecting / removing the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 27
13.5.1 Connecting the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 27
13.5.2 Starting and turning off the diesel engine with connected hand-held control 13 - 28
13.5.3 Disconnecting the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 32
13.6 Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
13.6.1 CHECKLIST: Extending the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
13.6.2 CHECKLIST: Retracting the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 35
13.6.3 Permissible outrigger spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 37
13.6.4 Preparing the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 42
13.6.5 Extending / Retracting the outrigger beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 43
13.6.6 Securing the outrigger beams for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 55
13.6.7 Moving the outrigger pads into working / driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 56
13.6.8 Extending / Retracting the outrigger cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 57
13.6.9 Checking the alignment of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 69
13.6.10 Aligning the truck crane on outriggers horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 77
13.6.11 Aligning the free-on-wheels truck crane horizontally . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80
13.6.12 Outrigger pressure indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 83
13.7 Rigging / unrigging the counterweight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85
13.7.1 Counterweight parts and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85
13.7.2 Counterweight combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 87
13.7.3 Slinging points at the counterweight sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 91
13.7.4 CHECKLIST: Rigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 92
08.03.2006
13.7.5 CHECKLIST: Unrigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 94

13.7.6 Assembling counterweight combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 97
13.7.7 Counterweight hoist unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 109
13.7.8 Removing / installing the counterweight sections on the turntable . . . . . . . . 13 - 116

GMK 4080-1
13.7.9 Slewing with the rigged counterweight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 118
13.8 Rigging work on the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 121
13.8.1 Hook block on the bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 121
13.8.2 Hook block on a separate vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 123
13.8.3 Reeving and unreeving the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 126
13.8.4 Possible reeving methods with 6 main boom head sheaves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 132
13.8.5 Possible reeving methods with 7 main boom head sheaves. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 135
13.8.6 Installing / Removing the lifting limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 139
13.8.7 Locking the lifting limit switch / Releasing the lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 145
13.8.8 Anemometer and air traffic control light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 147
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.1 Checklists for rigging work for crane operation with main boom
13 Rigging work
Once you have reached the site, you must carry out numerous rigging tasks
before you can begin crane work. To do so, proceed according to this check-
list.
If the truck crane on the site has already been rigged, proceed according to
the CHECKLIST: When truck crane is rigged, p. 12 - 1.
13.1 Checklists for rigging work for crane operation with

main boom
H
13.1.1 CHECKLIST: Rigging
1. Choose a suitable site; à Choosing a suitable site, p. 13 - 9.

2. Check whether the parking brake is locked (parking brake lever points
toward the rear).
3. If the main boom is resting on a trailer:

– Switch off the boom floating position (additional equipment);
à p. 13 - 18.
– Switch off the slewing gear freewheel (additional equipment);
à p. 13 - 20.
– With additional equipment, switch off boom pre-tensioning if
necessary; à p. 13 - 19.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
4. For operation with free-on-wheels truck crane:

Align the truck crane horizontally with the level adjustment system;
à Aligning the free-on-wheels truck crane horizontally, p. 13 - 80.
à Locking the suspension,

u 5. Switch on the suspension locking system;
p. 13 - 42.
6. For operation with truck crane on outriggers:

Support truck crane with the outrigger span required for the planned
crane operation and align horizontally; à
CHECKLIST: Extending the
outriggers, p. 13 - 33.
7. Switch off diesel engine in the driver's cab or remove hand-held

control; à Shutting down the diesel engine, p. 12 - 33,
à Disconnecting the hand-held control, p. 13 - 32.
3 8. Press Driving mode / Crane operation rocker button down into the Driving
mode position; àStarting the diesel engine from the crane cab, p. 12 - 23.
9. Inspect the truck crane looking out in particular for any leaking fluids
(oil, fuel or water).
10. Start diesel engine from the crane cab;

à CHECKLIST: Starting the diesel engine, p. 5 - 1
à Starting the diesel engine from the crane cab, p. 12 - 23
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
0 11. With additional equipment, switch off houselock if necessary;

à Switching off the houselock, p. 12 - 19.
12. Pick up the hook block;

à Picking up the hook block, p. 13 - 124,
à Picking up the hook block from the bumper, p. 13 - 121.
13. Install the lifting limit switch, connect and check whether locking has
been deactivated;
à Installing the lifting limit switch, p. 13 - 139,
à Releasing the lock, p. 13 - 146.
14. Attach lifting limit switch weight and place around on hoist rope;
à Attaching lifting limit switch weights, p. 13 - 141,
à Place a lifting limit switch weight around the hoist rope, p. 13 - 142.
15. If necessary, install the anemometer and air traffic control light;
16. Fold out and adjust all mirrors for crane operation;
à Folding mirrors in and out and adjusting them, p. 13 - 24.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
17. Check the position of the hoist ropes; à Checking the electrical system,
p. 12 - 10.
18. Enter the SLI code according to the Lifting capacity table for the current
1100 rigging status of the truck crane; à
19. With the SLI set correspondingly, rig the counterweight combination
required for the crane operation according to Lifting capacity table;
à CHECKLIST: Rigging the counterweight, p. 13 - 92.
20. Enter SLI code according to the Lifting capacity table for the current rig-
ging status of the truck crane with the newly rigged counterweight
combination; à
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.1.2 CHECKLIST: Unrigging
H
1. With the SLI set correspondingly, unrig the counterweight;

à CHECKLIST: Unrigging the counterweight, p. 13 - 94.
2. Depending on how the hook block is transported:

à Setting down the hook block, p. 13 - 124.
à Attaching the hook block to the bumper, p. 13 - 122.
3. Retract main boom, lock telescopic sections and lock telescoping cylin-
der with telescopic section I for on-road driving; à
Locking the telescopic
section for on-road driving, p. 12 - 123.
4. For on-road driving without trailer:

– If required, turn superstructure into 180° position to the front with the
SLI set correspondingly.
– Place the main boom on the boom rest.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
5. For on-road driving with trailer:

– With the SLI set accordingly, slew the superstructure into the 0° rear
working position and set down main boom on a trailer; à
p. 7 - 10.
– Switch on the boom floating position; à p. 7 - 10.
– Switch on slewing gear freewheel; à p. 7 - 8.
– With additional equipment, switch off boom pre-tensioning if
necessary; àp. 7 - 12.
– With additional equipment, do not switch on the houselock;
à p. 12 - 17.
6. If necessary, remove the anemometer and air traffic control light;

7. Fold in all mirrors that were needed for crane operation; à Folding mir-
rors in and out and adjusting them, p. 13 - 24.
With additional equipment, turn the slewable working area spotlight

downward; àUsing the directional spotlight for the working area,
p. 12 - 144.
8. After operation with truck crane on outriggers:

Retract the outriggers; à
CHECKLIST: Retracting the outriggers,
p. 13 - 35.
à Checking the suspension,

u 9. Switch off the suspension locking system;
p. 6 - 10.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
10. Switch off diesel engine; à Shutting down the diesel engine, p. 12 - 33.
11. Remove the hand-held control if necessary and stow in the driver's cab;
12. When the truck crane is no longer being used; à Work breaks lasting
longer than 8 hours, p. 12 - 192.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.2 Choosing a suitable site

The stability of the truck crane primarily depends on the condition of the
ground at the site. Therefore, observe the following section Load bearing ca-
pacity of the ground and the outriggers, p. 13 - 9.
Using the Outrigger pressure table determine the pressure that will be applied
to the ground by the outrigger pads during the planned crane work.
Examine the actual lifting capacity of the ground at the site. If necessary,
enlarge the surface of the outrigger pads using suitable packing material;
à Enlarging the outrigger surface area, p. 13 - 11.
The permissible pressure on the ground under the support points must not
be exceeded.
The outrigger cylinders can only be used to compensate for a specific off-
road angle. It is therefore necessary to note the structure of the terrain. Max-
imum possible levelling by lifting with outrigger cylinders; à Technical
data, Outriggers, p. 9 - 4.
When choosing a site, ensure that there is sufficient distance between the
truck crane and banks, pits and electrical lines.
à Safe distance from banks and pits, p. 13 - 12 and
à Safe distance from electrical lines, p. 13 - 14.
13.2.1 Load bearing capacity of the ground and the outriggers
Choose the on-site location for your truck crane with care. It is most impor-
tant that the ground withstands the resulting outrigger pressure. Choose a
location that will facilitate the smallest possible radius and ensure that no
obstacles are within the slewing range of the crane.
Always extend all four outrigger beams to the span specified in the Lifting
capacity table even when you are only working to one side. Never move the
superstructure out of transport position without first locking the suspension
and supporting the truck crane.
The outrigger pads transmit the supporting force to the ground. If the sur-
face pressure of the outrigger pads exceeds the permissible load bearing
capacity of the ground, you must enlarge the surface area of the outrigger
with packing made of durable material (e.g. wooden planks, steel plates);
à Enlarging the outrigger surface area, p. 13 - 11. Arrange the packing under
each outrigger so that the outrigger pad touches down in the centre of the
08.03.2006
outrigger surface area.
s
GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
The required surface area is calculated using the resulting outrigger pres-
sure and the load bearing capacity of the ground.
You will find the outrigger pressure for the intended crane use in the outrig-
ger pressure table. Maximum outrigger pressure and size of the outrigger
pad; àTechnical data, Outriggers, p. 9 - 4.
The following table contains approximate values for the load bearing capac-
ity of the ground.
H
Have the ground tested (e.g. using a ram probe) if you are unsure of the load
bearing capacity of the ground at the site.
Load bearing
GUIDELINES FOR THE LOAD BEARING CAPACITY
capacity
OF THE GROUND
(t/m2)
Backfilled ground, not artificially compacted ground: 0 to 10
Vegetated, apparently untouched soil:
Mud, pit, marsh 0
Non-cohesive ground which is Fine to me- 15
sufficiently firm: dium sand
Coarse sand 20
to gravel
Cohesive ground: Mushy 0
Soft 4
Stiff 10
Semi-hard 20
Hard 40
Rock with minimal fissures in In closed suc- 150
sound, unweathered condition cession of
and with favourable strata: beds
In massive or 300
columnar for-
mation
Now calculate the required supporting surface area:
2 outrigger pressure (t)

surface area ( m ) = -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
⎛ t ⎞
loadbearing capacity of the ground ⎜ ---------⎟
⎝ m 2⎠
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Always align the packing horizontally. Always align the truck crane horizon-
tally with the outrigger cylinders.
G
Danger of overturning when carrier or truck crane is at an angle!
Line up the carrier horizontally and align the truck crane horizontally with
the outrigger cylinders. In this way you prevent the outrigger pads slipping
from the angled carrier, or the truck crane from having an unfavourable
centre of gravity owing to an incline and overturning when subject to a
load.
Enlarging the Only use durable materials for the packing, such as:
outrigger surface – Thick wooden planks or squared timbers made of hardwood (such as
area Guinean red ironwood (ekki), etc.)
– Thick steel plates with welded webs that prevent the outrigger pads from
slipping or
– Wide steel profiles welded together (girders), with weld on webs that pre-
vent the outrigger pads from slipping
G
Danger of accidents by crane overturning due to weak packing!
Thin boards or planks made of pine wood or bricks are not made to with-
stand the resulting pressure and divert it safely into the ground.
Wooden planks and square timbers must have a height of at least 80 mm.
They must be knotless and free of fractures.
Please note the illustration on the left when

constructing the packing.
The materials used must have the same height

in every layer.
The layers must be offset one below the other

by 90°.
Consult your supervisor if you are in doubt.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.2.2 Safe distance from banks and pits
Set the crane a safe distance away from slopes and pits. The distance also
depends on the type of soil if the slopes and pits are not supported.
As a rule of thumb:
For loose or backfilled ground the safe
distance (a) must be twice the depth of the pit
(b).
a=2xb
For vegetated, cohesive ground the safe

distance (a) must be equal to the depth of the
pit (b).
a=1xb
The safe distance is measured from the base

of the pit (c).
In addition to this the safety strip (d) between
the pads and the pit border must always be
more than 2.00 m .
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.2.3 Earthing of the truck crane
B
Earth the truck crane before starting crane work
– Near strong transmitters (radio transmitters, radio stations, etc.)
– Near high-frequency switching stations
– If a thunder storm is forecasted
The truck crane can become electrostatically charged. This applies in partic-
ular if the truck crane is equipped with synthetic outrigger pads or the out-
rigger pads are packed with insulated material (e.g. wooden planks).
Earthing the truck To prevent electrostatic charging of the truck crane, you will need:
crane
– A conductive metal rod to insert into the earth (approx. 2.0 m in length)
– An electrically conductive cable, minimum cross section 16 mm2
– A screw clamp for welding work
B
Ensure that the connection between the load and the ground is a perfect,
electrically conductive connection.
• Connect one end of the cable to the metal rod that is to be inserted into
the ground. Hammer the metal rod at least 1.5 m into the ground. Moisten
the soil around the metal rod for better conductivity.
B
Fasten the screw clamp for welding work on welded parts of the main
boom or the superstructure only.
Do not fasten the clamp to screwed on parts such as valves, cover plates,
engines, gear units etc.!
• Connect the other end of the cable to the screw clamp for welding work
and fasten the clamp to the main boom or the superstructure.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.2.4 Safe distance from electrical lines
Always observe the regulations of the country where you are working if
there are electrical lines in the working range of the truck crane. This applies
in particular if these lines are overhead cables which have not been shut off
by an electrician or have not been covered in the danger zone.
B
This truck crane is not insulated. Contact between overhead power lines
and the boom, the hoist rope, the hook block, the lifting tackle, the load it-
self or the guide ropes can result in serious, possibly fatal injuries.
Have the current in the power lines switched off or keep the truck crane, its
equipment, lifting tackle and the load at a minimum safe distance as spec-
ified by the local regulations for that level of voltage.
• Contact the responsible electrical utility and have them switch off the cur-
rent from the relevant power line.
If it is not possible to switch-off the current, then the prescribed safe dis-
tance (A) must be observed ( à illustration). The distance A varies accord-
ing to local regulations. The following safe distances are recommended:
In accordance with DIN VDE 0105 (EU member states)

.
Voltage Minimum distance A

Up to 1 000 V 1m
From 1 000 V to 110 000 V 3m
From 110 000 V to 220 000 V 4m
From 220 000 V to 380 000 V 5m
In accordance with ASME B30.5-2000 (USA)
Voltage Minimum distance A

Up to 50 000 V 3.05 m
From 50 000 V to 200 000 V 4.60 m
From 200 000 V to 350 000 V 6.10 m
From 350 000 V to 500 000 V 7.62 m
From 500 000 V to 750 000 V 10.67 m
From 750 000 V to 1 000 000 V 13.72 m
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
• Set up an obstacle at the minimum safe distance which keeps the truck
crane and its attachments away from the power line. The obstacle must
be erected in such a manner that wind effects on the cable and possible
swinging of the load are taken into account.
• One banksman, or more than one if necessary, must monitor compliance
to the minimum safe distance and warn the crane operator in time if it is
necessary to stop crane movements. The banksman and crane operator
must be in communication with each other via radio.
• In addition, block off the area around the truck crane with minimum safe
distance. The safety area in case of line contact is thus enlarged.
• The banksman must also ensure that nobody is near power lines or in the
safety area when work is being carried out.
• When the load has to be guided, use only guide ropes of non-conducting
material.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
If the crane should come into contact with the cable despite all precautions:
• Keep calm.
• Do not leave the crane cab.
• Tell anyone standing outside to stop whatever they are doing and that
they are not to touch the crane, the load and the lifting tackle.
• Move the crane out of the danger zone.
If it is necessary to leave the crane, do not touch the crane and the ground
simultaneously. For this reason, do not climb down off the crane, but jump
from the crane to the ground.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.3 Rigging work after driving with a trailer

Carry out the following prior to working with the crane if the main boom
was resting on a trailer (Dolly) while driving:
– Switch off the slewing gear freewheel; à p. 13 - 20.

– Switch off the boom floating position; à p. 13 - 18.
– Switch off boom pre-tensioning if required; à p. 13 - 19.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.3.1 Switching off the boom floating position
This section only applies where boom floating position is fitted as additional
equipment and the boom is placed on a trailer (Dolly) for on-road driving.
The boom floating position may only be switched on for transporting the
main boom on the trailer. You need to switch off the boom floating position
before you lift the main boom off the trailer.
H
Due to different fitting positions of the changeover valve, the position of the
lever can deviate from the following illustrations. The following, however,
always applies to the position of the hand lever:
– For Driving, the lever is always pointing vertically upwards or down-
wards. Boom floating position is switched on.
– For Crane operation, the lever is always pointing horizontally outwards or
inwards. Boom floating position is switched off.
Valve I (1) is on the derricking cylinder.
• Remove the padlock (2) on the lever.

• Shift the hand lever into position B
(horizontal).
• Secure the hand lever with the padlock (2)
and remove the key.
The boom floating position is now switched
off.
G
Danger of accidents due to the main boom falling down!
After switching off the boom floating position, always secure the hand lever
with the padlock. The boom will fall down if the levers are accidentally op-
erated while the boom is raised.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.3.2 Switching off boom pre-tensioning
This section only applies to additional equipment with boom pre-tension-

ing.
If you switched on boom pre-tensioning for on-road driving, switch it off
again before lifting the main boom off the trailer.
The hand valves I to IV are located in the hydraulic circuit for the boom pre-
tensioning.
Set the valves to the following positions:
Valve I (on derricking cylinder with padlock):

Valve I is in the correct position if the boom floating position is switched off;
à p. 13 - 18.
Valve IV
The valve IV (1) is located directly on the der-

ricking cylinder.
• Shift the hand lever into position A for crane

operation.
S
Danger of overheating the hydraulic oil!
Always close valve IV before using the crane. If valve IV is left open, the
pressure in the boom pre-tensioning hydraulic circuit will increase consid-
erably which may result in the hydraulic oil being heated to above the per-
mitted temperature of 80 °C .
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Valves II and III

The valves II and III are on the left side of the
turntable behind the crane cab and access
ladder.
The pressure accumulator is drained with
valve II.
• Switch valve II (2) to position B (open).

The pressure at the pressure gauge (3) must
drop to 0 bar .
Valve III (1) is not used. For crane operation it

needs to be switched to position A (closed).
13.3.3 Switching off slewing gear freewheel
This section only applies whenever a slewing gear freewheel is fitted as ad-
ditional equipment and where the boom is placed on a trailer for on-road
driving.
If the main boom has been set down onto the trailer for on-road driving, the
slewing gear freewheel is switched on. You must switch off the slewing gear
freewheel before working with the crane.
S
Risk of damage to the superstructure when working with the crane while
the slewing gear freewheel is switched on!
As long as the slewing gear freewheel is switched on, the slewing super-
structure cannot be braked with the slewing gear brake. Switch off the slew-
ing gear freewheel in order to work with the crane. This prevents the super-
structure from colliding with obstacles as it turns.
Prerequisites You can only switch off the slewing gear freewheel when the following con-
ditions have been fulfilled:
– The diesel engine has been started from the crane cab.
1 – The slewing gear is switched on and the Slewing on / off indicator lamp is
shown on the Crane control display in green; à
p. 12 - 83.
t – The service brake is released and the Slewing gear brake indicator lamp
08.03.2006
goes out on the Crane control insert; à p. 12 - 83.

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
– The Slewing gear service brake pedal is not activated; à p. 12 - 88.
: H When the pin cannot be pulled out in the following step, then you can re-
lieve the system by performing Inclining the crane cab back to a horizontal posi-
tion. Press up the Incline crane cab rocker button.
• Remove the lock (4) from the bore hole (1).

• Pull the pin (3) out as far as possible.
• Guide the lock with the bracket through the
bore (2).
• Lock and remove the key.
The slewing gear freewheel is now switched
off and secured against being switched on by
unauthorised persons.
• Open the valve (5).

• Switch off the slewing gear freewheel on the
second slewing gear in the same way.
G
Risk of accidents due to reduced brake power
After switching slewing gear freewheel off, always open the valve on the
slewing gear.
When the valve is closed, the slewing gear brake power is insufficient for
crane operation.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Before slewing • Check that the free on wheels truck crane can be slewed with the currently
rigged counterweight; à Slewing with the rigged counterweight, p. 13 - 118.
G
For a free on wheels truck crane, the superstructure may only be rotated if
there is a maximum of 7.6 t counterweight on the turntable and the radius
G
Danger of overturning with a rigged outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m!
With an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 mthe superstructure may only be ro-
tated if there is a maximum of 8.6 t counterweight on the turntable and the
radius permitted in the working area is maintained according to the Lifting
capacity table (at least 3.0 m).
• If necessary, support the truck crane with the required outrigger span.
• Enter the corresponding SLI code for the supported or free on wheels
truck crane.
• Raise the main boom to an angle permitted within the working range.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.4 Rigging add-on parts in position for crane operation / driving
13.4 Rigging add-on parts in position for crane operation /

driving
This section describes rigging the parts on the truck crane that need to be
brought into different positions for driving and crane operation so that the
truck crane's dimensions and specified values for on-road driving are ob-
served.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.4.1 Folding mirrors in and out and adjusting them
Main hoist mirrors The hoist mirrors must be folded in for driving. For crane operation you
must fold the mirrors out again and adjust them.
G
Danger of accidents by exceeding the permitted overall height!
Fold the hoist mirrors and the mirror in again for driving. When the mirrors
are folded out, the overall height specified for on-road driving is exceeded.
Folding out mirrors

• Fold the mirror (2) on the main hoist up-
wards.
• For operation with the auxiliary hoist (addi-
tional equipment) fold the mirror (1) on the
auxiliary hoist upwards.
• Fold the mirror (3) on the crane cab up-
wards.
Adjusting mirrors
• Adjust the required hoist mirrors (1) and (2)
and the mirror (3) on the crane cab so that
you have a clear view of the rope running on
the hoist.
Folding in mirrors
• Fold the mirror (3) down onto the crane cab.
• Fold the mirror (2) down onto the turntable
frame.
• With additional equipment fold down the
mirror (1) onto the frame of the auxiliary
hoist.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Mirror for moni- The mirrors for monitoring the outriggers must be folded in for driving. For
toring the crane operation you must fold the mirrors out again and adjust them.
outriggers
S
Danger of accidents by exceeding the permitted overall width!
Fold the mirrors for monitoring the outriggers in again for driving. When
the mirrors are folded out, the overall width specified for on-road driving is
exceeded.
Folding out and adjusting mirrors

• Fold out the mirror (1).
• Adjust the mirror (1) in such a way that the
rear right outrigger beam can be observed
clearly from the crane cab when the main
boom is raised.
Folding in mirrors
• Fold in the mirror (1) until it no longer pro-
trudes over the side of crane carrier (2).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.5 Connecting / removing the hand-held control

You can connect the hand-held control to the sockets on the superstructure
or to the sockets on the carrier.
13.5.1 Connecting the hand-held control
• Always switch the diesel engine off before you connect the hand-held
control.
H
Although the diesel engine switches off once you remove a bridging plug
from a socket, this type of switching off is only for an emergency.
You can connect the hand-held control when the ignition is switched on and
off.

• Remove the bridging plug (3) from the
socket (1).
• Insert the plug (4) of the hand-held control
into the socket (1).
• Secure the plug (4) with the cap (2).
• Wait about 20 seconds until the CAN indica-
tor lamp (5) goes on. The ignition is now
switched on and the Charge control indicator
lamp (6) lights up.
If the CAN indicator lamp does not light up or
flash after approx. 20 seconds, there is a mal-
function; àp. 14 - 16.
Now you can start the diesel engine.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
After connecting it to the right side of the carrier

With standard equipment without Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pres-
sure indicator switch boxes, you can place the hand-held control for crane op-
eration in the shelf (1) on the right on the carrier.
The hand-held control can remain connected for crane operation.
G
Always keep the hand-held control in the driver's cab or in crane cab after
crane operation, and always lock the doors when you leave the truck crane.
In this way you can stop unauthorized persons from starting the diesel en-
gine with the hand-held control.
13.5.2 Starting and turning off the diesel engine with connected hand-
held control
The first start of the day should always be made from the driver's cab, as all
the control and display instruments for monitoring the engine can only be
accessed there.
If the hand-held control is connected, you can start the diesel motor with the
hand-held control, also from the driver's cab or the crane cab as required.
H
You can generally only start the diesel engine if the bridging plug is inserted
in all sockets which are not required.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
With the hand- If the battery master switch is switched on and the hand-control is connect-
held control ed, you must switch the Driving mode / crane operation rocker button as fol-
lows in order to turn on the diesel motor:
3 – If the hand-held control is connected, then press the Driving mode / crane
operation rocker button up into the Driving mode position.
3 – If the hand-held control is connected to a superstructure socket, then

press the Driving mode / crane operation rocker button down into the Crane
operation position.
H
If the hand-held control is connected to a superstructure socket, you cannot
drive the power units from the crane cab.
Starting the diesel engine

You can also start the diesel engine if the ignition in the driver's cab or crane
cab is switched on.
All activities and inspections required to start the diesel engine must be car-
ried out before starting the diesel engine; à p. 5 - 1.
• Wait until the CAN (2) and Charge control (1) indicator lamps go on.
If the CAN indicator lamp does not light up or flash after approx. 20 seconds,
there is a malfunction; à p. 14 - 16.
• Press the START (3) button; the diesel engine will start. Release the button
as soon as the diesel engine is running.
Shutting down the diesel engine

• On the hand-held control press the Stop (1) button, the diesel engine shuts
down.
If you start the diesel engine from the hand-held control, you cannot switch
it off by switching off the ignition in the driver's house or crane cab.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
From the driver's If the battery master switch is switched on, then you can start the diesel en-
cab gine from the driver's cab. The hand-held control functions active after start-
ing depends on which socket the hand-held control is connected to.
– If the hand-held control is connected to a socket on the carrier, then all the
functions that can be accessed from this socket are active.
– If the hand-held control is connected to a socket on the superstructure,
then all the functions on the hand-held control are locked except
emergency stop.
• Check whether the Driving mode / crane operation rocker button is pressed
3 up in the Driving mode position.
With the ignition switched off, press the rocker button up if necessary.

starts.

• Turn the ignition key to position 0. The diesel engine goes out.
If you start the diesel engine from the driver's cab, you cannot turn it off by
pressing the Stop button on the hand-held control.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
From the crane If the battery master switch is switched on, then you can start the diesel en-
cab gine from the crane cab. The hand-held control functions active after start-
ing depends on which socket the hand-held control is connected to.
– If the hand-held control is connected to a socket on the superstructure,
then all the functions that can be accessed from this socket are active.
– If the hand-held control is connected to a socket on the carrier, then all the
functions on the hand-held control are locked except emergency stop.
• Check whether the Driving mode / crane operation rocker button is pressed
3 down in the Crane operation position.
With the ignition switched off, press the rocker button down if necessary.

starts.

• Turn the ignition key to position 0. The diesel engine goes out.
If you start the diesel engine from the crane cab, you cannot turn it off by
pressing the Stop button on the hand-held control.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.5.3 Disconnecting the hand-held control
• Always switch the diesel engine off before you remove the hand-held con-
trol.
H
Although the diesel engine switches off once you remove the hand-held
control plug, this type of switching off is only for an emergency.
You can remove the hand-held control when the ignition is switched on and
off.

• Remove the plug (4) of the hand-held con-
trol from the socket (1).
When you pull out the plug, the CAN (5) and
Charge indicator (6) indicator lights go out.
• Insert the bridging plug (3) into the socket

(1).
• Secure the bridging plug (3) with the cap (2).
H
The ignition is switched off by pulling the plug of the hand-held control from
the socket, unless the ignition is switched on at the ignition lock in the crane
cab or in the driver's cab.
G
Always keep the hand-held control in the driver's cab or in crane cab and
lock the doors after leaving the truck crane. In this way you can stop unau-
thorized persons from starting the diesel engine with the hand-held control.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6 Outriggers
G
Danger of being crushed by extended outrigger beams!
You may activate the outriggers only if you yourself or a banksman with
whom you are in visual contact have an unobstructed view of their move-
ments.
13.6.1 CHECKLIST: Extending the outriggers
H
1. Horizontally align and lower the truck crane with the level adjustment
system; à Checking the alignment of the truck crane, p. 13 - 69.
à Locking the suspension,

u 2. Switch on the suspension locking system;
p. 13 - 42.
3. For standard equipment connect the hand-held control for operating

the outriggers; àp. 13 - 43.
With additional equipment the outriggers can also be operated from

the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure indicator switch boxes.
4. Extend all outrigger beams to the necessary span of the required

outrigger span;
à Permissible outrigger spans, p. 13 - 37.
à Extending / Retracting the outrigger beams, p. 13 - 43.
à Setting outrigger spans, p. 13 - 51.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
5. Move the outrigger pads into working position and lock them in place;
à Moving them into working position, p. 13 - 56.
6. Enlarge the surface area of the boom if necessary; à Enlarging the

outrigger surface area, p. 13 - 11.
7. Extend the outrigger cylinders until no wheels are touching the ground;
à Extending / Retracting the outrigger cylinders, p. 13 - 57.
8. Align the truck crane horizontally with the outriggers;

à Aligning the truck crane on outriggers horizontally, p. 13 - 77.
G
Danger of the truck crane overturning if improperly supported!
When working with the crane always:
– Extend the outrigger beams only to the permitted span of 2.32 m, 5.00 m,
6.00 m or 7.00 m.
– Extend all four outrigger beams to the same span.
– Enlarge the surface area of the boom if necessary.
– Raise the truck crane until no wheels are touching the ground.
– Align the truck crane horizontally.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.2 CHECKLIST: Retracting the outriggers
H
1. Retract the lifting cylinders as far as possible; à Extending / Retracting

the outrigger cylinders, p. 13 - 57.
2. Move the outrigger pads into driving position and lock them in place;
à , p. 13 - 56.
3. Fully retract and secure all outrigger beams;

à Extending / Retracting the outrigger beams, p. 13 - 43,
à Securing the outrigger beams for on-road driving, p. 13 - 55.
4. Remove the hand-held control and stow it if necessary;

s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
5. For road safety reasons, keep packing material in the storage box or on
a separate vehicle.
à Checking the suspension,

u 6. Switch off the suspension locking system;
p. 6 - 10.
G
Danger of accidents during on-road driving!
For on-road driving:
– All outrigger beams and cylinders must be fully retracted. All outrigger
beams must be secured.
– All outrigger pads must be pushed in and secured.
The outriggers must not protrude from the outer limits of the vehicle.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.3 Permissible outrigger spans
You can set various outrigger spans with the outriggers.

The outrigger spans are specified in metres x metres, e.g. 8.10 x 7.00 m.
The first value stands for the outrigger beam length between the front and
rear outrigger beams. It is always 8.10 mwith the GMK 4080-1 truck crane .
The second value indicates the necessary span to which you must extend
the outrigger beams. The spans for the following outrigger spans are per-
missible:
– Outrigger span of 8.10 x 7.00 m
The prescribed span can be found in the Lifting capacity table.
An outrigger cylinder is mounted at the end of every outrigger beam. The
outrigger cylinders are used to raise, lower and horizontally align the truck
crane.
G
Danger of the truck crane overturning when slewing if it is insufficiently
supported!
Depending on the counterweight rigged, the truck crane must be
sufficiently supported and the radius permitted in the working range must
be observed in line with the Lifting capacity table before the superstructure
can be rotated.
Observe all the instructions in the following sections, as well as in the sec-
à
tion Slewing with the rigged counterweight; p. 13 - 118.
G
Danger of the truck crane if it is not properly supported!
Always extend all four outrigger beams to the required outrigger span,
even if you are only working to one side. Otherwise the rear stability for the
rigging mode according to the SLI code is no longer guaranteed.
Raise the truck crane on the outriggers until none of the wheels are touch-
ing the ground.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Outrigger span of The outrigger length is 8.10 m.

8.10 x 7.00 m Front span 7.00 m
Rear span 7.00 m
Display on the SLI 7.00 m
8.10 m

8.10 x 6.00 m Front span 6.00 m
Rear span 6.00 m

8.10 m
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers

8.10 x 5.00 m Front span 5.00 m
Rear span 5.00 m
8.10 m
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers

8.10 x 2.32 m Front span 2.32 m
Rear span 2.32 m
8.10 m
G
Danger of overturning with a rigged outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m!
With an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m may only be rotated if there is a
maximum of 6.8 t counterweight on the turntable and the working radius
permissible in the working range is maintained according to the Lifting ca-
à
pacity table (at least 3.0 m ); Slewing with the rigged counterweight,
p. 13 - 118.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Free on wheels The truck crane is standing on all wheels.

All outrigger cylinders are extended as far as possible according to the avail-
able space. All outrigger cylinders are extended just above the ground. Ob-
serve the instructions in section If the truck crane is free on wheels;
à p. 12 - 70.
Display on the SLI
G
Danger of the free-on-wheels truck crane overturning!
With free-on-wheels truck cranes, the superstructure may only be rotated if
there is a maximum counterweight of 4.3 t on the turntable and the radius
permitted in the working area is maintained according to the Loading ca-
pacity table (at least 3.0 m);à Slewing with the rigged counterweight,
p. 13 - 118.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.4 Preparing the truck crane
Aligning the truck Before supporting the truck crane it should be aligned horizontally and low-
crane horizontally ered as far as possible.
• Align the truck crane horizontally in longitudinal and lateral directions us-
ing the level adjustment system; à Level adjustment system, p. 6 - 56.
H
If the truck crane is situated on a low level, the distance of the outrigger pads
to the ground is small. If necessary, uniformly lift the truck crane with the
level adjustment system if you have to pack the outrigger pad or, owing to
the condition of the terrain, you extend a support against a hill.
Locking the The suspension must be locked in all axle lines when the truck crane is on
suspension outriggers. For this reason, the crane control only releases the operating
elements for the outriggers if the suspension locking system is switched on.
• To do this push down the Suspension locking system rocker switch in driver's
u cab.
u The Suspension locking system indicator lamp lights up when the suspension
is locked.
Switching on / off If the ignition is switched on from the crane cabin, then the display fields in
the display fields the Outriggers / electronic level display / outrigger pressure display switch boxes
on the carrier (additional equipment) are simultaneously switched on.
You can switch the display fields on and off from the crane cab.
! • To do this, press the button in the main menu next to the Settings / Displays
symbol.
• To switch on or off, press the button next to the Display fields carrier on / off
(1) symbol.
The display Carrier display fields on / off indicates the current status:
– When the display fields are switched on, symbol (2) will be shown.
– When the display fields are switched off, symbol (3) will be shown.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.5 Extending / Retracting the outrigger beams
You can operate the outriggers from the carrier and from the superstruc-
ture.
Operation from the superstructure is preferable for subsequent aligning
during crane work; à
From the crane cab, p. 13 - 48.
There are different operating elements on the carrier depending on the truck
crane's equipment:
– For standard equipment you operate the outriggers with the hand-held
control; à With the hand-held control, p. 13 - 43.
– For additional equipment the outriggers can also be operated from the
Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure indicator switch boxes; à
From
the switch boxes, p. 13 - 46.
With the hand- In order to operate the outriggers with the hand-held control you must con-
held control nect the hand-held control.
Connecting the hand-held control

The sockets (1) and (2) for connecting the
hand-held control are located on the carrier.
– From socket (1) you can only operate the
outriggers on the right-hand side.
– From socket (2) you can only operate the
outriggers on the left-hand side.
• Connect the hand-held control to the re-
quired socket. For further information about
connecting; à Connecting the hand-held con-
trol, p. 13 - 27.
• Start the diesel engine with the hand-held control; à With the hand-held
p control, p. 13 - 29.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Extending and retracting outrigger beams

• Before driving you have to position the locking pins and safety hoops ap-
propriately for the desired span; à Setting outrigger spans, p. 13 - 51.
S
Risk of damage to the outrigger beams!
Before extending the outrigger beams, always check that they are released.
In such a way you avoid the outrigger beams bending or damaging the
locking bars.
G
Danger of accidents when outrigger movements are performed outside
your field of vision!
Block off the danger area of the moving outrigger beams before moving
them. Monitor the movements of the outrigger beams closely or have a
banksman, with whom you are in visual contact, monitor the movements
during operation.
Nobody, not even the banksman, may be in the danger zone of moving out-
rigger beams.
G
Only ever extend the outrigger beams to the span of a permitted outrigger
span (7.00 m, 6.00 m, 5.00 m) or retract them completely (2.32 m).
All the required buttons are on the Outrigger / electronic level operating panel.
You can pre-select two different speeds with the High speed (1) pre-selection
button.
Pressing the High speed pre-selection button switches between High speed
and Normal speed. The LED in the button shows the current pre-selection:
ÁI – If the LED is not lit, Normal speed is pre-selected for a slow movement.
The movement is carried out at idling speed of the diesel engine.
H – If the LED is lit, high speed is pre-selected for a faster movement.

The movement is carried out at increased speed of the diesel engine.
H
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
• Select the outriggers first before their outrigger beams are to be moved.
To do this, press the button next to the corresponding symbol. You can
only pre-select outrigger beams on the side on which the hand-held con-
trol is connected.
M – Front left outrigger or
E – Front right outrigger or
O – Rear left outrigger or
G – Rear right outrigger or
MO – Front and rear left outriggers or
EG – Front and rear right outriggers
L Now the green LED lights up for approx. 10 seconds in the symbol of the
pre-selected outrigger (e.g. front left outrigger). During this time you can
start moving the outrigger beam.
In addition to the pre-selected outrigger, press the key combination for the
desired direction of movement of the outrigger beam on the two-hand op-
erating panel:
• To extend press and hold the Direction button R.
Also press and hold the Right / upper movement button.
• To retract press and hold the Direction button R.

Also press and hold the Left / lower movement button.
Extend the outrigger beam to the required outrigger span; à Setting outrig-
ger spans, p. 13 - 51.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
From the switch With the corresponding additional equipment, the operating elements for
boxes the outriggers are in the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display
switch boxes.
• Remove the hand-held control if necessary and start the diesel engine
from the driver's cab; à p. 5 - 11.
If the hand-held control is connected, the operating elements are not active
in the switch boxes.
Both switch boxes are located on either side of

the carrier behind the second axle line.
• Open the switch box door (1).
When you have opened the door, only the LED
in the Switch on second level button lights up (Ç).
None of the other buttons are lit.
• To switch on the lighting, press the Switch on

second level button once or any other button
(Ç).
Ç All the other buttons are lit. If you do not press any button for ten seconds,
the lighting is automatically switched off and only the LED in the Switch on
second level button remains lit.
S
Risk of damage to the outriggers!
locking bars.
G
during operation.
08.03.2006
rigger beams.

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
G
Before driving you have to position the locking pins and safety hoops ap-
propriately for the desired span; à
Setting outrigger spans, p. 13 - 51.
The outrigger beams can only be operated from the switch box on the same
side of the vehicle. To move the outrigger beams you must always press
two buttons one after another.
• First press a button for the desired speed:
Á – For a slow movement, press the Normal speed button. The movement is
carried out at idling speed of the diesel engine.
Î – For a faster movement, press the High speed button. The movement is
carried out at increased speed of the diesel engine.
• Keep the button for the speed pressed and also press the button for
desired outrigger beam.
Outrigger beam to the right of the switch box

The beam is operated at the button unit (1):
– To extend, press button (2)
– To retract, press button (3)
Outrigger beam to the left of the switch box

The beam is operated at the button unit (6):
– To extend, press button (5)
– To retract, press button (4)
• Extend the outrigger beam to the required outrigger span; à Setting out-
rigger spans, p. 13 - 51.
H
You may also retract or extend the outrigger beams in pairs on the side
where you are positioned by pressing two respective buttons simultan-
eously.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
From the From the crane cabin, the outriggers are operated using the Crane control
crane cab display in the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display submenu.
• If another menu is shown on the Crane control display, keep pressing the
Exit submenu button (
ö) until the main menu is displayed.
" • In the main menu, press the button next to the Sub-menu outrigger / elec-
tronic level / outrigger pressure display symbol.
The Crane control display switches to the Out-

rigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display
submenu.
Adjacent symbols are now assigned to the

buttons.
You need the buttons (1) to move the outrig-
ger beam.
Extending and retracting outrigger beams

• Before driving you have to position the locking pins and safety hoops ap-
propriately for the desired span; à Setting outrigger spans, p. 13 - 51.
S
Risk of damage to the outriggers!
locking bars.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
G
during operation. Set the Mirror for monitoring outriggers in such a way that
both the outrigger beams can be observed from right side of the crane
cabin.
rigger beams.
G
1 • Switch off the slewing gear. The Telescoping mechanism on / off indicator
lamp must light up red. The lamp lights up red when the slewing gear is
off.
H
For reasons of safety extend the outrigger beams individually from the
crane cabin. To extend an outrigger beam, always press two buttons one af-
ter another.
• First pre-select the desired outrigger beam by pressing the button next to
the corresponding symbol:
; – Front left outrigger or
0 – Front right outrigger or
? – Rear left outrigger or
3 – Rear right outrigger
3 Now in the symbol of the pre-selected outrigger (e.g. front left) the point is
shown in green for approx. 10 seconds. During this time you can start mov-
ing the outrigger beam.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
65 If moving the outrigger beam of the pre-selected outrigger is released, the

Retract outrigger beams and Extend outrigger beams symbols are shown in
black.
If the symbols are shown in light grey, movement is locked (e.g. after press-
ing the button next to the All outrigger beams button).
If the Movement locked (!) symbol is also shown, then the slewing gear is
switched on.
• Switch off the slewing gear.
65 Movement is released and the Retract outrigger beams and Extend outrigger
beams symbols are shown in black.
3 H
If the pre-selection time has elapsed in the meantime, the point in the sym-
bol for the selected outrigger beam is shown in black and you have to pre-
select the outrigger beam again.
• Press the button next to the symbol for the desired direction of move-
ment.
5 – To extend an outrigger beam, press the Extend outrigger beam button.
6 – To Retract an outrigger beam, press the Retract outrigger beam button.
• Extend the outrigger beam to the required outrigger span; à Setting out-
rigger spans, p. 13 - 51.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Setting outrigger Extend the outrigger beams to the spans, which are shown in this section
spans and secure the outrigger beams with required safety devices.
G
Danger of overturning when the outrigger beams are not uniformly ex-
tended!
All outrigger beams must always be extended to the same width. Check
whether all outrigger beams are extended to the necessary span and secure
all outrigger beams.
H
The locking pins are inserted into the outrigger boxes on the right side from
the front and on the left side from the rear.
Outrigger span of 8.10 x 7.00 m

• Extract the locking pins (1).
• Insert the locking pins (3) from the bore
holes (8) into the brackets (2) if necessary.
• Undo the linchpin and fasten the safety
hoop (5) in such a manner that it only en-
closes the peg (4).
• Attach the linchpin to the peg (6).
• Fully extend the outrigger beams up to the
mark (7).
• Insert the locking pin (1) through the bore

holes into the outrigger box and outrigger
beam.
• Turn the locking pin (1) so that the handle
points downwards.
• Remove the locking pin (3) from the holder
(2) and insert it into the bore holes of the
outrigger beams.
• Set the same outrigger span in the same
way at the other outrigger beams.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers

hoop (5) in such a manner that it encloses
the pegs (4) and (6).
mark (7).

hoop (5) in such a manner that it only en-
closes the peg (4).
beam.
The locking pin (3) remains in the holder (2).
• Extend the outrigger beams further up to the

mark (4).
• Remove the locking pin (3) from the holder
(2) and insert it into the bore holes of the
outrigger beams.
points downwards.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Outrigger span of 8.10 m x 5.00 m

mark (7).

beam.
points downwards.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers

• Remove the locking pin (3) from the bore
holes in the outrigger beams, if necessary,
and insert it in the holder (2).
• Fully retract the outrigger beams.

beam.
points downwards.
The locking pin (3) remains in the holder (2).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.6 Securing the outrigger beams for on-road driving
All four outrigger beams must be secured with locking pins / safety brackets
for on-road driving.
G
Danger of accidents due to moving outrigger beams!
Always secure all of the outrigger beams with the locking pins and safety
hoops for on-road driving. This prevents the outrigger beams from falling
out while driving around corners, which could cause serious accidents.
Fully retract all four outrigger beams.

beam.
points downwards.
• Insert the locking pins (3) for the outrigger
beams into the holders (2).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.7 Moving the outrigger pads into working / driving position
H
The outrigger pads on the left side are illustrated in the diagrams. The out-
rigger pads on the right side are pulled forwards, diagonally.
Moving them into working position

The initial position is A.
• Loosen the retaining pins and remove the
pin (1) from the bore holes on the outrigger
pad (2).
• Pull the outrigger pad outward as far as it
will go by the handle (3).
• Insert the pin (2) through both bore holes in
the outrigger pad.
• Secure the pin (2) with a retaining pin.
• Move the other outrigger pads in the same
way into working position.
Moving them into driving position

The initial position is A.
pin (1) from the bore holes on the outrigger
pad (2).
• Push the outrigger pad with the handler (3)
as far as possible into the holder (4).
• Insert the pin (2) through both bore holes in
the outrigger pad.
• Secure the pin (2) with a retaining pin.
• Move the other outrigger pads in the same
way into driving position.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.8 Extending / Retracting the outrigger cylinders
S
Danger of overturning if the load bearing capacity of the ground is too low!
Monitor the outrigger pressure and keep the load bearing capacity of the
ground in mind during crane work. If the ground does not have sufficient
load bearing capacity, you must pack the outrigger pads with a suitable ma-
terial.
In this way you prevent the ground giving way underneath the outrigger
pad and the truck crane falling into an incline and tipping; àEnlarging the
outrigger surface area, p. 13 - 11.
If you need to support the outrigger pads:

– Choose packing that will provide the outrigger cylinders with enough lift-
ing power to align the truck crane horizontally and lift all wheels off of the
ground.
– Always align the packing horizontally.
G
Danger of overturning when packing is at an angle!
Always align the packing horizontally.
This way you prevent the outrigger pads from slipping off the inclined pack-
ing and the truck crane overturning.
You can operate the outriggers from the carrier and from the superstruc-
ture.
Operation from the superstructure is preferable for subsequent aligning
during crane work; à From the crane cab, p. 13 - 65.
There are different operating elements on the carrier depending on the truck
crane's equipment:
– For standard equipment you operate the outriggers with the hand-held
control; à With the hand-held control, p. 13 - 58.
– With additional equipment you operate the outriggers from the Outriggers /
à
Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indicator switch boxes; From the switch
boxes, p. 13 - 61.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
With the hand- • Connect the hand-held control to the required socket; à p. 13 - 43.
held control
• Start the diesel engine with the hand-held control; à With the hand-held
p control, p. 13 - 29.
All the required buttons are on the Outrigger / electronic level operating panel.
You can pre-select two different speeds with the High speed (1) pre-selection
button.
Pressing the High speed pre-selection button switches between High speed
and Normal speed. The LED in the button shows the current pre-selection:
ÁI – If the LED is not lit, Normal speed is pre-selected for a slow movement.
The movement is carried out at idling speed of the diesel engine.
H – If the LED is lit, high speed is pre-selected for a faster movement.

The movement is carried out at increased speed of the diesel engine.
G
Danger of accidents when outrigger movements are performed outside of
Monitor every movement of the outrigger cylinders closely or have a
banksman monitor the movements during operation.
To extend an outrigger beam, always press two buttons one after another.
To raise and lower the truck crane you can extend all outrigger cylinders at
the same time.
K • First select all outrigger cylinders by pressing the button next to the All
outrigger cylinders button once.
J • The green LED in the All outrigger cylinders symbol now lights up for ap-
prox. 10 seconds. During this time you can start moving the outrigger
cylinder.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
To align the truck crane you can extend the outrigger cylinders individually
or in pairs.
• Select the outriggers first before their outrigger cylinders are to be
moved. To do this, press the button next to the corresponding symbol.
M – Front left outrigger or
E – Front right outrigger or
O – Rear left outrigger or
G – Rear right outrigger
L Now the green LED lights up for approx. 10 seconds in the symbol of the
pre-selected outrigger (e.g. front left outrigger). During this time you can
move the outrigger cylinder.
LD You can also extend the outrigger cylinders in pairs by pre-selecting two
outriggers one after another (e.g. front left and front right to raise the truck
crane at the front).
In addition to the pre-selected outrigger, press the key combination for the
desired direction of movement of the outrigger cylinder on the two-hand
operating panel:
• To extend press and hold the Direction button r.
Also press and hold the Left / lower movement button.
• To retract press and hold the Direction button r.

Also press and hold the Right / upper movement button.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
• Align the truck crane horizontally with the outrigger cylinders. You can
also use the automatic alignment to do this;
à Aligning the truck crane on outriggers horizontally, p. 13 - 77,
à Automatic alignment, p. 13 - 77.
G
Danger of overturning due to slipping of the blocking!
After adjusting the truck crane, check the condition and position of the
packing material for the outrigger pads. Wooden beams may have slipped
or been pushed out of position. Rotate the truck crane by 360° and check
every individual outrigger.
Do not rely on visual inspection using the mirror.
If you notice a change and the packing on the ground under the outrigger is
no longer safe, stop working with the crane and rig the truck crane again as
prescribed.
G
Danger of accidents if the wheels touch the ground!
Do not forget that if the ground already gives way at several points under
the outrigger before or while readjustments are being made, the wheels of
the truck crane may touch the ground again. This would cause the stability
of the truck crane to change and thus increase the danger of overturning. If
you are not absolutely certain that the truck crane's wheels do not touch the
ground, you must get out and ensure that the truck crane is still on outrig-
gers as prescribed.
If the wheels of the truck crane are touching the ground, stop working with
the crane immediately and rig it again as prescribed.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
From the switch With the corresponding additional equipment, the operating elements for
boxes the outriggers are in the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display
switch boxes. On the location of the switch boxes and to switch on the light-
ing;à p. 13 - 46.
• Remove the hand-held control if necessary and start the diesel engine
from the driver's cab; à p. 5 - 11.
If the hand-held control is connected, the operating elements are not active
in the switch boxes.
Assignment of the switching units to the outrigger cylinders

Assignment of the button units to the outrigger cylinders is the same for
both switch boxes:
– Outrigger cylinders to the left of the switch box are operated with the two
left-hand button units (1, 4).
– Outrigger cylinders to the right of the switch box are operated with the
two right-hand button units (2, 3).
– Outrigger cylinders on the operator's side are operated with the lower
button units (3, 4).
– Outrigger cylinders on the opposite side of the operator are operated with
the upper button units (1, 2).
This results in the following arrangement:

– Button unit 1 for outrigger cylinder 1.1
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Extending the outrigger cylinders
H
The outrigger cylinders must have a remaining stroke of at least 25 mm in
order to carry out alignment corrections. The outrigger cylinders are not to
be completely extended to the end position.
G
Block off the danger area of the moving outrigger cylinders before moving
them. Monitor all movements of the outrigger cylinders closely or have a
banksman, with whom you are in visual contact, monitor the movements.
Nobody, not even the banksman, is allowed to be in the danger area of the
moving outrigger cylinders.
To move the outrigger cylinders you must always press two buttons one af-
ter another.
• Keep the button for speed pressed.
• Also press the button (1) on the button unit for the desired outrigger cyl-
inder; à Assignment of the switching units to the outrigger cylinders,
p. 13 - 61.
• When rigging extend all four outrigger cylinders one after the other until
the outrigger pads touch the ground.
S
Risk of damage to the outrigger cylinders!
Move the outriggers as uniformly as possible on all four support points.
This prevents the outrigger cylinders from getting damaged due to one-
sided pressure.
• To align, extend the outriggers individually or also in pairs when all

outrigger pads are touching the ground.
To extend the outrigger cylinders in pairs you must press the extend
buttons (1) on two button units at the same time (e.g. front left and front
right to raise at the front).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
To lift the truck crane you can now extend all outrigger cylinders at the same
time.
• Press the button (2) or (3) for speed.
• Also press the Extend all outrigger cylinders button (1).
Continue to extend the outrigger cylinders together until the truck crane
is lifted to such an extent that none of the wheels touch the ground.
Retracting the outrigger cylinders
S
Risk of damage to the tyres!
Before retracting the outrigger cylinders, walk around the truck crane and
remove all sharp-edged and pointed materials which are in the area under
the tyres.
By doing this you prevent the tyres bursting or being damaged when the
truck crane is lowered.
To move the outrigger cylinders you must always press two buttons one af-
ter another.
To align the truck crane you can retract the outrigger cylinders individually
or in pairs.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
S
Risk of damage to the outrigger cylinders!
Move the outriggers as uniformly as possible on all four support points.
This prevents the outrigger cylinders from getting damaged due to one-
sided pressure.
• Keep the button for speed (Á) or (Î) pressed and also press the button (1)
on the corresponding button unit.
To extend the outrigger cylinders in pairs you must press the extend
buttons (1) on two button units at the same time (e.g. front left and front
right to raise at the front).
To lower the truck crane you can now extend all outrigger cylinders at the
same time.
• Press the button (2) or (3) for the speed.
• Also press the Retract all outrigger cylinders button (1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
From the crane If the ground beneath the outrigger cylinder pads should give way while the
cab crane is in operation and the truck crane is no longer in the horizontal posi-
tion, the outrigger cylinders can also be activated from the crane cab to
bring the truck crane back into the horizontal position.
Observe the instructions in section Load bearing capacity of the ground and the
outriggers, p. 13 - 9.
G
Danger of overturning!
It is forbidden to readjust the outrigger with a load on the hook.
Always set the load down on the ground before activating the outrigger.
From the crane cabin, the outriggers are operated using the Crane control
display in the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display submenu.
" • In the main menu, press the button next to the Sub-menu outrigger / elec-
tronic level / outrigger pressure display symbol.
The Crane control display switches to the Out-

rigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display
submenu.
Adjacent symbols are now assigned to the

buttons.
You need the buttons (1) to move the outrig-
ger beams.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Extending and retracting the outrigger cylinders

The speed of outriggers is electronically restricted to a value approximating
the normal speed on the carrier.
G
Monitor every movement of the outrigger cylinders closely or have a
banksman monitor the movements during operation.
To extend an outrigger cylinders, always press two buttons one after anoth-
er.
To raise and lower the truck crane you can extend all outrigger cylinders at
the same time.
- • First pre-select all outrigger cylinders by pressing the button next to the
All outrigger cylinders symbol.
, • The point in the All outrigger cylinders symbol now appears in green for ap-
prox. 10 seconds. During this time you can start moving the outrigger cy-
linder.
H
irrespective of the position of the superstructure. The driver's cab is always
at the front.
To align the truck crane you can extend the outrigger cylinders individually
or in pairs.
• To extend the outrigger cylinders individually, first pre-select the desired
outrigger. To do this, press the button next to the corresponding symbol:
; – Front left outrigger or
0 – Front right outrigger or
? – Rear left outrigger or
4 – Rear right outrigger
• To extend the outrigger cylinders in pairs, first pre-select both desired

outrigger cylinders. To do this, press the button next to the corresponding
symbol:
= – Both left outrigger cylinders or
2 – Both right outrigger cylinders or

08.03.2006
8 – Both rear outrigger cylinders or

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
C – Both front outrigger cylinders
< Now in the symbol of the pre-selected outrigger (e.g. both left) the point is
shown in green for approx. 10 seconds. During this time you can start mov-
ing the outrigger cylinder.
@A If moving the outrigger cylinder of the pre-selected outrigger is released,

the Retract outrigger cylinder and Extend outrigger cylinder symbols are shown
in black.
If the symbols appear in light grey, movement is locked.
If the Movement locked (!) symbol is also shown, then the slewing gear is
switched on.
• Switch off the slewing gear.
@A Movement is released and the Retract outrigger cylinder and Extend outrigger
cylinder symbols are shown in black.
< H
If the pre-selection time has elapsed in the meantime, the point in the sym-
bol for the selected outrigger beam is shown in black and you have to pre-
select the outrigger beam again.
• Press the button next to the symbol for the desired direction of move-
ment:
A – To extend an outrigger cylinder, press the Extend outrigger cylinder button.
@ – To retract an outrigger cylinder, press the Retract outrigger cylinder button.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
G
Danger of overturning due to the blocking slipping!
After adjusting the truck crane, check the condition and position of the
packing material for the outrigger pads. Wooden beams may have slipped
or been pushed out of position. Rotate the truck crane by 360° and check
every individual outrigger.
Do do not rely on visual inspection using the mirror.
If you notice a change and the packing on the ground under the outrigger is
no longer safe, stop working with the crane and rig the truck crane again as
prescribed.
G
Danger of accidents if the wheels touch the ground!
Do not forget that if the ground already gives way at several points under
the outrigger before or while readjustments are being made, the wheels of
the truck crane may touch the ground again. This would cause the stability
of the truck crane to change and thus increase the danger of overturning. If
you are not absolutely certain that the truck crane's wheels do not touch the
ground, you must get out and ensure that the truck crane is still on outrig-
gers as prescribed.
If the wheels of the truck crane are touching the ground, stop working with
the crane immediately and rig it again as prescribed.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.9 Checking the alignment of the truck crane
The alignment of the truck crane is measured by a measuring unit on the

carrier and is displayed on electronic level display.
You can check the current alignment on various displays:
– When putting on outriggers with standard equipment on the hand-held
control; à p. 13 - 69 or
– When putting on outriggers with additional equipment in the Outrigger /
Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indicator switch boxes;àp. 13 - 71.
– During crane work in the crane cab on the Crane control display;
à p. 13 - 73.
On the hand-held The electronic level on the hand-held control is switched on when the hand-
control held control is connected to the carrier or the superstructure; à
Connecting
the hand-held control, p. 13 - 27.

The LED in the Switch measuring range (1) button lights up for the measuring
range currently set (e.g. 1°).
• Press the Switching measuring range button once to switch.
The other measuring range is switched on and the associated LED lights
up in the button (e.g. 5°).
A graduated ring corresponds to the same inclination as shown on the Crane
control display. The following measuring ranges result from the number of
graduated rings:
P LED lit up at 5°: Measuring range of 0° to 3° inclination

One graduated ring corresponds to 1° incli-
nation.
Q LED lit up at 1°: Measuring range of 0° to 0.6° inclination

One graduated ring corresponds to 0.2° in-
clination.
H
The measuring range 1° responds very sensitively. If the LEDs on the bars
have lit up as far as they can go, switch over to 5° inclination on the measur-
ing range in order to monitor the alignment with the outrigger cylinders.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Reading the status display
K The LEDs are always allocated to the carrier following the representation of
the carrier on the symbol under the display.
When the truck crane is level, only the LED (5)

in the centre lights up.
If the truck crane is higher on one side, the
LEDs arranged in cruciform (1 to 4) light up.
(1) The carrier is higher at the front than at

the back
(2) The carrier is higher on the right than on
the left
(3) The carrier is higher at the back than at
the front
(4) The carrier is higher on the left than on
the right
H
Diagonal inclines are indicated by the LEDs for two adjacent bars other light-
ing up simultaneously. For example, the LEDs (1) and (2) go on if the truck
crane is higher at the front right.
• Align the truck crane horizontally by extending the outrigger cylinders;

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
At the switch With additional equipment with the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pres-
boxes sure indicator switch boxes there is an electronic level on either side of the
carrier.
There is another electronic level in the crane cab.
Both switch boxes are located on either side of

the carrier behind the second axle line.
• Open the switch box door (1).
When you have opened the door, only the LED
in the Switch on second level button lights up (Ç).
None of the other buttons are lit.
To switch on the lighting, press the Switch on

second level button once or any other button
(Ç).
Ç All the other buttons are lit. If you do not press any button for ten seconds,
the lighting is automatically switched off and only the LED in the Switch on
second level button remains lit.
H
The display fields on the carrier are only active during crane operation if
they were switched on in the Crane control display; à Switching on / off the
display fields on the carrier, p. 13 - 42.
Å The Switch measuring range button is located under the display.
The currently set measuring range lights up above the display (e.g. 1°).
• Press the Switch measuring range button once.
The other measuring range is switched on and lights up above the display
(e.g. 5°).
The graduated rings are categorised as follows in the different measuring
ranges:
5° lights up above the display: Measuring range of 0° to 5° inclination
One graduated ring corresponds to 1° incli-
nation.
One graduated ring corresponds to 0.2° in-
08.03.2006
clination.
s
GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
H
The measuring range 0° to 1° responds very sensitively. When the LEDs
light up for a direction, switch from 0° to 5° inclination on the measuring
range in order to monitor the alignment with the outrigger cylinders.
Reading the status display

When the truck crane is level, only the LED (5)
in the centre lights up.
(1) The side of the truck crane opposite the

display is higher than the side with the
display.
(2) The truck crane is higher to the right of
the display than it is left of it.
(3) The side of the truck crane with the dis-
play is higher than the side opposite the
display.
(4) The truck crane is higher to the left of the
display than it is to the right of it.
Diagonal inclines are indicated by the LEDs for

two adjacent bars other lighting up simulta-
neously.
For example, the LEDs (2) and (3) go on if the
corner (1) of the truck crane on the right next
to the display is higher.
• Align the truck crane horizontally by extend-

ing the outrigger cylinders; à Aligning the
truck crane on outriggers horizontally,
p. 13 - 77.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
On the crane con- The Crane control display shows the electronic level in two different menus:
trol display – In the main menu and
– In the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger pressure display submenu.
In the main menu

ö
The Switch measuring range symbol is located at the top left of the main
menu.
The currently set measuring range is shown on the display (e.g. 5°).
• Press the button next to the Change measuring range symbol once.
The other measuring range is switched on and indicated above the dis-
play (e.g. 1°).

ranges:
One graduated ring corresponds to 1° in-
clination.
One graduated ring corresponds to
0.2° inclination.
H
The measuring range 0° to 1° responds very sensitively. If the LEDs on the
bars have lit up as far as they can go, switch to the 0° to 5° inclination
measuring range so that you can monitor the alignment with the outrigger
cylinders.
H
This display is read in the same way as in the Outriggers / electronic level / out-
rigger pressure display submenu; à
Reading the displays, p. 13 - 75.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
In the Outrigger / Electronic level / Outrigger pressure display submenu

ö
" In the main menu, press the button next to the Electronic level / Outrigger pres-
sure indicatorsubmenu symbol once.
The display changes to the Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indicator sub-
menu.
The Switch measuring range symbol is at the top left of the submenu.
The currently set measuring range lights up above the display (e.g. 5°).
• Press the button next to the Change measuring range symbol once.
The other measuring range is switched on and indicated above the dis-
play (e.g. 1°).
ranges:
One graduated ring corresponds to 1° in-
clination.
One graduated ring corresponds to
0.2° inclination.
H
The measuring range 0° to 1° responds very sensitively. If the LEDs on the
bars have lit up as far as they can go, switch to the 0° to 5° inclination mea-
suring range so that you can monitor the alignment with the outrigger cyl-
inders.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Reading the displays

The displays in the main menu and in the Electronic level / Outrigger pressure
display submenu are read in the same way.
When the truck crane is level, only the LED (5) in the centre lights up.

The allocation to the carrier corresponds to
the directional indicator (6).
(1) The carrier is higher at the front than at

the back.
(2) The carrier is higher at the right than at
the left.
(3) The carrier is higher at the back than at
the front.
(4) The carrier is higher at the left than at the
right.
H
Diagonal inclines are indicated by the LEDs for two adjacent bars other light-
ing up simultaneously. For example, the LEDs (1) and (2) go on if the truck
crane is higher at the front right.
• Align the truck crane horizontally by extending the outrigger cylinders;

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.10 Aligning the truck crane on outriggers horizontally
If the boom is on • Align the truck crane horizontally with the outrigger cylinders until only
the boom support the LED in the middle of the display lights up for the electronic level in
measuring range angle 0° to 1° angle; àExtending / Retracting the outrigger
cylinders, p. 13 - 57.
If the boom is • Slew the superstructure into the 0° or 180° position.

raised
G
Danger of overloading the boom!
Always turn the superstructure to the 0° or 180° position before you align
the truck crane horizontally with a raised boom. If the superstructure is in
another position, the Electronic level registers the deformation of the frame
as an additional angle and the displayed value can deviate from the actual
value and the truck crane is at an incline. The side load of the boom in-
creases when working at this incline and the boom can become over-
loaded.
• Align the truck crane horizontally with the outrigger cylinders until only
the LED in the middle of the display lights up for the electronic level in
measuring range angle 0° to 1° angle; à Extending / Retracting the outrigger
cylinders, p. 13 - 57.
Automatic You can also automatically align the truck crane horizontally. During auto-
alignment matic alignment, the outrigger cylinders will only be extended to prevent
any wheels from touching the ground after alignment.
• Before doing the automatic alignment, note the information about the dif-
ferent positions of the main boom; à p. 13 - 77.
• Extend all the outrigger pads until they are just above the surface of the
ground.
You can operate the automatic alignment differently depending on the truck
crane's equipment.
– Using the hand-held control with standard equipment, or
– Using the Outrigger / Electronic level / Outrigger pressure display switch boxes
with additional equipment.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Operation with the hand-held control
@ • Press the Switch second Level button once.

The LED in the button is on.
J • Press the All outrigger cylinders button once.

The LED in the button is on.
Automatic alignment is now pre-selected.
• Press and hold the Direction button r.

• Also press and hold the Left / lower movement button.
While you hold down both buttons, the control system will align the truck
crane.
Procedure during automatic alignment

1. First all the outrigger cylinders are extended until the outrigger pad is
touching the ground. There is a pause of about three seconds between
the extension of the individual outrigger cylinders; the extension is
done in the following sequence:
– Front left
– Front right
– Rear left
– Rear right
2. When all outrigger pads are touching the ground all the outrigger cy-
linders will be extended for about one second so that no wheel is touch-
ing the ground.
3. Now the truck crane will be automatically aligned horizontally. The car-
rier electronic systems evaluates the values from the electronic level
and extends the required outrigger cylinders. When this is done, the
axis with the greatest inclination is the first to move.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
The process will continue

– Until the truck crane is level or
– Until you release one button or
– Until the horizontal alignment is no longer possible, (e.g. an
– outrigger cylinder has been extended as far as it can go).
G
Danger of the truck crane overturning if not aligned horizontally!
Therefore always check the horizontal alignment on the electronic level dis-
play after automatic alignment.
When the crane control ends automatic alignment, the truck crane may not
necessarily be horizontally aligned (if for example one outrigger cylinder
has been extended as far as possible).
H
If all the outrigger pads are already on the ground when the automatic align-
ment begins, the electronic system will immediately start the automatic
alignment as described in point 3.
If one of the outrigger cylinders has been retracted since the last automatic
alignment, the control system will execute point 2 again - to check whether
all outrigger pads have been extended to the ground.
Operation with the Outrigger / Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indica-

tor switch boxes
• Press and hold the Normal speed button.

Á
ÁÉ • Also press the second Level button.
While you hold down both buttons, the control system will align the truck
crane. The procedure is the same as with operation with the hand-held con-
à
trol; Procedure during automatic alignment, p. 13 - 78.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.11 Aligning the free-on-wheels truck crane horizontally
If the truck crane is on the wheels, the alignment process varies according
to:
– Whether the truck crane is to be horizontally aligned directly after on-road
driving during rigging in the Free on wheels work position
– Whether the truck crane is already in the Free on wheels work position and
the suspension is blocked and therefore to correct alignment during crane
work.
When rigging During rigging, when the truck crane is still in on-road driving mode, you
can align the truck crane horizontally with the level adjustment system. The
procedure varies according to:
– Whether the truck crane is equipped as standard with the hand-held con-
trol
– Or whether the truck crane is equipped with the Outrigger / electronic level
/ outrigger pressure indicator display fields with additional equipment.
With the hand-held control

• Connect the hand-held control to a socket on the carrier.
• Start the diesel engine with the hand-held control.
• Align the truck crane horizontally with the level adjustment system;
6789 à Level adjustment system, p. 6 - 56.
The Electronic level display shows the current alignment.
When the measuring range 1° (Q) is switched on, align the truck crane hor-
izontally until only the LED in the middle of the display (1) lights up;
From the display fields

• Start the diesel engine from the driver's cab.
à Level
6789 Align the truck crane horizontally with the level adjustment system;
adjustment system, p. 6 - 56.
The Electronic level display shows the current alignment.

When the measuring range 1° is switched on, align the truck crane horizon-
tally until only the LED (1) in the middle of the display lights up;
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
During crane work If the truck crane is already in the Free on wheels work position and the sus-
pension is blocked, then do not switch off the suspension locking system
under any circumstances.
You must therefore align the truck crane as follows.
G
Danger of overturning when switching off the suspension locking system!
As long as the rigged truck crane is on wheels, you must not turn off the
suspension locking system for any reason. The suspension is no longer un-
der pressure and when the suspension locking system is switched off, the
suspension struts would be pressed together, damaged and the truck crane
could tip over.
• Extend the outrigger cylinders until all wheels are just above the ground.
• Align the truck crane horizontally with the outrigger cylinders.
G
Risk of crushing when switching off the suspension locking system!
When the suspension locking system is switched off, the wheels drop down
suddenly. Ensure that nobody is in close proximity to the wheels when you
are releasing the suspension locking system.
• Switch off the suspension locking system. To do this, push in the

u Suspension locking system rocker switch at the top.
The Suspension locking system indicator lamp goes out and all wheels lower
to the ground.
Now the wheels are in the correct position for horizontal alignment.
• Switch the suspension locking system on. To do this, push the Suspension
u locking system rocker switch at the bottom.
The Suspension locking system indicator lamp should light up.
• Retract the outrigger cylinders until the outrigger pads are approx. 10 cm
above the ground.
G
Danger of overturning!
To reduce the risk of the truck crane overturning, do not raise the outrigger
pads more than 5 to 10 cm off the ground. Leave the outrigger beams ex-
tended.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
13.6.12 Outrigger pressure indicator
The truck crane can be additionally equipped with an outrigger pressure in-
dicator. Then the current outrigger pressure is shown:
– In the crane cab.
– And on the carrier with additional equipment
H
When the outrigger cylinders are either extended or retracted as far as pos-
sible, the value on the outrigger pressure indicator does not correspond to
the actual outrigger pressure. The best indicator can be obtained if the last
movement to be carried out was Extend outrigger cylinder (not fully).
H
The crane is well aligned when in the 0° or 180° position the outrigger pres-
sures in both of the front outrigger cylinders are about the same and when
the outrigger pressures in both of the rear outrigger cylinders are about the
same.
But the horizontal alignment with the electronic level is decisive for the cor-
rect state for working with the crane.
Outrigger pres- In the superstructure the outrigger pressure is indicated on the Crane con-
sure indicator in troldisplay in the Outriggers / Electronic level / Outrigger pressure indicator sub-
the crane cab menu.
played.
" • In the main menu, press the button next to the Electronic level / Outrigger
pressure indicatorsubmenu symbol once.
The Crane control display switches to the Outrigger / electronic level / outrigger
pressure display submenu.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.6 Outriggers
H
The outrigger pressure displays are located

under the electronic level display:
1 Front right outrigger pressure
2 Rear right outrigger pressure
3 Rear left outrigger pressure
4 Front left outrigger pressure
The unit (t or klbs) of the displayed outrigger

pressure lights up next to the display:
– The display in t is with a decimal point.
– The values in klbs are displayed without a
decimal point (1 klbs = 1 kilopound =
1000 lbs).
Outrigger pres- The current outrigger pressure is only shown on the carrier when addition-
sure indicator on ally equipped with the Outriggers / electronic level / outrigger pressure display
the carrier switch boxes.
The outrigger pressure displays (1) to (4) for the individual outrigger cylin-
ders are located directly under the button unit for the respective outrigger
cylinder;à Assignment of the switching units to the outrigger cylinders,
p. 13 - 61.
The unit (t or klbs) of the displayed outrigger pressure lights up next to the
display:
– The display in t is with a decimal point for values up to 199.9 t.
Values above that are shown without a decimal point, with the last three
digits.
– The display in klbs is without a decimal point
(1 klbs = 1 kilopound = 1000 lbs).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7 Rigging / unrigging the counterweight
13.7.1 Counterweight parts and identification
Counterweight With the GMK 4080-1 truck crane the counterweight combinations are
parts assembled from two to six counterweight sections, depending on the equip-
ment.
With additional equipment, the scope of

delivery includes:
– A 2.5 t base plate (3) with supporting frame
(a 0.8 t counterweight section screwed onto
a 1.7 t counterweight section)
– A 1.3 t counterweight section (2) with lifting
cylinders (fixed on the turntable)
– A 0.5 t compensation weight (1) (or the aux-
iliary hoist with additional equipment)
Further additional equipment are:

– two 2.5 t counterweight sections (1).
– two 5.0 t counterweight sections (3).
– Two brackets (2) used to fasten the
counterweight sections onto the turntable
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Identification The truck crane and the accompanying counterweight parts are labelled
with the same serial number.
S
Danger if counterweight parts are interchanged!
Use only counterweight sections that belong to your truck crane while op-
erating the truck crane. The truck crane and the counterweight parts are la-
belled with the same serial number.
Other or additional counterweight parts may not be rigged.
The serial number (1) is situated on all coun-

terweight sections on the back in the middle or
above the weight specification.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.2 Counterweight combinations
G
Danger of overturning when slewing with rigged counterweight!
You may only slew the superstructure with rigged counterweight if a suffi-
ciently large outrigger span is rigged. You can find the required outrigger
span in the table in the section Slewing with the rigged counterweight,
p. 13 - 118 and support the truck crane accordingly before you slew the su-
perstructure. This prevents the truck crane from overturning when turning.
G
Combine the counterweights with each other only in the way prescribed in
this chapter and in the Lifting capacity table. Other combinations are not per-
missible.
If other combinations are assembled, the truck crane is no longer protected
against overloading by the SLI.
The counterweight parts of the truck crane GMK 4080-1 can be assembled
in two different counterweight combinations, or eight for additional equip-
ment.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
H
The illustrations always show only one possible combination for each coun-
terweight combination; à Assembling counterweight combinations, p. 13 - 97.
1.8 t
0.5 t compensation weight
or auxiliary hoist (additional equipment)
1.3 t counterweight section
4.3 t
6.8 t

9.3 t

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
11.8 t1)

14.3 t1)

16.8 t1)

1)
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
19,3 t 1)

2.5 t counterweight section installed on the
turntable
1)
S
Danger when rigging the 19.3 t counterweight combination!
To rig and unrig the 19.3 t counterweight combination, at least 4.3 t of coun-
terweight must be mounted on the turntable.
Hoist the max. 15.0 t counterweight section onto the counterweight plat-
form.
This prevents the counterweight lifting cylinder from being damaged while
the superstructure is slewing.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.3 Slinging points at the counterweight sections
G
Danger of accidents if used incorrectly!
Attach the various counterweight sections only to the appropriate slinging
points and use lifting gear with sufficient lifting capacity.
Only lift the counterweight sections individually because the slinging
points are not designed for lifting stacked counterweight sections.
Two slinging points (1) are cast in each of the

counterweight sections.
• Use only lifting gear with sufficient lifting ca-

pacity. Weights of the individual counter-
weight sections; à p. 15 - 4.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.4 CHECKLIST: Rigging the counterweight
H
G
there is a maximum of 4.3 t counter weight on the turntable and the radius
G
Danger of overturning with an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m!
With an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m , the superstructure may only be
rotated if there is a maximum counterweight of 6.8 ton the turntable and
the working radius permissible in the working range is maintained accord-
ing to the Lifting capacity table (at least 3.0 m).
1. The truck crane is stabilized with the outrigger span required for crane
à
work according to the Lifting capacity table; Permissible outrigger spans,
p. 13 - 37.
2. Set the current rigging mode with the currently rigged counterweight
on the SLI; àEntering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.
3. Lift the 2.5 t base plate from the separate vehicle, if necessary, and
place it onto the counterweight platform; à Setting down the 2.5 t base
plate, p. 13 - 100.
4. With a 1.8 t counterweight on the turntable

When the 19.3 t counterweight combination needs to be rigged:
– Assemble the 16.8 t counterweight combination; àp. 13 - 97,
– mount at least 4.3 of counterweight on the turntable; àp. 13 - 98.
5. Depending on the desired counterweight combination, place the re-

quired counterweight sections one after another onto the 2.5 t base
plate; à Assembling counterweight combinations, p. 13 - 97.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
6. Slew the superstructure into the 0° to the rear position; à Slewing to 0°

or 180°, p. 12 - 87.
% 7. Open the Counterweight submenu on the Crane control display;

à Selecting the Counterweight submenu, p. 13 - 109.
8. Check whether the counterweight lifting cylinders are in the unlocked

position. If required, turn the lifting cylinders into the unlocked position;
à Unlocking counterweights, p. 13 - 115.
9. Extend the counterweight lifting cylinder until the Lifting cylinder posi-
tion display shows the end position extended; à
Extending the lifting cyl-
inders, p. 13 - 112.
10. Turn the counterweight lifting cylinder into the locked position until the
locked end position is displayed on the Counterweight locking display;
à Locking the counterweight, p. 13 - 114.
11. Retract the counterweight lifting cylinder to lift the counterweight com-
bination until the Lifting cylinder position display shows the end position
retracted for the rigged counterweight; à Retracting the lifting cylinders,
p. 13 - 113.
12. Further retract the counterweight lifting cylinder to the end position un-
til the Precharge pressure display lights up green; à
Precharging the coun-
terweight, p. 13 - 113.
t 13. If you need to work 0° to the rear, engage the slewing gear brake;
à Switching off the slewing gear, p. 12 - 90.
14. Select the current rigging mode with the newly rigged counterweight
08.03.2006
combination on the SLI or enter the corresponding SLI code;

à Entering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.5 CHECKLIST: Unrigging the counterweight
H
G
there is a maximum counterweight of 4.3 t on the turntable and the radius
permitted in the working area is maintained according to the Loading capac-
ity table (at least 3.0 m).
G
Danger of overturning with an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m!
With an outrigger span of 8.10 x 2.32 m , the superstructure may only be
rotated if there is a maximum counterweight of 6.8 t on the turntable and
the working radius permitted in the working range is maintained according
to the Lifting capacity table (at least 3.0 m).
1. The truck crane is stabilized with the outrigger span required for crane
à
work according to the Lifting capacity table; Permissible outrigger spans,
p. 13 - 37.
on the SLI; àEntering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.
3. Slew the superstructure into the 0° to the rear position; à Slewing to 0°

or 180°, p. 12 - 87.
% 4. Open the Counterweight submenu on the Crane control display;

à Selecting the Counterweight submenu, p. 13 - 109.
5. When the 19.3 t counterweight combination is rigged

Check that at least 4.3 t of counterweight is mounted on the turntable;
à p. 13 - 98.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
6. Extend the counterweight lifting cylinder to lower the counterweight

combination until the Lifting cylinder position display shows the end po-
sition extended;à Extending the lifting cylinders, p. 13 - 112.
7. Turn the counterweight lifting cylinder to the unlocked position until the
unlocked end position is displayed on the Counterweight locking display;
à Unlocking counterweights, p. 13 - 115.
8. Retract the counterweight lifting cylinder without counterweight until

the Lifting cylinder position display shows the end position retracted;
à Retracting the lifting cylinders, p. 13 - 113.
on the SLI; à Entering the rigging mode, p. 12 - 39.
10. To unrig 19.3 to 1.3 t

– Lift off the counterweight sections until only the 16.8 to counter-
weight combination is assembled; à p. 13 - 105,
– Remove counterweight sections from the turntable; à p. 13 - 116.
Lift the counterweight sections from the counterweight platform and

place them onto a separate vehicle;
à Slinging points at the counterweight sections, p. 13 - 91,
à Driving modes, p. 7 - 1.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.6 Assembling counterweight combinations
G
Danger of overturning when slewing with a rigged counterweight
When a counterweight combination is rigged, check whether slewing is
permitted with the current rigging mode (outrigger span, working radius).
Correct the rigging mode if necessary; àSlewing with the rigged counter-
weight, p. 13 - 118.
G
Danger of crushing when setting down the counterweight sections!
Ensure that helpers maintain sufficient clearance from the counterweight
sections with all parts of their bodies during placement.
Remove all objects that could become clamped or crushed from the coun-
terweight platform.
G
Danger of crushing when slewing the superstructure!
Anyone who climbs onto the carrier using the access ladder is in the slew-
ing range of the superstructure.
Ensure that nobody uses the access ladder (e.g. helper) while they are lift-
ing a counterweight section from the separate vehicle onto the carrier.
G
Danger of accidents caused by falling counterweight sections!
Only attach the counterweight sections to the appropriate slinging points
and use lifting gear with sufficient lifting capacity.
The counterweight sections should be lifted one at a time. The slinging
points are not designed for hoisting stacked counterweight sections.
Smaller counterweight combinations can be installed on the turntable;

à Versions that can be installed on the turntable, p. 13 - 98.
For larger counterweight combinations, the 2.5 t base plate is lifted onto the
counterweight platform first; à
Setting down the 2.5 t base plate, p. 13 - 100.
Then the required counterweight sections are placed on the 2.5 t base plate
and lifted onto the turntable; à
Versions that can be assembled differently,
p. 13 - 101.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Versions that can This section also shows the counterweight combinations which can only be
be installed on the assembled with additional equipment.
turntable The following counterweight combinations can be installed on the turnta-
ble.
H
To mount and remove these counterweight sections, you need the 16.8 t
counterweight combination or a suitable lifting device; à Removing / install-
ing the counterweight sections on the turntable, p. 13 - 116.
1.8 t counterweight combination

This counterweight combinations is firmly
installed on the turntable when the truck crane
is delivered and is made of:
– The 0.5 t compensation weight or the auxil-
iary hoist (additional equipment)
– The 1.3 t counterweight section and
– The two lifting cylinders
The weight specification on the 1.3 t counter-
weight section include the weight of the lifting
cylinders.
S
Danger when rigging the 19.3 t counterweight combination!
You cannot rig or unrig directly from 1.8 to 19.3 t.
If 17.5 t of counterweight is on the counterweight platform, the lifting cylin-
ders will be damaged while slewing.

The following parts are installed on the
turntable with the 4.3 t counterweight
combination:
– The 1.3 t counterweight section (fixed)
– The 2.5 t counterweight section
The 2.5 t counterweight section is attached
with brackets to the 1.3 t counterweight
section; à p. 13 - 116.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work

combination:
– A 5.0 t counterweight section
The 5.0 t counterweight section is attached
with brackets to the 1.3 t counterweight
section; à p. 13 - 116.

combination:
iary hoist1)
– The 2.5 t counterweight section
– A 5.0 t counterweight section
The 2.5 t and 5.0 t counterweight sections are
attached with brackets to the 1.3 t
counterweight section; à p. 13 - 116.
H
If 9.3 t counterweights are installed on the turntable, the axle loads are
greater than 12 t;à Information on the axle loads, p. 7 - 1.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Setting down the The 2.5 t base plate is set down on the counterweight platform when rigging
2.5 t base plate the truck crane.
Depending on the counterweight combination, further counterweight sec-
tions can be set down on the 2.5 t base plate.
Select the current rigging mode on the SLI with the current rigged counter-
weight on the turntable or enter the corresponding SLI code.
There are four retaining sheets (1) on the

counterweight platform that position the 2.5 t
base plate correctly for rigging.
• Sling the 2.5 t base plate and lift it over the

counterweight platform; à , p. 13 - 90.
• Set down the 2.5 t base plate between the
retaining sheets in such a way that the re-
cess (3) grips into the rear left retaining
sheet (2).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Versions that can This section also shows the counterweight combinations which can only be
be assembled assembled with additional equipment.
differently The initial conditions for these counterweight combinations may vary de-
pending on which counterweight combination is installed on the turntable.
• Select the current rigging mode on the SLI with the current rigged coun-
terweight on the turntable or enter the corresponding SLI code.

(1.8 t installed on the turntable)
• Lift the 2.5 t base plate onto the
counterweight platform; à p. 13 - 100.
With additional equipment, you can also in-
stall a 4.3 t counterweight combination on the
turntable; à p. 13 - 98.
6.8 t counterweight version

• Lift the 2.5 t counterweight section onto the
2.5 t base plate.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work


• Lift a 5.0 t counterweight section onto the
2.5 t base plate.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work

2.5 t base plate.
5.0 t counterweight section.

2.5 t base plate.

• Lift the second 5.0 t counterweight section
onto the 2.5 t base plate.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work


2.5 t base plate.
onto the 5.0 t counterweight section.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work

2.5 t base plate.

2.5 t base plate.

08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Rigging work


2.5 t base plate.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work


This counterweight combination is not per-
mitted.
The lifting cylinders will be damaged while

slewing, since they knock against the counter-
weight during rigging (A) and unrigging (B).
For this reason, a counterweight of at least

4.3 t must be mounted on the turntable.
S
Risk of damage to the lifting cylinders!
Mount at least 4.3 t of counterweight on the turntable before rigging the
19.3 t counterweight combination. This prevents the counterweight lifting
cylinders from being damaged while slewing the superstructure.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.7 Counterweight hoist unit
The counterweight hoist unit consists of two lifting cylinders at the turn-
table, of which the piston rods can be turned in order to unlock and lock the
counterweight.
The lifting cylinders are locked in the carrier frame of the 2.5 t base plate and
lift the 2.5 t base plate with the assembled counterweight onto the turntable
while rigging the counterweight platform or lower the counterweight while
unrigging the counterweight platform again.
G
Danger of crushing when lifting and lowering the counterweight!
Before lifting or lowering the counterweight, remove all objects from the
top counterweight section which could be clamped or crushed.
Be sure that nobody is on the counterweight platform while the counter-
weight is being lifted or lowered.
Selecting the Operation of the counterweight lifting unit is carried out in the Counterweight
Counterweight submenu. This submenu can be opened in the Crane control display in the
submenu main menu.
% • In the main menu press the button next to the Counterweight submenu
symbol.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
The display changes in the Counterweight

submenu with the displays
– Counterweight locking (3)
– Lifting cylinder position (1) and
– Precharge pressure (2)
The buttons (4) to the right near the display are
now assigned adjacent symbols for extending
and retracting the lifting cylinders and for lock-
ing and unlocking the counterweight.
Checking the You can read the current locking status and the current position of the coun-
current hoist unit terweight lifting cylinder as follows:
status
Checking the locking status
The Counterweight locking display indicates the current locking status.
When the counterweight lifting cylinders are slewed to the locked end posi-
tion, they are indicated vertically on the display in green.
When the counterweight lifting cylinders are slewed to the unlocked end po-
sition, they are indicated horizontally on the display in red.
When the counterweight lifting cylinders are in an intermediate position (nei-

ther locked or unlocked ), they are indicated on the display diagonally in
yellow. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Checking the position of the lifting cylinders

The Lifting cylinder position display shows the current position of the coun-
terweight lifting cylinders.
When the lifting cylinders are in the end position Extended, the display
shows fully extended lifting cylinders in green.
When the lifting cylinders are in the end position Retracted, the display
shows fully retracted lifting cylinders in green.
When the counterweight lifting cylinders are in an intermediate position (nei-

ther of the two end positions), they are shown partially extended on the dis-
play in yellow.
Display of All end positions are registered by the sensors and are passed on to the
incorrect statuses crane control. When the crane control detects an incorrect status, it is dis-
played on the corresponding display (e.g. one lifting cylinder in end position
locked, other lifting cylinder in the position unlocked).
On the Counterweight locking display, an error on the affected lifting cylinder

is indicated by the simultaneous display of both end positions with the sym-
bol (!) in violet.
You can narrow down the error further using the display. In the illustration,
the display shows the right lifting cylinder in the end position locked. An
error is indicated at the left lifting cylinder. The reason in this case could be
a defective sensor on the left lifting cylinder or the left lifting cylinder was
not mechanically rotated.
On the Lifting cylinder position display when there is an error, the affected lift-
ing cylinder in the expected end position is shown with the symbol (!) in
violet.
You can narrow down the error further using the display. In the illustration,
the display shows the left lifting cylinder in the retracted end position in
green. An error is indicated at the right lifting cylinder. The reason in this
case could be a defective sensor on the right lifting cylinder.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Extending / Re- Prerequisites for extending and retracting:

tracting the lifting
The lifting cylinders can only be extended or retracted:
cylinders
– If both lifting cylinders are rotated into the end position locked or
– If both lifting cylinders are rotated into the end position unlocked.
89 If a movement is blocked, the corresponding symbol appears in light grey

in the submenu.
t When the slewing gear brake is disengaged, it will be automatically

engaged as long as a button for retracting or extending the lifting cylinder
is pressed.
Extending the lifting cylinders

Extending the lifting cylinder is only enabled when the superstructure is
slewed to the 0° or 180° position.
• Slew the superstructure into the working position 0° to the rear.
• Before extending, check the position of the lifting cylinders. If the 2.5 t
base plate is on the counterweight platform, the lifting cylinders must al-
ways be turned into the end position unlocked.
S
Before extending the lifting cylinders, always check that the lifting cylinders
are turned into the unlocked position if the 2.5 t base plate is on the counter-
weight platform.
Moving the lifting cylinders into the locked position against the supporting
frame of the 2.5 t base plate could damage the lifting cylinders.
H
If the crane control does not release the slewing of the retracted lifting cyl-
inders, you can slew the superstructure sideways into the 180° to the front po-
sition, extend the lifting cylinders, unlock them and retract again.
9 • To extend, press the button next to the Extend lifting cylinder symbol and
hold it in this position.
As soon as the lifting cylinders leave the retracted position, they are shown
partially extended on the display in yellow.
The Precharge pressure (1) display is shown in red; à Precharging the counter-
weight, p. 13 - 113.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
• Press the switch until both counterweight lifting cylinders are shown fully
extended on the display in green.
Now the lifting cylinders are in the extended end position.
If the 2.5 t base plate is rigged, it is now lowered.
à Display of incorrect statuses, p. 13 - 111.

H
If an incorrect status is displayed;
Retracting the lifting cylinders
• To retract press and hold the button next to the Retract lifting cylinders
8 symbol.
As soon as the lifting cylinders leave the retracted position, they are shown
partially extended on the display in yellow.
• Press the switch until both counterweight lifting cylinders are shown fully
retracted on the display in green.
Now the lifting cylinders are in the Retracted end position.
If the 2.5 t base plate is rigged, the counterweight is now lifted and you can
precharge the counterweight for crane operation.
Precharging the counterweight

• To precharge press the button next to the Retract lifting cylinder (8) symbol
until the Precharge pressure (1) display changes from red to green.
When the display is green, the required pressure with which the counter-
weight is to be drawn under the turntable during crane operation has been
reached in the lifting cylinders.

H
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Locking / Prerequisites for unlocking and locking

unlocking coun-
Permission for unlocking or locking depends on the end position of the lift-
terweights
ing cylinders:
– If the lifting cylinders are in the end position Retracted, only that turning
movement which was reached before the lifting cylinders were retracted
is permitted (e.g. after lifting the counterweight combination only the
Locking movement).
– If the lifting cylinders are in the end position Extended, locking and unlock-
ing are released.
S
Risk of damage to the hoist unit!
In the Locked position, the lifting cylinders may only be extended if the 2.5 t
base plate is not on the counterweight framework or if the superstructure
is turned to the side. This prevents the lifting cylinders from colliding
against the supporting frame of the 2.5 t base plate and becoming dam-
aged while extending.
!# If a button for a movement is blocked, the corresponding symbol appears in

light grey in the submenu.
Locking the counterweight
# • To lock press and hold the button next to the Lock counterweight symbol.
As soon as the lifting cylinders leave the end position Unlocked, they are
shown diagonally on the display in yellow.
• Press the switch until both counterweight lifting cylinders are shown ver-
tically on the display in green.
Now the lifting cylinders are rotated into the end position Locked.

H
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Unlocking counterweights
"! • To unlock press and hold the button next to the Unlock counterweight sym-
bol (if the symbol is shown in light grey; à Prerequisites for unlocking and
locking, p. 13 - 114).
As soon as the lifting cylinders leave the end position Locked, they are shown
diagonally on the display in yellow.
• Press the switch until both lifting cylinders are shown horizontally on the
display in red.
Now the lifting cylinders are rotated in the end position Unlocked.

H
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.8 Removing / installing the counterweight sections on the

turntable
H
This section describes the procedure with the 16.8 t counterweight combi-
nation. If there is less counterweight available, you will require a suitable
lifting device, such as a fork lift truck.
H
The illustrations show as an example how to remove/mount the 9.3 t coun-
terweight combination.
Removing • Assemble the 16.8 counterweight version on the counterweight platform

for the counterweight currently installed on the turntable (4.3 t, 6.8 t or
9.3 t); à p. 13 - 105.
S
When you assemble the 19.3 t counterweight combination, the lifting cylin-
ders will be damaged when you slew the superstructure after lowering
down the counterweight.
• Lift the counterweight onto the turntable and precharge it; à Retracting
8 the lifting cylinders, p. 13 - 113.
• Loosen the locknuts (1).

• Turn the nuts (1) up so far that you can lift
the locking bar (2) over the stop (3)).
• Lift the locking bar (2) over the stop (3) and
remove the bracket (4) from the slinging
point (5).
• Remove the bracket on the other side in the
same way.
9 • Lower the counterweight onto the counterweight platform.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Installing • Assemble the 16.8 t counterweight combination on the counterweight

platform in such a way that the required counterweight sections are posi-
tioned on top.
– For 4.3 t: a 2.5 t counterweight section
– For 6.8 t: a 5.0 t counterweight section
– For 9.3 t: a 2.5 t counterweight section and below that, a 5.0 t counter-
weight section
G
Risk of accidents from falling counterweights
The slinging points on the 2.5 t counterweight sections are only designed
for the dead weight of the sections.
For this reason, you should always position the 2.5 t counterweight section
on top, and under no circumstances should you mount both 2.5 t counter-
weight sections on the turntable.
S
If 1.8 t of counterweight is mounted on the turntable, and you assemble the
19.3 t counterweight combination, the lifting cylinders will be damaged
when you slew the superstructure.
• Lift the counterweight onto the turntable and precharge it; à Retracting
8 the lifting cylinders, p. 13 - 113.
• Suspend the bracket (4) on the slinging

point (5) from below.
• Fold the bracket on the 1.8 t counterweight
section in such a way that the locking bar (2)
is behind the stop (3).
• Tighten the nuts (1) only enough so that the
bracket is at the stop and has no more play.
• Secure the nuts in with the counternuts (1).
• Secure the bracket on the other side in the
same way.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.7.9 Slewing with the rigged counterweight
You may only slew the superstructure with rigged counterweight if the truck
crane is supported by a sufficient outrigger span and if the permitted work-
ing radii are observed. Otherwise the truck crane will overturn during slew-
ing.
The current rigging mode will be noted from the SLI code which has been
set and the SLI will block slewing if it is not permitted.
G
Danger of overturning when slewing with an incorrectly set SLI!
The SLI only blocks slewing if you have entered the correct SLI code for the
current rigging mode and if the SLI is not overridden.
So always check whether the valid SLI code for the current rigging mode
has been entered before slewing.
This will prevent slewing in impermissible areas from being allowed, re-
sulting in the truck crane overturning.
G
Danger of overturning when slewing with the hand-held control!
When the hand-held control is connected, there is no monitoring by the SLI.
So always check whether sufficient outrigger span for the rigged counter-
weight has been set before slewing.
This prevents the truck crane from overturning during slewing because of
too much counterweight mass.
The following table shows, depending on counterweight and outrigger

span, whether slewing of the superstructure is:
– Permitted
– Only permitted for certain working radii or
– Locked (if the correct SLI code has been entered):
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Rigged outrigger span

Free on wheels 8.10 x 2.32 m 8.10 x 5.00 m 8.10 x 6.00 m 8.10 x 7.00 m
Slewing is only
permitted if the Slewing only
1.8 t radius permit- permitted if the
ted in the work- radius permit-
ing range is ob- ted in the work-
Rigged counterweight
served (at least ing range is ob-

4.3 t 3.0 m); à Lift- served (at least
ing capacity table 3.0 m); à Lift-
ing capacity table Slewing Slewing Slewing
6.8 t
permitted permitted permitted
9.3 t Only 0° working
11.8 t position to the Rigging modes
rear permitted, not permitted,
14.3 t slewing not Slewing not
permitted permitted,
16.8 t
19.3
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8 Rigging work on the main boom
13.8.1 Hook block on the bumper
The hook block can be transported on a separate vehicle or suspended on

the front bumper; à Hook block on a separate vehicle, p. 13 - 123.
Picking up the Depending on the driving mode, a hook block can be attached to the front
hook block from bumper with a retaining rope for driving; à
Driving modes, p. 7 - 1.
the bumper
S
Danger of accidents if your view is obstructed!
Have someone guide you when releasing the hook block from the holding
rope because the view of the hook block is obscured by the driver's cab.
The main boom must be completely retracted.
• Enter the SLI code for the current rigging mode of the truck crane.
• Slacken the hoist rope and raise the main

boom simultaneously.
• Derrick the main boom until the boom head
is situated vertically above the hook block.
• Disconnect the hook block from the retain-
ing rope (1).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Attaching the Depending on the driving mode, the hook block can be attached to the at-
hook block to the tachment plates on the front bumper with the holding rope; à
Driving
bumper modes, p. 7 - 1.
G
Danger of accidents if your view is obstructed!
The reeved hook block rope lines obstruct your view on the roadway. The
number of legally permissible rope lines can differ depending on the coun-
try in which you are working. During on-road driving, the hook block may
be reeved up to a maximum of 4-fall according to EU regulations.
G
Danger of accidents due to the hook block swinging unexpectedly!
If the holding rope for the hook block breaks during tightening of the hoist
rope, the hook block suddenly swings forward.
Therefore ensure that the banksman or other persons always stand at a
safe distance to the side of the hook block. Nobody may be in front of the
hook block during tightening of the hoist rope.
H
Do not attach the hook block to the front towing coupling. Otherwise in the
case of a breakdown, you would have to transfer the hook block to the at-
tachment plates before you could attach the tow-rod to the towing coupling.
• Raise the hook block until it is directly above

the holding rope (1).
• Lower the hook block and suspend the hoist
rope (1) on the hook.
• Lower the main boom onto the boom rest
and pull the hoist rope taut using the hoist
so that the hook block is securely in place.
H
If the lifting limit switch is deactivated when the hoist rope is being pulled
tight, you can override the shutdown of the lifting limit switch from the
crane cab with the Override key-operated button; à Overriding the lifting
limit switch shutdown, p. 11 - 132.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.2 Hook block on a separate vehicle
G
Risk of overturning while slewing!
Always check before slewing whether slewing is permitted in the truck
crane's current rigging mode (counterweight, outrigger span, working
radius).
Correct the rigging mode if necessary; àSlewing with the rigged counter-
weight, p. 13 - 118.
G
Danger of overturning when turning with an overridden SLI!
Do not override the SLI before rotating the superstructure.
If slewing is not released, then enter an SLI code for the working range 360°.
This prevents the superstructure from being slewed into impermissible
areas and tipping.
S
Risk of damage to the accompanying vehicle!
Only lift the hook block from the separate vehicle when the boom head is
located directly above the hook block. This prevents the hook block from
swaying and damaging the vehicle.
S
Risk of damage to the hoist rope!
Do not ease down too much hoist rope when picking up and reeving the
hook block so as to prevent slack rope.
Slack rope causes rope loops to form on the hoist drum which can lead to
load slipping and destruction of the hoist rope.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Picking up the Depending on the driving mode, the hook block can be placed on a separate
hook block vehicle for on-road driving;àDriving modes, p. 7 - 1.
• If the respective setting has been made in

the SLI, slew the superstructure and lower
the main boom until the boom head is di-
rectly over the hook block (1).
• Reel off the hoist rope.
• Reeve the hoist rope into the hook block (1);
à Reeving and unreeving the hoist rope,
p. 13 - 126.
• Lift the hook block off the separate vehicle.
Setting down the Depending on the driving mode, the hook block must be placed on a sepa-
hook block rate vehicle for on-road driving; à
Driving modes, p. 7 - 1.
H
We recommend that you transport the hook block on a separate vehicle in
a holder in such a manner as to make it possible for you to reeve the hoist
rope directly onto the hook block.
• When the SLI is set accordingly, fully retract

the main boom and reel the hoist rope on
until the hook block is suspended about 1 m
below the boom head.
• Lower the main boom and place the hook
block (1) on the separate vehicle.
• Remove the rope holding rods on the boom
head; à p. 13 - 128.
• Loosen the spring cotters (4) and remove
the holding rods (2) and (23) from the bore-
holes in the hook block.
• Fold down the guards on either side of the
hook block.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
• Remove the lifting limit switch weight (5)

from the hoist rope; à p. 13 - 143.
• Loosen the rope end clamp from the fixed
point of the boom head or the hook block;
à p. 13 - 130.
• Fold both guards (4) on the hook block (1)
back up and insert the holding rods (2) and
(3) into the bores.
• Secure the holding rods into place using the
spring cotters.
• Secure the hook block on the separate
vehicle.
• Set down the main boom onto the boom
rest.
• Install the rope holding rods on the main boom head; à p. 13 - 131.
Securing the hoist rope and the lifting limit switch weight for on-road driving
H
Do not attach the rope end clamp on the front towing coupling Otherwise,
in case of a breakdown, you must remove the fork-shaped piece and attach
it on the attachment plates before you can attach the tow-rod in the towing
coupling.
• Reel the hoist rope in and secure the rope

end clamp on the hoist rope (1).
• Wind up the hoist rope until it is slightly taut.
• Attach the lifting limit switch weight on the
hoist rope.
Hook block and lifting limit switch weight are
now secured for driving.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.3 Reeving and unreeving the hoist rope
The hoist rope can be reeved differently depending on the required lifting
capacity.
The lifting capacity of the crane depends, among other things, on the trac-
tive force of the hoist and the number of reevings on the hook block. The
lifting capacity is never greater than the tractive force of the hoist times the
number of rope lines between the boom head and the hook block (minus the
amount of friction);
à Possible reeving methods with 6 main boom head sheaves, p. 13 - 132.
à Possible reeving methods with 7 main boom head sheaves, p. 13 - 135.
H
When determining the required lifting capacity, please note that the weight
of the hook block and the lifting gear must be added to the load. The actual
useful load is therefore less than the value specified in the table.
Rope end clamp A rope end clamp is fastened to the end of the hoist rope. The rope end
clamp can be attached to the hoist rope end; it is also possible to reeve the
rope with the clamp attached.
If the hoist rope is bearing a load, the rope end

clamp always aligns itself so that the point (2)
at which the carrying rope (1) ends in the rope
end clamp is on the same axis (X-X) as the
slinging point (3) (pulling axis).
• Always thread the hoist rope so that the car-

rying rope runs along this pulling axis and is
not kinked when under a load.
The hoist rope is correctly threaded if it runs
into the rope clamp at position (2) and the free
end projects out of the rope end clamp at po-
sition (4).
G
Danger of accidents due to a falling load!
Only thread the hoist rope as described in this section (free end at position
(4)). If you thread the hoist rope differently, the carrying rope kinks under
load, is damaged and the load can fall freely to the ground during crane op-
eration.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
A rope wedge is needed for attaching the rope end clamp. The rope end
clamp and rope wedge are labelled with their respective sizes and corre-
sponding rope diameters. Ensure that the rope wedge inserted into the rope
end clamp is labelled with the same size and rope diameter as the rope end
clamp.
G
Danger of accidents due to a falling load!
If you use a rope wedge which does not belong to the rope end clamp, the
hoist rope slips out of the rope end clamp during crane operation and the
load crashes uncontrolled to the ground.
Attaching the rope end clamp

• Insert the hoist rope and rope wedge (3) into
the rope end clamp (2).
• Secure the rope clamp (1) to the loose end of
the rope.
The rope clamp provides additional safety and
prevents the hoist rope from slipping out of
the rope end clamp.
• Pull the rope end taut until the hoist rope fits
snugly in the rope end clamp.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Positioning the On the main boom head, there are four or six rope holding rods (depending
hoist rope on the additional equipment) that prevent the hoist rope from slipping out
of the sheave. You have to remove the rope holding rod to position the hoist
rope.
Removing the rope retaining rods

rope holding rods (1) to (3) from the bore
holes on the boom head.
• Unreel the hoist rope and, while doing this,

guide it through under the rope grab (1).
If the ropes are reeved from both hoists, you
must guide the auxiliary hoist rope via the
rope grab.
Also use the rope grab when working with the

lattice extension.
G
Danger due to a slack rope!
Use only hook blocks and lifting gear with sufficient minimum safe working
load in accordance with the Lifting capacity tables for the reefing and boom
length. This will avoid the development of slack rope at large heights when
lifting with no load, which can lead to load slipping during subsequent lifts.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Reeving the hoist rope

• Loosen the spring cotters (3) and remove
the holding rods (1) and (2) from the bore-
holes in the hook block.
• Fold down the guards on either side of the
hook block.
The hoist rope may now be reeved.
• Guide the hoist rope from above over the

right head sheave (1) and over the outer
boom head sheave (2) downwards.
• Guide the hoist rope from the front around
the outer pulley (3) of the hook block, up-
wards to the boom head.
• Guide the hoist rope from the back over the
next sheave (4) on the boom head, etc.
Possible reeving methods for:
– 6 head sheaves; à p. 13 - 132,
– 8 head sheaves; à p. 13 - 135.
On which fixed point the fork-shaped piece of the rope end fitting is pinned
depends on whether the hoist rope was reeved with an uneven or an even
number of runs:
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Fixed point for an odd number of runs

The fork-shaped piece on the fixed point (1) is
attached to the hook block if the number of
falls is odd (1-time, 3-times, 5-times etc.).
Fixed point for an even number of runs

The fork-shaped piece on one of the fixed
points (2) of the boom head is attached if the
number of falls is even (2-times, 4-times,
6-times etc.).
Locking the rope end clamp on the fixed point

• Attach the rope end clamp (3) to the fixed
point (1). When the number of runs is even,
the cutout (4) must point to the front.
• Fasten the rope end clamp with the pin (2)
and secure the pin with the retaining pin.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
• Fold both guards on the hook block back up

and insert the holding rods (1) and (2) into
the bore holes.
• Secure the holding rods into place using the
spring cotters.
Installing the rope retaining rods

• Insert the rope retaining rods (1) to (3) back
into the bore holes on the boom head.
• Secure the rods into place using the retain-
ing pins.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.4 Possible reeving methods with 6 main boom head sheaves
Possible reeving methods on lattice extensions and auxiliary head sheave

(all additional equipment); Operating instructions lattice extension.
H
The maximum load bearing capacity of individual hook blocks does not cor-
respond to the maximum load bearing capacity of GMK 4080-1 together
with this hook block. The lifting capacity of the GMK 4080-1 depends on the
wire cable, the reeving and the friction force. It is less than the lifting cap-
acity of the hook block; à Reeving and unreeving the hoist rope, p. 13 - 126.
7-sheave hook block

Maximum lifting capacity of the hook block 80 t
Maximum load bearing capacity with the GMK 4080-1:
A for 12-fall reeving 59 t
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
5-sheave hook block

A for 11-fall reeving 54.4 t
B for 10-fall reeving 49.6 t
C for 9-fall reeving 44.7 t
D for 8-fall reeving 39.9 t
3-sheave hook block

08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
1-sheave hook block

Hook tackle
Maximum lifting capacity of the hook tackle 8t
A 1-fall reeving 5.1 t
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.5 Possible reeving methods with 7 main boom head sheaves
The seventh head sheave is only available with additional equipment.

Possible reeving methods on lattice extensions and auxiliary head sheave
(all additional equipment); Operating instructions lattice extension.
In case of additional equipment, the hoist rope can be reeved 16 times.

à p. 13 - 138.
H
The maximum load bearing capacity of individual hook blocks does not cor-
respond to the maximum load bearing capacity of GMK 4080-1 together
with this hook block. The lifting capacity of the GMK 4080-1 depends on the
wire cable, the reeving and the friction force. It is less than the lifting cap-
acity of the hook block; à Reeving and unreeving the hoist rope, p. 13 - 126.
7-pulley hook block

s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
5-sheave hook block

3-sheave hook block

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
1-sheave hook block

Hook tackle
Maximum lifting capacity of the hook tackle 8t
A 1-fall reeving 5.1 t
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Maximum reeving The hoist rope may be reeved up to 16 times. For this you need:
– an auxiliary single-sheave boom top and
– a hook block with at least eight sheaves and sufficient lifting capacity.
• Rig the auxiliary single-sheave boom top; Operating instructions lattice
extension.
. • Guide the hoist rope

– over the left head sheave (A),
– over the auxiliary single-sheave boom top
(B),
– around the first sheave (C) of the hook
block.
• Reeve the hoist rope up to 16 times.
The maximum lifting capacity is

With 16-fold reeving 75.0 t
With 15-fold reeving 73.5 t
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.6 Installing / Removing the lifting limit switch
If the truck crane was supplied with an auxiliary hoist (additional equip-
ment), two lifting limit switches will be supplied.
For every reeved hoist rope, you have to install a lifting limit switch, attach
a lifting limit switch weight and place it around the hoist rope.
Installing the lift- You can install the lifting limit switch either on the right or left side of the
ing limit switch main boom head. For installation, select the side that is closer to the rope
which was the last to lead upwards. A lifting limit switch may be installed
on either side.
On the left side

• Release the retaining pin (5) and place the
holder with the lifting limit switch (6) on the
holding rod (4).
• Secure the holder with the retaining pin (5).
socket (1) and plug it into the dummy socket
(2).
• Lay the connecting cable (7) in such a way
that it is not damaged during crane opera-
tion.
• Insert the plug of the connecting cable (7)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
On the right side

• Release the retaining pin (4) and place the
holder with the lifting limit switch (5) on the
holding rod (3).
• Secure the holder with the retaining pin (4).
socket (1).
• Lay the connecting cable (6) in such a way
that it is not damaged during crane opera-
tion.
• Insert the plug of the connecting cable (6)
The connections (7) are only available with lattice extensions as additional
equipment; àOperating instructions lattice extension.
If a lifting limit switch is installed

• Check if the bridging plug is inserted in the
socket not being used.
If, for example, the lifting limit switch (3) is
installed on the left, the bridging plug (2) must
be inserted in the socket (1) on the right.
Otherwise, the movements Raise hoist,
Telescope out and Lower boom are blocked.
• Check if the locking system is deactivated on
the lifting limit switch; à Releasing the lock,
p. 13 - 146.
S
Risk of damage if the lifting limit switch is locked!
The lifting limit switch must not be locked. If the lifting limit switch is
locked, remove the lock.
If the lifting limit switch is locked, the hook block can catch on the bottom
of the main boom head when hoisting, and the hook block, main boom
head and hoist rope can be damaged.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
If two lifting limit switches are installed

• Lock the lifting limit switch where no lifting
limit switch weight is attached.
If the lifting limit switch weight is attached e.g.
on the left lifting limit switch (1), then you have
to lock the right lifting limit switch (2);
à Locking, p. 13 - 145.
Otherwise, the movements Raise hoist, Tele-
scope out and Lower boom are blocked.
H
If two hoist ropes are reeved, two lifting limit switch weights must also be
used. In this case, no lifting limit switch may be locked; à
Releasing the lock,
p. 13 - 146.
Attaching lifting limit switch weights

• Mount the lifting limit switch weight on the
shackle (1).
If two hoist ropes are reeved, you have to at-
tach a lifting limit switch weight on each of the
two lifting limit switches.
This lifting limit switch must not be locked;

à Releasing the lock, p. 13 - 146.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Place a lifting limit switch weight around the

hoist rope
• Pull the retaining pin (1) upwards and fold
out the two sides of the weight.
• Close the two halves of the weight around
the last rope line leading upward.
• Ensure that the retaining pin locks into place
and the two halves of the weight are se-
curely attached to each other.
If two hoist ropes are reeved, you also have to
place a lifting limit switch around the second
hoist rope.
H
If you place the lifting limit switch weight around the last rope line to lead
upwards, less rope will run through the lifting limit switch weight, especially
for a large number of reevings per stroke. This rope line will remain still with
an even number of rope lines.
In this way, you reduce the wear on hoist ropes and lifting limit switch
weights and you prevent unintentional shutdowns that may arise if the run-
ning rope lifts the lifting limit switch weight.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Removing the lift- This section describes the complete removal.

ing limit switch If the hook block is to be attached to the bumper at a later point, you only
need to detach the lifting limit switch weight from the hoist rope so that you
can unreeve or reeve when rigging the hoist rope. For the journey you can
place the lifting limit switch weight around the hoist rope.
Removing the lifting limit switch weight

• Remove the halves of the weight from the
rope.
• Pull the retaining pin (1) upwards, fold out
the two sides of the weight and let the safety
pin engage.
• Unscrew the shackle (2) and remove the lift-
ing limit switch weight.
• Also remove the lifting limit switch weight
on the other side, if necessary.
Removing the lifting limit switch, left side

• Pull the plug of the connecting cable of the
lifting limit switch from the socket (1).
dummy socket (2) and plug it into the socket
(1).
• Release the retaining pin (5) and remove the
holder with the lifting limit switch (6) from
the holding rod (4).
• Secure the pin using the retaining pin of the
lifting limit switch.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Removing the lifting limit switch, right side

• Pull the plug of the connecting cable of the
lifting limit switch from the socket (1).
• Insert the bridging plug (2) into the socket
(1).
• Release the retaining pin (4) and remove the
holder with the lifting limit switch (5) from
the holding rod (3).
• Secure the pin using the retaining pin of the
lifting limit switch.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.7 Locking the lifting limit switch / Releasing the lock
Locking If a hoist rope is reeved and two lifting limit switches are installed, you have
to mechanically lock the non-required lifting limit switch so that all crane
movements are enabled.
S
Risk of damage if the lifting limit switch is locked!
During crane operation, the lifting limit switch with the lifting limit switch
weight attached must not be locked.
If the lifting limit switch is locked, release the lock.
If the lifting limit switch is locked, the hook block can catch on the bottom
of the main boom head, and the hook block, main boom head and hoist
rope can be damaged.
• Remove the hoist limit switch weight.

• Take the plastic cap from the holder on the
lifting limit switch (4).
• Pull on the wire cable (3) in order to release
the lifting limit switch.
• Thread the cable into the plastic cap's slit
(2).
• Place the plastic cap on the base (1) of the
lifting limit switch and release the wire
cable.
The lifting limit switch is locked in this posi-
tion.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Releasing the lock If you attach the lifting limit switch weight to a lifting limit switch, you have
to release the mechanical lock so that the lifting limit switch can switch on
in the case of an emergency.
• Pull on the wire cable (3) and thread it out of

the slit in the plastic cap (2).
• Remove the plastic cap from the base (1)
and insert it in the holder on the lifting limit
switch (4).
The locking system is released in this position.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
13.8.8 Anemometer and air traffic control light
S
Risk of damage when driving on roads!
Always remove the anemometer and air traffic control light before on-road
driving.
This prevents the given overall length from being exceeded at on-road
level, and the anemometer from being damaged by air currents.
Mounting The anemometer and the air traffic control light (both additional equipment)
are on the same rod.
• Insert the rod (1) into the clamp (3) and

secure them with retaining pins.
• Remove the cables from the clamps (2) and
attach
– the anemometer to socket (4),
– the air traffic control light to socket (5),
• Lay the cable so that it will not be damaged
during crane operation.
• Check that the anemometer is able to swing,
so that is hangs vertically when the main
boom is raised.
Switching the air traffic control light on and off:

To switch on: Press in bottom of switch (1).
To switch off: Press in top of switch (1).
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Rigging work
Removing You must remove the rod with the anemometer/air traffic control light be-
fore driving on the road.
• Switch off the air traffic control light – press the switch (1) upwards and
inwards.
• Remove the plug and close the sockets (4)

and (5) with the protective caps.
• Wind the cable onto the clamp (2).
rod (1) from the clamp (3).
• For transportation, attach the retaining pin
to the rod (1).
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14
14.1 Emergency-stop devices for crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
14.1.1 Carrying out emergency-stop operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
14.1.2 Resetting the emergency-stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 3
14.2 Procedure in the event of a malfunction during crane operation. . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5
14.3 Fuses on the superstructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
14.3.1 Fuses on the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8
14.3.2 Fuses in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 10
14.3.3 SLI fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
14.4 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15
14.4.1 Malfunctions in the diesel engine during crane operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15
14.4.2 Malfunctions when operating with the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
14.4.3 Malfunctions in the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
14.4.4 Malfunctions in the main hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 18
14.4.5 Malfunctions on the auxiliary hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 20
14.4.6 Derricking gear malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 22
14.4.7 Malfunctions in the slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 24
14.4.8 Malfunctions in the counterweight hoist unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 26
14.4.9 Malfunctions in the hydraulic system / hydraulic oil cooler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
14.4.10 Malfunctions on the turntable lock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
14.4.11 Malfunctions in the telescoping mechanism. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 28
14.4.12 Malfunctions when driving from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 32
14.5 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
14.5.1 General malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
14.5.2 Error messages on the SLI insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 34
14.6 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the crane control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
14.6.1 General malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
14.6.2 Error messages on the crane control display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 40
14.7 Emergency operations and programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 43
14.7.1 Emergency retraction operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44
14.7.2 Emergency telescoping program submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 49
14.7.3 Entering telescoping values after emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 60
14.7.4 Emergency operation in the event of a failure of the operating elements
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 63
14.8 Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159 (ZH1/461) . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 69
14.8.1 Important instructions for hydraulic emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 69
14.8.2 Operating principle and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 71
08.03.2006
14.8.3 Connecting / disconnecting hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 73

14.8.4 Establishing the hydraulic circuits required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 76
14.8.5 Operating in emergency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 80
14.8.6 After emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 84

GMK 4080-1
14.8.7 Emergency supply of another crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 85
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Malfunctions during crane operation
14.1 Emergency-stop devices for crane operation

A maximum of four emergency-stop devices are active on the GMK 4080-1
truck crane during crane operation.
H
The battery master switch cannot be used as an emergency stop switch for
the diesel engine. The diesel engine continues to run after the battery mas-
ter switch has been switched off.
G
Risk of overload if used improperly!
The emergency stop switches are only intended for emergencies when
crane operations cannot be braked or stopped by moving the control lever
appropriately. Never use this switch to brake crane movements in normal
crane operation mode.
Stopping crane operations suddenly at high working speeds and with un-
favourable combinations of the working position and rigging mode can re-
sult in the truck crane becoming overloaded.
14.1.1 Carrying out emergency-stop operations
G
Risk of accidents due to suspended loads!
If a load is suspended from the hook after actuating emergency stop, make
sure no one enters the danger area under the suspended load. Secure the
danger area in case the error cannot be corrected quickly before you leave
the operating site.
There are various emergency-stop switches on the truck crane GMK 4080-1:
– three emergency-stop switches on the outside of the truck crane
– one emergency stop switch in the crane cab
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
On the outside of the truck crane

The diesel engine emergency stop switches (1)
and (2) are on the carrier.
• Press one of the diesel engine emergency-
stop switches (1), (2) or (3).
stops.

The diesel engine can only be restarted after resetting the emergency-stop
In the crane cab

The Crane control emergency-stop switch (1) is
in the crane cab.
• Press the Crane control emergency-stop
switch (1).
stops.

The diesel engine can only be restarted after resetting the emergency-stop
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.1.2 Resetting the emergency-stop switch
You cannot start the diesel engine as long as one of the emergency-stop
switches is engaged. Proceed as follows to check whether the crane control
is working normally again after a restart:

• Turn the actuated emergency-stop switch until it disengages again.
• If the truck crane is additionally equipped with an air intake inhibitor, re-
lease the air intake inhibitor too; à p. 5 - 22.
• Let go of all control levers and restart the diesel engine.
Check whether the crane operations are being performed normally again.
H
Contact your local CraneCARE if the crane operations are unable to be car-
ried out normally or you have to reactivate the emergency shutdown
procedure.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.2 Procedure in the event of a malfunction during crane operation
14.2 Procedure in the event of a malfunction during

crane operation
If a malfunction occurs:
• Keep calm.
If it is possible to • If possible, set down the load immediately. Retract the main boom com-
lower the load pletely and set it down on the boom rest.
• Install warning signs in the crane cab to prevent unauthorised use of the
truck crane. Remove the ignition key.
• Inform your supervisor.
G
Risk of accidents due to suspended loads!
It is forbidden to carry out repair work with suspended loads!
G
Danger of accidents in the event of a defective SLI!
You may only override the SLI in cases of emergency, e.g. if the load has to
be set down due to a malfunction.
Do not perform any operations which increase the load moment (telescop-
ing, lowering the boom, lowering the lattice extension) any more if the SLI
is defective and there is still a suspended load on the hook.
If it becomes necessary to override the SLI, observe all of the information in

the section SLI override; àp. 12 - 59.
G
Risk of accidents!
Do not perform any crane operations that increase the load moment while
a load is on the hook block and the SLI is overridden.
• Try to eliminate the malfunction. Notify the local CraneCARE if it is not pos-
sible to repair the malfunction.
If it is not possible • Secure the danger area using barriers and warning signs.
to lower the load
• Notify the repair crew or the local CraneCARE.
G
Danger of accidents due to improper emergency operations!
Only trained, qualified personnel may carry out emergency operations if
solenoid valves have to be operated by hand while unrigging the crane.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.2 Procedure in the event of a malfunction during crane operation
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.3 Fuses on the superstructure

The fuses are located in different places on the superstructure:
– In the distribution box on the turntable
– In the driver's cab
– In the SLI
Information on The positions of the fuses, their designations and which functions are pro-
replacing fuses tected by the respective fuses are shown in the following sections.
• Switch off the ignition whenever a fuse has to be replaced.
S
Risk of damage when the ignition is switched on!
Switch off the ignition whenever a fuse has to be replaced. In this way you
can prevent the new fuse from being damaged by the increased starting
current immediately after inserting it.
S
Risk of damage due to overloading!
Replace blown fuses only with new fuses of the same amperage. In this
way you can prevent parts from being overloaded and damaged or the fuse
from being immediately damaged again.
Notify CraneCARE at the respective location if a fuse of the same amperage
blows again after turning on the ignition.
S
Danger of fire!
Never repair a defective fuse with other electrically conductive materials.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.3.1 Fuses on the turntable
• Open the door of the distribution box (4).

The distribution box contains
– The fuse groups F 1 (1).
– Input-output circuit board fuses (2).
– Fuses on the circuit board (3).
F 1 fuse group The following tables show the designations of the individual fuses of the
fuse group F 1, including their ratings and functions.
The designations 1 to 8 in the tables correspond to the order in the diagram

from top to bottom (fuse 1 is the top fuse).

Control unit at connection 0,
F 1/1 20
I/O 3 circuit board
Control unit at connection 1,
F 1/2 20
I/O 4 circuit board
Central lubrication (additional
F 1/3 10 equipment),
lattice extension (additional equipment)
F 1/4 3 Engine cutout relay
Input / output circuit board I/O 3,
F 1/5 3
I/O 4 circuit board
Emergency operation of the power units
F 1/6 3
via hand-held control
08.03.2006
F 1/7 20 Oil cooler

F 1/8 20 Oil cooler

GMK 4080-1
Fuses on I/O cir- The control units for the superstructure electronics are connected to I/O cir-
cuit boards cuit boards with two further fuses on each of them.
Check these fuse if the fuses for the control units are intact and the malfunc-
tion is unable to be eliminated in spite of following the remedial information
in section Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the power units.
The fuses (1) on the circuit board each have a

rating of 10 amperes.
• Check the fuses and replace defective ones.

The input / output circuit board I/O 4 is in the
distribution box on the telescopingcylinder
and only intended for maintenance purposes.
Fuses on the cir- The fuses on the circuit board are used to secure the control units at the con-
cuit board nections 0 and 1.
The fuses are named in the electrical circuit

diagram according to their function and allo-
cated as follows:
Pos. Designation in Amperage

electrical circuit dia- (A)
gram
1 ESX 1 D+ 3
2 ESX 1 UE 3
3 ESX 1 8.5 V 2
4 ESX 0 D+ 3
5 ESX 0 UE 3
6 ESX 0 8.5 V 2

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.3.2 Fuses in the crane cab
The fuse groups F 2 to F 4 are in the crane cab.
• Undo the screws (2) and remove the cover

(1).
The fuse groups F 2, F 3 and F 4 each consist
of eight fuses.
The following tables show the designations of

the individual fuses, including their amperage
and function.
The designations 1 to 8 in the following tables correspond to their order

from left to right in the illustration (fuse 1 is always the left fuse).

F 2/1 20 Control unit at connection 2
8.5 V fuse for control unit at
F 2/2 2
connection 2
Control unit at connection 2
F 2/3 3
Crane control display supply
Control unit at connection 2
F 2/4 5
Crane control display supply
F 2/5 10 Control lever supply
F 2/6 5 Safe load indicator and SLI insert supply
F 2/7 – Unassigned
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Designation Amperage Function

(A)
Voltage transformer 24 V / 12 V,
F 3/2 10
crane cab lighting
F 3/3 25 Air-conditioning system
F 3/4 25 Air-conditioning system
F 3/6 20 Heating

(A)
F 4/1 15 Working area spotlight
F 4/2 15 Working area spotlight
Windshield wiper-washer system,
F 4/3 15
cigarette lighter
F 4/4 10 Heating
F 4/5 5 Constant engine speed
Holding brake, indicator lamps for battery
charge indicator / holding brake,
F 4/6 5
switchover between for driving with /
without loads
F 4/7 10 Heater fan for air distribution
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.3.3 SLI fuses
An appropriate error code appears on the Information/Error display when-

à
ever a fuse is defective ( Table of error codes, p. 14 - 35).
There are six fuses on the control unit of the SLI.
The SLI control unit is behind the crane cab

seat.
• Undo the screws (2) and remove the cover

(1).
The plate (3) is behind the cover.
• Undo the screws (4) and fold the plate (3)
forwards.
The SLI control unit is at the bottom left on the

back of the plate.
The fuse groups are arranged as follows:
1: SLI F 1
2: SLI F 2
3: SLI F 3
4: SLI F 11
5: SLI F 12
6: SLI F 6

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

(A)
F1 5 For internal main relay
Display for external SLI shutdown
F2 5
Power supply for movements of all power
F3 5
units at connection 0
F6 5 SLI power supply
Display for external SLI early warning
F 11 5
function (additional equipment)
F 12 5 Unassigned
Replace the defective fuse with a new fuse of the same amperage
(5 amperes).
H
Notify the local CraneCARE if a fuse blows again after switching on the igni-
tion.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the power units

at the power units
14.4.1 Malfunctions in the diesel engine during crane operation

Engine is unable to be started Battery master switch not Switch on the battery master
from the crane cab (starter switched on switch; à p. 5 - 5.
does not rotate).
Fuse F 1/1, F 1/2 or Check the fuses and replace
F 5/6 C defective. them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
The Driving mode / Crane opera- Press in the driving mode / crane
tion rocker switch is in Crane operation rocker switch at the
operation position top, in driving mode position;
à p. 12 - 23.
Not all bridging plugs are Remove the hand-held control
plugged into the sockets for or insert the bridging plug;
the hand-held control; or an à p. 13 - 32.
attempt is being made to start
the diesel engine from the
crane cab with the hand-held
control connected.
An emergency-stop switch is Check the emergency-stop
engaged. switch ( à p. 14 - 1) and reset
it;à p. 14 - 3.
F 5/4 C fuse defective Check the fuses and replace
them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
Engine cannot be started The General warning lamp sym- Check the indicator lamps in
from the crane cab (starter bol is displayed in red in the the driver's cab and keep on
does not rotate). Warning message submenu. looking for the error there.
The Engine electronic system The output of the diesel engine falls continuously in the event
warning lamp goes on during of malfunctions in the engine electronics. The diesel engine is
driving and the diesel engine not switched off however, to ensure the load is able to lowered
output is reduced continu- and the truck crane unrigged.
ously. For remedial measures àp. 8 - 37.
H
If you still face problems while starting the diesel engine, proceed according
to the diesel engine malfunctions table; à p. 8 - 37.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.2 Malfunctions when operating with the hand-held control

CAN indicator lamp flashes or The bridging plug has been Change over the bridging
stays off after connecting the pulled out of another socket. plug; à p. 13 - 32.
hand-held control.
Malfunction in the control sys- Notify CraneCARE.
tem
Fuse F 1/2, F 1/5 or F 1/6 SS Check the fuse and replace it if
defective necessary; à p. 14 - 8.
Fuses F 5/4 C or Check the fuses and replace
F 1/7 C defective them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 30.
The Crane control emergency- à Resetting the emergency-stop
stop switch, an emergency- switch, p. 14 - 3
stop switch at the carrier or
the emergency-stop switch on
the hand-held control is de-
pressed.
Diesel engine cannot be The Driving mode / crane opera- Press the rocker switch into
started with the hand-held tion rocker switch is de- the required position;
control. pressed in the wrong position. à p. 13 - 28.
tem
Pre-selected function cannot Another function has been Pre-select the desired func-
be carried out. pre-selected. tion.
tem
14.4.3 Malfunctions in the outriggers

When operating with the Fuse F 5/3, F 5/4, F 5/7 or Check the fuses and replace
hand-held control: F 1/7 C defective them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 29.
Outrigger cylinders and
F 1/1, F 1/2, F 1/5 or F 1/6 SS Check the fuses and replace
beams can neither be ex-
fuse defective them if necessary;
tended nor retracted and the
à p. 14 - 8.
ing. Defective fuse on the I/O 0, Check the fuses and replace
I/O 1 (front outriggers) or I/O 2 them if necessary;
(rear outriggers) circuit board à p. 8 - 36.
08.03.2006
The bridging plug has been Change over the bridging

pulled out of another socket. plug; à p. 13 - 32.

GMK 4080-1

When operating with from Fuse F 5/4 or F 1/7 C defective Check the fuses and replace
the crane cabin: them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 29.
à p. 14 - 8.
Hand-held control is con- Remove the hand-held control
nected to a socket on the su- and insert the bridging plug;
perstructure à p. 13 - 32.
When operating from the Fuse F 5/4 or F 1/7 C defective Check the fuses and replace
switch boxes: them if necessary;
à p. 8 - 29.
à p. 14 - 8.
Display fields have been Switch on the display fields in
switched off on the crane con- the Settings / Displays sub-
trol display. menu; à p. 13 - 42
Hand-held control connected Remove the hand-held control
to the carrier and insert the bridging
plug; à p. 13 - 32
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.4 Malfunctions in the main hoist

Main hoist not working or Main hoist is switched off and Switch on the main hoist;
malfunctioning (no lifting, the indicator lamp in the Main à p. 12 - 71.
lowering or high-speed mode hoist on / off rocker button is
functions) only lit up weakly.
Dead man's switch system Press the dead man's switch;
not actuated à p. 11 - 134.
engaged. switch (à p. 14 - 1) and reset
à
it; p. 14 - 3.
Fuse F 1/1 SS defective (crane Check the fuse and replace it if
control). necessary; à p. 14 - 8.
Fuse 4, 5 or 6 defective on the Check the fuse and replace it if
circuit board in the distribu- necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
tion box
Defective control unit at con- Acknowledge the error mes-
nection 0 (error message is sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
displayed) Inform CraneCARE if the error
message recurs.
F 2/5 SS fuse defective (con- Check the fuse and replace it if
trol lever supply) necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
The parking brake is released Engage the parking brake
and gear position D is se- à
( p. 12 - 190) or select gear
lected position L, R; à p. 12 - 183.
Only the lifting function of the Lowering limit switch acti- Leave the shutdown range
main hoist is working (check vated and raise the main hoist.
all causes of 'Main hoist no
working' additionally).
Only the lowering function of Lifting limit switch activated Leave the shutdown range
the main hoist is working (warning lamp is on) and lower the main hoist.
(check all causes from 'Main
SLI shutdown (warning lamp Leave the shutdown range;
hoist not working' addition-
ally).
is on) à p. 12 - 55.
No lifting or lowering func- The corresponding function is Acknowledge the error mes-
tion or high-speed mode disabled by the crane control sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
(error message is displayed). If the error message recurs,
note down the information
displayed in the error menu
à p. 14 - 39 and notify
CraneCARE.
The corresponding function is Switch off the ignition briefly
disabled by the crane control and then turn it on again.
08.03.2006
(no error message is dis- If the error message recurs,

played). note down the information
CraneCARE.

GMK 4080-1

No lifting function The F6 fuse at the SLI control Check the fuse and replace it if
system is defective. necessary; à p. 14 - 12.
Lifting or lowering is either Maximum speed set too low Increase the maximum speed
not possible at all or only at a in the Power unit speeds sub-
very low speed. menu; à p. 12 - 138.
Lifting or lowering function Malfunction in the crane con- Stop the operation with the
cannot be switched off trol crane control emergency-stop
Main hoist no longer re- Failure of the crane control for Carry out the crane operations
sponds to the control lever. the operating elements in the required for the unrigging
crane cab process with the hand-held
control; à p. 14 - 63.
H
Check first of all whether the malfunction occurs in both directions of move-
ment.
In this case you also have to check the causes specified in the Main hoist not
working section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.5 Malfunctions on the auxiliary hoist

Auxiliary hoist not working or Auxiliary hoist is switched off Switch on the auxiliary hoist;
malfunctioning (lifting, lower- and the indicator lamp in the à p. 12 - 76.
ing or high-speed mode not Main hoist on / off rocker button
working) is lit up weakly.
à
it; p. 14 - 3.
Fuse F 1/1defective (crane Check the fuse and replace it if
control). necessary; à p. 14 - 8.
Fuse 4, 5 or 6 defective on the Check the fuse and replace it if
circuit board in the distribu- necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
tion box
message recurs.
F 2/5 fuse defective (control Check the fuse and replace it if
lever supply) necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
Only the lifting function of the Lowering limit switch acti- Leave the shutdown range
auxiliary hoist is working vated and raise the auxiliary hoist.
(check all causes from 'Main
hoist not working' as well).
Only the lowering function of Lifting limit switch activated Leave the shutdown range
the auxiliary hoist is working (warning lamp is on) and lower the auxiliary hoist.
(check all causes specified in
the 'Auxiliary hoist not work-
ing' section as well).
is on) à p. 12 - 55.
No lifting or lowering func- The corresponding function is Acknowledge the error mes-
tion or high-speed mode disabled by the crane control sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
CraneCARE.
08.03.2006

CraneCARE.

GMK 4080-1

Lifting or lowering is either Maximum speed set too low Increase the maximum speed
not possible at all or only at a in the Power unit speeds sub-
very low speed. menu; à p. 12 - 138.
No lifting function or no low- The F 6 fuse in the SLI control Check the fuse and replace it if
ering function with the luffing system is defective. necessary; à p. 14 - 12.
jib rigged
Lifting or lowering function Malfunction in the crane con- Stop the operation with the
cannot be switched off trol Crane control emergency-stop
Auxiliary hoist no longer re- Failure of the crane control for Carry out the crane operations
sponds to the control lever. the operating elements in the required for the unrigging
H
ment.
In this case also check the causes specified in the Auxiliary hoist not working
section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.6 Derricking gear malfunctions

Derricking gear not working Derricking gear is switched off Switch on the derricking gear;
or malfunctioning (no lifting and the indicator lamp in the à p. 12 - 78.
or lowering function) derricking gear on / off rocker
button is lit up weakly.
à
it; p. 14 - 3.
Fuse F 1/1, F 1/2, F 1/4,
Check the fuse and replace it if
F 1/5 or F 2/1 SS defective
(crane control).
Fuse 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6 defective Check the fuse and replace it if

on the circuit board in the dis- necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
tribution box
nection 0, 1 or 2 (error message once; à p. 14 - 40.
sage is displayed) Inform CraneCARE if the error
message recurs.
No lowering function (also Lifting limit switch activated Leave the shutdown range,
check all the causes specified (warning lamp is on) raise the respective compo-
in 'Derricking gear not work- nents.
ing')
is on) à p. 12 - 55.
trol lever supply) necessary; à p. 14 - 8. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

No lowering or raising The corresponding function is Acknowledge the error mes-
function disabled by the crane control sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
CraneCARE.
CraneCARE.
The F 6 fuse in the SLI control Check the fuse and replace it if
system is defective. necessary; àp. 14 - 12.
trol lever supply) necessary; àp. 14 - 8.
Raising or lowering not possi- Maximum speed set too low Increase the maximum speed
ble, or only at a very low in the Power unit speeds sub-
speed menu; à p. 12 - 138.
Raising or lowering function Malfunction in the crane con- Stop the operation with the
cannot be switched off trol Crane control emergency-stop
Derricking gear no longer re- Crane control failure Carry out the crane operations
sponds to the control lever. required for the unrigging
process with the hand-held
control; à Emergency opera-
tion in the event of a failure of the
operating elements in the crane
cab, p. 14 - 63.
H
ment.
In this case also check the causes specified in the Derricking gear not working
section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.7 Malfunctions in the slewing gear

Slewing gear not working Main hoist is switched off and Switch on the slewing gear;
the indicator lamp in the Main à p. 12 - 98.
hoist unit on / off rocker button
is lit up weakly.
à
it; p. 14 - 3.
Fuse F 1/1, F 1/2 or F 2/1 SS
defective (crane control). Check the fuse and replace it if
Fuse F 1/7 or F 1/5 C defective necessary; à p. 14 - 12.
(crane control).
tribution box
cuit board them if necessary;
à p. 14 - 9.
nection 1 or 2 (error message sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
is displayed) Inform CraneCARE if the error
message recurs.
SLI code entered for the 0° po- Enter the SLI code for a slew-
sition ing range.
The F6 fuse at the SLI control Check the fuse and replace it if
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

Left and right slewing func- An SLI code has been entered Enter the SLI code for a slew-
tions not working for the 0° or 180° position. ing range.
The corresponding function is Acknowledge the error mes-
disabled by the crane control sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
CraneCARE.
CraneCARE.
Function Stop at 0°/180° Switch off function;
switched on à p. 12 - 87
Slewing only possible in one Shutdown angle of a limited Enter the SLI code for a slew-
direction slewing range reached (addi- ing range of 360° or slew in
tional equipment) the opposite direction to leave
the shutdown angle.
Slewing not possible, or only Maximum speed set too low Increase the maximum speed
at a very low speed in the Power unit speeds sub-
menu; à p. 12 - 138.
Slewing gear no longer re- Failure of the crane control for Carry out the crane operations
sponds to the control lever the operating elements in the required for the unrigging
Slewing function cannot be Malfunction in the crane con- Stop the operation with the
switched off trol Crane control emergency-stop
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.8 Malfunctions in the counterweight hoist unit

Counterweight hoist unit is An emergency-stop switch is Check the emergency-stop
not working engaged. switch (à p. 14 - 1) and reset
à
it; p. 14 - 3.
Fuse F 1/2 or F 1/2 SS defec- Check the fuse and replace it if
tive (crane control). necessary; à p. 14 - 8.
Defective fuse on I/O circuit Check the fuse and replace it if
board 3 necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
message recurs.
The corresponding function is Acknowledge the error mes-
disabled by the crane control sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
CraneCARE.
CraneCARE.
Indicator lamps for lifting cy- Electronic system has de- Try to rectify the error;
linder extended / retracted or tected an electrical or logical à p. 13 - 111.
indicator and warning lamps error.
for locking / unlocking are
flashingsimultaneously.
The counterweight hoist unit Counterweight lifting cylinder Counterweight lifting cylinder
locking / unlocking function is retracted extended; àp. 13 - 112.
not working.
Counterweight lifting cylin- Counterweight hoist unit not Lock or unlock the counter-
der extension / retraction locked or unlocked in the end weight hoist unit completely
function not working position (indicator or warning lamp
must be on); à p. 13 - 114.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.9 Malfunctions in the hydraulic system / hydraulic oil cooler

Hydraulic oil temperature Hydraulic system is under ex- Stop crane work and keep the
above 80 °C, fan in the hy- treme strain diesel engine running until
draulic oil cooler is running the oil has cooled down.
Hydraulic oil temperature Fuse F 1/7 or F 1/8 SS defec- Stop crane operations, check
above 80 °C, fan in the hy- tive the fuse and replace it if nec-
draulic oil cooler is not run- essary; à p. 14 - 8.
ning
Fuse F 1/7 or F 1/5 C defective Stop crane operations, check
(crane control). the fuse and replace it if nec-
essary; à p. 8 - 30.
Defective temperature sensor Have the temperature sensor
in the circuit of the hydraulic replaced.
system (error message is dis-
played)
In the Warning messages sub- Displayed hydraulic oil filter is Replace the hydraulic oil filter;
menu, one or more of the dirty à maintenance manual.
symbols for the hydraulic oil
filter will be displayed in red
14.4.10 Malfunctions on the turntable lock

The turntable locking or un- Fuse F 1/1, F 1/5 or
Check the fuse and replace it if
locking function is not work-
ing.
F 1/4 SS defective (crane con-
trol).
Defective fuse on I/O circuit Check the fuse and replace it if

board 3 necessary; à p. 14 - 9.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.4.11 Malfunctions in the telescoping mechanism

Telescoping mechanism not Telescoping mechanism is Switch on the telescoping
working or malfunctioning switched off and the indicator mechanism; à p. 12 - 98.
(retraction / extension func- lamp in the telescoping mecha-
tion not working) nism on / off rocker button is lit
up weakly.
à
it; p. 14 - 3.
Fuse F 1/1, F 1/2, F 1/4 or F 2/1 Check the fuse and replace it if
SS defective (crane control). necessary; à p. 14 - 8.
tribution box
nection 0, 1 or 2 (error message once; à p. 14 - 40.
sage is displayed) Inform CraneCARE if the error
message recurs.
lected position L, R;à p. 12 - 183.
Telescopic section and tele- Defective valve Note down the error code in
scoping cylinder locking / un- the Telescoping mechanism sub-
locking function not working menu à p. 14 - 31 and notify
CraneCARE.
Lowering function not SLI shutdown (warning lamp Leave the shutdown range.
working (additionally check is on)
all the causes specified in
'Telescoping mechanism not
working')
Lifting limit switch activated Leave the shutdown range
(warning lamp is on) and lower the hoist.
Retraction function not work- Insufficient boom lubrication Lubricate the boom;
ing (additionally check all the à Maintenance manual
causes specified in 'Telescop-
Boom not steep enough Leave the shutdown range,
ing mechanism not working')
raise the respective compo-
nents.
Telescopic section cannot be Telescopic section is still Unlock the telescopic section;
moved by operating the con- locked. à p. 12 - 115.
08.03.2006
trol lever
The telescoping cylinder is Lock the telescoping cylinder;
not locked. à p. 12 - 107.

GMK 4080-1

The telescopic section / tele- Defective hydraulic / electrical Note down the number code
scoping cylinder locking func- system from the error display of the
tion is not working. telescoping mechanism
(à p. 14 - 31) and displays in
the error menu ( à p. 14 - 39)
and notify CraneCARE.
Extension or retraction func- Corresponding function is dis- Acknowledge the error mes-
tion or high-speed mode not abled by the crane control (er- sage once; à p. 14 - 40.
working ror message is displayed). If the error message recurs,
CraneCARE.
CraneCARE.
Retracting or extending is not Maximum speed set too low Increase the maximum speed
possible, or only at a very low in the Power unit speeds sub-
speed menu; à p. 12 - 138.
The retraction or extension Malfunction in the crane con- Stop the operation with the
function cannot be switched trol Crane control emergency-stop
off. switch; à p. 14 - 3.
The boom can no longer be The electrical control of the Notify CraneCARE.
telescoped, the locking / un- hydraulic system is inter-
locking mechanism is no rupted (e.g. cable in the main
longer responding to the op- boom is torn).
erating elements in the crane
cab
The boom can no longer be The hydraulic supply is inter- Retract the telescopic section
telescoped, the telescoping rupted. in emergency mechanical
cylinder can no longer be mode; à Emergency retraction
moved operation, p. 14 - 44.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

Telescoping mechanism no Crane control failure Carry out the crane operations
longer responds to the con- required for the unrigging
trol lever process with the hand-held
control; à Emergency opera-
tion in the event of a failure of the
operating elements in the crane
cab, p. 14 - 63.
H
ment.
If the malfunction occurs in both directions of movement, you also have to
check the causes specified in the Telescoping mechanism not working section.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Telescoping If the telescoping mechanism is disabled by the crane control, the following
mechanism error display appears after calling up the Telescoping submenu.
messages
All symbols (left) for operating the locks disap-
pear and the corresponding buttons become
inactive.
The Current telescoping mechanism status display

(1) appears.
The status displayed is defined more precisely

by a 16-figure error code (2) at the bottom of
the display.
• Always note down the error code before

contacting CraneCARE at the respective loca-
tion.
The following statuses can be displayed on the Current telescoping mechanism

status display:
Waiting status
All statuses have not yet been recorded or the supply voltage has not yet
been applied. In this condition, access to emergency operation and the Enter
telescoping after emergency operation area is blocked (both in the Settings / Dis-
plays submenu).
Deactivated status
There is a malfunction which is preventing any movement of the telescop-
ing mechanism. In this condition, access to emergency operation and the
Enter telescoping after emergency operation area is blocked (both in the Settings
/ Displays submenu).
No telescoping status
The crane control has detected a deviation between the current telescoping
operation and the displayed values (e.g. after telescoping with the emergen-
cy program). The Enter telescoping after emergency operation area is active in or-
der for the current telescoping to be entered.
Emergency program access status
The telescoping mechanism can only be operated with the emergency pro-
gram; à Starting the emergency program, p. 14 - 49.
Emergency program status

Whenever the emergency program status is displayed, the Telescoping emer-
gency program is switched on and the several symbols are displayed;
08.03.2006
à Emergency telescoping program submenu, p. 14 - 49.
s
GMK 4080-1
14.4.12 Malfunctions when driving from the crane cab

Operation elements for trans- Vehicle parking brake en- Release vehicle parking brake;
mission, separate steering, gaged à p. 12 - 175.
differential locks are not func-
tioning (symbols light grey) Ignition key in driver's cab not Turn the ignition key in the
in position 1. driver's cab to position 1;
à p. 12 - 173.
Transmission not shifting au- Gear position L is selected. Select gear position D;
tomatically à p. 12 - 183.
Symbols for the operating Separate steering switched Switch on separate steering;
mode / steering mode of the off. à p. 12 - 180.
separate steering light grey,
button has no function.
Displays for locking of differ- An illogical switching state Switch the ignition off and
ential locks or for locking the was detected. then back on again.
steering show error symbols. When an error symbol is dis-
played; notify CraneCARE.
If this table does not help solve the problem, you should also check the pos-
sible causes given in the diagnostic charts in Part 1 – Driving;
à Malfunctions to the transmission with automatic gear change, p. 8 - 40,
à Differential lock malfunctions, p. 8 - 39,
à Steering malfunctions, p. 8 - 41.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.5 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the SLI

This section contains general malfunctions for which no error code is dis-
played on the SLI insert and malfunctions for which errors are displayed on
the SLI insert. There is furthermore information on the monitoring of supply
lines and connections.
G
Risk of accidents!
You must cease operating the crane immediately as soon as any error mes-
sage is displayed.
Repairs to the SLI may only be carried out by trained, qualified personnel.
G
Risk of accidents in the event of a defective or overridden SLI!
In the event of a defective SLI, first try to eliminate the error using the infor-
mation in this section. Only override the SLI if it becomes unavoidable in
the event of an emergency in order to lower the load.
Do not carry out any movements which increase the load moment in the
event of a defective or overridden SLI.
The crane operations are not monitored and shutdown procedures are not
initiated when leaving the working range if the SLI is overridden.
14.5.1 General malfunctions

SLI is not working (dark dis- Power supply not switched Switching on the ignition
plays, no buzzer signal). on
Fuse F 2/6 SS defective Check the fuse and replace it if
H
If there are further malfunctions at the crane control, the corresponding er-
ror messages are displayed at the SLI insert.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.5.2 Error messages on the SLI insert
An error message is displayed at the SLI insert if the safe load indicator de-
tects an error.
r – The two red LEDs in the Error information button go on.
– An error code, e.g. 1138 appears on the Information / Error display.
r You can have all present errors displayed in succession by pressing the Er-
ror information button. The next error message appears on the Information
display each time the button is pressed. The display returns to the first error
message which was saved if the button is pressed again after reaching the
last error message.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Table of error The following table contains several error codes, their causes and possible
codes remedies.
An error code consists, from left to right, of a one-digit number (e.g. 5), a
two-digit number (e.g. 01) and a one-digit number (e.g. 2).
• Check whether or not the table contains the displayed error code. If the
information in the table does not help to remedy an error, note the error
code(s) down and contact CraneCARE at the respective location.
When all errors are remedied, the lamps in the button (1) go out.

1 01 1...7 Error pressure sensor 1, Switch off pressure sensor 1;
Lower chamber à p. 14 - 38
1 01 8 Pressure sensor 1 switched Have malfunction rectified
off
1 02 1...7 Error pressure sensor 2, Switch off pressure sensor 2;
Lower chamber à p. 14 - 38
1 02 8 Pressure sensor 2 switched Have malfunction rectified
off
1 04 1...7 Error angle sensor 1, Switch off pressure sensor 1;
Main boom à p. 14 - 38
1 04 8 Angle sensor 1 switched off Have malfunction rectified
1 05 1...7 Error angle sensor 2, Switch off pressure sensor 2;
Main boom à p. 14 - 38
1 05 8 Angle sensor 2 switched off Have malfunction rectified
1 13 1 Lattice extension not con- Electrically connect the lattice exten-
to nected or sensor faulty sion; if the error persists, inform
21 CraneCARE at the respective location
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

3 03 3 Comparison of telescoping Compare the actual telescoping sta-
diagram between ECOS and tus with the values on the ECOS dis-
SLI resulted in differences play and, if necessary, re-enter the
telescoping status; à p. 14 - 60.
Accept the ECOS telescoping position
data if an incorrect telescoping posi-
tion is displayed on the SLI:
1. Press the -UP button once;
the SLI shows the new values
2. Acknowledge the error.
5 01 1 There is no capacity dia- Re-enter the current rigging mode.
gram available for the en- If the error is displayed again, check
tered rigging mode whether the current rigging mode is
permissible.
5 01 2 Main boom angle too small Raising the main boom
(too flat) during operation
with the main boom.
5 01 3 Main boom angle to large Lowering the main boom
(too steep) during operation
with the main boom
5 02 1 There is no SLI code avail- Re-enter the current rigging mode.
able for the entered rigging If the error is displayed again, check
mode. whether the current rigging mode is
permissible.
5 02 2 Main boom angle too small Raising the main boom
(not steep enough) when
operating with the lattice
extension
5 02 3 Main boom angle too large Lowering the main boom
(too steep) when operating
with the lattice extension
5 02 4 Lattice extension inclination Raising the lattice extension.
is too small
5 02 5 Lattice extension inclination Lowering the lattice extension
is too large.
5 02 6 Current load greater than 1. Raising the lattice extension.
derricking load – movement
Lower lattice extension is dis-
2. Press button P once
08.03.2006
abled. 3. If necessary, increase the work-

ing radius using the movement
Lower main boom

GMK 4080-1

5 04 4 Maximum permissible Rotate superstructure to the permit-
slewing angle exceeded ted working range
5 04 5 Minimum load value not When the main boom is set down,
reached raise main boom and acknowledge
the error.
Notify CraneCARE at the respective lo-
cation if the error cannot be acknowl-
edged.
6 02 1 Fuse no. 1 on the SLI control
unit is blown.
6 02 2 Fuse no. 2 on the SLI control
unit is blown.
6 02 3 Fuse no. 3 on the SLI control Replace the blown fuse;
unit is blown. à p. 14 - 12.
6 02 4 Fuse no. 11 on the SLI con-
trol unit is blown.
6 02 5 Fuse no. 12 on the SLI con-
trol unit is blown.
8 01 1 Reeving or rigging mode Confirm the reeving/rigging mode;
not yet confirmed à p. 12 - 43.
8. 02. 2 SLI is overridden Cancel the override; à p. 12 - 59.
8 02 2 Slewing gear switched on Switching off the slewing gear
with SLI code for setting 0°
or 180°
When working range limiter is switched on
8 14 1 The maximum permissible Retract or lower the main boom.
overall height has been ex- Lower the lattice extension.
ceeded
8 14 2 Maximum permissible ra- Raise or retract the main boom.
dius is exceeded Raise the lattice extension.
8 14 3 Maximum permissible Slew to the right (after reaching
slewing range exceeded. slewing angle A).
Slew to the left (after reaching
slewing angle B).
8 14 4 Shutdown area of a moni- Move into a permissible working
tored object reached range.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Switch off sensor/ For values measured twice, you can switch off the faulty sensor/tachogen-
tachogenerator erator in the case of an error and continue working with one sensor/tacho-
generator for a short time.
G
Danger due to failure of the SLI
Have the error rectified before the next crane job.
By doing this, the crane can then still be unrigged with SLI monitoring if the
second sensor/tachogenerator fails.
• Press button 6 again and again until the error for the faulty sensor/faulty
is displayed, e.g. 1021 for pressure sensor 2.
• Press the , button and then press the P button once.

The faulty sensor/tachogenerator is switched off and the corresponding
error is displayed, e.g. 1028 for pressure sensor 2.
When the ignition is switched on again, the shutdown is cancelled and the
error occurs again, possibly with different final numerals, e.g. 1025.
After switching off the faulty sensor/tachogenerator, you should check

whether the remaining sensors/tachogenerator are functioning correctly.
G
Risk of accidents due to defective functioning
After switching off the faulty sensor/tachogenerator, only begin crane op-
eration if the remaining sensors/tachogenerators are displaying correctly.
In this way, you prevent the SLI from not switching off when leaving the
working range and the truck crane overturning as a result.
Check the pressure sensor function

• Hoist the hook block without a load.
• Check whether the display (1) shows, for instance, the weight of the hook
block. Weights of the hook blocks; à p. 15 - 4.
Check angle sensor function

• Set down the main boom in the boom rest.
• Check whether the display (1) shows an angle of 0°.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.6 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at the crane control
14.6 Finding and eliminating malfunctions at

the crane control
This section contains general malfunctions which are not displayed on the
Crane control display and malfunctions for which an error message appears
on the Crane control display.
Program version Note down the version number of the program before notifying CraneCARE
of the crane con- whenever a malfunction occurs.
trol
The current program version of your truck crane is displayed in the Main
menu of the Crane control display.
played.
The Crane control program version display (1) shows the version number of the
current program.
14.6.1 General malfunctions

The crane control display re- F 1/1 SS or F 1/2 SS fuse de- Check the fuse and replace it if
mains dark although the igni- fective necessary; à p. 14 - 8.
tion is switched on.
Fuse F 2/1 SS, F 2/2 SS,
F 2/3 SS or F 2/4 SS defective.
One or more fuses on the cir-
cuit board in the distribution
box are defective.
H
If there are further malfunctions at the crane control, the corresponding er-
ror messages will appear on the Crane control display.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.6.2 Error messages on the crane control display
If an error occurs, it is shown on the Crane control display as follows:

– The Error / warning message warning lamp (1) flashes and
– The LED alongside the Open error menu button (2) will flash.
For more information about the error message see the Error menu.
£ • To open the menu, press the Open error menu button once. This button is
only active as long there is an error message and the LED next to the but-
ton either flashes or is permanently on.
The display switches to the error menu.
• The display (2) shows how many errors
there are and the display (1) shows which of
these errors is displayed.
3 / 5, for example, means:
– Error 3 is shown on the display.
– In total there are 5 errors.
If the errors that are shown have not yet been
acknowledged, the LED alongside the Confirm
input button (5) will light up.
• To acknowledge, press the Confirm entry
button (5) once.
If there are more errors, the next error is now
displayed and can be acknowledged.
When all outstanding errors have been acknowledged, you can call up all
outstanding errors successively on the display. To do this, press button (3)
or button (4).
Button 3: Display errors in ascending order
Button 4: Display errors in descending order
Every time you press the button, the next error will be shown; if you keep
the button held down, all the errors will be shown one after another, con-
tinuously.
H
If not all errors have been acknowledged yet, the two buttons are inoperable
and shown in grey.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
When all error messages are acknowledged, the displays on the Crane con-
trol insert change:
– The Error / warning message warning lamp (1) lights up and
– The LED alongside the Open error menu button (2) will light up.
As soon as a new error occurs, both displays will start to flash again.
ö You can exit the error menu at any time by pressing the Exit submenu / input
mode button. The Crane control display changes again into the menu which
was displayed before calling up the error menu.
H
All errors remain saved until you switch off the ignition. This also pertains
to errors whose cause has been remedied in the meantime. After turning on
the ignition, all the errors present are treated as newly occurred errors and
are shown again.
Display of an error message

For each error, the error menu displays an
error code (5) and four symbols (1) to (4).
The symbols stand for:

1 The defective device
2 The error group
3 The index within the group
4 The type of error
The error code (5) contains four numbers,

each with one to three digits.
• Always note down the error code before

contacting CraneCARE at the respective loca-
tion.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.7 Emergency operations and programs

This section contains all information on possible emergency operations and
available emergency programs. In particular:
– the mechanical emergency activation for retraction of the telescoping
– the Emergency telescoping program submenu
– the procedure for entering the telescoping after a successful emergency
telescoping program
– The procedure for operating the power units with the hand-held control in
the event of a failure of the operating elements in the crane cab
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.7.1 Emergency retraction operation
Malfunctions to the electrical control of the locking mechanism, the me-

chanics or the hydraulic system could be to blame if the locking mechanism
at the head of the telescoping cylinder no longer responds to the operating
elements in the crane cab. For these cases, there is
– an emergency mechanical mode in which you can lock and unlock the
telescopic sections manually. This emergency mode is provided in case
the telescoping cylinder can no longer be moved by means of the hydrau-
lic system. In this case you need one or two auxiliary cranes.
In the worst case scenario, emergency operations may have to be carried
out by trained specialists because the risk of injury and of damage to the
main boom would be too great if one proceeded incorrectly. These cases
are described later in this section. Always check the following possibility
first however.
Check prior to Check first whether the main boom is allowed to be lowered into the hori-
each emergency zontal position with the current telescoping and the current rigging mode of
operation the truck crane. Proceed as follows:
• Enter the current rigging mode at the SLI. The appropriate SLI code must
be displayed in accordance with the lifting capacity table.
• Lower the main boom.
H
Check whether the truck crane can be moved in the current rigging mode
while operating with the main boom, if lowering would be possible but for
the fact that there is not enough space; à Driving the rigged truck crane,
p. 12 - 184.
When operating with the lattice extension; à operating manual of the lattice
extension - Driving with the rigged crane and rigged lattice extension.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
If the SLI allows lowering to the horizontal position,

the crane cannot tip towards the boom and you can:
– carry out emergency operations without using an auxiliary crane with the
personnel transporter, since you can reach the locking points with a lad-
der;à p. 14 - 46.
If the SLI switches off before you are able to lower the main boom into the
horizontal position, you must:
– have two auxiliary cranes available for mechanical emergency opera-
tions, of which one has a registered personnel transporter; à
p. 14 - 46.
Retraction Various retraction procedures are possible in emergency mode. The proce-
procedure dure which is the most appropriate for your specific case depends both on
which functions are still working and on the circumstances at the site. You
can, for example:
– If the locking head mechanism at the telescoping cylinder head is me-
chanically defective, unlock the telescopic sections in mechanical emer-
gency mode and retract them with an auxiliary crane (up to the section in
which the telescoping cylinder is locked) or
– retract the main boom with one or two auxiliary cranes until it is possible
to lower the main boom into a horizontal position and then retract the re-
maining telescopic sections into a horizontal position or
Select the procedure best suitable for your particular case and consult your
local CraneCARE.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Mechanical emer- The mechanical emergency operation must be used whenever the telescop-
gency operation ing cylinder can no longer be moved.
For manual unlocking and locking of the telescopic sections, a screw is in-
serted into each side of the section above the locking pins. When screwed
in, the screw actuates a lever mechanism which pulls the locking pin into the
telescopic section and thus unlocks the section.
The screw is screwed out again to lock the section manually.
The main boom is designed in such a way that the locks can be operated in
emergency mode from the outside for all possible fixed lengths.
H
If the telescoping cylinder is in the foot section of a telescopic section, this
telescopic section cannot be locked or unlocked manually.
The following prerequisites must be fulfilled before unlocking a telescopic

section manually:
– The telescopic section to be unlocked is attached to an auxiliary crane
with sufficient load bearing capacity and, in this way, is secured against
independent retraction.
– Or the main boom is lowered into a horizontal position so that the tele-
scopic section is unable to retract independently.
For manual unlocking, two screws M 8 are supplied for each telescopic sec-
tion,
– 125 mm length for telescopic section V,
– 140 mm length for telescopic sections I to IV.
You can only lock or unlock a telescopic sec-

tion manually if the recess (2) in the locking
pin no longer engages in the telescopic sec-
tion (3) above it.
• Extend the telescopic section approximately

35 mm (with an auxiliary crane if
necessary). The locking pin (1) must be cen-
tered in the opening and the recess (2) may
no longer engage in the telescopic section
(3) above it.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Unlocking telescopic sections

• Insert a screw into the bore (1). The locking
pin (2) is retracted in the process. You can
assist this process by lightly hammering on
the locking pins.
• Tighten the screw against the spring load
until the locking pin (2) is pulled in as far as
it will go and is situated behind the side wall
of the telescopic section (3).
The telescopic section is now manually un-
lokked on this side.
• Unlock the other side of the telescopic sec-
tion too.
S
Risk of damage in the event of a mechanically released lock!
Under no circumstances may you operate the telescoping cylinder as long
as the lock is mechanically released. Therefore unscrew all screws out of
the bore holes immediately after finishing the repair work.
In this way, you prevent the telescoping cylinder from hitting the locking
system and consequently damaging it.
Locking telescopic sections

• Retract the telescopic section until the lock-
ing pin (2) is in the middle of the opening.
• Screw the threaded pin out of the bore hole
(1).
The locking pin (2) is then pushed out of the
opening due to spring tension.
• Remove the screw from the bore hole.
• Continue retracting the telescopic section
until the recesses have been set down on
the telescopic section (3) above it.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.7.2 Emergency telescoping program submenu
The Telescoping emergency program is used to retract the main boom in or-
der to drive the crane on road to repairs.
Emergency operation is not intended for crane operation and is therefore
restricted to a certain time.
Starting the Only start the emergency program when the z symbol is shown;
emergency pro- à Telescoping mechanism error messages, p. 14 - 31.
gram
The emergency program can only be started if
the Settings / Displays submenu shows the
Emergency telescoping program access symbol (1)
in black.
• Press the right dead man's switch and hold
it down.
• Press the switch next to the Emergency tele-
scoping program access symbol to start the
program.
The prompt (—) now appears on the Current
telescoping mechanism status display (2) and the
LEDs next to the Key code input buttons (3) go
on.
• Press the Key code input buttons (3) in the
following order:
ÆÅÆÇ
Each character is confirmed by a star (✱) on the display.
If you press the wrong button several times successively, all entries includ-
ing those entries (✱) which have already been confirmed are deleted and
you must re-enter the key combination.
once or by releasing the dead man's switch.
As a result, the input mode is switched off and the display returns to the
state in which it was before the entry.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The symbol (1) for the Emergency program status is displayed on the Current
telescoping mechanism status display once you have entered the correct key
code.
The emergency program is displayed in the Telescoping submenu.
ö% Switch first to the main menu and then to the Telescoping submenu.
You can tell the emergency program by the

time display (1). A time of approximately
360 seconds starts to run after starting the
program.
The telescoping mechanism can be operated

with the emergency program within this time.
The symbol (2) for the emergency operation sta-
tus is displayed next to the time display.
The Emergency program access symbol (2) appears next to the time display (1)
when this time is over. You can only operate the telescoping mechanism
now after restarting the emergency program.
Display and oper- This section shows all possible displays. Whichever displays are active de-
ating elements of pend on the current malfunction in the telescoping mechanism.
the emergency
program
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Operating elements
The three switches next to the symbols
– Select telescopic section unlocking (1)
– Select telescoping cylinder unlocking (3) and
– Select locking (2)
are available as operating elements.
As opposed to telescoping in semi-automatic
mode, the locking procedures are immediately
carried out at the press of a button.
G
Risk of accidents if used incorrectly
You may only press the buttons *and +
a maximum of twice to unlock.
Pressing the button excessively could cause one of the telescopic sections
to be unlocked completely and consequently retract suddenly, which could
cause serious accidents and damage to the truck crane.
Display elements
Only one value is displayed on the Extended
telescoping cylinder length display (3), if mea-
sured values are still received by the length in-
dicator of the crane control.
The measured value recorded by the SLI for
the length of the extended telescoping cylin-
der also appears on the display (4).
The Current locking status display (1) is supple-
mented by additional symbols for the various
proximity switches. You can use these sym-
bols to tell which proximity switches are de-
fective.
Two of the symbols (2) represent the proxim-
ity switches which provide the information for
the Telescoping cylinder at locking point display.
Note down the error code (5) first if you intend to contact CraneCARE at the
respective location before carrying out the emergency program.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
• Check which emergency program procedure is suitable for the current er-
ror:
– You must follow the procedure described in the Retracting in the event of a
length indicator error section if the Extended telescoping cylinder length display
(1) is no longer working.
– If one of the symbols for the proximity switches (1) is displayed in violet
on the Current locking status display, you must follow the procedure de-
scribed in the section Retracting in the event of an error at the proximity switch.
G
Risk of damage to the main boom!
Never telescope the main boom if both the Extended telescoping cylinder
length display and the Current locking status display are not working.
In such a situation it would not be possible to monitor operations and you
could damage boom components or bring the boom into a position from
which it cannot be telescoped.
In the Emergency telescoping program submenu, all functions required to re-

tract the main boom are active, provided there are no other (hydraulic or
mechanical) errors.
H
In the emergency program, the speed is restricted to approximately 30% of
the maximum speed.
If the error is caused by a proximity switch; à When an error occurs on the
proximity switch, p. 14 - 56.
If the error is caused by a length indicator (Extended telescoping cylinder length

display is no longer active), retract the main boom as described in the fol-
lowing section:
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Retracting in the First record the current status of the telescoping mechanism.
event of an error
at the length indi-
cator
• Check the position of the locking pins of the telescoping cylinder and tele-
scopic section on the Current locking status display.
• Check the telescoping operation on the Current telescoping SLI display

(e.g. 50/50/50/50/100).
• Check whether the value for the length of the extended telescoping cylin-
der measured by the SLI is on the display (1), 8 000 mm.
Before carrying out a telescoping operation:

– The telescoping cylinder must be locked to the telescopic section.
The Unlock telescoping cylinder selection symbol must be displayed on a grey
background.
G
Risk of accidents from sudden retraction of a telescopic section
You may only press the button *
a maximum of twice. If this does not start
the unlocking procedure, contact CraneCARE.
* – The telescopic section must be unlocked and the Unlock telescope section
selection symbol must be displayed on a yellow background.
– No locking / unlocking process may be selected and the Locking selection
symbol must be displayed on a grey background.
– The telescoping cylinder must be at a locking point. If the Telescoping cyl-
inder at locking point display is still active, the two green arrows pointing in
each other's direction must be displayed.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
Retracting the telescopic section
S
You may under no circumstances press the button next to the Locking selec-
tion symbol while telescoping a telescopic section. If you press the button,
the locking pins at the telescopic section will immediately be pushed out
and may damage or tear off electrical or hydraulic components in the main
boom.
• Only telescope the telescopic section slowly.

• Fully retract the telescopic section as far as it will go.
, • Extend the locking pins on the telescopic section by pressing the button
next to the Locking selection symbol once.
• Extend the telescopic section slowly (about 35 mm ) in order for the lock-
ing pins to be pushed out.
* The Unlock telescopic section selection symbol is displayed on a grey back-

ground after completing the locking process.
, The Lock selection symbol is displayed on a yellow background.
The extended pins of the telescopic section (1) and the pins of the telescop-
ing cylinder (2) are displayed in green on the Current locking status display.
• Set down the telescopic section and retract it as far as it will go.
You can now unlock the telescoping cylinder.
G
Risk of accidents from sudden retraction of a telescopic section
+
You may only press the button a maximum of twice. If this does not start
the unlocking procedure, contact CraneCARE.
+ • Press the button next to the symbol Unlock telescoping cylinder selection
once.
+ The Select telescoping cylinder unlock symbol is displayed on a yellow back-

ground after completing the unlocking process.
, The Lock selection symbol is displayed on a grey background.

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The locking pins (2) of the telescoping cylinder are now displayed retracted,
in red on the Current locking status display.
Extending the telescoping cylinder without the telescopic section

You can now move the telescoping cylinder into the next telescopic section.
S
You may under no circumstances press the button next to the Lock selection
symbol while retracting or extending the telescoping cylinder. If you press
the button, the locking pins at the telescoping cylinder are immediately
pushed out and can cause damage or tear off electrical or hydraulic com-
ponents in the main boom.
• Only extend the telescoping cylinder slowly.

• Move the telescoping cylinder to the locking point of the nearest foot sec-
tion. The locking point is reached when the Telescoping cylinders at locking
point display shows the two green arrows pointing at each other.
When the telescoping cylinder is at the locking point, the display (1) shows
the corresponding value for the extended length of the telescoping cylinder
(e.g. 4 450 mm for the locking point of telescopic section II at 50%).
Values for approaching the locking points; à Locking points for the telescop-
ing cylinder, p. 14 - 58.
, • Lock the telescoping cylinder once you have reached the locking point.
To do so, press the button next to the Lock selection symbol.
background and

08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
When an error Defective proximity switches are shown in violet.

occurs on the The displays (A), (B) and (C) only show the current positions when all the
proximity switch corresponding proximity switches are free of error.
Several proximity switches are related to the
displays (A), (B) and (C).
For A: proximity switch (6) to (9)
For B: proximity switch (4) and (5)
For C: proximity switch (1) to (3)
When a proximity switch is defective (violet),

then
– the corresponding locking pins on the dis-
plays (A) and (B) are always yellow.
– The corresponding arrows are not shown in
the display (C).
When an error occurs, you can determine the current position more
precisely based on the other, fault-free proximity switch. The proximity
switches show the following positions:
– Display (C) – telescoping cylinders at the locking point

1 At the locking point
2 Behind the locking point
3 In front of the locking point
– Display (B) – lock for telescopic section

4 Locked
5 Unlocked
– Display (A) – lock for telescopic cylinder

6 Locked left
7 Unlocked left
8 Unlocked right
9 Locked right
For fault-free proximity switches, the following applies:

– Green: Position reached
– Red: Position not reached
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Required checks
When the locked position can no longer be shown, always conduct the fol-
lowing checks before unlocking:
• Move the telescoping cylinder or telescopic section carefully in and out.
In the locked position, the length on the displays (1) may only change mini-
mally around the play of the locking pins.
Retracting
The steps for retracting are the same when an error occurs on the proximity
switch as for an error on the length indicator.
– When the display (C) fails

• Calculate the telescoping cylinder length for the locking point;
à Locking points for the telescoping cylinder, p. 14 - 58,
à Locking points for the telescopic sections, p. 14 - 59.
• Move the telescoping cylinder to the required length – display (1).
S
Risk of damage if the length specifications are not observed!
Extend the telescoping cylinder (without telescopic section) only to the
given length.
This prevents the piston rod from becoming damaged if the telescoping
cylinder slides out of the telescopic section.
Terminating The emergency program is terminated:

the emergency – if the displayed time has expired or
program
– if the ignition is switched off.
H
The current telescoping values do not correspond to the telescoping values
last saved by the crane control if the Emergency telescoping program was open.
You must enter the current telescoping values at the Crane control display af-
ter terminating the emergency program; à Entering telescoping values after
emergency operation, p. 14 - 60.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Tables for ap- The extent to which the telescoping cylinder has to be extended in order to
proaching the reach a locking point depends on whether you:
locking points – wish to lock or unlock the telescoping cylinder or
– wish to lock or unlock a telescopic section
Locking points for the telescoping cylinder

The following table shows the extended length for locking and unlocking
the telescoping cylinders.
Table for locking / unlocking the telescoping cylinder

Telescopic Locking point at fixed Extended length of the tele-
section length scoping cylinder
in % in mm
0 5
Telescopic
50 4 152
section I
100 8 299
0 345
Telescopic
50 4 450
section II
100 8 555
0 665
Telescopic
50 4 713
section III
100 8 761
0 935
Telescopic
50 4 848
section IV
100 8 760
0 1 185
Telescopic
50 4 973
section V
100 8 760
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Locking points for the telescopic sections

To lock and unlock a telescopic section, the recess (2) of the locking pin (1)
should no longer engage in the telescopic section (3) above it. That is why
you have to extend the telescoping cylinder 35 mm further than with a re-
turn run.
This results in the following extended lengths:
Table for locking / unlocking the telescopic section

Telescopic Locking point at fixed Extended length of the tele-
section length scoping cylinder
in % in mm
0 40
Telescopic
50 4 187
section I
100 8 334
0 380
Telescopic
50 4 485
section II
100 8 590
0 700
Telescopic
50 4 748
section III
100 8 796
0 970
Telescopic
50 4 883
section IV
100 8 795
0 1 220
Telescopic
50 5 008
section V
100 8 795
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.7.3 Entering telescoping values after emergency operation
The displayed telescoping values no longer correspond to the actual status

of the telescopic sections after retracting the main boom in emergency
mode or if the power supply of the crane control was interrupted while sav-
ing the values.
In these cases you must enter the actual telescope status at the crane con-
trol (e.g. the values from the Telescope status SLI display). The entry is made
in the Settings / Displays submenu.
played.
The display switches to the Settings / Displays

submenu.
The Enter telescoping after emergency operation

display field (1) shows from left to right the set
values for the telescopic sections I to V.
All set values are displayed in green, provided
they are permitted.
All set values are displayed in red if the dis-
played set values are not permitted.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
• Press one of the buttons (3) to (7).

The input mode is switched on:
– All set values are displayed in yellow in the
Enter telescoping after emergency operation dis-
play field (1).
– The LED (8) next to the Confirm entry button
is on.
• To change a set value, press the correspond-
ing button under the set value (3) to (7).
Each time the button is pressed, the value
switches between the symbol for Unlocked (2)
and the fixed lengths 0%, 50% and 100%, in a
continuous loop.
• Enter the desired set values for all telescopic sections.
H
Select the Unlocked symbol if a telescopic section is positioned at an inter-
mediate length.
once.
The display switches to the Main menu. The same values are displayed again
if you now call up the Settings / Displays submenu again.
• Press the left dead man's switch and keep it pressed in.
Ö Press the Confirm entry button once to accept the entered set values.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
The input prompt (—) is now flashing on the

Current telescoping mechanism status display (1).
• Press the Key code input buttons (2) in the fol-
lowing order:
ÅÆÅÇ
Each entry is confirmed by a star (✱) on the
display.
H
All current entries (✱) are deleted again and you must re-enter the key com-
bination if you enter an erroneous key code.
The crane control verifies the entered tele-

scope status after entering the correct key
code.
– The values (2) are displayed in red and the
LED (3) next to the Confirmentry button goes
out if the entered set values are not permit-
ted.
– The entered set values (2) are displayed in
green if they are permitted.
The crane control saves the set values and
the LED (3) next to the Confirmentry button
goes out.
The symbol for the current status is displayed
on the Current telescoping mechanism status dis-
play (1).
S
Risk of damage during telescoping!
Check whether the telescope status currently displayed corresponds with
the actual telescope status before beginning work with the crane. You must
re-enter the actual value again if you accidentally enter an incorrect tele-
scope status.
In this way you prevent the crane control unit from calculating with incor-
08.03.2006
rect values, which would result in damage and malfunctions during tele-
scoping.

GMK 4080-1
14.7.4 Emergency operation in the event of a failure of the operating

elements in the crane cab
If, due to a malfunction, it is no longer possible to operate the power units

from the crane cab, you can operate the power units with the hand-held con-
trol in order to set down the load and secure the truck crane in order to unrig
it (e.g. if the control lever is not working or the crane control breaks down).
G
Danger of overturning when driving in the shutdown ranges!
The power units may only be operated with the hand-held control in cases
of emergency, in order to secure the truck crane. The SLI is switched off and
the crane operations are not monitored when operating with the hand-held
control. The truck crane will overturn if you drive in a critical range.
Make sure the maximum permissible working radius according to the Lift-
ing capacity table is not exceeded for the current rigging mode.
Before slewing, check whether slewing in the current rigging mode is per-
missible with the currently rigged counterweight; àSlewing with the rigged
counterweight, p. 13 - 118.
Connecting the For emergency operation, you must connect the hand-held control.
hand-held control
• Connect the control unit behind the crane

cab to connection (1).
All power units can be operated from this con-
nection.
Connecting the hand-held control;
à Connecting the hand-held control, p. 13 - 27.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Starting the diesel You can also start the diesel engine if the ignition in the driver's cab or crane
engine with the cab is switched on.
hand-held control
• Wait until the CAN (2) and Charge control (1) indicator lamps go on.
There is a malfunction if the CAN indicator lamp does not go on after ap-
proximately 20 seconds or flashes; àp. 14 - 16.
• Press the START (3) button; the diesel engine will start.
Release the button as soon as the diesel engine is running.
Pre-selecting a The pre-selection buttons on the hand-held control can be used to pre-select
power unit the power unit which is to be operated with the hand-held control.
A – The main hoist or
C – The telescoping mechanism or
D – The derricking cylinder of the lattice extension (only active with additional
equipment with the hydraulically derricked lattice extension) or
B – The auxiliary hoist or
E – The derricking gear or
F – The slewing gear.
A • Press the corresponding pre-selection button for the required power unit,
e.g. for the main hoist.
a The indicator lamp in the button (e.g. for the main hoist) goes on when the
crane control releases the function.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Operating the Follow all safety instructions for operating with the hand-held unit, which
power unit are specified in the sections on the operation of the individual power units:
– For the main hoist and auxiliary hoist; à p. 12 - 71,
– For the derricking gear;à p. 12 - 78,
– For the slewing gear; à p. 12 - 83,
– For the telescoping mechanism; à p. 12 - 91.
G
Risk of overturning when driving in the shutdown ranges!
Avoid operations which increase the load moment such as lowering and ex-
tending. The truck crane will overturn if you drive in the shutdown ranges
when operating with the hand-held control.
If operations which increase the load moment are unavoidable, make sure
the maximum permissible radius according to the Lifting capacity table is not
exceeded for the current rigging mode.
Always check before slewing whether this process is permissible in the cur-
rent rigging mode; àSlewing with the rigged counterweight, p. 13 - 118.
G
Risk of accidents while operating the slewing gear!
Sit down in the crane cab to operate the slewing gear and make sure the
connecting cable of the hand-held control unit does not hang down loosely.
In this way, you can avoid being knocked down from the carrier during
slewing operations or being crushed between the superstructure and the
carrier. You will also prevent the connecting cable from getting caught or
torn.
On the two-hand operating panel there is a specific key combination using

the movement button (1) and direction buttons (2) for each direction of move-
ment of any power unit.
The following table shows the key combinations required for all crane oper-
ations.
H
The operated buttons are displayed in black in the following illustrations.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Pre-selected power unit

Button combina- Derrick
tion Telescop-
Derrick- Slewing Main Auxiliary lattice
ing mech-
ing gear gear hoist hoist exten-
anism
sion1)
c e f a b d
None 2) Lower Lower Lower Lower
Retract Raise Lift Lift Raise
Turn to
the right
Turn to
the left
1)
Function only when additionally equipped with hydraulically derricked
lattice extension
2)
The telescoping cylinder is extended after it has been unlocked.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
H
The teleautomation function of the telescoping mechanism is always
switched on in emergency mode, and the nominal value of 0/0/0/0/0 is se-
lected. After you press the button for the Retract movement, the teleautoma-
tion starts and telescopes to the set value 0/0/0/0/0. You can cancel the
movement at any time.
The extension function is disabled in emergency mode.
• First press the Direction button for the required crane movement, e.g. the
button r for the Raise / lower main hoist operation.
• Keep the direction button pressed in.
• Now additionally press the Movement button in the direction required for
the crane movement e.g. Top / right for the Lower main hoist operation.
The appropriate operation is carried out as soon as you additionally press
the movement button.
The further in you press the movement button, the quicker the movement is.
In emergency mode, the speed of all power units is restricted to approxi-

mately 50% of the maximum speed.
Stopping The operation is carried out until you let go of the movement button or the di-
movements rection button, or until an end position is reached.
Stopping the op- You can stop the operation with the Emergency-stop switch if it is not stopped
eration in cases of after letting go of one of the buttons.
emergency
• The diesel engine is immediately switched off if you press the emergency-
stop switch (1) in cases of emergency.
Crane functions are released in the same manner as in the crane cab after
actuating emergency stop; à Resetting the emergency-stop switch, p. 14 - 3.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8 Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159 (ZH1/461)
14.8 Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159

(ZH1/461)
H
The hydraulic emergency function is provided as additional equipment. You
can use the standard emergency operation equipment with the hand pump
if your truck crane is not additionally equipped with this function and you
need to raise the main boom in order to tilt the driver's cab; à
Emergency
operation for lifting the main boom, p. 8 - 23.
14.8.1 Important instructions for hydraulic emergency operation
Truck cranes with this additional equipment are equipped with the hydraulic
emergency release as per BGR 159 (4.2.8), formerly ZH1/159, and thus have
an interface for connecting the superstructure's hydraulic system to another
crane using this additional equipment or an external hydraulic power
source.
This allows small loads to be transported in case of emergency, e.g. in the

event of a failure of the diesel engine. It enables crane operations such as
raising, lowering, slewing and main hoist lifting / lowering. The auxiliary
hoist (additional equipment) cannot be operated in hydraulic emergency
mode.
Furthermore, the GMK 4080-1 can be used as a hydraulic power source for
the emergency supply of another crane.
G
Risk of accidents due to improper use!
Only operate in hydraulic emergency mode to transport small loads in
cases of emergency and have the malfunction subsequently rectified. It is
prohibited to carry out crane work in emergency mode, since there is no
guarantee that the safety devices work in this mode.
G
Risk of tipping over if working radius is too large!
The lowering of the boom is not switched off automatically in emergency
mode. Make sure the maximum permissible working radius according to
the Lifting capacity table is not exceeded for the current rigging mode during
lowering operations.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
G
Switch off continuous operation immediately at both solenoid valves
(Y1105 and Y1104) after operating the main hoist in emergency mode.
Check whether the pins can be seen at the two open sealing caps.
In this way, you can prevent the load from falling during the subsequent
crane operations immediately after being lifted; à Switching off continuous
operation, p. 14 - 78.
G
Danger due to an unexpected change in the direction of movement!
Only use the small control lever for lowering operations. The direction of
movement is changed and the boom is raised if you additionally press the
large control lever.
S
Risk of damage to the hoses and transformer!
Make sure the connecting hoses can be moved freely in emergency mode.
In this way, you prevent the hoses from getting caught or torn.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8.2 Operating principle and accessories
For emergency This section provides a general overview of the operating principle, the sup-
operation plied accessories and the connection points at the truck crane which are re-
quired to operate the power units of the GMK 4080-1 in emergency mode.
Also read the following sections before operating in hydraulic emergency
mode.
The hydraulic circuits required for the various

crane operations are established by specific
switching positions of the valves on the con-
sole (1).
There are two additional control levers (2) on

the console for regulating the direction of
movement and the speed in emergency mode.
The required connection points and the oper-

ating principle both depend on whether the
emergency operations are carried out with a
hydraulic transformer (additional equipment)
or with the hand pump.
Emergency operation with the hydraulic

transformer
With a hydraulic transformer (6) as additional
equipment, three connecting hoses (5) are
connected to one hydraulic power source (e.g.
to another truck crane or a unit powered by
diesel) for emergency operation.
The two other connecting hoses (2) and (3) are
connected to the hydraulic tank connection (4)
and to the connection (1) of the hydraulic sys-
tem of the crane.
In emergency mode, the hydraulic power
source drives the transformer and the trans-
former conveys the oil from the hydraulic tank
to the hydraulic system of the superstructure.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Emergency operation with the hand pump

For emergency operation with the hand pump
(standard equipment), a connecting hose (2)
which is supplied as standard equipment is
connected to the connection (1) of the crane's
hydraulic system and to the connection (3) of
the hydraulic tank.
In emergency mode, the hand pump (4) con-

veys the oil from the hydraulic tank to the hy-
draulic system of the superstructure.
For the emergency The GMK 4080-1 can also be used for the emergency supply of another
supply crane which is likewise equipped with an emergency hydraulic function ac-
cording to BGR 159 (ZH1/461). In this case the GMK 4080-1 is used as power
source for a transformer.
At the rear of the hydraulic tank there are con-

nections (1), (2) and (3) for driving the trans-
former (5).
The connecting hoses (4) are connected to the
GMK 4080-1 at the connections (1), (2) and (3).
The connecting hoses (6) are connected to the
hydraulic emergency circuit of the crane to be
supplied.
For further information on operating the emer-
gency supply; à Emergency supply of another
crane, p. 14 - 85.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8.3 Connecting / disconnecting hoses
Before operating in emergency mode, you must establish a connection be-

tween the hydraulic tank and the console on the superstructure. This con-
nection is established via hydraulic hoses. This procedure varies depending
on whether you carry out the emergency operation:
– with a transformer ( à p. 14 - 73)
or
– with the hand pump ( à p. 14 - 75).
For emergency For emergency operation with the transformer, you must connect the con-
operation with the necting hoses of the transformer. The hoses are connected with the diesel
transformer engine switched off.
• Switch off the diesel engine.
Establishing hose connections

• Attach the transformer (1) to the superstruc-
ture.
• Connect the three connecting hoses (2) to a
hydraulic power source (e.g. to another
crane with hydraulic emergency function ac-
cording to BGR 159 (ZH1/461) or to a hydrau-
lic system with diesel drive).
H
To slew the superstructure in emergency mode, attach the transformer in a
position suitable for the direction of slewing in order to fully utilise the hose
lengths.
08.03.2006
s
GMK 4080-1
S
Risk of damage to the connecting hoses!
Lay the connecting hoses in such a manner that they can be moved freely
in order to prevent them from being crushed or torn or getting caught dur-
ing the subsequent crane movements.
The two other connecting hoses of the transformer are connected to the
truck crane.
• Open the protective caps at the connecting

hoses (2) and (3).
• Open the protective caps:
– at the connection (1) on the console
– at the connection (4) on the hydraulic
tank.
The correct allocation of the connections is de-
termined by the different hose diameters.
• Connect the thin hose (2) to the connection

(1).
• Connect the thick hose (3) to the connection
(4).
Disconnecting hoses
• Remove the connecting hoses (2) and (3)
from the connections (1) and (4).
(1) and (4).
• Close the ends of the connecting hoses (2)
and (3) with the protective caps.
• Remove the connecting hoses (5) from the
hydraulic power source.
• Remove the transformer (6) and store it
safely.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
For emergency op- The supplied connecting hose is required for emergency operation with the
eration with the hand pump.
hand pump
S
Risk of damage to the connecting hose!
Connect the connecting hose in such a manner that it can be moved freely
in order to prevent it from being crushed or torn or getting caught during
the subsequent crane operations.
Remove the connecting hose from the connections immediately after
emergency operation.
Establishing a hose connection

The connection (1) is on the console behind
the crane cab.
Connection (3) can be found at the top of the
hydraulic tank.
• Open the protective caps at the connections
(1) and (3) and at the connecting hose (2).
• Connect one end of the connecting hose (2)
to the connection (1).
• Connect the other end of the connecting
hose (2) to the connection (3).
The hose is connected.
Disconnecting the hose

• Remove the connecting hose (2) from the
connections (1) and (3).
(1) and (3).
• Close both ends of the connecting hose (2)
with the protective caps.
• Stow away the connecting hose safely.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8.4 Establishing the hydraulic circuits required
To do so, you must:

– Set the valves on the console to certain switching positions and
– Conduct additional switching operations before operating the hoist or the
slewing gear
Switching posi- The required hydraulic circuits are established by setting the valves to spe-
tions of the hand cific switching positions.
valves
A console is located behind the crane cab (1).
All hand valves required are on the console,

along with two control levers.
There are valves 1 to 5. All valves are labelled

(6).
All valves have two switching positions:
– The crane operation position and
– The emergency operation position
Crane operation position

The handles of the valves 1 to 5 point down-
wards diagonally (as displayed in the dia-
gram).
Emergency operation position

The handles of the valves 1 to 5 point upwards
08.03.2006
diagonally.

GMK 4080-1
Emergency operation positions

• To operate the desired power unit in emergency mode, switch the valves
1 to 5 to the appropriate positions (emergency operation and crane operation)
as specified in the following table.
G
Danger due to interaction of the power units!
Only set the valves for one power unit to Emergency operation. The other
valves must be set to Crane operation as specified in the table.
In this way, you can avoid carrying out unintentional crane operations and
also carrying out several operations unexpectedly at the same time.
Power unit Operation Valves in Valves in Additional switching

emergency crane opera- operations
operation tion position
position
Y1105 in continuous
Raising 1 2, 3, 4, 5
operation
Main hoist
Y1104 in continuous
Lowering 1 2, 3, 4, 5
operation
Derricking Raising 3 1, 2, 4, 5 none

gear Lowering 5 1, 2, 3, 4 none
The valves 6, 7 and 8
Slewing gear To the left or right 2, 4 1, 3, 5 are closed at the slew-
ing gear.
• Carry out additional switching operations before operating the main hoist
or slewing gear in emergency mode;
à Additional switching operations for the main hoist, p. 14 - 78,
à Additional switching operations for the slewing gear, p. 14 - 79.
Crane operation positions

• Set all the valves 1 to 5 to crane operation; the handles must point down-
wards diagonally.
G
Danger due to interaction of the power units!
Switch all valves back to Crane operation immediately after the emergency
operation.
The power units can interact and set each other in motion in an uncon-
trolled manner if one or more of the valves 1 to 5 remain open.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Additional switch- To operate the main hoist in emergency mode, you must additionally switch
ing operations for the Y1105 or Y1104 valve to continuous operation in accordance with the di-
the main hoist rection of movement ( àtable on the previous page).
The solenoid valves Y1104 (1) and Y1105 (2)

are on the left-hand side at the rear of the turn-
table, directly under the hoisting gear,
Switching on continuous operation
Only switch one valve (1) or (2) to continuous
operation at a time.
• Unscrew the sealing cap (3) from the re-
quired valve (e.g. from Y1104).
• Pull the protective cap (5) out of the sealing
cap (3); there is a pin (4) at this end.
with this end. The pin actuates the respec-
tive valve in the process.
The valve is now set to continuous operation.
S
Switch off continuous operation at both solenoid valves (Y1105 and Y1104)
immediately after the emergency operation. Check whether the pins can be
seen at the two open sealing caps.
In this way, you can prevent loads from falling down immediately after be-
ing raised in the subsequent crane operations.
Switching off continuous operation

• Screw the sealing caps (3) off the valve no
longer required (1) or (2).
with the other end (without pin).
• Check whether the pins (4) can be seen in
the two open sealing caps (3) before operat-
ing the crane.
• Insert the protective caps (5) in the sealing
caps in order to protect the pins from dirt.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Additional switch- You must additionally close three valves in order to operate the slewing
ing operations for gear in emergency mode.
the slewing gear
The valves 6 to 8 are on the slewing gears.
If there are only two valves at the slewing
gear, the third valve is on the valve block be-
hind the slewing gear.
For emergency operation

• Close the valves 6, 7 and 8.
The valves are closed if the handles are at a
right angle to the line.
For crane operation
• Open the valves 6, 7 and 8.
The valves are open if the handles are
parallel to the line.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8.5 Operating in emergency mode
Once you have established the hydraulic circuit required for a power unit,
the connected power unit can be operated in emergency mode. There are
two control levers outside the crane cab for this purpose:
The control levers are behind the crane cab, on

the console next to the valves.
The small control lever (1) is required to lower

the boom; the large control lever (2) is re-
quired for the other operations.
The description of the control lever operations in the following sections con-
forms to the definition of the direction specifications. The following there-
fore applies:
To the right: Press the lever in the direction R (towards the turntable)
To the left: Pull the lever in the direction L (outwards)
H
In emergency mode, you can regulate the speed of all power units with the
control lever.
You can additionally increase the maximum speed by increasing the speed
of the motor of the hydraulic power source (e.g. of the other truck crane) if
you use the transformer. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
With the hand If the hand pump is connected, you must move the corresponding control
pump lever and have a second person operate the hand pump.
The hand pump (1) is located on the right be-
hind the driver's cab.
The hand pump return valve can be opened
(turn to the left) and closed (turn to the right)
with the handwheel (3).
• Insert the pump lever (1) into the holder at
the hand pump.
• Check that the return valve is closed. The
handwheel (3) must be turned to the right as
far as possible.
• Pump on the pump lever.
The appropriate crane operation is performed.
H
If the return valve is open, you cannot move the crane with the hand pump.
• Take the pump lever out of the holder after the emergency operation and
stow it away in the tool box.
With transformer The power units are only operated by moving the appropriate control lever
if the transformer is connected and driven.
Emergency main
hoist operation
Only the large lever is used to operate the
hoist in emergency mode (1).
To raise: Pull the lever to the left (L)

To lower Press the lever to the right (R)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Emergency der- The derricking gear is driven by different control levers, depending on the
ricking gear opera- specific operation.
tion
Raising
The large control lever is used to raise the der-
ricking gear in emergency mode (1).
To raise: Pull the lever to the left (L)
Lowering
• Observe the following instructions before operating the control lever in
order to lower the derricking gear.
G
Risk of tipping over if working radius is too large!
The SLI does not automatically switch off the lowering process if the diesel
engine is off. This also applies if the SLI displays are still active after switch-
ing on the ignition. The truck crane will tilt if you exceed the maximum per-
missible radius for the current rigging status specified in the lifting capacity
table while lowering the derricking gear.
• Refer to the Lifting capacity tables for the maximum permissible working ra-
dius for the current rigging mode of the truck crane and lower the boom
only to such an extent that this radius is not exceeded. Measure the work-
ing radius with a metering rule, if necessary.
G
Danger from unexpected changes in the direction of movement!
Only use the small control lever for lowering operations. The direction of
movement is changed and the boom is raised if you additionally operate
the large control lever.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
You only need the small control lever (1) for

lowering operations in emergency mode.
To lower: Press the lever to the right (R)
Emergency slew-
ing gear operation
G
Risk of damage to the hoses and transformer!
Make sure that the connecting hoses do not get caught and torn off while
carrying out slewing operations.
H
It is not possible to control the slewing operations with the control lever for
emergency operation with the same degree of sensitivity as with the control
lever in the crane cab. Therefore only move the control lever slowly.
Only the large lever is used to operate the

hoist in emergency mode (1).
To the right: Pull the lever to the left (L)

To the left: Press the lever to the right (R)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8.6 After emergency operation
You must restore the truck crane to its original condition after finishing
emergency operation.
Establishing hy- After every emergency operation:

draulic circuits for
• Switch all valves on the console to crane operation; à Crane operation posi-
crane operation
tions, p. 14 - 77.
After operating the hoisting gear or slewing gear in emergency mode:

• After operating the hoist in emergency mode, screw the sealing caps onto
the two valves M1 and M2 with the other end (without pin); à Switching
off continuous operation, p. 14 - 78.
• Switch the hand valves 6, 7, and 8 to the position for crane operation
(open) after operating the slewing gears in emergency mode;
à Additional switching operations for the slewing gear, p. 14 - 79.
Disconnecting After operating with the transformer in emergency mode:

hoses
• Remove the two connecting hoses from the connections on the console
and on the hydraulic tank and close the connections with the protective
caps.
• Remove the connecting hoses from the connections at the hydraulic
power source.
• Remove the transformer from the superstructure, close all connecting
hoses with protective caps and store the transformer safely for driving.
à For emergency operation with the transformer, p. 14 - 73.
After operating with the hand pump in emergency mode:
• Remove the connecting hose from the connection on the console and
from the connection next to the hand pump tank and close the connec-
tions with protective caps.
• Close the connecting hose with protective caps and store it safely for driv-
ing.
à For emergency operation with the hand pump, p. 14 - 75.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
14.8.7 Emergency supply of another crane
For the emergency supply of another crane, you first have to establish the
required hose connections and then switch on the emergency supply.
After the emergency supply, you must switch it off and disconnect the hose
connections.
Connecting / dis- For the emergency supply you must connect the three connecting hoses of
connecting hoses the transformer (additional equipment) on the GMK 4080-1. The hoses are
connected with the diesel engine switched off.
• Switch off the diesel engine.
Establishing hose connections

The connections (1), (2) and (3) are on the right
side at the rear of the carrier.
The allocation of the connecting hoses (4) to
the connections (1), (2) and (3) is determined
by the various diameters.
• Connect the connecting hoses (4) to the con-
nections (1), (2) and (3).
• Connect the hoses (6) to the crane to be sup-
plied. Observe the information in the operat-
ing manual of the other crane.
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Disconnecting hoses
• Remove the hoses (4) from the connections
(1), (2) and (3).
(1), (2) and (3).
• Close both ends of the hoses (4) with the
protective caps.
• Remove the connecting hoses (6) from the
other crane and close the ends with the
protective caps.
• Stow away the transformer (5) safely.
Switching on / off The emergency supply is switched on and off in the driver's cab.
the emergency
supply
• Remove the cover (1).
You can now switch the emergency supply on
and off with the Emergency operation rocker
switch (2).
Switching on
• Press down the Emergency operation rocker
switch (2).
Switching off
• Press the Emergency operation rocker switch
(2) upwards. 08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15
15.1 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
15.1.1 Maximum lifting capacity (DIN/ ISO/ EN). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
15.1.2 Dimensions, weights and axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
15.1.3 Dimensions and weights of removable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 4
15.1.4 Technical data for superstructure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 5
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Technical information for superstructure
15.1 Technical data
15.1 Technical data

GROVE truck crane GMK 4080-1
Permitted temperature range: -25° C to +40° C
Crane designation: Truck crane in acc. with DIN 15 001,

part 1
Crane application: Erection crane in acc. with DIN 15 001,
part 2
Crane group: Hoist class H1 in acc. with DIN 15 018,
part 1
Crane class A1 in acc. with ISO 4301,
part 2
The construction design of the crane is in accordance with crane class A1

(as defined in ISO standard 4301 - 2). This relates to the engineering design
(specification of quality) and is not a guarantee in the sense of § 443 BGB
(German federal law).
15.1.1 Maximum lifting capacity (DIN/ ISO/ EN)
Max. load bearing capacity: 75 t

Max. load moment: 241.5 tm (34.5 t x 7 m)
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
15.1.2 Dimensions, weights and axle loads
The dimensions in the illustration are given in mm.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
Dimensions for All measurements relate to the on-road driving mode; à Driving modes,
driving on public p. 7 - 1.
roads
Length without auxiliary 12.53 m
hoist and without spare
wheel:
1) Height on on-road level: 3.85 m -130 / +170 mm (14.00 R25)
3.90 m -130 / +170 mm (16.00 or 20.50 R25)
2) Width: 2.55 m for 14.00 R25 tyres
2.75 m for 16.00 R25 tyres
2.86 m for 20.50 R25 tyres
Slope angle, front: Approx. 19° on on-road level (14.00 R25)
Slope angle, rear: Approx. 21° on on-road level (14.00 R25)
H
If there is a ladder in the holder under the driver's cab or if the spare wheel
and the rear outrigger pads are installed, then the specified slope angle is
correspondingly reduced.
Total weight and For equipment with the specified axle loads in on-road mode; à Driving
axle loads modes, p. 7 - 1.
Dimensions and weights of the parts which must be transported on sepa-
rate vehicles during on-road driving; à
p. 9 - 4 and à
p. 15 - 4.
Total weight: 48 t
Axle loads: 12 t
Axle loads: 24 t each in working position
H
The value for the axle load in working position free on wheels applies to
driving with a rigged truck crane and a maximum load that is allowed to be
hoisted according to the Lifting capacity table.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
15.1.3 Dimensions and weights of removable parts
This section contains the transport dimensions and weights of those parts
of the superstructure which can be transported on separate vehicles during
on-road driving; à Checking the condition of the truck crane, p. 6 - 7.
Hook blocks and

hook tackle (L) x (B) x (H)
Weight
Description Length x width x
in kg
height (m)
Single or double hook 1,80 x 0,55 x 0,60 800
7 sheaves, lifting capacity 80 t
Single or double hook 1.50 x 0.55 x 0.40 600
Single or double hook 1.40 x 0.55 x 0.30 400
Single hooks 1.35 x 0.55 x 0.25 210
1 sheave, load capacity 16 t
Hook tackle 0.90 x 0.35 x 0.35 100
Load bearing capacity 5 t
Counterweight- Counterweight combinations; à Counterweight combinations, p. 13 - 87

parts
Length x width x Weight

Description
height in m in kg1)
2,5 t base plate 1.20 x 2.55 x 0.70 2 550
(a 0.8 t counterweight sec-
tion with a 1,7 t counter-
weight section
5,0 t counterweight section, 1.20 x 2.55 x 0.40 4 860
each
2,5 t counterweight section, 1.20 x 2.55 x 0.25 2 425
each
1) Deviations of up to ± 2.5 % are possible due to the manufacturing pro-

cedure.
The stability of the crane rigged with the delivered counterweight sections
has been checked.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
15.1.4 Technical data for superstructure
Main hoist
Make: Siebenhaar
Type: 4033
Drum diameter: 330 mm (rope center to rope center)
Rope diameter: 16 mm
Rope length: 220 m
Max. rope pull: 50 kN / skein (≅ 5 t)
Power unit group: M 3 (acc. ISO 4301 - 2)
Load spectrum: L1
Load spectrum factor: Km = 0.125
Theoretical service life: D = 3 200 h
Auxiliary hoist
(additional equip- Make: Siebenhaar
ment) Type: 4033
Drum diameter: 330 mm (rope center to rope center)
Rope diameter: 16 mm
Rope length: 220 m
Max. rope pull: 50 kN / skein (≅ 5 t)
Power unit group: M 3 (acc. ISO 4301 - 2)
Load spectrum: L1
Load spectrum factor: Km = 0.125
Theoretical service life: D = 3 200 h
Slewing gear
Make: Siebenhaar
Type: 01 DD
Power unit group: M2 (acc. ISO 4301 - 2)
s
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
Derricking gear
Cylinder: Differential cylinder
Adjusting angle –3° to + 82° from horizontal position
(Main boom):
Power unit group: M2 (acc. ISO 4301 - 2)
Main boom
Main boom lengths: 11.0 m to 51,0 m
Main boom head: 6 sheaves (standard)
7 sheaves (additional equipment)
Cylinder: A 1-stage telescoping cylinder with integrated
locking / unlocking mechanism
Power unit group for tele- M 1 (acc. ISO 4301 - 2)
scoping mechanism:
Lattice extension As additional equipment, hydraulically tiltable or manually inclinable, in

pipe grille construction:
Swing-away lattice exten- 8,7 m

sion:
Two-stage swing-away 15 m
lattice extension:
Boom extension 21 m
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
Operating speeds The operating speeds below apply to an engine speed of approx.
and times without 1 850 min-1.
a load
Main hoist: Rope speed when lifting and lowering
Normal speed: maximum 60 m/min
High-speed maximum 125 m/min
mode:
Auxiliary hoist: Rope speed when lifting and low-

ering
Normal speed: maximum 60 m/min
High-speed maximum 125 m/min
mode:
Slewing gear : 0 to 1.8 turns per minute
Telescoping mech- Extend main boom telescoping from 11 m to 51 m

anism:
approx. 300 s In automatic mode, for uninter-
rupted locking and telescoping pro-
cesses
Derricking gear: derricking between –2.7° and 82°

Normal speed: To raise the der- approx. 70 s
ricking gear:
High-speed To raise the der- approx. 40 s
mode: ricking gear:
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
15.1 Technical data
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
16 Index
à
H
How to use the alphabetical index; p. 1 - 18.
To avoid making the index unnecessarily long and unclear,
we have not included every single element from the instrument panel.
These elements, such as rocker switches, rocker buttons, warning and indicator lamps,
as well as status displays, are described and named in detail in the overviews of
chapter 4 and chapter 11 Description of the truck crane.
From there, you will be referred to more detailed descriptions of these elements.
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
Blank page
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
A ABS
Access ladders to the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Adjusting mirrors
in the driver’s cab, electrically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 42
on the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 24
Adjusting the seat
Driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
Passenger’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14
Adjustments whilst operating the crane
Adjusting power unit speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 138
Adjusting the brightness of the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 135
Adjusting the wiper stroke interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 143
Directional spotlights for the working area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 144
Setting a constant engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 140
Setting characteristic curves for the control lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 136
Tilting the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 142
Air-conditioning system
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 202
All-wheel steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
Auxiliary hoist
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 77
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 76
Working with the auxiliary hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 76
Axle drive
B Battery charge indicator

after switching on the ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 12
Warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 40
Battery master switch
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Boom floating position
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 18
08.03.2006
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Boom pre-tensioning
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 19
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12

GMK 4080-1
Index
Brakes
Auxiliary brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
Checking the brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Eddy current retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 41
Engine retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 40
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 36
Test position of the parking brake when towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 84
Breakdown
Behaviour in road traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
C Carrier hydraulic system

Checking the position of the shut-off valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Checking the coolant level
Checking the oil level
in the carrier hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 7
Checking the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Checking the tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 8
Checking the windscreen washing system
CHECKLIST
before working with the crane in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Condition of the truck crane for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
Extending the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
Retracting the outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 35
Rigging for crane operation with main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Rigging mode when truck crane is rigged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
Rigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 92
Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Unrigging for crane operation with main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
Unrigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 94
Choosing the site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9
Compressed air system
see Brakes
Constant speed
see Tempomat
Counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85
08.03.2006
Assembling counterweight versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 97

CHECKLIST
Rigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 92
Unrigging the counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 94

GMK 4080-1
Index
Counterweight hoist unit

Checking the current status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 110
Display of incorrect statuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 111
Extending / retracting the lifting cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 112
Locking / unlocking counterweights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 114
Counterweight parts and identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 85
Counterweight versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 87
Installing counterweight sections on the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 117
Removing counterweight sections from the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 116
Slewing with the rigged counterweight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 118
Slinging points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 91
Crab travel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
Crane cab
Adjusting the front console and crane cab seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 8
Air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 202
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 102, 12 - 193
Position of the operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 4
Setting the automatic heating start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 198
Sliding door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 110
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 142
Ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 196
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 111
Windscreen washing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 9
Crane cab heating system
Fuel level in the tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 10
Crane control
Adjusting the brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 135
Error menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 149
Operating hours counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 145
Warning message submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 147
Emergency operation in the event of a failure of the operating elements
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 63
Emergency telescoping program submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 49
Entering telescoping values after emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 60
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
Error messages on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
Operating elements
at insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 16
in the (semi-automatic) Telescoping submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 24
in the counterweight submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 21
in the driving submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 30
in the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 18
in the Outriggers submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 22
in the Settings / Displays submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 28
Telescoping submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 103
08.03.2006
Crane engine

GMK 4080-1
Index
Crane work
in winter – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 4
Permissible slewing ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 68
Procedure in the event of malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5
Crane work with main boom
Before working with the crane, CHECKLIST – with rigged truck crane . . . . . . 12 - 1
Crane work with the main boom
Rigging – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Unrigging – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
D Dead man’s switch system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 134

Derricking gear
Raising and lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 79
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 80
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 78
Working with the derricking gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 78
Diesel engine
Diesel engine – operation with the hand-held control
Starting and turning off the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 29
Inspections after starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 17
Inspections before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 5
Malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37
Shutting down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 19
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11, 5 - 13
Starting – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
Starting the cold engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 15
Topping up oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 9
Diesel engine – operation in the crane cab
Inspections after starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 30
Inspections before starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
Preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
Starting the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 33
When starting the engine the first time in the day . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 21
Differential locks
see Longitudinal differential locks
see Transverse differential locks
Displaying whilst operating the crane
Error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 149
Operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 145
Warning message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 147
08.03.2006
Driver’s cab
Adjusting mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 9
Adjusting the driver’s seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 13
Adjusting the passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 14

GMK 4080-1
Index
Air-conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 75
Auxiliary heater
Position of the operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 21
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 69
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 57
Emergency operation for raising the boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
after the emergency activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 28
Establishing a hose connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 24
Establishing hydraulic circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 25
Performing emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 27
Switching the continuous operation on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 26
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 65
Position of the operating elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 20, 11 - 11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Roof ventilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 68
Tilting and lowering the driver’s cabin
with hydraulic tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 20
with mechanical tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Tilting forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 15
Tilting forward without hydraulic tilt mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 16
Ventilating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 67
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 59
Driving
Behaviour in the event of a breakdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 3
downhill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 38
Inspections before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
Inspections while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 34
off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49
uphill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 42
Driving from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 171
After driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 190
Driving the rigged truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 184
Opening / closing the driving mode submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 175
Possible connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 187
Longitudinal differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 188
Transverse differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 189
Preconditions for driving with a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 174
Preconditions for driving without a load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 173
Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 172
Steering
Adapt steering direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178
Normal steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 179
Separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 179
Switch on steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178
Driving modes
Using the tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 2
Dual tank
08.03.2006
Checking the fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 23

Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Switching over the fuel supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 25

GMK 4080-1
Index
E Earthing
of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 13
the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 67
Earthing the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 67
Eddy current retarder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 41
Electrical system
Display and operating elements in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 99
Fuses in the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
SLI fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
Emergency operation
for raising the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 23
Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159 (ZH1/461) . . . . . . . . . 14 - 69
in the event of the crane control breaking down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 63
Emergency retraction operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44
Inspections prior to emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 44
Mechanical emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 46
Retraction procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 45
Emergency stop devices
Air intake inhibitor (additional equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
Diesel engine
Air intake inhibitor (additional equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 21
with diesel engine emergency stop switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 20
on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
on the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
Extending / retracting the telescopic section / cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 110
F Fire extinguisher
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 113
Front flap
Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 62
Fuel tank
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Fuses
in the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 7
on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 29
on the superstructure
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 10
on I/O circuit boards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 9
on the turntable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 8
SLI fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
H Hand-held control
Connecting the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 27
Crane engine
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
Disconnecting the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 32
Starting the diesel engine with connected hand-held control
With the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 29
Starting the diesel engine with the connected hand-held control
From the driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 30
Hazard warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Heating
Crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 193
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 103
Crane cab heating system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 102
Driver’s cab
Auxiliary heater with timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 49, 6 - 69
Cab heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 65
High-speed mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
Derricking gear / telescoping mechanism high speed function . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
Hoist high-speed function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 133
Switching on the high speed function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 132
Hoist rope
Checking the position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 11
Positioning it on the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 128
Possible reeving methods on the main boom
Unreeving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 124
Hook block
on a separate vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 123
Setting down the hook block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 124
on the bumper
to the bumper
Attaching the hook block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 122
Houselock
Switching on / off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17
Hydraulic emergency operation according to BGR 159 (ZH1/461)
After emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 84
Emergency supply of another crane
Connecting / disconnecting the hose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 85
Switching on / off the emergency supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 86
Emergency supply of other cranes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 72
08.03.2006
Establishing hose connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 73

Establishing the hydraulic circuits required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 76
Important instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 69
Operating in emergency mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 80
Operating principle and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 71

GMK 4080-1
Index
Hydraulic system
Display and control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 38
Hydraulic system of the superstructure
Cooling the hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 134
Display and control elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 85
I Identification
of the counterweight sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 86
of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
Information
Conversion table for US measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 19
Example of how to use cross-references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 13
for operations planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
Instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 10
Technical information on carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
Inspections
"Boom not set down" warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
before driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7
of the safety devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 12
prior to starting the vehicle engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 8
while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 34
Installing/removing the air traffic control light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 147
Installing/removing the anemometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 147
Instrument panels
in the driver’s cab – overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 10
K Keys
for the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 57
for the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 110
L Ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Level adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 56
Moving the truck crane into on-road driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Raising or lowering the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 58
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 58
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 56
08.03.2006
Tilting the truck crane lengthwise or crosswise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57

Lifting limit switch
Installing / removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 139
Locking / releasing lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 145

GMK 4080-1
Index
Load bearing capacity of the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 9

Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 10
Longitudinal differential lock
Switch on from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 188
Longitudinal differential locks
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 53
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 52
while towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Lowering limit switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 131
M Main boom
Lowering to the horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 81
Rigging work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 121
Main hoist
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 75
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 71
Working with the main hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 71
Malfunctions
at the safe load indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
Auxiliary hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 20
Carrier electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 45
Counterweight hoist unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 26
Crane control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 39
Derricking gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 22
Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 37
Diesel engine – when operating with the dual tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Differential locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39
Hydraulic system / hydraulic oil cooler of the superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
in the diesel engine during crane operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 15
Level adjustment system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 39, 8 - 44
Main hoist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 18
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42, 14 - 16
Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 42
Slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 24
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 41
Suspension locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 44
Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 43
Telescoping mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 28
Transmission with automatic gear change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 40, 14 - 32
08.03.2006
Turntable locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 27
when operating with the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 16
when working with the crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 5

GMK 4080-1
Index
Movement combinations
for operation with the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 131
Multipurpose switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 55
O Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 49
On-road driving level
see Level adjustment
On-road level
Bringing the crane into on-road level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Operating elements
for crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 45
for driving from inside the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 115
on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 84
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
Aligning the truck crane horizontally
Automatic alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 77
with free-on-wheels truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80
during crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 81
when rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 80
with truck crane on outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 77
Checking the alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 69
at the switch boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 71
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 73
in the main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 73
in the Outriggers submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 74
on the hand-held control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 69
CHECKLIST – Extending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
CHECKLIST – Retracting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 35
Enlarging the outrigger surface area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 11
Extending / retracting outrigger beams
Setting permissible outrigger spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 51
Extending / retracting the outrigger beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 43
Extending / retracting the outrigger cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 57
Outrigger pads
Moving them into working position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 56
08.03.2006
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 83

on the carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 84
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 83
Permissible outrigger spans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 37

GMK 4080-1
Index
Preparing the truck crane for rigging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 42

Securing the outrigger beams for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 55
Overview
Crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 4
Crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 4
Operating and display elements – crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Operating and display elements – vehicle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
P Parking brake
while towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Possible reeving methods
on the main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 135
R Reeving / unreeving the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 126

Positioning the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 128
Reeving the hoist rope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 129
Rope end clamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 126
Refuelling
Dual tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 24
Fuel for the diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 10
Rigging for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
for driving with a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 7
Switching on boom floating position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 10
Switching on boom pre-tensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 12
Switching on the slewing gear freewheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
Rigging mode
before starting work – CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
Setting on the SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 39
Rigging work
Main boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 121
Outriggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 33
Rigging add-on parts in position for crane operation / driving . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 23
Folding mirrors in / out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 24
Rigging for crane operation – CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
Unrigging after crane operation – CHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 5
Rotating beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Rotating beacon (controlled from the crane cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 100
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1
Index
S Safe distance
from banks and pits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 12
from electrical lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 14
Safe load indicator
see SLI
Safety
Basic safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
Intended use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 2
Safety devices
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 12
Separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 61
Checking the steering lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 12
Steering the third and forth axle lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 62
Switching to normal steering mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 63
Switching to separate steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 62
Slewing gear
Braking the slewing movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 88
Slewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 84
Slewing to 0° and 180° . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 87
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 90
Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 89
Working with the slewing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 83
Slewing gear freewheel
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 20
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 8
SLI
Displaying / entering the time and date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 60
during crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 51
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 58
Finding and eliminating malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
Error messages on the SLI insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 34
General malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 33
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 12
Lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 37
Operating elements
at the insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 36
Overriding SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 59
Setting the rigging mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 39
SLI early warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 54
SLI shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 55
due to an error message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 56
due to overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 55
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 35
08.03.2006
SLI lamp test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 37

Steering
in the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 178

GMK 4080-1
Index
Steering column
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 15
Operating elements on the steering column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 23
Superstructure lock
Houselock
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 19
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 17
Superstructure, access ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 60
Suspension
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 10
Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 39
Switching on the ignition
Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 11
Superstructure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 23
Switching the fan thermostat to emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 51
Symbols in the operating instructions, explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
T Tachograph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 17
Inserting diagram sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 19
Opening the drawer to check time settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 18
Setting time groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 20
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1, 15 - 1
Dimensions and weights of removable parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 4
Dimensions, weights and axle loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 2
Maximum lifting capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
Technical data for the power units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 5
Working speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 7
Technical description of the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1
Telescoping mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 91
Checking the initial position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 102
Control lever function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 98
Emergency program submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 49
Error messages and causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 31
Example of a telescoping procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 101
Locking the telescopic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 119
Locking the telescopic section for on-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 123
Main boom fixed length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 93
Main boom intermediate length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 94
Main boom telescoping length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 94
Operating principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 92
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 100
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 98
08.03.2006
Telescoping in fully automatic mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 124

Telescoping sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 97
Telescoping the main boom for maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 81
Telescoping the main boom into a horizontal position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 130
Telescoping the telescopic section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 117

GMK 4080-1
Index
Telescoping, display on the SLI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 95

Unlocking the telescoping cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 107
Tempomat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43
Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 44
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 43
Temposet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Driving with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 45
Tow starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 5
Electric power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
in the event of engine or transmission damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 6
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 7
Towing the truck crane out of the danger area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 8
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 79
Towing free
Backwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60
Forwards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60
Transfer case
Display and operating elements in the driver's cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 33
Switching the off-road gear on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 50
Transmission
Transmission with automatic gear change
Changing gears while driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 27
Changing the direction of travel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29
Changing the starting gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
Error messages on the Transmission display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 53
gear position L - slow, maneuvering on sloping ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30
Manoeuvring mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 32
on the roller type dynamometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 33
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 23
Selecting the driving direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 24
Selecting the operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 26
Shifting to neutral position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 30
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 25
Starting at extremely low temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 33
Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29
Transverse differential locks
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 11
08.03.2006
switch on from the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 189

switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 55
switching on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 54

GMK 4080-1
Index
Trip recorder
see Tachograph
Truck crane
Checking horizontal alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 63
Earthing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 13
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
in on-road driving position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Overview of crane section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
Overview of the vehicle section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 29, 6 - 46
Raising or lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 58
Rocking free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 59
Safe distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 63
Securing against rolling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 47
Tilting lengthwise or crosswise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 57
Towing free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 60
Turn signal indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 41
Tyres
see Wheels
V Vehicle engine
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 28
Ventilation
Driver’s cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 47
W Warning plates for vehicle width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 7

Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Filling the tyres yourself . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 13
Wheel change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Mounting a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
onto the spare wheel holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 11
Removing a wheel from the truck crane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 9
Removing the wheel from the spare wheel holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 10
Wind
Effect of wind on crane work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 64
Permissible wind load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 67
Wind strength table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 64
Windscreen wipers
at the crane cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 100
08.03.2006
Work break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 191

During short work breaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 191
During work breaks longer than 8 hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 192
Working area spotlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 99

GMK 4080-1
Index
Working range limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 151

Entering a maximum working radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 156
Entering limit values manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 164
Entering point data for objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 160
Entering the maximum overall height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 155
Entering the maximum slewing angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 157
Opening the working range limitation submenu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 152
Reading current settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 153
Shutdown caused by working range limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 169
Switching monitoring off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 168
Switching monitoring on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 167
08.03.2006

GMK 4080-1

Operationg Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operationg Instruction Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Operating instructions

Duplications of any kind and excerpts from this

Duplications and printouts of data carriers on

© Copyright reserved by Deutsche GROVE GmbH

3 112 252 en Operating instructions

Additional operating elements:

These change the following:

– Cancelling automatic mode for rigging the

Cancelling automatic mode

Additional pages 3 112 695 en 1

If additional equipment is used, the status dis-

SLI override – symbol (B)

The following operating elements can be used

2 Key-operated SLI override switch

Carry out the SLI override only as it is

2 3 112 695 en Additional pages

– about the current degree of utilisation,

Additional pages 3 112 695 en 3

Display (4) Display (5) Display (4)

4 3 112 695 en Additional pages

There are different types of SLI shutdowns:

– Shutdown due to overload, approx. 100% of the maximum permissible

If the SLI has shut down the crane movements, then:

– depending on the version, the lamp (1) lights up,

– the status display lights up red.

Now you can:

à Raising after SLI shutdown, S. 6

Additional pages 3 112 695 en 5

Raise main boom

6 3 112 695 en Additional pages

For rigging work, you can:

Lifting limit switch shutdown

Overriding the SLI

Additional pages 3 112 695 en 7

8 3 112 695 en Additional pages

If the SLI has shut down all crane movements,

Once the shutdown is cancelled, the crane

The power unit speeds are reduced to 15%.

The status display blinks red.

Additional pages 3 112 695 en 9

10 3 112 695 en Additional pages

Representation of error codes; à Operating instructions

Error code Cause Remedy

Additional pages 3 112 695 en 11

12 3 112 695 en Additional pages

Differing slightly from the details in the operating instructions, depending

Additional page 3 112 526 en 1

Setting fresh air/recirculated air/mixed air

Setting the fan

• Turn the switch (4) to the position for the

A Air vents (1), (2),

2 3 112 526 en Additional page

Part 2 – Crane operation

Part 1 comprises the following chapters:

Chapter 11 to 16 are in Part 2 – Crane operation

Operating instructions 3 112 252 en

3 112 252 en Operating instructions

Operating instructions 3 112 252 en

3 112 252 en Operating instructions

1.1 Vehicle identification

Operating instructions 3 112 252 en 1-1

1-2 3 112 252 en Operating instructions

The location of the identification numbers on removable rigging parts (e.g.

Operating instructions 3 112 252 en 1-3